UC-NRLF 


^B    257    im 


GIFT  OF 


OASUy 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/elenientsofgermanOObacorich 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


BY 

PAUL  VALENTINE   BACON 


cs-^ 


iBoEcnbcn  tft  nidjt  bie  @a(f)e  beg  ©c^uter^;  e§  tft  gcnug,  bag  er  fid^  iibt 


ALLYN    AND    BACON 


COPYRIGHT,   1914,  BY 
PAUL   VALENTINE  BACON. 


Ncrtoooti  ^regg 

J.  B.  Gushing  Co.  —  Berwick  &  Smith  Co. 

Norwood,  Mass.,  U.S.A. 


PREFACE. 

The  Elements  of  German  is  like  my  German  Grammar  in 
its  simplicity  and  its  thoroughness ;  it  differs  from  the  earlier 
book  in  that  it  aims  especially  to  meet  the  needs  of  those 
teachers  who  may  wish  to  vary  their  reading  from  year  to 
year.  The  arrangement  of  the  syntax  in  the  two  books  is 
identical,  except  where  improvements  in  gradation  and  in 
simplification  of  statement  were  possible. 

jSTo  effort  has  been  spared  to  make  the  Elements  practical. 
To  secure  this  end  special  attention  has  been  paid  to  the 
exercises  and  to'  the  vocabulary.  The  exercises  have  been 
simplified  without  sacrificing  thoroughness,  and  have  been 
enlivened  from  the  outset  by  the  introduction  of  conversation 
and  of  letter- writing,  the  two  most  practical  uses  to  which  the 
average  pupil  will  put  his  German.  This  plan  has  the  addi- 
tional merit  of  offering  from  the  beginning  more  connected 
sentences  than  are  usually  given. 

In  the  choice  of  the  vocabulary  the  aim  has  been  to  do  three 
things :  to  keep  the  number  of  words  as  small  as  is  consistent 
with  variety  and  life  in  the  exercises ;  to  introduce  as  many 
cognates  as  possible ;  and  above  all  to  use  common,  e very-day 
words.  The  new  words  average  only  seven  to  the  lesson  —  a 
number  readily  mastered  by  any  pupil  —  and  in  the  first  part 
of  the  book  eighty  per  cent  of  these  are  cognates.  This  re- 
duces to  a  minimum  the  effort  of  vocabulary  building. 

The  practical  character  of  the  vocabularies  deserves  special 
mention.  The  words  are  taken  entirely  from  the  language  bf 
the  school  and  of  the  home,  and  are  so  arranged  that  by  the 
middle  of  the  year  the  pupil  has  a  vocabulary  of  schoolroom 

335655 


> 


PREFACE. 


expressions,  of  household  terms,  of  the  things  he  eats,  drinks, 
and  wears,  of  the  parts  of  the  body,  and  of  the  weather,  the 
time  of  day,  and  so  on. 

While  the  practical  vocabulary  of  the  lessons  is  thus  limited 
to  the  commonel|.t  words,  an  unusually  large  number  of  poems, 
proverbs  and  quitations  has  been  introduced  for  those  teach- 
ers \^o  wish  to  develop  an  extensive  Wortscliatz.  Taken  in 
.veonnectlon  with  the  appendices  on  Word  Formation  and  on 
Grimm's  Law,  these  offer  an  excellent  opportunity  for  extend- 
ing the  vocabulary. 

The  subject  of  ^Pronunciation  is  treated  not  only  in  the  usual 
way  at  the  beginning  of  the  book,  but  also  in  thQ  Appendix, 
where  specific  directions  and  diagrams  are  given  for  those  who 
are  eager  to  approach  more  nearly  to  the  real  German  of  the 
Germans. 

The  termiiaology  of  the  Elements  conforms  to  the  Report  of 
the  Joint  Committee  on  Grammatical  Nomenclature.  It  is  grati- 
fying to  note  that  this  report  adopts  many  terms,  such  as 
"past"  and  "past  perfect,'^  which  have  ^Iwl^ys  be^n  used  in 
my  German  Grammar. 

As  in  Im  Vaterland  and  in  my  German  Composition,  particu- 
lar care  has  been  taken  with  the  index  and  the  vocabularies. 

To  those  teachers  who  have  offered  suggestions  from  their 
classroom  experience,  I  take  this  opportunity  of  expressing 
a  grateful  acknowledgment. 

P.  V.  B. 

March,  1914. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


The  German  Alphabet x 

Introduction xi 

LESSON 

I.  Present  of  ^abett  and  fcttt 1 

Gender.     Questions. 

II.  Past  of  ^aBctt  and  fctit 3 

Nominative  and  Accusative.     Terms  of  Address. 

III.  Present  of  loBen ,  6 

The  Definite  Article. 

IV.  Past  of  iohtn S 

The  Indefinite  Article.     9^i(^t. 

V.   Review.    Present  of  fc^Ctt 10 

iBergigmeitinid^t         .        .    galler^lebcn     .        .        .      12 
®ute9^ad^t        .        .        .    torner       .        .        .        .      13 

VI.  Pastoffe^ett 14 

Masculine  Nouns  of  the  First  Class. 

VII.  Present  of  merbctt 16 

Feminines.     Possessive  Genitive. 

VIII.  Past  of  tticrben ,18 

Neuters.     Indirect  Object. 

IX.   Future  Tense .20 

Second  Class  of  Nouns. 

a^ein  55aterlanb         .        .     @turnt       .        .        .        .22 

X.  Review.    Use  of  Present  for  Future 23 

S)a8  SBiffen       .        .        .    ?ogau         .        .        .        .24 
2)ie  $?orelei        .        .        .    §einc         .        .        .        .26 

V 


VI 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS, 


LESgON 

XI. 


XII. 
XIII. 
XIV. 

XV. 

XVI. 
XVII. 

XVIII. 

XIX. 

XX. 

XXI. 

XXII. 
XXIII. 


Perfect  Tense  with  t^ahtn    .        .        . 

Third  Class  of  Nouns. 

Perfect  Tense  with  fcitt        .        ... 

Fourth  Class  of  Nouns  (Weak). 

grul)Ung^al)nung    .        .    Uljlanb 
Past  Perfect  Tense 

Fifth  Class  of  Nouns  (Mixed). 

@:pru(^   .        .        .        .    Sbner-(Sjd)cnbad^ 
Future  Perfect  Tense    .... 

Rules  of  Gender. 

Siegenlieb      .        .        .    iBrentano 
Review,    Outline  of  Declensions    . 

S)eg  SO^cibc^eng  I'teb         .    @torm 

iBanbrer^  ^^ac^tUeb        .    @  o  e t  ^  e 

2Bie  i[t  boci^  bie  @rbe  fo  f(f)on !     9leinicf 

Prepositions  with  Dative  or  Accusative 

Personal  Pronouns 

Position  of  Objects. 

Prepositions  with  Dative      .        .        . 

Inverted  Order. 
Prepositions  with  Accusative 

Possessive  Adjectives,     ^eitt. 

Review.    Apposition      .... 

§erbftlieb       .        .        .    @turm 
5Bor  3ena       .        .        .    S)ret)eg 

Strong  Declension  of  Adjectives  . 

Nouns  of  Measure. 

9)iube  bin  id^  .        .       .    §enfc( 

Weak  Declension  of  Adjectives     . 

Accusative  of  Time. 


Mixed  Declension  of  Adjectives 

Position  of  tiie. 


TABLE   OF  CONTENTS.  vii 

LES80X  PAGE 

XXIV.    Adjectives  after  tt)cid)f  fo(rf|,  etc .63 

Adverbs. 

XXV.   Review.    Summary  of  Adjectives 65 

!2'leb  be6  gifd^erfnaben        .        ©critter.        .        .  67 

3)er  erfte  3}lai    .        .        .         §ageborn       .        .  68 

®u  benfft  an  mid)  jo  felten          ^^  I  a  t  e  n    .        .        .  68 

XXVI.   Present  of  Modal  Auxiliaries 69 

@)3ritd}      ....        S^ucfert  ...  71 

XXVII.   Past  and  Future  of  Modals      .        .   '     .        .        .        .72 

Use  with  eg  and  ^u. 

XXVIII.    Perfect  Tenses  of  Modals 74 

'*Two  Infinitives." 

XXIX.    Special  Uses  of  Modals  .......  77 

Use  of  laffen. 

XXX.   Review 80 

aReiit  iBaterlanb         .        .        galler^teben         .  82 

XXXI.    Possessive  Pronouns 83 

Intensive  Pronouns. 

XXXII.    Interrogative  Pronouns 86 

Use  of  ha^  and  bie§  with  fein. 

XXXIII.  Demonstrative  Pronouns 88 

Indecltnable  Indefinites. 

XXXIV.  Inflected  Indefinites 92 

XXXV.   Review -.  .95 

@g  wax,  aU  lydtV  ber  §immel:  @tcf).enborff    .        .  96 

5rnben3Jionb     .        .        .        (gn^Uti    ...  97 

XXXVI.   Relative  Pronouns 98 

Dependent  Order. 
XXXVII.   Review.     Lessons  I-XV  .        .        .        .        .        .        .101 

Indirect  Questions. 

XXXVIII.  Review.     Lessons  XVI-XXV    .,,,,,  103 
Conjunctions. 


Vlll 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS, 


LESSON 

XJtXIX.   Review.     Lessons  XXVI-XXX   . 

Modals  in  Dependent  Sentences. 

XL.   Review.     Lessons  XXXI-XXXVI 

The  Modified  Demonstrative. 
2)ag  ®d)Io8  am  9«eer  .    U^tattb 

XLI.   Separable  and  Inseparable  Verbs 

Complementary  Infinitive. 

XLII.   Separable  and  Inseparable  Verbs 

Meaning  of  Prefixes.     Common  Prefixes. 

XLIII.   Imperative 

XLIV.   Infinitives  and  Participles 

XLV.   Review 

3m^oIfgtoti       .        .    @tortn 

XL VI.   Comparison  of  Adjectives  and  Adverbs 

Particles  of  Comparison.. 

XLVII.    Numerals 

Cardinals.     Ordinals.      Fractions. 

XLVIII.   Days,  Months,  Dates 

Telling  Time  of  Day. 

XLIX.    Proper  Nouns 

Use  of  Article  with  Names. 

L.   Review 

Der  gute  ^'amerab        .    U^tanb 

2)ie  arme  flelne  3bee    .     ©ommergtorff 

LI.   Passive  Voice 

Dative  of  Agent. 
LII.   Passive  Voice     .... 

Substitutes  for  the  Passive. 
LIII.    Reflexive  Verbs  . 

Use  of  Reflexives. 

LIV.    Impersonal  Verbs 

Use  of  e^  gibt  and  c§  ift. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS.  IX 

LESSON  PAGE 

LV.   Review 161 

§eibenrbg(ein  .        .        .     ©oet^c        .        .        .        .163 

LVI.    Subjunctive  of  Auxiliaries .164 

Dependent  Subjunctive. 

LVII.   Subjunctive  of  Weak  and  Strong  Verbs        ....  168 

Conditional.     Potential.     Optative. 

LVIII.  Conditions  of  Fact .        .172 

Subjunctive  of  Modals.  x 

iiber  ben  Bergen      .        .    iBuffe 175 

LIX.   Conditions  Contrary  to  Fact 176 

Special  Use  of  Modals. 

LX.   Review 180 

Senn      ....     gulba         ....  182 

LXI.   Genitive  and  Dative  Cases .  183 

Uses  with  Adjectives  and  Verbs. 

LXII.   Verbals.         .        .        .     *  .        .        .        .        .        .        .186 

Modified  Verbals. 

LXm.   Word  Order 188 

S)ag@mcf       .        .        .    3)a^n 191 

LXIV.   Idiomatic  Particles        .        . 192 

LXV.   Review 196 

List  of  Strong  and  Irregular  Verbs          .....  199 

Summary  of  Inflections         ........  206 

Pronunciation 237 

Word  Formation      .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .  251 

Grimm's  Law    ...........  260 

German-English  Vocabulary 1 

English-German  Vocabulary          . 33 

Jndex          .,,,,,,.....  49 


German  type. 

21  a 

«  b 

S  c 

©  b 

.@  e 

??  f 

®  9 

§  ^ 

3  i 

0  i 

^  f 

8  t 

aw  m 

3le  a  t 

Ue  il  U 
ttt 


THE  GERMAN   ALPHABET. 

Cerman  script.  Same.  Germaa  type,      (erman  script.         Hame. 


xxy 


ah 


^^  bay 

c=^   ^/^  tsay 

/^  ^^  day 

ef 

gay 
hah 


Oy    ,^^  ee 

yot 
kah 

<^^^  el 

^^-■0^  em 


9?  n 

O  0 

Q  q 

9?  r 

@f « 

X  t 

U  u 

SB  w 

3  a/ 


.<^^ 


■^ 


.y(r 


/^}(^ 


/It? 


oh 

pay 

koo 

air 

es 

tay 

(t)oo 

fou(l) 

vay 

ix 

ipsilon 

tset 


,.^      ah-umlaut 
(y    ^        oh-umlaut 

^y/^       oo-umlaut 
au-umlaut 


^  es-tset 

^^j^       tsay-kah 


es-tsay-hah 


INTRODUCTION. 

The  following  pages  give  in  a  general  way  the  pronuncia- 
tion of  German  letters.  For  a  more  detailed  treatment,  see 
§§  324-342. 

I.      VOWELS. 

(a)  Quality  and  Length  of  Sound.  —  Unlike  English  vowels, 
each  German  vowel  has  only  one  kind  of  sound.  This  sound 
varies  in  length.    The  five  German  vowels  may  be  long  or  short. 

(1)  They  are  usually  sliort  when  followed  by  two  or  more 
consonants  or  a  double  consonant :  ba^  SBaffer,  ba^  ^tii,  ber 
gifd^,  bie  Sotte,  ber  C^utib, 

(2)  Otherwise  they  are  long,  especially  when  doubled  or 
followed  by  1^  :  ber  SSater,  ba^  Seet,  t^nen,  tDo()I,  txm. 

(3)  Some  monosyllables,  mostly  indeclinable,  have  a 
short  vowel  before  a  single  consonant :  an,  cA^  matt,  itt,  e^,  ob. 

The  chief  difference  between  the  pronunciation  of  long  and 
short  vowels  in  German  is  that  long  ones  are  pronounced  less 
vigorously  than  the  short.  The  short  vowels  are  uttered  with 
a  tenseness  —  they  are  almost  coughed  —  which  clips  them  short 
and  carries  the  sound  immediately  to  the  following  consonant. 

(6)  Pronunciation  of  Vowels. 
(1)  Long. 

Long  a  as  in  father,  never  as  \x\  fate;       SSater,  aber. 

"     e  "    "  they,         "  "    "  he;         ge^tt,  SBeg, 

"     t  "    "  machine,  "  "    "  fine;       il^ttett,  btr. 

<^     0  "    "  7iote;  ®o()tt,  lobett^ 

"    U  "    "  rude,  "  "    "  mule;     Sul),  gut. 


XU  INTRODUCTION. 

(2)  Short. 

Short  a  as  in  aQia),  never  as  in  fat;  SBaffer,  SKatiTt, 

"    c  "    "  net;  tDetttt,  gettfter. 

"     i  "    "  pin;  Si[(^,  tcf)  bin. 

"    0  "    "  o6e2/;  (Sonne,  t)oIL 

"    u  ^/    "  put,  '^     "   "  >n;  gln^,  aJiutter. 

German  final  unaccented  e  is  like  English  final  unaccented  a. 
Pronounce  @(Je  to  rhyme  with  Mecca,  t^re  like  era.  g)  is  found 
only  in  foreign  words ;  it  is  pronounced  like  i. 

(c)  Umlaut.  —  When  in  Old  and  Middle  High  German  a  stem 
whose  Yowel  was  a,  P,  U,  or  au  was  followed  by  a  suffix  con- 
taining the  vowel  t  (later  e)  the  sound  of  the  stem  vowel  ^ 
was  modified,  becoming  more  like  the  vowel  in  the  ending. 
Thus  df  0^  Mf  or  avi  came  to  be  spoken  ft,  5,  ii,  or  ftu  (Old  High 
German,  fallu,  fellis,  fellit;  Middle  High  German,  valle, 
vellest,  vellet ;  New  High  German,  fatte,  fiilleft,  fctCt).  This 
change  of  sound  is  called  Umlaut. 

((f)  Pronunciation  of  Umlaut  Vowels.  —  (1)  Short  ft  is  like  e 
in  met;  long  ft  is  properly  the  same'  quality  of  sound,  only 
longer.  It  is  a  pure  sound,  not  like  a  in  late,  but  more  like  the 
first  e  in  the^^e,  or  ai  in  faith  when  spoken  with  Irish  brogue.  In 
North  Germany,  however,  it  is  coming  to  be  spoken  more  and 
more  like  long  c  except  to  distinguish  similar  forms.  Pro- 
nounce :  bie  Wdnnev,  bte  SBdIber  ;  ga^nen,  tt)a^{en.  Distinguish 
carefully :  Sl^re,  ©f)re  ;  fci^e,  fe^e. 

(2)  Short  B  has  the  lips  rounded  as  in  short  o  and  the 
tongue  in  the  position  for  short  c  (e  in  met) ;  long  9  has  the 

1  The  best  English  illustration  of  Umlaut  is  the  difference  we  make 
in  pronouncing  the  o  in  woman,  when  we  speak  the  plural  form,  women. 
The  change  in  the  last  vowel  affects  the  sound  of  the  first. 


INTRODUCTION,  XIU 

lips  rounded  in  the  position  for  long  d  (whistling  position)  and 
the  tongue  in  the  position  for  long  c  (3Jie^I).  Pronounce: 
bte  §oHe,  offnen,  bte  §b^(e,  bie  Ofen*  Distinguish  carefully: 
§dtte,  ^elle  ;•  fonnen,  fennen  ;  §o^Ien,  ^e^Ien. 

(3)  Short  u  has  the  lips  rounded  as  in  short  u  and  the 
tongue  in  the  position  for  short  i  (i  in  pin);  long  it  has  the 
lips  rounded  as  in  long  u  (whistling  position)  and  the  tongue 
in  the  position  for  long  i  {i  in  machine).  Pronounce :  bie  §iitte, 
fUHen,  bte  §Ute,  fiil)len.  Distinguish  carefully :  Sitffett,  Stffeti ; 
^iifte,  Sifte ;  tnitffett,  tntffen, 

(4)  The  diphthong  Su  is  pronounced  just  like  eu* 

(5)  Notice  that  in  every  case  an  Umlaut-vowel  has  the 
same  lip  position  as  the  corresponding  non-umlauted  vowel, 
but  the  tongue  is  raised  nearer  the  position  for  t  (see  Fig.  1, 
p.  238).  As  this  t  was  origineiJly  the  sound  of  the  following 
syllable,  we  may  say  that  the  tongue  began  to  prepare  for  the 
ending  while  pronouncing  the  vowel  of  the  stem.  Thus  Um- 
laut may  be  called  an  assimilation  of  the  stem  vowel  to  the 
vowel  of  the  ending.  w 

(e)  Diphthongs  are  pronounced  about  as  shown  below.     Por 
more  specific  directions  see  §§  329-330. 

r  Satfer.''    -. 
1  ©tner,  etn. 
au  like  ou  in  house;  §au^,  taut.-^ 

cu 


ct  J 


like  ai  in  aisle; 


ftu 


like  oi  in  toil; 


'  treu,  geute.' 
^  §ciufer,  Iciutett.^ 


(J)  Digraphs. — In  English  we  have  many  double  vowels 
for  single  sounds,  as  in  the  words  each,  heart,  heard,  believe, 
receive,  and  so  on.  German  has  but  few  of  these  digraphs. 
They   are   ie,  pronounced  like   long  i;   dd,   pronounced   like 


xiv  INTRODUCTION, 

long  a;  CC,  pronounced  like  long  e ;  DO,  pronounced  like  long  o* 
All  these  digraphs  are  used  merely  to  show  by  the  spelling 
that  a  sound  is  long.  They  are  employed  usually  where  a 
simple  vowel  would  naturally  be  short.  ®te,  t)tel^  bte  ®aat, 
ber  ©aal,  ba^  S3eet,  ba^  Wlttx,  ba^  i8oot» 

II.      CONSONANTS.  ' 

(o)  Classification  of  Consonants.  —  German  consonants  are 
classified  in  three  different  ways :  (1)  according  to  the  kind  of 
sound  they  make;  (2)  according  to  the  vibration  of  the  vocal 
cords  during  the  sound;  and  (3)  according  to  the  place  of  the 
sound  in  the  mouth. 

(1)  According  to  the  first  classification  I  and  r  are  called 
liquids;  m,  n,  and  ng,  nasals.  The  remaining  consonants  are 
either  stops  or  spirants.  A  stop  is  produced  by  a  short  puff 
following  a  complete  closure  of  the  oral  passage ;  as  6,  b, 
I,  tf  p^  In  pronouncing  a  spirant^  the  breath  passes  through 
a  narrow  openin*  producing  a  hissing  or  buzzing  sound;  as 

f,  \, »,  f<^. 

(2)  A  consonant  is  voiced  if  the  vocal  cords  vibrate  in 
producing  it,  as  m,  6,  b ;  otherwise  it  is  voiceless,  as  ^,  f,  p,  U 
This  vibration  can  best  be  felt  by  putting  the  fingers  on 
the  throat.  Compare  zeal,  {z  voiced),  seal  (s  voiceless) ;  vara 
(y  voiced), /an  (/voiceless) ;  bat  (b  voiced),  pat  (p  voiceless). 

(3)  A  consonant  is  guttural  if  it  is  produced  between  the 
back  part  of  the  tongue  and  the  soft  palate ;  as  ^  in  good,  ck 
in  lucJc.  If  produced  in  a  similar  way,  but  farther  forward,  it 
is  palatal;  as  y  in  year.  It  is  dental  if  produced  between  the 
fore  part  of  the  tongue  and  the  upper  teeth ;  as  d,  t.  It  is 
labial  if  produced  between  the  lips ;  as  b,  p. 


INTRODUCTION.  XV 

(6)  Pronunciation  of  Consonants.  —  (1)  Of  the  consonants, 
f,  {|,  tf  if  m,  n,  )J,  (\f  i,  and  i^  and  generally  b  and  b,  are  pro- 
nounced as  in  English :  babeu,  'Dtebe,  ^olett,  beten,  !ranf,  9}?ann, 
^aar/quer,  §eye,  fitlben.  But  at  the  end  of  a  word  or  part  of 
a  compound  word,  and  before  voiceless  consonants,  6  is  pro- 
nounced like  p,  and  b  like  t.  Thus,  ab,  3^ob,  Slbfii^t,  3J?ab(^en, 
er  liebt,  bu  Icibft,  O^^^f^f^r  Ii^6,  are  pronounced  as  if  written  ap, 
Jot,  2l^3[id)t,  aKat(^en,  er  ae|3t,  etc. 

(a)  bt  like  t:  (gtabt,  gefattbt, 

(&)  t|   after  an  accented  vowel  is  silent:    ^u^,  fa^, 

fii^Ien. 
(c)  cf  like/c;  ©tod,  9?Men, 

(2)  Simple  c  is  found  only  in  foreign  words. 

(a)  c  before  a,  D,  U,  or  a  consonant,  like  k:  Safe, 
SaltJin,  Sanal,  gontre,  greme.  In  the  latest  offi- 
cial spelling  it  is  largely  supplanted  by  f^ 

ih)  c  before  c,  t,  S,  or  B,  like  ts:  (^ebet%  gtcero,  Safar, 
In  the  latest  official  spelling  it  is  largely  sup- 
planted by  5* 

(3)  d^  is  a  voiceless  spirant.     It  has  two  different  sounds 
not  found  in  English. 

(a)  After  a,  D,  U,  aUf  it  is  guttural,  as  in  Scotch  loch : 

^Vi6),  ®a(^,  bod),  au(^. 
(6)  After   other  vowels  and  after  consonants  it  is 

palatal :  8t(^t,  red^t,  id),  tDeld), 

Note.  To  pronounce  the  guttural  rf),  raise  the  back  of  the  tongue  till 
it  almost  touches  the  soft  palate  and  expel  the  breath  forcibly.  To  pro- 
nounce the  palatal  d),  raise  the  tongue  to  the  position  for  ee  in  feet  and 
breathe  out.    Do  not  pronounce  t^  like  English  k  or  sh. 


xvi  INTRODUCTION. 

(4)  rf|^  at  the  end  of  a  root-syllable  is  pronounced  like  ks: 
T)Cii)^f  }^ud)^.  But  where  the  ^  is  added  as  an  ending,  as  in 
ba^  ditid)^  be^  3Jetcf)^,  the  d^  retains  its  proper  sound. 

(5)  d)  in  foreign  words  is  like  Jc  or  sh :  Jc  in  Greek  words, 
as  g^or,  Shrift,  g^arafter;  sh  in  French  words,  as  g^rabe, 
Sniffer,  ©f)0C0labe.  In  the  latest  official  spelling  French  ^  is 
largely  supplanted  by  Bdj :  @(^arabe,  ©c^ofolabe, 

(6)  g  has  three  different*  sounds. 

^  (a)  When  doubled,  or  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  or 
syllable,  it  is  pronounced  like  the  English  g  in 
go:  gebett,  griin,  S^Iagge,  Jage,  ^uge, 

(b)  When  final,  after  a,  0,  U,  or  au,  it  is  a  voiceless 
guttural  spirant,  like  ^  in  ad^  (II.,  (6),  3,  a):  Jag, 

(c)  When  final,  after  e,  i,  et,  (i,  8,  or  a  consonant,  it  is  a 
voiceless  palatal  spirant,  like  d)  in  i(f|  (II.,  (6), 
3,  b) :  ®omg,  Seg,  STetg,  Serg, 

Note  1.  Officially  final  g  is  like  f  in  (5)  and  (c),  but  few  Germans 
pronounce  it  that  way. 

Note  2.  In  gb,  gt,  and  gft,  g  has  the  same  sound  as  above  in  (2) 
and  (3)  :  9Jlagb,  cr  fagte,  fUegt,  bu  btegft. 

(7)  ng  is  always  pronounced  like  ng  in  singer,  never  like 
ng  ill  hunger:  ginger,  fingen,  [ang,  brtngen. 

(8)  i  like  y  in  yes:  -3af)r,  ja. 

(9)  pi}  is  pronounced  like  f,  by  which  it  is  being  gradu- 
ally supplanted :  ^^iIofo)3^,  (Slefant,  gfeu. 

(10)  r  is  always  pronounced  sharply  and  distinctly.  It 
is  either  guttural  or  trilled  with  the  tip  of  the  tongue.  It  must 
never  be  slwrred,  as  in  English, /2^Mia/i  for  further. 

(11)  German  f,  §  has  three  pronunciations  just  like  the 
three  of  English  s. 


INTRODUCTION.  XVil 

(a)  When  at  the  end  or  next  to  the  end  of  a  sylla- 
ble, or  when  doubled,  it  is  like  s  in  see:  e^, 
ma^,  bift,  I}aft,  laffen, 

(&)  When  at  the  beginning  of  a  syllable  it  is  like 
s  in  rose :  fe^ett,  ber  @aaf ,  bte  SRofe,  ber  Unftnn, 

(c)  AVhen  f  begins  an  accented  syllable  whose  second 
letter  is  t  or  ^j,  it  is  like  s  in  sugar :  fte'^ett,  f]Dre* 
(^en  are  pronounced  as  if  spelled  [(^te^ett,  fi^|)re=* 

iVb^e.  For  those  not  using  German  script,  the  distinction  between 
\  and  §  is  immaterial.  Those  who  write  German  script  should  remember 
to  use  ^  at  the  end  of  a  word  or  of  a  stem  syllable,  f  in  all  other  cases. 

(12)  fc^  like  sli  in  ship:  ®(f)t[f,  tDafdjen, 

(13)  ^  is  like  ss :  ©d^Io^, 

(a)  After  a  short  vowel,  |^  is  changed  to  ff  when  an 

ending  beginning  with  a  vowel  is  added :  (Sd)Io^, 

(Sc^Ioffer, 
(h)  After  a  long  vowel  or  a  diphthong  or  before  a 

consonant,  it  remains  unchanged ;  ^U^,  S^^^^r  i^ 

tDei^,  t(^  mu^te. 

(14)  ix  before  another  vowel  in  foreign  words  is  like  tsee: 
92atton,  'patient* 

(15)  t{|  is  like  t:    Jf)eater,  ©oet^e. 

Note.  In  all  but  foreign  words  and  proper  names  the  silent  )i)  after  t 
has  recently  been  dropped.  But  pupils  should  be  prepared  to  meet  it  in 
newspapers  and  letters  and  in  all  but  the  most  recent  books. 

(16)  ^  is  like  ts:  fi^en,  bitten,  fa^e. 

(17)  tJ  is  like  /.*  SSater,  SSogeL     But  in  foreign  words  it 
is  pronounced  like  English  v :  SSenu^,  SSerattba,  SSerbutu, 

(18)  UJ  is  like  English  v  in  vice:  XOXX^  SBotf, 


XVUl  INTRODUCTION. 

(19)  5  is  like  ts  in  hats:  ju,  ^dt,  §erg,  For  ^  and  ^,  see 
(13)  and  (16). 

(20)  In  Jjf,  gtt,  and  fn,  both  letters  must  be  distinctly 
enunciated,  as  in  English,  hopfarm,  ignoble,  banknote:  ^ferb, 
©nabe,  Snabe. 

ni.      SYLLABICATION. 

Cn  general,  words  are  divided  into  syllables  as  they  are 
spoken  when  articulated  slowly :  ©e-fd^Ied^^ter,  ^reutt^be^-treue. 

(a)  Compound  words  are  divided  according  to  their  compo- 
nent parts :  l^in-au^,  S)ten^^tag. 

(6)  Otherwise  a  single  simple  sound  (including  j  and  5)  goes 
with  the  following  vowel :  ^U-c^er,  SBci^fd^e,  ei^tien,  rei^jen. 

((?)  Of  several  consonants  the  last  one  goes  with  the  follow- 
ing vowel,  except  that  the  combination  ft  is  not  divided :  gin* 
get,  aSaH^r,  fiHen,  Snof^pe,  ©tiib^te,  be-fte,  mei^fte,  gen^ter. 

IV.      PUNCTUATION   AND   CAPITALIZATION. 

German  rules  for  punctuation  and  capitalization  are  much 
like  English,  especially  in  regard  to  the  beginning  of  a  sen- 
tence, the  use  of  the  period,  colon,  quotation  marks,  interroga- 
tion point,  and  so  on. 

(a)   Tlie  comma  is  used  more  frequently  in  German. 

(1)  Relative  clauses  are  always  set  off  by  commas 
(§  169,  c). 

(2)  In  many  compound  sentences  where  English  omits 
the  comma,  German  uses  it  to  separate  the  two  parts  of  the 
sentence. 


INTRODUCTION.  xix 

(6)   The  exclamation  point  is  also  commoner  in  German  than 
in  English. 

(1)  A  command  is  always  followed  in  German  by  an 
exclamation  point  (§  69). 

(2)  The  address  inside  a  letter,  as  Dear  Carl,  is  often 
followed  by  an  exclamation  point:  8teber  ^arl! 

(c)  German  begins  all  nouns  with  a  capital. 

(1)  When  an  adjective,  verb,  or  other  part  of  speech  is 
used  as  a  noun,  it  is  always  written  with  a  capital. 

(2)  On  the  other  hand,  when  nouns  have  lost  their  noun 
force  they  are  written  small  (§  138,  a). 

((/)  The  formal  pronoun  ©te  and  its  possessive  QijX  always 
begin  with  a  capital,  though  its  reflexive  fid^  is  small. 

(1)  The  pronoun  bit  and  its  plural  tl^r,  with  the  posses- 
sives  and  reflexives,  beitter,  euer,  bid^,  and  euc^,  are  written 
small  except  in  letters,  where  they  are  capitalized. 

(e)  Adjectives  are  capitalized  after  ettt)a^  and  nic^t^  (§  159, 
a  and  e). 

V.     GERMAN   EQUIVALENTS   FOR  GRAMMATICAL 
TERMS. 

The  letter  (of  the  alphabet),  ber  ^nd)'^tait* 

The  vowel,  ber  SSofal',  or  ber  ©elbftlaut. 

The  consonant,  ber  ^onfonant',  or  ber  TlWlant 
The  sentence,  ber  @a^. 

The  subject,  ba^  ©ubjeft';  the  predicate,  ba^  ^rdbifaf* 

The  main  clause,  ber  §au|3t'fa|. 

The  subordinate  clause,  ber  S^e'benfa^. 


XX  INTRODUCTION. 

The  parts  of  speech,  bte  9te'betetle» 
The  article,  ber  Slrtt'tet,  or  ba^  ©efc^ted^t^'lDort. 
Definite,  beftimtuf ;  indefinite,  un'beftimmt. 
The  noun,  ba^  (Sub'ftatttit),  or  ba^  ^aupt'woxt. 
First,  second,  third  class,  er'fte,  ^tDci'te,  brtf  te  Staffe. 
The  pronoun,  ba^  'iproTto'meti,  or  ba^  gitr'iDort. 
The  adjective,  ba^  2Ib'ie!ttt),  or  ba^  @i'9en[c^aft^tt)ort» 
The  numeral,  ba^  9^umerale,  or  ba§  3^^^'^^^^^- 
The  adverb,  ba^  SlbDerb',  or  ba^  Um'ftanb^tport. 
The  verb,  ba^  33er'b(um),  or  ba^  3^^^'^^^^** 

Strong,    ftar! ;    weak,   f(f)lDacf) ;    separable,    tretltt'bar ;    in- 
separable, un'trennbar ;  transitive,  tranfittt)' ;   intransi- 
tive, intranfitiD^ 
The  preposition,  bte  ^rdpofitiott',  or  ha^  SSer^cilt'nl^tDort. 
The  conjunction,  bie  Sottiunftioti',  or  ba§  ^©in'betDort* 
The  interjection,  bie  ^^nterieftioTt',  or  ba^  Slu^'rufung^mort. 
The  gender,  ba^  ®efd}Ie($f:    masculine,  mcinnli^  ;  feminine, 

tDeibltrf)  ;  neuter,  fcic^lii^. 
The  number,  bie  ^a^I'f^^^* 
Singular,  ber  Singular',  or  bie  gin'ja^L 
Plural,  ber  *ip(u'rat,  or  bte  9J?e^r'3aI)L 
The  case,  ber  gad  (pi.  bte  galle). 

The  nominative,  ber  9^o'mtttatiti ;  genitive,  ber  ©e'ttttit) ;  da- 
tive, ber  ©a'ttt) ;  accusative,  ber  2lf  fufattt). 
The  inflection,  bte  ©te'guttg  ;  to  decline,  beflinie'rett. 
The    declension,    bte    !De!(ittatiott' ;    strong,    ftarf ;    weak, 

f(J)tt)a(i);  mixed,  gemt[(f)t» 
To  conjugate,  fottjugie'rett ;  conjugation,  bte  ^ottjugation'. 
The  comparison,  bte  ^oittparatioti',  or  bte  ©tet'geruttg  ;  to  com- 
pare, ftei'gern ;  positive,  ber  ^o'fttiti ;  comparative,  ber 
^otn'Mratit) ;  superlative,  ber  @u'per(atiD, 


INTRODUCTION,  XXI 

The  tense,  ba^  Xem'|)U^,  bie  3^it'f orm  ;  present,  ba^  ^rci'fen^ ; 
past,  ba^  3^m'^3erf eft ;  future,  ba^  gutur'  (ba^  er'fte 
guturO;  perfect,  ba§  ^erfeff ;  past  perfect,  ba^  ^Iu^':= 
quamperfeft ;  future  perfect,  ba^  jtnef te  gutur' ;  simple, 
compound,  em'fai^,  pfam'mengefe^t. 

The  mode,  ber  3Jfo'bu^  ;  indicative,  ber  ^^n'bifatit) ;  subjunc- 
tive, ber  Son'iunctit) ;  imperative,  ber  3^m'|3*eratit) ;  infini- 
tive, ber  ^n'finitit) ;  participle,  ba^  ^artijip'. 

The  accent,  ber  2^on ;  raising  and  lowering  of  the  voice,  bie 
§ebung  unb  @en!ung  ber  ©ttmme. 

Position,  order,  bie  (SteHung,  bie  Drbtiuttg. 

Word  order,  bie  SBorf  folge  ;  inverted  order,  bie  ^^ntierfiott'^ 

Page,  bie  @eite  ;  line,  bie  ^dit,  bie  9tei^e  (row). 

Note.  Properly  the  foreign  terms  should  have  the  accent  on  the  last 
syllable  ;  but  in  the  language  of  the  schoolroom  the  accent  has  been 
shifted  from  the  meaningless  ending  to  the  distinctive  part  of  the  word. 


IPcIdpe  Spxad^e  barf  fid?  mtt  ber  beutfd?en  mcffen,  meld^e 
anberc  tft  fo  retd?  unb  mddptig,  fo  muttg  unb  anmuttg,  fo  fdport 
unb  fo  mtib  als  unfere  ? 


Borne, 


LESSON  I. 
Present  of  f^ahcn  and  feim    Gender. 


^Jrifd?  begonnen,  t^alb  geiponnen.  —  2)eutfci^c^  <2^rtci^tDort 
Well  begun  is  half  done .  —  German  Proverb. 


1.  Present  Tense  of  !^aben,  to  have,  and  [etn,  to  he, 

\^  ^afte,  /  have.  \^  Bin,  /  am. 

tsxx  i)tL%  thou  hast.  btt  Bift,  thou  art. 

tXf  ftc,  c^  ^at,  he,  she,  it  has.  cr,  fie,  t^  ift,  Ae,  s/^e,  it  is. 

toix  f^ahtrtf  we  have.  ttitr  finb,  we  are. 

t^t  ^abt,  2/oi^  /lave.  i^r  feib,  2/om  «re. 

fie  l^abett,  they  have.  fie  fittb,  ^/le?/  are. 

2.  Gender.  —  Like  English,  German  has  three  genders : 
masculine,  feminine,  and  neuter.  But  in  German  the  gender 
of  a  noun  does  not  necessarily  depend  upon  sex,  as  in  Eng- 
lish ;  instead  it  utterly  disregards  meaning.  Thus  the  German 
word  for  knife  is  neuter ;  for  fork,  feminine ;  and  for  spoon, 
masculine. 

(a)  To  indicate  gender  the  definite  article  (masc.  ber,  fem. 
bie,  neut.  ba^,  the)  should  be  learned  with  every  noun.  It 
should  be  considered  a  part  of  the  noun  and  learned  as  a  first 
syllable:  not  @cf)itler,  but  t)tv  ®(^u(er;  not  ©d^ute,  but  bie 
@^ute;  not  ^ui),  but  ba^  «urf|. 

1 


2'  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

3.  German  Questions.  —  In  German,  as  in  English,  a  question 
is  asked  by  inverting  subject  and  predicate,  or  by  using  an 
interrogative  adverb  or  pronoun. 

mnxd)?Aml? 

SBo  bift  btt  ?   Where  art  thou  f 

SBa^^at  cr?  What  has  he? 

(a)  The  English  repetition  of  the  auxiliary  in  a  question,  as 
isnH  he  ?  don't  you  ^  iDonH  they  f  canH  I  f  etc.,  is  given  in  Ger- 
man by  nid^t  or  ni(^t  tDaijV^  isn't  it  true  f 

We  are  the  pupils,  arenH  toe  9    SSir  ftnb  bic  <B6)iihv,  nid^t  (toaf^v)? 
She  has  the  book,  hasn't  she?    (5ie  ^di  t>a^  ^M^f  nit^t  (ttial^r)? 


4.                                       Vocabulary. 

bcr     Sci^it'lcr,     pupil     (compare 

ni^if  not. 

scholar). 

Xoa^Xf  true. 

bic  'B^M'Uf  school ;  in  ber  S^ulc, 

mo?  where? 

in  or  at  school. 

\)mf  here. 

U^  ^xx6),  hook. 

i^f    I;        btt,    thou; 

tx,    he; 

:^a'0Ctt,  to  have. 

fie,    she;      e§,    it; 

ttiir,   we; 

fcin,  to  he. 

x^Xf  you;   fie,  they. 

(a)  Note  that  the  same  word,  fie, 

means  she  or  they. 

5.                                        Exercise. 

(a)  1.  §at  ber  ©(filler  ba^  Su(^?  2.  2Btr  ^abett  ba^  mi), 
ntd)t  iDa^r?  3.  2Bo  finb  fie?  4.  ©ie  ftnb  ^ter,  fie  ftnb  in 
ber  (2d)ule.       5.  (Sie  ^aben  ba^  ^n(^  l^ier,  nii^t  tDal^r? 

(h)  „gBo  bift  bn?'' 

„3^(f)  bin  in  ber  (Sd)ule/' 

,,§aftbuba^»uc^?" 

„3(^  f)abe  ba^  ^ud),  nic^t  n)a^r?'' 

;;3:)er  ©(^uler  ^at  ba^  «ucf)." 


PAST  OF  HABEN  AND   SEIJST.  3 

i 

(c)  1.  Have  you  the  book  ?  2.  The  pupil  has  the  book. 
3.  Is  he  at  school  ?  4.  I  am  the  pupil,  am  I  not  ?  5.  They 
are  here  at  school ;  they  have  the  book. 

(d)  ^'  Where  are  we  ?  '^ 

"  You  are  here  at  school." 

"  We  have  the  book,  haven't  we  ?  '^ 

"  You  have  it.     It  is  here." 

"  I  have  the  book  here  at  school." 

LESSON  II. 
Past  of  i^ahtn  and  feim 


filler  2lnfang  t[t  fd?it)er.  —  2)eutfc^e3  (S^rtd^tDort 
Every  beginning  is  hard.  —  German  Proverb. 


6.  Past  Tense  of  ^aben  and  fetn. 

tr^  ^aiitf  I  had.  \^  toaXf  I  was. 

btt  f^atit^if  thou  hadst.  bu  ttJarft,  thou  wast. 

tVf  fie,  t§  f\aitCf  he,  she,  it  had.        cr,  ftc,  t§  tt)av,  he,  she,  it  was. 

ttiir  i^atUUf  we  had.  ttitr  mar  en,  we  were. 

i^r  ^atittf  you  had.  if)v  toaxtf  you  were. 

fie  f^atttUf  they  had.  fie  ItJarett,  they  were, 

7.  Nominative  and  Accusative  Cases.  —  The  nominative  and 
accusative  are  always  alike  except  in  the  masculine  singular. 

(a)  The  Nominative,  as  in  English,  is  the  case  (1)  of  the 
subject,  and  (2)  of  the  predicate  after  intransitive  verbs  like 
fein  and  tuerben,  to  become. 

©r  ift  ber  Secret*    He  is  the  teacher. 
^er  3^ater  tout  ^mU     The  father  was  good. 


4  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

(b)  The  Acmsative,  like  the  English  objective,  is  the  case  of 
the  direct  object. 

Sic  ^ai  cittCtt  Skater*     She  has  a  father. 
SBir  fatten  cinctt  Scorer*     We  had  a  teacher. 


8.. 


Table  of  Forms. 


Nom. 
Ace. 


Definite  Article,  the. 

Singular,  Plural. 

M.       F.       N. 

bcr     hit     H^        bie 
bctt     bic     H§        btc 


Indefinite  Article,  a. 

Singular.  Plural. 

M.        F.       N. 
Nom.     citt        cine    citt      Want- 
Acc.      cittCtt    eittc    citt        ing. 


(a)  Note  that  tie  is  the  form  for  nominative  and  accusative  of  the 
definite  article  for  all  genders  in  the  plural  and  for  the  feminine  singular. 
Observe  especially  the  masculine  singular,  contrasting  the  nominative 
and  accusative  forms. 


9.  A  Predicate  Adjective  is  not  declined. 

^cr  fic^rcr  ift  gttt*     The  teacher  is  good. 

^a§  S3tt(i^  ttttb  bic  fRofc  fittb  VOt     The  book  and  the  rose  are  red. 

10.  Terms  of  Address.  —  In  formal  or  polite  address,  German 
uses  @ie,  a  form  like  the  third  person  plural.  The  pronoun 
is  always  written  with  a  capital.  ©U  (plural  tl^r)  is  used 
with  intimates,  relatives,  young  children,  and  animals. 

Have  you  the  book  9    (To  the  teacher)  ^abctt  @ic  ha§  S3tt(J^  ? 
(To  a  fellow  pupil)  ^a)i  btt  \>a§  Sttd)  ? 
(To  several  pupils)  ^aht  i\}V  ha§  ^nHj  ? 

(a)  @lc  is  the  common  form  of  address  to-day  in  Germany  for  both 
singular  and  plural,  except  when  bu  (i^r)  is  required.  In  translating  you, 
think  carefully  whether  you  are  addressing  intimate  friends  or  not.  When 
in  doubt,  use  @ic. 


PAST  OF  HABEN  AND   SEIN.  6 

11.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  ^a'tcr,  father.  t>a^  '^J^apicx',  paper. 

ber  Se^'rer,  teacher.  ttiai^  ?  what  9 

bie  Tlnt'ttVf  mother.  ja,  yes. 

btc  ^e'ber,  i)ew  (compare  feather).  ^ntf  good. 

t>a§  ^tttb,  child.  ttttb,  «wd 

12.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  SBa^  ^atte  ba^  tinb?  2.  ©a^  Mnb  ^atte  eitten 
SSater  unb  eine  9)Zuttei\  3.  !®er  SSater  unb  bte  3)?utter 
iDaren  gut*  4.  9Bo  tt)ar  tc^;  tDar  t(f)  in  ber  @(^ule?  5.  ^^a, 
n)ir  tDaren  ^ter  in  ber  @c^ule;  iDir  fatten  ba^  ^a|)ier  unb  ein 
Suc^. 

(&)  ,,aBa^  fatten  @ie?'' 

„3(^  ^atte  ba^  "ipapier  unb  eine  geben" 

„2Baren  @ie  ber  8el)rer?'' 

„3^a,  id)  n)ar  ber  ge^rer." 

„Unb  @ie  fatten  ba^  Sud)  unb  bie  geber." 

(c)  1.  Was  the  child  the  pupil  ?  2.  Yes,  the  child  was 
the  pupil,  and  the  father  was  the  teacher.  3.  Where  were 
they,  and  what  had  they  ?  4.  They  were  here  at  school,  and 
they  had  the  paper.  5.  You  had  a  book  and  a  pen,  didn't 
you  ? 

(d)  "  What  were  you  at  school  ?  " 
"I  was  the  teacher." 

"What  had  you?" 

"  I  had  a  book  and  a  pen." 

"  Yes,  we  had  a  pen  and  the  paper." 


ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

LESSON  III. 
Present  of  loben.    Definite  Article. 


Das  IDerf  lobt  bzn  ITTeifter.  —  2)cutfc^e«  (S^rtd^ttjort 
The  work  praises  the  master,  —  German  Proverb. 


13.  Classification  of  Verbs.  —  Verbs  are  generally  called 
strong,  when  the  stem  vowel  changes  in  the  past ;  weak,  when 
it  remains  the  same :  (weak,  lobett,  loBte  ;  strong,  fel)en,  faf)). 
Compare  English  j9raise,j9rafed;  see,  saw. 

Note,  These  terms  were  i^ivented  by  the  German  'Scholar,  Jacob 
Grimm.  A  strong  verb  has  strength  enough  to  form  its  past  by  changing 
its  vowel ;  a  loeak  one  requires  the  help  of  an  ending. 

14.  The  Weak  Verb  has  the  following  personal  endings  in 
the  present  tense.     These  are  added  to  the  verb  stem. 

Singular.  Plural. 

1st c  eit 

2d (e)ft  (c)t 

3d (c)t  ctt 

(a)  Euphony  requires  that  certain  verbs  have  -e-  before  the 
ending  in  the  second  person  singular  and  plural  and  in  the 
third  singular:  bu  grlt^eft,  thou  greetest;  er  tnartet,  he  waits, 
bit  retjeft,  thou  provokest;  er  babet,  he  bathes.  Naturally  it  is 
awkward  to  write  bu  grii^ft,  er  n^artt,  bu  retjft,  er  babt, 

15.  Present  Tense  of  loben,  to  praise.     Stem,  Iob» 

id)  iohtf  I  praise.  tuir  lohtttf  we  praise. 

^n  inh^tf  thou  praisest.  tl^r  (oBt,  you  praise. 

tVf  fie,  t^  lohtf  he,  she,  it  praises.  fie  (oBeit,  they  praise. 

(a)  Conjugate  the  present  tense  of  fagen  and  (erncn  like  lobcn. 


PRESENT  OF  LOBEN.  7 

16.  English  Progressive  and  Emphatic  Forms  are  given   in 
German  by  the  simple  verb. 

I  am  learning^  I  do  learn.     ^^  (cmc* 

He  was  praising,  he  did  praise.     @r  lobtc*  * 

Were  you  saying?  Did  you  say?    ^agtCtt  <Bit? 

17.  The  Definite  Article. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

All  Genders. 

Nom. 

bcr,  the. 

bie,  the. 

H^f  the. 

bie,  the. 

Gen. 

ht^f  of  the. 

ber,  of  the. 

ht^f  of  the. 

bcr,  of  the. 

Dat. 

bcm,  to  the. 

bcr,  to  the. 

bent,  to  the. 

ben,  to  the. 

Ace.    . 

ben,  the. 

bic,  the. 

\>a§f  the. 

bic,  the. 

(a)  Note  the  similarity  of  endings  for  the  definite  article  and  the 
personal  pronoun :  ber  —  cr,  bic  —  fie,  ba^  —  eg,  bie  —  fte. 

18.  Vocabulary. 

htv  ^ni'htVf  brother.  ha^^nit,desk. 

bcr  (BtU^I,  chair.  (o'Bctt,  to  praise. 

bic  ^itt'tc,  ink.  fa'gcit,  to  say,  tell. 

^xt  ^tci'be,  chalk.  Icr'nctt,  to  learn,  study. 

'b^^  Qb\a^,  glass.  ttiantm'?  why  f 

19.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  ®er  8et)rer  lobt  ben  ® ruber;  er  lernt  ba«  53uc^. 
2.  SBarum^at  ber  53ruber  emen@tuf)Iunbem^u(t?  3,  Sa^ 
lernen  ®te  ^ier  in  ber  ®(^ule  ?  4.  ^^  ^abe  ba^  ®{a^  unb  bte 
^retbe.       5.  ©ie  abutter  lobt  ba^  ^inb;  ba^  Stnb  lernt. 

{b)  „9Barum  loben  ®te  ben  ©ruber?'' 

M  lernt  ba^  Surf).'' 

„aBo  tt)aren  bie  Slinte  unb  bte  Sreibe?" 


8  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

„Qij  [age,  fie  iDarett  ^ter  in  ber  ®(f)ule." 
„3Bir  loben  ben  @(J)U{er;  er  ift  gut;  er  lernt/' 

(c)  1.  What  have  I  here?  2.  You  have  the  chalk 
and  a  glass.  3.  The  desk  and  the  chair  are  here  in  the 
school.  4.  What  do  you  say  ?  Why  do  you  praise  the  ink  ? 
It  (fie)  is  not  good.         5.    The  teacher  praises,  and  we  learn. 

(d)  "  What  are  you  saying  ?  " 
"  I  am  studying  the  book." 

"  Why  are  you  studying  ?  '' 

"  I  have  a  chair  and  a  desk  and  a  pen  and  the  ink." 

"  The  brother  studies,  and  the  teacher  praises  the  pupil." 


LESSON  IV. 
Past  of  iohcn*    Indefinite  Article. 


IDte  gel^t  es  ?    <5an^  gut,  id?  banU, 

How  goes  it?     Quite  well,  I  thank  {you). 


20.  The  Past  Tense  of  Weak  Verbs  is  formed  by  adding  r^te  to 
the  present  stem.  The  personal  endings  are  the  same  as  in  the 
present  tense,  except  that  the  third  person  singular  is  like  the 
first. 

21.  Past  Tense  of  loben. 

ici^  U^itfl praised.  ttiir  lobtcn,  we  praised. 

btt  lofiteft,  thou  didst  praise.  i^r  Mittf  you  praised. 

tXf  fie,  t^  loiite,  he,  she,  it  praised.  fie  lobten,  they  praised. 

(a)  Conjugate  the  past  tense  of  fud)cn  and  mact)en  like  loben. 


PAST  OF  LOB  EN. 
22. 


The  Indefinite  Article. 

Singular. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

cilt,  a. 

cittc,  a. 

citt,  a. 

Gen. 

cittCi^,  of  a. 

tintVf  of  a. 

cinc^,  of  a. 

Dat. 

einem,  to  a. 

cttter,  to  a. 

cittcm,  to  a. 

Ace. 

cittCtt,  a. 

cine,  a. 

citt,  a. 

(a)  The  plural  of  course  is  wanting.  Compare  the 'endings  of  ber 
and  eitt, 

23.  Position  of  ntd^t,  —  When  nid^t  modifies  the  whole  sen- 
tence it  stands  at  or  near  the  end;  otherwise  it  conies  just 
before  the  word  or  phrase  it  negatives. 

SBir  iohtn  ben  8rf|ii(er  nit^t*     We  are  not  praising  the  pupil, 
^tv  S3rnber,  niti^t  ber  Battv,  lohi  ben  8cf|nler«     The  brother^  not  the 
father,  praises  the  pupil. 

24.  Vocabulary. 

ber  @ar'ten,  garden;  in  ^tm  @ar=      bai^  ^Ui'i>f  dress. 

ten,  in  the  garden.  fn't^en,  (past)  fnri^te,  to  seek,  look 

ber  X^d)f  table.  for. 

hk  Dflo'fe,  rose.  ma'c^en,  (past)  mad}ttf  to  make. 

hit  SBIn'me,  floioer.  rot,  red. 

'tsa^  ^aw^f  house,  Xoit"^  how? 

25.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  2Bie  ma^te  bie  abutter  ba^  Sletb?  2.  @te  ma^te 
ba^  tietb  auf  (on)  etttem  %\\6),  3.  SBie  luar  ba^  ^leib;  \mx 
e^  ntc^t  rot?  4.  ©a^  §au^  n)ar  nic^t  in  bem  ®arten.  5.  ^6) 
fu(i)te  ben  Setter  in  bem  ®arten- 

{h)  ,,$Ba^  [uc^ten  ®ie,  eine  ^Inme?'' 
„3^a,  \6)  \Vi6)it  tint  $Rofe  in  bem  ©arten," 
„3Bie  mar  bie  9to[e?    Sar  fie  {it)  rot?'' 


10  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

„Qa,  id)  fud^te  eitte  $Ro[e,  unb  fie  n^ar  rot/' 
,,'^it  9iofe,  ba^  §au^  unb  ba^  Stetb  finb  rot,'' 

(c)  1.  Did  you  make  the  chair  and  the  table  ?  2.  Why 
was  the  teacher  praising  the  pupil  ?  3.  The  house  in  the 
garden  was  not  red.  4.  The  pupil  was  not  studying  the 
book.       5.    How  did  she  make  the  dress  ? 

(d)  "  Were-  you  looking  for  a  flower  in  the  garden  ?  " 
"  Yes,  I  was  looking  for  a  rose ;  it  (fie)  was  red." 

"  What  did  you  say  ?     The  rose  is  not  red.'' 

"The  teacher  praised  the  flower." 

"  How  and  why  were  you  looking  for  it  (fie)  in  the  garden  ?  " 

LESSON  V. 
Present  of  fej^eit*    Review. 


(Er  ftebt  ben  VOalb  vov  Bdumen  nid?t.  —  :iDeutfc^eg  (S^ric^ttjort. 
He  does  not  see  the  wood  for  the  trees.  —  German  Proverb. 


26.  Certain  Strong  Verbs  change  the  stem  vowel  of  the  sec- 
ond and  third  persons  singular  in  the  present  indicative,  as 
in  fe^en  (bu  fie^ft,  er  fte^t) ;  f|3red)en  (bu  fpric^ft,  er  fprid^t). 
(A  list  of  strong  verbs  and  these  stem  changes  will  be  found 
on  pages  199  to  205.) 

27.  Present  Tense  of  fe^en,  to  see. 

\6)  f c^c,  I  see.  ttiir  fc^cn,  we  see. 

bu  fie^ft,  thou  seest.  t^r  fe^t,  you  see. 

tVf  fie,  t§  fic^t,  he,  she,  it  sees.  fie  fe^eit,  they  see. 

(a)  Conjugate  the  present  tense  of  fprcd^en  (t)U  fpridjft)  and  finbcn  (bu 
ftnbcft)  Uke  fe^cn. 


PRESENT  OF  SEHEN.  11 

28.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  Manrtf  man.  fprc'c^cn,  to  speak. 

bic  5tuf  gabe,  exercise.  fitt'bcn,  to  find. 

tsa^  (^xa^f  grass.  Ontit,  green. 

^a^  ^tVii\^f  German^  the  German      (i'\>tXf    hut. 

language.  ttcitt,  no. 

fe'^Ctt,  to  see.  fc^ttJer,  hard,  difficult. 

29.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  @ief)[t  bu  ba^  ®ra^  ?  2.  ^a,  t(^  fef)e  ba^  ®ra^ ;  e^ 
ift  griln.  3.  ^^d^  fu(^e  eine  geber,  aber  t(J)  [tube  fie  (it)  nidji. 
4.  (S^jrtc^t  ber  Tlam  ©eutfc^  ?  5.  ^a,  er  f^3ri(^t  S)eut[^ ;  er 
fitibet  e^  nicf)t  fc^mer. 

(b)  „<Spxtd)tn  ®te  3:)eutf(^?'' 

„9^em,  id)  lerne  J)eutfd^,  aber  ber  Setter  f^rt(^t." 

„mt  fittben  ®te  bie  Slufgabe?    Q\t  fie  (I'O  fi^trer?" 

„9?ein,  bie  Slufgabe  ift  nidjt  f(f)lDer.'' 

„®ut!    @ie  lernen  2)eutfcl),  unb  @ie  fittben  e^  ttic^t  fd^mer.'' 

(c)  1.  Does  the  man  see  the  flower  in  the  garden?  2.  No, 
but  he  sees  the  grass ;  it  (e^)  is  green.  3.  How  do  you  speak 
German  ?  4.  I  do  not  find  German  hard,  but  I  do  not  speak 
it  (e^).       5.  She  is  looking  for  a  book,  but  she  does  not  find  it. 

(d)  "  Does  the  pupil  speak  German  ?  " 

"  No,  he  is  learning  German,  but  he  does  not  speak." 
"  Is  he  finding  the  book  hard  ?  " 

"  No,  he  praises  the  book,  and  he  does  not  find  the  exercise 
hard." 

30.  Review  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  Conjugate  in  the  present  and  past:  ^^  f)^^^  ^^^ 
^uc^.    SBa^  bitt  ic^?    ^^c^  lertte  ©eutfi^.        2.  Conjugate  in 


12  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

the  present:  Qd)  fe^e  e^  nidjt  ©pre^e  id)  !©eutfc^?  Qi)  finbe 
bie  Slufgabe  fdjtDer^  3.  Decline  the  definite  and  indefinite 
articles.  4.  Give  the  rule  for  the  position  of  ntiJ)t ;  for  the 
use  of  the  second  person  pronouns. 

(b)  1.  Q6)  f)abe  ba^  «U(^.  2.  ©u  btft  ber  ®(^uter,  3.  gr 
lernt  bie  3lufgabe,  4.  Sir  loben  ben  8e^rer»  5,  Qi^v  mad)t 
ba^  ^leib,  6.  ©ie  fu^en  bie  9?ofe.  7.  SBo  iDaren  @ie? 
8.  9Ba^  fagte  ber  8e^rer?  9.  Sarum  fpre^en  ®ie  nt^t? 
10.  mt  mvbxe  Jinte? 

(c)  1.  Is  he  speaking  German?  2.  Thou  wast  not  at 
school.  3.  She  has  a  rose,  hasn't  she  ?  4.  We  are  looking 
for  the  flower,  but  we  do  not  find  it  (fie).  o.  Were  you 
studying  German?  6.  They  do  not  find  German  hard. 
7.  Where  did  you  look  for  the  rose  ?  8.  Why  did  they 
make  a  dress?  9.  W^hat  was  he  studying?  10.  How 
does  she  speak  German? 


^ergi^meinni($|t. 

®  MU^t  ein  f(^one^  :93Iitmd^en  . 

3luf  utifrer  gritnen  2lu' ;  '^'^'^ 

®ein  Slug'  ift  tnie  ber  §ttnmel, 
©0  ^eiter  unb  fo  blau. 

a^  tt)ei^  nid^t  t)iel  ju  reben, 
Unb  alle^,  tDa^  e^  fprid^t, 
Q\t  tmmer  nur  ba^felbe, 
3f[t  nur :  SSergi^meinnid)!. 

—  Hoffmann  t)on  ^atler^Icbcn. 


REVIEW.  13 


©ute  mad)t ! 
giHen  a)?uben  fef ^  gebrac^t. 
9?eigt  ber  STag  ftd^  [tilt  jum  (Snbe, 
atu^en  alle  flei^'gen^dnbe, 
Si^  ber  Sl^orgen  neu  ertDat^t. 
®ute  92ad^t ! 

®e^t  pr  9?ul)M 
(g^Ue^t  bie  muben  2tugen  ju- 
©tiller  iDtrb  e^  auf  ben  @tra^en, 
Unb  ben  2Ba(f)ter  ^5rt  man  blafen, 
Unb  bie  9^ad}t  ruft  atten  p : 

©e^taur^Ru^M 

©d^luntntert  fit§ ! 
S^rciumt  trni)  euer  *i|3arabie^* 
SBent  bie  8iebe  raubt  ben  grieben, 
®ei  ein  fc^oner  2:ranm  befi^ieben, 
311^  ob  8ieb(^en  i^n  begrit^'. 

©(^tuntntert  fit^ ! 

®nte  mad)t ! 
©(f)Inntniert,  bi^  ber  3:ag  txtoadjt 
©(^lummert,  bi^  ber  nene  9)?orgen 
^ontntt  ntit  feinen  neuen  ©orgen, 
O^ne  gur^t :  ber  aSater  tDa^t. 

®ute  ^Jiac^t ! 

--  Xi)eot>ov  Corner. 


14  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

LESSON  VI. 
Past  of  fc^ett*    Masculine  Nouns  of  the  First  Class. 


Was  tft  bas  ?    3d?  cerftet^e  es  nid^i 
What  is  thatF    I  don^t  understand  it. 


31.  The  Past  Tense  of  Strong  Verbs  has  the  same  personal 
endings  as  the  present,  except  that  the  first  and  third  persons 
singular  have  no  personal  ending. 

32.  Past  Tense  of  [e^en. 

x6)  ^a%  I  saw.  mir  f  a^eit,  we  saw. 

bit  fa^ft,  thou  sawest.  xljv  fa^t,  you  saw. 

tx,  fie,  C^  fa^,  he,  she,  it  saw.  fie  fa^en,  they  saw. 

(a)  Conjugate,  the  past  of  j^rerfjen  (f)3rad^)  and  finben  (fattb). 

33.  Classes  of  Nouns. — Nouns  are  divided  into  five  classes 
according  to  the  way  they  are  declined.  The  first  class  con- 
tains those  which  do  not  change  in  the  plural,  except  some- 
times to  take  umlaut. 

(a)  Umlaut  meaiis  changed  sound  and  is  indicated  by  two 
dots  over  the  vowel.  31,  0,  and  u  are  the  only  vowels  that 
can  take  umlaut.  Compare  the  English:  man,  men;  foot,  feet. 
See  also  J,  c  of  the. Introduction. 

34.  The  First  Class  of  Nouns  contains  only  words  of  more 
than  one  syllable.     It  includes : 

(1)  All  masculine  and  neuter  nouns  ending  in  ?el,  -er,  KU* 

(2)  All  diminutives  ending  in  ^djtU  or  ^lein. 

(3)  Neuter  nouns  with  prefix  ®e*  and  suffix  ?e, 

(4)  The  two  feminines  2)?utter  and  S^od^ter. 


PAST  OF  8EHEN,  '        15 

35.  Declension  of  a  Masculine  Noun  of  the  First  Class. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Nom.  ber  S3rnlicr,  the  brother.  bic  S3rubcr,  the  brothers. 

Gen.    bc^  S3  rubers,  the  brother's.  ber  S3rubct,  the  brothers\ 

Dat.    bcm  S3rubcr,  (to)  the  brother.  bctt  S3rubcrtt,  {to)  the  brothers. 

Ace.    bctt  S3rubcr,  the  brother.  bte  SBriibcr,  the  brothers. 

(a)  Like  ber  i8ruber  decline  ber  @(^uler,  ber  !i?el^rer,  ber  Skater  (\ixt 
SSater),  ber  @arten  (bie  ©cirten).  Decline  each  of  these  nouns  also  in  the 
singular  with  ein.     See  §  22. 

36.  Vocabulary. 

ber  Som'mcr,  bic  8ommcr,  sum-  na%  wet. 

mer.  \>a§f  that. 

ber  SBin'ter,  bte  SBiitter,  winter.  (e'fen,  er  Hep,  (past)  Ja§,  to  read. 

tttavntf  warm.  uerfte'^eit,  (past)  tierftanb,  to  un- 

lalif  cold.  der stand. 

37.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  ®te  ©ommer  finb  inarm,  unb  bie  SBittter  finb  na^, 
2.  aSa^  tt)ar  ba^?  ^c^  t)erftanb  e^  m6)i,  3.  gafen  bte  Sritber 
bie  3lufgabe?  4.  !Die  ©djiiler  t^erftanben  nid^t,  tna^  fie  lafen, 
5.  SBarum  ift  e^  fait  in  ber  ©c^ule?    ^(^  tierfte^e  e^  ni^t 

•    (h)  „3Serftanb  ber  (Sinter  T)eutfd)?'' 

„^a,  er  Derftanb  T)eutf(^,  utib  er  la^  e^,  aber  er  [prat^  e^  tti(^t»" 
„gattb  er  bie  3lufgabe  \6)\otx?" 

„yitm,  er  tierftattb  bie  3lufgabe;  fie  (it)  tnar  ni^t  firmer." 
„!Da^  ift  gut.    !l)ie  (Skitter  finben  ba^  ©ud)  ni(^t  fdiiner*" 

(c)  1.  Are  the  summers  here  warm?  2.  Yes,  and  the 
winters  are  cold  and  wet.  3.  The  teacher  spoke  German, 
and  the  pupils  understood.  4.  Did  they  see  the  rose  in  the 
garden  ?  5.  The  teachers  were  speaking  (f|)rad^en)  German, 
and  the  pupils  were  reading,  but  they  did  not  understand. 


16  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

(d)  "  Did  you  understand  the  exercise  ?  '^ 
"  Yes,  but  we  found  it  (fie)  hard." 
"  Didn't  you  read  the  book  ?  '' 
"No,  we  didn't  understand  it  (e^)." 

"  But  you  spoke  Grerman  and  you  read  it.     Why  didn't  you 
understand  ?  " 

LESSON  VII. 
Present  of  ttierben*    Feminine  Nouns  of  the  First  Class. 


VOas  fd?retben  Ste  ba?    Das  gel|t  ntd?t. 

What  are  you  writing  there  ?     That  won't  do. 


38.  Present  Tense  of  tDcrben,  to  become,  get. 

x^  ttierbc,  I  become,  get.  ttJtr  tticrbcn,  we  become, 

btt  ttiitft,  thou  becomest.  i^r  ttictbet,  you  become. 

tVf  fie,  e^  toit\>f  he,  she,  it  becomes.      fie  tticrbctt,  they  become. 

39.  Declension  of  a  Feminine  Noun  of  the  First  Class. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Nom.    bic  %ts6)itXf  the  daughter.  "bit  %'66)itVf  the  daughters. 

Gen.    ber  Xoti^ter,  the  daughter's.  ber  ^iic^ter,  i^e  daughters'. 

Dat.     ber  ^oti^ter,  (io)  ^/le  daughter,     bctt  Xiid^tertt,  (io)  ^Ae  daughters. 
Ace.     bie  Xoci^tet,  «/ie  daughter.  'bit  %o6)itXf  the  daughters. 

(a)  Note  that  feminine  nouns  keep  the  same  form  throughout  the  sin- 
gular. 2)te  Xo^ter  forms  the  plural  merely  by  taking  umlaut,  hence  it  is 
of  the  first  class.  Like  bie  ^od^ter  decline  bie  Wnttex,  the  only  other 
feminine  of  the  first  class. 

40.  The  Possessive  Genitive.  —  The  German  genitive,  like 
the  English  possessive,  is  used  to  denote  possession.  As  in 
English,  it  may  precede  or  follow  its  noun. 


FBESENT  OF   WERDEN.  17 

^t^  (B6)Xi\tx^  ^W^.     The  pupiV  shook. 

^ic  0*{ofc  t>cr  Xt>^itv.     The  rose  of  the  daughter. 

(a)  The  genitive  singular  masculine  and  neuter  of  all  nouns  except 
Class  V  ends  in  (e)^. 

41.  Vocabulary. 

bic  Xo^'ter,  btc  Zd^itXf  daughter.  ft^rei'ictt,  (past)  \^x\t%  to  write. 

baig  SBct'tcr,  weather.  ttJCtbett,  to  become,  get. 

im  Som'mcr,  /?i  (?^e)  summer.  p,  ^oo. 

im  SSitt'ter,  m  (^/le)  winter.    ,  \)t\%  hot. 

fo,  so.  tuann  ?  i(?/ien  ? 

fc^r,  very.  a\if  old. 

42.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  !j)te  5ti5(^ter  be^  ge^rer^  Derfte^ett  ben  (S(^u(er  ntd^t ; 
fie  tDerben  fe^r  rot.  2.  @^  totrb  ju  ^et^  l)ter  in  ber  ©d^ule. 
3.  X)er  SSater  be^  @(^iiler6  mirb  fe^r  alt.  4.  ©(^reiben  ©ie 
bie  Slufgabe  ^ier  in  ber  ©c^ule?  5.  ®ie  SJJutter  be^  8e^rer^ 
fi^rieb  ein  ®ud^ ;  \o\x  tafen  e^,  aber  iDir  t)erftanben  e^  nid^t. 

(&)  „9IBann  n)irb  ba^  SBetter  irarm,  unb  tDann  n)irb  e^  fait?'' 
„  J)a^  ^Better  tDirb  iDarm  im  @ommer  unb  !att  im  SBinter.'' 
„3Iber  e^  trirb  m^i  fo  fel^r  fait  im  3[Binter.'' 
„9lein,  e^  ift  tt)arm  ^ier  in  ber  ®cf)ule  im  Sinter." 
„3^a,  aber  e^  ift  ju  f)ei^  in  ber  ®(^ule  im  ©ommer.'' 

(c)  1.  The  weather  gets  very  warm  in  summer.  2.  The 
weather  gets  too  cold  in  winter.  3.  The  exercise  of  the 
pupil  is  getting  too  hard.  4.  The  daughter  of  the  teacher 
is  getting  very  red.  5.  The  pupiPs  book  was  not  green ;  it 
was  old  and  red. 

(d)  "  When  did  you  write  the  exercise  ?  " 
"I  did  not  write  it  (fie).'' 


18  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

"  Why  didn't  you  write  it?     Is  it  getting  too  hard? " 
"No,  but  it  (e^)  is  getting  too  hot  here  at  school." 
"  Yes,  it  is  very  hot  in  summer  at  school.'' 


LESSON  VIII. 
Past  of  metbett.    Neuter  Nouns  of  the  First  Class. 


Was  tun  Sie  ba?    §eigen  Ste  mir  bas  3ud?l 
What  are  you  doing  there  F     Show  me  the  book. 


43.  Past  Tense  of  iDcrben. 

x6)  ttiurbe,  /  became.  ttJtr  ttiurben,  we  became. 

btt  ttiurbcft,  thou  becamest.  i^r  ttiurbct,  you  became. 

tXf  ftc,  e§  ttiurbc,  he^  she,  it  became.      fte  ttJurbcn,  they  became. 

44.  Declension  of  a  Neuter  Noun  of  the  First  Class. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Norn.  ba§  SJlabti^en,  the  girl.  bte  SJlabd^cn,  the  girls. 

Gen.    bei3  9JJabd^Ctt!^,  ^/le  ^^VZ's.  bcr  SWabti^cn,  ^/le  ^Ms\ 

Dat.    bcm  SJlabrJ^cn,  («o)  ^Tie  gr^w.  ben  9)labti^ctt,  (^o)  ^/le  ^iVZs. 

Ace.    'bti^  SJlabt^ctt,  «/ie  ^iW.  bic  9}labc^ett,  ^/le  ^iWs. 

(a)   Like  bag  9Jidb(i)'en  decline  ba«  Setter,  U^  2Jleffer,  bag  3Baffer, 

45.  The  Indirect  Object.  —  The  dative  is  used  to  denote  the 
indirect  object.  If  both  objects  are  nouns,  the  dative  generally 
precedes  as  in  English. 

8tc  ^a\>  bcm  Scorer  cm  S3u^,     She  gave  the  teacher  a  book. 
^6)  scigtc  bcr  Xoc^tcr  cine  OlDfc.    /  showed  the  daughter  a  rose,  or  / 
showed  a  rose  to  the  daughter. 

(a)   The  dative  plural  for  all  genders  always  ends  in  (e)n. 


PAST  OF   WERDEN.  19 

46.  Vocabulary. 

t>a§  aWef  fer,  btc  SJieffcr,  knife.  tm,  (past)  tat,  to  do. 

ba^  SBaf'fcr,  bte  233affcr,  tmter.  ober,  or. 

gc'ben,  er  ^xht,  (past)  gab,  io  ^ive.  mtt,  prep,  with  dative,  loiY^. 

SCi'gcit,  (past)  jctgtc,  ^o  s/io?/j.  ha,  there. 

47.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  ©er  ©i^uler  gab  bem  3Kab(f)en  ba^  aJJeffer  be^  8e^rer«» 
2.  SBurbe  ba^  9Ba[fer  tt)arm  ober  ijti^?  3.  (5^  tt)ar  njarm,  aber 
e^  iDurbe  fait,  4.  ®a^  ^Better  murbe  ^etg,  unb  ba^  SKdb^en 
tt)urbe  rot,  5.  ©a  ift  etn  ®Ia^;  it)a^  taten  ©te  mit  bem 
Saffer? 

(6)  „SBa^  taten  ©te  tntt  bem  ajjeffer  ba?" 
n^t^  X^^a^^  ^^^  Secret  ba^  9}?e[fer.'' 
„®aben  @te  bem  ge^rer  ba^  ^nd)?" 
„^txn,  id)  gab  bem  2Kab(f)en  ba6  Suc^/' 
„Unb  ba^  3)Mb{^en  tnurbe  rot,  nic^t  ma^r?" 

(c)  1.  What  did  you  do  with  the  water?  2.  Did  the 
pupiPs  father  have  the*  water  or  the  glass  ?  3.  We  gave 
the  pupils  the  pen  with  the  ink.  4.  Was  the  man  there 
with  the  teacher,  or  was  he  in  the  garden  ?  5.  The  teacher 
gave  the  pupil  a  knife  and  a  book. 

(d)  "  What  did  you  do  there  ?  Did  you  show  the  teacher 
the  pupil's  exercise  ?  '' 

"  No,  the  exercise  was  getting  very  hard.'' 
"  What  did  you  say  ?     Was  the  exercise  getting  too  hard  ?  " 
"  Yes,  and  I  gave  the  pupiPs  book  to  the  teacher." 
"  And  the  teacher  saw  the  book,  and  he  showed  the  exercise 
to  the  pupil's  father." 


20  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

LESSON  IX. 
The  Future  Tense. 


Semen  Ste  bas  (5ebtd?tl    Die  Sd^e  finb  ntd?t  lang. 
Learn  the  poem.     The  sentences  are  not  long. 


48.  Formation  of  the  Future  Tense.  —  Used  independently, 
iperben  means  to  become.  Used  as  an  auxiliary  (that  is,  with 
a  present  infinitive),  it  forms  the  future  tense.  All  verbs  form 
the  future  in  the  same  way,  simply  by  prefixing  the  present 
indicative  of  tt)erben  to  the  present  infinitive. 

3^  ttierbe  alt    /  become  old. 
^ti^  ttJerbe  Mem    I  shall  praise. 

49.  Future  Tense  of  loben.  Future  Tense  of  [e'^en. 

x6)  ttJerbe  Uhtxx,  I  shall  praise.  x^  ttierbe  fe^en,  I  shall  see. 

btt  ttitrft  U^txXf  thou  wilt  praise.  btt  ttJirft  fe^en,  thou  wilt  see. 

tx,  fie,  e^  ttiirb  U^trx,  he,  she,  it      er,  fie,  ei^  mirb  fe^en,  he,  she,  it 

will  praise.  *     wilVsee.^ 

toxx  merbett  (oben,  we  shall  praise.       mtr  merben  fe^eit,  we  shall  see. 
x\)x  t&tx\^ti  loben,  you  will  praise.        x^x  tuerbet  fe^en,  you  will  see. 
fie  ttierben  (oben,  they  will  praise.        fie  luerben  fe^en,  they  will  see. 

(a)  Conjugate  in  full  the  future  of  !^aben,  feiti,  and  ttierben. 

50.  Position  of  the  Infinitive.  —  The  infinitive  stands  after 
all  its  modifiers,  usually  at  the  end  of  the  sentence. 

^^  tuerbe  t>tn  IBe^rer  nidjt  fe^ett*    I  shall  not  see  the  teacher. 

Sie  ttiirb  bem  ©chiller  ein  ^ut^  geben.    She  will  give  the  pupil  a  book. 

51.  The  Second  Class  of  Nouns  contains  a  large  number  of 
masculine,  feminine,  and  neuter  monosyllables,  and  words  of 


THE  FUTURE  TENSE.  21 

more  than   one   syllable   ending   in   =tg^  =tng^   =faf,    -nt^  and 

These  nouns  add  ^e  to  form  the  plural.  The  masculines 
take  umlaut  usually,  the  feminines  always,  the  neuters  very 
seldom.  Plurals  that  take  umlaut  must  be  learned  from  the 
vocabularies. 

52.  Declension  of  the  Second  Class  of  Nouns. 

Masculine. 
Singular.  Plural. 

N.  bcr  ^ttttb,  the  dog.  Mc  ^ttttbc,  the  dogs. 

G.  be^  §UttbC)§,  the  dog's.  bet  ^ttttbc,  the  dogs'. 

D.  bent  §uttb(c),  (to)  the  dog.  htrt  ^nn'i>tnf  (to)  the  dogs, 

A.  ben  ^nn'tf  the  dog.  hh  ^nnbe,  the  dogs. 

Feminine. 

N.  bte  fSanff  the  bench.  bte  S3attfe,  the  benches. 

G.  ber  23anf,  of  the  bench.  ber  S3dn!e,  of  the  benches. 

D.  ber  23an!,  (to)  the  bench.  "btw  S3an!en,  (to)  the  benches. 

A.  bte  S3anf,  the  bench.  bte  battle,  the  benches. 

Neuter. 

!N".  "^a^  ^ferb,  the  horse.  bte  ^ferbe,  the  horses. 

G.  ht§  ^ferbe^,  the  horse's.  ber  ^ferbe,  the  horses'. 

D.  bent  ^ferb(e)^  (to)  the  horse.  ben  ^ferben,  (to)  the  horses, 

A.  t>a^  ^ferb,  the  horse.  bte  ^fevbe,  the  horses. 

(a)  In  like  manner  decline  ber  @tu^(  (bte  ©tii^Ie),  bte  §anb  (bte 
§attbe),  ba^  ^ult  (bie  ^ulte),  ber  Sifd)  (bie  Xtjdie),  bag  papier  (bie  fa-- 
^iere),  ber  @a^  (bie  @d^e),  ein  $unb,  eitte  iBan!,  etn  ^ferb, 

53.  Vocabulary. 

ber  ^nt,  bte  ^ii'te^  hat.  t>a§  (BM^^t',  bte  ©ebiri^'te,  poem, 

ber  iSa^,  bie  Sat'^e,  sentence.  piece  of  poetry. 

bte  ^ari^t,  t>it  Wdd)'tt,  night.  (ang,  Zo/i^. 

bie  'Btaht,  t>it  (Btdt^'U,  city.  ^vo%  large,  big,  great. 

bai^  ®^ie(,  bie  (B^h'Uf  play,  game.  f^ie'len,  (past)  f^ielte,  to  play. 


22  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

54.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  SBerben  ®te  etnen  §ut  madden?  2.  @te  merben  in 
bem  ©arten  mit  ben  ©c^iilern  f|)te(en»  3.  ®e^en  ®ie  bie 
®tabt?  (Sie  (t'O  ift  fe^r  gro^.  4.  ©te  ^ix6)it  iDcrben  fe^r 
lang.      5.  S)te  ©(filler  fptelten  etn  (S<)iel  mit  einent  §ut* 

(&)  „2Berben  @ie  bie  ®a^e  ber  9lnfgabe  f^reiben?'' 

„3^a,  tDir  merben  bie  ©ci^e  fc^reiben  nnb  bent  Secret  jeigen-'' 

„SBarmn  lernen  ©ie  bie  ®ebi(^te  nit^t?" 

„S)ie  ©ebic^te  finb  ju  fang,  aber  \oxx  ttjerben  fie  {them)  lernen." 

„@nt!    2Sir  n)erben  ein  ©piel  fpielen.'' 

(c)  1.  Will  he  learn  the  sentences  or  the  poems  ?  2.  Shall 
you  make  the  hats  ;  will  they  be  very  large  ?  3.  They  were 
not  playing;  the  teacher  was  reading  a  book,  and  the  pupil 
was  learning  a  poem.  4.  Will  the  game  be  very  long  ? 
5.   The  nights  will  get  long  and  cold  in  winter. 

(d)  "Will  the  pupils  learn  the  sentences  of  the  poem  ?'' 
"  Yes,  they  will  learn  the  poem ;  it  is  not  very  long." 

"  And  will  they  write  the  exercise  with  a  pen  and  ink  ?  " 
"No,  they  will  play  with  the  girls  in  the  garden." 
"  The  sentences  of  the  exercise  are  getting  too  long." 


©em  8anb,  n)o  nteine  9Biege  ftanb, 
5ft  boc^  !ein  anbre^  gteii^  ; 
g^  ift  ntein  liebe^  3SaterIanb 
Unb  ^eigt:  ba^  ©entfc^e  $Rei(^. 

—  3uHu«@tumt. 


REVIEW,  23 

LESSON   X. 
Review. 


libung  mad?t  t>en  ITtetfter.  —  2)eutfc^e^  <Bpvxd))movt 
Practice  makes  perfect  (lit.  the  master).  —  German  Proverb. 


55.  The  Use  of  the  Present  for  the  Future.  —  As  in  English, 
German  often  replaces  the  future  by  the  present,  when  no 
misunderstanding'  can  arise.  This  occurs  usually  when  the 
sentence  contains  an  adverbial  expression  referring  to  the 
future. 

They  will  play,    ©tc  tuerbcn  f^JtcIctt. 

To-morrow  they  {will)  play  ball.     "Mov^tn  fpiclctt  ftc  ^aiU 

We  shall  study  German,    295ir  tticrbctt  ^eutfc^  Icrnctt. 

Next  year  we  (shall)  study  German.    9^ari^ftC)^  ^af^t  Itvntn  ttiir  ^eutfti^. 

56.  Review  Questions. 

(a)  1.  Make  an  outline  table  of  the  present,  past,  and  future 
tenses  of  ^aben,  feitt,  tnerben,  loben,  and  fe^ett.  2.  Note  that 
the  verb  forms  of  the  first  and  third  persons  plural  and  the 
second  person  for  formal  address  are  always  alike.  In  the  past 
the  first  and  third  persons  singular  are  also  alike.  The  second 
person  singular  always  ends  in  :=[t;  the  second  person  plural 
always  in  4,  except  [etb. 

(b)  1.  How  do  the  personal  endings  of  the  past  differ  from 
those  of  the  present  in  weak  verbs ;  in  strong  verbs  ?  2.  Do 
strong  verbs  always  have  the  same  root  vowel  in  the  present  ? 
3.  Do  weak  verbs  ?  4.  How  can  you  distinguish  the  two 
uses  of  tDcrbeti? 


24  ELEMENTS   OF  GEBMAN. 

(c)  1.  In  what  letter  does  the  dative  plural  always  end? 
2.  How  do  feminine  nouns  differ  from  masculine  nouns  in  the 
singular  ?  3.  How  is  the  indirect  object  expressed  in  Ger- 
man? 4.  How  does  the  German  express  the  progressive 
and  emphatic  forms,  he  is  praising  and  he  does  praise? 

(d)  1.  What  endings  are  included  in  the  first  class  of  nouns? 
the  second  class  ?  2.  What  pronoun  would  you  use  in 
speaking  to  your  mother  ?  your  brother  ?  your  dog  ?  your 
teacher  ?  a  good  friend  among  your  classmates  ?  several  of 
your  classmates  ?  3.  Give  two  original  sentences  illustrat- 
ing the  use  of  the  present  for  the  future. 

57.  Review  Exercise. 

1.  I  am  studying  the  exercise ;  I  found  the  pen ;  I  shall 
give  the  pupil  the  book.  2.  You  (translate  three  ways) 
have  a  garden,  were  reading  a  book,  will  make  a  dress.  3.  He 
is  getting  warm  ;  he  spoke  German  ;  he  will  do  it.  4.  She 
is  not  looking  for  the  paper;  she  wrote  the  sentence;  she 
will  not  find  the  exercise  hard.  5.  We  are  showing  the 
pupils  the  flower ;  we  did  not  understand  German ;  we  shall 
not  do  it.  6.  They  are  reading  a  book ;  they  did  not  do  it ; 
they  will  study  the  exercise.  7.  Why  are  the  sentences  so 
long  ?  8.  When  shall  we  play  the  games  ?  9.  Does  the 
weather  get  warm  in  summer  ?  10.  What  were  you  looking 
for  in  the  garden  ? 

mi)t  ba^  Dtele  SBiffen  tuf ^, 
©onbern  miffen  tttoa^  ®ut'^. 


REVIEW.  25 

^     ^ie  2ovcUu 

^d)  n)et§  nxi)t,  wa^  foil  e^  bebeuten, 

J)aB  id)  |o  traurig  bin ; 
©in  2ftarc^en  au^  atten  3^i^^^r 

®a^  fommt  mir  nid^t  an^  bem  ©inn* 

©ie  gnft  ift  !u^t,  nnb  e^  bnnfelt, 
Unb  ru^ig  fliegt  ber  9t^ein ;  ^     , 

©er  ®i|)fel  be^  Sergei  funfett 
^m  3lbenb[onnenf^ein, 

©ie  [(^onfte  3=ungfran  fi^et, 

©ort  oben  tt)nnberbar ; 
Q^x  gotbne^  ©efc^meibe  bli^et, 

(Sie  fdntmt  t^r  golbene^  §aar* 

@ie  fcintmt  e^  mit  golbenem  ^antme 

Unb  fingt  ein  8ieb  babei ; 
!Da^  ^t  eine  h)nnber[ame, 

®en)altige  SJJelobei, 

®en  ®d)iffer  int  !(einen  Sd^iffe 

grgreift  e^  mit  trilbem  SBe^  ; 
Sr  f(^aut  nid^t  bie  gelfenriffe, 

gr  fd^aut  nur  ^inanf  in  bie  §5^\ 

Qij  gtanbe,  bie  SBellen  tierfi^Iingen 

2lm  gnbe  ©differ  nnb  ^a^n  ; 
Unb  ba^  ^t  mit  if)rem  ©ingen 

©ie  gorelei  getan. 


26  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

LESSON  XI. 
Perfect  Tense.     Nouns  of  the  Third  Class. 


VOas  }:iaht\\  Ste  gcfagt?    3<^  ^^^^  ^^e  ntd^t  gcl|ort. 
What  did  you  say?    I  did  not  hear  you. 


58.  Formation  of  the  Perfect  Tense.  —  The  perfect  tense  is 
formed,  as  in  English,  by  prefixing  the  present  tense  of  l^aben, 
to  have,  to  the  past  participle. 

Perfect  Tense  of  (oben. 

i^  l^abc  gcIoBt,  /  {have)  praised.  luir  ^((btw  geloBt,  we  {have) praised. 

\^Vi  l^aft  gclolit,  thou  {hast)  praised.  \1)x  ^aht  gelobt,  you  {have) praised. 

tXf  fie,  C^  f^ai  Qtlohtf   he,  she,  it  ^k^atcxt.qtioUf  they  {have) praised, 
(has)  praised. 

(a)  In  like  manner  conjugate  id^  ^ahe  e§  9efef)en,  id^  Ijaht  c^  gc^abt,  id) 
()abe  nt(^t  gef^rod)en,  id)  l)abe  ®ie  t)erftanben. 

59.  The  Principal  Parts  of  a  German  verb  are,  as  in  English, 
the  present  infinitive,  past,  and  past  participle :  fetn,  tt)ar,  getDC- 
fen;  ^aben.^atte,  ge^abt;  loben,  lobte,  gelobt;  fe{)en,  fa^,  gefe^en. 

The  weak  past  participle  always  ends  in  '(e)t,  the  strong 
in  *en.  Verbs  take  the  prefix  ge-  in  the  past  participle,  if 
accented  on  the  first  syllable. 

(a)  From  the  list  in  §  304  learn  the  principal  parts  of  finben,  gcben, 
(cfcn,  fcin,  fc^en,  fprcd)en,  tun. 

60.  Position  of  Participle.  —  The  past  participle,  like  the 
infinitive,  stands  at  the  end  of  the  sentence. 

^^  i^abt  ha§  Bnd)  tttt^t  gcf  unbctt.     /  have  not  found  the  hook. 
^aistvi  (Sic  bcm  Scorer  cine  Olofc  gegeben  ?    Did  you  give  the  teacher  a 
rose  f 


PERFECT   TENSE.  27 

61.  Use  of  Past  and  Perfect  Tenses.  —  To  report  a  single 
finished  act,  especially  in  conversation  and  in  questions,  the 
German  uses  the  perfect  where  the  English  has  the  past.  The 
English  did  is  usually  a  sign  that  the  German  perfect  should 
be  used. 

I  did  not  understand.     ^(^  §a6c  tttri^t  ticrftattbctt. 

Did  you  find  the  girl  9    ^aftcn  ®ic  ba^  SUlabr^cn  gefuttbctt? 

(a)  The  German  past  is  the  English  past  progressive,  and  is 
used  in  continued  narration. 

The  teacher  was  speaking,     ^tx  Scl^vcr  f^rad^* 

The  pupil  was  reading  the  book,    ^ct  ©chiller  la^  H^  S5ttd^» 

62.  Nouns  of  the  Third  Class  add  s=er  to  form  the  plural  and 
take  umlaut  whenever  possible ;  that  is,  when  the  stem  vowel 
is  a,  0,  U,  or  au.  This  class  contains  a  large  number  of  neuter 
monosyllables  and  about  twelve  masculines,  but  no  feminines. 
Nouns  ending  in  -tutn  modify  the  vowel  in  the  ending  ^UVX, 
instead  of  in  the  stem. 

63.  Declension  of  the  Third  Class  of  Nouns. 

Masculine. 
Singular.  Plural. 

N.  bcr  SDIamt,  the  man.  btc  Wl'mncVf  the  men. 

G.  bc§  ^annt^f  the  man's.  bcr  9)lamier,  the  men's. 

D.  bem  SJlattttC,  {to  or  for)  the  man.  belt  WHxttntvUf  {to  or  for)  the  men. 

A.  ^tn  Wlanxtf  the  man.  btc  SOZauitcr,  the  men. 

Neuter. 
N.     H§  ^n^f  the  book.  btc  25ur^cr,  the  books. 

G.     bc§  ^n^t^f  of  the  book.  bcr  S5u(^cr,  of  the  books. 

D.    bcm  Bn^Cf  {to  or  for)  the  book,      bctt  25u^crtt,  {to  or  for)  the  books. 
A.    t>a§  ^xid}f  the  book.  btc  S3it^er,  the  books. 

(a)  In  like  manner  decline  ba^  ^inb  (bie  f  Inber),  ha^  §au^  (bie  §du* 
fer),  bass  ma^  (bie  @(dfer). 


28  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

64.  Votabulary. 

ba§  Sanb,  hit  Satt'bcr,  land,  coun-  ba§  fiieb,  bic  Sie'bcr,  song. 

try ;    auf  bcm  Satt'be,   2>i  ^/le  ba^  JJclb,  bic  gcl'bcr^  jieZc?. 

country.  fitt'gett,  fang,  gcfun'gctt  (^aBcit), 
bai^  SSort,  i^jord;  bic  293i)r'tcr,  sep-         to  sing. 

arate  words;  bic  SSor'tc,  co?i-  Brautt,  brown. 

nected  words  in  a  sentence.  f^^tt,  beautiful. 

65.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  S)te  gelber  auf  bem  ?anbe  fitib  nid^t  fi^on  im  ©ommer ; 
fie  finb  braun,  2.  §aben  @te  bie  §dufer  auf  bem  8anbe  gefe- 
i)tn?  3.  ©te  Siuber  ^aben  ben  9Kanneru  bie  8ieber  gefungen, 
4.  T)er  (Siguier  ^at  bie  9Sorte  be^  8iebe^  nii^t  gelernt,  5.  ®ie 
gelber  auf  bem  8anbe  tDaren  braun ;  U)ir  f)aben  fie  (tJiem)  gefel)en. 

(b)  '.^^aben  ®ie  bie  gieber  gefungeu?'' 

„Qa,  aber  irir  ^aben  bie  SBorte  nid)t  tierftanben*'' 
„§aben  @ie  bie  gieber  \d)Wtx  gefunben?" 
„9?eiu,  bie  !iBorte  tnaren  niif)t  frf}it)er  ju  lernen,  aber  t^ir  l^aben 
fie  (them)  nic^t  t)erftanben,'' 
„Q6)  ^be  bie  gieber  nid)t  gelernt,  aber  ic^  U)erbe  fie  fingen/' 

(c)  1.  Did  you  find  the  children  in  the  country  ?  2.  The 
fields  in  the  country  get  green  in  summer  and  brown  in  winter. 
3.  The  sentences  were  too  long,  and  the  men  did  not  understand 
the  words.  4.  They  have  been  looking  for  the  men,  but  will 
they  find  them  (fie)  ?  5.  What  has  he  done  with  the  books  ? 
Where  are  they  ? 

(d)  "  Didn't  you  understand  the  words  of  the  song  ?  " 
"No,  I  haven't  learned  the  song;  I  didn't  understand  it." 
"  But  you  have  sung  the  song,  .haven't  you  ?  " 

"  Yes,  I  have  sung  it,  but  I  didn't  learn  it." 

"  The  song  is  very  beautiful,  and  it  is  not  hard  to  learn." 


PERFECT   WITH  SEIN.  29 

LESSON  XII. 
Perfect  with  fcin*    Weak  Nouns. 


Ste  finb  3U  fpdt  gefommen;  cr  ift  fd?on  ^e^an^zn. 
You  have  come  too  late  ;  he  has  already  gone. 


66.  Use  of  fein  as  Auxiliary.  —  Some  verbs  take  feitt  as  the 
auxiliary  for  the  perfect.  They  are  (1)  intransitives  that  indi- 
cate motion  (like  ge'^en,  fommen,  etc.)  or  change  of  condition 
(like  fterben,  to  die,  iDcrben,  etc.),  (2)  feitt  and  bleibett,  to  re- 
main, and  (3)  some  impersonals  (§  251). 

Perfect  Tense  of  ge^ett. 

\^  ]6itt  gegangctt,  /  have  gone,  I  mir  finb  gcgaitgeit^  we  have  gone^ 

went.  we  went. 

im  bift  gcgattgctt,  thou  hast  gone.  i^v  fcib  gcgangcn,  you  have  gone. 

tXf  fie,  c§  ift  gcgattgctt,  he,  she,  it  fie  finb  gegangen,  they  have  gone. 

has  gone. 

(a)  In  like  manner  conjugate  id}  bin  nid^t  gcfotttttten,  id}  bin  ba  gemefcn, 
tc^  bin  getrorbcn. 

67.  The  Fourth  Class  of  Nouns,  commonly  called  the  Weak 
Declension,  contains  masculines  and  feminines.  The  mascu- 
lines form  all  cases,  singular  and  plural,  by  adding  *tt  or  ^tn  to 
the  nominative  singular.  Feminines,  of  course,  do  not  change 
in  the  singular ;  in  the  plural  they  add  ^(e)tt. 

The  fourth  class  includes  : 

(1)  Most  masculines  ending  in  ?e  and  about  twenty  masculine 
monosyllables  which  used  to  end  in  ^e  (§elb,  9?arr,  etc.). 

(2)  Foreign  masculines  with  the  accent  on  the  last  syllable 
(©tubettf,  ^f)otograpVr  e^^.). 


30 


ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 


(3)  Most  feminines  of  more  than  one  syllable,  and  those  of 
one  syllable  not  in  Class  II. 


68. 


Weak  Declension  of  Nouns.     Fourth  Class. 


Masculine. 


Singular, 

N.  •  htv  ^nabCf  the  boy. 

G.  t>t§  ^nahtttf  the  boy's. 

D.  htm  ^nahtrtf  {to  or  for)  the  boy. 

A.  bctt  ^nahtrtf  the  boy. 


Plural. 


bte  ^naBctt,  the  boys. 
betr  ^nabctt,  the  boys'. 
ben  ^nahtxXf  {to  or  for)  the 
hit  ^xtahtn,  the  boys. 


Feminine. 


N.  btc  ^vaxXf  the  woman. 

G.  bet  i^vaxXf  the  woman's. 

D.  bcr  ^xaxt,  (to  or  for)  the  woman. 

A.  bie  ^xaxXf  the  woman. 


btc  '^xaMtn,  the  women. 

ber  %xa\XtXif  the  women's. 

ben  ^rauen,  {to  or  for)  the  women. 

btc  ^xaxitttf  the  women. 


69.  The  Imperative  in  formal  address,  is  like  the  indicative 
inverted.  (For  a  full  treatment,  see  §§  200  and  201.)  An  ex- 
clamation mark  usually  follows  a  German  command. 

Bead  the  sentence.     Scf Ctt  8tc  bctt  Sa^ ! 

Write  the  exercise.    (Bd^xtihtxx  <Bit  btc  5Iuf gabc ! 

(a)  German  uses  the  expression  (idt))  bitte,  /  beg  {of  you)  for  the 
English  {if  you)  please. 


70. 


Vocabulary. 


bcr  ^txXf  ht^  ^txxrXf  bic  ^cr'rcit,  fonj'tttctt,  fatit,  gcfom'tttcit  (fctit), 

gentleman  ;  sir  ;  Mr.  to  come. 

bcr    ^tta'bc,    bo^    ^ttabctt,    bic  gc^ctt,  gtitg,  gcgattgctt  (fciit),  to 

^ttabcit,    boy.  go. 

btc  fjrau,  bic  ^xaw'txif  woman ;  ftcrbctt,  ftarb,  gcftorbctt  (fcitt)^  cr 

wife  ;  Mrs.  ftirbt,  to  die. 

bic  ^a'tttc,  bic  ^atttctt,  lady.  na^  ^aufc,  {to)  home. 


PERFECT  WITH  SEIN.  31 

71 .  Exercise. 

(a)  1. '  :93ttte,  !ommen  ©te  na(^  ©aufe,  unb  fd^retben  @te  bte 
@a^e  be^  Stiaben!  2.  ©er  §err  ift  gegangen,  aber  bte  Same 
tft  gefommen.  3.  ®te  grau  be^  §errn  ift  geftorben.  4.  SBo 
finb  @ie  geU)ej'en;  finb  ©te  nai^  §au[e  gegangen?  5.  SBa^ 
tun  ©ie?    33ttte,  geben  @ie  bem  §errn  ba^  Su(^  be^  ^naben! 

(^)  ff-S'ft  ber  tnabe  be^  germ  in  ber  ©(^ule  getrefen?'' 
,,9letn,  er  ift  na(^  §aufe  gegangen/' 
„3lber  n^arum  ift  er  nic^t  gefommen?'' 
„J)er  3Sater  be^  Snaben  ift  geftorben." 
,,®e^en  @ie  na(^  §anfe  nnb  fagen  ©ie,  er  ift  niif)t  ^ier 
getnefen!" 

(c)  1.  Please  give  the  boy  the  pens  and  the  ladies  the 
flowers.         2.   The  wife   of  the  gentleman   has   gone   home. 

3.  When  did  the  women  come,  and  why  did  they  go  home  ? 

4.  Come,  read  the  exercise  and  write  the  sentences:        5.   Did 
you  go  home,  or  did  you  come  with  the  gentlemen  ? 

(d)  "  Where  have  you  been  ?     Did  you  go  home  ?  '^ 
"  No,  I  did  not  go  home." 

"  But  you  have  not  been  at  school ! " 

"  I  have  just  (eben)  come." 

"  Why  did  you  come  ?     Why  didn't  you  go  home  ?  " 


D  fanfter,  fitter  §auc^ ! 
©c^on  iDedeft  bn  tDieber 
2Wir  grli^Iing^Iieber ; 
53alb  blit^en  bte  SSeitc^en  and). 


32  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

LESSON  XIII. 
Past  Perfect  Tense.    Mixed  Nouns. 


VOic  lange  finb  Stc  fd?on  l|tcr? 
How  long'  have  you  been  here? 


72.  Formation  of  the  Past  Perfect  Tense.  —  The  past  perfect 
is  formed  as  in  English :  l^atte  or  \0(\X  is  the  auxiliary  used. 
See  §§  58  and  m. 

Conjugation  of  the  Past  Perfect     Conjugation  of  the  Past  Perfect 
with  ^atte.  with  tt)ar. 

\^  l^atte  gcloBt,  /  had  praised.  \^  tnar  gcgangctt,  /  had  gone. 

btt  l^attcft  %tU^if  thou  hadst praised,  tm  tuarft  gcgangen,  thou  hadst  gone. 

tXf  fie,  t§  f^aitt  gcloBt,  he,  she,  it,  er,  fie,  e^  ttiar  gegangen,  he,  she,  it 

had  praised.  had  gone. 

Xoxx  ^atitn  ge(oBt,  we  had  praised.        toir  toaxtn  gegaugen,  we  had  gone. 
i^r  ^aiiti  geloBt,  you  had  praised.       t^r  toaxi  gegangen,  you  had  gone, 
fie  l^attett  geloBt,  they  had  praised.       fie  maren  gegattgen,  they  had  gone. 

(a)  In  like  manner  conjugate  id)  ^atte  e8  gefel^en,  i(^  tDar  ba  gcttJcfcn, 
td^  ^attc  eg  ge^abt,  id)  tt)ar  ntd^t  gefommcn,  id)  ^atte  ntd^t  gefprod^en,  id^  njar 
alt  gctDorben,  id}  Ijatte  e^  t)crftanben. 

73.  German  Substitutes  for  English  Perfect  and  Past  Perfect.  — 
When  the  English  perfect  denotes  what  has  been  and  still  is, 
German  uses  the  present  with  fc^on,  already. 

Have  you  been  here  long?    8ittb  <Bic  fri)Ott  lattge  ^ier? 

^010  long  have  you  studied  German  9  293ie  (attge  lemen  8ie  fd^ott  ^eutfci^? 

(a)  Similarly  when  the  English  past  perfect  denotes  what 
had  been  and  still  was,  German  uses  the  past  with  f  d)on. 


PAST  PERFECT  TENSE. 


33 


Had  you  been  there  long  ?    SSarctt  8ic  f^Ott  langc  ba? 

How  long  had  you  studied  German  f  333ic  lattQC  (ctttteit  @ic  fri^Ott  ^CUtfli^? 

iVb^e.  If  the  question,  How  long  have  {had)  you  studied  German 
should  be  translated,  2Bie  lange  ^aben  (fatten)  ®lc  2)eut|(^  gelernt,  it 
would  imply  that  you  have  (had)  stopped  studying  German  at  the  time 
of  the  question. 

74.  The  Mixed  Declension.  —  A  few  masculines  and  neuters 
are  declined  strong  in  the  singular  and  weak  in  the  plural 
(fifth  class).  Hence  they  are  said  to  belong  to  the  Mixed  De- 
clension. 


75. 


The  Mixed  Declension.     Fifth  Class. 


Masculine. 


Singular. 

N.  ber  ^imif  the  state. 

G.  iiei^  ^iaatt^f  of  the  state. 

D.  bem  'Bim%  (to)  the  state. 

A.  bctt  (Btaatf  the  state. 


Neuter. 


N.  \^a§  3lttgc,  the  eye. 

G.  bc§  5(ugca,  of  the  eye. 

T>.  bcm  5(ugC,  (to  or  for)  the  eye. 

A.  ba^  5(tt9C,  the  eye. 


Plural. 

hit  ^iaattttf  the  states. 
bet  (Biaattrtf  of  the  states. 
bctt  ^taattrtf  (to)  the  states. 
btc  'Btaaitttf  the  states. 


bic  ^lugcn,  the  eyes. 
bcr  5(ttgcn,  of  the  eyes. 
bCtt  5lttgctt^  (to  or  for)  the  e 
bte  5(ttgctt,  the  eyes. 


76. 


Vocabulary. 


bcr  ^ortt,  ht§  ^ovn^f  bic  ^or'ntn, 

thorn. 
bcr  8cc,  bC)^   Scc;^,   bic   Sc'cn, 

lake. 
bcr  So^n,  bic  (Sii^'itc,  son. 
bO)§  S3ctt,  bc^  Setter,  btc  S3ct'tcn, 

bed ;  ju  23ctt,  «o  bed. 


\sa^  @n'bc,  bc^  @ttbC)§,  btc  ©nbctt^ 

end. 
(ait'tjc,  adv.,  long^  a  long  time. 
fd^on,  already^ 
ttiiCbicF?   how  much  ?     ttJtCbtC'tc? 

how  many  f 
jttict,  two. 


34  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

77.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  ®er  @o^n  be^  §errn  trar  ni(^t  p  ©ett  gegangen, 
2,  fatten  (gte  bie  ©omen  ber  9iofe  ni(^t  gefe^en?  3.  SBir 
Ijatttn  bem  (So^ne  be^  §errn  bte  jmet  enben  be^  @ee^  gejeigt. 
4«  aBtet)teIe  3Iugen  ^aben  tt)ir  ?  5,  3=(^  (erne  bie  ®a^e  f i^on 
lange  ;  t(^  ge{)e  ju  Sett, 

(6)  ^SBte  tange  ternen  @te  ft^on  3)eut[d^?'' 
„-3(^  feme  e^  [d^on  lange,  aber  ii}  tjerfte^e  e^  nid^t." 
„®tnb  ®te  fd^on  tange  ^ter  in  ber  ©c^nle  ?" 
,;9?ein,  nid^t  fef)r  lange," 
„Qi}  ^atte  (Ste  ntt^t  gefe^en,'' 

(c)  1.  Had  you  seen  the  thorns  of  the  flowers  in  the  garden? 
2.  The  two  sons  of  the  gentleman  had  grown  (become)  very- 
large.  3.  The  ends  of  the  lakes  had  been  very  beautiful  in 
summer.  4.  How  many  books  and  pens  have  we  ?  5.  That 
is  not  the  end  of  the  exercise,  but  I  am  going  to  bed. 

(d)  "  How  long  have  you  been  here  at  school  ?  " 

"I  have  been  here  one  (einen)  summer  and  one  (etnen) 
winter." 

"  Have  you  already  studied  German  ?  " 

"  No,  I  have  not  studied  German,  but  I  have  understood  it  a 
long  time." 

'^  That  is  good !     Please  read  the  sentences." 

3tret  !j)inge  tern'  gebnibig  tragen  : 
©ein  eigen  8eib,  ber  anbern  Slagen. 


FUTURE  PERFECT,  36 

LESSON  XIV. 
Future  Perfect.    Gender. 


(£tn  Cag  ift  nidqt  bem  anbcrcn  gletd?.  — @oet^e» 
One  day  is  not  like  another.  —  Goethe. 


78.  The  Future  Perfect  is  formed  by  the  future  of  the  auxil- 
iary (idj  tnerbe  ^aben,  etc.)  and  the  past  participle ;  the  infini- 
tive of  the  auxiliary  (^aben  or  fetu)  follows  the  past  participle. 

^d)  njcrbe  gelobt  ^abciu    I  shall  have  praised. 
^►(^  tticrbc  gegangctt  fcitt.    I  shall  have  gone, 
(a)   As  in  English,  the  German  future  perfect  is  seldom  used. 

79.  Rules  of  Gender.  —  There  are  no  very  helpful  rules  of 
gender.  Below  are  given  those  which  have  fewest  exceptions. 
These  rules  fall  into  two  classes:  those  that  determine  the 
gender  by  meaning,  and  those  that  determine  it  by  ending. 

(a)  Nouns  that  determine  the  gender  by  their  meaning:  — 

1.  Names  of  males,  days,  months,  and  seasons  are  mas- 
culine. 

bcr  Wlann,  the  man;  bcr  Sonu'tag,   Sunday;  bcr  Wlai,    May;  ber 
^OtnmtVf  summer. 

2.  Names    of    females    and    abstract    nouns    are    mostly 
feminine. 

hit  ^vaUf  the  woman ;  bic  fjrcttbc,  joy ;  bic  Stebe,  love. 

3.  Names  of  cities  or  countries  and  words  not  nouns  but 
used  as  such  are  usually  neuter. 

ha^  fti^iine  ^tviin',  beautiful  Berlin;  ^>a§  trettC  ^cutft^'Ianb,  loyal  Ger- 
many;  H^  Scbcn,  life  (Icben,  to  live). 


36  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

(6)  Nouns  that  determine  the  gender  by  their  ending:  — 

1.  Kouns  having  the  ending  4i),  -tg,  'ting,  or  ?er  express- 
ing agency,  are  masculine.  Those  in  *er  belong  to  Class  I, 
those  in  A6)^  -tg,  or  4ing  to  Class  II. 

ber  Xtp^pi^f   the  carpet;   htv  ^o'tttg,  the  king;   bcr  3iiing'(tng,   the 
young  man ;  tier  Scl^rcr,  the  teacher. 

2.  Nouns  having  the  ending  ?et,  '{)eit,  -feit,  4n,  'f(^aft,  or 
?ung,  and  most  names  of  things  ending  in  :=e,  are  feminine. 
These  are  all  weak  (Class  IV). 

bie  ^pnigtn,  the  queen;  btc  ^off'mtng,  hope;  bie  JJrcuttb'fri^aft,  friend- 
ship ;  btc  %xt\'^txtf  freedom  ;  tsxt  S3htmc,  flower. 

3.  Nouns  ending  in  the  diminutive  suffixes,  ^i^tu  or  4ein, 
are  neuter.     These  belong  to  Class  I. 

^a^  Wi^^tMf  the  girl ;  \^a^  ^rautcitt,  the  young  lady. 

80.  Vocabulary. 

ber  grcttttb,  btc  ^rcmt'bc,  friend.  tsa^  ^o^r,  bic  ^al^'rc,  year. 

bcr  Za^f  btc  Xa'gc,  day.  tiicr,  four. 

bcr  9Jl5'nat^  bic  SHottatc,  month.  ftc'bcn,  seven. 

btc  SBo'^C,  bic  SBo^Ctt,  t^eeA;.  S^iitf,  ^i^eZve. 

81.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  3Btr  trerben  bie  greutibe  be^  Snaben  gefel^en  ^aben. 
2.  !j)er  @o^n  ber  l^atne  ift  jtDbtf  ^a^re  alt,  unb  bie  Sloc^ter  be^ 
§errn  ift  fieben  ^(x^xt  ait  3.  J)er  greunb  be^  8ef)rer^  ^at 
bem  Snaben  bie  9tofen  in  bent  ©arten  ge^eigt.  4.  !j)ie  3lnf' 
gaben  be^  ©d^itler^  maren  fe^r  lang  getDefen,  abet  bie  @a^e  [inb 
nid)t  \i)Xotx.  5.  ©ie  t^ier  §erren  fprei^en  fc^on  lange  J)eutf(^, 
aber  fie  fd^retben  e^  nt(f)t. 

W  ff@agen  @te,  bitte,  tDteuiete  2Borf|en  lernen  @ie  f^on 
Deutf^?'' 


FUTURE  PERFECT.  37 

„3=(i)  (erne  fi^on  5tt)ei  SJionate  ©eutfd^,  ober  fieben  SBoc^en 
unb  t)ter  JTage," 
„3Btet)tete  SJionate  l^at  etti  -3=af)r?'' 

„@ut!  33itte,  fd^reiben  ©te  bte  (gci^e  ber  3lufgabe!" 

(c)  1.  The  boy's  friends  will  have  studied  German.  2.  The 
days  had  been  wet  and  cold,  but  the  water  of  the  lake  was 
warm.  3.  The  boy  had  a  pen  and  a  book ;  he  was  writing 
the  four  sentences,  wasn't  he  ?  4.  We  have  studied  the 
exercise;  we  shall  write  the  twelve  sentences.  5.  A  week 
has  seven  days ;  how  many  months  has  a  year  ? 

(d)  ^'  How  many  days  has  a  week  ?  " 
"  A  week  has  seven  days.'^ 

"  And  how  many  weeks  has  a  month  ?  " 
"  A  month  has  four  weeks,  and  a  year  has  twelve  months.'' 
"Good!     You    have    studied    German;    please   write    the 
exercise." 


• 
©tnget  leife,  teife,  teife, 
©ingt  eitt  pfternb  SBtegentteb ! 
2Son  bem  3JJonbe  lernt  bie  SBeife, 
©er  [o  fttti  am  §immel  jie^t. 

®tngt  etn  8teb  fo  fit^  geltnbe, 
9Bie  bie  Quetten  auf  ben  ^iefeln, 
SBte  bte  53tenen  um  bie  ginbe 
©urnmen,  murmein,  fliiftern,  rtefeln. 

—  ©tcntcn^  33rcntano. 


38 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 


LESSON  XV. 
Review. 


Vftan  mug  etmas  fein,  um  etmas  3U  madden.  —  ©oeti^e. 

One  must  be  something  in  order  to  do  {make)  something.  —  Goethe. 


82. 

Outline  of  Declensions 

Class. 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

Plural. 

Take  Umlaut. 

1st  Strong 

tif  tWf  cr 

tif  zrtf  tXf 
(f|Ctt,  (citt 

add 
nothing 

sometimes 

2d  strong 

mono- 
syllables 

mono- 
syllables 

mono- 
syllables 

add  c 

usually 

iWVX  and 

iMVX  and 

3d  strong 

mono- 
syllables 

none 

mono- 
syllables 

add  cr 

always 

4th  weak 

(e) 

(e) 

none 

tt,  t\x,  nen 

never 

5th  mixed 

few 

none 

few 

tt,  Ctt 

never 

83. 

« 

Singular. 

Strong  Noun  Endings, 

Plural. 

Class  I. 

Class  11. 

Class  III. 

Class  I. 

Class  II. 

Class  III. 

N.       — 

— 

— 

u. 

"C 

"cr  . 

G.      -g 

-t^ 

-e§ 

u. 

H 

HX 

D.      — 

-(e) 

-(e) 

"It 

"Ctt 

"crtt 

A.     .— 

— 

— 

IL 

"t 

"cr 

Note.     The  above  tables  are  not  meant  to  be  complete,  but  just  to  give 
a  graphic  impression  of  the  declensions. 


REVIEW.  39 

84.  Perfect  Tenses. 

Present  Perfect  =  present  of  auxiliary  (^abetl  or  fettt)  + 
past  (also  called  perfect)  participle. 

Past  Perfect  =  past  of  auxiliary  +  past  participle. 
Future  Perfect  =  future  of  auxiliary  -|-  past  participle. 

85.  Table  of  Cases. 

Nom.  Gen.  Dat.  Ace. 

Masc.  ^cr  Srubcr       bc§  Wanm^      gaB  bcm  Se^rcv  ben  Stit^t* 

Fern,    ^ic  Xoc^tcr       bcr  fjrau  gaB  ber  SDIuttcr  bic  ^ofc* 

Neut.    ^a^^ittb         bc§  9)lantt(cin§  gaB  bcia  Sl^lobti^ett  ba^  t(eib. 
little  man 

86.  Infinitive  of  Purpose. -^  The  expression  to,  in  order  to, 
denoting  purpose  in  English,  is  given  in  German  by  um  .  .  . 
gU  with  the  infinitive.     A  comma  precedes  UTU. 

He  came  to  see  the  teacher.     @r  !am,  ttttt  bctt  Sc^rcr  ^n  fc^Ctt* 
We  read  in  order  to  understand.    23Bir  lefctt,  Utti  ^u  tJerftc^Ctt. 

87.  Review  Questions. 

(a)  1.  How  is  the  German  perfect  formed?  2.  What 
verbs  take  !^aben  as  auxiliary,  and  what  take  fettt?  3.  Give 
the  rule  for  the  position  of  the  past  participle. 

(b)  1.  Distinguish  betyreen  the  use  of  the  past  and  the  per- 
fect tenses  in  German.  2.  What  are  the  principal  parts  of  a 
German  verb  ?  Illustrate.  3.  What  nouns  are  included  in 
the  weak  declension  ? 

(c)  1.  How  is  the  formal  imperative  formed?  2.  When 
does  German  use  the  present  and  past  for  the  English  perfect 
and  pluperfect?  3.  Give  the  rules  of  gender  according  to 
meaning,  and  according  to  endings. 


40  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

88.  Review  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  J)ie  i^^eunbe  be^  ^naben  finb  gegangen,  urn  bie  Dtofen 
in  bem  ©arten  gu  fe^en.  2.  ^d)  ^abe  bie  ®taaten  unb  Scinber 
gefe^en.  3.  (Sudden  @ie  bie  geber  unb  ba^  'ipapier,  um  ju 
fc^reiben?  4.  ©itte,  geben  @ie  bem  ^naben  ba^  Su^,  unb 
lefen  @ie  bie  ©ci^e!  5.  SBa^  fatten  bie  ^inber  be^  ge^rer^ 
ntit  ber  Sreibe  getan?  6.  S5ir  tDerben  bem  3Kanne  bie  SKeffer 
jeigen.  7.  9Biet)ieIe  SBod^en  ^at  ein  9Jfonat?  8.  SBann  ^at 
ba^  3)Mb(^en  ba^  ^(eib  gemai^t?  9.  SBerben  bie  2:age  im 
(Sommer  fd^dn  unb  tt)arm  njerben?  10.  !Da^  SBetter  ift  !alt 
unb  na^  gemorben;  bie  tinmen  in  bem  ©arten  finb  geftorben. 

(b)  1.    The  boys  came  to  look  for  the  pens  and  the  paper. 

2.  I   am   studying   German,  in  order   to   read   and  write   it. 

3.  When  did  you  show  the  dress  to  the  girl  ?  4.  The 
weather  got  (use  perf.  tense)  very  warm  in  summer,  and  the 
grass  died.  5.  The  garden  has  been  very  green,  but  it  (er) 
is  getting  brown.  6.  I  went  home  to  show  the  exercise  to 
my  (meiner)  mother.  7.  Please  read  the  sentences  and  write 
the  exercise.  8.  It  has  become  very  warm;  the  children 
have  gone  home.  9.  Please  learn  the  words,  in  order  to 
write  the  sentences  of  the  exercise.  10.  The  days  had  become 
very  hot,  but  the  nights  had  been  cold. 


§eute,  nur  ^eute  bin  id)  fo  f(^5n, 
SO^orgen,  ai}  morgen  mu^  alle^  t)erge^n  ; 

9tur  biefe  ©tunbe  bift  bu  noi}  mein, 
©terben,  ad)  [terben  foil  id)  allein. 


REVIEW.  '    41 

liber  attett  ®i|)feln 

Qn  attett  9BipfeItt 

(S^Jitreft  bu 

^auttt  eittett  ^ani) ; 

!Die  SSoglem  |(^tt)etgett  tttt  SBatbe. 

SBarte  ttur,  balbe 

9?u^eft  bu  au^. 

aBic  ift  bor^  bie  (gtbc  fo  Wonl 

SOBte  ift  bo^  bie  (Srbe  [o  fd^ott,  fo  fc^btt! 
!Da^  n)tffett  bie  3SogeIeitt ; 
@ie  ^ebett  il)r  leii^t  ©efieber 
Uttb  ftttgett  fo  fro^Iid^e  Sieber 
^'tt  bett  blauett  §ittttttel  fjitteitt, 

SBie  ift  bod^  bie  grbe  fo  f(^ott,  fo  f(^i3tt!' 
©a^  iDiffett  bie  glitff  uttb  @eeu  ; 
©ie  tttaleu  iu  ftarettt  ©piegel 
!Die  ©cirten  unb  ©tcibt^  unb  §ugel, 
Unb  bie  SBoIfen,  bie  britber  ge^n. 

Unb  ©anger  unb  3KaIer  n)iffen  e^ 
Unb  Sinber  unb  anbere  8eut'; 
Unb  totf^  nid)t  malt,  ber  fingt  e^, 
Unb  tDer^^  nic^t  fingt,  bent  ftingt  e^ 
Qn  bent  §erjen  Dor  (auter  greub\ 


42  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN, 

LESSON  XVI. 
Prepositions  with  the  Dative  or  Accusative. 


2ln  bcr  Kontge  ^ofcn,  an  ben  Ctfd^en  Der  Hetd^cn  unb  cor  ben 
Ciiren  ber  Perltebten  l^ord^te  man  auf  bie  Did?ter»  —  ©oet^c. 

>!/  kings'  courts,  by  the  tables  of  the  rich,  and  in  front  of  the  doors  of  lovers 
they  harkened  to  the  poets.  —  Goethe. 

89.  Prepositions  with  Dative  or  Accusative.  —  The  preposi- 
tions used  with  either  dative  or  accusative  are  :  an,  auf ,  ^tnter, 
in,  neben,  U6er,  nnter,  t)or,  5n)i[(^en. 

They  take  the  dative  in  answer  to  the  question  where  9  in 
ivhat  place  ?  (lt)o)» 

They  take  the  accusative  in  answer  to  the  question  whither  9 
to  or  into  what  place  f  (tDO'^iu)* 

@r  fag  itt  bem  ^aufe*     Re  sat  in  the  house,     (SSo  fag  cr?) 
©r  lam  in  ba§  ^an§.    He  came  into  the  house.     (So^in  tarn  er?) 
®r  ftanb  in  bcr  §iittc»    He  stood  in  the  hut.     (2Bo  ftanb  er?) 
@r  gittg  in  \^it  ^iittc.    He  went  into  the  hut.     (So^in  ging  er?) 
®r  ging  in  t>cr  ^iittc  auf  nnh  ab.    He  went  back  and  forth  in  the  hut, 
(SBo  ging  er  auf  unb  ah?) 

(a)  Many  prepositions  may  unite  with  the  definite  article  :  am  for  an 
bem;  im  for  in  bem;  tn§  for  In  \)a^;  auf^  for  auf  ha^,  etc. 

90.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  5lrm,  \>it  %x'mt,  arm.  in,  in,  into. 

ha§  ^nit'f  bic  ^nt'c,  knee.  nc'Ben,  beside. 

fit'jcn,   fa|,  gcfcffcn   (f^abcn),  to      Whtx,   over,    above,    across;   fig., 

sit.  about. 

an,  at,  near,  by  (rarely  on).  tttt'ter,  binder;  among. 

auf,  on,  upon,  onto.  t)OVf  before,  in  front  of. 

^ill'tcr,  behind.  ^tt>i'\^cn,  between. 


PREPOSITIONS    IVITH  TWO   CASES.  43 

91.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  @r  fa^  an  bem  ^ufte  auf  etnem  ©tu^Ie.  2.  SBtr 
finb  itber  bie  gelber  in  bie  ©tabt  gegangen,  3.  gr  ^atte  ba^ 
9J?ab(^en  tm  3lrme  nnb  ben  Snaben  auf  bem  Snie*  4.  Sitte, 
fommen  ®te  in  ba^  §au^  unb  f^reiben  @ie  bie  ®a^e  in  ba^ 
SSVii)l  5.  SBo  fifeen  ®ie?  (Answer  07i,  at,  beside,  between, 
behind,  and  in  front  o/what  or  whom.) 

(b)  ,,®ing  ber  ^nabe  jmifi^en  bie  Slumen  in  bem  Oarten?'' 
„9^ein,  er  tDar  nid^t  in  bem  ®arten;  er  ift  in  bie  Stabt 

gegangen-" 
„2Birb  er  in  bie  ®(^ule  !ommen?'' 
„Qa,  er  fommt  in  bie  ©(^ute.    3Bo  fi^t  er  ^ier?'' 
„gr  fi^t  Winter  einem  ^naben  unb  t)or  einem  ^naben,  aber 

jnjifc^en  itvd  Wdhdjtn." 

(c)  1.  He  sat  beside  the  boy,  in  order  to  see  the  sentences 
in  the  book.       2.    Did  you  go  into  the  city  to  look  for  a  pen  ? 

3.  The  ink  was  among  the  books  on  a  chair  beside  the  table. 

4.  The  man  w^as  sitting  beside  the  desk  with  two  books  in 
his  (ben)  arms  and  a  paper  on  his  (bem)  knee.  5.  "We  went 
across  the  garden  in  front  of  the  house  to  go  into  the  city. 

(d)  "You  were  sitting  in  the  garden;  why  did  you  go  into 
the  house  ?  " 

"  I  went  into  the  house  to  look  for  a  paper  among  the  books." 
"  Did  you  find  the  paper  in  the  house  ?  " 
"  Yes,  it  was  on  a  chair  by  the  desk." 

*^  And  you  found  it  on  the  chair  and  came  here  to  (in  bie) 
school,  didn't  you  ?  " 


44  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

LESSON  XVII. 
Personal  Pronouns.    Position  of  Objects. 


XPer  tft  ba? 

3d?  bin  es. 

Sinb  Sie  es 

?        (£r  ift  es. 

Who  is  there  F 
92. 

/f  is  I. 

/5  /?  I'OM  ? 

It  is  he. 

Personal  Pronouns. 

First  Person. 

Second  Person. 

N. 

id),  7. 

ttiir,  we. 

btt,  iJ/iO?f. 

xfjx,  Sie,  you. 

G. 

mcittcr,  of  me. 

ttttfcr,  o/ws. 

bcittCt,  of  thee. 

euer,  3^rcr,  o/?/om. 

D. 

ttttr,  to  me. 

Utti§,  ^0  us. 

bit,  ^0  ^/lee. 

euc^,  S^tteu,  to  you. 

A. 

mi^,  me. 

mi^f  us. 

bi(^,  «/iee. 

tnd^f  @ie,  you. 

Third  Person. 

N. 

tVf  he. 

fir,  she. 

C^,  if. 

fie,  ^ey. 

G. 

feittcr,  of  him. 

\%XtXf  of  her. 

fcitter,  of  it. 

i^rer,  of  them. 

D. 

t^m,  to  him. 

i^Xf  to  her. 

x^vXf  to  it. 

xf^ntrtf  to  them. 

A. 

t^n,  him. 

fic,  her. 

t^,  it. 

fie,  f/iem. 

93.  Agreement  of  Pronouns.  —  In  German,  a  personal  pronoun 
of  the  third  person  must  agree  with  its  antecedent  in  gender 
as  well  as  in  person  and  number. 

^^  f^abt  bie  ^inmt  nidft  gefe^ett;  fie  ttiar  ^u  flein.  /  did  not  see  the 
flower  ;  it  was  too  small. 

(Sffeit  Sie  ben  ^ifd^  nid^t;  er  ift  nxd^t  ^nt   Do  not  eat  the  fish ;  it  isn't  good. 

Se^en  Sic  \>a^  ^av^  ?  (§:§  ge^iJrt  mir*  Do  you  see  the  house  f  It  he- 
longs  to  me. 

94.  The  Position  of  Objects  in  German  is  just  like  English, 
(a)  A  personal  pronoun,  whether  the  direct  or  the  indirect 

object,  stands  right  after  the  simple  verb  or  auxiliary. 

®r  gab  e§  bent  fie^rer*    He  gave  it  to  the  teacher. 

@r  ^ai  mix  txxxtxx  SBrief  gefri^rieben.    He  has  written  me  a  letter. 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS,  45 

(b)  If  both  direct  and  indirect  objects  are  personal  pronouns, 
the  accusative  comes  first. 

^d)  ^aht  t§  i^m  ge^cigt     I  have  shown  it  to  him. 

(c)  If  both  objects  are  nouns,  the  indirect  object  (dative) 
usually  comes  before  the  direct  (accusative) (see  §  45). 

@r  gab  bcm  Scorer  tin  ^nti}.    He  gave  the  teacher  a  hook. 

95.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  Soil,  bie  SBal^lc,  ball.  Ic'gen,  (cgtc,  gctcrjt'  (^aBctt),  to 

bcr  @c^tt^,  bic  8ti^tt'^c,  s^oe.  lay,  laid,  laid. 

hit  23attf,  bic  S3att'!c,  &e?ic/i.  lic'gcn,  lag,  gcle'gctt  (^aben),  to  lie, 

bic  ^laf^fe,  bic  ^laffcit,  class,  lay,  lain. 

H§  S3oot,  tilt  ^oo'ttf  boat.  fet'scn,  fc^te,  gcfc^f  (^aben),  «o 

t>a^  St^iff,  btc  Sr^if'fc,  s/iip.  set. 

96.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  ©er  (S(^u^  ift  Wer;  i^  ^be  x\}n  unter  bem  ®ette 
gefunben*  2.  ©te  ^t  ben  ©all  auf  ben  2^ifd)  gelegt;  er  tag 
auf  einem  ®tn^Ie.  3.  ©ie  3Kdnner  ^ben  bte  S3anfe  in  ba^ 
@(^iff  gefe^t  nnb  bie  ©tix^Ie  in  ein  ^oot  gelegt.  4.  ®te 
©chiller  ber  Staffe  fni^en  ben  53aII;  er  Itegt  nnter  etner  S3anf, 
ober  neben  bem  "^nttt.  5.  SBtr  ftnb  in  ein  Soot  gegangen, 
urn  in  ba^  @(^tff  jn  fontmen. 

(6)  „§at  ba^  tinb  ^f^nen  einen  53att  gegeben?    Qd)  fe^e  i^n 
ntd^t.'' 
„3fa,  er  ift  ^ier;  ic^  ^be  i^n  anf  bie  SSant  gelegt." 
„Qd}  finbe  i^n  mi)t;  er  liegt  ni(^t  anf  ber  -93ant'' 
„@r  tiegt  nnter  bent  "^Japier;  fe^en  ®te?" 
„Qa,  er  ift  ^ier.    35anfe  fe^r." 

(c)  1.  The  man  showed  (use  perf.  tense)  the  ball  to  the 
class,  but  he  gave  it  (§  93)  to  me.       2.   The  boy  found  a  shoe 


46  ELEMENTS    OF  GERMAN. 

in  the  garden  and  laid  it  on  a  bench.  3.  We  went  into  two 
boats  in  order  to  be  beside  the  ship.  4.  The  father  laid  the 
child  on  the  bench,  but  the  child  did  not  lie  on  the  bench. 
5.  Where  is  the  ball  ?  I  do  not  see  it.  It  is  lying  on  the 
table. 

(d)  "  I  do  not  find  the  shoe.     Did  you  set  it  under  the  bed  ?  " 
"  No,  I  laid  it  on  the  bench.     It  is  lying  beside  the  ball." 
"  Why  didn't  you  show  it  to  me  ? '' 

"  It  was  not  hard  to  see  it.     I  did  not  come  into  the  house 
to  give  it  to  you." 

LESSON  XVIII. 
Prepositions  with  the  Dative.     Inverted  Order. 


€tle  mit  IDctle.  —  2)eutfrf;e^  @^nc^h)ort 

The  more  haste  the  less  speed  (lit.  haste  with  delay). 


97.  Prepositions  with  Dative.  —  The  commonest  prepositions 
with  the  dative  are  au^,  bet,  mit,  narf),  feit,  t»on,  ju* 

5ttt!^  bcm  ^aufe,  out  of  the  house. 
SBci  xxn^f  vnth  us,  at  our  house, 
^a^  bcr  6tat»t,  to  the  city. 

98.  When  referring  to  inanimate  objects  ba(r)*  is  generally 
used  with  prepositions  instead  of  a  personal  pronoun.  Com- 
pare the  English  thereupon^  therewith. 

On  it,  out  of  it,  in  it.    "^arattf,  baraxt-g,  bariit* 
With  it,  beside  it,  from  it.     ^dVXXi,  battcBctt,  baHOtt* 

99.  Inverted  Order.  —  In  the  inverted  order  the  subject 
stands  directly  after  the  simple  verb  or  auxiliary. 


PREPOSITIONS    WITH   THE  DATIVE.  47 

(a)  This  order  is  used,  as  in  English  (1)  in  direct  questions 
whose  subject  is  not  an  interrogative  pronoun,  and  (2)  in  com- 
mands where  the  form  with  @te  is  used. 

Do  you  speak  German  9    S^rc^Ctt  8ic  ^CUtf(i^  ? 
When  will  he  come  9    SBattit  ttiirb  cr  fommen  ? 
Give  me  the  book.    Q^chtn  ®ic  mix  ba^  S3uc^  ! 

(6)  The  inverted  order  is  used  in  declarative  sentences,  when 
they  are  introduced  by  some  element  other  than  the  subject. 

Now  I  am  ready,    ^t^t  hin  tt^  fctttg. 

In  summer  it  is  beautiful,     ^m  Sommcr  ift  e^  fc^iitt. 

Fm  looking  for  a  pen,  not  for  ink.     ^ittC  fjcbcr  flt^C  \^f  m6)i  %\Xitt. 

100.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  Wbn'ia^,  Monday.  avi^f  out  of 

btc  ^ViVitXf  butter.  \>t\f  near ;   at  the  house  of  (with 

bic  Sm>'^C,  btc  Stt^pCtt,  soup.  persons). 

ba§  Srot,  bte  Sro'te,  bread.  mit,  with. 

\s(i^  %\t\S6),  bic  ^iti'\^tf  meat.  na^,  after;  to  (a  place). 

cffctt,    a^,   ficgcffctt   (^aBcn),  cr      \txif  since ;  for. 

,    x^if  to  eat.  tJOtt,  from.,  of;   by  (to  denote  the 

tci'ti^ett,  rcif^tc,  gerciri^t  (ftaBcn),  «o  agent). 

^anc?,  pass  (as  at  table).  gu,  to  (a  person). 

101.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  Set  bem  getter  f)aben  tDtr  gfetf(^,  ©rot  unb  S3utter 
gegeffen.  2.  @ett  3Jiontag  ^aben  bte  ^naben  :93rot  unb  gutter 
mit  ber  ©u|3))e  gegeffen.  3.  T)te  ©i^itler  finb  mit  bett  2JJdb= 
d^en  au^  bem  §aufe  ju  bem  Setter  gegangen.  4.  ^(^  f)abe 
bat)on  gefefen ;  voai  l^abett  (Sie  bamtt  getan?  5.  :93itte,  ret^ 
d^en  @te  bem  ^^naben  bie  Sutter  ;  fie  ift  auf  bem  %\\6)t. 

ip)  „Sitte,  retc^en  @ie  mtr  ba^  gletfd^!'' 
„(Sffen  @ie  «rot  unb  Sutter  mit  bem  gleif(^?" 


48  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

„Qa,  naii)  ber  ©uppe  effe  id)  gfeifc^  mit  33rot  unb  ©utter/' 
„^tx  nn^  effen  wix  Srot  unb  Sutter  narf)  bem  gletfrf)," 
„3<ft  ba^  ma^r?    ©itte,  reii^en  @ie  mir  ba^  :33rot  mit  ber 
Sutter!" 

(c)  1.  I  passed  the  boy  the  butter,  and  beside  it  he  laid  the 
bread.  2.  At  our  house  we  eat  meat  after  the  soup.  3.  At 
the  teacher's  (house)  he  passed  us  the  bread  and  the  butter 
with  the  meat.  4.  Since  Monday  I  have  not  gone  home  from 
school  with  the  girls.  5.  What  have  you  done  with  it  ? 
I  shall  not  speak  of  it. 

(d)  "  Please  pass  me  the  bread  and  the  butter." 

"  At  our  house  we  don't  eat  butter  with  the  soup." 

"  Here  I  eat  bread  with  the  soup  and  bread  and  butter  with 

the  meat." 

"  Please  pass  me  the  meat.     I  eat  meat  after  the  soup  and 

bread  and  butter  with  it." 


LESSON  XIX. 
Prepositions  with  the  Accusative.    Possessives. 


3d?  banfe  3l^nen,  (id?)  ^anh  fet^r,  (id?)  banfe  fd?on,  beften  Danf, 
thanks.— -'Bxtie,  bitte  fel^r,  bitte  fd?on, you  are  welcome,  lit.  (/)  beg  {you  mi 
to  mention  it), 

102.  Prepositions  with  Accusative.  —  The  prepositions  used 
with  the  accusative  are  bi^,  burc^,  fUr,  gegeu,  o^ue,  urn,  tt)iber. 

O^ttC  hid),  without  you. 
^iir  ba^  ^inb,  for  the  child. 
f       ^urr^  ben  Garten,  through  the  garden. 


PBEPOSITIONS   WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 


49 


103.   The  Possessive  Adjectives  are  formed  from  the  genitive 
of  the  personal  pronouns,  as  follows  :  — 

(i^)  mctn,  my.  (ftc)  t^r,  her.  (t^r)  tnttf  your. 

(tn)  htxttf  thy.  (t^)  fcin,  Us.  (ftc)  i^r,  their. 

(er)  fcin,  his.  (toxx)  unfcr,  our.         (Sic)  3^r,  your, 

(a)  The  possessives  and  the  negative  !ein,    not   a,   wo,   are  called 
"citi"  words,  because  they,  are  declined  in  the  singular  like  tin* 


104 

:.                   Declension  of  the  Possessives 

Singular. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

N. 

ntcttt  Srubcr 

ntctnc  S5anf 

ntcin  ^n^ 

G. 

mtint^  S3rttt>cr§ 

ntcincr  S5anf 

mtxnt§  ^n^t^ 

D. 

tttcincm  Snibcr 

ntcincr  Sanf 

ntcincm  Snti^c 

A. 

tttcittcn  S3ntbcr 

ntctnc  SBanf 

Plural. 

ntcin  ^n^ 

N. 

mcittc  23ritbcr 

Jttcinc  Sanfc 

ntcinc  M^tx 

G. 

ntcittcr  S3riibcr 

ntcincr  Sanfc 

ntcincr  Sitc^cr 

D. 

mcittcn  Sritbcrn 

ntcincn  ^an!cn 

ntcincn  ^^itt^crn 

A. 

ntctnc  S5rubcr 

ntcinc  S3an!c 

ntcinc  Siir^cr 

(a)  In  like  manner  decline  betn  §ut,  fettte  Xodjttx,  i^r  §aug,  eure  @tabt, 
unfere  iBIumc,  3^r  ^leib,  fein  ©arteiu 

(6)  Note  that  the  endings  are  the  same  for  all  genders  in  the  plural, 
and  that  cucr  usually  drops  its  second  e  for  euphony  when  it  has  an  end- 
ing ;  eucr,  cure,  eucr ;  eure§,  eurcr,  cure«,  etc.  Unfer  may  do  the  same : 
unfer,  unjrc,  unfer ;  unfrc^,  unfrer,  unfrcS,  etc. 

105.  Agreement  of  Possessives.  —  A  possessive  adjective  must 
agree  in  stem  with  its  antecedent ;  in  ending,  with  its  noun. 

I  have  my  book.    3»t^  ^abc  mcin  S5n^» 

I  have  my  hooks,    ^d)  ^aBc  ntcinc  SBiid^cr, 

We  have  our  book.    3Sir  ffahtn  nnfcr  ^n^. 

The  rose  has  its  thorns,    ^ic  S^Jufc  \)ai  i^rc  "^orncn* 

The  girl  sees  her  mother,     ^a^  WaH^^tXX  fic^t  fciwc  3RnttCt, 


50  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

106.  Use  of  !etn»  —  German  uses  feitt  to  express  no,  not  any, 
not  a,  unless  it  is  meant  to  be  very  emphatic.  9^td^t  ein  means 
not  one, 

I  haven't  any  bread.     3ri^  ^abc  feitt  SBrot 

He  didn't  say  a  word.     @r  fagtc  fcitt  3Bort» 

Not  one  word  did  he  speak.    Wi^t  tin  ^oxi  fjjrari^  cr» 

107.  Vocabulary. 

iJCr  SJricf,  hit  23rtc'fc,  letter.  with  dative,  to  thank;  for,  fiir; 

bcr  ^ttttb,  bic  ^tttt'be,  dog.  (t^)  hanltf  thank  you. 

hit  ^nf^f  hit  ^Wf^tf  cow.  ttittf  no,  not  a,  not  any,  none. 

hit  XnVf  hit  XWttttf  door.  hmtt^,  through. 

Ui'ttrtf  hatf  qtht'itn  (t^ahtn),   to  ^nx,  for. 

beg,  ask;  for,  uttt;  btttc,  please;  ^e'gett,  against. 

you're  welcome.  U^'ttC,  without. 

batt'fctt,  hanfitf  gcbattft  (^abctt),  nniffor;  around. 

108.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  (Ste  gtbt  t^rem  §unbe  [ein  i^Ietf^ ;  t^  [ef)e  t^n  buri^ 
bte  2:ur.  2.  Qn  bem  gelbe  ftnbet  ber  9}?ann  feitt  ®ra§  fitr 
fettte  Sit^e ;  o^tte  ®ra^  tt)erbett  bie  Slt^e  fterbett,  3.  SBtr  fittb 
bur^  ^'^rett  Oartett  uttb  uttt  uttfer  §au^  gegattgett,  uttt  unfren 
§unb  su  ftnben.  4.  ©a^  SJfcibd^eu  fe^te  fein  "ipult  gegen  bie 
$Eur,  utn  feine  3lufgabe  fitr  feinen  gel^rer  ju  fi^reiben.  5.  ®er 
^nabe  V*  f^itte  SUJutter  urn  Sdvot  unb  S3utter  gebeten,  aber  er 
^at  i^r  nirf)t  gebanft, 

(b)  „§aben  @ie  feine  SSriefe  fitr  ntid^?" 
„§aben  ®te  i^re  greunbe  um  Sriefe  gebeten?'' 

„3a,  unb  ntein  33ater  ^at  ntir  jmei  burd^  bie  Jitr  gereidf)t,  aber 
fie  t^aren  ntdfjt  fur  ntid^." 
rfQ^  fd^reibe  feine  :93rtefe.    Qd)  bin  fe^r  bagegen!" 
w®o?    3lber  e^  ift  nic^t  gut,  ot)ne  Sriefe  ^u  fein." 


BEVIEW.  51 

(c)  1.  I  don't  see  any  cow;  where  is  it?  2.  Without 
their  dog  the  boys  went  around  our  garden  and  through  their 
father's  field.  3.  The  lady  did  not  ask  for  a  flower,  but 
her  mother  gave  her  a  rose ;   she  thanked  her  mother  for  it. 

4.  Through  the  door  I  saw  our  cow  and  your  dog  in  the  field. 

5.  Did  you  thank  your  mother  for  her  letter?     It  (§  93)  was 
very  beautiful. 

(d)  "  Did  your  friend  thank  you  for  his  letter  ? '' 
"  No,  he  didn't  have  any  letter." 

"  Didn't  he  ask  you  for  any  paper  or  any  pen  ?  " 
"Yes,  and  I  gave  them  to  him,  but  I  hadn't  any  ink  for 
him." 

"  He  writes  no  letters  without  ink." 


LESSON  XX. 
Apposition.     Review. 


^unbe,  bte  bellen,  beigcn  ntd?t.  —  (S^rtd^njort 
Barking  dogs  never  bite. 


109.   Apposition. — A  noun  in  apposition  with  another  has 
the  same  case. 

Nominative.    SDlettt  SJatCf,  ber  Scorer,  ift  gcfommeit*    My  father,  the 

teacher,  has  come. 
Genitive,     ^d)  (efc  H§  SBttrf)  ttteittc^  ^atct^f  H§  ^tf^uv^.    lam  reading 

the  book  of  my  father,  the  teacher. 
Dative.    @r  f}at  t&  ntcinem  ^atcr,  bem  Scorer,  gcgcBcn*    He  gave  it  to 

my  father,  the  teacher. 
Accusative,    ^aft  t»n  mcinen  Skater,  ben  Setter,  gefe^en?    Have  you 

seen  my  father,  the  teacher  9 


62  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

110.  Review  Questions. 

(a)  1.    Which    prepositions    take    dative    or    accusative? 

2.  When,  do  they  take  the  dative,  and  when  the  accusative  ? 

3.  Which  prepositions  take  only  the  accusative  ?     Which  only 
the  dative  ? 

(b)  1.  Give  the  personal  pronouns  in  German.  2.  Give 
all  the  cases  where  fie  and  t^r  occur.  3.  Give  the  rule  for 
the  order  of  objects  when  both  are  pronouns ;  both  nouns ;  one 
a  pronoun  and  one  a  noun. 

(c)  1.  Give  the  rule  for  inverted  order.  2.  How  are  the 
possessive   adjectives   formed   from   the   personal   pronouns  ? 

3.  Give  the  rule  for  their  agreement  with  their  antecedent  and 
with  the  noun  they  modify. 

(d)  Distinguish  carefully  between  lie,  lay,  lain  (liegen,  lag, 
gelegen)  and  lay,  laid,  laid  (legen,  legte,  gelegt).  Also  between 
sit,  sat,  sat  (fi^en,  fa^,  gefe[fen)  and  set,  set,  set  (fe^en,  fe^e, 
gefe^t).  8tegen  and  ft^en  are  strong,  never  take  an  object,  and 
always  express  rest ;  legen  and  fe^etl  are  always  weak,  transi- 
tive, and  express  motion. 

111.  Review  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  She  found  a  ball  and  laid  it  by  a  bench,  on  the  bed, 
behind  the  door,  in  the  garden,  beside  a  desk,  over  the  paper, 
under  a  table,  in  front  of  the  man,  between  the  houses. 
2.  Here  is  a  rose ;  it  lay  by  the  chalk,  on  the  grass,  behind 
the  dress,  in  the  glass,  beside  the  hat,  over  the  paper,  under 
the  water,  in  front  of.  the  dog,  between  the  flowers.  3.  The 
girl  found   a   rose   in   our    garden,   and   she  gave   it  to   me. 

4.  The  boy  with  a  letter  saw  the  girl,  and  he  gave  it  to  her. 

5.  He  went  out  of  the  house^  near  the  garden^  with  his  dog. 


REVIEW.  53 

to  the  city,  from  the  field,  to  his  father.  6.  We  had  come 
through  the  door,  without  your  flowers,  around  the  field. 

(6)  1.    The  girl  has  her  flower,  and  the  flower  has  its  thorn. 

2.  Under  the  table  the  girl  found  a  rose ;  we  gave  it  to  her. 

3.  Have  you  seen  my  brother,  the  teacher  ?  He  is  in  the  gar- 
den with  his  books.  4.  In  the  school  the  pupils  had  no  ink ; 
they  asked  the  teacher  for  it.  5.  The  boy  asked  for  the 
butter  on  the  table  and  I  passed  it  to  him.  6.  You  asked 
(use  perfect  tense)  for  it ;  what  will  you  do  with  it  ?  7.  In 
our  garden  I  saw  my  dog  with  your  father,  the  teacher. 
8.  In  (the)  school  we  speak  German  and  write  our  exercises 
on  our  desks.  9.  The  girl  came  out  of  the  school  to  go  home ; 
she  had  her  books  under  her  (use  def.  art.)  arm.  10.  What 
did  you  say  ?    You  have  no  paper  ?    What  did  you  do  with  it  ? 


©etnc  -Stutnen  finb  tierblu^t, 
8eer  unb  !a^(  fte^t  gelb  unb  §atn* 
mntttx  (Srbe,  bu  bift  mub^ 
Unb  ber  SBtnter  pKt  bid)  etn. 

^aft  bu  boi^  genug  ge[(i)afft, 
3lQen  rei^  ben  3:tf(f)  gebedt ; 
©amntle  bir  nun  neue  Sraft, 
SSi^  ber  Serine  8teb  bt(^  totdt ! 

—  3uliu^  (Sturm. 


64  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 


^ot  ^ena. 


3luf  ben  Sergen,  bie  S3urgen, 
Qm  3:ale,  bie  ©aale, 
3)ie  a}Jab(f)en  tm  ®tabtd)en  — 
einft  atte^  tute  l^eut ! 
Q\)x  inerten  ©efd^rten, 
SBo  feib  t^r  jur  ^dt  mir, 
3^^r  tteben,  geblteben? 
Sli},  alk  jerftreut! 

©ie  etnen,  fie  tDeinen, 
©ie  anbern,  fie  iDanbern, 
®ie  britten  no(^  mitten 
Qm  SBec^fel  ber  ^tit ; 
2lu(^  t)iele  ant  S^tk, 
3u  ben  3:oten  entboten, 
3Serborben,  geftorben 
Qn  8uft  ober  8eib, 

^'c^  aCeine,  bev  eine, 
@d^an'  mieber  ^ernieber 
3ur  @aa(e  ini  Zah, 
©od^  tranrig  unb  ftumnt ; 
(Sine  ginbe  inx  SBinbe, 
!Cie  tDiegt  fii^  unb  biegt  fit^, 
9iaufc^t  f^aurig  unb  traurig, 
Qd)  tod^  tDO^I  toaxnm ! 


STRONG  DECLENSION   OF  ADJECTIVES.  55 

LESSON   XXI. 
Strong  Declension  of  Adjectives.    Nouns  of  Measure. 


(Suten  IHorgcn,  ^crr  £el^rcr.    (Suten  Xa^,  meinc  Ktnbcr. 
Good  morning,   {Mr.)  teacher.     Good  day,   {my)  children. 


112.  Strong  Declension  of  Adjectives. — When  not  preceded 
by  an  article,  or  some  other  word  with  distinctive  endings 
(§  116),  the  adjective  must  indicate  the  number,  gender,  and 
case  of  the  noun.  This  is  called  the  Strong  Declension  of 
Adjectives, 

The  adjective  takes  the  following  endings,  akin  to  the  defi- 
nite article,  except  that  with  strong  nouns  in  the  genitive  singu- 
lar masculine  and  neuter,  euphony  requires  :=en  instead  of  -e^. 
Here  the  adjective  does  not  need  to  be  strong,  as  the  noun 
ending  indicates  its  number  and  case. 

Singiilar. 
Masc.  Fern.  Neut. 

N.  gutcr  ajlann*  gutc  %xm.  gutc^  '^n^. 

G.  gutctt  Sfflannt^.  gutcr  %xavi.  gtttcn  S3uc^c^, 

D.  gutcm  ^Olattttc*  jjitter  fjrau*  gutcm  ^w^t. 

A.  gutcn  Wann.  gutc  JJrau*  %Mit^  Sud^* 

Flural. 

N.  gute  Whnmx.  gutc  fjrauctt,  gutc  SiitS^cr* 

G.  gutcr  aJliittttcr*  gutcr  grauen,  gutcr  ^iic^cr* 

D.  gutett  9Jlattttcrtt»  guten  grauen,  gutcn  ^iit^ern. 

A.  gute  SOflanncr*  gutc  graucn.  gutc  SBiid^cr* 

(a)  In  like  manner  decline  junger  @d)uler,  tDarmer  2^ag,  treige  ^u^, 
fc^one  S^od^ter,  fd^mercg  ^inb,  l^ctgeS  Staffer. 

(&)  At  the  top  of  the  next  page  are  given  the  typical  strong  endings. 
Note  their  resemblance  to  those  of  the  definite  article. 


56  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 


Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Plu. 

er 

se 

=e§ 

«e 

eg  (en) 

scr 

-eig  (Ctt) 

«er 

em 

=er 

=em 

=ett 

en 

*e 

't2 

=e 

113.  Omission  of  Preposition  after  Nouns  of  Measure.  —  Nouns 
following  expressions  like  a  glass  of,  a  piece  of,  etc.,  are  given 
in  German  without  a  preposition.  They  are  put  in  apposition, 
and  so  are  in  the  same  case  (§  109). 

A  glass  of  milk,    (^xn  Q^ia^  Wliid). 

Apiece  of  bread.    @itt  ©tilrf  23rot 

A  cup  of  white  wine,    ©ine  ^affe  ttieiger  SScitt. 

With  a  glass  of  hot  water.    Wit  cittcitt  (^ia^  ^cigem  Staffer. 

(a)  Masculine  and  neuter  nouns  of  measure  after  a  numeral 
usually  have  the  same  form  in  both  singular  and  plural.  Fem- 
inines  have  the  regular  plural  form. 

^itv  ^Xl%  four  feet. 
©ieben  $fttttb,  seven  pounds. 
3tt»ei  Xaffcn,  two  cups. 

114.  Vocabulary. 

ber  ^af'fee,  ^t^  ^affee§,  coffee.  ha^  ^funb,  $ttiei  ^funb,  pound. 

ber  Xtt,  bei^  Xtt^,  tea.  hlan,  blue. 

bte  ^af  fc,  btc  ^affcit,  cup.  jung,  young. 

btc  Wild)f  ber  SJiilti^,  mi7A;.  runb,  roiind. 

bo§  Stiirf,  bte  Stii'rfe,  piece.  ttieig,  i/?;iiYe. 

115.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  3<n  faltem  ^Better  ^aben  tDir  iDarme  ^letber.  2.  Qn 
bem  ©arteti  [e^e  ic^  mei^e  :931umen  unb  griine^  @ra^.  3.  Qnn%e 
Wdh6)tn  f(f)retben  lange  2Iufgaben  mtt  runben  gebern  unb  blauer 
Jtnte.      4.  aStr  ^aben  ein  ®Ia^  ^ei^e  9)?i[^  unb  eine  Xa\\t  Ztc 


STRONG  DECLENSION  OF  ADJECTIVES.  57 

auf  bem  ^ult  gefunben*      5.  ®er  f  na6e  ijattt  em  ®tu(f  met^e^ 
53rot  in  ber  §anb  unb  t^ier  "ipfunb  ^affee  unter  bem  Slrrn* 

(^)  ^f3^  ^txbe  etn  ®Ia^  fatten  Jee,    Sitte,  geben  @ie  mir 

eine  Jaffe  ^ei^en  f  affee  !'^ 
„@ine  Xaffe  iDarmer  Sl^ee  tft  gnt  fiir  ©ie/' 
;,3Biet)iet  S'affee  nnb  JTee  ^aben  ®ie  im  §aufe?'' 
„3d^  ^abe  etn  '^fnnb  gritnen  3;:ee  unb  jtDet  ^funb  braunen 

Saffee,  aber  feme  mUd).'' 

(c)  1.  Please  set  a  cup  of  tea  and  a  glass  of  warm  milk 
beside  my  piece  of  bread.  2.  Young  pupils  were  writing 
hard  exercises  on  white  paper  with  blue  ink.  3.  Eound 
pieces  of  meat  and  a  pound  of  coft'ee  lay  on  the  table  beside  a 
glass  of  hot  water.  4.  Our  teacher  was  writing  long  sen- 
tences with  a  piece  of  white  chalk.  5.  On  the  table  we  saw 
two  pounds  of  green  tea,  a  piece  of  meat,  a  cup  of  hot  coffee, 
and  a  glass  of  cold  milk. 

(d)  "  Have  you  warm  milk  in  your  cup  ?  '^ 

"  No,  I  have  a  cup  of  cold  coffee.  Please  give  me  a  glass 
of  hot  tea." 

"  Good !  I  have  here  two  pounds  of  green  tea  and  four  cups 
of  hot  water.     But  I  haven't  any  coffee.^' 

"  Please  give  me  a  cup  of  tea.     I  thank  you." 


ajlitbc  hin  id). 

aWitbe  bin  i^,  ge^'  jur  9?n^, 
@cf)Ite^e  beibe  tugletn  ju  ; 
SSater,  la^  bie  9lngen  bein 
Uber  meinem  SStitt  fetn. 

—  ;2utfc  ^enfcU 


68  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

LESSON  XXII. 
Weak  Declension  of  Adjectives. 


3eber  ift  fid?  felbft  bcr  Hddpfte.  —  <S^nc^hjort. 

Chanty  begins  at  home  (lit.  ^i;er2/  one  is  nearest  to  himself ) . 


116.  Weak  Declension  of  Adjectives. — An  adjective  is  weak 
when  used  with  the  definite  article  ber,  or  with  btefer,  thiSy 
jener,  that^  or  jeber,  every.  These  are  called  „ber''  words,  as 
they  have  endings  like  ber.  The  adjective  following  does  not 
need  strong  endings,  because  number  and  case  are  shown  by 

the  „ber"  word. 

Singular, 
Masc.  Fein.  Neut. 

K    bcr  gutc  SJlaittt  biefc  gutc  gran  jcnc^  gutc  SBuri^ 

G.    bcig  gutctt  'Maxmt^  bicfer  gutcn  ^rau  jcnc^  gutett  SBurJ^ei^ 

D.    bcm  gutett  SJlattttc  btefer  gutcu  f?trau  jcttcttt  gutett  S5uri^c 

A.    tstn  guteu  SyZauu  biefe  gute  ^xavi  [tnt^  gutc  S3u(i^ 

Plural. 

N.    bie  guteu  SJZduuer         biefe  guteu  JJroueu  jeue  guteu  Stirrer 

G.    ber  gtiteu  SJlauuer         btefer  gitteu  fjraueu  jeuer  guteu  ^iid^er 

D.    '^tn  guteu  9)louueru       biefeu  guteu  5^*<Jueu  \tntn  gttteu  23ttt^eru 

A.    bte  guteu  9)lauuer         biefe  guteu  ^roueu  jeue  guteu  Sitter 

(a)  Decline  ber  fd)onc  Sag,  jenc  rote  9lofe,  jebe^  ffeine  (Stiicf. 

(6)  Below  are  given  the  typical  weak  endings.  Notice  that  a  weak 
ending  of  an  adjective  is  always  preceded  by  a  strong  ending  of  another 
word. 


Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Plural. 

(-er)  -e 

(-C)   -c 

(-c^)  -c 

(-C)    -Ctt 

(-c§)  -eu 

(-er)  -eu 

(-c§)  -eu 

(-er)  -cu 

(-cm)  -cu 

(-er)  -eu 

(-cm)  -cu 

(-CU)  -cu 

(-ctt)  -cu 

(-e)   -c 

(-c^)  -c 

(-C)   -eu 

WEAK  DECLENSION   OF  ADJECTIVES.  59 

117.  Accusative  of  Definite.  Time. — Expressions  of  definite 
time  are  put  in  the  accusative. 

Every  day,  jcben  Xag;  this  year,  btcfc!§  ^af^v. 

118.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  Sa'bcn,  t>ic  Sobcit,  store.  ticrfau'fctt,  ticrfauftc,  ticrfauft  (^a= 

t>a§  Q^tlt>f  btc  Q^tVhtVf  money.  Bctt),  «o  sell. 

fau'fctt,  fauftc,  gcfauft  (^aficn),  to     btc'fcr,  «/iis. 
6wy.  jc'bcr,  every. 

tUiUf  small,  little.  jc'ncr,  that. 

119.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  3=ener  junge  .^nabe  t)atte  ba^  fd^one  aJJcibc^en  {ebett 
S^ag  gefe^eti*  2.  ©ie  alte  grau  ^tte  !ein  ®e{b,  urn  in  bem 
fleinen  fiabett  ein  *^funb  Saffee  5U  faufett.  3.  ©te  fleine  Zoii)^ 
ter  be^  alten  8e^rer§  f^3riii)t  biefe  a[Bod)e  fe^r  gute^  ®eut[(^,, 

4.  5J}Jetn  33ruber  ^at  btefe  Heinen  93(umen  tier!auft  unb  mit 
feinem  ©elbe  in  einem  8aben  ein  ®Ia^  falte  W:ili}  ge!anft> 

5.  3=eben  S£ag  ge^t  Jener  alte  2)Zann  o^ne  ®e(b  in  biefen  fleinen 
8aben. 

(b)  „§at  jener  fleine  (Schiller  biefen  langen  ®a^  gefdirieben?" 
„9lein,  biefe  fteinen  @(^ii(er  [(^reiben  feine  @d^e," 

„3lber  Jeber  gnte  ^nabe  fc^reibt  bie  fteinen  ©cifee/    SBarum 

fc^reiben  Jene  ®(f|iiler  nic^t?'' 
„!Diefe  jungen  Sinber  ^aben  feine  geber  nnb  feine  2:inte/' 
„®o?    Qd)  n)erbe  geber  nnb  2:inte  fUr  biefe  gnten  Snaben 

fanfen." 

(c)  I  haven't  any  money  to  buy  a  cup  of  coffee  in  that  little 
store.  2.  The  poor  man  sold  that  little  house  this  week. 
3.  In  this  little  garden  I  looked  every  day  for  the  red  roses, 
but  I  did  not  find  any  flowers.        4.   My  brother  went  into 


60  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

that  little  store  of  his  friend,  but  he  hadn't  any  money  to  buy 
that  brown  hat.  5.  Did  the  little  boy  sell  his  roses  in  that 
large  store  and  buy  these  little  books  with  the  money  ? 

(d)  "Haven't  you  any  money?  Why  did  you  come  into 
this  little  store  ?  " 

"  I  did  not  come  in  order  to  buy.  I  came  to  sell  these  brown 
shoes  for  that  old  lady." 

"  What  will  she  buy  with  the  money  ?  " 

"  This  week  she  has  asked  me  every  day  for  the  money  (in 
order)  to  buy  bread  for  her  children." 


LESSON  XXIII. 
Mixed  Declension  of  Adjectives. 


gu  jebem  gan3en  IDerf  gel^ort  etn  gaTt3er  XTTann.  —  WXdtxi* 

Every  complete  work  requires  a  complete  man. 


120.  Mixed  Declension  of  Adjectives.  —  An  adjective  is  de- 
clined as  shown  at  the  top  of  the  next  page,  when  it  follows 
the  article  etn,  the  negative  fein,  no,  none,  or  any  possessive, 
like  metn,  bein,  if)r,  etc.  These  are  all  declined  like  ein,  and 
are  called  ,,ein"  words.  Note  that  unfer  is  an  „etn"  word  and 
not  a  ,,bcr"  word. 

In  the  nominative  singular  masculine,  and  nominative  and 
accusative  singular  neuter,  these  words  have  no  ending. 
Therefore  a  following  adjective  must  be  strong  in  order  to 
show  number  and  case.  In  all  other  cases  the  adjective  is 
weak.  Hence  the  term  Mixed  Declension,  because  the  adjec- 
tive is  sometimes  strong,  sometimes  weak. 


MIXED  DECLENSION  OF  ADJECTIVES. 


61 


Singular. 
Masc.  Fern. 

N.  mcttt  armcr  ^m<b  Ictue  anbcrc  ^iatsi 

G.  meittc^  armctt  ^unbei^  Imxtx  anberctt  ^iat^i 
D.  meittcm  armctt  ^ititbc  fcitter  attbcrctt  'Bia\si 
A.  utcittett  armctt  ^ttttb 


Neut. 
t^r  ircittc^  ttttb 
t^reg  f (cittctt  ^ittbo^ 
i^rcm  fictttctt  ^tttbc 
i^r  flcittc^  mttb 


N.  mctttc  armctt  ^uttbc 
G.  metttcr  armctt  i^uttbc 


i^rc  fictttctt  ^ittbcr 
t^rcr  fktttctt  ^ittbcr 


fcittc  attbcrc  'Bta\>t 
Plural. 

fcittc  attbcrctt  Stabtc 

fctitcr  attbcrctt  'Bt'oHsit 
D.  mcittctt  armctt  ^uttbctt    fcittcit  attbcrctt  ©tabtctt  t^rctt  fkittctt  ^tttbcrtt 
A.  mcittc  armctt  ^uttbc       fcittc  attbcrctt  ^itit^it      i^rc  flcittctt  ^ittbcr 

(a)  Decline  eitt  alter  9Jlann,  3^r  grower  ^nabc,  unjere  alte  Mwiitx,  fein 
neuc§  aReffer,  metne  meige  9lofe,  euer  aiit^  §au«»     (See  §  104,  h.) 

{h)  Below  are  given  the  mixed  endings  for  ,,eitt"  words  and  adjectives. 
Note  that  they  are  like  the  typical  weak  endings  (§  116,  h)  with  „bcr" 
words,  except  in  the  singular  of  the  nominative  masculine  and  of  the 
nominative  and  accusative  neuter. 


Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Plural. 

(-)    -er 

(-e)  -c 

(-)     -e^ 

(-0    -ctt 

(-c§)  -ctt 

(-cr)  -ctt 

(-c§)  -ctt 

(-cr)  -ctt 

(-cm)  -ctt 

(-cr)  -ctt 

(-cm)  -ctt 

(-ctt)  -ctt 

(-ett)  -ctt 

(-e)    -c 

(-)     -e^ 

(-C)    -ctt 

121.    Position  of  nie.  —  9^te   has  the  same  position  in  the 
sentence  as  ntc^t  (§  23). 

/  never  saw  those  roses.    ^^  f^aht  jcttc  O^iofctt  ttic  gcfc^ctt. 
He  never  came  into  the  city.    @r  fam  ttic  itt  bic  ^tahU 


122. 

bcr  Sof'fcl,  bic  Siiffcl,  spoon. 
bcr  ^ct'tcr,  jiic  teller,  plate. 
bic  Q^a'Mf  bic  ©abcitt,  fork. 
ha§  Si,  bic  (Sicr,  egg. 
ha^  ^ittg,  bic  ^ittgc,  thing. 
attbcr,  other,  different. 


Vocabulary. 

tritt'fctt,  trattf,  gctruttfctt  (^aBctt), 

to  drink. 
ttCtt.  new. 

arm,  poor.  "  '^^  >  . 

rcitt,  clean. 
ttic,  never. 


62  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

123.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  ®etn  artner  Sruber  \)at  nte  au6  eittem  gro^en  ®Iafe 
getrunfen;  er  trinft  aM  etner  Heinen  3:a[fe»  2.  Uttfere 
gro^en  2:eIIer  unb  bte  anberen  Singe  auf  bie[em  5li[(J)e  finb  nte 
rein.  3.  9Kein  neuer  8offe(  ift  nic^t  fo  rein  iDie  (as)  3=^re 
alte  ®abel;  i(^  ^be  bamit  ©er  gegeffen.  4.  ^ein  anbere^ 
!j)ing  liegt  stDift^en  meiner  nenen  ®abel  unb  biefem  reinen 
goffeL  5.  J)er  Soffel,  bie  ®abel  unb  ba^  3Jie[fer  liegen  auf 
einem  reinen  teller. 

(&)  ,,©itte,  geben  @ie  mir  eine  anbere  ®abel !  ®iefe  J)inge 
finb  ni^t  rein." 

„§ier  ift  ein  neuer  gdffel  unb  eine  reine  ®abel.  @ie  tiegen 
auf  einen  reinen  Speller. " 

„Q(ij  ^be  meinen  iDarmen  Saffee  au^  einer  neuen  3:^affe 
getrunfen.'' 

„Unb  id)  ^abe  meine  fatten  (Sier  unb  biefe  anberen  Singe  mit 
meinem  alten  DJJeffer  unb  meiner  alten  ®abel  gegeffen.'' 

(c)  1.  His  poor  mother  never  drinks  her  warm  tea  out  of  a 
little  cup ;  she  drinks  it  (§  93)  out  of  a  big  glass.  2.  Your 
new  spoon  is  lying  between  your  plate  and  those  other  things. 
3.  Every  day  I  go  into  a  large  store,  but  I  never  buy  new 
things.  4.  No  other  man  has  seen  my  poor  friend's  letter. 
5.   What  is  that  clean,  white  round  thing  beside  my  plate  ? 

(d)  "  Here  is  my  new  fork ;  it  is  clean ;  I  have  never  eaten 
eggs  with  it." 

"  Where  are  your  new  spoon  and  my  little  fork  ?  " 

"  Your  little  fork  and  my  new  spoon  are  lying  on  the  table, 

but  our  other  things  are  not  here." 

"  I  will  drink  out  of  our  old  cup  and  eat  an  e^g  with  your 

new  spoon." 


ADJECTIVES  AFTER    WELCH,   SOLCH,   ETC,  63 

LESSON  XXIV. 
Adjectives  after  mel^,  fol<^,  etc. 


filler  guten  Ptnge  finb  brei.  —  <©^rid^iuort 
All  good  things  come  in  threes. 


124.  9Kan(^,  many  a,  folrf),  swc/i  a,  and  \otl6)^  which,  may  be 
declined  like  ,,ber''  words.    A  following  adjective  is  then  weak; 

Many  an  old  hook,  vxaw^t^  alte  S3uc^* 

On  such  a  warm  day,  an  folt^cm  ttiarmctt  Xagc* 

Which  young  hoy?  SSeld^er  jungc  ^tiabc  ? 

(a)  But  usually  these  words  are  indeclinable  and  do  not 
affect  a  following  construction  at  all.  The  adjective  may  be 
strong  or  mixed.  When  indeclinable,  XotiH)  is  exclamatory  and 
means  what. 

Many  an  old  hook,  tttattr^  a\it^  SBttd^* 

ntan^  cin  a\it2  ^u^. 
On  such  a  warm  day,  an  ^old}  marmcm  Xa^c. 

an  fo(^  etttcm  warmen  Xa^t* 
What  a  young  hoy !  $Be(d^  iunrjcr  Una^t ! 

235c(rf)  citt  jitttgcr  ^naBc ! 
TTi'^/i  to/ia^  a  young  hoy !  '^xi  )^t\6)  jmtgcm  ^naBctt ! 

"MM  ttjclti^  cittcm  juttgett  ^ttaBcit ! 

(6)  9lt(,  all,  is  usually  declined  as  a  „ber"  word  when  fol- 
lowed directly  by  an  adjective.     When  followed  by  a  „ber" 
word  or  an  „etn''  word,  it  is  usually  indeclinable. 
All  good  tea,  affcr  gwtc  ^cc. 
Of  all  good  things,  attcr  cjuteit  ^ittgc. 
All  the  old  hooks,  aU  bie  dtctt  ^urf|cr» 
Of  all  these  blue  flowers,  aU  btcfcr  btoctt  S3Ittmctt» 
With  all  ny  little  friends,  mii  all  metueu  thincn  grcuttbctt* 


64  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN, 

125.  Adverbs.  —  The  uninflected  form  of  most  adjectives  is 
used  also  as  an  adverb.  A  single  adverb  has  the  same  position 
as  md)t  (§  23). 

^ttbift  gut  (adj.).     You  are  good. 

^tt  (critft  ^ni  (adv. ).     You  learn  tvell. 

Sr  ift  citt  pflic^ier  Wann  (adj.).    He  is  a  polite  man. 

(£r  \pxadi  fc^r  pflid^  (adv. ).    He  spoke  very  politely. 

126.  Vocabulary. 

bet  S5o'bett^  bic  SSobctt,  floor.  ^o^kn,  f^otttf   ge^iolt  (f^aUn),  to 

ber  Xtp'pid^f  bic  Xcppi^t,  carpet.  fetch,  go  and  get. 

^h  2am' pt,  ^k  Sam^cit,  lamp.  Iftati^gctt,  ^tng,  gc^angcn  {^a^tn), 

bte  SBattb,  btc  SBanbc,  wall  (of  a  cr  ^rittgt^  to  hang  (intrans.). 

room).  f^b^'lxdlf  polite. 

H^  S3i(b,  hk  ^ilbcr,  picture.  flci'^ig,  industrious;  ffcigig  (etttett, 

ha§  3iJ«'ittcr,  bic  giwmcr,  room.  to  study  hard. 

127.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  ajJan^  after  Je^pt^  Itegt  auf  bem  ^oben.  2.  3=d^ 
l^abe  all  metne  :93itd^er  unb  eine  gro^e  8ampe  au^  metnem  3^* 
mtx  ge^olt;  ic^  n)erbe  flei^ig  lernen.  3.  31H  biefe  iungen 
©driller  ^aben  ffet^ig  gelernt ;  fie  f^reibett  att  i^re  2lufgaben 
fe^r  gut.  4.  ajjeiu  junger  greuub  [prat^  fe^r  ^ofttt^ ;  er  ^tte 
fold)  etu  f^5ne6  Stib  nte  gefe^en.  5.  Seiu  STeppti^  tag  auf 
bem  :©obeu  be^  3*^^^^^^  ^^^^  ^^^^  'ff^^^^  Sampe  iDar  auf  bem 
SEift^,  uub  an  ber  SBanb  ^ing  etn  fd^one^  Silb. 

(b)  „2Bet^  fc^5ue^  Silb  ^angt  an  ber  SBanb  biefe^  atten 
^tmmer^ !" 

„^(i)  l^abe  man^  f^one^  J)ing  gefe^en,  aber  fold^  etn  fi^one^ 
Sitb  l^abe  id)  nte  gefunben.'' 
„§aben  ®te  fold)  eine  alte  ?ampe  gefe^en?'' 
„5Rem,  i^  ^abe  flei^tg  gefu^t,  aber  foI(^  eine  8ampe  ^abe  i^ 


REVIEW.  65 

nie  gefunben,    Unb  id^  fage  btefe^  nid^t,  um  i)'6fiii)  ju  fpred^en. 
m  tft  mi)x.'' 

(c)  (Write  adjective  modifiers  in  as  many  ways  as  possible.) 
1.  All  these  young  girls  are  studying  hard ;  they  write  these 
long  sentences  very  well.  2.  What  large  pictures  on  (an)  the 
wall !  I  have  never  seen  such  beautiful  things.  3.  Many 
an  old  woman  has  never  seen  such  a  carpet  on  the  floor. 
4.  We  have  seen  many  a  beautiful  flower,  but  we  have 
never  seen  such  red  roses.  5.  Which  lamp  did  you  fetch 
out  of  that  big  room  ? 

(d)  "What  big  words!  We  have  never  read  such  hard 
exercises." 

"  You  will  study  hard  in  order  to  write  many  a  long  sentence.'^ 
"  But  I  have  never  seen  such  long  words." 
"  These  long  sentences  are  not  hard.     Get  your  paper  and 
write." 

"  I  will  study  hard,  and  we  shall  write  the  exercise  well." 

LESSON  XXV. 
Review. 


Die  2(lten  3um  Hat,  bte  Z^n^zn  3ur  ^at  —  ©^rid^toort 
The  old  for  counsel,  the  young /or  action. 


128.  Summary  of  Adjective  Declensions. 

(a)  A  predicate  adjective  is  not  inflected. 

(b)  An  attributive  adjective  is  inflected.  It  is  inflected  weak 
when  preceded  by  a  „ber"  word,  mixed  when  preceded  by  an 
„txn"  word,  and  strong  when  not  preceded  by  either.     But, 


66  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

while  an  attributive  adjective  has  these  three  kinds  of  declen- 
sion, it  has  only  two  kinds  of  ending :  (1)  weak  and  (2)  strong. 

(1)  Its  endings  are  wealc  when  preceded  by  a  „ber"  word  or 
an  inflected  form  of  an  „ein''  word.  The  adjective,  when  weak, 
has  only  two  endings,  ^t  and  '(e)n.  It  takes  -e  in  the  nomina- 
tive and  accusative  singular  of  all  genders  except  the  accusative 
masculine ;  =(e)n  in  all  other  cases. 

(2)  The  endings  of  an  adjective  are  strong  when  not  pre- 
ceded by  a  „ber''  word  or  an  inflected  form  of  an  „ein"  word. 
When  strong  it  takes  endings  like  the  definite  article. 

Note.  The  endings  of  an  adjective  in  the  Mixed  Declension  are  the 
same  as  those  in  the  Weak,  except  in  cases  where  the  „ein"  word  has  no 
ending  (is  not  inflected).  Then  the  strong  ending  (wanting  in  „ein" 
words)  is  substituted  for  the  weak  ending  in  the  adjective. 

(c)  An  adjective  used  as  a  noun  is  written  with  a  capital  to 
show  its  noun  nature,  and  declined  like  ah  adjective  to  show 
its  adjective  nature. 

©in  ^IvmcVf  a  poor  man. 
^er  Swwgc,  the  young  man. 
^a§  &nitf  the  good. 

(d)  To  translate  English  one  following  an  adjective,  German 
uses  simply  the  inflected  adjective,  agreeing  in  gender  with  the 
noun  implied  in  one. 

Give  me  this  book  and  that  one.    (^chtn  8ie  tttir  bicfC)3  S3ur^  ttiib  jcttC)^* 
ThaVs  not  my  hat;  I  bought  a  new  one.     ^a^  tft  mcitt  ^ttt  tt^t;  \6) 

^obc  ctnen  ncucn  gcfauft* 
Here  is  a  pen ;  havenH  you  any  {one)  ?    ^xtx  ift  cine  gcbcr;  l^aBen  Sic 

f  cine  ? 

129.  Review  Questions. 

(a)  1.  What  is  the  peculiarity  of  the  German  expressions 
for  a  glass  of  a  piece  of  a  cup  of  etc.  ?       2.    What  is  the  posi- 


REVIEW,  67 

tion  of  a  single  adverb  in  the  sentence  ?       3.    When  does  Ger- 
man use  fetn?      4.   How  is  definite  time  expressed  in  German  ? 

(b)  1.  Why  must  the  adjective  be  strong  when  no  article 
modifies  a  noun  ?  2.  Why  may  the  adjective  be  weak  in 
the  genitive  singular  of  masculine  and  neuter  nouns  ?  3.  Is 
there  any  reason  why  it  should  be  weak?  4.  Give  and  illus- 
trate the  peculiarities  of  matti^,  [oI(^,  iDcfc^,  and  att* 

(c)  1.  Name  the  „ber"  words  and  the  „txn"  words.  2.  When 
is  the  adjective  following  them  weak,  and  when  strong? 
3.  What  is  meant  by  an  inflected  form?  4.  How  do  adjec- 
tives used  as  nouns  differ  from  other  inflected  adjectives  ? 

# 

130.  Review  Exercise. 

1.  Good  boy,  a  good  boy,  the  good  boy,  this  good  boy,  such 
a  good  boy,  what  a  good  boy,  which  good  boy,  your  good  boy, 
many  a  good  boy.  2.  Put  each  of  the  above  expressions  into 
the  genitive  and  accusative  singular.  3.  We  go  every  day ; 
we  go  every  warm  day.  4.  I  have  a  glass  of  water,  a  piece 
of  bread,  a  cup  of  coffee,  and  a  pound  of  meat.  5.  She  will 
never  write  well.  6.  The  good  die  young,  but  the  poor  we 
have  always  (ttutner)  with  (bei)  us.  7.  I  have  never  seen 
that  little  school,  such  a  little  one  (school),  your  beautiful 
garden,  this  old  dress,  blue  roses.  8.  Every  day  this  sum- 
mer we  have  had  warm  weather.  9.  My  young  friend  set  a 
cup  of  tea  on  the  table  and  laid  a  piece  of  bread  beside  it. 
10.   We  have  never  sold  such  good  meat  to  the  poor. 

@^  lac^elt  ber  See  ;  er  labet  ^um  Sabe. 
S)er  Snabe  [(f)Uef  etn  am  griinen  ®eftabe ; 

!3)ort  ^()rt  er  ein  Mngen,  tDte  gldten  [o  fltg, 
SBie  ©timtnen  ber  gngef  itn  ^arabte^.  — ©corner. 


68  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 


^et  erfte  WHau 


!Der  erfte  2:ag  tm  aWonat  SKat 
Q\t  mtr  ber  gludlicfifte  tion  alien. 
®id^  fa^  i^  unb  geftanb  bir  fret, 
!j)en  erften  STag  tm  9J?ottat  3}?at, 
S)a^  bir  meitt  ^erj  ergeben  fet. 
SBentt  tnettt  ©eftcinbtii^  bir  gefatleti, 
©0  ift  ber  erfte  Sag  ittt  3)?ai 
gitr  mi^  ber  glitcflii^fte  Don  aCen. 


®tt  bettfft  an  mx6)  fo  fcUett 

!j)u  benfft  an  mid)  fo  felten, 
Qfi)  benf  an  hid)  fo  t)iel ; 
©etrennt  n)ie  beibe  SBelten 
3:ft  unfer  beiber  ^ieL 

S)od^  nti^^f  i(^  beibe  SBeften 
©nrc^jie^n  an  beiner  @anb, 
©alb  fd^Iummern  unter  ^elten, 
4BaIb  ge{)n  t)on  8anb  ju  8anb. 

Unb  m5(^teft  bn  Dergelten 
©nrd^  Siebe  bie^  ©ebic^t, 
@o  flie^t  itm  beibe  SBelten 
gin  rofenfarbne^  8i^t. 

~  Sluguft,  Oraf  t>on  platen. 


PBESENT  OF  MODAL  AUXILIARIES.  69 

LESSON  XXVI. 
Present  of  Modal  Auxiliaries. 


5ed?s  Woxtet  ncl^men  mtd?  in  2(nfprud?  jeben  Cag  : 

3d:?  foil,  id?  mug,  id?  fann,  id?  n)ill,  id?  barf,  xdi  mag.  —  TOcfcrt. 


131.   The  Modal  Auxiliaries  are  followed  by  the  present  in- 
finitive.    They  correspond  to  the  English  modals  as  follows  :  — 


Pre 

jsent  Infinitive.                           Past. 

Past  Participle. 

biirfen,  may, 

to  be  permitted,  must  not.            burfte 

gcburft 

fottttett,  cauj 

to  be  able  to ; 

may  (possibly),      fonnte 

gefuttttt 

mogctt,  may 

;  to  like  (to). 

tttO^tC 

gemoti^t 

tttiiffen,  must 

:,  to  be  obliged  to.                          mu^te 

gemugt 

fotteit,  shall, 

{ought),  to  be  to.                            folltc 

gcfoUt 

tt^oUtUf  will, 

to  want  to  ;  to  be  about  to.            ttioUte 
Present  Indicative  of  Modals. 

gettioUt 

id^  barf 

faun 

mag             mii^ 

foK 

ttiitt 

bu  barfft 

fannft 

magft           mn^t 

foKft 

ttiiUft 

cr  barf 

fautt 

mag             mui 

foil 

iDill 

ttiir  biirfctt 

fiittttCtt 

miigctt          miiffcn 

foKcit 

mottctt 

iftr  biirft 

fiittttt 

mogt            mufet 

foUt 

mUi 

fie  biirfctt  fiittttcit  miigcn  miiffcn  foKctt  mottctt 

132.  Use  of  Auxiliaries.  —  (a)  The  English  will  is  translated 
in  two  ways  in  German :  to  indicate  simple  futurity,  tuerben  is 
used ;  to  indicate  desire,  use  tnolten.     Eeread  §  55. 

He  will  go.    ($r  ttJtrb  gc^cn. 
He  wants  to  go.    @r  mill  gc^ett. 

SBcrbctt  <?ic  fommcn?    Shall  you  come  f  (at  some  future  time.) 
SSollctt  ®ic  fommcn  ?     Will  you  come  f   (are  you  loilling  to,  do  you 
want  to  f) 


70  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

(b)  English  shall jve  is  usually  tooUtn  Wiv.  Use  foHen  tDir 
only  when  you  can  substitute  are  we  to. 

Shall  we  go  home  f    333oIlett  mit  ttad|  ^aufc  gc^ctt  ? 
Shall  we  translate  the  next  page?    (to  the  teacher).    <BoUcn  ttiir  bic  nd(i^fte 
(Scitc  iificrfe^en  ? 

iVb?6.  SBerben  is  used  for  future  meanings  of  shall  and  loiZZ.  ©otteti 
is  used  when  the  decision  rests  with  some  one  besides  the  subject;  tDoUeti; 
when  the  decision  rests  with  the  subject. 

133.  Vocabulary. 

bte  Sct'tc,  bie  iSetten,  page.  trasted   with  Hticn,   to   ask   a 

bie  Settle,  bte  S^^^^^r  H^^-  favor). 

iiberfct'^Ctt,    itficrfe^'te,    iiberfc^t'  ^^Wh  '^hole^  entire^  all. 

(^abCtt),  to  translate.  ttot^jft,  next. 

fra'gctt,  fragtc,   gcfragt    (^aBctt),  gc'ftern,  yesterday. 

with  the  accusative  or  two  accusa-  l^eu'tc,  to-day. 

tives,  to  ask  (a  question,  as  con-  ntor'gett,  to-morrow. 

134.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  ©eftern  ^aben  tt)tr  jtDdlf  3^^^^  ixberfe^t ;  ^eute  fotlen 
tDtr  eine  ganje  ©ette  itberfe^en ;  morgen  miiffen  xovc  bte  nd^fte 
9lufgabe  iiberf e^en.  '2.  SBa^  tDoCen  ©ie  mid)  fragen  ?  9Jfogen 
®te  biefe  tangen  @a^e  nti^t?  3.  aKorgen  iiberfe^en  iDir  jmolf 
3ei(en  auf  biefer  nac^ften  ©eite ;  fbnnen  ©ie  ba^  t)er[tel)en? 
4.  SBir  miiffen  bie  ganje  ncid^fte  ©eite  lefett ;  tDoHen  voxx  fie  iiber- 
fe^en?  5.  "^tx  junge  ©(f)UIer  foil  bie  ncic^fte  ^dU  iiberfe^en, 
aber  er  !ann  nid)t  gut  lefett- 

(&)  „Sitte,  tDoIIett  ©ie  bie  ttcidifte  ^t\\z  iiberfefeett?" 
«'J)arf  id^  lefett?    ^i)  fatttt  ttic^t  gut  iiberfe^en." 
„?Jein,  ©ie  mitffeu  (efen  unb  itberfe^eu-    SBir  foHen  ^eute 
eine  ganje  ©eite  lefen.'' 


PRESENT  OF  MODAL  AUXILIARIES,  71 

„Q(i}  fann  bie[e  ®a^e  ni(^t  t)er[te^en,    ®arf  t^  nt(f)t  morgen 
uberfe^ett?'' 
„3a,  aber  morgen  miiffen  @ie  bie  gatije  3lufgabe  lefen*'' 

(c)  1.  Will  you  please  pass  me  the  butter  ?  2.  I  can  read 
the  whole  line  very  well ;  shall  I  translate  the  next  one  ? 
3.  To-day  I  must  read  a  whole  page ;  to-morrow  I  shall  trans- 
late the  next  twelve  lines.  4.  Shall  you  see  my  young 
friend  ?  Will  you  give  him  this  book  ?  5.  She  likes  Ger- 
man, but  she  cannot  translate  it  very  well.  6.  Children,  you 
must  come  into  the  house;  you  must  (biirfen)  not  go  into  the 
garden. 

(d)  "  Are  w^e  to  translate  the  next  page  to-morrow  ?  " 

"  Yes,  you  must  read  all  the  sentences.  To-morrow  we  shall 
translate  a  whole  page." 

"  What  did  you  ask  us  to-day  ?  I  cannot  understand  such 
long  words." 

"I  will  ask  the  next  boy.  He  likes  German,  and  yesterday 
he  translated  very  well." 

"I  cannot  translate  these  next  sentences.  May  I  go 
home  ?  " 

^^Yes,  but  to-morrow  you  must  read  the  whole  next  page." 


aWtige  ieber  fttlt  beglitdt 
(Seiner  ^renben  trarten ! 
SBenn  bie  9tofe  felbft  fi^  fi^ntitdt, 
©(^ntiicft  fie  au^  ben  ©arten. 


72  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

LESSON  XXVII. 
Past  and  Future  of  Modals. 


XOtnn  id?  ipollte,  was  id?  follte,  fonnf  id?  allcs,  was  id?  mollte. 

—  (S^ric^hjort. 

135.  Past  Tense  of  Modals.  —  The  Modal  Auxiliaries  are  con- 
jugated in  the  past  indicative  like  any  weak  verb. 

x^  fottttte,  I  could.  Xoix  fonntctt,  we  could. 

btt  fontttcft,  thou  couldst.  i^r  fonntct,  you  could. 

cr  fotttttc,  he  could.  fie  JonutCtt,  they  could. 

(a)  Conjugate  the  other  five  modals  in  the  past. 

136.  Future  Tense  of  Modals.  —  The  future  is  regular. 

x^  ttjerbc  fpre^Ctt  biirfcu,  I  shall  he  permitted  to  speak. 
btt  ttiirft  fommen  fiJttltCtt,  thou  wilt  he  ahle  to  come. 
tx  tutrb  gc^Ctt  fiinncn,  he  loill  he  ahle  to  go. 
toxv  ttJerbcn  (crnen  miiffeit,  ice  shall  have  to  study. 
xf!jv  totvHt  ftcrBctt  ntiiffctt,  you  will  have  to  die. 
ftc  metbctt  f^JtcIcn  ttJottctt,  they  will  want  to  play. 
(a)  2Rogcn  and  foEcn  are  rarely  used  in  the  future  tense. 

137.  Modals  with  e^  and  ju.  —  (a)  Where  English  says  I  can^ 
you  must,  and  so  on,  German  generally  uses  e^  as  object  of 
the  auxiliary,  ^ij  fann  e^,  @te  mitffen  e^,  etc.  In  negative 
sentences,  e^  is  not  necessary,  ^^  fann  x\x6)i,  ©ie  mitffen  ni(J)t. 

(h)  When  ju  is  used  with  the  modal  auxiliaries,  it  comes 
between  the  auxiliary  and  the  verb. 

He  studied  to  he  ahle  to  read  German.     (Sr  (cttttc,  ttttt  ^Ctttfci^  lefctt  Jtt 

fiJttnen. 
We  stood  up  to  he  ahle  to  see  hetter.    SSir  ftanben  auf,  um  bcffcr  fei^ett  5tt 

fottttCtt* 


PAST  AND  FUTURE  OF  MODALS.  73 

138.  Vocabulary. 

bet  WhtM\>f  bte  5(bcttbe,  evening,  l^o'rcn,  pttc,  gc^iirt  (^abctt),  «o 

bcr  SHur'gcn,  hit  ^orgcit,  morning,  hear. 

bet  ^ad)'mtttaqf  bte  ^ati^mittage,  tu'fett,  tief,  getufett  (^aben),    to 

afternoon.  call  (in  the  sense  of  caZZ  out,  call 

hiti'htn,  hixthf  geblieben  (fetn),  to  to,  not  msi«  or  call  upon), 

stay,  remain.  je^t,  now. 

(a)  With  geftcrn,  l^eute,  and  morgen,  nouns  are  written  without  a  capi- 
tal: yesterday  moriiing,  geftcrn  tnorgen;  this  afternoon,  ^eutc  nad^tnittag; 
to-morrow  evening,  tnorgen  Oi\itn\i,  Do  not  confuse  ntorgen  and  ber 
SJiorgen,  and  note  the  use  of  ^ente  for  this  when  this  means  to-day. 

139.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  ©eftern  abenb  fonnten  iDtr  ni(f)t  fomtnen,  aber  tnorgen 
tDcrben  xovc  ben  ganjett  9lbenb  bleiben  bitrfen.  2.  9Korgen 
nai^mittag  njerbe  tc^  einen  neuen  ©alt  faufen  miiffen,  nm  fpielen 
ju  fonnen,  3.  ©te  l^rfen  ^ier  nidfjt  bleiben;  \mx  n^erben  @ie 
rufen  mitffen,  4.  3=(^  fonnte  ba^  8ieb  ntcf)t  pren;  irolften 
®te  e^  ^dren?  5.  ^^a^  id)  iroHte  e^,  aber  id)  burfte  nid^t, 
6.  ©eftern  abenb  iDoHten  iDir  fpielen;  ^eute  morgen  mu^ten  luir 
l^ier  bleiben;  aber  morgen  nad)mittag  iDerben  n)ir  f))ielen  biirfen- 

(Z>)  „SBoHten  (Sie  geftern  na(^tnittag  ni^t  ©all  f|)ie(en?" 
,,3=(^  ti^oHte  f^jielen,  aber  ic^  fonnte  ni^t" 
„aBa^  mnfeten  @ie  tun?'' 

„^6)  burfte  nid^t  fpielen;  id)  mu^te  fiir  meinen  SSater  in  bie 
©tabt  ge^en," 
„9lber  je^t  n)erben  ®ie  fpielen  fonnen,  ni^t  itja^r?" 

(c)  1.  Shall  you  want  to  go  into  the  city  to-morrow  after- 
noon ?  2.  No,  I  wanted  to  (e^)  yesterday,  but  to-morrow  I 
shall  have  to  stay  here  the  whole  afternoon.  3.  Yesterday 
morning  we  were  permitted  to  play  in  the  garden,  but  to-day 


74  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN, 

we  shall  have  to  stay  in  the  house.  4.  He  was  to  translate 
the  next  sentence,  but  he  couldn't.  5.  Shall  I  give  you  your 
new  book  and  this  old  one  now  or  this  afternoon  ?  6.  The 
boys  were  permitted  to  play  in  the  house,  and  we  did  not 
want  to  call  them. 

(d)  "Shall  you  want  to  play  ball  to-morrow,  or  shall  you 
have  to  stay  here  ?  " 

"Yesterday  afternoon  I  wanted  to  play,  but  I  could  not; 
to-morrow  afternoon  I  shall  be  permitted  to  play." 

"  Yesterday  morning  I  wanted  to  go  to  the  field,  but  I  was 
not  permitted." 

"  Why  ?  Were  the  big  boys  playing  there  the  whole  morn- 
ing?" 

"  Yes,  I  could  hear  them,  but  I  couldn't  go  on  the  field  to 
see."     (§  86.) 

"  To-morrow  we  shall  have  to  play  we^l,  in  order  to  be  able 
to  win  (geiDtnnen)/' 

LESSON  XXVIII. 
Perfect  Tenses  of  Modals. 


(£s  l^at  nid?t  foUcu  fctn.  —  ©c^effcl. 


140.   The  Perfect  Tenses  of  Modals  are  conjugated  with  ^aben« 

'   Present  Perfect. 
i^  f^ahtf  btt  f^a%  etc.,  gefomtt,  gcmitgt,  etc.,  I  have  been  able,  etc. 

Past  Perfect. 
^  f^atttf  btt  ^attcft,  etc.,  gcfonnt,  gcmu^t,  etc.,  I  had  been  able,  etc. 


PERFECT   TENSES   OF  MODALS.  75 

Future  Perfect. 
The  Future  Perfect  of  the  modals  is  regular,  but  rarely  used. 

(a)  These  regular  past  participles  of  the  modal  are  used 
when  there  is  no  dependent  infinitive.     (§  137,  a.) 

I  couldn't,    ^d^  ^abt  c§  nid^t  ^donnt 

He  didn't  want  to.     ©r  i)at  C^  Xti^t  gcttiottt 

141.  "Two  Infinitives."  —  The  modals  and  nine  other  verbs 
(^nl]kn,  feel ;  f)ti^tn,Md;  ijti^cn.help;  ijoxtn,  hear;  la\\ tu,  let 
or  have  done;  lefjren^  teach;  (emen,  learn;  mac^en,  make; 
and  fallen,  see)  have  two  past  participles,  one  of  which  has 
the  same  form  as  the  infinitive.  This  latter  form  is  used  in 
compound  tenses  governing  a  dependent  infinitive.  The  de- 
pendent infinitive  precedes  the  past  participle  (with  infinitive 
form)  of  the  modal.    • 

Present  Perfect. 

\6)  l^tlBc  f^iclen  bitrfcn,  /  have  been  or  was  permitted  to  play. 
btt  ^laft  ft^retl6cn  fijniicit,  thou  hast  been  or  wast  able  to  write. 
cr  f^at  fdjrctBctt  (crticn,  he  {has)  learned  to  write. 
ttiir  ^ahtn  fommcn  miiffcit,  loe  (have)  had  to  come. 
i^r  f^ahi  arbcitett  ^elfctt,  you  (have)  helped  work. 
fie  ^abctt  gc^Ctt  tooUtrtf  they  (have)  wanted  to  go. 

Past  Perfect. 
^  f^aiit  f^iclcn  bitrfcn,  etc.,  I  had  been  allowed  to  play,  etc. 

(a)  Conjugate  each  of  the  above  combinations  in  full  throughout  the 
perfect  and  past  perfect. 

(b)  Remember  that  German  often  uses  the  perfect  where  English  em- 
ploys the  past.     (See  §  61.) 

@r  \)at  nici)t  fpielctt  ttJoUcn.    He  didn't  want  to  play. 
^6)  i)ahe  bleiben  miiffen»    /  was  obliged  to  (had  to)  stay. 


76  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN, 

142.  Vocabulary. 

at'htxitnf      arBcitetc,      gcarBettet  fcr'ttg,    ready;    through    (in   the 

(^aficu),  to  icork.  sense  of  finished). 

ttirtr'tctt,  ttJartcte,  gctuartct  (^aBcit),  f|jat,  adv.,  late  (used  as  a  predicate 

^0  loaiY ; /or,  auf  with  ace.  adjective    only  with    Cj^;    t^  ift 

batttt,  ^/leTi  (in  the  sense,  of  after  fjjftt,   e^  ttirb  f^ot.    But,  He  is 

that,  next).  late,  tx  fomtttt  f^Jftt)* 

laut,  Zowd  ju  ^aufc,  a«  /iome. 

143.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  ©eftern  morgen  )^ahtyi  voxx  tnarten  tt)oHen,  aber  voxx 
^aben  arbelten  miiffen.  2.  !j)ann  ^aben  bie  Snaben  511  §aufe 
fptelen  biirfen,  aber  [ie  I)aben  ba  ni(^t  fo  (aut  fptelen  fdnnen. 
3.  (gr  ift  fo  fpcit  na6)  §aufe  gefommen;  mir  iDaren  fertig,  mir 
^aben  nt(^t  njarten  tDoIIen.  4.  S)ann  \)Cii  bie  alte  grau  taut 
f^rei^en  tt)oI(ett,  aber  fie  ^at  e^  m&ji  gefonnt.  5.  !j)a^  Heine 
9)Jdb(^en  ^atte  ba  fi^en  unb  auf  ben  Setter  marten  tDoKen. 
6.  3=e^t  bin  id)  fertig  unb  e^  ift  nic^t  ju  f))dt,  um  Salt  fpielen 
ju  f  dnnen. 

(6)  „SBarunt  ^aben  ®ie  geftern  abenb  fo  f^cit  arbeiten 
miiffen?" 

„^6)  ^be  ntit  nteiner  9lufgabe  nid^t  fertig  tDerben  fi5nnen.'' 

„^i)  ^be  ju  §aufe  nx6)i  iDarten  Gotten,  aber  id^  ^be  e^ 
gemu^t.'' 

„®o?  ©ie  ^ben  ba  ni(f)t  fpielen  biirfen?'' 

,,9lein,  id)  ^abe  ju  §aufe  bleiben  miiffen,  um  fertig  n)erben  ju 
fdnnen.'' 

(c)  (Use  perfect  tense  when  possible ;  see  §  61.)  1.  Yester- 
day afternoon  I  was  not  able  to  come  ;  I  had  to  work  too  late. 
2.  He  did  not  want  to  wait  at  home,  but  he  was  not  permitted 
to  go  into  the  city.       3.   Then  he  waited  there  and  worked, 


SPECIAL    USES   OF  MODALS.  77 

but  he  couldn't  get  ready.       4.    Please  do  not  speak  so  loud  ; 
the  boys  in  the  next  room  have  to  work.       5.    Why  have  you 
had  to  work  so  late  ?     Couldn't  you  wait  ?       6.    I  didn't  want 
•to  stay  there  and  work,  but  I  was  not  permitted  to  go. 

(d)  "  Did  you  have  to  stay  at  home  and  work  yesterday 
afternoon  ?  " 

"  Yes,  I  couldn't  wait ;  it  was  getting  late  and  I  had  to  get 
ready." 

^  Did  you  want  to  go  to  (ju)  the  game  ?  " 

"  I  wasn't  permitted  to  go.  I  wanted  to,  but  I  couldn't. 
To-morrow  I  shall  be  able  to  go." 

"  Good  !     Then  we'll  wait  till  to-morrow.'^ 


LESSON  XXIX. 
Special  Uses  of  Modals.    Saffett* 


£ag  bas  I    3d:?  mag  es  ntd?i 


144.  Special  Uses  of  Modals  and  laffett*  —  ©iirfett,  fbntien, 
tDoHetl  and  tniiffen,  are  used  regularly  in  the  meanings  already 
given ;  tni^gett  and  f offen  have  also  special  uses. 

(a)  SJfogen  is  usually  translated  by  English  like,  especially 
when  accompanied  by  the  adverb  gertt,  gladly. 

3*^  maj;  gem  ftttgcn  or  i^  ftngc  gctn*    /  like  to  sing. 
SOIogCtt  Sic  btcfe  S3(ttmett  ?     Do  you  like  these  flowers  f 

(1)  English  may  is  usually  rendered  by  bitrfetl  to  denote 
permission ;  by  f otlTten  to  denote  possibility. 

You  may  speak,    ^tt  barf  ft  f^rct^en* 
That  may  he.     "^a^  fautt  fein* 


78  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

(b)  ©oHetl  i^  often  used,  especially  in  the  present,  to  report 
hearsay.     It  is  translated  is  said  to. 

&x  futt  fc^r  arm  fcitt*     He  is  said  to  be  very  poor. 
Sic  foil  fc^r  ^nt  ftngctt.     She  is  said  to  sing  very  well. 

(1)  An  especially  common  German  idiom  is  the  question, 
SBa^  foH  (bentt)  ba^?  What  is  the  meaning  of  that  ?  What  do 
you  mean  by  that  f 

(2)  The  past  subjunctive  of  folfen  (foCte)  is  like  the  past 
indicative.     It  regularly  means  02ight  to, 

^U  fottteft  lernen*     You  ought  to  study. 
@r  folltc  axhtitciu    He  ought  to  work. 

(c)  Besides  its  regular  meaning,  tDOlten  is  often  used  in  the 
sense  of  to  be  about  to  or  to  be  determined  to. 

®r  tuoKtc  ge^Ctt*    He  was  about  to  go. 

Stf)  toiU  gcprt  ttJCtbcn*    I  insist  upon  being  heard. 

(d)  8af[en  in  its  causative  meaning,  to  have  (done),  to  cause  to 
(be  done),  is  used  like  the  modals.  It  always  takes  the  active 
infinitive  but  sometimes  with  passive  sense. 

@r  Vd^t  ciliett  Mod  madden.    He  is  having  a  coat  made. 

293ir  i}ahtn  ncitc  ^iitc  f aufen  (affcu*     Tf  e  have  had  new  hats  bought. 

293ittft  bu  mcttt  ^nd^  ^otctt  (affcn  ?     Will  you  have  my  book  brought  f 

145.  Vocabulary. 

baig  ^JPlaf,  bte  SOlalc,  time  (a  single  frii^,  early;  moroen  frii^,  to-mor- 

point  of  time).  roio  morning  (to  avoid  ntotgett 

bic  ^nif  bic  ^txitUf  time  (in  gen-  morgctt). 

eral ;  an  extent  of  time).       '  gcrit,  adv.,  gladly;  usually  trans- 

bic  ©httt'bc,   bic  ©tuttben,  hour;  IditQ^liketo. 

lesson.  natiix'lid^f  adv.,  of  course.    • 

taf'feu,  lxt%  gclaffctt  (l^abcn)^  cr  mttt,    exclamation,    well    (rarely, 

Iri^t,  to  let;  to  have  or  cause  to  now). 

be  {done).                         ,  t)it\izxd)i'f  perhaps. 


SPECIAL   USES  OF  MODALS,  79 

146.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  (5r  foil  fe^r  arm  fein;  er  foCte  em  anbere^  3Kat  arbei^ 
ten.  2.  ^fatitrtirf);  ba^  !ann  fein;  aber  t)teltet(f)t  mag  er  titcf)t 
arbetten.  3.  9^un,  morgen  frii^  tDerbe  ic^  t)iellet(^t  ^eit  ^aben, 
em  neue^  ^leib  ma^en  ju  Iaffen»  4.  3^(^  mag  meine  beutfd^en 
©tunbeti  fe^r  gem,  aber  td^  ^abe  feme  ^dt,  all  bie  @a^e  gu  libera 
fe^en.  5.  3)a^  nacf)fte  9}lal  fodten  @te  mi^  ni(f)t  [o  fritf)  rufen; 
mir  ^ben  Dtel  ^eit,  eine  ganje  ©tunbe,  6.  9^un,  H)a^  foH 
(benn)  ba^?  §aben  @ie  mem  neue^  ^letb  nic^t  maiden 
raffen? 

(&)  ,aBa^  [oil  U^?    aSarum  ^aben  ®ie  mt^  rufen  laffen?" 

„?Jun,  t(^  ^be  ein  neue^  Sleib  mat^en  laffen  tDoffen,  SSiellei^t 
mogen  ®ie  e^  gem  fe^en.'' 

„5yjaturUd^,  aber  ein  anbere^  3KaI;  fe^t  l^abe  i(^  feine  ^t\i. 
^^  ^abe  eine  beut[(^e  ©tunbe  bei  meinem  Ce^rer.'' 

„33iettei({)t  fommen  @ie  morgen  frii^  T 

n^(^f  gem/' 

(c)  1.  Of  course  I  have  time  to  have  a  new  dress  made ;  Til 
do  it  gladly.  2.  Perhaps  you  ought  not  to  have  a  new  one 
made.  3.  He  is  said  to  sing  very  well ;  perhaps  he  has 
lessons.  4.  Of  course  I'll  be  glad  to  call  you  the  next  time, 
perhaps  to-morrow  morning.  5.  Well,  it  is  summer  now;  is 
it  too  early  to  have  a  new  hat  made?  6.  I  ought  to  write 
these  sentences,  but  I  have  no  time. 

(d)  "Well,  the  next  time  in  the  German  lesson  I  shall  have 
my  exercise  written  by  (t)on)  my  brother.'^ 

"  Perhaps,  but  you  ought  not  to  do  that.  Don't  you  like  to 
write  these  sentences  ?  " 

"  Yes,  of  course.     I   like  German,  but  I  have  no  time  to . 
study  it."       • 


80  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

"Well,  I  work  early  and  late  and  I  like  these  German 
lessons.     You  ought  to." 

"  Well,  perhaps  I'll  do  it.  My  father  is  calling  me ;  I  must 
go.'' 

LESSON  XXX. 
Review. 


VO\\\\i  bu  tmmer  metter  fd?ipctfen  ? 

S\z\i,  bas  (Sute  Itegt  fo  nal|, 
£erne  nur  bas  (Sliicf  ergretfen, 

Dtnn  has  (Sliicf  ift  immer  ha.  —  @oet^e. 


147.  Review  Questions. 

(a)  1.  Give  the  German  modals.  2.  What  two  ways  may 
English  will  be  translated  ?  3.  Give  the  ways  of  translat- 
ing English  may.        4.   What  does  mdgen  usually  mean  ? 

(5)  1.  Which  modal  means  must  (riot)  in  withholding  per- 
mission ?  2.  What  peculiarity  have  the  modals  when  gov- 
erning a  dependent  infinitive?  3.  What  is  the  difference 
in  the  use  of  the  past  participles  of  modals  ? 

(c)  1.  What  tense  does  German  sometimes  prefer  when 
English  uses  the  past  ?  2.  Give  two  meanings  for  f oltetl ; 
two  for  laffen  ;  two  for  !5nnen.  3.  Explain  the  use  of  e^ 
and  3U  with  modals. 

148.  Review  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  @aben  ®te  m^  rufen  taffen?  2Ba^  folt  ba«? 
2.  ©a^  ncid^fte  yjlal  follten  ®te  laut  fpred^en,  mir  ijahtn  @ie 
ni(f)t  ^oren  !onnen.  3.  ®a^  tann  fein,  aber  i^  mag  biefc 
tangen  Slufgaben  nid^t.       4.  SBarum  (affen  @te*  fie  nid^t  t)on 


REVIEW.  81 

etnem  anberen  @^u(er  f^reiben?  5.  !Diefe^  aJZat  ^atte  id) 
feitte  ^tit,  aber  ba^  nd(i)fte  3)tol  merbe  id)  ttielleii^t  eine  ganje 
©tunbe  ^aben*  6.  5yJaturUc^  mdgen  tt)tr  unfere  beutfcf)en  @tun^ 
ben ;  bte  Slufgaben  foUen  ntc^t  fc^ii^er  feiti.  7.  ©eftern 
abenb  fatten  wiv  feine  ^dt ;  ijtutt  morgen  mitffen  iptr  arbeiten; 
morgen  frit^  n)erben  wix  fptetett  biirfen,  8.  ©ie  Xoi)ttx  be^ 
ge^rer^  ^at  ^eute  morgen  ein  nene^  fileib  ntarf)en  (a[fen  iDoIIen. 

9.  ®er  Snabe  [o(t  fef)r  arm  fein  ;  natiirli^  foltte  er  arbeiten. 

10.  3)iogen  @ie  biefe  fc^ijnen  SInnten  nidjt  ? 

(b)  1.  Of  course  I  shall  have  to  have  it  made.  2.  Well, 
perhaps  you  ought  to.  3.  He  had  w^anted  to  read  the  whole 
next  page,  but  he  was  not  permitted  to  translate  it.  4.  -We 
ought  to  have  a  whole  year  to  be  able  to  speak  German  well ; 
shall  we  be  able  to  ?  5.  Yesterday  afternoon  I  wanted  to 
play,  but  I  had  to  work  the  whole  afternoon.  6.  Yesterday 
evening  we  had  to  be  ready,  but  it  was  too  late  to  be  able  to 
play,  and  we  didn't  want  to  work.  7.  What  do  you  mean 
by  that  ?  You  mustn't  play  here  in  the  house.  8.  May  we 
play  in  the  garden,  or  must  we  stay  at  home  the  whole  day  ? 
9.  I  like  German,  but  I  have  to  have  my  exercises  written  by 
(t)on)  my  brother.         10.    He  is  said  to  be  very  poor. 

(c)  A  Story  ((gine  ©efc^ic^te).  The  children  had  wanted  to 
play  in  the  house,  but  they  had  not  been  permitted.  But  they 
had  been  able  to  go  into  the  garden  to  play  there.  They  had 
wanted  to  have  their  German  sentences  written  by  (Don)  a 
friend,  but  they  had  had  to  write  them  themselves  (felbft). 
The  whole  afternoon  they  had  been  permitted  to  play  in  the 
garden.     Then  their  mother  called  them. 

(cZ)  Write  the  above  story,  substituting  perfect  for  past 
perfect  tenses. 


82  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 


^cin  QJtttetlattb* 


3:reue  8iebe  bi^  jum  ®rabe 
@(^tt)5r'  ic^  bit  mit  ^erg  unb  §anb  ; 
2Ba^  ic^  bin,  unb  nja^  t(^  ^be, 
®anf  t(^  bir,  metn  33aterlanb. 

^xii)t  in  SBorten  nur  unb  8tebern 
Q\t  metn  §erj  jum  3)an!  berett : 
3Ktt  ber  3:at  tt^ill  i^'^  ertDibern 
©tr  in  9?ot,  in  Sani^Df  unb  (Streit. 

-3n  ber  greube  iDie  im  8eibe 
3{uf'  i(^'^  greunb  unb  geinben  gu : 
gtoig  finb  ttereint  tt)ir  beibe, 
Unb  mein  Zxo%  mein  ©litcf  bift  bu- 

Slreue  8iebe  bi^  jum  ®rabe 
@(^tt)5r'  id^  bir  mit  ^erj  unb  §anb ; 
2Ba^  irf)  bin,  unb  ira^  xi)  ^abe, 
S)anf  i(^  bir,  mein  33aterlanb ! 

—  Hoffmann  t)on  5attcr«le6cn. 


POSSESSIVE  AND  INTENSIVE  PRONOUNS. 


83 


LESSON  XXXI. 
Possessive  and  Intensive  Pronouns. 


(El^ret  bte  ^raucn,  fie  fled^ten  unJ)  mzhen 
fjtmmltfd?e  Hofen  ins  irbifd?e  'icbcn, — (St^iaer, 


Eeview  Sections  92,  93,  94,  98,  103,  104,  and  105. 

149.  The  Possessive  Pronoun  stands  for  a  noun.  It  is  some- 
times called  the  independent  possessive,  because  it  is  used  inde- 
pendently, without  its  noun.  Below  are  given  the  neuter 
forms  of  the  possessive  pronouns  and  the  corresponding  pos- 
sessive adjectives.     See  §  103. 

Possessive  Adjectives.  Possessive  Pronouns. 

mcinc!^  ba§  mcttt(i9)c 

bcine)^  ha^  tiettt(ig)c 

fcittC)^  t>a§  fcitt(tg)c 

t^rc!^  H^  t5r(tg)c 

tmf{e)rc)3  ha^  ttttfr(t0)c 

a^rc)^  ba^  3^r(t9)e 

curc^  ha§  cur(ig)c 

i^rc!^  t>a§  i^r(tg)e 

(a)  When  the  German  possessive  pronoun  is  preceded  by 
the  definite  article,  it  is  declined  like  a  weak  adjective.  The 
article  agrees  with  the  noun  which  the  pronoun  represents. 

SJJcitt  S3uti^  ift  aiif  H§  betttc  (bctnigc)  ift  ttcit*    My  book  is  old,  yours  is  new. 
SJlcittC  S3u(^er  ftitb  oR,  bic  bciucn  (bcittigcn)  flnb  ncu*    My  books  are 
old,  yours  are  new. 

(b)  If  the  article  is  not  used,  the  possessive  takes  the  end- 
ings of  a  strong  adjective  agreeing  with  the  noun  understood. 
The  forms  in  ?tg  cannot  be  used  without  the  article. 


my 

mem 

mine 

thy 

beitt 

thine 

his 

fettt 

his 

her 

ilir 

hers 

our 

unfer 

ours 

your 

CttCr 

yours 

their 

xiix 

theirs 

84  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

ayJeitt  SBttc^  ift  alt,  ^^vt§  (ba§  ^^rc,  ba^  S^ttgc)  ift  ttcu*    My  book  is 

old,  yours  is  new. 
®citt  SBrubcr  ift  ber  Scorer,  ntcincr  (bcr  ntcinc,  bcr  meittigc)  ift  ber 

Sti^iitet*     His  brother  is  the  teacher,  mine  is  the  pupil. 
3^  ^ie  mcitt  S3u^  ^ier,  after  ^o^aitn  i)ai  feinc^  (ba;^  feinc,  ba;^  fcinigc) 

tiedorctt*     /  have  my  book  here,  but  John  has  lost  his. 
^icr  ift  3^t^  $wt,  lifter  ntcincn  (bctt  mcinciv  ben  nteittigen)  l^abe  iti^  nit^t 

gefunben*     Here  is  your  hat,  but  mine  I  have  not  found. 

Note.  — The  same  rule  applies  also  to  ein  and  fein,  except  that  they  do 
not  take  the  suffix  =ig,  and  fein  cannot  be  preceded  by  the  article. 

Reiner  Don  i^ncn  flcl^t  e^.    No  one  {none)  of  them  sees  it. 
2)er  cine  ift  nic()t  ^ier.     One  {of  them)  is  not  here. 
@incr  ntng  l^ciratcn.     One  {of  them)  must  marry. 

150.  The  Intensive  Pronoun,  felbft  or  felber,  myself,  yourself y 
himself,  herself  itself  ourselves,  yourselves,  themselves,  is  inde- 
clinable. It  is  used  for  all  persons,  genders,  numbers,  and 
cases. 

(Sie  ift  felBer  gefommen*    She  came  herself 

SBir  ^aften  c§  felftft  gefe^en*     We  saw  it  ourselves. 

^(tf  ^aht  t^  felfter  (f elftft)  getan*    /  did  it  myself. 

(a)  When  felbft  precedes  its  noun,  it  means  even. 

<Sie  wag  felbft  bie  DfJofcn  nirfjt.    She  does  not  even  like  roses. 

@e(bft  feitt  S3ruber  tiebt  if^n  ni^i.    Even  his  brother  does  not  love  him. 

151.  Vocabulary. 

ber  5(n'5ug,  bie  5(tt'5itgc,  suit  ( of  berlie'ren,  uxUVf  berloren  (^aben), 

clothes).  to  lose. 

ber  ^odf  t^it  ^Mc,  coat.  franf,  sick. 

He'ben,  (iebte,  geliebt  (l^aben),  to  mn't>t,  tired. 

love.  xtidiff  rich. 

im'mer,  always.  genug',  enough. 


POSSESSIVE  AND  INTENSIVE  PBONOUNS.  85 

152.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  Qd)  liebe  meinen  alten  SSater,  aber  er  ift  imtner  tniibe 
ober  franf,  2.  §ter  ift  mein  neuer  9?o(f  ;  mein  -©ruber  ^at 
ben  [eintgen  [elbft  gemac^t.  3.  ©etbft  feine  Zoijttv  Itebt  ben 
aften  Ttann  nit^t  immer.  4.  2)?ein  $Ro(f  Itegt  au[  bent  SSttt ; 
aber  meine  greunbe  t)aben  bie  i^rigen  t)erIoren,  o.  ©er  eine 
^at  fetnen  ^ter  gefud^t,  ber  anbere  ben  fetnigen  ba,  aber  feiner 
Ijat  bie  Slnjiige  gefunben.  6.  9lber  fie  finb  reid)  genng,  unt 
neue  laufen  ju  fonnen* 

(&)  „§ier  ift  mein  neuer  2lnjug  ;  tDO  ^aben  @ie  ben  3^^rigen 
nta^en  laff en  ?" 

„Qii}  f)abe  meinen  felbft  gemai^t,  aber  mein  ©ruber  l^at  ben 
feinen  mac^en  laff  en.'' 

„§aben  @ie  ein  9}?effer?  S^  ^abe  meinen  t)ertoren,  unb  i(^ 
bin  niijt  xdd)  genug,  um  ein  neue^  ju  faufen/' 

„®ie  bitrfen  meinen  l^aben ;  id)  I)abe  jtDei." 

(c)  1.  This  is  my  old  coat ;  I  am  not  rich  enough  to  buy  a 
new  one.  2.  Where  is  yours  ?  Have  you  lost  it  (§  93)  ? 
3.  Your  brother  is  always  sick  or  tired;  mine  can  play  the 
whole  day.  4.  My  father  has  had  a  new  suit  made ;  I  had 
to  make  mine  myself.  5.  All  the  pupils  lost  their  books 
and  none  of  them  has  found  his.  6.  That  boy  was  very 
tired,  but  he  wasn't  sick  enough  to  stay  at  home. 

(d)  "Is  that  your  new  suit?     I  like  if 

"  Yes,  and  I  like  yours.     Did  you  buy  it  yourself  ? '' 
"  No,  my  father  bought  it  for  me.     I  am  not  rich  enough  to 
buy  such  a  suit." 

"That  boy  has  lost  his  coat.     Won't  you  give  him  yours  ?  '' 
"No,  he  can  look  for  his ;  perhaps  he  will  find  it." 
"  Yes,  he  is  always  losing  everything  (alle^)." 


86, 


ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 


LESSON  XXXII. 
Interrogative  Pronouns. 


IPentge  iPtffcn,  iptectel  man  toiffen  mug,  um  5U  ipiffen,  wk  mentg 
man  wei%.  —  (S^ric^hjort. 


153.  The  Interrogative  Pronouns  are  lt)er,  wJio;  iDa^,  wJiat; 
todi)^  which,  what;  and  Xoa^  fur  (ein),  what  kind  of  (a),  what. 
SBer  and  tt)a^  can  never  be  used  as  adjectives. 

(a)  Declension  of  3Ber. 

Masc.  and  Fein. 
N.  ttJcr,  lo/io. 

G.  ttieffen,  whose,  of  whom. 
D,   ttjcm,  ^0  whom. 
A.  tuen,  whom. 
As  in  English,  the  plural  is  the  same. 

(b)  SBet^er,  which?  what?  has  the  strong  endings  of  a  „ber" 
word :  — 


Neut. 
toa^,  what. 
tticffen,  of  what. 

t»a^,  lohat. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

For  all  genders. 

totl^tx 

tii>t\6)t 

totX^t^ 

ttield^e 

m\^t^ 

m\6)tx 

ttjc(ei|c§ 

tticlr^cr 

ttied^em 

melci^er 

mel^em 

txstX^tn 

ttclrfiett 

ttielc^e 

ttjelc^C)^ 

ttielc^e 

(c)  In  n)a^  fiir  etU,  the  ein  is  of  course  omitted  in  the  plural. 

2Ba!§  fiir  cin  alter  ^vA  ift  'tsa^  ?     What  kind  of  an  old  hat  is  that  f 
S95a§  fiir  etnen  9fJorf  faufen  8tc  ?     What  sort  of  a  coat  are  you  buying? 
993ai^  fiir  S3ii(i^cr  X)ai  cr  ?     TT^a^  sort  of  hooks  has  he? 

154.   Combination  of   Interrogative   and   Preposition.  —  When 
referring  to  an  inanimate  object,  U)o(r)'  is  used  with  preposi- 


INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS.  81 

tions,  instead  of  iDa^:  iDOtion,  of  what;  tt)omit,  with  what;  mxiu, 
in  what;  etc.  (See  §  98.)  Compare  whereof,  loherewith,  wherein, 
etc. 

155.  Use  of  ba§,  bie^  and  e^  with  feitl,  — In  speaking  of 
they,  these  or  those,  with  to  be,  German  generally  uses  the  neuter 
singular  where  English  has  the  plural. 

What  kind  of  books  are  those  ?    SSa;^  fiitr  Sitc^cr  ftnb  ba§  ? 
Which  children  are  those?    a93c(c^c  ^ittbcr  fittb  "^^^  ? 
Those  are  our  trees.     ^a§  ftnb  Uttfcrc  S3aitmc, 
These  are  hard  exercises.     ^k§  fittb  f(i^tticrc  5tttfgabCtt» 
What   boys  are  those  ?    Are   they   our  friends  9    S93c(ti^e  ^ttaBCtt  fittb 
ba§  ?    (Sittb  c^  ttttfcrc  JJrcttttbc  ? 

156.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  Sattttt,  bte  ^fitttttc,  tree.  H^  ^ett,  tsa^  ^ctt(e))g,  hay. 

ber  ^ttfr^,  Vxt  23iifc^c,  bush.  gc^b'rctt,  gc^ortc,  geprt  (^abett), 

bic  gattti'Uc,   bic  g'atttilictt   (four  to  belong  to,  with  dative, 

syllables), /amiZy.  ttiiffctt,    ttitt^te,    gcltttt^t    (^abett), 

'^a^  ^aar,  'isxt  ^aate,  pair;  tin  id)  meit^  btt  ttici^t,  cr  ttici^,  «o 

^jaar,  a  few,  a  couple  of  used  as  know,  have  knowledge  of  ' 

an  adjective,  not  affecting  the  fctt'ttCtt,  fattttte,  gcfattttt  (l^obett), 

following  case.  to  know,  be  acquainted  with. 

157.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  3Ba^  fitr  etn  ©aum  ift  ba^,  unb  tDcm  ge^ort  er? 
©iff en  @ie?  2.  ©a^  ift  fein  33aum  ;  ba^  ift  ein  «uf(f),  unb 
er  ge^ort  mtr.  3.  Unter  bem  53aum  fanben  tt)ir  ein  paar 
©amen,  fie  fa^en  auf  bem  §eu.  4.  3Bot?on  l^aben  @ie 
gefpro(^en?  ^i)  niei^  nid^t,  tt^a^  ®ie  fagten.  5.  3Kit 
h)el(f)en  greunben  finb  @ie  gefommen?  Q6)  fenne  fie  alle 
nirf)t.  6.  SBeld^e  ©amen  finb  ba^,  unb  ma^  fUr  einer  gamiUe 
ge()b'ren  fie? 


88  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

(b)  „SBa^  fitr  Su^er  ftnb  ba^,  unb  it)em  ge^bren  fie?" 
„  J)ie^  finb  bie  tneinigen;  fie  ge^oren  jener  ©ame  nirf)t/' 
„^ennen  ®te  ben  atteti  §errn?    3^c^  tod^  ntd^t,  trier  er  ift" 
,,aB^f(^en  §errn?    9?ein,  ic^  fenne  i^n  nic^t.'' 
„3lber  fie  fennen  bie  J)amen  feiner  gamilie,  ni(^t?'' 

(o)  1.  What  kind  of  trees  are  those,  or  are  they  (§  155) 
bushes  ?  2.  I  don't  know ;  I  don't  know  them ;  they  be- 
long to  our  teacher.  3.  Which  family  does  that  lady  belong 
to  ?  4.  I  don't  know,  but  I  know  a  couple  of  ladies  of  (t)on) 
another  family.  5.    What  kind  of  bushes  are  those  there 

beside  the  hay  ?  6.  I  don't  know,  but  they  belong  to  that 
old  man.     You  ought  to  ask  him. 

(d)  "  What  ladies  are  those  ?     Do  you  know  ?  " 

"  Who  are  they  ?     I  don't  know  them." 

"  What  are  you  talking  about  (§  154)  ?  They  belong  to  the 
family  of  your  friend,  don't  they  ?  " 

"  Yes,  but  I  don't  know  them.  They  (§  155)  are  a  couple  of 
beautiful  women." 

"  I  know  it.     You  ought  to  know  them." 

LESSON  XXXIII. 
Demonstrative  and  Indeclinable  Indefinite  Pronouns. 


2lus  ntd?ts  mirb  ntd^ts,  bas  mer!e  wolil, 
VOenn  aus  btr  tiwas  mcrben  foil.  —  ©laubiu^. 


158.  The  Demonstrative  Pronouns  are  biefer,  this;  {ener,  that; 
ber^  berjentge,  that,  the  one  (who);  berfelbe,  the  same;  folc^er, 
such  (a). 

(a)  The  demonstrative  ber  is  declined  as  follows  :  — 


DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS.  89 


Singular. 

Plural. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

For  all  genders. 

N.    ber 

Me 

bai^ 

bie 

G.     bcffCtt 

bcrctt 

bcffctt 

berer 

D.    bcm 

ber 

bent 

beneit 

A.     bCtt 

bte 

ha§ 

t>it 

Note.  It  is  like  the  definite  article  except  throughout  the  genitive 
and  in  the  dative  plural.  To  distinguish  it  from  the  article,  it  is  often 
written  with  spaces  between  the  letters :  b e r,  bie,  ba^.  This  is  the 
German  way  of  emphasizing  or  italicizing. 

(h)  For  the  declension  of  btefer  and  Jetter  see  Lesson  XXII. 

(c)  ©erjenige  and  berfelbe  are  composed  of  the  article  ber 
and  the  weak  adjectives  {etlige  and  felbe,  each  of  which  has  its 
regular  declension :  berietttge,  be^Jentgett,  bem}enigen,  etc. 

(d)  ©erjenige  may  be  used  instead  of  ber  when  the  demon- 
strative is  modified  by  a  phrase  or  clause.  But  in  conversation 
bet  is  preferred. 

The  one  on  the  table,  bO!§(jettige)  auf  bem  ^if^e* 
Those  that  I  saw,  bie  (jettigeit),  t>k  i^  fa^, 

159.  The  Indefinites.  —  The  following  indefinites  are  inde- 
clinable :  — 

(a)  @ttt)a^,  somethmg,  somewhatj  some,  any.  See  (e)  below. 
An  adjective  following  is  strong  and,  except  atlber,  always 
begins  with  a  capital. 

(£tnja§  @ttte§,  something  good. 
^itoa^  ^e(b,  some  {any)  money. 
(&iti>a^  attber(e)!§,  something  else. 

(h)  ^'fgenb,  which  is  used  with  some  other  word  to  give  it  a 
more  general  meaning. 

Srgeitb  ttma^^  anything  at  all. 

3»^9Cttb  iemanb,  irgenb  eiuer,  some  one,  any  one. 


90  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN, 

(c)  9Kan,  one,  they,  people.  It  is  used  only  in  the  nominative, 
and  is  often  best  rendered  by  the  passive  voice. 

93'latt  fagt*     They  or  people  say,  it  is  said. 
9Jlatt  hxttti.    It  is  requested. 

Note.  (Stneg,  eitient,  einen  are  used  for  the  geii.,  dat.,  and  ace.  of 
man;  ftci)  is  its  reflexive,  and  fein  its  possessive. 

(d)  aWe^r,  more, 

Wltf^V  ^ttbf  more  money.   . 
Wlcf)v  ^nabtrtf  more  boys. 

(e)  5yfi(^t^,  nothing,  not  anything.  9ti(^t^  is  always  used  in- 
stead of  a  negative  and  ettt)a^.  A  following  adjective  is 
strong  and,  except  attber,  always  begins  with  a  capital. 

^\6)i^  Sc^OttC)^,  nothing  beautiful. 

^\^i§  anbcr(c)^,  nothing  else. 

^X  \(i\j  m^i^.     He  did  not  see  anything, 

(/)  SBentger,  less,  fewer. 

SBemger  @clb,  less  money. 
SKcmger  ^inbcr,  fewer  children. 

(g)  The  following  generally  have  no  inflection,  except  an  ?^ 
in  the  genitive:  {ebermattn,  every  one,  everybody;  Jemattb,  some 
one,  somebody ;  TtietuaTlb,  no  one,  nobody,  not  anybody.  After 
iemanb  and  ntetnanb  adjectives  are  used  as  after  ettDa^  and 
nid)t^. 

Semanb  fjrcmbe^,  some  one  strange. 

9'Jicmattb  attbcr(c)!g,  no  one  else, 

160.  Vocabulary. 

glau'ben,    gtaubte,    gegtaubt   (^a=  when  it  is  a  person.    (So  is  not 

Bctt),  to   think,  to   believe,  with  used  with  glaubett:    /  think  so, 

the  accusative  when  that  believed  ^a^   glaube  idi,    or  simply,  i^ 

is  a  thing,  and  with  the  dative  glaube* 


DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS.  91 

^al^d^f  false  ;  wrong.  attber^  other^  in  the  sense  of  dif- 

(c^t,  last.  ferent  :  noc^  S3riJt,  more  bread; 

noc^,  yet ;  uor^  nid^t,  ?2o«  2/e« ;  with  nr>^  cine  Xaffc^  one  more  cup, 

nouns,  more,  or  other  in  the  sense  another  cup  ;  nis^  citt  (Stiirf,  owe 

of  more,  as  distinguished  from  more  piece,  another  piece. 

161.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  ©a^  ift  nt(J)t  btefelbe  Staffe;  fie  ^at  meniger  Saffee* 
2.  ^a,  ba^  gtaube  \6) ;  geben  ©ie  mtr  nod)  eine  S^affe ;  bie  te^te 
lt)ar  5U  !alt.  3.  ^ij  fe^e  nti^t^  galfd)e^  in  bie[er  Slufgabe, 
aber  \6)  glaube  bem  fletnett  @d^u(er  ni(f)t.  4.  2)?an  ^t  bie 
blauen  ^(umeu  in  nnferem  ©arten  gefunben;  glauben  ©ie  e^ 
nic^t?  5.  ®er  le^te  ®a^  ift  ni(^t  berfefbe;  id)  fe^e  etlDa^ 
ga(fd)e^  barin.  6.  ©lauben  ®ie  mir,  mir  finb  mit  ber  le^ten 
©tunbe  no(^  nii^t  fertig. 

(&)  „9Biff  irgenb  femanb  anber^  noc^  ein  ©titd  :93rot  l^aben?" 
„3a,  i(^  gtanbe,  aber  biefe^  foH  mein  le^te^  ©tiid  fein-    ^i) 
fann  nid^t^  me^r  effen/' 
„^6)  effe  no(^  ettm^  affiarme^.    ©iefe^  ift  ni(^t  ba^fefbe." 
„!Da^  glaube  id),  aber  ^^a^  auf  bem  3:ifd)e  mag  ic^  nid)t»" 
„®ann  follten  ©ie  ettt)a^  ^atte^  effen,'' 

(c)  1.  Haven't  you  translated  that  last  sentence  yet? 
2.  Yes,  but  I  think  I  translated  it  wrong.  3.  I  don't  be- 
lieve you ;  I  don't  find  anything  wrong  in  that  sentence. 
4.  These  sentences  are  not  the  same ;  this  one  has  fewer 
words  ;  that  one  has  more.  5.  Do  you  find  anything  wrong 
in  this  exercise  ?       6.    That  is  false ;  nobody  else  believes  it. 

(d)  "That  last  sentence  is  not  wrong.  Did  you  write  it 
yourself  ?  " 

"  Yes,  I  wrote  all  these  sentences.  To-morrow  I  shall  have 
to  write  another  exercise.'' 


92  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN, 

"But  you  have  not  yet  written  this  one.  Someone  else 
will  have  to  write  the  next  one." 

"I  think  so.  To-morrow  I  shall  write  fewer  sentences,  and 
then  I  shall  have  more  time." 

"  Then  you  will  not  write  anything  wrong." 

LESSON  XXXIV. 
Inflected  Indefinite  Pronouns. 


Was  bu  ntd?t  iptllft,  bag  man  bir  tu', 

Das  fiig'  aud?  fetnem  anbern  3U. — 0^nc^h)ort. 


162.    Inflected  Indefinites.  —  The  following  indefinites  usually 
take  the  regular  inflection  of  adjectives  :  — 

(a)  31II  is  usually  uninflected  before  ber  (demonstrative  or 
article)  or  a  possessive  pronoun.     See  §  124,  b. 

5(11  bcr  ^cc,  all  the  tea-. 

9Wtt  all  fcinett  ^iitbcnt,  with  all  his  children. 

(1)  2III  is  never  inflected  weak. 

All  that,  H2  alM. 

(2)  When  all  is  used  for  whole  or  entire,  the  German 
uses  ganj. 

All  day,  bcn  gatt^en  Xa^. 
All  the  year,  ^a§  gansc  ^a\)V. 

(3)  The  neuter  afle^,  used  alone,  means  everything,  all 

(b)  2lnber,  other,  different.      Another  (for  one  more)  is  no^ 

eitt-    See  §  160. 

Some  other  day,  tin  anbcrer  Xag. 
One  day  more,  noc^  citt  Xa^* 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS.  93 

(c)  S3etbe,  bothy  two,  is  preceded  by  the  article,  which  follows 
in  English. 

Both  the  girls,  btc  ^etbett  Wlahti^^tt. 
The  two  friends,  hit  Bcibcn  fjreuttbe* 

(d)  (Stnige  .  .  .  ,  some;  me^rere  .  .  ♦  ,  several 

Some  pens,  cittigc  ^thtvn. 
Several  boys,  mefjrcrc  ^naben* 

(e)  3SieI,  much,  many,  and  iDenig,  /lY^^e,  few,  are  usually  un- 
inflected  in  the  singular  ;  in  the  plural  they  are  inflected  like 
other  adjectives.  A  following  adjective  without  its  noun  is 
capitalized  and  takes  strong  neuter  endings.  See  §  159,  a 
and  e, 

25ic(  @c(b,  much  money  ;  35te(c  S3uci^et,  many  books. 
@itt  totnx^f  a  little  ;  SSScnigc  Xagc^  feio  days. 
Wxtl  ^nit^  S3r0t^  much  good  bread. 
25iel  %Mit^f  much  good. 

163.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  %t\\'izXf  bic  IJe^Ier,  mistake.  tticfcn,  ^/iere  is,   there  are,  fol- 

btc    ©rJ^tte'ftcr,     bic     S^weftern,  lowed    by  the    nominative   and 

sister.  used  of  something  in  a  definite 

^alb,  half;  half  the  sentence,  bcr  place. 

l^albe  6a^«  eS  gibt,  t§  ^ah,  t§  f^ai  gegeben, 

alSf  after  a  comparitive,  ^/law.  there  is,  there  are,  followed  by 

tturi^,  also,  besides,  too.  the  accusative  and  used  of  things 

x\^'ii%f  correct,  right.  less     definite.        ^a^     ^\W§  ? 

C§  x%  t§  fittb,  t^   mar,  C§  tft  9C=  TT/^a^  is  there  f     What's  up  9 

164.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  (S^  finb  tDentge  ge^Ier  in  btefem  ®a^,  aber  e^  finb 
me^r  ge^Ier  al^  in  Jenent  langen.  2.  ®iefe  beiben  ®a^e  finb 
aud^  ri^ttg,  aber  ber  anbere  ift  falfc^.      3.  @^  tt)aren  feine 


94  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

ge^Ier  in  eintgen  ©ci^en,  aber  titete  @d^e  fatten  mef)rere  gel^Ier* 
4.  SBa^  gtbf^?  gitiige  anbere  ©ci^e  t)aben  me^r  gel)ler  al^ 
btefe  beiben*  5,  3=(^  mag  t)tel  dJlHi)  in  meinem  ^affee* 
6«  g^  finb  me^rere  getter  in  biefem  le^ten  @a^,  unb  all  bte 
anberen  I)aben  einige  falfi^e  SBdrter* 

(b)  „gBa^  gibf^?    ^d)  t^erfte^e  ba^  alte^  ni(^t.'' 

„S^  [inb  ju  t)iele  ge^Ier  in  biefer  Slnfgabe.  3HI  bie  @a^e  finb 
falfd)." 

^^'d^  fe^e  Die!  galfrfjc^,  aber  i(^  glanbe,  bie  f)albe  Slufgabe  ift 
ric^tig/' 

„g^  finb  einige  getter  in  biefem  @afee  unb  jtnei  ge^Ier  in  ben 
beiben  le^ten*" 

„Qa,  aber  e^  finb  tDenige  ge^Ier  in  ben  anberen," 

(c)  1.  Some  men  have  much  money,  but  few  friends ;  others 
have  more  friends  than  money.  2.  What's  up  ?  Couldn't 
those  two  boys  write  all  the  words  right?  3.  There  are 
several  mistakes  in  the  other  sentence,  but  none  in  both  these. 
4.  My  little  sister  wrote  half  the  exercise  without  any  (irgenb 
einen)  mistake.  5.  There  were  more  mistakes  in  that  sen- 
tence than  in  this ;  this  one  is  right.  6.  That  one  is  also 
right,  I  think,  but  perhaps  there  is  something  wrong  in  it. 

(d)  "  Who  has  found  few  mistakes  in  his  exercise  ?  " 

"  Those  two  boys  have  more  mistakes  than  I.  I  translated 
the  last  sentence  right,  I  think." 

"  No,  half  the  sentence  is  wrong.  Does  anyone  see  anything 
wrong  ?  " 

"  Yes,  it  has  too  few  words.  He  must  write  another  word 
for  moreJ^ 

"  Can  anyone  find  anything  else  (nod^  tttoa^)  wrong  ?  Good ! 
Eead  the  sentence  and  translate." 


BE  VIE  IV.  95 

LESSON  XXXV. 
Review  of  Pronouns. 


tPer  vkhs  bringt,  tptrb  mand^em  etmas  brtngen, — @oct^e. 


165.  Review  Questions. 

(a)  1.  Give  all  the  German  translations  of  mine,  yours,  hers, 
theirs.  2.  How  do  these  differ  in  English  from  my,  your,  her, 
their  ^  3.  Give  the  rule  for  the  independent  use  of  ein  and 
lein.      4.  Give  the  two  uses  of  [elbft. 

(6)  1.  Explain  the  use  of  ba^,  bie^^  and  e^  with  [etn. 
2.  What  are  the  German  interrogative  pronouns  ?  3.  How 
do  they  combine  with  prepositions  ?  4.  What  other  combi- 
nation with  prepositions  have  you  learned  ? 

(c).  1.  What  peculiarities  has  an  adjective  following  ettDa^ 
or  nid^t^  ?  after  alte^  ?  after  t)iel  ?  2.  Give  two  translations 
for  the  two  brothers.  3.  How  are  other  and  another  expressed 
in  German  ?  4.  How  do  you  say  in  German  with  something 
good,  with  everything  good  f 

166.  Review  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  He  has  lost  his  new  coat,  but  mine  is  here.  2.  What 
did  you  do  with  yours  ?  3.  What  kind  of  books  are  those  ? 
Which  one  belongs  to  you  ?  4.  With  whom  and  of  what 
were  you  speaking  ?  5.  I  know  a  couple  of  ladies,  and  they 
are  both  very  beautiful.  6.  We  wanted  to  see  something  new, 
but  there  was  nothing  new  there.  7.  There  are  fewer  mis- 
takes in  that  last  sentence,  I  think.  8.  Won't  you  drink 
another  cup  of  tea  ?      Another  time,  thank  you.      9.  I  can  see 


96  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

much  good  in  those  two  girls.      10.  There  were  several  mis- 
takes in  these  last  sentences. 

(&)  A  Story  ((Sine  ®ef(f)i^te).  Half  the  class  wanted  to 
write  their  exercises  in  school.  The  others  wanted  to  write 
theirs  at  home.  Both  (bte  beibett)  could  read  the  sentences, 
but  they  could  not  translate  them  right.  Those  at  school 
made  many  mistakes  in  their  sentences.  And  those  at  home 
had  several  mistakes  in  theirs.  There  are  perhaps  some  sen> 
tences  without  mistakes.  I  think  so.  But  there  are  more  with 
something  wrong.  Who  will  be  able  to  find  it  ?  Has  any 
one  found  anything  wrong  in  these  last  sentences  ? 


g^  mar,  al^  ^tV  ber  ^immet 
©te  (Srbe  fttll  gefit^t, 
©a^  fie  im  ^Ilttenfc^immer 
2Son  il)m  nun  traumen  mu|t\ 

T)k  8uft  ging  buri^  bte  gelber^ 
S)te  St^ren  tDogten  facf)t, 
(S^  raufc^ten  letf  bie  9BdIber, 
(go  fternflar  toax  bie  9?a(^t^ 

Unb  meine  ®eete  fpannte 
SBeit  t^re  glitget  au^, 
glog  bur^  bie  ftttten  8anbe, 
211^  fI5ge  fie  na^  ^au^. 

—  ^c^epf),  ^rci^crr  t)on  (Std^cnborff. 


BEVIEW.  97 

®uter  3Konb,  bu  ge^ft  fo  ftille 
©urrf)  bie  atbenbinolfen  ^m ; 
©etne^  (Sc^o^fer^  tDeifer  SBiHe 
§te^  auf  jener  48a^n  bt(^  jte^n. 
geu^te  freunblirf)  jebem  9Kubett 
^n  ba^  ftitte  ^ammerlein ! 
Unb  bein  @(^tmmer  gie^e  grieben 
^n^  bebrcingte  §erj  l^inein ! 

®uter  ajfonb,  bu  tDanbetft  leife 
2ln  bem  blauen  ^tmmel^gelt, 
SBo  bic^  @ott  gu  feinem  ^rei[e 
§at  ate  8eucf)te  ^ingeftetft. 
3311(1  e  trauU(^  ju  un^  nieber 
!Dur(^  bie  ^a6)i  auf^  ©rbenrunb ! 
9H^  etn  treuer  SOZenf^ettpter 
Suft  bu  ®otte^  8iebe  !uub. 

®uter  a)?onb,  fo  fanft  unb  mtlbe 
©lanjeft  bu  im  ©ternenmeer, 
©alteft  in  bem  8id)tgefi(be 
^t\)x  unb  feierlic^  ein^er. 
a}Jen[(^entr5fter,  ©otte^bote, 
©er  auf  grieben^tDoIfen  t^ront ; 
3u  bem  fd^onften  3Jforgenrote 
P^rft  bu  un^,  0  guter  ajjonb ! 

—  ^arl(gn«ltm 


98  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

LESSON   XXXVI. 

Relative  Pronouns.    Dependent  Order. 


It)al^re  (Srogc  l^at  alletn, 

Wcv  bte  (Srogc  meffen  fann ; 

Wev's  rcrftel^t,  etn  grower  ITTann 

Un^  etn  fd^Itd^ter  XTtenfd?  3U  feirt.  —  <Siebct. 


167.  The  Relative  Pronouns  are  ber  and  Xodd)tX^  meaning 
who,  which,  that. 

(a)  The  relative  ber  is  declined  like  the  demonstrative  ber, 
except  that  the  genitive  plural  is  always  beretl  instead  of  berer 
(§  158,  a). 

The  relative  U)eld^er  is  declined  like  the  interrogative  tDeld^er 
(§  153,  b),  but  is  not  used  in  the  genitive.  The  genitive  of  the 
relative  ber  (beffen,  beren)  must  be  nsed  instead. 

(b)  The  relative  must  agree  with  its  antecedent  in  gender 
and  number,  but  its  case  depends  on  its  construction  in  the 
clause  it  introduces. 

^a^  ^an^f  ba^  (ttie(r5^c§)  irfi  fa^,  the  house  which  I  saw. 

^ic  S^lofc,  bte  (melti^e)  id)  \0i%  the  rose  which  I  saw. 

^er  Wlanttf  beffen  ^xii  i^  fanb,  the  man  whose  hat  I  found. 

^cr  Wanttf  hti  bem  (totl^cm)  i6)  tt>of}ntf  the  man  with  whom  I  live. 

^er  'ManUf  ben  (melc^en)  t^  fenne,  the  man  whom  I  know. 

168.  Compound  Relatives. — 2Ber  and  n)a^  (§  153,  a)  are 
both  used  as  compound  relatives,  meaning  he  who,  whoever, 
that  which,  whatever,  what. 

8©er  felne  ^rennbe  i^at,  ift  arm*    He  who  has  no  friends  is  poor. 
3ri^  ^abc  gctan,  niai^  iti)  inn  f  onnte.    /  have  done  what  I  could. 


RELATIVE  FliONOUNS.  99 

(a)  SBa^  is  also  generally  used  as  a  relative  after  neuter 
adjectives  and  neuter  pronouns. 

3^  ^cht  bit  ba^  Bcftc,  ttia§  id^  ^abc*    /  ^ive  ^o  ?/o?^  the  best  that  I  have 
@r  ^attc  ttiri^t^,  tua^  ir^  i^abcn  ttiotttc*    ^e  /iad  nothing  that  I  wanted. 

(b)  When  referring  to  an  inanimate  object,  lt)o(r)=  is  gener- 
ally used  with  prepositions  instead  of  a  relative  pronoun : 
tt)0t)0tl,  of  which;  tDorttt,  in  which;  iDOtttit,  with  which;  tPOfUr, 
for  which ;  etc.     Compare  §  98  and  §  154. 

169.  The  Use  of  Relatives  in  German  differs  from  the  Eng- 
lish use. 

(a)  The  relative  is  never  omitted  in  German  as  in  English. 

The  house  Thought,  \sa^  ^dw^f  'i>a^  x^  gcfaitft  ^a^e* 
The  man  you  saw,  bcr  Wlami,  bctt  Sic  gcfc^ctt  ^aBctt* 

(&)  When  the  antecedent  is  first  or  second  person,  (1)  it 
may  be  repeated  directly  after  the  relative,  the  verb  agreeing 

with  it. 

I  who  did  this,  idj,  bet  i^  t^it§  ^tian  f^ahc. 
You  who  know  that,  btt,  ber  tsM  ba§  lueilft. 

(2)  If  the  antecedent  is  not  repeated,  the  verb  is  in 
the  third  person. 

Sri),  bcr  bic^  gctan  ^ai^  I  who  did  this. 
^Mf  bet  \s(i^  ttJci^,  you  who  know  that. 

(c)  Commas  always  set  off  the  relative  clause  in  German. 

170.  Dependent  Order.  —  In  the  dependent  order,  the  per- 
sonal part  of  the  verb  (in  compound  tenses,  the  auxiliary) 
stands  at  the  end  of  the  clause.  This  order  is  used  in  all  de- 
pendent clauses.  These  are  introduced  either  by  a  relative 
pronoun,  or  by  a  subordinating  conjunction  (ba,  tDetl,  IDO,  etc.). 
They  are  set  off  from  the  main  clause  by  commas.  Illustra- 
tions :  All  the  preceding  examples  in  this  lesson. 


100  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

(a)  Eemember  that  the  main  clause  is  inverted  when  the 
dependent  clause  precedes. 

When  he  saw  me,  he  went  home.    5(1^  er  mid}  falft,  gtttg  tx  nad)  ^aufc. 
As  you  have  no  book,  I  will  give  you  mine,     ^a  <Bxt  f eitt  S3tt(^  ^a^ett, 
merbc  id^  ^f^mn  ba§  mcittc  gc^cn* 

171.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  IJifr^,  t>te  |?tfc^c,  fish.  \>a2  ^t%  hit  9?cftcr,  nest, 

bic  SBic'ne,  btc  Sicncit,  6ee.  f(^ttctt,  /as^,  quickly. 

bie  fJUe'ge,  bic  JJUcgen,  j^y.  fan'gcn,  fing^  gefangcit  (^abcn),  cr 

ha§  ^nf^n,  bic  ^ii^ncr,  chicken.  fftngt,  «o  ca^c/i. 

172.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  9Kit  etner  gtiege  ^abe  id)  ben  gifrf)  gefangen,  ber  tm 
SBaffer  tear*  2.  33atb  iDerben  tt)ir  bie  aSogel  fe^en,  bie  in  bent 
9?efte  liegen-  3.  J)er  ^nabe,  ber  bie  gifi^e  gefangen  ^at,  ging 
fd^nett  na(^  ganfe.  4.  ^c^  ^abe  .^fltten  nirf)t^  gelefen,  n)a^  id) 
felbft  ni(^t  itberfe^en  fonnte.  5.  ®ie  Sinber,  ntit  benen  ic^  in 
bie  @^nte  ge^e,  ijahtn  §it^ner  nnb  53tenen  jn  §anfe.  6.  ©er 
SJogel,  beffen  ®i  n)ir  in  bem  9?efte  fanben,  [a§  auf  bent  Sannt. 

(b)  ,,Sontnten  @ie  fdtinett!  ^alb  fijnnen  iDir  bie  335gel  fe^en, 
beren  Sleft  in  biefent  93annt  ift." 

„(Sinb  ba^  bie  93oge{,  bie  mir  geftern  nt(^t  fangen  fonnten?" 

„9lein,  bie^  finb  anbere  3S5geI,  bie  trir  geftern  niijt  gefe^en 
^aben." 

„®e^5ren  3^tten  bie  Sienen  nnb  bie  §it^ner,  bie  xdj  int  ®arten 
fe^e  ?'' 

„Qa,  ba^  finb  aHe  bie  nteinigen/' 

(c)  (Write  both  ber  and  treld^er  for  all  relatives.)  1.  Soon 
we  shall  catch  all  the  flies  that  are  in  this  room.        2.  Are 


INDIRECT  QUESTIONS.  101 

those  the  fishes  that  you  caught  yesterday  in  that  little  lake  ? 

3.  You  read  that  page  too  fast,  that  I  had  not  yet  translated. 

4.  There  is  in  this  sentence  something  hard,  which  I  cannot 
translate  fast.  5.  There  are  bees  and  chickens  in  our  garden, 
and  some  birds  that  have  made  their  nests  in  a  big  tree. 
6.  My  little  sister  quickly  caught  the  fish  that  she  saw  in  the 
water. 

(d)  "  Have  you  seen  any  one  who  caught  more  fish  than  I  ?  " 
"  I  don't  know.     How  many  did  (§  61)  you  catch  ?  '^ 
"I  caught  all  (§  169,  a)  there  were  in  the  lake,  I  think." 
"  I   don't  believe  it.     It  is  too  hard  to  catch  all  the  fish 
one  sees." 

"  But  I  caught  a  lot  (t)itlt),  and  I  caught  them  very  fast." 


LESSON  XXXVII. 
Indirect  Questions.     Review  of  Lessons  I.-XV. 


3^  voex%  ntd?t,  was  foil  es  hebzutzn, 
Pag  id?  fo  traurtg  bin.  —  ^etnc. 


173.  Indirect  Questions.  —  When  a  direct  question  is  put 
into  a  subordinate  clause  in  German,  it  takes  the  dependent 
order. 

(Direct)    Where  is  your  hook  ?    2Bo  ift  3^t  25ttti^  ? 

(Indirect)   I  do  not  know  where  your  book  is.     ^^  ttici§  nidlt,  ttio  ^f^x 

fSn^  ift. 
(Direct)    Why  did  he  do  that  ?    Watnm  f^at  cr  ba^  qttan? 
(Indirect)    He  told  me  why  he  did  that,    (£r  f^at  mix  gefagt,  ttiarum  Ct 


102  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN, 

174.  The  Article  with  Parts  of  the  Body.  —  When  words  for 
parts  of  the  body  are  used  in  the  predicate,  German  generally 
has  the  definite  article  and  the  dative  of  a  personal  or  reflex- 
ive pronoun  (fi(i))  where  English  has  the  possessive. 

/  broke  my  hand,    ^d)  f^ahc  ntir  btc  $attb  ^thvo^tn. 

He  hurt  his  foot,    @r  ^at  fic^  belt  ^x\^  ticrle^t 

Did  you  have  your  hair  cut  ?    ^aft  btt  bir  H§  ^aav  fd^tieibctt  (affctt  ? 

175.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  ^ttt'gcr,  btc  ??itt9Ct,  finger.  singular  and  plural,  and  for  the 

hex  gni^,  bic  ^ii^tf  foot.  polite  form  ©te,  himself,  herself, 

hit  S5a'rfe,  bic  ^adtxi,  cheek.  themselves,  yourself,  etc. 

bic  2xp'pc,  bic  Si^^ctt,  Up.  liitf,  left. 

t^a§  ^aaXf  bic  ^aarc,  hair,  used  in  rci^t,  right  (as  opposed  to  left). 

both  singular  and  plural  for  hair.  brc'ti^Ctt,  brari^,  gcbroti^Ctt  (f^abctt), 

ha§  S3cin,  bic  S3cittc,  leg.  cr  bric()t,  to  break. 

\xdjf  reflexive  pronoun  for  the  da-  bcr(ct'5Ctt,    bcrlc^tc,    bcrlc^t    (I)a= 

live  and  accusative,  third  person  bctt),  to  hurt. 

176.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  ©iff en  @te,  toann  ber  8ef)rer  fi^  ben  Heinen  ginger 
unb  ba^  red)te  Setn  gebrodien  l^at.  2.  ®a^  Stnb  fiel^t  nid^t, 
\va^  er  mtt  einer  langen  geber  anf  ba^  "ipaijier  f(f)reibt.  3.  Qd) 
berfte^e  nidjt,  Wit  id)  mir  ben  linfen  gu^  unb  ba^  re(^te  ©ein 
berle^t  ^abe.  4.  SBir  mu^ten  nid)t,  mann  bie  ©ante,  bie  Sl^utter 
be^  jungen  llnaben,  geftorben  ift  5.  Qii)  lerne  f^on  jlDci  3^al)re 
!5)eutf(^,  urn  gut  lefen  ju  fonnen,  aber  id)  berfte^e  nid^t,  tDarum 
®ie  e^  lernen.  6.  SBiffen  ®ie  ni(^t,  \va^  ber  SSater  be^  ©d^ii^ 
ler^  bemgerrn  gegebeti  ^at? 

(b)  „^i)  berftef)e  ni^t,  tDarunt  3'^re  Heine  ©(^l^efter  folc^e  rote 
53acfen  unb  fold)  f(^one^  §aar  Ijat." 

„3=(f)  iDei^  and)  nic^t»    Qijxt  git^e  unb  8ippen  finb  nidf)t  f(^bn." 
„SBiffen  ®ie,  wit  fie  fief)  bie  ginger  ber  red^ten  §anb  berlefet  ijaV 


CONJUNCTIONS.  103 

„5)fetn,  after  id^  toiU  fie  fragen,  wit  fie  fid)  bie  ginger  gebro(^en 

„3d)  fe^e  ntdjt,  *tt}arum  @ie  nod)  nic^t  gefragt  ^ben/' 

(c)  1.  I  don't  know  how  I  hurt  my  little  finger  and  my  left 
foot.  2.  You  saw  where  he  had  broken  his  right  leg,  didn't 
you  ?  3.  That  little  boy  doesn't  understand  why  his  sister 
has  such  red  cheeks  and  such  beautiful  hair.  4.  Of  course 
her  lips  are  red,  but  I  don't  see  why  she  has  red  cheeks.  5.  I 
have  been  studying  German  half  a  year;  I  don't  know  when 
I  shall  be  able  to  speak  it  well.  6.  I  hurt  my  right  foot, 
but  I  broke  my  left  leg. 

(d)  ''  Well,  did  you  break  your  finger  ?  " 

"No,  I  didn't  break  my  finger,  but  I  hurt  my  left  foot." 

"  I  don't  understand  how  you  did  that." 

"  There  was  a  knife  on  the  floor  and  I  didn't  see  it." 

"  Then  you  will  not  be  able  to  play  to-morrow." 

"  No,  I  don't  know  when  I  shall  be  able  to  play." 

LESSON  XXXVIII. 
Conjunctions.    Review  of  Lessons  XVI.-XXV. 


VOtnn  IUenfd?en  ausetnanbergebn., 

So  fagcn  fie  :  2luf  SBiebcrfel^n.  —  g^euc^tcrgtebcn. 


177.  The  Coordinating  Conjunctions,  unb,  and;  aber  (fonbem), 
hut;  benn,  for;  and  ober,  or,  do  not  affect  the  order.  They 
are  used  in  compound  sentences. 

^6)  !am,  mx\s  er  gtng  ttar^  ^attfc*    /  came,  and  he  went  home. 
@r  nttt§  fontmcn,  obcr  it^  mctbc  naci^  ^aufe  ge^ett*    He  must  come,  or  I 
shall  go  home. 


104  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

(a)  When  hut  in  English  introduces  a  contrast  with  a  pre- 
ceding negative,  that  is,  when  you  can  say  "  on  the  contrary/^ 
German  uses  fonbern  instead  of  aber, 

@jr  ift  ni^t  mcin  JJrcunb,  fonbern  niein  fjcinb*    He  is  not  my  friend^ 

hut  my  enemy. 
8ic  ift  nt^t  W^f  fonbern  fia^Hti^,  aBer  fie  ift  reijenb.    She  is  not 

heautiful,  hut  homely,  hut  she  is  charming. 

(1)  fonbern  is  always  used  in  the  correlative,  not  only  .  .  .  hut  also. 
^ir  traren  nic^t  nur  arm,  fonbern  and)  IranL  We  were  not  only  poor, 
hut  also  sick. 

178.  Subordinating  Conjunctions  are  used  in  complex  sen- 
tences and  are  followed  by  the  dependent  order  (§  170).  The 
commonest  ones  are  al^,  ba,  ba^,  e^e,  tiad^bem,  ob,  fobatb,  tna^- 
renb,  tnetl,  and  ipenn* 

^^  font,  tf^t  er  nati^  ^onfe  ^xn^.    I  came  hefore  he  went  home. 
@r  nttt^  fommen,  tneit  \6)  na^  ^anfe  ge^e*   He  must  come,  hecause  I  am 
going  home. 

179.  Vocabulary. 

al^f  when,  used  only  of  past  time.  tnenn,     when,    used    generally    of 

ha,  as,  usually  giving  a  reason.  present  time,  but  in  the  sense  of 

c!^e,  he/ore.  whenever,  also  of  the  past. 

na^bent',  after.  benn,  for,  followed  by  the  normal 

ohf  whether,  if.  order. 

fobolb',  as  soon  as.  fon'bern,   hut    (instead),   hut   (on 

mii^'renb,  while.  the  contrary),   followed  by  the 

meil,  hecause.  normal  order. 

180.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  @^e  er  fetn  SSmi)  auf  ba^  "^vdt  fegte,  fe^te  er  feine 
@(^u]^e  unter  bte  ®anf.  2.  9la^bem  tdf)  etn  fteine^  ®oot 
gema(^t  ^tte,  ging  id)  bamit  ndc^  bem  See.  3.  211^  feine 
aJiutter  gegangen  tnar,  a^  tnein  ^ruber  fein  ©rot,  toeit  er  e^  md)t 


CONJUNCTIONS.  105 

moi^te,  4.  SBenn  n)tr  gleif^  ^aben,  effe  ti$  e^  nic^t  mtt 
meinem  SKeffer,  fonbern  mtt  einer  ®abel,  5.  SBir  ^ben  eiti 
^funb  gute^  93rot  gefauft,  it)eit  tt)ir  nt(i)t^  ju  §aufe  flatten. 
6.  SBenn  tnir  bet  3^nen  fittb,  trttt!en  tt)tr  fetnen  ^affee,  fonbertt 
See. 

(b)  „g^e  @te  ba^  ©titd  gletfi^  effett,  mitffeti  (Ste  un^  etti 
®ra^  falte  mHi)  gebett,'^ 

„2lber  i^  ^abe  fetn  ®Ia^  9)Jtlc^,  fonbern  etne  STaffe  njarmen 

„®obaIb  @te  nn^  ba^  gegeben  f)aben,  mitffen  toxv  ge^en,  ba  e^ 
f|)at  H)trb/' 
„S03d^renb  tc^  fertig  merbe,  burfen  ©te  ^ter  bleiben/' 
„5>tac^bem  iDtr  gegangen  finb,  follten  @te  ntc^t  arbetten." 

(c)  1.  How  many  legs  has  the  bee  ?  2.  After  the  boy  has 
eaten  that  piece  of  bread,  he  will  come  with  us  into  the  next 
room.  3.  While  you  are  reading,  I  will  go  to  the  city,  for 
I  must  buy  a  pound  of  meat.  4.  It  isn't  meat,  but  fish  that 
you  must  buy  when  you  go  to  the  city.  5.  When  you  are 
ready,  we  ought  to  write  tliis  exercise,  because  our  teacher  is 
coming.  6.  When  she  had  fetched  a  piece  of  bread,  she 
drank  her  cup  of  hot  tea. 

(d)  "  Well,  when  you  are  ready,  I  will  read.'^ 

"As  soon  as  you  read,  I  can  translate,  because  I  know  these 
words.''  ^ 

"  While  you  are  translating,  the  other  pupils  may  write 
their  exercises,  for  they  will  have  plenty  of  [much]  time.'' 

"  After  you  have  read  the  sentences  and  before  you  write 
them,  you  must  translate." 

"  Well,  as  I  am  ready,  I  can  read  now." 

"  You  mustn't  read  this  exercise,  but  the  next  one." 


106  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

LESSON  XXXIX. 

Dependent  Order  for  Modals.     Review  of 
Lessons  XXVI.-XXX. 


Drum  frol^lid?  in  ben  Kampf  l^inetn  ! 

VOev  fiegen  tpill,  mug  ftcrben  fonnen. 
3a,  foil  bas  £eben  red?t  gebetl^n 

XHug  man  bem  Cobe  aud?  was  gonnen.— ^ru^. 


181.  Modals  in  Dependent  Sentences. — In  the  dependent 
order  in  simple  tenses,  the  auxiliaries  of  mode  stand  at  the 
end  of  the  clause,  just  like  auxiliaries  of  tense.  In  a  com- 
pound tense  of  the  modal,  when  there  is  a  dependent  infinitive, 
the  tense  auxiliary  (t)aben  or  t^erben)  stands  just  before  the 
rest  of  the  verb  phrase  (^•'  two  infinitives  "). 

He  told  me  why  he  had  to  go.    (^v  fagtc  mir,  ttiaruitt  er  gc^cn  ntugtc* 
Here  is  an  exercise  you  will  have  to  write.    §icr  ift  eitte  ^ufgabe,  hit  btt 

mirft  f d^rcibctt  miiff en*  # 

That  is  the  man  who  wanted  to  buy  my  horse,    ^a^  ift  tstx  ^atttt,  ber 

ittcttt  ^ferb  \)(ii  faufcn  ttiottctt* 

(a)  In  translating  two  or  more  German  infinitives  at  the  end  of  a 
clause,  always  begin  at  the  end,  then  take  the  one  next  to  the  end, 
then  the  third  from  the  end. 

^6)  \jo}it  t\x6)  fpielen  l^oren  tonncn,    I  was  able  to  hear  you  play. 

182.  The  Use  of  ba^.  —  The  conjunction  ba^,  not  to  be  con- 
fused with  the  demonstrative  or  relative  ba^,  introduces  de- 
pendent clauses. 

He  knows  that  I  shall  come.    ®r  ttiei^,  ba§  \(i)  fomtucu  mcrbc* 

/  saw  that  you  were  tired,    ^d)  f^ahc  gcfejctt,  bag  8ic  mitbc  tuarctt* 


DEPENDENT  ORDER   FOR   MODALS.  107 

183.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  Sut^'ftaBc,  ^c§  ^itr^ftaBctt(^),  bcbcu'tctt,      licbctttete,      bebeutct 

btc    S3ttr^fta!Dett,    letter    (of    the  (^abcn),  «o  meaw  (of  things), 

alphabet).  hn^^iaUt'xtn^  btt^ftabicr'tc,  Buri^- 

bcr  ^oufonant',  bc§  ^ottfottatt'tett,  ftabicrt'  (^aben),  to  spell. 

btc  ^oiifonantcn,  consonant.  loi^,   Zoose ;  ^/ie  matter.     28ai§  tft 

bcr  2^o!a(',  bic  ^ofa(c,  vowel  io§  ?     WhaVs  the  hatter  f 

hvtif  three.  nnVf  only. 

184.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  Qdi)  tDU^te,  ba^  ber  anbere  (Siguier  bte  SBorter  ntd^t  ^at 
buc^ftabieren  n^ollen.  2.  2Ba^  i[t  (o^  ?  g^  finb  nur  ttter  SSud}-- 
ftabett  in  btefem  2Borte ;  ba^  finb  nid^t  genug,  3.  23er[te^ft 
bu  ni(J)t,  ba^  brei  ^onfonanten  unb  jl^ei  2So!a(e  bavin  ge{)oren, 
4.  @iet)ft  bu,  ba^  e^  nic^t  lie,  fonbern  lay  bebeutet?  5.  dtwa^ 
ift  lo^ ;  e^  finb  jiDotf  gel)(er  in  biefer  3lufgabe.  6.  ^d^  ^abe 
^^nen  gefagt,  baj3  i(^  fie  ni(^t  ri(f)tig  f)abe  itberfe^en  fonnen, 

(6)  „3Ba^  ift  lo^?  @ie  tDiffen,  ni^t  mi)x,  ba^  ©ie  ba^,  SSort 
nid)t  ^aben  bui^ftabieren  fonnen.'' 

^^'a,  aber  id)  tierfte^e,  ira^  e§  bebeuten  mu^.'' 

„@e^en  ®ie,  ba^  e^  nur  fitnf  ^uc^ftaben,  jtDei  SSofale  unb 
brei  Sonf onanten,  l^aben  barf  ? " 

„9lber  e§  finb  ^ier  anbere  ©i^iiler,  bie  e^  ni(f)t  ^aben  bud^- 
ftabieren  Jt)o(Ien»'' 

„Q^  fe^e,  ba^  etma^  lo^  ift,  tvtnn  ©ie  ni^t  bui^ftabieren 
fonnen*" 

(c)  1.  What's  the  matter  ?  Can't  you  spell  that  next  word  ? 
2.  There  are  only  three  letters  in  it,  two  consonants  and  one 
vowel.  3.  I  saw  that  he  hadn't  been  able  to  spell  it. 
4.  You  know  that  that  word  must  not  have  three  vowels,  but 
three  consonants.         5.  I  hear  that  you  will  be  permitted  to 


108  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

play   only  in   the   garden.         6.  The  teacher  knew  that  the 
pupil  had  not  wanted  to  spell  all  those  words. 

(d)  "What's  the  matter?  Don't  you  know  that  that  sen- 
tence doesn't  mean  anything?" 

"  Yes,  now  I  see  that  I  wasn't  able  to  translate  it  right." 

"I  think  that  you  didn't  want  to  translate  it.  Can  you 
spell  all  the  words  ?  " 

"No,  there  are  too  many  consonants  and  too  few  vowels  in 
that  last  word." 

"  Well,  I  see  that  you  have  been  able  to  find  your  mistakes. 
Now  we  will  translate." 


LESSON  XL. 
Review  of  Lessons  XXXI.-XXXVI. 


Die  irtenfd?en,  bte  btc  Hul^e  fud?en,  bte  ffnbcn  Hul^e  ntmmermet^r, 
IDetl  fie  bie  Hul^e,  bie  fie  fud^en,  in  (Eile  jagen  t>or  fid?  l^er. 

________  —muUtx. 

185.  The  Modified  Demonstrative.  —  In  conversation,  German 
generally  uses  ber  for  the  demonstrative,  when  this  is  modified 
by  a  phrase  or  clause  (§  158,  d).  In  more  formal  language 
berjenige  may  be  used.  Kemember  that  this  is  the  regular 
translation  for  the  one,  the  ones,  and  that  German  never  omits 
the  relative.     See  §  128,  d. 

Where  are  those  {the  ones)  I  gave  you  9    993o  fittb  bic,  ^\t  \^  3^ttett  gaB  ? 
Is  he  the  one  (xohom)  you  saw  ?    ^ft  er  htx,  belt  (bcrjctttgc,  tiie(ri^ett) 

(Sic  fa^en? 
She  is  not  the  one  who  came.    Sic  ift  ni^t  bic,  bic  (bicjcttigc,  tDtltift) 

tarn. 


EEVmW.  109 

186.  Review  Questions. 

(a)  1.  Name  the  relative  pronouns  in  German.  2.  How 
do  they  combine  with  prepositions  ?  3.  What  is  used  as  a 
relative  after  neuter  adjectives  and  neuter  pronouns  ?  4.  Name 
the  indefinite  compound  relatives. 

(b)  1.   What  punctuation  precedes  the  relative  in  German  ? 

2.  May   the    German   relative    be    omitted,  as   in  English? 

3.  How  is  the  relative  for  the  first  or  second  person  used? 

(c)  1.  What  word  order  follows  the  relative?  2.  What 
kind  of  conjunctions  are  followed  by  the  same  order  as  the 
relative?  3.  How  do  compound  tenses  of  the  modals  in 
dependent  clauses  differ  from  compound  tenses  of  other  verbs 
so  used  ? 

187.  Review  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  !j)a^  finb  bte  SBCrter,  bie  xoxx  mi)i  l^aben  fiuc^ftabieren 
ttjotten.  2.  ^\i  btefer  Heine  @(f)ii(er  ber,  ber  fit^  ba^  33etn 
gebrod^en  ^at?  3.  %{^  ber  Snabe  fa^,  ba^  er  bie  Slufgabe  itber= 
fe^en  fonnte,  fa^  er  ben  niii^ften  ®a^.  4.  ^ft  btefer  5Ro(J  ber 
(berjenige),  ben  @te  ^aben  derfoufen  tr>oHen?  5.  9^ein,  ba^  ift 
ber,  ben  x6)  geftern  fiir  nteinen  33ruber  l^abe  fanfen  miiffen. 

6.  ®er  Snabe  xoM^it  ntd)t,  ba^  ba^  ba^  ri(f)ttge  SBort  lt)ar. 

7.  2Btr  t)erfte^en  nti^t,  n)a^  @te  l^aben  fagen  trotten.  8.  ©a 
t(^  ba§  Sort  m6)i  ^abe  bnt^ftabieren  fonnen,  ^be  tc^  e6  nt^t 
tefen  tDotfen.  9,  ^6)  fe^e  nti^t,  trie  iDir  SBbrter  of)ne  3So!aIe 
but^ftabteren  !5nnen.  10.  T)te,  bte  bte,  bte  bte  gef)Ier  gema(i)t 
^aben,  fe^en,  bitrfen  nac^  §aufe  ge^en. 

(p)  1.  That  man  isn't  the  one  I  saw,  but  another.  2.  When 
we  heard  the  boy  spell,  we  didn't  know  what  was  the  matter. 


110  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

3.  Are  these  children  the  ones  whom  we  saw  playing  in  the 
garden  yesterday  ?  4.  Yes,  those  are  the  ones  you  saw,  but 
I  do  not  know  where  they  were  playing.  5.  As  you  haven't 
been  able  to  spell  those  words,  perhaps  you  will  be  willing  to 
read  the  next  sentence.  6.  No,  that  is  the  one  that  I  hadn't 
been  able  to  translate. 

(c)  A  Letter.  —  Dear  (lieber)  father:  —  I  must  write  you 
(§  10)  what  we  did  yesterday  in  school.  We  had  a  long 
exercise,  and  it  was  not  the  one  we  had  studied.  The  teacher 
asked  (fragen):  "Who  is  ready?"  and  no  one  could  trans- 
late. But  when  he  asked  me,  I  was  able  to  spell  all  the 
words  in  the  first  sentence.  After  I  had  spelled  the  words,  he 
asked  (Mtten)  me  to  read.  And  after  I  had  read,  I  found  that 
I  could  translate  the  sentence.      But  the  other  pupils  could 

not  translate. 

Your  son, 

Karl. 


®a^  ^^loft  am  aJleet* 

§aft  bu  ba^  ®d)Io^  gefel^en, 
©a^  f)o^e  @(^Io^  am  SJ^eer? 
©olben  unb  roftg  me^en 
S)ie  aSoIfen  briiber  ^er. 

S^  m5rf)te  ftd^  niebernetgen 
Qn  bie  |)3tegelflare  glut, 
@^  m5rf)te  ftreben  unb  ftetgen 
^n  ber  SlbenbtDolfen  ®Iut* 


REVIEW.  Ill 

3)a§  ^o^e  @i^Io^  am  9)?eer, 
Unb  ben  3Konb  bariiber  fte^en 
Unb  9iebet  mett  umt)erJ' 

5)er  9Bmb  unb  be^  SJJeere^  SBaHen, 
©aben  fie  frifc^en  Slang? 
SSerna^mft  bu  au^  ^o^en  fatten 
(Saiten  unb  geftgefang? 

„!Dte  SBinbe,  bie  SBogen  afle 
8agen  in  tief er  9tu^' ; 
ginem  Slagelieb  au^  ber  §aHe 
§5rf  ii)  mit  3^ranen  iu/' 

©a^eft  bu  oben  gef)en 
©en  Sonig  unb  fetn  ©entail? 
S)er  roten  9JidnteI  SSe^en, 
!Der  golbnen  kronen  @tral^I? 

git^rten  fie  nii^t  mit  SBonne 
©ne  f^ijne  .^ungfrau  bar, 
§errlid)  mie  eine  Sonne, 
©tra^Ienb  im  golbnen  §aar? 

„9Bo^I  fa^  id)  bie  ©Item  hdht, 
D^ne  ber  kronen  8i(^t, 
^m  fd^mar^en  J^rauerffeibe ; 
©ie  ^ungfrau  fa^  id)  nid^t" 


112  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

LESSON  XLI. 
Separable  and  Inseparable  Verbs. 


Das  fommt  barauf  an.     That  depends. 


188.  Inseparable  Verbs  differ  from  simple  verbs  in  only  one 
way  —  they  never  take  the  prefix  ge-  for  the  past  participle. 
The  inseparable  prefix  is  always  directly  before  the  verb, 
attached  to  it,  and  (except  mi^-)  is  never  accented.  The  insep- 
arable prefixes  are  be^,  emp^,  ent-,  er-,  ge-,  mi^^,  t)er*,  jer^* 

Synopsis  of  Inseparable  Verbs. 
Weak.  Strong. 

Pres.            xd^  tx^a^Uf  I  telL  id^  tttv^icf^tf  I  understand. 

Past.           x^  tv^mttf  I  told.  x^  Ucrftanb,  /  understood. 

Put.          .  x^   nicrbc   cr^a^lctt,   /  id^  ttjcrbe  tierftc^en,  I  shall  under- 

shall  tell.  stand. 

Perf.           iri^  ^aht  cr^a^lt,  I  have  i^  fjaht  Uctftanbctt,  I  have  under^ 

told.  stood. 

Past  Perf.  i(^  i)aiit  crjri^lt,  /  had  x^  ^attc  Ucrftanbctt,  /  had  under- 
told,  stood. 

Put.  Perf.  t^ttierbc  tx^^li  l^aBett,  i^  tticrbc  ijcrftanbcn  ^abett,  I  shall 

I  shall  have  told.  have  understood. 

(a)  Conjugate  each  tense  in  full. 

189.  Separable  Verbs.  —  All  other  prefixes  are  separable. 
Separable  verbs  have  the  following  peculiarities :  — 

(a)  The  prefix  always  takes  the  accent,  as  in  English :  pick 
up\  take  down'. 

att'fattfictt,  ftng  an',  atx'^t^an^tn,  to  begin. 


SEPABABLE  AND  INSEPARABLE   VEBBS.         113 

(b)  With  simple  tenses  in  independent  clauses  the  prefix  is 
put  at  the  end  of  the  clause. 

^dif  fattgc  ^Ctttc  biefc  %vhdi  an.    I  begin  this  work  to-day. 

^tt  fingft  gcftcrn  bcine  5(ufgabc  an.     You  began  your  exercise  yesterday. 

(c)  In  compound  tenses  and  in  dependent  clauses  the  prefix 
is  attached  to  the  verb. 

^Mov^tn  ttiirb  cr  att'fangen*     To-morrow  he  will  begin. 
®a^ft  hUf  too  ttiir  an'ftngcn  ?    Did  you  see  where  we  began  f 

(d)  The  signs  ju  of  the  infinitive  and  ge-  of  the  past  par- 
ticiple are  put  between  prefix  and  verb. 

@ie  ^aBcn  fcfjr  ^nt  an'^cfan^cn.     They  have  begun  very  well. 
SSarum  tuiittfti^t  if^v  nxd)t  an^sufangcn  ?     Why  don't  you  want  to  begin? 

190.  Conjugation  of  Separable  Verbs. 

anfangctt,  to  begin. 
*    Present  Tense.  Synopsis. 

x^  faitge  an  Pres.  i^  fattgc  att 

bu  fattgft  att  Past.  \^  ftttg  att 

cr  fattgt  att  Put.  \^  ujcrbc  atifattgctt 

ttitr  fangctt  att  Perf.  x^  ^abc  attgcfattgctt 

i^r  fattgt  att  Past  Perf.  x^  ^aiit  attgcfattgctt 

fie  fattgctt  att  Put.  Perf.  \6)  ttjcrbc  attgcfattgctt  l^aBctt 

Formal  Imperative,   fattgctt  Sic  att 

(a)  Conjugate  each  tense  throughout  m  full.  In  like  manner  conju- 
gate auf^oren,  auffte^ctt,  and  fortfa^ren  (§  193). 

191.  Use  of  Separable  Verbs.  —  In  translating  a  printed  or 
written  sentence  it  is  always  well  to  look  toward  the  end  for  a 
separable  prefix,  as  separable  verbs  are  very  common  in  German. 

When  two  verbs  mean  the  same  in  German  and  one  is  sepa- 
rable, Germans  usually  prefer  to  use  this.  Thus,  while  ^^c^ 
^abe  bie  3lufgabe  begonnen,  and  ©ttte,  tDoHen  @te  ba^  genfter 


114  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

ijfftten?  are  perfectly  correct,  a  German  is  more  likely  to  say, 
^i)  ^abe  bie  2lufgabe  angefangen,  and  Sitte,  tDoMen  @te  ba^ 
genfter  auftnai^ett? 

192.  The  Complementary  Infinitive  usually  follows  the  sepa- 
rable prefix.  A  modified  infinitive  phrase  is  generally  pre- 
ceded by  a  comma. 

Please  begin  to  translate,    ^tttc,  fattgett  Sic  an  p  iiberfc^ett* 

He  began  to  read  the  sentence.    Sr  \)(xi  angcfattgcn,  tictt  8a^  jtt  (cfen* 

193.  Vocabulary. 

crfta'rctt,  crllattc,  erf  (art  (KjaBctt),  (^aBcn),  to  stop,  with  a  comple- 

to  explain.  mentary  infinitive  and  ju  where 

tntf^aVitrtf       cnt^ielt,       tni^aittn  English  has  a  verbal  in  -ing. 

(^afictt),  t§  tnt1;)iiUf  to  contain.  auf'ftc^ctt,  ftanb  an^'f  aufgcftanbcn 

an'fattgctt,    ftng   an',   nu'gcfangett  (fcitt),  to  stand  up,  get  up,  rise. 

(^a^cit),  cr  fdngt  an',  to  begin,  forf  fa^rctt,  fit^r  furt'^  fort'gcfo^rwt 

with  accusative  or  a  complemen-  (fjahtxt),  cr  fo^rt  fort',  to  con- 

tary  infinitive  and  ^u*  tinue,  go  on,  with  a  complemen- 

attf'prcit,    prte    aw^'f    auf  gcprt  tary  infinitive  and  p, 

194.  Exercise. 

.  (a)  1.  9Benn  ®te  anfangen  ju  iiberfefeen,  [te^eti  ®ie  auf  unb 
lefen  ®ie  bie  SBorte !  2.  %U  \mx  auf ge^ort  fatten  ^u  f c^retben, 
^at  ber  na(i)fte  @(^UIer  fortgefa^ren.  3.  ©er  ndcf)fte  ©coaler 
fix^rt  fort,  tpenn  biefer  aufge^ort  t)at.  4.  ®ttte,  erHdren  @ie 
un^,  tDtediete  getter  btefe  3lufgabe  entl)dlt !  5.  gr  ftanb  auf 
unb  fuf)r  fort  ju  iiberfe^eu,  naii)bem  n^ir  alle  aufge^ijrt  fatten. 
6.  !Dte  3lufgabe  t)ort  nii^t  ^ter  auf;  bitte,  \cAjXtn  @ie  fort  gu 
Uberfe^en! 

(ft)  „33ttte,  fte^en  @ic  auf  uub  erfliireu  @ie  un^,  ma^  ber  le^te 
@a^  bebeutet!'' 


SEPARABLE  AND  INSEPARABLE   VERBS.  115 

„3df)  ^abe  aufgefiort  5U  lefen,  el}e  iDtr  ben  te^ten  @a^  itberfe^t 

fatten." 
„@o?    !©ann  fa()ren  @ie  fort,  tDo  @te  aufge^drt  ^aben!" 
„2lber  @ie  mitffen  mtr  ben  ®a^  erftciren,  e^e  ti^  anfange/' 
„5Rein,  fangen  ®te  an,  ober  lt)tr  wolkn  trgenb  jemanb  anber^ 

fortfa^ren  Ia[fen,'' 

(c)  Did  you  explain  to  that  pupil  that  his  exercise  contained 
too  many  mistakes  ?  2.  Please  stand  up  and  begin  to  trans- 
late where  that  other  boy  stopped  reading.  3.  He  continues 
to  explain  the  mistakes  to  the  children,  after  they  have  stopped 
studying  and  have  begun  to  play.  4.  Did  she  stand  up  and 
begin  to  read,  or  did  the  other  girl  continue  reading  ?  5.  We 
stopped  explaining  the  sentences  as  soon  as  the  teacher  came 
into  the  room.  6.  This  last  exercise  is  not  the  one  I  had 
begun  to  translate. 

(d)  "  Please  stand  up  and  read  the  exercise  on  this  page.'' 

"  Where  shall  I  begin  to  translate,  and  when  shall  I  stop  ? '' 
"  Begin  with  this  line  and  read  two  sentences.     I  will  explain 
to  the  class  what  you  read." 

"  Shall  I  continue  to  read  when  I  have  translated  two  sen- 
tences ?     I  know  what  the  next  line  means." 

"  ]S"o,  you  must  stop  reading,  and  we  will  let  some  one  else 
(§  159,  g)  translate." 

"  I  like  to  go  on  translating  when  I  have  begun." 

"  Yes,  I  know  that,  but  now  you  must  stop."  ' 


116  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

LESSON  XLII. 
Separable  and  Inseparable  Verbs. 


3e^t  get^t  es  los.    Now  it  is  going  to  begin  (familiar) . 

Pas  fdllt  mir  gar  nid^t  etn.    IhavenH  the  least  idea  {of  doing  that). 


195.  Meaning  of  Prefixes.  —  The  meaning  of  many  insepa- 
rable prefixes  is  hard  to  define.  In  general  mt^-  equals  mis-  ; 
jer=  means  to  pieces,  and  ent*  denotes  separation.  The  others 
vary. 

laufcn,  to  run ;  eittlaufett^  to  run  away. 

tjcrftel^cn,  to  understand;  nti^'lJcrftel^Ctt,  to  misunderstand. 

Brec^en^  to  break;  §et(rec^en^  to  smash,  to  break  to  pieces. 

(a)  The  separable  prefixes  usually  have  their  literal  meaning : 

ftcl^Ctt,  to  stand  ;  aufftc^Ctt,  to  stand  up,  get  up. 
Brcc^Ctt,  to  break  ;  aBBrct^ett,  to  break  off. 
ian^tttf  to  run ;  meglahf en,  to  run  away,  to  escape. 

196.  Common  Prefixes.  —  The  four  prepositions,  bur^,  iiber, 
Utn,  and  unter  are  sometimes  separable,  sometimes  inseparable. 

(a)  They  are  inseparable  when  used  in  a  figurative  meaning, 
or  one  not  exactly  literal.  The  verbs  are  usually  transitive, 
have  l^aben  as  auxiliary,  take  the  accent  on  the  root  of  the  verb, 
not  on  the  prefix,  and  do  not  take  ge*  in  the  past  participle. 
The  inseparable  use  is  much  commoner  than  the  separable. 

buti^rei'fctt,  burii^rci'ftc,  buvd^rcift'  (^oben)  to  travel  over,  to  ''do.'' 
'^^  bttr(3Jrei'fc  ^cutftifttanb  jebcn  Sommct*    I  travel  all  over  {''do'') 

Germany  every  summer. 
3^  IJaBe  2)ctttft!^(attb  le^teti  Sommer  burr^reift'.    /  "did"    Germany 

last  summer. 


SEPARABLE  AND  INSEPARABLE   VERBS,         117 

ilBcrge'^cn,  uBctgittg^  iiBergatt'gcn  (^abcn),  to  omit,  skip, 

SBtr  ttictbctt  bicfc  (Seitc  nhtvqc'f^txu     We  will  skip  this  page, 
2Bir  ^abctt  bicfc  Settc  u^ergan'gctt*    We  have  skipped  this  page, 

umgc'^ctt,  umgittg',  umgan'gen  (^abeti),  to  avoid,  to  evade, 

'Bit  umgc'^Ctt  bicfei^  (SJefc^.     They  evade  this  law. 

Bit  f^ahtn  bicfc^  ^cfc^  umgan^gen*     They  evaded  this  law. 

tttttcr^al'tctt,  ttttterl^ielt',  nnitx^aVttn  (^aben),  to  entertain. 

Bit  nnitvf^dW  ttitlt  f^reiinbc*     She  entertains  many  friends. 

Bit  f^at  \)itlt  ^rcttttbc  nnttti^al'ttn.     She  entertained  many  friends. 

(b)  They  are  separable  when  both  prefix  and  verb  are  used 
in  their  natural  meaning.  The  verbs  are  often  intransitive, 
take  the  auxiliary  of  the  simple  verb,  and  have  the  accent 
upon  the  preposition,  as  in  the  case  of  all  separable  verbs. 

^^  fc^c  meinctt  SSiUen  burti^*    I  carry  out  my  will. 

(5r  ift  u'bcrgefa^ren*    He  crossed  over. 

2)ic  Bmnt  ift  mt'tcrgcgangcn.    The  sun  has  set. 

9Jae^  cittCt  SSctIc  fc^rtctt  ttiir  \xm.    After  a  while  we  turned  round. 

(c)  When  used  regularly  with  a  simple  verb,  these  four 
prepositions  sometimes  look  like  separable  prefixes.  Hence  they 
are  often  so  called,  and  the  principal  parts  of  the  verbs  are  so 
given.  But  really  they  are  simple  verbs  used  with  a  preposi- 
tion. Compare  the  examples  below  with  those  under  (a) 
above. 

tt'Bctge^cn,  gtng  ii'Bcr,  ii'Bctgegattgctt  (fctn),  to  go  over, 
St^  gcl^c  iiBer*    I  go  across  (separable). 
3*^  gc^e  itbcr  'tsa^  fjetb*    I  go  across  the  field  (simple  verb). 

tttt'tcr^altctt,  i)it\i  un'tcr,  utt'tergc^alten  (^aben),  to  hold  under. 
@r  \)Ui  btc  ^a^e  Ulttcr*     He  holds  the  cat  under  (separable) . 
©r  pit  btc  ^a^c  uittcr  bcm  %i\^t.    He  holds  the  cat  under  the  table 

(simple  verb). 


118  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN, 

burj^i'rctfctt,  rciftc  t>xiv^'f  burd^'gctcift  (fein),  to  travel  through, 
933ir  reifctt  burd^»     We  travel  through  (separable). 
2Bir  rcifCtt  hnxd)  ^CUtfti^lattb*     We  travel  through  Germany  (simple  verb). 

um'gc^ett,  gutg  um',  nm^oegangctt  (fein),  to  go  around. 
(Bh  rje^Ctt  urn*     You  go  around  (separable). 
©ie  ge!^en  lim  ben  SBalb*     Fow  are  going  around  the  wood  (simple  verb). 

197.  §in  and  §ei\  —  All  verbs  of  motion  are  commonly 
compounded  with  !^tn  or  ^er  to  denote  direction  of  motion.  §in 
always  means  aiuay  from  the  speaker,  ijtx^  toward  the  speaker, 

^a  ge^t  ct  f^ht.     There  he  goes  (away  from  here). 
293pnctt  Sic  ^er  (or  l^icr^cr)  tommctt?     Will  you  come  here? 
^iinttcn  ©ie  ^erauffommen?     Can  you  come  up  (here')  ? 
^^  faittt  ntc^t  ^inaufge^ctt*    I  can't  go  up  (there). 

(a)  §in  unb  t)er  means  here  and  there,  hither  and  thither. 

(£r  lief  \)\\X  unb  ^tx.     He  ran  hither  and  thither. 

(h)  2Bo  means  where  (rest)  ;  tropin'  means  where  to,  whither ; 
tDOl^er'  means  where  from,  whence.  The  two  parts  may  be 
separated. 

Where  are  you  going?    293o^tn  gc^cn  8ic?  or  3Bo  gcl^cn  8te  l^ttt? 

198.  Vocabulary. 

btc  Ofic'gcl,  bic  ^t^thif  rule.  nntcr^jaCtcn,    nntcrl^iclt',    unter= 

bic    8c^tt)ie'rtg!ett,    bic     (5r^ttiic=  \)(iVit\x  (^abcn),  ct?  untcrplt^  to 

riofcttcn,  difficulty.  entertain. 

burji^b(aftctn,bnrti^blat'tcrtc,but(^=  nnfcrnc^'mcn,  nntcrnte^m'^  untct= 

Wii^itxi  (l^abcn),  to  skim  over,  nom^mcn    (^abcn),     cr     ntttcr= 

run  through  (of  a  book).  ntntmt',  to  undertake. 

uber^cn'gcn^ubcr^cng'tc,  iibcrscugt'  njtcbcr^o'len,  micbcrljol'tc,  ttiicbcr= 

(f^ahtn)f  to  convince.  f^M  (^nbcn),  to  repeat.    This  is 

ttmgc'bcn,      umoab',       umgc'bcn  the  only  inseparable  compound 

(^abcn),  cr  umgibt',  to  surround.  of  micbcr* 


SEPARABLE  AND  INSEPARABLE   VERBS.         119 

199.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  2Btr  ^aben  xiju  uberjeugt,  ba^  er  nt^t  l^inge^en  foUte. 
2.  @r  ijat  e^  unternommen,  alt  bie  9tegeln  in  btefem  :93u(J)e  ju 
tt)ieber^oIen.  3.  @(f)one  Saume  umgaben  unferen  ©arten, 
lt)o  tDir  unfere  greunbe  unter^alten  fatten.  4.  ®itte, 
trteber^olen  @te  bte  ®(^triertgfeiten,  bie  @ie  fanben,  a(§ 
(Sie  ba^  SSnd)  buri^blcitterten !  5.  gr  ireig,  tDo^er  er  fommt, 
aber  er  trei^  nid^t,  tDo^in  er  ge^t.  6.  SBir  furf)ten  f)in  unb  ^er, 
aber  irir  fonntett  feiti  SBaf[er  finben. 

(b)  „2BoIten  ®ie  biefe  ®d^e  burrf)blcittern  unb  nn^  bie 
©c^tDierigfeiten  erf(ciren?" 

„^ij  bin  iiber^eugt,  ba§  ic^  e^  nici^t  nnterne^nten  fottte." 
„®ann  miiffen  ®ie  bie  9tege(n  iDieber^oIen." 
„Qa,  ba^  tDirb  bie  anberen  fe^r  gut  unter^alten." 
„(Sie  U)erben  t^enige  @c^tx)ierig!eitenfinben,  menu  ®ie  e^unter- 
nontmen  {)aben.'' 

(c)  1.  Did  you  undertake  [it]  to  explain  all  these  difficul- 
ties ?  2.  I  ran  through  his  sentences  and  convinced  him 
that  they  contained  too  many  mistakes.  3.  It  does  not  en- 
tertain the  pupils,  when  they  have  to  repeat  these  rules. 
4.  The  man  was  running  hither  and  thither ;  he  did  not  know 
where  he  wanted  to  go.  5.  Big  trees  surround  the  field 
where  these  flowers  came  from  ({)er!amen).  6.  Please  repeat 
the  last  rules  in  this  book. 

(d)  "  Now  I  will  run  through  your  exercises  and  explain  the 
difficulties.     How  many  have  made  mistakes  ? '' 

"  I  didn't  make  any  mistakes ;  I  will  undertake  [it]  to  re- 
peat all  the  rules.'' 

"I  think  I  shall  be  able  to  convince  you  that  you  made 
several  mistakes.     Did  the  exercise  contain  difficulties  ?  '^ 


120  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN.  ' 

"  The  whole  class  was  surrounding  me,  while  I  was  writing 
this  exercise.     I  entertained  them  well.^' 

"  Good,  but  you  have  not  yet  convinced  me  that  you  under- 
stand all  the  rules." 

"  Well,  I  am  willing  to  undertake  [it]  to  repeat  them." 


LESSON  XLIII. 
Imperative. 


Set  bulbfam  gegen  alles  2Inber5fetn, 

Unb  lag  bid?  fetnen  lOtberfprud:?  r>erbriegen; 

ZTur  tmmcr  ftcl^'  auf  betnen  eignen  (Jii§cn, 

Vinb  fprtd?  5ur  red?ten  §ctt  entfd^Iognes  ZTetn.  —  SBid^crt 


200.  The  Imperative  for  formal  address  is  like  the  inverted 
indicative  (§  69);  loben  @te,  praise;  fe^en  @te,  look;  fangen 
@te  an,  begin;  itberfe^en  @te,  translate. 

(a)  The  second  singular  imperative  adds  *e  to  the  stem. 
This  ^t  maybe  dropped  in  conversation:  lobe,  praise;  ]^5re, 
listen;  fatige  an,  begin;  fte^e  anf,  stand  up;  iiberfe^e, 
translate. 

(b)  When  the  root  vowel  e  changes  to  ie  or  t  in  the  second 
singular  indicative,  the  same  vowel  change  occurs  in  the  im- 
perative and  *e  is  not  added.  Strong  verbs  in  a  do  not  take 
umlaut,     fie!^,  see;  gib,  give;  ^It,  stop. 

(c)  The  second  plural  imperative  is  like  the  indicative  with- 
out the  pronoun.  The  connecting  vowel  ?e^  may  be  inserted 
for  euphony.     See  §  14,  a. 


IMPETtATIVE. 

121 

201. 

Conjugation  of  the 

Imperative. 

Second  Singular. 

Second  Plural. 

Formal. 

(o(e 

mt 

iohtn  Ste,  praise 

m 

fcl)t 

fc^en  @te,  see 

tomm 

fommt 

fDmmctt  ®tc,  come 

fange  an 

fattgt  an 

faugcn  Sic  an,  begin 

iiBcrfe^c 

iibcrfc^t 

iibcrfe^cn  <Bit,  translate 

fiaht 

^aBt 

l^abctt  Sic,  have 

fci 

fcib 

fcictt  Sic,  5e 

(a)  The  only  imperatives  offering  any  difficulty  are  those  of  verbs 
whose  root  vowel  is  c,  which  changes  to  ic  or  t  in  the  second  singular. 
These  form  the  imperative  simply  by  dropping  the  (e)ft  of  the  second 
person  singular  present  indicative  active :  tt)erfen,  bu  tt)irfft,  tt)irf ;  gebcn, 
t>n  Qib\t,  gib  ;  lefen,  bu  Uef(ef)t,  lie«  ;  j^reci)en,  bu  fprid^ft,  fprid^. 


202. 


Vocabulary. 


gcttii'gcn,  gcniig'tc,  gcniigt'  (I)a= 
Ibcn),  to  suffice,  be  enough;  ha§ 
gcniigt,  that  will  do,  that  is 
enough  or  sufficient. 

:^ci'ftcn,  ^ic§,  gc^ci^cn  Ojobtn), 
to  be  called,  to  be  named,  to  be 
(translated) ;  2Bic  I)cigcn  Sic  ? 
Whafs  your  name  f 

^cr'fagcn,  fagtc  ^cr',  l^cr'gcfagt 
(^aBcn),  to  recite. 

nc^'ntcn,  na^m,  gcnom'mcn  (^a= 
Ben),  cr  nimmt,  to  take. 


ticrbcf  fern,  tjcrbef  fcrtc,  tictBcf'fcrt 

(^aBcn),  to  correct. 
uot'tcfcn,  Xa^  t»or\  tiot'gcicfcn  (^= 

Ben),    cr    Ucft    tjor',     to    read 

(aloud). 
ttici'tcricfcn,  ia§  tnci'tcr,  ttJci'tcr= 

gefcfcn  (I)aBcn),  cr  Ucft  mci'tcr, 

to  read  on  (further). 
bctttftift,  adj.,  German;  anf  bcntfti^, 

in  German. 
cng'iifii^,  adj.,  English;  anf  cng= 

lifj^,  in  English. 


203.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  8ie^  iDeiter,  natfibem  bte  anberen  ©(filler  bte  engltfc^en 
SRegeIn  ^ergefagt  ^aben!  2.  yit^mi  btefe  2lufgaben  unb  t)er== 
beffert  aH  bie  @dfee,  bte  getter  ent^atten !  3.  f  omm  ^er  unb 
fage  mir,  iDte  betn  ©ruber  ^ei^t !       4.  9?imm  eiu  ®tU(f  "ipapier 


122  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

unb  etne  geber  unb  fi^reibe  ben  nci^ften  engli[(^en  @a^  auf 
beutfc^!  5.  ©agt  bte  le^te  beut[(^e  ^eile  auf  engltfc^  ^er! 
3Bie  t}et^t  ba^  lange  SBort  ?  6.  e^e  lt)ir  bte  Dtegeln  f)erfagen, 
net)tnt  gebern  unb  STinte  unb  f(^retbt  auf  beutf(^,  n)a^  id)  tud) 
t)orIefe! 

(&)  ^-^Sitte,  (te^  auf  beutfd^  tDetter!    Sie  ^ei^t  ba^  nd(^fte 

„S)a^  n)et§  idf)  nid^t ;  tc^  f)abe  ntt^t  mettergefefen/' 

„9^imm  betn  beutfdie^  ^u^  unb  Ite^  htn  na(f)ften  @a^  t)or !'' 

,,3<^  ^^^^  fe^^  ®ti^  nt(^t  Ijerfagen  ;  fd^  wti^  n\d)t,  tuie  er  auf 

beutf(^  f)ei^t," 
„®o  ^ore  auf  unb  t)erbeffere  bte  anberen  ©cifee!    !Da^  ge- 

nugt,'' 

(c)  (Write  all  imperatives  three  ways.)  1.  Take  these  Ger- 
man books  and  read  on  in  English.  2.  That  will  do.  Read 
the  next  sentence  aloud  in  German  before  we  correct  it. 
3.  Eecite  the  English  rules,  and  then  we  will  read  the  exercise 
aloud  in  German  and  translate  it.  4.  What  is  that  last 
word  in  English  ?  Yes,  that  will  do.  5.  Take  these  papers 
and  read  aloud  the  German  sentences  which  we  have  translated 
and  corrected.  6.  Kead  on  in  German  ;  I  will  tell  you  when 
it's  enough. 

(d)  "Take  this  book  and  read  this  English  exercise  aloud 
in  German." 

"Please  explain  the  difficulties  to  us  in  English  before  we 
read  on." 

"  No,  I  will  correct  your  mistakes  after  you  have  recited  the 
rules." 

"What  is  the  next  German  word  in  English?  I  do  not 
understand  how  I  am  to  translate  it." 


INFINITIVES  AND  PARTICIPLES.  123 

"  Eecite  the  rules  in  English  and  you  will  be  able  to  under- 
stand the  German  sentences.'' 

"Now  I  have  read  the  sentences  aloud  in  German  and  in 
English.     Is  that  enough  ? '' 

"Yes,  that  will  do.'' 

LESSON    XLIV. 
Infinitives  and  Participles. 


Selbft  gcfponnen,  selbft  gemad^t, 

Hetn  babei,  tft  "Sarnvntvad^t  —  ^^nd^tvort. 


204.  The  Infinitives.  —  There  are  two  infinitives  in  German : 
present,  (oben,  to  x>raise  ;  ge'^ett,  to  go  ;  and  perfect,  gelobt  jU 
l^aben,  to  have  praised  ;  gegattgen  ju  feitt,  to  have  gone. 

(a)  The  infinitive  without  the  sign  ju  is  used  after  modal 
auxiliaries  and  after  finben,  fit^ten,  ^ei^en,  ^elfen,  ^oren,  laffen, 
te^ren,  (ernen,  ma(f)en,  fe^en, .  (See  §  141.) 

3c^  fottttte  i^n  fe^cn*    I  could  see  Mm. 
^        ^6)  fa^  i^ju  am  ^cnftcr  ftc^cn,    /  saio  him  stand  at  the  window. 
@r  Icrntc  ^\xi  (cfctt*     He  learned  to  read  well. 
3c^  ^ottc  i^tt  fommcn*     /  heard  him  come. 

(b)  In  most  other  cases  ju  is  used  when  the  infinitive  has 
to  in  English. 

@r  ftng  an,  ctnett  2?ncf  ^u  fc^rctbcn*    He  began  to  write  a  letter. 

^ic  ^(ttfgaBc  ift  ft^tticr  p  iificrfc^Ctt*     The  exercise  is  hard  to  translate. 

(c)  The  infinitive  may  be  used  as  a  notm.  It  is  a  neuter 
noun  of  the  first  class. 

^a^  fiebCtt  ift  fc^r  ft^on.     iz/e  (^o  live)  is  very  beautiful. 


124  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN, 

(d)  Besides  utn,  denoting  purpose  (§  86),  the  infinitive  is 
also  used  after  attftatt,  instead  of,  and  oijUt^  without,  where 
English  employs  a  verbal. 

Instead  of  going,  he  came.    5lttftatt  ju  gel^Ctt,  ift  cr  gcfommcn. 

Without  asking  me,  she  went  home.    Otfttt  mi^  5U  fragctt,  ging  fie  nati) 

205.  Position  of  the  Infinitive.  —  An  infinitive  with  ju  usually 
comes  outside  the  clause. 

He  began  to  lorite.    ©r  ftng  an  5U  fr^retBen* 

We  continued  to  translate.    SBir  ful^ren  fort  ju  uBcrfc^Ctt* 

(a)  An  infinitive  is  always  preceded  by  its  objects  and 
modifiers.  When  so  preceded  it  may  be  treated  as  a  separate 
clause  and  set  off  by  commas  (§  192). 

He  began  to  write  a  long  letter.     (Sr  ftttg   an,    cittCtt  (attgen   SBrief  p 

fri^reiBctt. 
We  continued  to  translate  these  sentences  without  a  mistake.     2Bit  ftt^tCtt 

fort,  ol^ttc  etncn  JJc^lcr  btcfc  Sa^e  p  iiberfc^en. 

206.  The  Participles.  —  There  are  two  participles  in  Ger- 
man :  present,  {ohty\!i) ^  praising  ;  get)enb,  going  ;  past  (also  called 
perfect),  gelobt,  praised  ;  gegangen,  gone, 

(a)  The  participle  may  be  used  as  an  adjective  or  a  noun, 
but  it  is  always  declined  like  an  adjective.  Unlike  the  Eng- 
lish, it  is  preceded  by  its  modifiers,  and  as  an  adjective  it 
stands  before  its  noun.     It  is  not  common  in  conversation. 

(5ttt  (!tcttt)cr  %\\\%  a  little  river. 

(Sin  (bur^  bic  'Biatsi  flic^cub)cr  '^h\%  a  river  flowing  through  the  city. 

@ttt  (nott  eittcnt  gclc^rtcn  Scorer  gcfc^ricbctt)e)^  SButi^,  a  book  written  by 

a  learned  teacher. 
%xt  (5(n!ommcnb)Ctt,  the  newcomers. 


INFINITIVES  AND  PARTICIPLES.  125 

207.  The  Use  of  Infinitives  and  Participles  is  not  so  common 
in  German  as  in  English. 

(a)  German  does  not  possess  the  progressive  and  emphatic 
forms  of  the  verb  (§  16).  For  the  three  forms,  he  praises ,  he  is 
praising  J  and  he  does  praise,  the  German  has  but  one  form :  er 
tobt. 

(6)  Often  where  English  has  an  infinitive  or  participial 
phrase,  German  uses  a  finite  clause,  commonly  introduced  by 
ba.  To  avoid  errors,  change  the  English  phrase  to  an  English 
clause  with  when  or  as,  and  then  translate. 

Not  finding  him  in  the  house^  Hooked  for  him  in  the  garden,     ^a  id)  i^tt 

ntd^t  m  ^aufc  fanb,  fud^tc  t(^  if^n  int  Garten* 
Coming  home,  he  found  the  letter  on  his  table.     ^i§  tt  nati^  ^aufe  fattt, 

fanb  cr  ben  Srtef  auf  fciticm  ^ift^c. 
I  knew  him  to  be  my  friend,    ^c^  ttitt^tc,  ba§  er  mettt  JJreuttb  toav. 

208.  Vocabulary. 

bic  ^n^'jpva^tf  bic  5(tt)^f^ta^eit,  bor'gett,  Uv^ttf  gcBorgt  i^aUn), 

pronunciation,  accent.  to  borrow. 

bie  ^rommo'tif,  bie  QJramma'ttf en,  lei'Ijeit,  lie^,  gelie^eit  (^ahcn),  to 

grammar.  lend. 

ha§    Se'feBu^,     bie     Sefebiiti^er,  e'bctt,  just ;  ja,  e'^en,  yes,  that's 

reader,  reading  book.  so. 

enb 'Itr^,  finally,  at  last.  iiBerall',  everywhere,  all  over. 

209.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  ^t%i  ^aben  ®ie  eben  etnem  greunbe  ba^  geborgte  ®elb 
gelie^en.  2,  9lein,  anftatt  e^  ^u  (et^en,  ^aU  xi)  enbltrf)  nod) 
ettDa^  geborgt,  3,  ©a^  ift  ein  fe^r  gut  ge[d)riebene^  gefebud), 
aber  e^  ent^alt  nur  menig  ©rammattf,  4,  ®a^  8efen,  o^ne  bie 
®a|e  ju  iiberfe^en,  ift  mtr  nt(^t  firmer.  5.  9So((en  tDir  fort- 
fasten,  btefe  noc^  nt^t  Uberfe^ten  SBdrter  t^orjulef en  ?    6.  Unfer 


126  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

8ef)rer  loht  unfere  beutf^e  9lu^f|3ra(f)e  itberall  in  ber  ®tabt,  o^ne 
un^  in  ber  ®rf)ule  ein  Sort  bat^on  jn  fagen, 

(b)  „2Bie  ^aben  @ie  fo  gnt  ©eutfc^  f^re(f)en  lernen?"    (§  141). 
„2Inftatt  an^  einer  ©rammatif  ober  einem  Sefebud)  jn  lefen, 

l^abe  i^  meine  Sln^fpra^e  burc^  @pred)en  gelernt*'' 
„Qd)  ^abe  no(^  nie  einen  |o  gnt  fprec^enben  ©fitter  gefel^en. 

(Sie  foHten  bie  anberen  fprecfjen  le^ren,'' 
„Qa,  eben,  aber  man  mn^  nberall  fprec^en-     ©ann  enblic^ 

ge^t  e^.'^ 

(c)  1.  Not  being  able  to  see  well,  we  finally  went  home 
without  waiting.  2.  Instead  of  lending  me  her  reader  when 
I  had  lost  mine,  she  made  (144,  d )  me  look  everywhere  for  it. 
3.  Not  being  able  to  learn  a  good  pronunciation  from  your 
reader,  you  must  borrow  a  grammar.  4.  Do  you  find  this  a 
well- written  grammar  ?  Yes,  that's  so.  5.  Coming  into  the 
room,  the  teacher  found  the  pupils  playing  instead  of  writing 
tTieir  exercises.  6.  The  pupils  finally  began  to  write  their 
sentences,  after  the  teacher  had  seen  them  playing  (§  141). 

(d)  "Do  you  know  that  to  be  the  right  pronunciation  of 
that  sentence  ?  " 

"  No,  but  I  heard  another  pupil  read  it  so." 

"Borrow  a  grammar  and  learn  the  pronunciation  of  these 
words.     Who  will  lend  him  a  grammar  ?  " 

"  Here  is  my  reader,  but  I  have  looked  everywhere  for  my 
grammar  without  finding  it." 

"  When  you  finally  find  it,  let  me  see  a  well-written  exercise 
and  hear  a  good  pronunciation.  You  must  work  hard  to  learn 
well." 

"  Yes,  that's  so." 


REVIEW.  127 

LESSON  XLV. 
Review. 


3n  £^od?mut  iiberl^eb'  bid?  nid?t, 
Unb  lag  ben  XHut  ntd?t  fin!en, 

Xtttt  beinem  XDtpfel  reid?'  ins  £id?t, 
Unb  lag  bie  rDur3el  trinfcn.  — TOcfert. 


210.  Review  Questions. 

(a)  1.  Give  the  inseparable  prefixes.  2.  Where  do  the 
separable  prefixes  stand  in  simple  tenses  (a)  in  independent 
clauses  ?  (&)  in  dependent  clauses  ?  3.  In  compound  tenses 
(a)  in  independent  clauses  ?  {b)  in  dependent  clauses  ?  4.  With 
the   infinitive?  5.  What  prefixes  are  sometimes  separable 

and  sometimes  inseparable?  6.  Give  the  rule  for  distin- 
guishing these  by  their  accent.  7.  Explain  the  distinction 
in  the  use  of  !^ttt  and  !^er.  8.  What  is  the  position,  order,  and 
punctuation  of  infinitive  phrases  ? 

(&)  1.  Give  the  rule  for  regular  formation  of  the  imperative 
second  singular.  2.  Give  the  rule  for  the  second  singular 
imperative  of  verbs  whose  root  vowel  is  e,  that  change  e  to 
ie  or  t  in  the  second  singular  indicative.  3.  Is  „bitte"  an 
imperative  ?     Might  it  be  ? 

.  (c)  1.  Give  the  cases  where  English  uses  to  with  the  infini- 
tive, where  ju  is  omitted  in  German.  2.  What  is  the  posi- 
tion of  the  infinitive  with  reference  to  its  modifiers?  3.  What 
is  the  force  of  um  with  the  infinitive  ?  4.  What  other  prepo- 
sitions are  regularly  used  with  the  infinitive  ? 

(d)  1.  Give  the  two  chief  uses  of  the  participle  in  German. 
2.  What  is  the  German  equivalent  for  the  following :  He  is 


128  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

singing  very  beautifully.  Not  seeing  anything  in  the  garden,  I 
went  into  the  house.  3.  What  is  the  position  of  the  participle 
with  reference  to  its  modifiers?  4.  Which  language  uses 
participles  more  frequently,  German  or  English  ? 

211.  Review  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  ^i)  tierfte^e  ntc^t,  tDa^  ba^  bebeutet.  Sttte,  erftare  e^ 
mtr!  2.  @r  ^t  angefangen,  bte  9tegetn  t^orjutefen.  3.  S)te 
(Si^iiter  ^aben  ben  Secret  itbeqetigt,  ba^  bie  Slufgabe  tiiele 
©^iDterigfeiten  ent^ielt.  4.  ^itte,  t)erbeffern  @te  biefe  eng^ 
Ufd^ett  (gcifee,  e^e  ©ie  auf  beutfd)  iDettertef en !  5.  SBie  fjet^t 
ba^  auf  beutf(^?  .^a,  ba^  geniigt.  6.  9^imm  bein  Sefebud^ 
unb  Ite^  auf  ber  nad^ften  ©eite  t)or,  anftatt  mit  ber  (e^ten  anju- 
fangen!  T.  SBann  glauben  ®te,  ba§  \6)  enblt(^  eine  gute 
beutfd^e  3lu^fpra(^e  fjaben  n)erbe?  8.  3)a  ber  8ef)rer  bie 
©dottier  arbetten  fa^,  lobte  er  fie.  9.  Slnftatt  nai^  §aufe  gu 
ge^en,  bin  \6)  in  ber  @cf)ule  geblieben.  10.  S)a^  3JZab(^en  mit 
ber  guten  Slu^fprai^e  f)at  bie  gauge  3Iufgabe  gelefen,  o^ne  einen 
ge^Ier  gu  nta(f)en. 

(h)  1.  The  teacher  was  explaining  to  the  class  what  the 
rules  meant.  2.  We  undertook  [it]  to  convince  him  that  he 
had  not  begun  to  translate  right.  3.  Else,  please,  and  tell 
us  where  you  are  going  (§  197,  h).  4.  We  went  hither  and 
thither,  but  everywhere  the  trees  surrounded  us.  5.  Coming 
home  without  seeing  anybody,  I  looked  everywhere  for  my 
friends.  6.  Take  this  book,  stand  up,  and  read  the  next 
sentence    in    German,    instead   of    correcting    the    last   one. 

7.  Please  recite  the  last   rules  in  this  grammar  in  English. 

8.  Seeing  the  boys  playing  instead  of  working,  the  teacher 
stopped  reading.  9.  I  have  just  borrowed  the  teacher's 
grammar,  in  order  to  learn  a  good  pronunciation.         10.  You 


REVIEW.  129 

will  never  be  able  to  do  that  without  speaking  a  great  deal 
(much). 

(c)  A  Letter.  —  Dear  Mother :  I  like  to  study  German.  When 
I  began  to  study  it,  I  did  not  speak  well.  But  instead  of 
stopping,  I  read  aloud  every  time  that  I  could,  and  now  I  have 
a  good  accent.  But  you  cannot  learn  to  speak  German  with- 
out working.  I  work  hard  every  day',  instead  of  playing  the 
whole  time.  Please  write  me  a  letter  soon,  and  tell  me  what 
you  are  doing. 

Your  [you]  loving  daughter. 


Sw  ^olf^tott. 


(Sinen  Srief  foH  ic^  f^retbett 
9J?einem  ®rf)a^  in  ber  gem' ; 
@te  ^at  mxi}  gebeten, 
(Sie  ^iitf  ^  gar  ju  gem* 

211^  n)ir  nod^  tnttfammen 
Un^  lufttg  gemai^t, 
®a  ^aben  wit  ntmmer 
2ln^  @(f)reiben  gebai^t, 

3Ba^  l^tlft  mir  nun  geber 
Unb  Jinf  unb  papier? 
®u  tt)et^t,  bie  ®eban!en 
@inb  alljeit  bet  bir ! 

—  Zt)to't>ov  (Storm. 


130  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

LESSON  XL VI. 
Comparison  of  Adjectives  and  Adverbs. 


€tn  cMer  ^elb  tft,  ber  fiirs  Vatevlanb,  ein  cblerer,  bcr  fiir  bcs  £anbes 
XDoI^I,  ber  cbelfte,  ber  fiir  bie  ITTenfd?beit  fdmpft. — Berber. 


212.  Comparison  of  Adjectives  and  Adverbs.  —  Adjectives  and 
adverbs  are  compared  by  adding  ^er  and  -(e) ft.  Monosyllabic 
stems  in  a,  0,  or  u  usually  take  umlaut.  Euphony  requires  the 
use  of  the  connecting  vowel  e  before  ft  in  the  superlative,  when 
the  positive  ends  in  a  diphthong  or  a  sound  like  ^  or  t  (^,  ^,  J, 
b,  t) :  freieft,  alteft,  fiirgeft.  Some  adjectives  are  irregularly 
compared. 

(a)  The  comparative  and  superlative  are  declined  like  other 
adjectives.     The  uninflected  superlative  is  very  rare. 

@itt  Bcffcrc^  23ur^,  a  better  hook. 

^cr  pcffftc  f&anntf  the  highest  tree. 

@r!^ottcrc§  SBettcr,  fti^oucrctt  233cttcr^,  more  beautiful  loeather. 

(b)  For  the  English  superlative  in  the  predicate,  when  not 
modified  by  a  phrase  or  clause,  the  German  uses  ant  with  the 
superlative  ending  in  ^tn  for  both  numbers  and  all  genders. 

liefer  SBaum  ift  am  pii^ften.     This  tree  is  the  highest. 
liefer  S3aum  \\i  bcr  pti^ftc  \m  Garten*     This  tree  is  the  highest  in  the 
garden. 

(c)  For  the  adverbial  superlative  absolute,  in  the  — est  possible 
way,  German  uses  the  phrase  auf^  — -fte. 

He  spoke  in  the  clearest  possible  way.    (Sr  f^ra^  nufi^  beutUt^jftc. 

j^he  pave  you  the  highest  praise  possible.    Sic  t^at  ^i^  auf^  Ifo^ftc  gctoM* 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES  AND  ADVERBS.      131 


(d)  Unlike  English,  long  words  are  regularly  compared  in 
German,  mtijX  being  used  only  when  one  adjective  is  compared 
with  another. 

/  know  nothing  more  disagreeable.    ^^  f cnuc  ni^t§  Unattgcnc^mcrej^. 
He  is  more  lazy  than  sick.    @r  ift  me^r  faul  aW  fratlf ♦ 


213. 

Positive. 

Adj.  and  Adv. 

ticf,  deep. 

a\t,  old. 

fri^on,  beautiful. 


Table  of  Comparisons. 
Comparative.  Superlative. 

Begular, 
Adj.  and  Adv.  Adj.         Adv.  and  Pred.  Adj. 

ticfcr,  deeper.  bcr  ticfftc,  am  ttefften,  deepest, 

alter,  older.  bcr  aUcftc,  am  aftcftcn,  oldest. 

fri^oncr,  more  bcr  ft^ijnffe,  am  fc^iinftcn,  most 
beautiful.  beautiful. 


Irregular. 
Adj.  and  Adv.         Adj.  and  Adv. 

^uif  good  {?LdY.  well).  Bcffct,  better. 


tfitif  much. 
f^ot^f  high. 
na^,  near. 
QXO%  great. 


tucttig,  little. 


Adj.         Adv.  and  Pred.  Adj. 

bet  befte,  am  Beften,  best. 
mcfjr,  more.  ber  meifte,  am  meiften/  most. 

pljer,  higher.  ber  pr^fte,  am  prffften,  highest. 

naljer,  nearer.         bet  nati^fte,  am  nad^ften,  nearest. 
gtijfeet,  greater.       bet  B^^ftte,  am  gtogten,  greatest. 
bet  etftete, /ormer.  bet  etfte,  suetft  (adv.),^rs^. 
bet  (e^tete,  Za^^er.    bet  le^te,  ple^t  (adv.),  last. 
ttjemget  1  am  hJemgfteu  1 

mittbet  J  am  minbeftett  J 


gettt  (adv.)  gladly.     liebet,  rather. 


214. 


am  (tebften,  (to  like)  best. 


Particles  of  Comparison. 

(a)  As  is  translated  by  tDte  ;  than  usually  by  al^,  sometimes 
by  tDte. 

He  is  not  so  large  as  you.    ^t  ift  ttid^t  fo  qto^  ttiie  btt» 
He  is  larger  than  I,    (^t  ift  gtii^et  al2  {or  ttiie)  td^. 


132  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

(b)  As  ...  as  is  translated  ebenfo  «  ,  ,  tt)te  (or  al^). 
She  is  as  pretty  as  you.    (5ie  ift  ebctifo  f(^Ott  ttJic  (or  ai§)  @ic» 

(c)  The  .  .  .  the  is  translated  by  je  ,  .  .  be  [to. 

The  longer  the  sentence,  the  harder  it  is  to  write,      ^t  (anger  bct  @<l^, 
bcfto  f(i^tticrcr  ift  cr  ^u  fti^rciftcn* 

215.  Vocabulary. 

bic  U'bmig,  bic  ilbungcn,  practice,  brau't^eit,      brauc^tc,      gcbrauii^t 

ba§  SSiJr'tcrbttd^,  bte  SSorterbiir^er,  (^abcn),  ^o  wee(?. 

dictionary.  itac^'fc^Iageit,  fti^lttg  nari^',  ttari^'gc= 

auf  mari^ctt,    mat^tc    mtf ,   attf'gc=  fr^lagcn  (^abcti),  er  S^XHi  m^'t 

ma^i  (l^abcn),  ^o  open.  to  look  up  (of  words,  etc.). 

au^'fprci^cn,   f^rar?^  au^',  att§'gc=  bcrfu't^en,  bcrfu^te,  bcrfurJ^t  (^a= 

f^roti^ctt  (l^abcn),  cr  f^ri^t  aui§',  ben),  to  try. 

to  pronounce.  \tx6)if  easy. 

216.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  Um  beffere  Ubung  ju  ^ben,  braud^t  man  auf^  f^netlfte 
tm  aSorterbu^  na^juf^tagen.  2.  3=(^  I)abe  bte  iibung  fi^nelter 
gelefen  unb  beffer  au^gefproc^en  ate  meiti  93ruber ;  ber  Secret 
{)at  mt(^  auf^  ^ot^fte  gelobt.  3.  @ie  fpielt  beffer  afe  i^,  unb 
fie  fingt  au(^  am  f^onften.  4,  3JJiI(^  ift  gut,  Jee  ift  beffer  ate 
9}?ilc^,  aber  ^affee  ift  am  beften.  5.  ^e  beffer  tt)ir  bie  SBorter 
t)erfte^en,  befto  ireniger  brau(^en  \o\x  unfere  ©rammati!  auf=^ 
jumac^en,  um  narf)3ufc^Iagen.  6.  ©tefer  53aum  ift  ni(^t  fo  I)oc^ 
tt)ie  iener  ;  ber  nd(^fte  ©aum  ift  am  ^od^ften. 

(b)  „@ie  f)3rerf)en  n\6)i  fo  f^neK  mie  bie  anberen ;  ®ie  mltffen 
t)erfu(^en,  bie  (Sdfee  f^nefier  au^juf^jret^en.'' 

„©a^  ift  nict)t  fo  lei^t,  n)ie  @ie  glauben,  toenn  man  Ubung 
braud^t.'' 

„T)tefe  Snaben  ^aben  eine  beffere  Slu^fprad^e  ate  @ie,  aber  ba^ 
aJtdb^en  fpri^t  bie  SBorte  am  beften  au^.'' 


NUMERALS.  133 

„Qa,  fie  fpric^t  auf^  f^neHfte,  aber  t^  braud^e  im  SBiJrterbud^ 
na^jufcfjlagen,  e(}e  id)  bie  @d^e  au^f|3red)e," 
^^^a,  eben,  aber  ®ie  follten  fortfa^ren,  e^  ju  derfui^en.'' 

(c)  1.  Can  you  pronounce  this  sentence  faster  than  I  ?  Try- 
it.       2.  You  need  practice ;  begin  with  the  easiest  exercises. 

3.  The  faster  we  read,  the  harder  it  is  to  try  to  understand. 

4.  It  is  easier  to  open  the  dictionary  and  look  up  these  words 
than  to  try  to  pronounce  them  without  knowing  what  they 
mean.  5.  That  last  sentence  is  the  longest  (§  212,  b)  that  we 
have  had.       6.  She  is  the  most  beautiful  girl  I  know. 

(d)  Dear  Karl :  The  more  I  see  of  this  country,  the  better  I 
like  it.  It  is  as  beautiful  as  you  told  me.  The  fields  are  the 
greenest  I  have  seen,  and  the  trees  are  larger  and  higher  than 
ours.  But  I  do  not  like  the  most  beautiful  things  here  so 
well  as  those  at  home.  At  home  it  is  always  most  beautiful. 
I  shall  try  to  come  home  next  week. 

Your  friends 

LESSON  XL VII. 
Numerals. 


§ipet  ^dlftcn  madden  3iDar  etn  (Sanjes,  aber  merf: 

2lus  l^alb  unb  l^alb  ^ctan  entftel^t  fetn  ganjcs  XX)erf.  —  9tucfcrt. 

217.  The  Cardinal  Numerals  correspond  to  the  English  as 
below.  They  are  indeclinable  except  etn^  (see  §  22)  and  tint 
5KiHton,  gtDet  aKtllionen. 

1  etn^  3  brct  5  fitnf 

2  jmet  4  t)ier  6  fe^^ 


134 

7  fieben 

8  ai)t 

9  neuti 

10  ge^n 

11  elf 

12  glDoIf 

13  breijefin 

14  titerje^n 

15  fitnfje^n 

16  fe(^5e^n 

17  fieb(en)3e^n 


ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 


18  ai^tje^n 
.19  neunje^n 

20  imnm 

21  ein'unbjtDanjtg 

22  jtDei'unbjtDanstg 
30  bret^ig  (not 

bretjtg) 
40  Diergig 
50  funfstg 
60  [e(^3tg 
70  fiel)(en)atg 


80  a^tm 
90  neunjig 
100  ^unbert 
200  jtDei'^unbert 
225  jtDeif)unbert' 

funfunbjtDanjtg 

1000  taufenb 

1901  taufettb       neun- 

^unbertunbein^ 

1,000,000    etne    aKil- 

lion' 


(a)  German  numbers  of  the  same  group  are  usually  written 
as  one  word. 

56  fecfj^unbfitnfstg, 
147  ^unbert(utib)fiebenunbt)ter5tg, 
329,564  brei^unbertneununbjtDansigtaufenb  fiinfl^unbertDter* 
unb[erf)3tg, 
3,784,632  brei   SKtHionen  fieben^unbertt)ierunbac^t3tgtaufenb 
fed^^^unbertjiDeiunbbrei^tg, 

(b)  Cardinal  adverbs  are  formed  by  adding  ^mal  (ba^  Wldl, 
the  time)  to  the  cardinal :  eintual,  once;  jtt)ettnal,  twice;  breitttal, 
three  times,  etc. 

(c)  German  translates  a  hundred  by  l^utlbert^  a  thousand  by 
taufenb  ;  ein  l^unbert  and  ein  taufenb  mean  one  hundred  and  one 
thousand, 

218.  The  Ordinal  Numerals  are  formed  from  the  cardinals  by 
adding  *t  up  to  20,  and  ^\i^  from  20  up.  Exceptions :  ber 
erfte,  ber  britte,  ber  ac^te.  They  are  declined  like  other  adjec- 
tives, and  their  uninflected  use  is  rare. 


NUMERALS,  135 

ber  erfte,  1st  ber  jtranjigfte,  20th 

ber  jtDette,  M  ber  ^unbertfte,  i(96/^/i 

ber  britte,  Sd  ber  taufenbfte,  i(96>6>^/i 

ber  t?ierte,  4t^  ber  taufenb    a(f)tl)unbert[ed^^unb^ 

ber  fitnfte,  5th  neunjtgfte,  1896th 

(a)  Ordinal  adverbs  are  formed  by  adding  ^tn^  to  the  ordinal 
stem:  tx\itn^,  firstly,  in  the  first  place;  ^tvdttXl^,  secondly,  in  the 
second  place,  etc. 

219.  Fractions  (except  bte  §alfte,  the  half  and  eitl  ©rittel,  a 
third)  are  formed  by  adding  =tel  (a  softening  of  ber  2^eil,  the 
part)  to  the  ordinal  stem  up  to  20,  and  ==[tel  from  20  on.  They 
are  all  neuter  nouns  of  the  first  class. 

^tci  ^ktitlf  three  fourths ;  cttt  B^^^WS^OP^^  «  twentieth ;  fieBctt  ^tttt= 
bcrtftcl,  seven  hundredths. 

(a)  To  express  and  a  half  with  small  numbers,  besides  the 
regular  expression,  German  may  add  ^(t)^alh  to  the  ordinal  stem 
of  the  number  next  larger  than  the  one  to  be  expressed.  Thus 
britte^Ib  really  means  tivo  ivhole  ones  (understood)  ayid  half 
the  third;  atlbert^alb  means  one  whole  one  (understood)  and 
half  another.     They  are  indeclinable. 

One  and  a  half,  cittuubciu^lft,  anbert^alli. 
Two  and  a  half  ^rtJctttubctn^alB,  brtttc^ali* 
Three  and  a  half,  brciuttbein^alb,  tiicrte^ali^ 

(h)  The  half  (of)  is  bie  ©alfte. 

Half  (of)  the  book,  bie  ^alftc  be§  S3ttc^e§» 

(c)  The  adjectives  ijalh,  half,  and  gatlj,  all,  whole,  are  declined 
regularly  following  the  article. 

Half  a  page,  einc  f)atbt  6eite  ;  all  the  sentence,  ben  gan^en  @a^» 


136  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

220.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  @ie  ^at  anbert^alb  Jaffen  Xtt  getrunfen,  unb  i^  smet^^ 
unbein^alb.  2.  gr  ^at  bie  §dlfte  ber  britten  Seite  lefen 
tDoQen,  aber  er  fonnte  nur  ^tiju  ^dhn  lefen.  3.  grften^ 
f^attt  fie  jmijif  9?ofen,  tt)ot)on  fie  mir  nur  ein  aSiertel  geben 
mottte.  4.  3^^iten^  wax  e^  ba^  erfte  3Jfa(,  unb  britten^ 
tt)oHte  fie  felbft  brei  SSiertel  ^aben.  5.  SBieDiel  ift  fiebenmat 
a^t?  6.  m  finb  fec^^  Sucf)ftaben  in  bem  britten  SBort  auf 
ber  fiebenunbfiinfjigften  ©eite. 

(b)  „3Jiac^en  ®ie  bie  :93iic]^er  auf,  unb  fangen  @ie  mit  ber  neun^ 
ten  3^if^  ^^f  ®^i^^  breiunbt^ier^ig  an!" 

„@oH  id)  mit  berfelben  ^dk  auf  ber  t^ierjigften  @eite  auf^ 
^oren?" 

„@ie  ^ben  nur  anbert^alb  ^tikn  gelefen  unb  ^aben  fiinf 
ge^Ier  gentaii)t.    3)ie  §alfte  be^  ©a^e^  mar  falfd^.'' 

„3=(^  ^abe'  e^  siDeimal  gelefen ;  ba^  britte  Wat  merbe  id)  nur 
brei  3SierteI  fo  tiiele  getter  madden.'' 

(c)  1.  How  much  is  seven  times  twelve?  2.  We  read 
one  and  a  half  lines  on  the  twenty-third  page  and  three  quar- 
ters of  page  twenty-four.  3.  In  the  first  place  I  can't  read 
three  and  a  half  pages  in  an  hour  and  a  half ;  and  in  the  second 
place  I  don't  want  to.  4.  She  translated  half  the  exercise 
in  three  quarters  of  the  time,  but  I  did  it  in  half  an  hour. 
5.  You  are  half  as  old  as  I,  and  I  am  seventeen  and  a  half 
years  old.  6.  In  the  year  a  thousand  nine  hundred  and 
thirteen  we  read  a  hundred  and  thirty-three  pages  in  our 
reader. 

(d)  "  Please  begin  with  the  third  line  on  the  forty-seventh 
page  and  read  five  and  a  half  lines." 

"  I  cannot  translate  the  first  half  of  that  second  exercise.'' 


TIME,  DATS,   MONTHS,   DATES.  137 

"Read  half  the  sentence  and  try  to  translate  a  line  and  a 
half." 

"  I  know  only  a  third  of  the  words ;  you  will  have  to  trans- 
late three  fourths  of  the  sentence  for  me." 

"  That  will  do.     We  will  try  some  one  else." 

LESSON  XL VIII. 
Time,  Days,  Months,  Dates. 


3m  u)unberfd?onen  UTonat  Iltat,  als  alle  Knofpcn  fprangen, 
Pa  ift  in  mcinem  fjer3en  bte  £iebe  aufgegangcn.  —  ^cine. 


221.  Telling  Time  of  Day.  —  German  uses  U^r  for  English 
o^clock.  As  in  English,  it  is  expressed  usually  only  on  the 
complete  hours. 

What  time  is  it  f    SBietifcl  U^jt  ift  t§? 

It  is  ten  o'clock.     (^§  ift  jc^tt  UffV* 

It  is  half  past  eight.    Q:^  ift  f^aih  ttCtttt* 

(a)  German  usually  reckons  ahead  to  the  following  hour,  and 
instead  of  saying  quarter  past  any  hour,  it  says  one  quarter 
towards  the  succeeding  hour. 

It  is  quarter  past  Jive.     (^§  ift  Cttt  S^icrtcl  (auf)  ^t6)§* 
It  is  half  past  Jive.     ©^  ift  i^aih  fcr^§- 
It  is  quarter  of  six.     ©^  ift  brci  ^itvtd  (auf)  fcd^i^* 
At  quarter  to  eight.    Uttt  brci  S^icrtel  a6)t 

(b)  Minutes  are  reckoned  as  in  English,  before  (t)or)  and 
after  (na6))  the  hour. 

It  is  ten  minutes  to  nine.     ®^  ift  5cl)tt  SJlittutCtt  tJOr  ttCUtt* 
It  is  twenty-three  minutes  past  seven.     Q:§  ift  breiuttbsttiattjig  SKittUtetl 
nad^  fieBen* 


138  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN, 

222.  Other  Time.  —  Days  of  the  week  are  put  in  the  accusa- 
tive of  time  (§  117)  or  in  the  dative  with  atn* 

What  day  (of  the  week)  is  to-day  f    SBcIc^cu  Xag  JjaBctt  ttiir  ^cute  ? 

To-day  is  Monday.     ^Cttte  ift  Wmiaq. 

Monday  we  went  home.    9Jlotttag  (am  SJlutttag)  fitngctt  toix  nacft  ^aitfe* 

(a)  Days  of  the  month  are  put  in  the  accusative  of  time 
(§  117)  or  in  the  dative  with  am.  In  dating  a  letter  use  ben, 
Notice  the  idiomatic  expression  by  which  German  asks,  What 
day  of  the  month  is  to-day  9 

What  day  of  the  month  is  to-day?    ^Ctt  ttJieUicltCtt  f^ahtn  toiv  ^Ctttc  ? 
To-day  is  the  thirteenth.     $cutc  ift  bcr  btci^C^tttc, 
We  arrive  (on)  the  eighth,     ^it  fOtttlttCtt  bctt  at^tCtt  (or  am  a^ittt)  an. 
Chicago,  June  7,  S^icago,  ben  7tctt  (b,  7,)  3utti, 

(b)  The  name  of  the  month  foHows  the  date  without  article 
or  preposition.     Qm  QaijVt  usually  precedes  the  year  date. 

Fourth  of  July,  ben  4tCtt  3iUU. 
(On)  the  first  of  January,  bclt  (am)  crftCtt  SattUar, 
In  1492,  im  3a^re  tanfenb  tjict^ttttbcrtsttJciuttbttcunsig,  or  simply  1492^ 
bicrac^tt^uttbcrt^tticiuttbttcttitaig. 

223.  Names  of  Days  and  Months. 

(a)  The  days  of  the  week  are:  — 

bcr  Sotttt'tag,  bet  ^mx^'ia^f  bcr  ^on'itcr^tag, 

bcr  Wm'ia^f  bcr  SJlitt'ttJot^,  bcr  fjrci'tag, 

bcr  Sott'nabcttb,  bcr  Sam^'tag  (South  Germany). 

(p)  The  names  of  the  months  are :  — 


bcr  Sati'uar, 

bcr  max, 

bcr  (Sc^tcm^bcr, 

bcr  ??g'brttar, 

bcr  3tt'tti, 

bcr  Ofto'bcr, 

bcr  9Kar^, 

bcr  ^vi% 

bcr  ^obcm'bcr, 

bcr  %px\V, 

bcr  5(ttgttft', 

bcr  ^cjcm'bcr. 

TIME,   DAYS,   MONTHS,   DATES.  139 

224.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  a^  fing  um  stDanjig  3}?tnuten  t)or  adjt  am  ©onner^tag 
bem  fiebten  Wdx^  im  ^a^re  neunse^n^unbertbreije^n  an. 
2.  3=m  (Sotnmer,  in  -3^^^^  -3^tt  nnb  3lngnft  ge{)e  id)  nm  ^alb  elf 
jn  Sett.  3.  ge^ten  SBinter  in  ©ejember  unb  .^annar  famii^ 
ieben  STag  nm  l^alb  nenn  in  bie  (Si^nle.  4.  ^ebe  SBoi^e  fdngt 
bie  ©c^nle  am  3Kontag  nm  brei  asiertet  nenn  an,  nnb  fie  ^brt 
am  greitag  nm  ^alb  jtDei  anf.  5.  aBeId}en  Slag  ^aben  n)ir 
^ente?  6.  §ente  ift  ©onnabenb,  geftern  wax  greitag,  nnb 
morgen  n)irb  @onntag  fein* 

(p)  „3Biet»ieI  U^r  ift  e^,  nnb  ben  U)iet)ietten  ^aben  iDir  ^ente?'' 

„^tutt  ift  ber  erfte  nnh  e^  ift  ein  SSiertel  ^e^n." 

„®eftern  morgen  bin  xii)  nm  brei  a5iertel  fieben  anfgeftanben, 

aber  am  tiierten  -3^Ii  ftanben  tDir  alle  nm  ^alb  t)ier  anf." 
„®a^  ift  jn  frit^  fiir  micf|.    Qd)  fte^e  nie  t)or  je^n  3Jiinnten 

nad)  fieben  anf/' 
„®ann  fommen  ®ie  fpdt  in  bie  ©c^nle.    SBir  fangen  nm  brei 

aSiertel  nenn  an.'' 

(c)  1.  What  day  of  the  week  and  of  the  month  is  to-day? 
2.  To-day  is  Wednesday,  the  twelfth  of  February.  3.  What 
time  was  it  when  you  went  to  bed  last  Sunday  evening?  4.  It 
was  half  past  ten,  or  perhaps  it  was  quarter  to  eleven,  but  on 
Monday  I  went  to  bed  at  twenty-five  minutes  past  nine. 
5.  I  saw  him  here  in  the  city  at  quarter  past  eleven  on  Thurs- 
day, the  seventh  of  October,  1913.  6.  Where  were  you  at 
two  o'clock  and  at  half  past  two  on  Saturday  the  eighth  of 
May,  1897? 

Tuesday,  March  18,  1915. 

(d)  A  Letter.  —  Dear  Sister :  Last  Friday,  the  fourteenth 
of  March,  we  got  up  at  quarter  past  six.     After  we  had  eaten 


140  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

at  seven  o'clock,  we  went  into  the  city  at  quarter  to  eight. 
Before  eleven  o'clock  I  had  bought  a  new  dress.  Then  we 
waited  till  quarter  to  twelve  before  we  came  home.  We  were 
both  very  tired  before  half  past  twelve,  but  I  bought  a  beauti- 
ful dress. 

Your  [you]  loving  sister. 


LESSON  XLIX. 
Proper  Nouns. 


2IIt  f^eibelberg,  bu  fetne, 

Du  Stat>i  an  (El^rcn  retd?; 

2lm  Hecfar  unb  am  Ht|etne 

Ketn'  anbre  fommt  bir  gletd?.  —  ©c^cffel. 


225.  Proper  Names. — Names  of  persons  or  places  usually 
have  no  inflection  except  an  ^^  in  the  genitive  singular. 

29St(^c(m^  ^hdilcVf  William's  books. 
^crttt  'MMcv§  ^an^f  Mr.  Miller's  house. 
^ic  ©tra^Ctt  ScrUn^,  the  streets  of  Berlin. 
^tc  ^liiffc  fRn^ianHf  the  rivers  of  Bussia. 

(a)  Names  of  persons  ending  in  an  s  sound  take  an  apostrophe 
in  the  genitive ;  names  of  places  ending  in  an  s  sound  substi- 
tute the  dative  with  t)Ott. 

^xW  SKcffcr,  Fritz's  knife, 

^ic  ©ttagctt  tlOtt  ^axx^f  the  streets  of  Paris. 

(b)  When  modified  by  the  definite  article,  proper  nouns  are 
uninflected.  When  they  are  modified  by  an  adjective,  this 
must  be  preceded  by  the  definite  article. 


PROPER  NOUNS.  141 

^a§  ^a\X§  ht§  ^tvvn  WlMtv,  the  house  of  Mr.  Miller, 
^ic  SKuttcr  bcr  gutcn  5ttttta,  good  Anna's  mother. 
@r  gai  ci^  bem  ncittett  2Bi(^c(tn.    He  gave  it  to  little  William. 
^ic  233a(t»er  bc^  fcrnett  JRuPanb,  the  forests  of  distant  Russia. 

(c)  German  often  uses  the  article  with  a  proper  noun  where 
English  does  not. 

Thafs  Charles.    ^'a§  tft  (bet)  ^axL 
Give  it  to  Mary,    (^ih  t§  bcr  9Jlaric» 

226.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  fit%  Fred.  bag  2)Ctttfti^'Iattb,  Germany. 

bet  ^o'^attit,  Jb/iw.  httom'mttif     htfam',     Bcfom'ntcit 

ber  ^arl,  Charles.  (!^abctt),  to  get,  secure. 

bic  ^n'na,  Anna,  Ann.  t^aVitUf    f^itU,    gc^dtctt   Oiabtn), 

bte  Syjattc',  Mary,  Marie.  Ct  p(t,  ^o  hold. 

ha^  ^mt'vxla,  America,  fttts,  short, 

227.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  ©er  Heine  ^o^ann  ^t  gri^'  ©itd^er  genommen  utib 
ber  guten  3)iarte  gegeben.  2.  ®a^  finb  ^o^nn^  gebern,  bte 
aJiarie  ^citt;  fie  l^at  fie  t)on  ^arl  befomtnen.  3.  2lnna  ift  brei- 
unbein^alb  3^a^re  alter  al^  ^avl,  aber  grife'  ©ruber  ^'o^ann  ift 
anbertfjafb  Qaijxt  alter  ate  5lnna.  4.  T)ie  ©aume  be^  alten 
S)eutf^Ianb  finb  ni^t  fo  gro^  tt)ie  bie  be^  f(^ijnen  2lmerifa. 
5.  ^art,  IDO  ^aben  @ie  ben  furjen  SRod  befomnten?  6.  T)a^ 
ift  !ein  Stod;  e^  ift  ein  ^leib,  ba^  ber  Meinen  2Inna  ge^tirt. 

W  rf-3o%tin,  ma^  fatten  ®ie  ba  in  ber  §anb?" 
,,'Da^  ift  gri^'  Su(^  iiber  ba§  f(i)5ne  ©eutfiiiranb.'' 
„Unb  ^aben  @ie  e^  Don  gri^  befontmen?" 
„9Jein,  grife  l^at  e^  (bem)  ^arl  gegeben  unb  ^arl  gab  e^  ber 
fteinen  2Karie.'' 


142  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

„Unb  bte  fletne  Ttaxk  ijat  e^  3'^nen  gegeben?" 
,     „S^,  unb  id)  tuerbe  e^  (ber)  3tnna  geben," 

(c)  1.  John  and  Charles  are  Fred's  brothers.  2.  Anna 
and  Marie  are  sisters.  3.  Fred's  brother  John  knows  Marie's 
sister  Anna.  4.  All  the  children  went  from  America  to 
Germany,  where  they  stayed  a  short  time.  5.  There  little 
Fred's  brother  Charles  got  more  things  than  he  could  hold  in 
both  hands.  6.  When  they  came  home  to  America  in  March, 
Anna's  dresses  were  shorter  than  in  January. 

(d)  "  John,  where  did  you  get  that  reader  ?  " 

"  This  isn't  a  reader ;  this  is  Fred's  grammar.  I  got  it  from 
Fred." 

"  Well,  hold  it  in  your  (ber)  left  hand  and  read  a  line  and 
a  half  in  the  third  exercise  on  page  seventy-three." 

"  I  can  read  two  and  a  half  lines,  but  I  cannot  translate." 

"  Well,  perhaps  John  or  Charles  will  translate  for  you." 


LESSON  L. 
Review. 


Das  fletne  rDortd?en  ^IlTug" 
3ft  bod?  von  alien  Hiiffen, 
Die  Xrtenfdpen  inaden  miiffen, 
Die  allerl^drtfte  Hug.  —  S3ed^ftetn. 


228.  Review  Questions. 

(a)  1.  How  are  adjectives  and  adverbs  compared  ?  2.  Do 
adverbs  or  adjectives  have  two  forms  in  the  superlative  ? 
3.    Explain  the  uses  of  these  two  forms.  4.    Give  eight 


REVIEW.  143 

irregular  comparisons.  5.  How  is  than  following  a  com- 
parative expressed  in  German  ?  6.  Give  the  German  for 
as  .  ,  .  as  and  tJie  .  .  .  the. 

(b)  1.  Count  from  one  to  one  hundred  in  German.  2.  How 
does  German  distinguish  a  hundred  and  one  hundred  f  3.  Give 
the  rule  for  forming  ordinals.  4.  What  are  the  various  Ger- 
man equivalents  for  half? 

(c)  1.  Name  the  months  and  the  days  of  the  week.  2.  Give 
all  the  rules  for  telling  the  time  of  day.  3.  Illustrate  each. 
4.  How  does  German  ask  the  day  of  the  week  ?  5.  Of  the 
month  ?  6.  Give  the  rule  for  dating  a  letter.  7.  What 
expression  usually  precedes  the  year  date  ? 

(d)  1.  What  is  the  only  difference  between  German  and 
English  use  of  proper  nouns  ?  2.  What  is  the  distinction  in 
use  between  names  of  persons  ending  in  an  s  sound  and  names 
of  places  ending  in  an  s  sound  ?  3.  Comment  on  the  use  of 
the  article  with  German  proper  names. 

229.  Review  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  Sart  ift  tttd^t  fo  gro^  tDte  3^o^ann,  a6er  er  tft  gr5^er 
at^  3lnna,  unb  grtfe  ift  am  gro^ten.  2.  ^e  Iclnger  mtr  lernen, 
befto  me^r  tt)if[en  tt)ir*  ♦  3.  aic^tmal  neun  ift  stDeiunbfiebstg,  uttb 
bie  §alfte  t3on  jlt)eiunbfieb5tg  ift  fe^^unbbrei^ig.  4.  Qn  ber 
brttten  2lufgabe  auf  ber  neununbai^tsigften  @eite  ijaUn  mtr  nur 
anbertf)alb  ^tiltn  iiberfe^en  fcinnen.  5.  9Biet)tet  U^r  ift  e^  ?  ©en 
tt)iet)telten  ^aben  tt)ir  f)eute  ?  SBe((^en  2^ag  f)aben  tt)tr  ^eute  ? 
6.  2lm  T)onner^tag  bem  t)ierten  3^uU,  tm  ^a^re  a^tje^n^unbert^^ 
fiebenunbtteunjig  ^aben  metne  betben  ^©ritber  jn^eiunbein^Ib 
©tunben  ti:)artett  mitffen.  7.  gr  tft  am  britten  gebruar  urn 
bret  SSiertel  neuti  gefommen,  unb  nm  ijalb  je^n  tft  er  gegangen* 
8.  ©onntag  ben  erften  Wdx^  finb  tt)ir  urn  etn  aSiertet  fteben  auf^ 


144  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

geftattbeti,  9.  35te  5Kutter  ber  fletnen  3lnna  ^t  gri^'  aJZeffer 
in  ©eutfi^Ianb  ge!auft,  10.  ©ann  ijat  fie  e^  (bem)  ^arl 
gelie^en* 

(b)  1.  Her  oldest  daughter  has  the  most  beautiful  clothes. 
2.  This  tree  is  higher  than  that ;  it  is  the  highest  in  the  gar- 
den. 3.  Anna  is  as  old  as  Fred's  sister,  but  not  so  old  as 
Marie.  4.  John  is  bigger  than  his  brother,  but  Charles  is 
the  biggest.  5.  The  faster  we  try  to  translate,  the  more 
mistakes  we  make.  6.  Six  times  eight  is  twice  as  much  as 
twelve  times  two.  7.  629,354  and  756,871  is  1,386,225. 
8.  Please  read  a  line  and  a  half  in  the  third  exercise  on  the 
seventy-fourth  page.  9.  What  day  of  the  week  and  of  the 
month  is  it,  and  what  time  is  it  ?  10.  It  was  quarter  to  ten 
when  you  came ;  now  it  is  quarter  past  ten. 

Boston,  August  18,  1916. 

(c)  A  Letter,  —  My  dear  friend:  You  asked  me  about  my 
brothers  and  sisters.  I  have  three  brothers  and  two  sisters. 
The  brothers  are  named  Fred,  Charles,  and  John,  and  the  sis- 
ters, Mary  and  Anna.  Fred  is  older  than  Mary,  but  not  so  old 
as  Charles.  Anna  is  as  old  as  Fred,  and  John  is  the  oldest 
in  the  family.  Mary  can  sing  better  than  the  boys ;  but  Anna 
sings  most  beautifully.  We  all  go  to  school  every  morning  at 
half  past  eight  and  come  home  at  quarter  past  one. 

Your  friend. 

Qd)  ^atf  etnen  ^ameraben, 
(Stneti  beffern  finbft  bu  nit ; 
®te  2:rommeI  fd)(ug  jum  ©treite, 
@r  gtng  an  meiner  (Sette 
Qn  glet^em  ©c^ritt  unb  SCritt. 


BEVIEW,  145 

©tie  ^uget  !am  geflogen ; 
®tlf^  mir  ober  gilt  e§  btr? 
^'^ti  ^t  e0  lr)eggert[fen, 
6r  Itegt  mir  tior  ben  ^it^en, 
311^  mart  em  (gtiid  t)on  tnir* 

9Bttt  mir  bie  §anb  not^  reid^en, 
©erlDeil  ic^  eben  lab' ; 
„^ann  bir  bie  §anb  nidjt  geben  ; 
©teib'  bu  im  ett)'gen  geben 
ajiein  guter  Samerab !" 

—  Subtotg  Ui^lanb. 


a)ie  axmt  Ketne  S^^^^* 

@^  h)ar  einmal  eine  arme,  Heine  3^bee, 
(gin  arme^,  f^mat^tige^  SSSefen,— 
!Da  famen  brei  ©id^ter  be^  S93eg^,  o  tDe^ ! 
Unb  ^aben  fie  anfgelefen. 
S)er  eine  matfjt  einen  @^3rn(f)  baran^  — 
S)a^  ^ielt  bie  fleine  ^'bee  nod^  au^  ; 
®er  jlDeite,  eine  :33a((abe  — 
®a  iDurbe  fie  [^n)ac^  nnb  malabe ; 
®er  britte  iDoItf  fie  Dernjenben 
^u  einem  9ioman  in  jmei  Sanben, 
!Dem  ftarb  fie  unter  ben  §anben. 

—  otto  ©ommcr^torff. 


146  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

LESSON  LI. 
The  Passive  Voice. 


(Sliicf  Idgt  fid?  ntd^t  r»on  (Sott  erbttten 
Unb  ntd?t  t)om  ^tmmel  fid?  erflel^n, 

€s  tDtrb  erMmpft  ntd?t,  ntd?t  erftritten, 
Unb  nte  errungen  fann  man's  fel^n.  —  SSei^I. 


230.  The  Passive  Voice  of  transitive  verbs  is  formed  by 
conjugating  tperbetl  with  the  past  participle  (the  third  one  of 
the  principal  parts).  In  the  perfect  tenses  the  form  tDOrbett 
is  used  for  getDorben. 

(a)  SBerben  thus  has*  two  meanings  in  English  besides  its 
regular  meaning,  to  become.  In  the  future  it  means  shall  or 
will;  in  the  passive,  am,  is,  or  are.  Distinguish  carefully;  id) 
tDerbe,  /  become;  t(^  tDcrbe  (oben,  /  shall  praise;  t(^  iDcrbe 
getobt,  I  am  praised.  When  you  see  a  form  of  tDerbetl,  look 
carefully  to  see  whether  it  is  used  independently,  or  is  fol- 
lowed by  a  simple  infinitive,  or  by  a  past  participle,  and  then 
,  translate  accordingly.  Except  in  the  future  it  may  often  be 
translated  by  get.  Qd)  inurbe  !ran!,  /  got  sick.  Qd)  tt)urbe 
gef(f)Iagen,  I  got  hit. 

231.  Conjugation  of  the  Passive. 

Present  Indicative. 

td^  wctbe  gcIoBt,  gcfc^ctt  ttitr  tticrbcn  gcIoBt,  gefcl^en 

/  am  praised^  seen.  we  are  praised,  seen. 

btt  wirft  ^tU%  ocfe^en  x^x  ttJcrbet  gclofit,  gcfc^ctt 

thou  art  praised,  seen.  you  are  praised^  seen. 

tx  ttitrb  gclobt,  gcfc^ctt  fie  mcrbcn  gcloBt,  gefc^cn 

he  is  praised,  seen.  they  are  praised,  seen. 


THE  PASSIVE   VOICE.  147 

Synopsis. 

Pres.        i^  tticrbc   gctoBt,  /  am     Perf.        id^  hin  qtloU  irborbcn,  / 

praised.  have  been  praised. 

Past.       i(^  ttjurbc  gcluBt,  /  was     P.  Perf.  tci^   mar   gdoBt    ttJOtbcn, 

praised.  I  had  been  praised. 

Fut.        irJ^  iticrbc  geloBt  tuerbcn^      F.  Perf.  x^  tucrbc  gcIoBt  njorbcn 

/  shall  be  praised.  feiu,  /  shall  have  been 

praised. 
Imperative.  —  ttlcrbc  gctobt  (rare),  luetbet  gctobt  (rare)^  &6  praised. 

Note.  —  The  passive  imperative  is  usually  formed  with  felit :  — 

fci  ^tloUf  fcib  gcloBt,  fcictt  Sic  gcIoBt,  6e  praised. 

Infinitive.  —  Pres.    gcluBt    (gu)    tticrben,    ^o  5e  praised.     Perf.   geloBt 

ttiotbctt  (gu)  fcttt,  ^0  have  been  praised. 
Participle.  —  Pres.  5U  lobettb,  ^0  5e  praised  (used  only  as  a  declinable 

adjective  preceding  its  noun)  :  cttt  ^tt  (uBcjtbcr  ^atttt^  a  man  to  be 

praised.     Past,  qtlofft,  praised. 

(a)  Conjugate  each  tense  of  the  indicative  in  full,  and  give  complete 
synopses  in  the  second  and  third  singular,  and  first,  second,  and  third 
persons  plural. 

232.  Dative  of  Agent.  —  The  agent  is  put  in  the  dative  after 
t)on.     The  English  by  with  the  agent  is  never  German  itu 

3c§  tijerbc  tiutt  bcm  Secret  gclobt    I  am  praised  by  the  teacher. 
^tt  bift  tJUtt  bciner  9Jliittcr  gclobt  tnorbcn*     You  have  been  praised  by 
your  mother. 

233.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  ^efn^',  bie  S3efu^(S^c,  visit.  ct^aCtcn,  cr^tclt^    cr^jarteit   (^a= 

bic  ^tt'tc,  middle^  center.  bctt),  er  etJ|a(t',  ^0  receive. 

^a^  gen'ftcr,  bie  fjcnftct,  window.  fa('(cn,    ftel,    gefattcn    (fcin),    cf 

beftt'^en,    befuti^'tc,    bcfurfft'   (^a=  fallt,  ^o  fall. 

bctt),   ^0  v/si^;   (in  speaking  of  ^zx\^xt'6)tn,    5crbvat^',    ^crbto'd^ett 

school)  to  attend  (as  a  pupil,  not  (^abctt),  cr  ^txWx^i',  to  smash, 

as  a  visitor).  break  to  pieces. 


148  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

234.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  @r  tft  au^  bem  genfter  in  bie  3JJttte  be^  ©attend 
gefallen,  aber  er  murbe  nt(f)t  Derle^t.  2.  ©te  gter,  bte  lt)tr 
tjott  -^o^atiti  er^alten  ^aben,  finb  atle  t)on  bem  2!JJdbcf)en  jer* 
broc^en  iDorben.  3.  §eute  morgen  tDerben  ©ie  gelobt  tDerben, 
benn  bte  Slufgabe  ift  t)on  -3^nen  rit^tig  uberfe^t  tDorben.  4.  !Sie 
^Taffe  unb  ber  ^tetter  finb  t)om  %x\ijt  gefallen  unb  finb  beibe 
jerbro(^en  iDorben.  5.  Dlai^bent  bie  ©d^e  itberfe|t  iperben, 
iDirb  bie  Hnfgabe  anf  bentf(^  gef(f)rieben  n)erben.  6.  SBenn 
id^  meinen  grennb  befnd^e,  n^erbe  i^  Don  feinen  lleinen  Sriibern 
nnter^alten. 

{h)  „33on  irem  ift  ba^  genfter  jerbrod^en  morben  ?" 

„S)a^  genfter  mnrbe  t)on  feinem  ber  @^iiler  jerbrod^en,  bie 
nnfere  @d^n(e  befnd^en." 

„2lber  e^  ift  gerbrod^en  n^orben,  af^  x6)  einen  ^efnd^  t)on  einem 
grennbe  er^ielt." 

,,3^^  ^t^be  ettDa^  an^  bem  i^enfter  fatten  fe^en,  aber  e«  n)ar 
fc^on  jerbrod^en  toorben,  e^e  id^  ba^  fal^." 

(c)  1.  When  I  fell  out  of  the  window,  I  was  not  hurt. 
2.  What  school  do  you  attend,  and  from  whom  did  you  re- 
ceive those  books  ?  3.  In  the  middle  of  the  lesson  the  win- 
dow was  smashed  by  a  ball.  4.  Your  visit  is  too  short ;  you 
must  stay  longer  when  you  visit  us.  5.  It  is  fine  (fd^on)  to 
be  called  out  of  the  class  to  be  praised  by  the  teacher. 
6.  When  these  words  have  been  written,  the  whole  exercise 
will  have  to  be  translated. 

{d)  "  What  school  does  your  brother  Charles  attend  ?  Where 
is  he  ? '' 

"  To-day  he  isn't  attending  any  school.  He  fell  out  of  the 
window  yesterday  and  was  hurt.'' 


THE  PASSIVE   VOICE.  149 

"  Did  he  receive  his  books  at  home,  or  weren't  these  exer- 
cises written  by  him  ?  " 

"  Yes,  his  books  were  brought  (^oletl)  by  a  friend,  and  all 
these  sentences  were  translated  by  Charles." 

"  Good.  He  will  be  praised  by  his  teacher,  because  these 
sentences  were  all  written  correctly." 


LESSON  LII. 
The  Passive  Voice. 


(Es  tft  bcfttmmt  in  (Sottes  Hat, 

Dag  man  com  £tebftcn,  was  man  I^at, 

ITTug  fd?etben.  —  i^eud^ter^Ietcn. 


235.  Uses  of  the  Past  Participle.  —  When  the  Past  Par- 
ticiple is  used  as  an  adjective  in  English,  German  uses  feitt  as 
copula. 

The  door  is  shut,    ^ie  ^^iir  ift  gcfe^toffett. 

The  cloth  is  torn.     l)a^  Xnd^  ift  jcmffctt, 

(a)  This  must  not  be  confused  with  the  passive  construction, 
often  expressed  the  same  way  in  English  (because  in  English 
to  be  is  both  the  copula  and  the  sign  of  the  passive).^ 

The  door  is  (being)  shut.     'J)tC  ^iir  toxvh  gefti^Iuffcit* 
The  cloth  is  (being)  torn,     ^a^  %x\ti^  toM  SCtriffCtt. 

(b)  The  auxiliary  depends  upon  whether  a  condition  is 
asserted  or  an  action.  A  simple  way  to  distinguish  is  to  make 
the  verb  active.  If  the  tense  stays  the  same  without  changing 
the  meaning  of  the  original  sentence,  use  tperbett.     But  if,  in 


150  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN, 

order  to  keep  the  original  meaning,  you  have  to  change  the 
tense,  use  [eitl* 

Passive.                    Active.  Rule.                  Example. 

The  door  is  being    Some  one  is  shut-  Use  WtX^tn.     ^ic  %nv  tt)trb  gc= 

shut.                          ting  the  door.  fl^luffctt* 

The  door  is  shut.     Some  one  has  shut  Use  fettt*          ^tc     Xnv    ift    ge= 

the  door.  fc^Iojfett* 

The  cloth  is  being    Some  one  is  tear-  Use  ttietbeu.    ^a§  Xn6}  ttiirb  5Cr:= 

torn,                         ing  the  cloth.  riffciu 

The  cloth  is  torn.     Some  one  has  torn  Use  fcttt*          ^a§  Xuri^l'tft  jcrnf* 

the  cloth.  fen* 

(c)  Always  use  tt)erben  when  the  agent  is  expressed.  TJie 
cloth  was  torn  may  be  translated  correctly,  ®a^  Xu6)  Wax  jerrif-^ 
fen  or  ©a^  Xui)  tnurbe  jerriffen,  depending  on  the  meaning,  but 
The  cloth  was  torn  by  the  man  can  be  translated  correctly  only  by 
©a^  %Vi6)  murbe  t)on  bem  3)?anne  gerrtffen. 

236.  Passive  of  Verbs  governing  the  Dative.  —  Verbs  followed 
by  the  dative  are  used  only  impersonally  (that  is,  with  e^  as 
subject)  in  the  passive,  the  subject  being  put  in  the  dative  of 
indirect  object.    In  dependent  or  inverted  clauses  e^  is  omitted. 

I  am  thanked.    @i§  luirb  vxxx  gebanft  (lit.  it  is  thanked  to  me). 
You  were  helped  by  a  man.     ^\x  {tXX^f  S^ltClt)  ttltttbe  tiOtt  eittCItt  9JlattttC 
ge^olfctt* 

237.  Substitutes  for  the  Passive.  —  German  uses  the  passive 
less  than  English. 

(a)  When  the  agent  is  not  expressed,  matt  with  the  active 
may  be  used. 

/  am  thanked.    9)latt  banft  mtr* 
You  were  asked.     '^axK  fragtc  btti^  (tw^,  Stc)» 
We  shall  be  convinced.     WldM  tuirb  \xn^  ttber^eugctt^ 
It  is  said.    SSlaw  fagt. 


THE  PASSIVE   VOICE.  151 

(b)  When  the  agent  is  expressed,  we  may  invert,  making 
the  agent  the  subject,  and  the  subject,  the  object. 

You  were  helped  by  a  man.    @itt  SSHann  \\(ii  bir  ge^olfctt* 
Tlie  cloth  was  torn  by  the  man.    ^er  'Mann  5em§  t>a§  Xn^* 

238.  Vocabulary. 

ber  ^Ip'^cif  hit  ^^fcl,  apple.  cr  gcfiiUt',  to  please,  followed  by 

bet  293eg,  bic  S95egc,  way,  road.  the  dative. 

bic  Ui^Vf  bic  U^ren,  c?ocA:,  i^^^c/i.  ft^rrfcn,  fc^ttfte,  gcfi^irft  (f^ahtn), 

ha^  Xnd^,  hit  Xiid)tVf  cloth.  to  send. 

^eFfctt,  l^alf,  ge^olfctt  (^abcn),  er  aerret'gcn,  $cm^^  gcrrtf fctt  (:^a= 

!^Uft,    ^0   help,   followed  by  the  htn),  to  tear  (to  pieces). 

dative.  brcit,  imde,  broad. 

gcfaFIctt,  gcflct',  gefaCten  (^abeit),  ttiett,  /ar  (not  wide). 

239.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  2Son  h)em  tDurben  -3t)nen  btefe  Stpfel  gegeben? 
2.  ©er  ^naht  tDurbe  in  bie  Stabt  gef(f)i(ft,  urn  etne  U^r  ju 
faufen;  e^  irurbe  tf)m  auf  bem  3Bege  tion  einem  greutibe  ge- 
^olfen.  3.  ©efallen  ^^nett  Jene  breiten  3Iit(^er,  bie  fiir 
unfere  Steiber  gemadjt  tDurben?  4.  (5^  tDurbe  bem  ©(^itler 
bott  ben  anberen  gebanft,  al^  man  i^m  bie  fc^onen  St^fel  ft^idte, 
bie  er  ben  anberen  @(^ulern  gab.  5.  Ttan  ^pitlt  nnb  fingt 
auf  bem  SBege  nad)  ©aufe,  nad)bem  bie  Slufgaben  gefc^rieben 
finb.  6.  !T)er  flei^igfte  Snabe  ift  nad)  §aufe  gefd^idt  tDorben, 
treit  bie  @a^e  bon  i^m  fo  [d)ne{(  iiberfe^t  njurben. 

(6)  „g^  gefallt  mir  nt^t,  biefe^  jerriffene  Xud)  ^ier  ju  fet)en/' 
„©o?    3ft  ba^  5ru(^  serriffen?'' 

„Qa.    @^  ift  bon  jenem  ^naben  jerriffen  iDorben.    ®  tDurbe 
i^m  bon  feinem  Sruber  ge^offen.'' 
„9Jfan  foHte  i^n  na^  §aufe  fd)iden.'' 
„?Jein,  e^  ift  ju  tueit ;  ber  Seg  ift  ju  lang/' 


152  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

(c)  1.  John  was  sent  the  long  way  to  the  city  to  fetch  a 
clock  and  some  apples.  2.  That  broad  piece  of  cloth  that 
has  been  torn  doesn't  please  me.  3.  The  pupil  was  helped 
by  the  teacher,  and  the  teacher  was  thanked  by  the  pupil. 

4.  The  cloth  is  torn,  they  say,  but  by  whom  was  it  totn  ? 

5.  How  far  is  it  home,  and  is  the  way  beautiful  ?         6.   The 
girl  became  red  when  she  was  praised  by  her  mother. 

(d)  "  Did  it  please  your  mother  when  you  were  sent  home 
with  a  torn  coat  ? '' 

"  She  did  not  know  that  my  coat  was  torn ;  I  did  not  show 

it  to  her." 

"  Is  it  far  to  your  house  ?     Is  the  way  long  ?  " 

"  Yes,  but  I  was  helped  on  the  way  by  an  old  man." 

"  Did  you  thank  him  ?     Old  men  must  always  be  thanked 

by  boys,  when  the  boys  are  helped  by  them." 

"  Yes,  he  gave  me  an  apple  and  I  thanked  him,  and  I  showed 

him  where  the  cloth  was  torn." 

LESSON  LIII. 
Reflexive  Verbs. 


<£s  btlbet  tin  Calent  fid?  in  ber  Stille, 

Std?  ctn  Cl^arafter  in  bem  Strom  ber  IPelt.  —  @oct^c. 


240.  Reflexive  Verbs.  —  A  reflexive  verb  is  one  whose  object 
is  a  pronoun  referring  to  the  subject. 

(a)  The  reflexive  pronoun  for  the  first  and  second  persons  is 
the  same  as  the  personal,  except  for  ©te  (formal  address). 
For  the  third  person,  including  man  and  (Sie,  it  is  fi(^  in  both 
numbers  and  cases  (dat.  and  ace). 


REFLEXIVE   VERBS.  153 

(b)  As  the  reflexive  verb  always  has  an  object  (the  pronoun), 
the  auxiliary  is  always  ^aben, 

241.  Conjugation  of  a  Reflexive. 

Indicative. 

Present.  Past, 

id)  frcuc  mid},  I  rejoice.  id)  frcutc  mxd)f  I  rejoiced. 

btt  frcuft  t>xd}f  thou  rejoicest.  btt  freuteft  hidj,  thou  rejoicedst. 

tv  frcut  ftti^,  he  rejoices.  tv  freutc  \idj,  he  rejoiced. 

toiv  frcttCtt  tttt^,  we  rejoice.  toix  frcutcn  un^,  we  rejoiced. 

xf^t  frcut  mdjf  you  rejoice.  xf^x  frcutct  cud^,  you  rejoiced. 

ftc  freuctt  ftti^,  they  rejoice.  ftc  frctttett  fic^,  they  rejoiced. 

Future. 

id}  mcrbe  midj  frcucn,  /  shall  rejoice. 
btt  ttiirft  bt(i^  frcttCtt,  ^/low  wilt  rejoice,  etc. 

iri^  ^afic  mtti^  gcfrcttt,  /  /iaue  rejoiced. 

btt  ^aft  bid^  gcfrcttt,  thou  hast  rejoiced,  etc. 

Pas«  Perfect. 

id}  f^aiit  mid}  Qcfrcttt,  /  had  rejoiced. 

btt  ^attcft  biti^  gcfrcttt,  thou  hadst  rejoiced,  etc. 

Future  Perfect. 

id}  tucrbc  mid}  gcfrettt  l^abew,  /sTiaZZ  7i(z?;e  rejoiced. 

btt  ttiirft  bid^  gefrcttt  l^aBen,  «/iow  i(Ji7«  /la^e  rejoiced,  etc. 

Imperative. 

ftctte  btii^,  frcttt  tnd},  frcttCtt  @ic  ftr^,  re/oice. 

Infinitives. 

Pres.    m  (mii^,  btt^,  etc.)  (ju)  frcttCtt,  ^o  rejoice. 

Perf.    ft(^  (n«(^,  bi(i^,  etc.)  gcfrcttt  (311)  l^aiett,  ^0  /tave  rejoiced. 


154  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

Participles. 

Pres.    ft(ij  ftCttCttb,  rejoicing  (rare). 

Past,  fi^  gefreut,  rejoiced  (used  only  in  compound  tenses,  never  as 
adjective). 

(a)  Give  complete  synopses  of  all  persons  and  both  numbers,  including 
the  formal  address.  Conjugate  each  tense  in  full,  remembering  to  change 
the  reflexive  pronoun  in  each  form  to  agree  with  the  personal  one 
(subject) . 

242.  Use  of  Reflexives.  —  Reflexives  are  commoner  in  Ger- 
man than  in  English. 

(a)  Any  transitive  verb  may  be  used  refiexively. 

'^6)  fti^ttcibc  ba^  %\t\\^.     I  cut  the  meat. 
'^^  fti^ttcibc  m\6).     I  cut  myself. 

(b)  Intransitives  may  also  be  used  refiexively.  This  is  an 
impersonal  idiom,  used  only  vs^ith  e^» 

§icr  tait^t  c§  ftrfi  fc^r  fr^iin.     The  dancing  here  is  very  fine. 

Q:§  gel^t  fid)  nic^t  fe^r  gut  im  SBalbc*     The  walking  is  not  good  in  the 

wood. 
@^  fti^ttitmmt  fit^  ttti^t  (cic^t  in  btcfem  falteu  Staffer,    Swimming  isn't 

easy  in  this  cold  water. 

(c)  Reflexives  are  often  used  as  substitutes  for  the  passive. 

The  door  is  opened  (opens),    ^ic  Xnv  iiffnct  fid^* 

The  book  has  been  lost.    ^a§  ^x\d)  i}at  ftc^  ijcttorcti* 

This  paper  is  easily  torn,    ^ief  C)§  *^5a<jlet  scrrci^t  \i^  (citi^t* 

243.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  ^i'\^cVf  bie  JJifi^er,  fisherman,  ba^  ^ferb,  btc  ^ferbc,  horse. 

fisher.  ft(i^  bcfitt'bett,  Bcfanb'  fi(^,  ftd^  Bc= 

bcr  SBa'gctt,  bie  SBagcn,  wagon,  ^nn'htn    (^abcit),    id)    bcfin'be 

carriage.  mid),  to  be,  do,  feel  (in  health). 

bic  <Bd)tn'ntf  bic  ©^cunctt,  bam,  fi^  crtti'itent,  criit'ttcrtc  \id)f  ^id) 


BEFLEXIVE   VERBS,  155 

critt'ttcrt  (Ijabctt),  id)  critt'ttcrc  bctgcffcn,       ticrgafc       ticrgcffcit 

mi^f  to  remember,  with  gen.  (i^ahtn),  btt  ticrgtgt,  cr  Hejrgi^t, 

\id)  frcuen,  frcute  fiti^,  fic^  gcfrcut  to  forget. 

(^a^ctt),  i(^  freue  witi^,  to  be  sie'ljctt,  sog,  gc^ogctt  (iftaBen),  ^o 

^Zac?,  rejoice.  draw,  pull. 

244.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  greuen  ®te  fit^,  ba^  ®te  fic^  biefer  @ci^e  ertnnern 
fdntien?  2.  S)er  gif^er  ^at  fetnen  SBagen  t>ergeffen,  ber  t)on 
jtuei  ^ferben  gejogen  tDurbe.  3.  Qd)  ermnere  mid^  ^tl^e^ 
SSater^  fe^r  gut;  befinbet  er  ft(^  gut?  4.  ©ie  tDtrb  fid)  freueu, 
treun  fie  bie  gro^eu  ^ferbe  uub  ben  f^onen  SBagen  fie^t. 
5.  Qi)  1:)attt  t)ergeffen,  ba^  ba^  "ipferb  ben  SBagen  in  bie  ©d^eune 
gegogen  ^atte.    6.  Qd)  freue  mid),  ba^  @ie  fid)  fo  gut  befinben. 

(b)  „'&k  befinben  @ie  fic^  ^eute  morgen?'' 
„Qi)  freue  mic^,  ba^  id)  mic^  fe^r  gut  befinbe.'' 

„§aben  ©ie-  ben  gifd^er  gefef)en,  beffen  ^ferbe  ben  breiten 
SBagen  in  bie  ®d)eune  gegogen  ^ben?'' 
„9^ein,  id)  erinnere  mii^  feiner  nxiijt" 
„SBie  I)aben  @ie  i^n  t)ergeffen  fdnnen?    (Sr  tnar  eben  l^ier." 

(c)  1.  How  do  you  do  to-day,  and  how  is  your  father? 
2.  I  am  glad  that  you  have  not  forgotten  me.  I  remember 
you  very  well.  3.  Are  those  the  fisherman's  horses,  that  are 
pulling  that  big  wagon  into  the  barn  ?  4.  Were  you  glad 
that  you  had  remembered  all  the  words  in  the  sentence  ?  5.  I 
had  forgotten  that  you  had  been  sick,  but  I  am  glad  that  you 
are  well  now.  6.  I  do  not  remember  your  horse,  but  I  for- 
get very  easily. 

(d)  "  Good  morning  !     How  do  you  do  this  morning  ?  " 

"  Very  well,  thank  you.  I  cannot  remember  when  I  have 
been  so  well." 


156  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

"  I  am  glad  to  hear  it.  Won't  you  come  and  make  me  a 
visit  ?     I  will  show  you  my  new  horses." 

"  I  had  forgotten  that  you  had  a  barn.  I  am  glad  that  you 
have  one.'' 

"  Yes,  I  have  two  carriages  and  two  beautiful  horses." 

"  Oh,  yes,  now  I  remember  the  barn.  Thank  you,  I  shall  be 
glad  to  see  all  that." 

LESSON  LIV. 
Impersonal  Verbs. 


5d?on  fSngt  es  an  5U  bdmmern. 
Per  ITTonb  als  ^trt  crmad^t 
Unb  ftngt  ben  IPoIfenldmmern 
(Etn  £teb  3ur  guten  TXad^t  —  ©etbeU 


245.  Impersonal  Verbs.  —  Impersonal  verbs  are  of  four  kinds 
or  classes :  pure  impersonals,  reflexive  impersonals,  imper- 
sonals  with  the  accusative,  and  impersonals  with  the  dative. 

(a)  Impersonals  are  found  only  in  the  third  person  singular, 
and  are  conjugated  only  with  the  pronoun  e^*  They  are  usu- 
ally weak  and  take  ^aben  as  auxiliary,  except  gef  (^e^en,  gelingen, 
and  einfatlen. 

246.  Pure  Impersonals  usually  denote  states  of  the  weather : 
e^  regnet,  it  rains;  e^  fd^neit,  it  snows. 

Conjugation  of  e^  regnet^  it  rains. 

Pres.        c§  rcgttCt,  it  rains. 

Past.       t^  rcgnete,  it  rained. 

Fut.        c§  ttiirb  rcgnen,  it  will  rain. 


IMPERSONAL    VERBS,  157 

Perf .        t§  f^at  gcrcgnct,  it  has  rained. 

P.  Perf.  c^  f^atU  gcrcgnct,  it  had  rained. 

F.  Perf.  c§  ttitrtJ  gcrcgnct  f^abtUf  it  will  have  rained. 

Infinitive.  —  Pres.  (ju)  tcgttCtt,  to  rain.    Perf.  gcregttct  (gu)  ^abctt,  «o 
Aave  rained. 

247.  Reflexive  Impersonals  include  such  as  e^  ftagt  ft(^,  t^  is 
a  question;  eg  fcflidt  [id),  i^  ^s  proper;  eg  t)erfte^t  firf|,  i^  *s  a 
matter  of  course. 

Conjugation  of  eg  [(^idt  fi(^,  ^^  is  proper, 

Pres.  c^  fri^ttft  fir^,  i^  IS  j9roi9er. 

Past.  0)3  f c^irftc  fid^,  i^  teas  proper. 

Fut.  ci§  tuitb  fi(!^  fd^irfcn,  i^  will  beproper. 

Perf.  C!^  ^at  fil^  gcfti^icft,  i^  Aas  been  proper. 

P.  Perf.  c§  ^attC  fir^  gcfti^irft,  it  had  been  proper. 

F.  Perf.  t§  Uiirb  fit^  gcfrfftrft  ^aBctt,  i^  w?i7Z  /lave  been  proper. 

Infinitive.— Pres.  m  (ju)  fci^itfcn,  ^o  beproper.     Perf.  m  gcfd^irft  (gu) 
l^a^en^  ^o  /iat;e  been  proper. 

248.  Impersonals  with  the  Accusative  include  such  as  eg  freut 
mic^,  lam  glad;  eg  tDUnbert  mtc^,  I  wonder. 

Conjugation  of  eg  freut  tnic^,  /  am  glad. 

Present. 

C^  freut  mx^f  I  am  glad.  t§  freut  nn^f  we  are  glad. 

t§  freut  hid}f  thou  art  glad.  e^  freut  eur^l,  you  are  glad. 

t§  freut  i^tt  (fie,  eg),  he  (she,  it)  is  glad.  c§  freut  fie,  they  are  glad. 

Synopsis. 


Pres.  c§  freut  mi(^,  /  am  < 

Past.  e§  freute  btti^,  ^/lo?^  wast  glad. 

Fut.  e!^  luirb  U}n  freueu,  he  will  be  glad. 

Perf.  e§  Ijat  uu^  gefreut,  we  have  been  (were)  glad. 


158  ELEMENTS    OF  GERMAN, 

P.  Perf.    t§  ^atte  CU(^  gefrcut,  you-had  been  glad. 

F.  Perf.   t^  ttJitb  fie  gcfrcut  ^laben,  they  will  have  been  glad. 

Infinitive.  — Pres.  nti^,  'tsx^f  etc.,  (311)  freucit*     Perf.  mx^t  b^,  etc., 
gcfrcttt  (^u)  \)a^tn, 

249.  Impersonals  with  the  Dative  include  such  as  e^  tUt  tntr 
fetb,  /  am  sorry;  e^  fallt  mir  ein,  it  occurs  to  me;  e^  gelingt  mir, 
I  succeed;  e^  gefi^te^t  mir,  it  happens  to  me. 

Conjugation  of  e^  tut  tnir  leib,  /  am  sorry. 
Present. 

e§  iVii  mix  (eib,  /  am  sorry.  t^  tnt  nn^  (cib,  we  are  sorry, 

t§  int  bit  Icib,  thou  art  sorry.  t§  int  txtd}  (eib,  you  are  sorry. 

t^  tnt  xf}m  (il)r,  i^nt)  (eib,  he  {she^         t§  txxt  i^ncn  Ux^,  they  are  sorry, 
it)  is  sorry. 

Synopsis. 

Pres.  t§  tnt  mix  ttxhf  I  am  sorry. 

Past.  c^  tat  bir  tcib,  thou  wast  sorry. 

Put.  t§  ttiirb  x\}m  Icib  tun,  he  will  be  sorry. 

Perf.  t^  i\at  nn^  (cib  ^ttmf  we  have  been  sorry, 

P.  Perf.  e§  ^attc  cur^  (eib  gctatt,  you  had  been  sorry. 

F.  Perf.  t^  ttiirb  i^nctt  (eib  getan  ^a^tn^  they  will  have  been  sorry. 

Infinitive. — Pres.  mir,  bir,  etc.,  ttxh  (311)  ttttt.     Perf.  mir,  bir,  etc., 
leib  qttan  (ju)  \)a^tn, 

250.  @^  gibt;  e^  ift, —  There  is  (there  are)  is  expressed  in 
two  ways  in  German ;  e^  gibt  and  e^  ift. 

(a)  To  express  general  existence  without  naming  a  limited, 
definite  place,  use  e^  gibt.  It  is  always  impersonal,  singular, 
takes  the  accusative,  and  e^  is  never  omitted. 

(S§  gibt  t)ie(e  ftol^e  2tntt,     There  are  many  proud  people. 
SBttig  gibt  t§  S'Jette^  ?     What  is  there  new?    (  What's  the  news?) 


IMPEBSONAL    VERBS.  159 

(6)  To  express  particular  existence  in  a  limited,  definite 
place  use  e^  ift  or  e^  finb  (§  163).  It  is  personal,  the  verb 
agreeing  in  person  and  number  with  the  real  subject  (not  e^), 
which  is  always  in  the  nominative  case.  @^  is  omitted  in  an 
inverted  or  subordinate  clause. 

^§  ift  fein  ^la^  me^r  tm  Xf^taitv.     There  is  no  more  room  in  the  theatre. 
^§  finb  5ttiei  (SJlafcr  auf  bcm  Xifc^c.     There  are  two  glasses  on  the  table. 
GJcftcrn  ttiar  fcitt  ^(a^  im  Xf^tatcv.     Yesterday  there  was  no  room  in  the 

theatre. 
^^  fel^c,  baft  stuei  (^(afcr  auf  bcm  Xi^d^t  finb*    /  see  that  there  are  two 

glasses  on  the  table. 

251.  Vocabulary. 

c^  tcg'ttet,    e§  rcgnete,    ci^    i^at  e§  tut  mir  Uxh^  c§  iat  mh  Uxh,  c§ 

gcrcgnet,  it^s  raining.  f^at  mir  (eib  gctau,  /  am  sorry. 

t§  f^ttcit^  c^  ft^jttcite,  t§  ^at  ge=  t§  ^tlin^t'  mir,  t^  gckng'  miVf  c^ 

fd^ttcit,  ifs  snowing.  ift  mir  gelutt'gctt,  /  succeed,  in, 

c^  Sic^t,   c§  5og,   Ci^  ^at  gc^ogcn,  with  the  infinitive. 

there's  a  draft.  C§    gcfd^ic^t',    c§  gefti^a^f    e§    ift 

c§  fragt  firi^,  c§  fragtc  fiti^,  e^  f)at  gcfri^c'^cn,  to  happen,  to,  with 

fid^    gcfragt,   it   is    a   question,  dative. 

about,  um  with  accusative.  t^  faltt  mir  tin',  c§  fte(  mir  citt',  t^ 

t§  t)erfte!)t'  fi^,  t§  ijcrftattb'  fir^i,  c^  ift  mir  cingefaUctt,  it  occurs  to 

f^ai  fi^  tJerftan'ben,  it  is  a  matter  me ;   t§  fntlt  mir   itidftt   eiit,   / 

of  course.                                  '  shouldnH  think  of  {such  a  thing) . 

t^  f rcut  miti^,  t§  frcute  mi^,  c§  ^ai  295a^  f  aUt  ^^ntn  cin?    What  are 

mx(il  gcfreut,  /  am  glad.  you  thinking  of  f 

252.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  g^  tut  mir  feib,  ba^  e^  un^  nt(^t  gelungen  ift,  ben 
fiirsef ten  SBeg  ju  finben,  2.  ©a^  gibt'^  5«eue^?  ©^  freut 
mt(^,  ba^  e^  fo  gefi^e^en  ift.  3.  g^  nerfte^t  fit^,  ba^  e^  un^ 
freut,  l^ier  ju  fifeen,  menu  e^  regnet  unb  fc^neit.       4.  g^  gi6t 


160  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

fettten  beffereti  greutib  al^  ^ol^antt,  5.  g^  tut  mtr  tetb,  ba^ 
e^  ^ier  jie^t,  aber  e^  fdllt  mir  nt(f)t  etn,  tti^  anbere  ^i^^^^  3^ 
ge^en*  6.  (g^  fragt  fi^,  toann  e^  nn^  gelingen  n)irb,  biefe 
(Sd^e  rid^ttg  ju  uberfe^en, 

(&)  „9Ba^  fallt  ^'^tien  eiti?  SBtr  fbnnen  nt(f)t  ^tnge^en,  tDenn 
e^  regnet  unb  [c^neit." 

„©a^  t^erfte^t  fi(^,  aber  e^  fragt  fii^,  ob  tvix  l^ier  bleiben 
tDoIIen,  n)o  e^  ste^t*'' 

ud^  tut  mtr  letb,  ba^  e^  un^  ntd^t  gelungen  tft,  fritter  ju 
ge^en/' 

„Qa,  aber  e^  freut  mtc^,  ba§  e^  balb  auf^oren  tcirb  ju 
regnen-'' 

,,3Bentt  ba^  gefd)ie^t,  [o  fdnnen  tt)ir  ^tuge^eu-" 

(c)  1.  What  are  you  thinking  of  ?  There's  a  draft  here. 
2.  Is  it  raining  or  snowing  ?  3.  I  am  sorry  that  you  didn't 
succeed  in  translating  these  long  sentences.  4.  I  was  glad 
that  it  occurred  to  me  to  look  the  words  up  in  the  dictionary. 

5.  It  happened  yesterday  that  there  was  a   draft  in  school. 

6.  Are  you  sorry  or  glad  that  it  is  snowing  and  raining  ? 

(d)  "  What  were  you  thinking  of  ?  It  is  a  matter  of  course 
that  you  will  translate  this  exercise." 

"  There's  a  draft  here  and  I  feel  (§  243)  sick.  Mayn't  I  go 
home  ?  " 

"  No,  it  is  snowing  and  raining.  I  am  sorry  that  it  happens 
so,  but  you  will  have  to  stay  here." 

"  It  occurs  to  me  now  that  I  have  something  to  eat  in  my 
coat.     Perhaps  I  shall  succeed  in  finding  it." 

"  I  am  glad  that  you  have  something,  for  there  is  nothing 
warm  here." 


REVIEW.  161 

LESSON  LV. 
Review. 


^veu^voU  nnb  letbcoK,  geban!ent?oII  fein; 
^an^zn  unb  bangen  in  fd^tpebenber  petit ; 
^immcll^od?  jaud73enb,  3um  Cobe  bctriibt, 
(Sliicflid?  allcin  tft  bie  Seele,  bie  Itebt. — ®otti}c. 


253.  Review  Questions. 

(a)  1.  Give  the  rule  for  forming  the  passive  in  German. 
2.  How  many  meanings  may  lt)erben  have  in  English?  3.  Il- 
lustrate each.  4.  How  is  the  agent  expressed  in  German? 
5.  What  is  the  best  way  to  tell  when  to  use  iDerben  and  when 
fetn,  with  the  past  participle  ?  6.  How  do  you  express  the 
passive  of  German  verbs  that  take  the  dative?  7.  Give 
two  examples.  8.  Which  language  uses  the  passive  more 
frequently?  9.  Give  the  common  German  substitutes  for 
the  passive.    *    10.  When  may  they  be  used  ? 

(b)  1.  Give  the  reflexive  pronouns  for  each  person. 
2.  Which  language  uses  the  reflexive  more  often  ?  3.  Give 
a  reflexive  that  takes  the  genitive.  4.  May  intransitives  be 
used  reflexively  in  German  ?  5.  If  so,  what  is  their  English 
equivalent?  6.  Give  an  illustration  of  the  German  reflex- 
ive used  for  the  English  passive. 

(c)  1.  Name  the  four  kinds  of  impersonal  verbs.  2.  State 
two  peculiarities  of  impersonals.  3.  Which  impersonals 
correspond  exactly  to  the  English  usage  ?  4.  Give  and 
illustrate  the  distinction  between  the  use  of  e^  gibt  and  that  of 
ee  ift. 


162  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

254.  Review  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  SSon  iDcrn  tDurbe  ba^  genfter  jerbroi^en?  2.  911^  e^ 
iDarm  im  ^tmmer  tnurbe,  mac^tett  tDir  ba^  genfter  auf ;  banti  jog 
e§.  3.  !T)a^  2;u(^  ift  jerriffen ;  e^  tft  t)on  bem  Snaben  get* 
rtffen  tDorben,  4.  (g^  it)urbe  mtr  t)on  etnem  SJfanne  ge^olfen, 
bem  t)on  meinem  3Sater  gebanft  iDurbe,  5.  2Bir  freuen  un^, 
bag  e^  fidf)  auf  biefem  SBege  [o  gut  ge^t,  6.  (g^  freut  un^, 
bag  tntr  un§  be^  alten  Tlanm^  erinnert  ^aben,  7.  (g^  gibt 
©c^uler,  beueu  e^  letb  tut,  tvtnn  e^  fctinett,  fo  bag  fie  bie  ®df)ule 
ntd^t  be[u(^en  founen,  8.  2lber  ba^  gefi^te^t  nic^t  iu  unferer 
©c^ule,  mo  e^  \\ii)  utd^t  um  ba^  SBetter  fragt.  9.  ?fa(f)bem  e^ 
aufge^ort  ^t  ju  regnen,  U)irb  e^  dtedetc^t  f^neieu*  10.  (g^  tut 
mir  leib,  bag  e^  mtr  ntc^t  gelungeu  tft,  ^'^rem  3Sater  ju  gefalleu. 

(b)  1.  It  became  cold  and  there  was  a  draft,  when  the  win- 
dow was  broken.  2.  I  see  that  the  cloth  is  torn,  but  by 
whom  was  it  torn  ?  3.  I,  was  thanked  by  an  old  man,  who 
had  been  helped  by  my  friend.  (Write  two  ways.)  4.  He 
was  glad  that  it  wasn't  raining.  5.  The  little  girl  did  not 
remember  that  her  mother  was  well.  6.  I  am  sorry,  but  I 
can't  remember  the  next  word.  7.  There  are  pupils  in  this 
city  who  like  to  study.  8.  I  am  sorry,  but  there  are  too 
many  mistakes  in  that  last  sentence.  9.  It  is  a  matter  of 
course  that  he  will  not  succeed.  10.  I  am  sorry  that  there 
is  a  draft ;  I  had  forgotten  that  it  was  snowing. 

(c)  A  Story.  — YesteTdsiy  we  went  into  the  wood  (beH  2BaIb). 
It  got  cold  and  began  to  rain,  but  we  succeeded  in  finding  a 
little  house  in  which  we  played.  The  windows  had  been 
smashed  by  someone,  and  there  was  a  draft,  but  we  succeeded 
in  getting  warm.  We  played  games  and  sang  songs  and  were 
sorry  when  we  had  to  go  home. 


BEVIEW.  163 

®a^  ein  ^naV  ein  dlMtin  fte^n, 
9?5^Iein  auf  ber  §etben,  ' 

SBar  fo  iung  unb  tnorgenfrfion, 
8tef  er  fc^nett,  e^  nal)  ju  fe{)n, 
@a^^^  tntt  Dtelett  greuben* 
dtMtin,  $Rd^iein,  9to^Iein  rot,      / 
SR5^Iem  auf  ber  ^eibett* 

^nabe  \pva(i) :  ,,3^^)  bterfie  btc^, 
dtUkxn  auf  ber  §eibeu!" 
9?5^rem  fpra^  :  „Q^  fte^e  bt(^, 
!Da^  bu  eU)tg  beu!ft  an  mti^, 
Unb  ii)  U)tir^  ni(^t  leibeh/' 
9?5^tetn,  5Ro^(etn,  9tb^(etn  rot, 
9ft5^Iein  auf  ber  §eiben- 

Unb  ber  toilbe  ^nabe  brad^ 
'^  SRd^Ietn  auf  ber  ^etben ; 
JRo^Iein  me^rte  fid^  unb  ftad), 
§alf  t^m  bod)  !etn  2Bel)  unb  ^d), 
Ttu'^V  e^  eben  (etben, 
dtUkin,  9?o^tetn,  dtMidn  rot, 
9ftij^(etn  auf  ber  §eiben» 


164  ELEMENTS  OF  GEBMAN. 

LESSON  LVI. 
The  Subjunctive.    The  Auxiliaries. 


(Eincs  fd?t(f t  fid?  ntd?t  fiir  alle, 
Sel^e  jeber,  wk  er's  tretbe, 
Scl^c  jeber,  ipo  cr  bleibc, 
Unb  wet  ftet^t,  bag  er  ntd?t  falle.  - 


255.  The  Subjunctive  Mode  is  formed  regularly  from  the  cor- 
responding tense  of  the  indicative.     The  subjunctive  endings 

are :  — 

Singular.  Plural. 

1st  person    =c  -Ctt 

2d  person     =eft  -ti 

3d  person     =c  *ett 

(a)  The  present  subjunctive  is  formed  by  adding  these  end- 
ings to  the  present  stem,  except  in  the  case  of  fetn,  which  does 
not  add  ^e  in  the  first  and  third  persons  singular, 

(h)  The  past  subjunctive  of  weak  verbs  is  the  same  as  the 
indicative ;  strong  verbs  add  the  regular  endings  above,  and  the 
root  vowel  takes  umlaut  when  possible. 

(c)  The  future,  perfect,  past  perfect,  and  future  perfect  sub- 
junctive are  formed  regularly  from  the  corresponding  tenses 
of  the  indicative.  Instead  of  the  indicative,  the  subjunctive 
of  the  auxiliaries  '^aben  (fettl)  and  tDcrben  is  used. 

{d)  In  German,  as  in  English,  there  is  a  tendency  to  use  the 
iAdicative,  especially  in  conversation,  even  when  the  rule  calls 
for  the  subjunctive.  In  learning  the  language,  however,  it  is  best 
to  adhere  to  the  usage  which  is  generally  accepted  as  correct. 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE, 


166 


256. 


Subjunctive  of  the  Auxiliaries. 


No  translation  is  given,  as  the  meaning  varies  with  the  use.  As  the 
subjunctive  is  most  used  in  dependent  sentences,  it  is  best  learned  in  the 
dependent  order. 


Present. 


Past. 


(baf3)  if)r  f^abtt 
0)a^)  fie  f\ahcn 


fci 

fcieft 

fet 

fcten 

feict 

fcictt 


ttierbc 
merbcft 
ttiertie 
ttjerbett 

tticrbcn 


(bag)  bu  ptteft 
(bag)  cr  pttc 
(bag)  ttJtr  gotten 
(bag)  i^r  pttet 
(bag)  fie  pttett 


ttiare 

ttirireft 

ttJiire 

njiirett 

motet 

todttn 


mitrbe 

tuitrbeft 

ttiurbe 

ttJittbett 

ttitttbet 

ttitttbett 


(bag)  ic^  f^ahtn  ttJerbe 
(bag)  bu  l^aBen  itierbeft 
(bag)  er  ^aben  ttierbe,  etc. 


(bag)  x^  Qtf^aU  ^abe 
(bag)  t>n  ^ti^aU  ^abeft 
(bag)  er  ^tf^aU  ^ahc,  etc. 


(bag)  iti^  Qtf^aU  ^iitte 
(bag)  btt  ^tt^aitt  f}aitc\i 
(bag)  er  ge^abt  f)ixtttf  etc. 


Future. 

feitt  ttierbe 
feitt  ttJerbeft 
fein  ttierbe,  etc. 

Perfect. 

gettiefpn  fet 
getticf  en  feteft 
gettiefen  fei,  etc. 

Past  Perfect. 

gettJefen  ttJdre 
gettjefett  ttiareft 
gettjefett  ttidre,  etc. 

Future  Perfect. 


ttierben  ttierbe 
ttierbeii  ttierbeft 
ttierben  ttierbe,  etc. 


gettiorben  fet 
gettforbeu  feteft 
gettiorbett  fet,  etc. 


gettiurbett  ttirire 
gettiorbett  ttiareft 
gettiorbett  ttiare,  etc. 


(bag)  id)  gc^abt  ^abett  ttierbe    gettiefen  fein  ttierbe  gettiorbett  feitt  ttierbe 

(bag)  bu  ge^abt  ^abett  ttierbeft  gettiefett  feitt  ttierbeft  gettiorbett  feitt  ttierbeft 

(bag)  er  geljabt  ^abett  ttierbe,    gettiefeit  feitt  ttierbe,  gettiorbett  feitt  ttierbe, 

etc.  etc.  etc. 

(a)  Conjugate  all  the  tenses  in  full,  and  give  complete  synopses  in  each 
person. 


166  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

257.  Uses  of  the  Subjunctive  Mode.  —  The  German  subjunc- 
tive is  used :  (1)  in  indirect  discourse  {dependent  subjunctive) ; 
(2)  to  express  possibility  {potential  subjunctive)  ;  (3)  to  express 
a  wish  or  command  {optative  or  hortatory  subjunctive) ;  and  (4)  in 
some  conditional  sentences  {conditional  subjunctive).  The  de- 
pendent subjunctive  will  be  treated  in  this  lesson;  (2)  and  (3) 
in  Lesson  LVII ;  and  (4)  in  Lesson  LIX.  Except  in  indirect 
discourse,  the  German  subjunctive  corresponds  very  closely  to 
the  English. 

258.  The  Dependent  Subjunctive  is  used  in  indirect  discourse 
and  indirect  questions  after  verbs  of  saying,  thinking,  feeling, 
asking,  etc. 

(Sr  ^\aM\>it,  ba^  x^  fratt!  f ci.    He  thought  that  I  ims  sick. 

@r  fdgtc,  ber  ^nahc  fci  im  ^aufc.    He  said  the  hoy  was  in  the  house. 

(a)  In  indirect  discourse  English  changes  the  present  tense  Ibo 
past,  if  the  verb  of  the  main  clause  is  past.  German  may  make 
this  change,  but  usually  it  keeps  the  tense  of  direct  discourse- 

He  said,  ''lam  ilV    @r  fagte:  ,,3*^  Bin  franf/' 

He  said  that  he  was  ill.    ^v  fagte,  ba§  er  frrmf  fci* 

He  said,  ''I have  a  book.''    ^r  fagte:  ,,3<^  f)aht  tin  ^nd^*" 

He  said  that  he  had  a  book.    @r  fagtc/  bag  cr  cttt  ^n6)  ^aht. 

{b)  When  the  form  of  the  present  subjunctive  is  the  same 
as  the  indicative,  German  often  changes  the  tense  of  the  indi- 
rect discourse,  in  order  to  use  a  form  distinctively  subjunctive. 

He  says  that  I  have  money.    ($r  fagt,  t^a^^  x(^  ^clb  i^diit. 
They  say  they  'have  no  time.    Sic  fagcit,  fie  i^aiitn  hint  3cit 

(c)  The  indicative  should  be  used  if  the  speaker  wisTies  to 
emphasize  his  belief  in  the  truth  of  what  he  reports 

@r  fagtc,  bag  cr  t§  nid^i  gctan  i}at    He  said  that  he  didn't  do  it. 
^^  qlanhtf  t>a^  \>n  tt^i  ^aft*     /  think  {am  sure)  that  you  are  right. 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE.  167' 

259.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  '^aVtSf  bte  3Ba(bet^  wood.  W\^^f  ^^ff' tc,  gc^offt'  (^aBcti), 
bic    Q^t\^x^'itf    bie    (SJcfc^itifttctt,         ^o  hope. 

story.  (au'fctt,  lief,  gctaufen  (fein),  to  run, 

\^a^  %tVi'tXf  btc  %tVitXf  fire.  ttiun'fc^cit,  milttfr^'te,  gcttJiiitfi^t' 
ftc§  amiifle'ren,  amiiftcr'tc  ft(^,  ft(^         (^aficn),  ^o  lois/i,  with  a  com- 

antiiflert'  (^aBeit),  ^o  have  a  good  plementary  infinitive  and  ^u* 

^ime  ;  used  with  and  without  gut*  brau'tett,  outside^  out  (of  doors), 
tV^df^'Uttf        tX^'df^VUf        tv^'df^W  with  words  denoting  rest. 

(^abctt),  to  tell,  relate.  oft,  often. 

260.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  3Btr  ^offen,  ba^  e^  brau^en  nid)t  ju  Mi  fern  t^erbe; 
tDtr  tDunfd^en  hnxd)  ben  2BaIb  ju  laufeti-  2.  Unfere  greunbe 
fagen,  fie  fatten  fic^  oft  amitfiert,  al^  tDtr  um  ba^  geuer  fa^en 
itnb  ®efif)t(^ten  erjci^Iten.  3.  gr  fagt,  er  fjabe  nic^t  fo  t)iel 
®elb,  tt)te  er  iDiinfi^t,  aber  er  ^offt,  no(^  tttoa^  gu  6e!ommen» 

4.  ®er  ft^nabe  fagte,  ba^  er  oft  brau^en  im  333albe  gelDefen  feu 

5.  (Sr  ^offte,  ba^  feine  SDJutter  nt^t  !ran!  getnefen  tt^cire.  6.  3=^ 
l^atte  gegtaubt,  ba^  er  ®elb  genug  ge^abt  f)atte,  um  ba^  §au^  ju 
faufen. 

(&)  „Sr  amitfiert  fid^  ^ier  nirfjt  [e^r  gut-    ©r  fagt,  ba§  ba^, 

geuer  ju  ^ei^  fei»'' 
„Q(i)  ^offe,  ba^  e^  beffer  iDerben  tDerbe.    SJian  fagt,  ba^  e^ 

brau^en  fe^r  !alt  fet." 
„Qa,  unb  er.l^at  mtr  erja^tt,  ba^  er  feinen  trarmen  diod  fjaUJ' 
„T)a^  tut  mir  teib,  benn  er  tDiinf^t,  burc^  ben  SBalb  gu  laufen.'' 
„Qa,  er  l^at  felbft  gefagt,  e§  fei  i^m  brau^en  ju  !alt.''. 

(c)  1.  We  had  a  good  tirae  when  we  sat  around  the  fire  and 
told  stories.  2.  When. they  were  running  through  the  wood, 
they  said  it  was  getting  warm.  3.  .The  boys  often  wished  to 
have  a  good  time  out  in  the  woods.       4.    He  thought  that  he 


168  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

had  the  right  book.  .  5.  I  hope  that  you  had  money  enough, 
and  that  you  were  not  sick.  6.  The  children  told  that  they 
were  in  the  woods,  but  that  they  had  no  fire. 

(d)  A  Story.  —  I  wish  to  tell  you  a  little  story.  It  hap- 
pened out  in  the  wood.  Two  boys  went  into  the  wood  to  have 
a  good  time.  But  the  little  one  said  that  he  was  too  tired. 
Then  the  other  said  that  the  little  one  was  not  tired,  but  that 
he  was  not  warm  enough.  He  said  it  was  getting  cold,^and  he 
made  a  fire  in  the  wood.  When  the  little  one  said  that  it  was 
warm,  the  two  boys  ran  home.  But  they  had  not  had  a  good 
time. 

LESSON  LVII. 
The  Subjunctive.    Weak  and  Strong  Verbs. 


Unfer  Pater  in  bem  fjtmmcl.  Dctn  Hame  merbe  gebetltget.  Detn 
Hetd?  fomme.  Detn  W'lUe  gefd^el^e  auf  (£rben,  u)te  tm  ^tmmel.  Unfer 
tcigltd?  Brot  gib  uns  I]eute.  Unb  cergib  uns  unfere  Sd?ulben,  tpie  w'xv 
unfern  Sdpulbigern  r»ergeben.  Unb  fiil^re  uns  nid?t  in  Perfud?ung, 
fonbern  erlofe  uns  von  bem  Ubel.  Denn  Dein  ift  bas  Heid?  unb  bie 
Kraft  unb  bie  ^errlid?!eit  in  (£u)igf eit.  2lmen.  —  (Stjangeltum  @.  Wlait^'di, 
vi.  9-13.  

261.  Subjunctive  of  loben,  a  Weak  Verb. 

Present.  Past. 

(ba^)  tr^  loBc  (ha^)  ttitr  iohtn  (\)a^)  i^  (oBtc  (ha^)  ttiir  (oBtcn 
(ha^)  U  (oBeft  (t)a^)  i^t  UUt  (bog)  bu  (oBtcfi  (ba^)  i^r  loBtct 
(bag)  cr  loht       (ta^)  fie  Mtn         (ba^)  er  MU         (iba^)  fie  UUtn 

Future.  Perfect. 

(ba^)  xdf  lohtn  tticrbe  (ba^)  td^  geloBt  iftaBe 

(ba^)  bu  roBen  metbeft  •  (ba^)  \>n  gcIoBt  ^abeft 

(ba^)  er  (obeit  werbe,  etc.  (bag)  er  gelobt  i^aU,  etc. 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


169 


Past  Perfect. 
{\iOi^)  \^  getoBt  pttc 
(bag)  btt  ^zUU  pttcft 
(bag)  cr  %tUU  ^aiXtf  etc. 


Future  Perfect. 
QiOi'^)  x^  gclpBt  l^aictt  mcrbc 
{ha^)  bu  gelobt  ^afieit  merbeft 
{\>a^)  zx  gctobt  l^oben  ttierbe,  etc. 


262.  Subjunctive  of  [e^en,  a  Strong  Verb. 

Present.  Past. 


(bag)  t^  fe^c 
{\ia^)  btt  fc^cft 
{tic^^)  tx  fe^c 


(bag)  ttJtr  fc^cn 
(bag)  i^r  fcliet 
(bag)  fie  fc^ctt 


(bag)  i^  fa^c 
(bag)  btt^a^cft 
(bag)  cr  fa^c 


(bag)  ttJtrfa^ctt 
(bag)  tf)r  fa^ct 
(bag)  fie  fa^en 


Future. 

(bag)  tr^  fc^ctt  ttierbc 
(bag)  bu  fe^ctt  mctbeft 
(bag)  cr  fe^en  ttJcrbc,  etc. 

Past  Perfect. 

(bag)  x^  gcfel^ctt  ftottc 
(bag)  bu  gefc^en  ^attcft 
(bag)  cr  gcfc^ctt  ^attc,  etc. 


Perfect. 
(bag)  ic^  gefe^ctt  ^abc 
(bag)  btt  gcfelien  ^abcft 
(bag)  er  gcfe^eit  ^abe,  etc. 

Future  Perfect. 

(bag)  x6)  gcfc^ctt  ^abctt  ttJcrbc 
(bag)  '^M  gefc^cit  ^abcit  mcrbeft 
(bag)  er  gefe^en  ^aben  ttierbc,  etc. 


263.     Subjunctive  of  ge^etl,  a  Strong  Intransitive  Verb. 
Present.  Past. 


(bag)  x^  ge^c 
(bag)  \svi  ge^eft 
(bag)  er  gel^c,  etc. 

Future. 
(bag)  \6)  ge^en  luerbe 
(bag)  bu  ge^en  hjerbeft 
(bag)  er  ge^^en  itierbe,  etc. 

Past  Perfect. 

(bag)  x^  gegangett  ttiare 
(bag)  btt  gegangett  ttiareft 
(bag)  cr  gcgattgctt  ttiarc,  etc. 


(bag)  tr^  gittgc 
(bag)  btt  ghtgeft 
(bag)  cr  gittgc,  etc. 

Perfect. 

(bag)  x^  gcgattgctt  fet 
(bag)  btt  gcgattgctt  feteft 
(bag)  cr  gcgattgctt  fet,  etc. 

Future  Perfect. 

(bag)  x^  gcgattgctt  fcttt  tticrbc 
(bag)  btt  gcgattgctt  feitt  ttjcrbcft 
(bag)  er  gcgattgctt  feitt  ttJcrbc,  etc. 


170  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

264.  The  Conditional  is  formed  by  prefixing  the  forms  of 
ipiirbe  to  the  present  and  perfect  infinitives.  Its  use  is  exactly 
like  that  of  the  English  with  should  and  would. 

Present.  Perfect. 

I  should  praise.  I  should  have  praised, 

id)  tonvht  Uhtn  tr^  ttiurbe  geloBt  f^ahtn 

'    bu  ttJiirbcft  Men  bu  wilrbcft  gcluBt  ^abcn 

cr  ttiiirbc  (oben,  etc.  er  ttiiirbc  gclobt  ^abcn,  etc. 

« 

265.  The  Potential  Subjunctive,  as  in  English,  expresses  a 
possibility  or  a  contingency.  It  is  like  the  conclusion  of  a 
condition,  and  is  usually  translated  by  should  or  tvould.  The 
use  of  tenses  is  like  the  English. 

©r  f^dtiz  aubcr^  getan^     He  would  have  done  othericise. 
Q:§  ttitirc  faum  miigltti^.    It  would  scarcely  be  possible. 
^a§  ^in^t  ttt^t  fo  gut     That  would  not  go  so  well. 

(a)  The  conditional  and  the  potential  subjunctive  are  interchangeable. 
The  conditional  might  be  used  in  all  the  above  cases.  (Sr  tt)iirbe  anbcrS 
getan  l)aben.    S^  triirbe  faum  tnoglic^  feln.    S)a^  tDiirbe  nt(f)t  fo  gut  ge^eu. 

266.  The  Optative  Subjunctive  is  used  to  denote  a  wish.  As 
in  English,  the  verb  precedes  the  subject,  unless  the  wish  is 
introduced  by  ba^*  The  use  of  tenses  is  also  like  the  English. 
yim  or  boif)  is  often  used  to  strengthen  the  wish. 

293arc  \^  nur  p  ^auf e !    Were  I  only  at  home  ! 
5trf),  bo§  i^  boc^  ntc^r  (^tVts  ^attc  !     Oh,  that  I  had  more  money  ! 
GJingctt  mir  nur  jcben  Xag  ini^  X^catcr !    Would  that  we  went  to  the 
theatre  every  day  ! 

(a)  The  Hortative  Subjunctive  is  the  present  tense  of  the  sub- 
junctive used  in  the  first  and  third  persons  for  the  imperative. 

Soben  ttitr.     Let  us  praise. 

^cin  3SiUe  gcfe^ie^c.     Thy  will  be  done. 

@eictt  fie  fleiftig*    Let  them  be  industrious. 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE.  171 

267.  Vocabulary. 

ber  ^fcf'fcr,  pepper,  tion)  ;  btc  Xxt'i^pt  I)tnab  or  ^itt= 

\stx  ^n'dtXf  sugar.  unitx f  downstairs  {moWorL). 

bic  portion',  bic  ^ortiottett  (t  ?iA;e  ba§  <Sa(5,  salt. 

^),  portion.,  helping    (of  food),  bur'fttg,  thirsty. 

followed  by  a  noun  in  apposition  ^tttt'grtg,  hungry. 

(§  113).  O'ficn,  upstairs  (rest),  aZo/^ 

bie Xre^'^c,  bic  ^re^^Ctt,  s^airiort?/ ;  un'tcn,  downstairs  (rest),  fteZoii?.  ' 

bie  Xre^Jpe  ^mauf,  upstairs  (mo-  a^  I  oh  I  ah! 

268.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  3<(^  bin  fo  ^ungrtg  unb  burfttg ;  ad),  ba§  t(^  no(^  eine 
portion  gteifc^  f)atte!  2.  ®tefe  Sup^e  Mre  beffer  ol)ne  fo 
bid  ^feffer  unb  ©alj,  3.  Qd)  n)ei^,  ba^  er  unten  ift ;  ic^  ^abe 
t^n  bie  Xxtppt  ^inunter  ge^en  fe^en.  4.  ^c^  d^e  meine  ©uppe 
unten,  aber  i(^  ge^e  nid^t  gem  bie  S^reppe  ^inab.  5.  aSurben 
®ie  "iPfeffer  unb  ©alj  mit  einer  portion  ®uppe  effen?  6.  ^(^ 
tDiirbe  bie  2:reppe  {)inauf  gef)en,  um  oben  no(J)  etn)a^  ^^der  ju 
befommen, 

(&)  „SBdre  ic^  nur  nic^t  fo  l^ungrig  unb  burftig !  .^c^  n)itrbe 
3=^nen  meine  portion  ©uppe  geben.'' 

„3lber  id)  tonxht  fie  nid)t  effen ;  idj  "^abe  eben  unten  eine  gro^e 
portion  gleifd^  mit  biel  ^feffer  unb  ©alj  gegeffen*" 

„®o?  Unten?  Qd)  ^be  ©ie  nirf)t  bie  3:reppe  l^inunter  ge^en 
fe^en,  ober  id)  tDdre  mit  3^nen  gegangen.'' 

„^a^  ij'dttt  mid)  fe^r  gefreut*  Slber  ^ier  oben  neben  bem 
geuer  ift  e^  f(^5n  unb  loarm." 

(c)  (Write  should  and  would  in  two  ways.)  1.  Oh,  that  I  had 
a  little  soup !  2.  I  am  so  hungry  and  thirsty ;  I  would  eat  a 
portion  without  pepper  and  salt.  3.  Why  did  you  go  up- 
stairs?    Don't   you   like   to  eat  downstairs?        4.  Oh,  that 


172  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

you  had  spoken  to  them  when  they  were  upstairs!  5.  It 
would  have  been  colder  downstairs  in  the  garden  than  up- 
stairs in  my  room.  6.  We  should  have  succeeded,  but  it 
happened  otherwise. 

(d)  A  Letter.  —  Dear  Charles :  I  thought  that  you  were 
happy  (glUcfliiJ))  in  your  new  school.  It  would  have  been  hard 
to  stay  in  those  other  classes.  You  would  have  had  too  many 
German  exercises  to  write.  The  lessons  would  have  been 
longer  and  the  sentences  harder.  Oh  that  I  were  with  you 
and  had  lessons  with  (bet)  your  teacher ! 

Your  friend, 

John. 

LESSON  LVIII. 
Subjunctive  of  Modals.    Conditions  of  Fact. 


XDenn  es  btr  iibcl  gel^t, 

Htmm  es  fUr  gut  nur  tmmerl 

VOenn  bu  es  iibel  nimmft, 

So  gel^t  es  btr  nod?  f^Itmmer.  —  diMevt 


269.   Subjunctive   of   Modals.  —  The  modal  auxiliaries  form 
the  subjunctive  regularly. 

Present.  Past.  Future. 


(ta^)  x^  biirfc 

biirftc 

biirfett  ttJerbc 

(bag)  ^  fottttc    . 

fiitttttc 

fiJttttett  mtht 

(bag)  id^  ittiigc 

mo^tt 

ntogen  merbe 

(bag)  xdi  miiffe 

mit^tc 

miiffen  ttierbc 

(bag)  ic^  foUc 

fottte 

fottctt  ttictbe 

(bag)  i^  ttJoUe 

mUic 

tooUcn  toierbe 

SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  MOBALS. 


173 


Past  Perfect.  Future  Perfect. 

gcburft  pttc  geburft  IjaBen  mcrbc 

gcfottttt  ^attc  gefonnt  ^abcn  ttierJ»c 

gcmod^t  ^attc  gemoi^t  ^aibcn  tticrbe 

gemu^t  :^attc  gcmu^t  f^aien  wcrbc 

gcfottt  pttc  gefoUt  ^aBen  wcri^c 

gettioUt  ptte  gcttujllt  l^afien  ttJcrbc 

iVo^e.     Gotten  and  tDotten  do  not  modify  the  vowel  in  the  past  sub- 
junctive ;  it  is  like  the  indicative.     The  future  perfect  is  rare. 

(a)  The  perfect  and  past  perfect  are  conjugated  as  follows 
with  a  dependent  infinitive.     Note  the  position  of  ^aben* 


Perfect. 

(bag)  i(^  gebiirft  ^aBc 
(bag)  \^  gefottttt  ^abc 
{\>ci^)  ic^  gemot^t  ^abc 
{ha^)  it^  gcmu^t  !)abc 
(bag)  tc^  gcfoUt  ^aH 
(bag)  ic^  gettiottt  l|abc 


Perfect. 

o 

(bag)  \^  ^a^e  ge^cit  bitrfcn 
(bag)  bu  ^al^cft  ge^en  fonncn 
(bag)  er  I)aBc  gc^cn  mogcn 
(bag)  nitr  \)ahtn  ge^cn  milffen 
(bag)  i^r  \)(ihti  gc^cn  foUeu 
(bag)  fie  ^Bctt  ge^cn  ttioUen 


Past  Perfect. 

(bag)  tt^  ^fittc  gc!)Ctt  bitrfett 
(bag)  btt  ^dttcft  gc^eit  fiiitnctt 
(bag)  er  pttc  ge^ctt  mogcn 
(bag)  ttJtr  pttcn  gc^cn  tttiiffctt 
(bag)  \^x  pttct  gc^ctt  foUcn 
(bag)  fie  pttcn  gc!)Ctt  ttiottctt 


270.  Conditions  of  Fact.  —  German  conditions  correspond 
very  closely  to  English.  As  in  English,  if  the  premise  of  a 
conditional  sentence  assumes  something  as  an  actual  fact,  both 
clauses  are  in  the  indicative. 

2Benn  ct  f omntt,  tuirft  bu  bi^  freuen*    If  he  comes,  you  will  he  glad. 
SScnn  C!§  regnet,  mcrbcn  ttiir  511  ^aitfc  bkibctt*    i/'z^  miws,  toe  shall  stay 
at  home. 

271.  Use  and  Omission  of  3Benn.  —  The  condition  is  usually 
introduced  by  tt)enTl,  if  As  in  English  either  clause  may  pre- 
cede. Also,  as  in  English,  the  verb  stands  first  when  tpetlU 
is  omitted.  @o  (compare  English  then)  often  sums  up  the 
condition  and  introduces  the  conclusion. 


174  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN, 

$Bctttt  @ic  titcttt  ^reunb  finb,  (fo)  ttJcrbcn  Sic  ba;^  i\m.    If  you  are  my 

friend^  (then)  you  will  do  that. 
®te  itjcrbctt  ba^  tmt,  mcim  Sic  mcitt  grcunb  ftnb*    row  iui7Z  do  that,  if 
you  are  my  friend. 

(a)  Contrary  to  English  usage,  German  may  omit  tt)enn  in  a 
condition  of  fact. 

Stub  Sic  mcitt  fjrcttttb,  fo  tticrbcn  Sic  'ta^  inn.    If  you  are  my  friend, 
(then)  you  will  do  that. 

272.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  Sarf,  bic  Sarfc,  sack,  bag.  instead  of  a  possessive  adjective. 

bcr  3«9r  bic  SH^f  train.  t>a§  ^olb,  gold. 

bic  ^il'fc,  help.  ha§  SiCbcr,  silver. 

bic  Xa'^^tf  bic  ^afr^ctt,  pocket,  ftc'rfcw,  ftcrftc,  gcftcrft  (^abctt),  to 

used  generally  with  the  article  stick,  put. 

273.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  9Benn  @te  ba^  ®otb  unb  ba^  @tI6er  in  bie  Jafd^e 
fteden,  fo  braudie  id)  3^f)nen  nti^t  gu  ^elfeti.  2.  Q]t  ber  ©ad  ju 
gro^  gu  flatten,  fo  mu^  t(^  urn  §tlfe  bitten.  3.  ^tnn  @ie  mir 
ni(f)t  ^elfen,  ben  ©ad  nttt  bem  ®oIb  in  bent  ^UQt  jn  fn(i)en,  fo 
ftede  id)  ba^  ©ttber  in  bie  Jafd^e.  4.  §aben  ®ie  ntein  ®oIb  in 
ben  ©ad  geftedt,  fo  fann  id)  nic^t^  tun.  5.  2Benn  mir  l^ier 
bleiben,  fo  merben  toxx  ben  3^9  f^^^^  mitffen.  6.  SBenn  n)ir 
ba^  ©ilber  fnd)en,  fo  n)erben  n)ir  e^  finben  !onnen,  tt)enn  nie^ 
manb  e^  in  bie  2:afc^e  geftedt  ^t. 

(b)  „SBenn  @ie  mir  nid)t  l^etfen,  fo  fann  i(^  btefe  langen  ©d^e 
nid)t  f(^reiben." 

„355enn  ©ie  bie  ©cifee  o^ne  §ilfe  fd)retben,  fo  bitrfen  ©ie  nad^ 
§aufe  ge^en.'' 

„9lber  toenn  id^  bie  2B5rter  nid^t  t)erfte^e,  mn^  id)  bie  ganje 
9lnfgabe  itberfe^jen?'' 


SUBJUNCTIVE   OF  MODALS.  175 

„9?etn,  fie  bitrfen  §t(fe  ^aben,  menu  ®te  nt^t  uerfte^en.'' 
„§eute  nacf)mittag  ftecEe  icf)  mein  33u(^  in  bie  5J:a[d)e,  urn  ju 
§aufe  ju  lernen." 

(c)  (When  the  condition  precedes,  write  it  with  and  without 
tDenn,  and  use  fo  in  the  conclusion.)  1.  If  you  help  me,  I  shall 
be  able  to  put  all  this  gold  and  silver  in  that  bag.  2.  If  he 
asks  for  help,  my, brother  will  help  him.  3.  If  you  get  up 
early,  you  will  hear  the  trains.  4.  I  will  not  help  him,  if  he 
wants  to  put  that  gold  in  his  pocket  and  that  silver  in  a  sack. 
5.  If  you  want  to  translate  that  long  story,  perhaps  the  teacher 
will  help  you.  6.  If  you  put  that  silver  in  your  (bie)  pocket, 
it  won't  contain  anything  else. 

(d)  "  If  you  give  us  such  a  long  exercise,  we  shall  not  be 
able  to  write  it." 

^*  If  you  do  not  write  all  the  sentences,  you  will  have  to  stay 

in  school  the  whole  afternoon.'' 

"  But  if  we  do  not  know  the  words,  must  we  write  all  the 

sentences  ?  " 

"If  you  do  not  know  the  words,  you  must  look  them  up." 

"If  the  exercise  is  very  hard,  will  you  help  us  ?  " 

"  If  you  put  your  grammar  in  your  pocket  and  take  it  home, 

you  will  be  able  to  translate  the  sentences  without  help." 

itbet  ben  Bergen* 

'^ber  'i^tn  Bergen,  wtit  ju  tt)anbern, 
®agen  bie  geute,  it)of)nt  ba^  ®IM, 
9l(^,  unb  id)  gtttg  tm  ®(^it)arTne  ber  anbern, 
^am  mtt  beriDeinten  3Iugen  prltd . 
ilber  ben  Bergen,  meit,  irett  britben, 
@agen  bie  Qtntt,  n)ol)nt  ba^  ©titcf.— SarisBuffe. 


176  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAJST. 

LESSON  LIX. 
Conditions  Contrary  to  Fact. 


VOenn  mand^er  VTiann  tpiigte, 
VOj^x  mand^er  XHann  wdv\ 

Of  mand?er  Vflann  ntandpem  ITTann 
ITland^mal  met^r  (£I^r\  —  ^^ric^hjort. 


274.  Conditions  Contrary  to  Fact.  —  The  subjunctive  is  used 
in  the  condition  and  conclusion  of  contrary-to-fact  conditions. 
As  in  English,  the  conclusion  may  be  in  the  conditional.  The 
use  of  tenses  corresponds  to  the  English. 

^attc  i^  S^^^r  o^  totnn  i^  3ctt  ^iittc,  tatc  x^  e^  gern^  or  miirbe  xtf^  t§ 

gem  ttttt*     If  I  had  time,  I  should  gladly  do  it  (present). 
^^  fame,  or  t(^  milrbc  fommctt,  tt>cnn  i^  fontttc*    /  should  come,  if  I 

could  (present). 
3^  pttc  eig  gctan,  or  ttiitrbe  t§  getait  l^aBeit,  ttJcntt  ic^  Sett  gc:^aBt  pttc* 

I  should  have  done  it,  if  I  had  had  time  (past). 
@r  pttc  c§  gem  getan,  or  tuitrbe  e§  gem  gctan  ^aBeit,  ttietttt  cr  mettt 

fjrcunb  gcttiefeu  tiodxt.    He  would  have  been  glad  to  do  it,  if  he  had 

been  my  friend  (past). 

(a)  The  contrary-to-fact  subjunctive  is  also  used  after  al^ 
(ob)  and  al^  (menn).  When  ob  or  n)enn  is  omitted,  the  clause 
is  inverted  and  the  personal  part  of  the  verb  stands  first. 

@r  jptx^tf  aU  oB  cr  Ute(  @e(b  f^aiU,  or  aU  i^ditt  er  t>id  Q^d'b.   He  speaks 

as  if  he  had  much  money. 
(£r  fic^t  avi^f  al^  oB  er  frattf  turire,  or  al§  todn  er  franl.    He  looks  as  if 

he  were  sick. 

275.  Difference  between  German  and  English  Conditions. — 
There  are  two  chief  differences  between  English  and  German 
conditional  sentences. 


CONDITIONS   CONTRARY  TO  FACT.  177 

(a)  English  never  omits  if  or  though  in  the  expressions  as  if, 
as  though,  while  German  may  omit  tvtUU  or  ob  and  invert. 

(b)  English  has  only  the  form  with  would  and  should,  both 
for  the  German  regular  subjunctive  and  for  the  conditional. 

That  would  not  go  so  well.    ^a§  gtttgc  tttri^t  fo  gttt,  or  ^a^  tonxH  nxttjt  fo 

gut  ge^ett* 
It  would  scarcely  he  possible.     ^^  toixvt  tanm  mbgliti^,  or  t^  ttJitrbC  faum 

tttogHd^  feim 

276.  Use  of  Modals.  —  The  German  modals  occur  frequently 
in  conclusions  contrary  to  fact,  with  or  without  the  condition 
expressed.  The  English  expressions  ought  to  have  (gone), 
could  have  (gone),  and  so  on,  are  then  translated  in  German  by 
the  past  perfect  subjunctive  of  the  modals,  not  by  the  condi- 
tional. In  the  dependent  order  the  personal  auxiliary  (l^dtte) 
precedes  the  two  infinitives  (§  181). 

3c^  ^Stte  ge^Ctt  bitrfcn*    /  should  have  been  permitted  to  go. 

^tt  ptteft  ge^Ctt  Unntn.     You  would  have  been  able  to  go. 

(St  pttc  ge^en  mogctt.    He  icould  have  liked  to  go. 

2Bir  fatten  gel^ctt  mitffett*     We  should  have  been  obliged  to  go. 

S^r  pttct  gc^cn  foUeit.     You  ought  to  have  gone. 

8ie  pttctt  gel^en  ttujKeit.     They  would  have  wanted  to  go. 

(a)  The  expression,  He  ought  to  have  done  it,  or  should  have 
in  the  meaning  of  ought  to  have,  is  (gr  l^citte  e^  tUtl  foHett,  be- 
cause it  was  not  done,  and  so  is  contrary  to  fact.  On  the  other 
hand.  He  must  have  done  it,  is  @r  mu^  e§  getatl  l^aben,  because 
it  was  done,  and  so  is  a  fact. 

Note.  English  could  may  be  indicative  or  subjunctive.  He  could 
(was  able  to)  do  it  yesterday^  but  he  canH  to-day^  is  a  present  fact,  and 
so  is  indicative  :  (Sr  fonnte  eg  tun.  He  could  {would  be  able  to)  do  it,  if 
he  had  time,  is  contrary  to  fact  in  the  present,  and  so  is  subjunctive :  @r 
fonnte  eg  tun. 


178  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN, 

There  is  the  same  difference  in  referring  to  past  time.  He  could  {was 
able  to)  have  done  it^  for  he  had  time^  is  a  past  fact,  and  so  is  indicative: 
(Sr  !onnte  eS  getan  l^aben.  He  could  (would  he  able  to)  have  done  it,  if  he 
had  had  time^  is  contrary  to  fact  in  past  time,  and  so  is  past  perfect  sub- 
junctive :  ©r  \aiit  e§  tun  fonnen. 

In  the  above  cases  the  difficulty  is  not  with  the  German,  but  with  the 
defective  English  modal,  which  has  but  a  single  form  for  two  meanings 
which  in  German  are  expressed  by  two  different  forms.  Pupils  should 
learn  to  analyze  the  exact  English  meaning. 

(h)  Should  like  and  ivould  like  are  always  forms  of  TUt)(i)te 
(past  subjunctive). 

Would  you  like  to  go  9    Wod^ttn  Sie  gc^Ctt  ? 
Yes,  I  should,    ^a,  i^  mb^U. 

277.  Vocabulary. 

bcr   ^a't^trtf    btc   IJaben,    thread,  n^'^tn,  ttal|te,  gcita^t  (f^ahtn),  to 

string,  sew. 

bcr  ^tto^f,  ^it  ^no^jfc,  button.  tra'gctt,  trug,  gctragen  (Ija^cn),  cr 

hit  ^ant^f  btc  ^anbc,  hand.  tragi,  to  carry  ;  to  wear  (in  speak- 

bic  ^a't^tif  bic  ^abcln,  needle.  ing  of  clothes). 

aitj^'fc^cn,    fo^     aui3,    au^^gefc^ett  ftarf,  adj.,  strong;  adv.,  hard. 

(I)abctt),   cr  fic^t  avi^f  to   look,  gcra'be,  adj.,  straight;  adv.,  just, 

appear.  exactly. 

278.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  @r  fte^t  au^,  ate  tDcire  er  nt(^t  [tar!  genug,  um  att 
biefe  <93u(J)er  in  ber  §anb  ju  tragen.  2.  SBir  I)citten  gerabe 
gur  red^ten  ^di  !ommen  fonnen,  tt)enn  mir  nic^t  fatten  niarten 
mitffen.  3.  (gie  ntu^  ben  Snopf  gena^t  ^ben,  benn  \i)  ^atte 
!einen  gaben  nnb  feine  9^abe(.  4.  ^6)  ni5(^te  ^eute  nac^mittag 
in  bie  ©tabt  ge^en,  after  i^  barf  nid)t.  5.  ©ie  fa^  au^,  ate 
tDcire    fie  gerabe  ftar!  genug,  nm  i^re  fleine  ®^n)efter  nad^ 


CONDITIONS   CONTRARY  TO  FACT.  179 

§aufe  ju  tragen*       6.  jKoc^ten  ®te  biefen  9to(f  tragen,  nad^* 
bent  bie  ^nopfe  mxt  [tarfem  gaben  gend^t  morben  finb  ? 

(b)  „®ie  f)dtten  ben  ^no|3f  tnit  ftcirferem  gaben  unb  etner 
befferen  Stabel  nd^en  folfen." 

„^a,  ba^  t)dtte  id)  tun  fonnen,  menn  tc^  ben  2ln5ug  I)dtte 
ttagen  tDoiknJ' 

„3lber  moc^ten  ©ie  i^n  ntc^t  tragen?  @ie  iDiirben  barin  fe^r 
gut  au^fef)en,'' 

„  ©te  fatten  nti(^  fe^en  follen,  al^  t(^  ba^  le^te  3Kal  t^n  trug* 
gr  faf)  nt^t  [et)r  f(^on  au^,'' 

„@o  ?  SBenn  er  nti^t  f (f)on  au^fie^t,  fo  module  id^  i^n  ntd^t 
tragen/' 

(c)  1.  Would  you  like  a  needle  and  some  strong  thread  to 
sew  those  buttons?  2.  He  would  have  looked  better,  if  he 
had  worn  better  clothes.  3.  You  ought  not  to  have  carried 
those  hot  plates  in  your  hand  ;  they  might  have  hurt  you. 
4.  The  little  boy  must  have  been  just  strong  enough  to  carry 
those  bags  to  the  train.  5.  I  should  like  to  sew  those  buttons 
with  your  needle  and  [your]  thread,  if  I  hadn't  hurt  my  hand. 
6.  She  looked  as  if  she  couldn't  carry  all  those  things. 

(d)  "You  look  as  if  you  were  tired.  Would  you  like  to 
stop  working  and  play  ? '' 

"I  should  like  to  play,  but  I  must  sew  these  buttons  with 
this  needle  and  some  strong  thread." 

"  You  ought  to  have  done  that  this  morning ;  you  must  have 
had  time  enough." 

"  I  could  have  done  it,  if  my  brother  had  not  come.  I  know 
that  I  ought  to  have  done  it." 

"  I  think  that  you  could  have  done  it  if  you  had  wanted." 

"  Yes,  that  is  true,  but  now  I  should  like  to  stop." 


180  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

LESSON  LX. 
Review. 


£tegt  btr  (Seftern  flat  unb  offen, 
IDtrfft  bu  l^eute  fraftig  fret, 
Kannft  aud?  auf  ein  ITTorgen  I]offcn, 
Das  ntdpt  mtnbcr  glii(f  Itd^  fet.  —  ©octi^e. 


279.  Review  Questions. 

(a)  1.  Give  the  rules  for  forming  the  different  tenses  of  the 
subjunctive.  2.  Name  the  four  chief  uses  of  the  subjunc- 
tive. 3.  Which  use  differs  most  widely  from  the  English  ? 
4.  Give  in  detail  the  rules  for  this  use,  and  illustrate  each  by 
two  examples.  5.  Name  and  illustrate  the  subjunctives 
whose  use  is  just  like  the  English. 

(b)  1.  How  is  the  conditional  formed  ?  2.  Give  the  rules 
for  conditions.  3.  Are  conditional  sentences  always  in  the 
subjunctive  or  conditional  ?  Illustrate.  4.  How  do  German 
conditional  sentences  differ  from  English  ?  5.  Give  the  rule 
for  the  use  of  the  past  perfect  subjunctive  of  the  modstls. 
Illustrate  fully. 

280.  Review  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  ®ie  ©(fitter  fagten,  ba^  bie  @efc^t({)te  gu  lang  fei; 
fie  f)offen,  ba^  irtr  eine  Wrjere  erja^Ien.  2.  ®(auben  ®te, 
ba§  e^  ju  fait  fein  merbe,  urn  un^  brau^en  im  SBalbe  gu  amit^ 
fieren?  3.  31(f),  baf  trf)  no^  eine  "^Portion  @up^e  f)atte! 
J)ann  tDitrbe  tc{)  nid}t  fo  Ijungrtg  fetn,  4.  SBdren  iDtr  nur  ju 
§aufe !       5.  SBenn  e^  oben  ju  fait  ift,  tDarum  ge()en  @te  nid^t 


BEVIEW,  181 

bte  3:re^3|3e  l^tnunter  unb  bletben  @te  unten?  6.  §at  er  ba.^ 
®i(ber  in  bte  Za\d)t  geftecft,  fo  tDcrben  tt)tr  t^m  ntd^t  ^elfen. 
7.  3Baren  @te  fritter  gefommen,  fo  l^atte  tc^  nid)t  anbert^atb 
©tuttben  auf  ®te  marten  mitffen,  8.  !j)er  ©dfjuler  ptte 
feine  3lnfgabe  geftern  [rfiretben  foden ;  er  ptte  e^  tnn  !dnnen, 
9.  Qd)  mo^te  ie^t  in  bie  @tabt  ge^en ;  nto(^ten  @ie  nxdjt  mit 
mir  fomnten?  10.  gr  ntu§  e^  getan  ^aben^  aber  id)  mbc^te 
iDiffen,  ii3ie  er  e^  tat- 

(b)  1.  Oh  that  there  were  more  pepper  and  salt  in  this  soup ! 
(§  250,  b).  2.  These  boys  would  write  their  sentences,  if 
they  only  had  time.  3.  If  you  go  downstairs,  I  shall 
remain  upstairs.  4.  If  that  girl  has  put  all  those  things 
in  her  pocket,  we  shan't  give  her  anything.  5.  If  you  had 
wanted  to  do  this,  you  ought  to  have  told  me  so  (e^).  6.  He 
must  have  tried  for  an  hour  to  spell  that  word,  but  he  couldn't 
have  spelled  it  right.  7.  I  should  like  to  read  those  German 
stories;  would  you  like  to  help  me  translate  them?  8.  We 
must  have  worked  for  half  an  hour ;  we  couldn't  have  done  it 
in  less  time.  9.  You  ought  to  have  come  home  earlier; 
your  mother  would  have  liked  to  see  you.  10.  If  the  pupils 
could  have  translated  those  long  sentences,  they  wouldn't  have 
had  to  stay  in  school  the  whole  afternoon. 

(c)  A  Letter.  —  Dear  Mother :  You  ought  to  have  seen  us 
yesterday.  I  should  like  to  tell  you  what  we  did.  We  wanted 
to  read  a  German  story,  but  no  one  could  translate  it.  I  could 
have  helped,  if  I  hadn't  wanted  to  go  home.  We  must  have 
worked  a  whole  hour  before  we  finally  succeeded  in  reading  it. 

Your  [you]  loving  son, 

Charles. 


182  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 


3SSenn. 


^'a,  ^iitte  mir  t)on  3lnbegtnn 
@o  manc^e^  nid)!  gefe^It, 
Unb  ptf  ifi)  nur  mit  anberm  ©inn 
T)tn  anbern  SBeg  erma^tt, 
Unb  l^dtf  t(^  auf  bem  rec^ten  *ipfab 
t)te  re^te  §Uf  empfa^n, 
Unb  fo  ftatt  beffen,  lua^  ti^  tat, 
3)a^  Oegentetl  getan, 
Unb  fjcitt'  tc^  Dieted  nt(^t  gentn^t 
2lnf  f)o^ere^  ©e^et^ 
Unb  nur  bie  §alff  t)or^er  getDU^t 
3Son  bem,  n)a^  ^euf  16)  iDci^, 
Unb  ^att'  i(^  ernftltc^  nur  getDotlt, 
Qa,  tDoIIf  \d)  nur  no(^  {e^t, 
Unb  tDcire  mir  ba^  ®Iu(f  fo  ^o(b 
SBte  mani^em,  ber'^  ntt^t  f^ct^t, 
Unb  f)atf  i^  je^nmat  [ot)ieI  ®elb, 
Unb  fdnnt',  tt)a^  id)  nt(f)t  fann, 
Unb  !dm'  no^  einmat  auf  bie  SBelt  — 
3a,  \>ann ! 


GENITIVE  AND  DATIVE  CASES,  183 

LESSON  LXI. 
Genitive  and  Dative  Cases. 


(Sletd?  fet  fetner  bem  an^zven,  bod?  gletd?  fet  jeber  bent  ^od?ften. 

—  ©oet^e. 

281.  The  Genitive  Case.  —  Besides  its  use  as  possessive 
(Lesson  VII.)  and  with  certain  reflexive  verbs  (§  243),  the 
genitive  is  also  used  (a)  to  denote  indefinite  time  and  (6)  with 
certain  prepositions. 

(a)  In  contrast  with  the  accusative  of  definite  time  (Les- 
son XXIL),  the  genitive  is  used  (1)  with  the  indefinite  article 
to  express  indefinite  time ;  (2)  with  the  definite  article  to 
denote  regularly  recurring  time. 

(1)  ^int§  Xa^t^f  one  day.  ^int§  5lbenti)§,  one  evening. 

(2)  ^c§  5(5ettb)^,  in  the  evening  (regiilarly) ,  every  evening. 
^C^  Wlov^tn^f  every  morning^  mornings. 

(b)  The  genitive  is  used  with  iDCi^rettb,  during,  and  many- 
other  prepositions,  most  of  which  may  be  translated  into  Eng- 
lish by  a  phrase  with  of  (instead  of,  in  spite  of  in  the  midst  of 
etc.).  The  most  familiar  are:  attftatt,  au^er^atb,  inner^alb, 
bie^fett^^  {enfett^,  inmttten,  tro^,  tnatjrenb,  and  tpegen, 

SSa^renb  bc^  '^miat^,  during  the  month. 
^nmxtitn  fctncr  greimbc,  in  the  midst  of  his  friends. 
Xxo^  bc^  ^ttttv^f  in  spite  of  the  weather. 

282.  The  Dative  Case. — Besides  its  use  as  indirect  object 
(Lesson  VIII.)  and  with  prepositions  (Lessons  XVI.  and 
XYIIL)  the  dative  is  also  used  (a)  with  a  few  adjectives  and 
(b)  with  certain  verbs. 


184  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

(a)  The  dative  is  used  with  many  adjectives,  most  of  which 
are  followed  by  to  in  English.  Unlike  English  usage,  the 
dative  usually  precedes  the  adjective  in  German. 

Q^t  ift  mir  lith.     He  is  dear  to  me. 

^a^  mar  uit^  frcmb*     That  was  strange  to  us. 

^a§  ^ixt()  ift  bcm  anbercn  aljuni^.     The  book  is  like  (to)  the  other, 

^a^  393cttcr  ift  ntir  angene^m*     The  weather  is  agreeable  to  me. 

(b)  The  following  verbs  which  take  the  dative  have  already 
been  given:  batiteti,  etnfatlen,  gefatten,  ge^oren,  gelingen,  ge- 
fc^e^en,  gtauben,  ^elfen.  Besides  these  the  commonest  are 
begegnen,  btenen,  broken,  fofgen,  ge^orc^en,  ^affen,  f(f)met(^eln. 

233tr  ftttb  il|m  Begcgnct*     We  met  him. 
^a§  pa^t  mix  ntti^t*     That  doesn't  suit  me. 

283.  Vocabulary. 

^egeg'ttCtt,     Begegncte,     fiegegnet  an^tait',  prep,  with  genitive,  instead 

(feitt),  with  the  dative,  to  meet  of. 

(by  chance) .  au'^crl^aK^    prep,    with    genitive, 

fuCgctt,  folgtc,  gefotgt  (fein),  with  outside  of. 

the  dative,  to  follow.  biC)3'fett§,  prep,  with  genitive,  this 

Jjaf'fctt,    pa^iCf    QCpa^t    (f)ahtn)f  side  of. 

with  the  dative,  to  Jit  ;  to  suit.  tro^,  prep,  with  genitive,  in  spite 

a^n'W^f   preceded  by  the  dative,  of. 

similar  (to),  like^  resembling.  ttia^'renb,     prep,    with     genitive, 

an'gcnc^m,  preceded  by  the  dative,  during. 

agreeable  (to) ,  pleasant  (to).  me'gctt,  prep,  with  genitive,  some- 

fremb,    preceded    by    the    dative,  times  following    its    object,    on 

strange  (to),  a  stranger.  account  of  because  of. 

284.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Ivol^  be^  SBetter^  waxMt  er  au^er^alb  ber  ®tabt  tie^- 
feit^  be^  breiten  gelbe^.      2.  gtne^  angene^men  3lbenb^  finb  - 
ti:)ir  bem  latigen  SBege  bte^feit^  be^  SBalbe^  gefotgt,       3.  ©^ 


GENITIVE  AND  DATIVE  CASES,  185 

toav  un^  angenel^m,  un^  tDa^retib  ber  ©tunbe  ju  amufieren,  aber 
e^  pa^tt  bem  getter  nii^t.  4.  2Begen  be^  §unbe^  pa^tt  e^ 
bem  3}?attne,  tt)a^renb  be^  9la(J)mtttag^  au^ert)alb  be^  ©attend  3U 
bteiben-  5.  Jro^  ber  ©onne  g^^fl^^  ^i^  ^i^^^  S^age^  narf) 
einem  keitett  gelbe  au^erl}alb  ber  ®tabt*  6.  2lnftatt  eine^ 
S3u(^e^,  ba^  mir  fremb  ift,  foHten  @te  tnir  em  anbere^  geben. 

(b)  „gme^  2:age^  bin  id)  einem  3Jianne  begegnet,  ber  ^^rem 
S3ruber  fe^r  d^nlii^  au^faf)/' 

„§aben  @ie  mit  i^nt  gefprod^en  ?" 

„9?ein,  ^'^r  ^rnber  ift  mir  fremb,  3:ro^  feine^  9lu^fel^en^ 
pa^tt  e^  mir  nic^t,  i^m  jn  folgen  nnb  mit  i^m  ju  fpredjen/' 

„&  nrtire  meinem  :93rnber  [e^r  angene^m  geiDefen." 

„3lber  tviv  traren  an^er^alb  ber  ©tabt  bie^feit^  be§  gro^en 
gelbe^,  nnb  ii)  gtanbte,  e^  !onnte  jemanb  anber^  fein," 

(c)  1.  This  side  of  the  big  field  outside  the  city,  we  met 
two  strange  men,  and  we  followed  them  during  the  whole 
afternoon.  2.  It  was  very  agreeable  to  the  girl  that  the  hat 
fitted  her  so  well.  3.  Because  of  my  sick  mother  I  went 
home  early  in  spite  of  the  weather.  4.  She  is  like  her 
father  instead  of  her  mother.  5.  If  her  clothes  fitted  her 
better,  she  would  look  like  her  sister,  because  of  her  beautiful 
hair.       6.   In  spite  of  your  work  you  ought  to  have  come. 

(d)  "  Shall  we  follow  the  way  this  side  of  the  wood  ?  '^ 
"  That  suits  me  ;  it  will  be  very  agreeable  to  me." 

"  Outside  the  city  perhaps  we  shall  meet  some  friends." 

"  During  the  afternoon  we  must  meet  some  friends  and  some 

who  are  strange (rs)  to  us." 

"  In  spite  of  all  those  exercises  that  I  ought  to  have  written 

yesterday,   I    should    like   to    go,   because   of    the   beautiful 

weather." 


186  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

LESSON  LXII. 
Verbals. 


Da  id?  bte  ^erbe  trteb  auf  unfern  3ol^en 

Pa  tpar  id?  gliiifltd?  ipie  im  parabics.  —  ©emitter. 


285.  Verbals  in  -ing.  —  When  an  English  verbal  in  -i7ig  is  in  a 
participial  phrase  of  time  or  cause,  it  is  rendered  in  German, 
not  by  a  participle,  but  by  a  clause.  This  clause  is  generally 
introduced  by  al^,  ivhen,  ba,  as,  ittbem,  at  the  moment  when,  as, 
or  iDcil^renb,  while.  Thus  these  participial  phrases  toust  be 
mentally  changed  to  clauses  before  translating. 

Seeing  Mm,  she  waited,     ^a  fic  Utt  ^a%  ttiartctc  fie* 
While  playing,  I  got  tired.    SSri^rcnb  ir^  f^tcltc,  ttitttbc  id)  miibe* 
Coming  home,  he  found  a  letter.    'iJHi^  cr  nad)  ^aufe  fattt,  fattb  cr  cittcn 
S3ricf, 

286.  Modified  Verbals.  —  When  the  English  verbal  is  modified 
by  a  possessive,  German  uses  a  clause  with  ba^,  instead  of  the 
infinitive  with  ju.     Compare  §  204,  d. 

He  came  without  seeing  me.     @r  fam,  u^ltc  mid}  5tt  fel^eiu 
He  came  without  my  seeing  him.     ©r  !am,  O^ttC  ba^  id)  t^U  fa!^»    - 
Instead  of  going,  he  came  home.    Stttftatt  p  ge^ieu,  fam  cr  nad)  ^attfc* 
Instead  of  my  taking  the  book,  you  must,    ^n^iatt  ha^  id)  bai^  '^^nd)  nel^me^ 
mn^i  bit  t^. 

287.  Vocabulary. 

ber  ^In^f  bic  5?Hlffe,  ntjer.  ha^  U'fcr,  bte  Ufcr,  s/iore,  bank. 

bcr  JHc'gCtt,  min.  ba§  X^ta'tcVf  bte  X^eatcr,  «7iea«re  ; 

bic   ^0%    t>ic    ^oftcii^    postoffice,         ttt^  X^catcr,  ^o  ^/le  theatre, 

post;  auf  bic  ^^5oft,  «o  the  post-  ha§  ^onscrt',   bic  ^ott^cttc,  con- 
office,  cert ;  in^  ^Oltjcrt,  to  the  concert 


VERBALS,  187 

an'fommctt,  tarn  an,  att'gcfommctt     H§   ^xUttt',    btc    SBiKct'te   (pro- 
(fcitt),  to  arrive^  usually  followed  nounced  bilyet'),  ticket. 

by  in  or  an  with  the  dative.  O^Ct^^  adv.,  at  once^  immediately. 

288.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  aSa^renb  fie  xm  $Regen  nad)  §aufe  Itefen,  fatnen  fie 
am  Ufer  be^  Stuffed  an*  2.  J5a  er  fpcit  im  3:t)eater  anfam, 
^at  er  !etne  Gillette  befommen  fcinnen*  3.  3lnftatt  ba^  iii)  auf 
bie  ^oft  ge^e,  inerben  @ie  g(ei(^  ^inge^en  mltffen.  4.  SBa^- 
renb  tt)ir  am  Ufer  be^  gluffe^  fpieften,  fa^en  mir  ben  3^g,  ber 
citn  angefommen  trar,  .  5.  ®a  fie  i^r  ^iltett  ^atte,  ging  fie 
gtei(^  in^  ^onjert,  o^ne  mi^  ju  fet)en»  6.  !l)a  er  ba^  ^inb 
im  gfuffe  fa^,  ging  er  glei^,  nm  §i(fe  ju  t)oten. 

(&)  „0^ne  ba^  icf)  etma^  bat)on  innate,  ^at  mein  Sruber  jiuei 
©ittette  jnm  tonjert  gefanft.^' 

„Unb  anftatt  mit  3^t)nen  in^  Sonjert  p  ge^en,  ift  er  oI)ne  ©ie 
gegangen?" 

„?Jein,  er  ijat  mir  ein  ^ittett  gegeben,  aber  inbem  irfi  in^  Son^ 
jert  an!am,  erinnerte  ii^  mit^,  ba^  id)  e^  t^ergeffen  ^atte," 

„SBa^  ^ben  @ie  getan?" 

,jQd)  ^abe  nai^  §aufe  ge^en  mltffen*  3Keine  ®(f)rt)efter  ift  mit 
meinem  -93it(ett  im  ^onjert  angefommen,  of)ne  ba^  x6)  fie  fal^^'' 

(c)  1.  Having  bought  our  tickets  to  the  theatre,  we  shall  go 
at  once.  2.  While  gomg  to  the  postoffice,  I  saw  many  women 
coming  from  the  concert.  3.  Arriving  at  the  shore  of  the 
river,  he  saw  the  boys  at  once,  without  their  seeing  him. 
4.  Instead  of  our  going  to  the  theatre  with  those  tickets,  you 
ought  to  go  yourself.  5.  While  playing  in  the  rain  at  the 
shore  of  the  river,  my  little  sister  hurt  her  foot.  6.  Arriving 
in  the  theatre  late,  we  bought  our  tickets  at  once  without  any- 
body's seeing  us. 


188  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

(d)  "  I  am  glad  that  you  have  arrived.  Shall  we  go  to  the 
theatre  at  once  without  waiting  for  (auf )  the  others  ?  " 

"Perhaps,  instead  of  our  waiting  here,  they  think  that  we 
will  wait  outside." 

"  I  have  the  tickets  here.  They  could  not  have  arrived 
without  our  seeing  them." 

"  No.  Coming  through  the  door  there  they  would  have  had 
to  see  us." 

"  There  they  are.    I  am  glad  that  they  have  finally  arrived." 


LESSON  LXIII. 
Wor4  Order.    Review, 


Der  fjerr  tft  metn  i^trte;  mtr  mtrb  ntd^ts  mangeln.  (Er  ipctbet  mid? 
auf  etncr  griinen  2lm  unb  fiil^ret  mid?  5um  frifd?en  XPaffer;  er  erquic!et 
mcine  Scele;  cr  fiil^rct  mid?  auf  rcd?tcr  Strage  um  feines  Hamens 
millcn.  Unb  ob  id?  fd?on  ujanberte  im  ftnftcrn  Cal,  fiird?te  id?  fein 
Ungliicf;  benn  Du  bift  bei  mir;  Dein  Stedzn  unb  Stab  troften  mid?. 
Du  bereiteft  vox  mir  e'lncn  Cifd?  gegen  mcine  ^einbc.  Du  falbeft  mcin 
^aupt  mit  01  unb  fd?enfeft  mir  coil  ein.  (Sutcs  unb  Barml^er3igfeit 
tDcrbcn  mir  folgen  mein  £eben  lang,  unb  id?  mcrbie  bleiben  im  £]aufe  bes 
X7crrn  immerbar.  —  2)er  23.  ^falm  2)ai)tb^. 


289.  Word  Order.  —  (a)  Eeview  Inverted  Order,  §  99;  in 
questions,  §  3;  in  the  formal  imperative,  §§69  and^200;  in 
the  main  clause,  §  170,  a ;  in  conditions,  §  271 ;  after  al^, 
§  274,  a ;  the  omission  of  e^  in,  §  250,  6. 

(6)  Keview  Dependent  Order,  §  170;  with  relatives,  §  167; 
in  indirect  questions,  §  173 ;  with  subordinating  conjunctions, 
§  178 ;  ba^,  §  182 ;  the  modals  in,  §§  181  and  276. 


WORD   ORDER.  189 

(c)  Review  Normal  Order;  position  of  ntd^t,  §  23;  of  nie, 
§  121 ;  of  a  single  adverb,  §  125 ;  of  objects,  §  94 ;  of  the  object 
of  an  adjective,  §  282,  a;  of  possessive  genitive,  §  40;  of  in- 
direct object,  §  45;  of  past  participle,  §  60;  of  participle  as 
adjective,  §206,  a;  of  infinitives,  §§50,  192,  and  205;  of  ju 
with  separable  prefixes,  §  189,  c? ;  of  ju  with  modals,  §  137,  b ; 
of  "  two  infinitives,"  §  141 ;  of  separable  prefixes,  §  189 ;  after 
coordinating  conjunctions,  §  177. 

290.  General  Rule  for  Word  Order.  —  In  general,  the  more 
emphatic  parts  of  a  German  sentence  come  nearest  the  end. 
Thus,  if  whom  is  emphasized  when  the  question  is  asked :  To 
whom  did  you  give  your  book  ?  then  in  the  answer,  to  the  teacher 
is  the  emphatic  part,  and  German  does  not  follow  the  rule  in 
§  94,  c,  but  says  Q(i)  ^abe  metn  SSnd)  bem  Secret  gegeben. 

(a)  In  independent  clauses  the  personal  part  of  the  verb 
(the  auxiliary  in  compound  tenses)  is  the  second  element  in 
the  sentence,  except  that  particles  (aber,  jebod),  etc.)  may  pre- 
cede it. 

But  I  won't  do  it.    ^6)^  aBcf,  tttc  c^  tttr^t* 

Still  I  will  do  it  to-morrow.     9)lorgctt^  jcboti^,  tttC  \^  t2* 

(b)  Adverbs  and  adverbial  phrases  stand :  (1)  time,  (2)  place, 
(3)  manner. 

2Bir  f^ahtn  t^n  ^cutc  itBcrall  ftcitig  gcfur^t*     We  have  hunted  for  him 

to-day  diligently  everywhere. 
^ic  ^inbcr  f^ielcn  f^tntt  brau^cn  im  ©onncnf^eitt*     The  children  are 

playing  to-day  out  of  doors  in  the  sunshine. 

(1)  Adverbs    of   time    usually   precede    objects,    except 
pronouns. 

3t^  ffaht  i^m  gcftcrn  ctttcn  ^od  gefauft    /  bought  him  a  coat  yesterday. 
©r  ttJirb  S^ttcn  tia(b  H§  SSuc^  gcBcn.    He  will  soon  give  you  the  book. 


190  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN, 

(2)  In  main  clauses  adverbs  must  never  be  placed  be- 
tween subject  and  verb. 

^^  gC^C  nie  in  bic  BiaH.    I  never  go  to  the  city.  ' 

(3)  A  phrase  follows  a  single  word. 

S93ir  gittgctt  o^Pcnt  ttt  bic  ^icCisi*     We  went  into  the  city  yesterday, 

291.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  8(^ttce,  snow.  fiirr^^itct  (^abeit),  to  he  afraid,  of, 

Jjic  ^xx'^tf  bic  ^irr^ett,  church,  tjor  with  dative. 

ba§  ^Xaiif  btc  flatter,  leaf  su'ma^cn,  ntati^te  p',  ^u'gema^t 

rerf|t  f)atJCtt,  l^attc,  gc^abt  (^aBcn),  (^abcn),  ^o  shut,  close. 

to  be  right,  used  of  persons.  Cttt'ttieber  ♦  ♦  ♦  ot>tv,  either  .  .  ,  or. 

un'rcj^t     f^ahtUf      f^attc,      ^ti^abt  ttic'bet  ♦  ♦  ♦  norf|,  neither  .  .  .  nor. 

(^abctt),  to   be  wrong,   used  of  tinttUV ,  of  one  and  the  same  kind ; 

persons.  ha^  ift  mix  cincrlci',  thaVs  all 

\i^  fiiri^'tcn,  fitr^tctc  fitift,  \i^  gc=  one  to  me,  I  don't  care. 

292.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  aSenn  ®te  iiberfefeen,  Tniiffen  ®te  entmeber  red^t  ober 
unred^t  ^aben.  2.  3<(i)  furcate  mid)  iDeber  t)or  bem  ©d^tiee  nod) 
t)or  bem  9?egen.  3.  g^  ^at  geftern  itberatt  ftarf  (hard)  geregnet; 
bie  ^©latter  ber  ^ciutne  neben  ber  tirc^e  ftnb  gang  na^.  4.  gr 
^atte  unret^t,  aber  e^  tDar  i^m  ganj  einerlet;  er  tDoHte  tDeber 
lefen  noc^  Itberfe^en.  5.  Qi)  ^abe  red^t  nnb  @ie  ^aben  nnred^t; 
mac^en  @te  Q^x  ^n^  jn,  unb  fagen  ®ie  bie  ©efdftii^te  anf  beutfd) 
^er !  6.  g^  ift  mir  gang  einerlei,  ba§  meine  ©(^u^e  na^  ftnb ; 
ic^  fitrd^te  mid^  meber  t)or  bem  SBaffer  nod^  t)or  bent  ®c^nee» 

(&)  „Sttte,  madden  @te  bie  :93it(^er  ju!  Sir  tDoffen  enttDeber 
fefen  ober  itberfe^en.'' 

,rJ)te  ©latter  meine^  -Snd^e^  finb  jerriffen;  i^  fann  tt)ebev 
lefen  nod^  itberfe^en*'' 


WORD   ORDER.  191 

„35a^  tft  mir  etnerlei.  @ie  ptten  entlDcber  bte  3Iufgabe  ait^ 
ctner  anberen  ©ramtnati!  lernen  ober  eitte  neue  faufen  follen,'' 

„(Ste  ijahtn  vtd)t,  aber  ic^  fltrc^tete  mtc^  Dor  metnem  SSater, 
tt)enn  id)  t^m  [agte,  ba^  mein  :93uc^  jerriffett  fei." 

„®a^  tut  mir  (eib,  aber  @te  mitffen  bte  @a^e  lernen/' 

(c)  1.  My  shoes  are  wet,  but  I  don't  care ;  rm  not  afraid 
of  the  snow.  2.  You  will  either  have  to  write  this  exercise 
with  closed  books  or  go  home.  3.  That  little  boy  goes  nei- 
ther to  (in  bie)  church  nor  to  school.  4.  You  were  right  and 
I  was  wrong;  these  leaves  are  quite  wet.  5.  We  are  not 
afraid  of  them ;  they  are  neither  so  big  nor  so  strong  as  we. 
6.  Those  younger  pupils  are  wrong  every  time  they  translate, 
but  the  teacher  is  always  right. 

(d)  ^^  I  don't  like  this  weather.  It  either  rains  or  snows  the 
whole  time.'' 

"No,  you  are  wrong;  yesterday  it  neither  rained  nor 
snowed." 

"  I  don't  care ;  it  was  very  wet  and  we  couldn't  play  ball." 

"  Are  you  afraid  of  the  rain  ?  " 

"No,  but  it  is  not  very  agreeable  when  either  the  ball  or 
our  shoes  get  wet." 

"  Yes,  that's  true.     Perhaps  it  will  be  better  to-morrow." 


©.a^  ®IM,  ba^  imnter  i)or  mir  f^tuanb, 
!j)a^  id)  t)erf olgte  f onber  9?u^^  — 

grreic^t  nun  \}aV  xd)'^  unb  erfannt : 
©a^Omd  — biftbu. 


192  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

LESSON  LXIV. 
Idiomatic  Particles,     ^entt,  ^od^,  ^a,  '^od),  <^d)on,  2BoI|L 

( This  Lesson  may  be  omitted  at  the  discretion  of  the  teacher  or  post- 
poned till  later  in  the  course.) 


irttr  tDtrb  von  alle  bcm  fo  bumm, 

2II5  gtng'  mir  ein  UTiil^Irab  tm  Kopf  lucrum*  —  ©octi^c* 


293.  Idiomatic  Particles.  —  The  use  of  the  German  expletives 
benn,  bod^,  ja,  noc^,  f(^on,  and  tpo^I  is  important.  It  consti- 
tutes one  of  the  chief  differences  between  idiomatic  German 
and  German  that  is  merely  grammatically  correct.  Of  course 
no  pupil  is  expected  to  speak  idiomatic  German  after  but  one 
year's  study,  but  many  may  wish  to  try. 

(a)  The  chief  difficulty  arises  from  the  impossibility  of 
translating  these  particles  directly  into  English.  Good  illus- 
tration of  this  is  found  in  the  already  and  yet  of  Germans  who 
have  but  partly  mastered  English.  They  know  already  and 
yet  are  English  for  fd^OTl  and  bod^,  so  they  translate  them  with 
disastrous  results. 

(b)  The  use  of  these  expletives  can  be  learned  only  by  hear- 
ing, studying,  and  memorizing  good,  idiomatic  German.  As  it 
is  largely  a  question  of  feeling,  no  set  of  rules  will  suffice,  but 
the  following  hints  may  help. 

294.  2)cntt  may  be  used  in  almost  every  spoken  German 
question.  It  adds  an  almost  imperceptible  note  of  surprise 
or  curiosity.     It  is  not  translated  in  English. 

2Ba)g  ift  bcttti  ba^  ?     What  is  that  9 
^a^  ift  bcnn  (0^  ?     Whafs  the  matter  ? 


IDIOMATIC  PARTICLES.  193 

295.  ^a*  —  Besides  its  regular  meaning  of  yes  in  answering 
affirmative  questions,  }a  is  used  to  strengthen  an  imperative. 
Here  it  is  emphasized  and  may  be  translated  by  all  rueans. 

Xxt^  t§  ja*     Do  it  by  all  means  ! 
(a)  It  adds  a  tone  of  assurance  or  surprise  to  any  sentence. 
Here  it  is  not  emphasized  and  may  usually  be  translated  by 
why  at  the  beginning. 

^a§  ift  ja  friftott.     Why,  that  is  fine. 

^X  fagte  ja  m^i^*     Why,  he  didnH  say  anything. 

296.  Sod^  has  three  uses  besides  that  of  adversative  conjunc- 
tion, yet.  They  are  like  the  corresponding  uses  of  Ja,  but  there 
is  always  a  suggestion  of  but  or  yet  about  them. 

(a)  It  means  yes  in  answering  negative  sentences. 

^oBctt  Sic  fcin  @clb  ?    Have  you  no  money?    ^t>^.     Yes  {but  I  have). 
^u  ttiirft  ^Ctttc  toof^l  nx^t  tommtn.     You  won't  come  to-day,  will  you? 
^0(j^.     Yes  (oh,  but  I  shall). 

(6)  It  means  but  in  strengthening  a  negative  and  pray  or  do 
(emphatic)  in  strengthening  an  imperative.  It  may  also  be 
translated  in  the  first  case  (with  the  negative)  by  repeating 
the  subject  and  auxiliary  as  a  question. 

®r  fagte  ho^  tti^t^.     But  he  didn't  say  anything. 

^U  fommft  bO(^  ni^t  ^CUtC  ?     You  aren't  coming  to-day,  are  you? 

^ommen  (Sic  boti^.     Pray  come,  or  do  come. 

@C^C  btd^  bO(^.     Pray  be  seated,  or  do  sit  down. 

(c)  It  adds  a  note  of  surprise  to  an  affirmative  sentence. 
Here  it  is  stronger  than  Ja,  and  may  be  translated  by  why  or 
some  stronger  exclamation. 

^a§  ift  but^  fj^iitt.     My,  but  that  is  fine  ! 

^u  l^aft  boc^  einctt  langcn  S^lorf.     Why,  what  a  long  coat  you  have  I  or 
well,  you  have  a  long  coat  I 


194  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

297.  9lo^  is  used  (besides  its  regular  meaning  of  still,  more, 
yet)  whenever  the  idea  of  yet  or  more  enters  into  an  English 
sentence.     It  is  not  expressed  in  English. 

233cr  fottft  nori^  ?     Who  else  9 

^dl^t  ^(umctt  5a6c  ic^  not^  uic  gefc^cn*    I  never  saw  such  flowers. 

298.  Sd^on  is  used  whenever  the  idea  of  already  or  of  all 
right  enters  into  an  English  sentence. 

3t^  i^xn  fd^Ott  ba  gcttJCfctt*     I've  been  there. 

^a  fommt  cr  fti^ott.     7% ere  Tie  comes  (now). 

3<^  Werbe  c^  ft^oit  tun  fiJitncn*    ril  he  able  to  do  it,  all  right. 

299.  SBol^I  is  used  whenever  the  idea  of  probability  enters 
an  English  sentence.  It  may  be  translated  perhaps^  probably, 
I  think,  or  by  any  phrase  showing  lack  of  certainty. 

@r  ift  n)oI)(  franf  ♦    He  is  sick,  I  think. 

^tt  ttiirft  ^Cttte  ttio^I  ntc^t  fommctt*     Tow  (probably)  won't  come  to-day, 
will  you  ? 

(a)  SBol^t  is  generally  not  English  well,  except  sometimes  in 
speaking  of  health. 

^a^  ^aft  btt  ^iit  gctan.     Tow  did  that  well 

^a§  ^aft  i)U  nJ0^(  gctait*    Tow  did  that,  didn't  you?    You  probably  did  that. 

(b)  TTeZHn' English  is  gut  for  the  regular  abverb ;  nutl  for 
the  exclamation. 

»     Mnrtf  ba§  ^aft  bu  ^nt  gctan !     Well,  you  did  that  well ! 

300.  Vocabulary. 

bet  ^o'ntg,  bic  ^onigc^  A:in^.  bai^  ^orf,  bic  ^iirfer,  village. 

ber  (Solbaf,  bci^   SoCba'tcn,   bie  crlau'bcu,  crlauB'te,  txXmW  (^a= 

©olba'tCtt,  soldier.  ben),  «o  aZZot(?,  with  dative. 

bet  5ln'genbUcf,  bie  5(n/genbUtfc,  ermar'ten,    crttiar'tcte,    crnior'tet 

moment.  (!^aben),  ^o  expect,  await. 


IDIOMATIC  PARTICLES,  195 

etttfc^uCbtgctt,    entf^ttCbtgte,   cnt=  faum,  hardly,  scarcely. 

fti^uFMgt  (^abctt),  to  excuse.  ^txi'it  (mor'gcn,  etc.)   ii'Bcr  a^i 

f^a5tc'rcn  gc^cn,  ging  f^ajic'tcn,  Xa'^tf  a  week  from  to-day,  etc. 

f^ja^tc'rctt  gegangctt  (feiit),  to  go  tior,   with  dative,   ago;   mv  sttJci 
walking,  or  /or  a  toaZ/c.  3<^^J^^Wf  ^^^  2/^^^^  ^S'^^* 

301.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  gntfd^ulbtgen  @ie  mt(^  borf) !  ^'(^  ^abe  {a  nxiji^  getatt* 
2.  T)er  ®onig  iDirb  ben  Solbaten  tDol^I  faum  eriauben,  ba^  fie 
^eute  itber  ac^t  Silage  fpajieren  ge^en.  3.  a3or  gtuet  28ocf)en 
tt)ar  irf)  f(^on  in  biefem  Keinen  ©orfe.  4.  2:un  @ie  e^  ja !  ©^ 
ift  tDO^l  eriaubt ;  ®ie  braud)en  \id)  boc^  nirfjt  ju  entfc^ulbigen* 
5.  3}?orgen  itber  at^t  STage  tDerbe  ic^  bie  ©d^e  fi^on  iiberfe^en 
fdnnen.  6.  ®ie  eriauben  boc^  nii^t,  ba§  ber  @o(bat  mit  .^^nen 
fpajieren  ge^t !    ©oc^ ! 

(b)  „gntf(^u(bigen  @ie  mi(^  bod^ !  Qii)  ijattt  faum  ertDartet, 
®ie  ^ier  ju  fe^en,'' 

,,3Sor  jtDei  ©tunben  tDoHte  i(^  bur^  ba^  ®orf  f^^ajieren  ge^en, 
aber  tc^  fonnte  nidit*'' 
„@rlauben  ©ie  bo(^,  ba§  i^  ntit  3'^nen  ge^e !" 
,,^'ommen  ©ie  {a !    ©^  mirb  jeben  3lugenbli(f  f(^dner." 
„3Bir  miiffen  bo(^  nic^t  ju  itjeit  gef)en." 

(c)  (Use  as  many  particles  as  you  can.)  1.  Do  excuse  me ! 
Why,  you  would  [probably]  hardly  expect  me  to  [that  I]  go 
walking  in  the  village  with  a  soldier!  2.  Why,  the  king 
won't  allow  that,  will  he  ?  3.  He  never  [yet]  has  allowed 
it,  but  we  expect  [already]  every  moment  that  he  will  (tUt). 
4.  Why,  that  is  beautiful !  You  wouldn't  have  expected  it, 
would  you  ?  5.  Pray  give  me  some  more  water  in  this  cup 
of  tea;  it  is  [still]  much  too  strong.  6.  A  week  from  to-day 
you  will  [probably  already]  have  time  enough  to  go  for  a  walk. 


196  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

(d)  "Why,  I  hadn't  expected  [it]  to  find  you  here!  Do 
allow  me  to  go  walking  with  you." 

"  No,  I  can't  (md)t  bO(^) !  Why,  I  have  hardly  a  moment. 
My  brother  has  probably  arrived  already." 

"Pray  excuse  me !  I  did  not  know  that  you  were  expecting 
your  brother." 

"I  know  [it].  Another  time  I  shall  probably  have  more 
time." 

"  Good !     A  week  from  to-day  I  shall  try  it  again."  * 


LESSON  LXV. 
Review. 


(£nbe  gut,  alles  gut.  —  0^rtc^n)ort. 


302.  '         Review  Questions. 

(a)  1.  What  kind  of  prepositions  govern  the  genitive? 
2.  Name  the  commonest  ones.  3.  Give  three  other  important 
uses  of  the  genitive,  and  illustrate  each.  4.  Distinguish  be- 
tween the  German  ways  of  telling  definite,  indefinite, "  and 
recurring  time.     Illustrate  each. 

(&)  1.  Give  the  rules  for  the  four  chief  uses  of  the  dative 
case.  2.  Name  ten  verbs  that  govern  the  dative.  3.  What 
kind  of  adjectives  take  the  dative  in  German?  4.  What 
should  be  done  to  English  verbals  before  they  are  translated 
into  German  ?  5.  Distinguish  between  modified  verbals  and 
similar  unmodified  uses.  6.  Illustrate  both  uses  by  original 
sentences. 


BEVIEW.  197 

(c)  Grive  the  rule  for  the  use  of  dependent  order.  What 
exception  occurs  ?  2.  Give  the  three  main  rules  for  inverted 
order.     Illustrate  each.       3.  In  what  order  do  adverbs  stand  ? 

4.  Do  adverbs  sometimes  come  between  subject  and  predicate, 
as  in  English  ?     If  so,  when  ? 

(d)  1.  Give  the  position  of  the  separable  prefix  in  all  tenses 
for  the  normal  order,  and  in  the  present  and  imperfect  for  the 
dependent  order.  2.  Where  do  the  infinitive  and  participle 
stand  ?  3.  Give  and  illustrate  all  the  rules  for  position  of 
objects.  4.  What  general  rule  covers  almost  all  cases  of 
normal  word  order  ?  5.  Prove  it  from  the  illustrations  you 
have  given. 

303.  Review  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  Slnftatt  eine^  3Jiantie^,  ber  mtr  fremb  ift,  fatten  @ie 
mtr  etnen  jeigen  foKen,  bev  tnetnem  33ruber  ai^nlxi)  tft.  2.  sjjad^^ 
bem  fie  ben  Wdnmxxi  begegnet  fittb,  fitib  bie  llinber  t^nen  tDix^- 
renb  be^  ganjen  S^aiimittag^  gefolgt.  3.  3lte  er  anfam,  gitig 
er  in  ba^  ^an^,  o^ne  ba^  jemanb  etiDa^  ^orte.  4.  Slnftatt  ba§ 
fie  bie  Gillette  ^nm  3:^eater  !anft,  tDtrb  i^r  ©rnber  e^  tnn. 

5.  &  ijat  geftern  UberaH  ftar!  geregnet,  aber  e^  ift  ntir  ganj 
etnerlei.  6.  SBo  ge^en  ®ie  benn  I)tn?  7.  ®  ift  boc^  noi^  nic^t 
3eit,  tn^  Son,^ert  ^n  ge^en.  8.  ^c^  iDar  fc^on  ba.  ©o  t)tete 
®amen  ^abe  id)  no(^  nie  gefe^en.  9.  (Sntfifiutbtgen  ®ie  mid^ 
bod^!  @te  n)erben  mtr  tno^I  ertauben,  mit  ^arf  fpajteren  jn 
ge^en*  10.  Sari  fonimt  ft^on,  aber  bie  anberen  fommen  n)o^( 
fpater,  tDtil  e^  noi^  mi)t  ^tit  ift. 

(b)  1.  Because  of  its  difficulty,  that  other  book  does  not  suit 
this  class.  2.  In  spite  of  the  rain  we  have  followed  those 
women  during   the   last   two  hours.       3.  Coming  home  late, 


198  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

he  tried  to  open  a  window  without  anybody's  hearing  him. 
4.  Seeing  him  arrive,  we  all  stopped  singing  at  once.  5.  In- 
stead of  my  buying  the  tickets,  you  ought  to  have  done  it 
yourself.  6.  She  could  neither  write  nor  'translate  the  sen- 
tences ;  she  was  wrong  every  time.  7.  Why,  I  am  not  afraid 
of  long  sentences ;  they  are  all  the  same  to  me.  8.  Haven't 
you  translated  [yet]  ?  Well,  you  will  probably  have  to  read 
later.  9.  You  don't  want  to  go  yet,  do  you  ?  Oh  yes,  I  do. 
10.  I  have  never  [yet]  seen  a  king,  but  my  brother  has  prob- 
ably [already]  seen  several. 


STEONG    VERBS. 


199 


304.     LIST   or   STRONG  AND   IRREg^ULAR  VERBS. 

The  principal  parts  are  in  full-faced  type.  The  second  and  third  per- 
sons singular  of  the  present  indicative  are  given  when  the  vowel  differs 
from  that  of  the  infinitive;  also  when  the  connecting  vowel  e  is  required 
in  verbs  whose  stem  ends  in  b,  t,  g,  ff,  f,  ft.  The  second  person  singular 
of  the  imperative  is  given  when  it  has  the  short  form  without  e,  or  vowel- 
change  i;  also  when  the  e  is  optional.  A  dash  indicates  regular  forms. 
Compound  verbs  are  given  only  when  the  simple  verb  has  passed  from 
use,  e.  g.,  befel)Ieu,  gebciren.    Cognates  are  in  small  capitals. 


Infinitive 

fdaden,^  bake 
JBcfc^Ien,  command 


bacfft,  bMt,  

befie^Ift,  beMIt      befte^I 


Past 
ind.  subj. 


fdtfitxfien,  apply  (refl.)    bcfleifeeft,  befleiBt    befleiB(e) 

©egtnncn,  begin  

aJet^ctt,  BITE  6et§eft,  bet^t  bciB(e) 

a5cttctt,2  bark  biUft,  bittt  hiU 

©crgctt,  bide,  birgft,  birgt  Hrg 

©crftcn,!  BURST,  birfteft,  birft  birft 

93ctt)C0ett,^  induce  — »  

fdiCQtn,  bend  

JBictCtt,  offer  

©inbcn,  BIND  binbeft,  binbet  

S3tttcn,  beg  bttteft,  btttet  

f&iaicn,  blow  btafeft,  blaft  

S3(cibcn,  remain  

S3lCtt^Cn,*  BLEACH  

Sratcn,^  roast  bratft,  brSt  

aSrcc^cn,  break  bric^ft,  bric^t  brid^ 

JBrcnnctt,  burn  

JBringcn,  bring  


Befall 

Bcflt^ 
begann 

m 

Barg 

barft 
borft 

bcU)00 

Bog 

bot 

battb 

Ut 

bUeS 

blteb 

b(t(Q 

bdct 

brar^ 

branntc 

brac^tc 


bufc 

befal^Ie 
befo^Ie 

befliffe 

bcgcinne 
begonnc 

biffe 

bbtte 

barge 
biirge 

bSrftc 
bbrftc 

bett)oge 

boge 

bote 

banbc 

bate 

bliefe 

bliebe 

blid^e 

briete 

brad^e 

br^nnte 

brac^te 


Past  Part. 

Oeba(fen 
befo^len 

Bcftiffctt 
begonnett 

OCbiffctt 
geboUen 
geborgen 

gcborftcn 

bemogen 

gcbogcn 

gcboten 

gcbunben 

gcbctcn 

gebtafen 

gebUeben 

gebtid^en 

gcbraten 

gcbroil^ctt 

gebrannt 

gebrat^t 


1  Often  weak,  except  in  the  past  part. 

2  Generally  weak. 

s  Weak,  except  in  figurative  sense* 


*  Weak  when  transitive  and  sometimes 
when  intransitive. 
5  Sometimes  weak,  except  in  the  past  par. 


200 


ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 


Infinitive 

Pres.  Ind. 

2nd  and  3d 

per.  sing. 

Imperative 
2ud  per.  sing, 

Past 
,    ind.           subj. 

Past  Part 

2)Cn!Ctt,  THINK 

• 

bad^tc 

bad^tc 

gebad^t 

2)in9Ctt,i  hire,  bargain 

(bung 
bang 

biinge) 

gcbungctt 

^refC^Ctt,  THRESH 

brifd^eft,  brifd^t 

brifc^ 

brafiff 
broM 

braf*e 
brofc^c 

gebtofd^en 

2)rtngctt,  urge 

brang 

brangc 

gcbrungen 

2)ttttfen,  THINK 

(bauc^te 

baud^te 

gcbautftt) 

2)iirfen,  be  allowed 

barf,  barfft, 
barf,  bitrfen 

(wanting)  burftc 

bUrfte 

gcburft 

©m^jfclj Jen, recommend  cmpfie^lft,  em* 

empfte^l 

em^fa^I 

ctn^fal^Ie 
emi)fb^U 

tmp^ofittn 

@ffCtt,  EAT 

iffeft,  m 

i% 

a§ 

ftBe 

gegcffctt 

^af^tn,  archaic  for  fangen 

^af}ven,  go,  fare 

fa^rft,  fal^rt 

fa^r(e) 

mv 

fU^re 

gcfa^rcn 

fallen,  FALL 

faUft,  foUt 

tier 

fide 

gcfatten 

^aUtn,^  FOLD 

falteft,  faltet 

gcfattctt 

^angctt,  catch 

fangft,  fangt 

(ficttg 

fiengc) 

gcfangctt 

fJCr^tCtt,  FIGHT 

fic^tcft,3  fiesta 

fiesta 

fot^t 

foc^te 

gefor^tett 

fjittben,  find 

finbeft,  finbet 

fanb 

fanbe 

gcfuttbcn 

^U<f)ttn,  twine 

flic^ft,3  fitc^t  3 

flic^ts 

ftodit 

floc^te 

gcflot^tctt 

f^aCgCtt,  FLY 



flog 

pge 

geflogctt 

{JUcflCtt,  FLEE 



fiofi 

flo^e 

gcffo^ett 

{JKc^Ctt,  flow 

ffo§ 

Pffe 

gefloffctt 

f^ragcn,  ask 

fragft,  fragt 

frug^ 

friigc 

gefragt* 

IJrcffen,  eat  (of 
animals) 

friffeft,  friBt 

ftife 

fra§ 

fra^e 

gcfrcffctt 

Oriercn,  freeze 



fror 

frbrc 

gcfiurctt 

@a(^)rctt,  ferment 

go^r» 

gb^re 

gcgo^rctt* 

©cBarctt,  bear 

gebar 

gebare 

gcborcn 

©CBCtt,  GIVE 

fltebft,  gtebt 
gibft,  gibt 

gteb 
gib 

gab 

gabc 

gcgebctt 

©cbei^cn,  thrive 

gebtc^ 

gcbic^c 

gcbie^en 

(SJcIjcn,  GO 



gtng 

gtngc 

gcgangen 

(SJelingeit,  succeed 



gelang 

gelange 

gclungcn 

OJelten,  be  worth 

giltft,  gilt 

gilt 

gait 

gaitc 
goltc 

gcgoltcn 

©encfctt,  recover 

genefeft,  geneft 

gcna^ 

genafc 

gcnefeit 

1  Often  weak.  *  Always  weak,  and  the  other  forms  are 

8  Entirely  weak,  except  in  the  past  part,    properly  weak. 

8  The  weak  forms  also  occur.  ^  Also  weak,  especially  in  figurative  sense. 


STRONG    VERBS. 


201 


Infinitive 

^Cttic^cn,  enjoy 
©eft^e^Ctt,  happen 
©cttiiitnctt,  WIN 

©tc^cn,  pour 
@tei(f)en,^  resemble 

^(ciftCtt,  GLITTER 
@(CttCn,2  GLIDE 
@(tmmCtt,  GLEAM 

@vaf}tn,  dig 
OJrcifcn,  gripe,  grasp 
^ahtn,  HAVE 
fatten,  hold 
•^angen,  hang 
^auen,  hew 
J&cBeit,  raise 

J&et^cn,  call 
j^elfctt,  help 

^cifcn,*  chide 
^Cttttcn,  KNOW 
^tcfctt,  see  ^uven 

^KciCn,  CLEAVE,  split 

^nmmcn,2  climb 
^linqtn,  sound 
^ttetfen,^  pinch 
^ttei^jen,  pinch 
^ommen,  come 
^ontten,  can 

^rctftl^Ctt,*  scream 
^rtec^cn,  creep 
^itrctt,  choose 
2abcn,^  load,  invite 


2nl^!ndid       Imperative 
per.  sing.      2nd  per.  sing. 


Past 
ind.  subj. 


gcfc^ie^ft,  gefc^te^t  (wanting) 


Qlet^eft,  glet^t        

flleiteft,  glettct        

Qv'db%  Qvaht  


i^artft,  ^art 


gemann 

gittt 

qvuh 
Oriff 
fiatte 
fiieit 
fting 

^oh 
^ub 

Kff 
tannte 


tUh 

tiomm 

ftanq 

ftttff 

(Xnipp 

fotnm(e)  tarn 


^alt(e) 


i^ilf 


lann,  f  annft,  lann,  (wanting)  tonntc 
fonnen 


Iretfc^eft,  freifc^t 


labft,  labt 


lor 
tnt> 


gefc^a^c 

getDcinnc 
gehjonne 

0offe 

gltc^c 

gaffe 

gatte 

glomme 

griibc 

grtffe 

l^attc 

l^ielte 

l^tnge 

l^iebc 

l^o&e 
pbe 

l^alfc 
pife 

«ffe 

fenntc 

flbbc 

!Iommc 

flang 

fniffc 

fnippe 

fame 

lonnte 

Irifd^c 
Irbd^e 
fore 
liibe 


Past  Part 

gcnoffctt 
gefd)c^cn 
gemonnen 

gcgoffctt 

gegltc^en 

gcgliffctt) 

gegUtten 

gcgtommett 

gegraben 

gcgriffeit 

ge^aBi 

gc^aitett 

geljangen 

ge^auen 

ge^oiben 

gc^cigctt 
gc^oifett 

gefiffcn 
gefannt 

geftoien 

geflommett 

geftungen 

gefniffctt 

gefni^^en) 

gefommen 

gefonnt 

gefrift^ctt 
gcfrot^en 
gcforcn 
gelaben 


1  Usually  weak  when  transitive.  ^  Sometimes  weak. 

2  Weak  forms  sometimes  occur.  «  ^jgo  weak.   Two  verbs  are  confounded  in 
•'' l^angft,  l^angt  also  occur.    Do  not  con-  this  one,   viz.,   laben,   load,  once  always 

fuse  with  the  weak  l^iingen.                     .  strong,    and    laben,    invite,    once    always 

*  Usually  weak.  weak. 


202 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 


Infinitive 

2ndand3d     o^^^Z^^Z 
per.  sing.      2ndper.sing. 

Past 
,    ind.           subj. 

Past  Part 

gaffcn,  LET 

laffeft,  la^t, 

lam 

m 

lieBc 

rjclaffen 

fittttfcn,  run 

laufft,  lauft 



act 

Hcfc 

gclaufen 

2cU>cn,  suffer 

leibeft,  leibet 

Ittt 

attc 

gclittctt 

Sci^Ctt,  LEND 

m 

Ite^e 

geUc^eit 

ficfcn,  read 

liefeft,  Ueft 

Ite§ 

ta§ 

lafc 

ficCefctt 

Sicgctt,  LIE 

lag 

lage 

gclcgen 

Soft^ctt,!  go  out 

Itfc^eft,  Ufc^t 

m 

lofc^ 

lofc^c 

gcroft^cn 

fiugcn,  tell  a  lie 



lOfl 

loge 

gcJogctt 

9Waf|(ctt,2  grind 

gcma^len 

SWcibCtt,  shun 

tneibeft,  tncibet 

mteb 

miebe 

gcmtcbctt 

anc«Ctt,3  MILK 

mirfft,  milft 

mtif 

molt 

molfe 

gcmottcn 

aWcffen,  measure 

tnifjeft,  nti^t 

mi^ 

mafi 

ma^e 

Ocmcffett 

miUmtn,  fail 

mi^tang 

miBISnge 

miftlungen 

aWogCtt,   MAY 

mag,  magft,  mag, 
mbgen 

(wanting)  motfttc 

moc^te 

gemoi^t 

aWuffcn,  MUST 

mu^,  mu^t,  mufi, 
miiffen 

(wanting)  mu^tC 

mii^tc 

gewu^t 

^cfimtn,  take 

nimmft,  ntmmt 

ntmm 

ttdljnt 

na^me 

genommen 

D^JCttnCtt,  NAME 



nanntc 

nennte 

genannt 

^fcifcn,  whistle 

i^nff 

PPffe 

ge^ftffctt 

^flcgen,*  cherish 

^flog 

^Pge 

gc^ffogeti 

^reifctt,''  PRAISE 

iDreifeft,  preift 

^ric§ 

priefe 

gc^riefett 

jQueKen,^  gush 

quiUft,  quiEt 

quia 

quoll 

qubHc 

QtanoUtn 

Slacken,  avenge 



(roc^ 

rbc^e) 

gerorftett 

gflatctt,  advise 

ratft,  rat 

rict 

riete 

gcrateit 

ditxhtn,  rub 

vieh 

riebe 

gerteben 

aiet^Ctt,  tear 

rci^eft,  rci^t 

reiB(e) 

m 

riffe 

gcriffctt 

giettCtt    RIDE 

rciteft,  reitet 

vxtt 

rittc 

gcntten 

9ietttten,  run 

ratttttc 

renntc 

gcrattttt 

9lie(^en,  smell 

ror^ 

rdc^c 

gerad^en 

Siingett ,  wring,  wrestle     

rang 

range 

gcrungeit 

Slinnen,  run 





tann 

rannc 
rdnne 

gcrottttctt 

Kttfew,  call 



Hef 

riefe 

gcrufctt 

©aljcn,'  SALT 

faljeft,  faljt 

gcftttseit 

@aufen,  drink 

fftufft,  fftuft 

fauf(e) 

foff 

fiJffe 

gcfoffen 

1  When  transitive, 

,  quench,  weak. 

«  Sometimes  weak 

«  Usually  weak,  ex 

:cept  in  the  past  part. 

«  When  transitive 

i,  5oaA,  weak. 

«  Usually  weak. 

*  Also  entirely  weak. 

'  Only  the  past  part,  is  strong. 

STRONG   VERBS. 


203 


Infinitive 

i?S  iffX 

Past 
ind.           subj. 

Past  Part. 

©augcn,  suck 

fog 

fbge 

ficfooctt 

©c^nffen,!  create 



fiijuf 

fc^iife 

ficft^affeit 

@c^attctt,2  sound 

fi^ott 

fc^bUe 

gcfc^oactt 

©tiftcibctt,  part 

fc^eibeft,  fd^cibet 

fdjteb 

fc^iebc 

flcft^tcbcn 

©t^eincn,  appear 

fr^ien 

fc^ienc 

gcfdjiencn 

©t^CltCn,  SCOLD 

fc^tltft,  fc^ilt 

fc^itt 

naii 

fc&alte 
c^blte 

gcfi^ottctt 

@d^erctt,3  SHEAR 

fd^ierft,  fc^iert 

fc^ier 

mv 

fc^dre 

gcfi^orcn 

Sd^tCBCtt,  SHOVE 

mf> 

fd^obc 

gefr^ofiett 

©r^ic^cn,  shoot 

mfi 

wm 

gcftftoffctt 

©(i^inben,  flay 

fc^tnbeft,  fc^inbet 

ft^unb2 

fc^iinbe 

gcft^unbeit 

©ti^Iafcn,  SLEEP 

fc^Iafft,  fc^Iaft 

fc^raf(c) 

ft^nef 

fc^liefe 

gefd^rafen 

©t^tagctt,  strike 

mm,  m^Qt 

mm 

fd^mgc 

gcfrfjrrtgcn 

@(i)(ctt^en,  sneak 

fr^n« 

fc^lic^c 

geft^lit^cjt 

©t^Ictfctt,*  whet 

ft^ntf 

fc^Uffc 

gcfi^affen 

©(^ICt^Ctt,  SLIT 

fc^lciBeft,  fc^IeiBt 

frfia^ 

fc^Hffe 

geft^affctt 

©c^Ucfett,  slip 

fi^foff 

fc^loffc 

gcft^loffctt 

©t^Kcfeett,  shut 

ft^Ioft 

mm 

gcff^toffctt 

©t^Ungcn,  sling 

ft^Ittng 

Wiange 

QtWutiQtn 

©t^met^en,  smite 

fd^met^eft,  fc^meifet 

fc^metB(e) 

ftiimtft 

fd&mtfle 

gcfr^miffcn 

©ti^melscn,''  melt 

fc^miljeft,  fc^miljt 

fc^milj 

fc^mo(5 

fc^molge 

gcfii^moljcn 

©d^nauBcn,^  snort 

fC^ttOft 

fc^nobe 

gefi^noben 

©dinciben,  cut 

fc^ncibeft,  fc^neibet 

fd)nttt 

fc^nxtte 

gcfd^ttittcn 

©ti^rauBcn,'  screw 

fc^roB 

fc^rb&c 

gcft^robcn 

©t^rccfcn,^  be  afraid 

^c^rfdft,  fc^rlcft 

fd^rid 

ft^ra! 

fc^rafe 

geft^rodfctt 

©t^rctfictt,  write 

ft^rieJi 

fc^riebe 

geft^tieBen 

©tftrctcn,  cry 

fc^rei(e) 

ft^rtc 

fc^rtee 

gcfrfinccn 

©tl^reiten,  stride 

fc^retteft,  fd^rcttet 

fc^ritt 

fc^ritte 

gcfdinttctt 

©r^rotcn,^  rough-grind  fc^roteft,  fc^rotet 

gcfj^rotcn 

©(^marcn,  suppurate 

fc^toicrft,  fc^hJtert 

fd^hJier 

ft^rtjor 

fd^h)brc 

gcfi^toorcn 

©d^hJCtgctt,^  be  silent 

fi^tftco 

fd^hJtcge 

gcft^UJtcgcn 

©t^ttjettctt,^  swell 

fc^hJtUft;  fc^njiEt 

fc^ttJia 

m^ou 

fc£)tt)bae 

gcfc^UJoKeit 

Bti^toimmtn,  swim 

■ 

fr^h>am» 

I  fcbioatniTK 
d9rt)bmm( 

•  gcfrf)tyommcii 

1  In  other  senses  weak.  «  Weak  when  transitive. 

2  Also  entirely  weak.  «  Also  weak ;  f(3^nieben  occurs  Instead  of 

3  Sometimes  weak.  fd^naubcit. 

4  Weak  in  other  senses,  rase,  drag.  '  Also  weak. 

8  Only  the  past  part,  is  strong. 


204 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 


Infinitive 

Pres.  Ind. 
2nd  and  3d 
per.  sing. 

Imperative                Past 
2nd  per.  sing.      ind.           subj. 

Past  Part. 

©tftttitnbcn,  vanish 

fc^toinbeftjd^toinbet 

frf)jj>anb 

cbttjcinbe 
c^toilnbc 

gcf(^ttJttttbctt 

©dittJtngctt,  SWING 



fi^ttjang 

<6h)ange 

gefti^hJUttgei 

©tftwiircn,  swear 



f(fitt)or 

(bhjorc 
4toure 

gcft^ttioren 

@e^ett,  SEE 

fte^ft,  fic^t 

fteKe) 

m 

vm 

gefclicn 

<Scttt,  be 

bin,  bift,  tft,  jc. 

fei 

ttiar 

toSre 

gettiefcn 

©cnben,  send 

fenbeft,  fenbet 



anbtc 
enbctc 

fenbcte 

gefanbt 
gefcnbct 

©iebcn,^  seethe 

ficbeft,  fiebet 

fott 

fotte 

gefotten 

Bin^tn,  sing 

fang 

fcinge 

gcfungctt 

©tttfctt,  sink 

fan! 

fanfe 

gcfutttctt 

eittttcn,  think 

fann 

annc 
onne 

gcfottttcn 

Si^cn,  SIT 

fi^eft,  fi|t 

fa# 

fagc 

gcfcffcn 

©otten,  should 

fott,  foUft,  foU,  fotten  (wanting)  jojjte 

fottte 

gcfottt 

©^ia(tcn,2  split 

fpalteft,  f^altet 



Qt\palttn 

Bptkn,  SPEW 

m 

f^icc 

Qtipietn 

Spitttten,  SPIN 



f^iatttt 

pSnnc 
ijonne 

gcf^jottneti 

^pieificn,  SPLIT 

\phim,  m^m 

mfi 

fiJliffe 

gef^liffeit 

©^rci^en,  speak 

\px\^%  f priest 

f^ric^ 

\pvatfi 

f))rac^c 

gef^rot^en 

©^jricftctt,  SPROUT 

f*>ro§ 

fprbffc 

gef^roffen 

S^jringcn,  spring 



f)>rang 

f^range 

gcfprungeit 

Stcdjctt,  prick 

ftid^ft,  ftic^t 

ftic^ 

fta* 

ftac^e 

gefto(^en 

©tCrfCtt,»  STICK 



m 

ftatc 

(geftocfcit) 

©tC^Ctt,  STAND 

fte^(e) 

tanb 
tunb 

ftanbe 
ftttnbe 

geftanbeti 

©te^len,  steal 

ftie^lft,  ftie^rt 

ftlc^l 

iiaf)i 

table 
td^le 

gefto^Iett 

©tcigen,  ascend 



ftieg 

fttegc 

geftiegett 

©terbctt,  die 

ftirbft,  ftirbt 

ftirb 

ftara 

ftarbc 
tUrbe 

geftor^ett 

©tieBen,  disperse 



ftuB 

ftobe 

gcftobett 

@titt!ctt,  stink 



ftani 

ftanle 

geftunfcw 

©toftcn,  push 

mt%  mt 

ftoB(e) 

fHc§ 

ftieftc 

gcftoftcn 

©trett^citr  stroke 

ftrirft 

ftric^c 

geftritl^en 

1  Also  weak. 

2  Only  the  past  part,  is  strong. 


«  Always  weak  when  transitive  j   some- 
times when  intransitive. 


STRONG   VERBS. 


205 


Infinitive 

9nrr«nH?H         Imperative 
'ptr.%fn|.'       2dp^er.sing. 

Past 
ind.          subj. 

Past  Part. 

©Ireitcn,  strive 

ftrciteft,  ftrcitct  • 

ftrttt 

ftritte 

gcftrittcn 

Sragett,  carry 

trdgj^,  tragi 



ttUQ 

triige 

gcttugctt 

^rcffcn,  hit 

trifffl,  trifft 

triff 

traf 

trdfc 

gctroffcn 

'^teiben,  drive 



ttiah 

triebc 

gctricbctt 

^Vetm,  TREAD 

trittjl,  tritt 

tritt 

ttat 

tratc 

gctrctcit 

^ricfctt/  DRIP 





ttoff 

troffe 

gctroffeit 

Xtinttn,  DRINK 

traitf 

tranfe 
trunfc 

getruulen 

2;riigcn,  deceive 



trog 

troge 

getrugctt 

'^vm,  DO 

tu(e) 

tat 

tdtc 

gctott 

JBerbcr6en,2  spoil 

Uerbirbft,  berbirbt 

Dcrbirb 

bevbatb 

ijerbarbc 
berbiirbe 

berburbctt 

IBcrbrieftctt,  vex 

berbro^ 

ijerbroffe 

berbroffctt 

aScrgeffen,  forget 

bergiffeft,  bergtBt 

ijergiB 

bcrgaft 

i)crgaffe 

bergeffett 

JBcraeren,  lose 

bertor 

berlijre 

bcrtoren 

SBat^fcn,  grow 

toac^feft,  todc^ft 

tout^S 

toUc^fe 

gentat^fen 

SBagcn,^  vs^eigh 



toog 

tooge 

gchiogen 

aSafr^en,  wash 

toafc^eft,  toafc^t 



ttlUf(^ 

toufc^c 

gctuaft^ctt 

!D3caen,3  weave 



mob 

hjobe 

gemoben 

gBctt^cn,*  yield 

toiiii 

hJtc^e 

getoic^ett 

aScifctt,  show 

toeifeft,  toeift 

mteS 

h)iefe 

gcttiicfctt 

aBcttbCtt,  turn 

tocnbeft,  toenbct 

mattbte 
tticnbete 

toenbete 

gcttjanbt 
gctticnbct 

aSBcrficn,  sue 

toirbft,  toirbt 

toirb 

toarb 

tuarbe 
hjiirbe 

gettiorben 

SBerbcn,  become 

hJirft,  toirb 

toerbe 

toarb 
ujurbe 

toilrbc 

getQorbett 

aScrfcttr  throw 

toirfft,  toirft 

toirf 

toarf 

todrfe 
toilrfc 

gcttJorfctt 

SBtcgett,''  weigh 

too0 

toogc 

gctoogen 

SBtttbcn,  WIND 

toinbeft,  toinbct 



ttiattb 

ttjanbc 

getounben 

aSiffctt,  know 

h)ei|,  njiffen 

toiffe 

ttjuftte 

toii^te 

getoufet 

aSBottCtt,  WILL 

hjitt,  toiaft 
toitt,  tooUen 

tooQe 

tDoate 

tooUtc 

gcttJottt 

Sci^cn,  accuse 

8ie^ 

Sie^e 

gesic^ctt 

Bie^en,  draw 

800 

joge 

gesogcn 

Smingcn,  force 

swang 

jtocinge 

gcsttJungctt 

1  Sometimes  weak. 

4  Weak  in  the  sense  of  soften. 

2  Weak  when  transitive. 

»  2Bagen  and  miegen  are  really  identical 

8  Also  weak,  especially  in  the  sense  of      «  SESiegen,  rocA;,  is 

always  weak. 

move,  hover. 


206 


ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 


SUMMARY   OF   INFLECTIONS 


305.   TheDef 

Lnite  Article  and  "  bcr  "  Words.     Typical  Endings. 

(a)  ®er,  the: 

Definite  Article. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Masc. 
Nom.           b  cr 
Gen.            b  t§ 
Dat.           b  cm 
Ace.           b  Ctt 

Fbm. 

bte 
bcr 
bcr 
bic 

Neut. 

bc§ 
bcm 

M.  F.  N. 
bic 
bcr 
bctt 
bic 

(b)  ®iefer,  ^/^is ;  Demonstrative 

Adjective  or 

Pronoun. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

M.  F.  N. 

Nom.         bicf  cr 
Gen.         bicfeig 
Dat.         bicf  cm 
Ace.          bicf  Ctt 

bicfc 
bicf  cr 
bicfcr 
bicfc 

bicfcr  (bieg) 
bicf  t§ 
bicf  cm 
bicf  c^  (bieg) 

bicfc 
bicf  cr 
bicf  Ctt 
bicfc 

(c)  Like  btefer  are  declined  Jeber,  every,  jener,  that,  manijtr, 

many  (a),  folc^er,  such  (a),  and  tlie  interrogative  tDcIi^er,  which. 

These  are  called  "ber"  words,  as  they  have  endings  similar  to 

'  ber.     These   are   the   typical  strong  endings  as   distinguished 

from  the  typical  weak  endings. 


(d)  Typical  Strong  Endings  :     (e)  Typical  Weak  Endings : 


Singular.  Plural. 

Masc.  Fem.  Neut.  M.  F.  N. 
Nom.      cr        c         C)^  c 

Gen.       c§        cr        c§  cr 

Dat.       cm      cr       cm  ctt 

Ace.        Ctt         C  C^  C 


^ 

Ungul 

ar. 

Plural. 

Masc. 

Fem, 

,  Neut. 

M.  F.  N. 

C 

C 

C 

Ctt 

Ctt 

Ctt 

Ctt 

Ctt 

Ctt 

Ctt 

Ctt 

Ctt 

Ctt 

c 

c 

Ctt 

SUMMABY  OF  INFLECTIONS. 

306.   The  Indefinite  Article  and  **  citt"  words. 

(a)  Sin,  a:  Indefinite  Article. 


207 


Singular. 

Plural  wanting. 

Masc. 

Eem. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

citt 

cine 

citt 

Gen. 

eittc^ 

ciuer 

txut§ 

Dat. 

etttcm 

eincr 

eittettt 

Ace. 

cittett 

tint 

tin 

(b) 

3)?etn,  my  : 

Possessive  . 

Singular, 

Adjective. 

Plural 

Masc. 

Eem. 

Neut. 

M.  E.  N. 

Nom. 

ttteitt 

ttteinc 

ttieitt 

ttteitte 

Gen. 

metueig 

mctner 

ntcittC)^ 

tttcittcr 

Dat. 

meinem 

metttcr 

tttcincm 

mcittCtt 

Ace. 

meinett 

meine 

tttcin 

meittc 

(c)  Like  tneitl  are  declined  the  possessives  beitt,  your,  f  etn,  his, 
its,  il)r,  her,  their,  Utlfer,  our,  Qi)V,  your,  euer,  your,  and  the 
negative  lettt,  no,  not  a. 

{d)  @uer  and  unfer  may  contract  by  dropping  the  e  either 
of  the  stem  or  of  the  ending. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

Masc. 

Eem. 

Neut. 

M.  E.  N. 

Nom. 

euctr 

cure 

cttcr 

cure 

Gen. 

tnvt§  or  tntv^ 

eitrcr 

Ctttcg  or  CttCri^ 

curcr 

Dat. 

cttrcm  or  cttcrnt 

cuter 

curcttt  or  cucrnt 

eurctt  or  cttcrtt 

Ace. 

curctt  or  cttcrtt 

cure 

cttcr 

cure 

J^ote  that: 

1.  The  nominative  and  accusative  forms  are  always  alike, 
except  in  the  masculine  singular.- 

2.  The  genitive  singular  masculine  and  neuter  are  alike,  as 
are  also  the  dative  singular  masculine  and  neuter. 

3.  The  dative  plural  always  ends  in  n. 


208  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

4.  There  are  only  two  typical  weak  endings^  e  and  en*  The 
e  is  found  throughout  the  nominative  singular  and  in  the 
accusative  singular  feminine  and  neuter ;  the  en  is  found  in  all 
other  cases. 

5.  The  endings  for  the  indefinite  article  and  "ein"  words 
closely  resemble  those  for  the  "ber"  words,  except  in  the 
nominative  singular  masculine  and  neuter  and  the  accusative 
singular  neuter. 

307.  Adjective  Declension. 

(a)  Adjectives  have  three  declensions :  strong,  weak  and 
mixed, 

(b)  In  the  strong  declension  an  adjective  has  the  typical 
strong  endings,  except  that  in  the  genitive  singular  masculine 
and  neuter,  the  weak  ending  is  preferred.  The  strong  de- 
clension occurs  when  the  adjective  is  not  preceded  by  an  arti- 
cle or  a  "ber"  or  an  "  ein  "  word. 

(c)  Strong  Declension  of  Adjectives. 

Singular. 
Fem. 

gutcr 
fitttetr 
gttte 

(c?)  In  the  weak  declension  an  adjective  has  the  typical 
weak  endings.  The  weak  declension  occurs  when  the  adjective 
is  preceded  by  the  definite  article  or  a  "ber"  word. 

(e)  Weak  Declension  of  Adjectives. 


Masc. 

Nom. 

(jttter 

Gen. 

^nt  tn(t§) 

Dat. 

out  em 

Ace. 

gut  en 

Plural 

Neut. 

M.  F.  N. 

9UtC)g 

gute 

gut  tn{t^) 

gutcr 

gut  em 

guteu 

^ntt§ 

gute 

Singular. 

Plural 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

M.  F.  N. 

Nom. 

ber  gut  e 

bie  gut  e 

H^  gut  e 

hit  guteu 

Gen. 

hz§  gut  en 

ber  gut  en 

be^g  gut  en 

ber  gut  en 

Dat. 

bemguten 

ber  gut  en 

bem  gut  en 

htn  gut  en 

Ace. 

ben  gut  en 

bie  gute 

bn^gute 

bie  gut  en 

SUMMARY   OF  INFLECTIONS. 


209 


(/)  In  the  mixed  declension  the  adjective  takes  the  typical 
weak  endings  in  all  cases  except  the  nominative  singular  mas- 
culine and  the  nominative  and  accusative  singular  neuter,  which 
are  strong.  The  mixed  declension  occurs  when  the  adjective 
is  preceded  by  the  indefinite  article  or  an  "ein"  word. 


(.9) 

Mixed  Declension  of  Adjectives. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Masc. 

Fem.                    Neut. 

M.  E.  N. 

Nom. 

mcin  gut  cr 

meiuc  gutc       mciuguto^ 

Uteiue  gut  eu 

Gen. 

mcittcg  gut  eit 

uteiuer  gut  eu    mmtt§  gut  eu 

uteiuer  gut  eu 

Dat. 

ntctnem  gutctt 

mctuer  gut  eu    meiuem  gut  eu 

uteiueu  gut  eu 

Ace. 

meinen  gut  eu 

uteiue  gut  e       meiu  gut  e^^ 

uteiue  gut  eu 

Note.  —  While  these  are  the  three  adjective  declensions,  the  endings 
of  an  adjective  can  be  only  strong  or  weak.  They  are  weak  when  pre- 
ceded by  the  definite  article  or  a  "ber  "  word  (but  see  §  309,  5),  or  by  an 
inflected  form  of  the  indefinite  article  or  an  "etn"  word  (that  is,  a  form 
having  a  case-ending).     They  are  strong  when  not  so  preceded. 

Hote  that: 

1.  In  the  genitive  singular  masculine  and  neuter,  the  ending 
e§  of  the  noun  sufficiently  indicates  the  case,  and,  in  order  to 
avoid  too  many  e^  sounds,  the  adjective  takes  the  weak  ending 

en. 

2.  When  the  "  ein  "  word  has  no  ending,  the  adjective  must 
have  one  in  order  to  show  the  case.  If  the  "  ein  "  word  is 
inflected  (has  an  ending)  the  adjective  does  not  need  to  show 
the  case,  and  so  is  weak. 

3.  Though  there  are  three  adjective  declensions,  there  are 
only  two  kinds  of  endings  for  adjectives. 

308.  Noun  Declension. 

There  are  five  classes  of  nouns,  declined  as  follows: 


210 


ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 


(a)    Masculine  Nouns. 
Singular. 


let  class. 

N.  bcr  ^vttbcr 

G.  t>c§  S3rut>cr)§ 

D.  bcm  SBrubcr 

A.  t>tn  ^ntbcr 

N.  bic  SBriibet 
G.  bcr  Sriibct 
D.  ben  S3rtttJertt 
A.  bic  S5ruber 


is^  class. 

N.  bic  Xoc^tcr 

G.  bcr  Xor^tcr 

D.  ber  Xor^tcr 

A.  bic  Xod^itv 

N.  bic  Xiic^tcr 
G.  bcr  Xii(i^tcr 

A.  bic  XiJti^tcr 


Isi  class. 

N.  ba§931abd)Ctt 
G.  bc§  9Kab(i)Ctt§ 
D.  bcm  Wat>ii)tn 
A.  ba§  SJlabt^ctt 

N.  bic  SJlcibr^ctt 
G.  bcr  SJlabrfjCtt 
D.  bctt  SJlcibdjcn 
A.  bic  Wla'bditn 


2d  class. 

bcr  ^uttb 
bc^  ^unbc!^ 
bcm  ^ttttbc 
bctt  ^lutb 

bic  $unbc 
bcr  ^ttitbc 
bcii  ^uttbcu 
bic  ^iinbc 


3d  class. 

bcr  Wamx 
bc^  aJlattttc^ 
bcm  SJlannc 
bctt  aJlautt 

Plural. 
bic  ^aitttcr 
bcr  Wmntx 
ben  ^anncrn 
bic  SUlrinncr 


Uth  class.  5th  class. 

bcr  ^nabc  bcr  ^imi 

bc§  ^nabcn  bca  etaate^ 

bcm  ^nabcn  bcm  ^iaait 

ben  ^nabcn  ben  ^i^ai 


(6)  Feminine  Nouns. 

Singular. 

2d  class. 

bic  S3anf 
bcr  S3an! 
bcr  ^an! 
bic  ^anf 


Plural. 


bic  Scinfc 
bcr  ^an!c 

bic  "^mit 

2d  class. 

bag  ^ferb 
be§  ^ferbeg 
bcm  ^ferb 
U^  ^fcrb 

bic  ^ferbc 
bcr  ^fcrbc 
'istw  ^ferben 
bic  ^ferbc 


bic  ^naben 
bcr  ^naben 
tstn  ^xxahtM 
bic  ^nabcn 


uth  class. 

bic  %xaM 
bcr  fjran 
bcr  ^ran 
bic  gran 

bic  fjranctt 
bcr  ?5^anen 
^tn  grancn 
bic  grancn 


Neuter  Nouns. 
Singular. 

3d  class. 

beg  S5tt(^cg 
bcm  S3n^c 
t^a^  ^nd) 

Plural. 
bic  SBiir^cr 
bcr  S3it(^cr 
\st\x  Sitti^ern 
bic  ^Vi^tx 


bic  ^iaaitn 
bcr  8taaten 
\>t\x  ^iaaitxx 
bic  8taatcn 


5th  class. 

tsa^  5lngc 
beg  5Inge§ 
bcm  5(ngc 
bai^  5lngc 

bic  5(n0cn 
bcr  5(n(jcn 
tstn  5(ngcn 
bic  5(ngcn 


SUMMABY  OF  INFLECTIONS.  211 

Note.  —  The  first  three  classes  are  called  the  Strong  Declension  of 
Nouns;  the  fourth,  Weak;  the  fifth,  Mixed. 

But  feminines  like  bic  graii  are  sometimes  grouped  with  the  fifth  class 
because  they  seem  to  resemble  it  more  closely,  in  that  they  form  the. 
plural  the  same  way,  while  they  are  declined  in  the  singular  like  other 
feminines,  just  as  fifth  class  neuters  are  declined  in  the  singular  like 
other  neuters,  and  fifth  class  masculines  are  declined  in  the  singular  like 
other  masculines  (except  the  weak  ones). 

(c?)  A  few  nouns  differ  slightly  from  Class  1,  seeming  to 
drop  the  last  letter  in  the  nominative. 

J)er  9^ame(n),  name.  J)a^  gerj,  heart,      « 

Sing.                        Plu.                          Sing.  Plu. 

Nom.    bcr  9^amc(tt)  bic  ^amcn  \>a^  ^erj  bic  ^cr^cn 

Gen.     be^  $^amctt)3  bcr  ^^amctt  bc§  ^cr^cn^  bcr  ^crjctt 

Dat.     bcm  9Jamctt  bctt  ^amcit  bcm  ^cr^cn  ben  ^cr^cn 

Ace.     bctt  ytavxtn  bic  9Jamctt  ^a^  ^cr^  bic  ^cr^cn 

{e)  Other  nouns  declined  like  ber  SSl(XVXt  are : 

bcr  JJricbc(tt),  peace  bcr  $attfc(tt),  heap 

bcr  fjttttfc(tt)^  spark  bcr  Same  (it),  seed 

bcr  (55cbattfc(n),  thought  bcr  St3^abc(n),  injury 

bcr  ^lauBc(tt),  faith  ,  bcr  933itte(n),  will 

Note  that  : 

1.  Nomis  of  the  first  and  third  classes  and  feminines  of  the 
second  class  usually  add  umlaut  in  the  plural  when  possible. 

2.  l^ouns  of  the  fourth  and  fifth  classes  add  (e)n  to  form 
the  plural  and  never  add  umlaut. 

3.  Except  bie  SJJutter  and  bte  S^O(i)ter  all  feminines  form  the 
plural  (1)  by  adding  (e)n,  or  (2)  by  adding  e  and  taking  umlaut. 

4.  Only  monosyllabic  feminines  belong  to  the  second  class. 
So  all  feminines  of  more  than  one  syllable,  except  bie  3J?utter 
and  bie  2;0{f)ter,  are  of  the  fourth  class  and  form  the  plural 
without  umlaut  by  adding  (e)n. 

5.  The  dative  plural  always  ends  in  n* 


212     '  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

309.  Declension  of  nouns  with  adjectives  and  "ber"  and  "ettt" 
words. 

(a)  Strong  adjective  —  without  article;  declined  with  typical 
strong  endings,     (See  §  307,  h.) 

Singular. 

Norn.       gutcr  Wann  gutc  ^xan  gitte^  ^inb 

Gen.        gutctt  Mannt^        gutet  f^rau  gutcn  ^iiibc^ 

Dat.         gutem  SStamxt         guter  fjrau  gutcm  ^inbc 

Ace.        guten  ajfJann  gutc  %xaxi  gutC)^  ^inb 

Plural. 
Norn.         gutc  WhxntXf  l^raueit,  ^inbcr 
Gen.  guter  9Jlauuer,  fjrnucu,  ^iubcr 

Dat.  guteu  Wmntxn,  fjraucu,  ^iubern 

Ace.  gutc  aWauncr,  fjraucu,  ^iubcr 

(6)  When  mattd^er,  iDcIc^er,  foI(J)er  are  used  without  the  end- 
ing (mant^,  tt)e(c^,  fo(cf)),  the  adjective  following  has  the  strong 
ending.     (See  §  307,  g,  Note.) 

Singular. 
Nom.       ntauri^  gutcr  ^tinn 
Gen.        tttaur^  gutcu(cig)  SKauttCi^ 
Dat.         maud^  gutcm  ^Jlauuc 
Ace.         mauc^  gutcu  Wann 

(c)  Weak  adjective  —  after  definite  article  or  "  ber "  word ; 
declined  with  typical  weak  endings. 

Singular. 
Nom.     bcr  gutc  "^anxt  bic  gutc  JJrau  \sa^  gutc  ^m\s 

Gen.  bci§  guten  Wannt^  bcr  gutcu  fjrau  be^  gutcu  ^iubC)^ 
Dat.  bcm  gutcu  SD^lauuc  bcr  gutcu  JJrau  bcm  guteu  ^tubc 
Ace.      bcu  gutcu  "^ann        bic  gutc  g^ou  \>a^  gutc  ^tub 

Plural. 
Nom.    bic  gutcu  9)'lauucr,  fjroueu,  ^iuber 
Gen.     bcr  gutcu  9Jiauuer,  groucu,  ^iubcr 
Dat.     bcu  gutcu  93'iouuertt,  g'^oucu,  ^iubern 
Ace.     bic  guteu  WmntXf  fjraucu,  ^iuber 


SUMMARY  OF  INFLECTIONS,  213 

(d)  Mixed  adjective  —  after  indefinite  article  or  "  ettt"  word; 
weak  when  the  article  is  inflected,  strong  when  the  article  is 
not  inflected. 

Singular. 

Norn,  citt  0Utctr  SWatttt  etnc  gute  ^Jrau  etn  gutejg  ^inb 

Gen.  txnt^  gutcn  SJlanttci^  citter  gutcn  %x(va  eitie§  gutcn  ^inbeig 

Dat.  cincm  gutcn  aWanne  ciuer  gutcn  %xa\i  cincm  gutcn  ^inbe 

Ace.  cinen  gutcn  SSlmn  cine  gutc  fjrau  ein  gntc^^  ^inb 

Plural. 

Nom.  fcine  gutcn  SD'lanner,  granen,  ^tnbcr 

Gen.  fcincr  gutcn  Scanner,  fjrancn,  ^tubcr 

Dat.  fcincu  gutcn  SWonncrn,  S^^aucn,  ^inbern 

Ace.  fcine  gutcn  9Hanner,  ^raucn,  ^inbcr 

Note  that: 

If  the  article  or  "ber"  word  or  "ein"  word  is  omitted,  or 
does  not  show  the  case  {i.e,  is  not  inflected),  the  case  must  be 
shown  by  the  adjective,  except  in  the  genitive  singular  mas- 
culine and  neuter,  where  the  noun -ending  shows  the  case  and 
the  adjective  may  be  weak. 

310.  Personal  Pronouns. 

ic^,  J;  bu,  thou ;  @ie,  you ;  er,  he ;  fie,  she;  e6,  it, 
(a)    First  Person:  Sing.  Second  Person:  Sing. 

Nom.  x^,  I  '^Uf  thou^  you  (Bit,  you 

Gen.  mcittcr  (mcin),  of  me  bctncr  (bein),  of  thee  ^I^rcr,  of  you 

Dat.  ntir,  to  or  for  me  bir,  to  or  for  thee  ^i^ntttf  to  or  for  you 

Ace.  mi^f  me  bici^,  thee,  you  @ic,  you 

(6)     First  Person:  Plur.  Second  Person:  Plur. 

Nom.  mir,  we  xf)Xf  you  @ic,  you 

Gen.  unfcr,  of  us  eucr,  of  you  Sftrer,  of  you 

Dat.  nn^f  to  or  for  us  euri^,  to  or  for  you  3^ttcn,  to  or  for  you 

Ace.  nn^,  us  cur3ft,  you  (Bit,  you 


214 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 


(o)  Third  Person  Singular. 

Masc.  Fern.  Neut, 

Nom.    cr,  he,  it  fic,  she,  it  t§,  it 

Gen.     f  einetr  (feirt),  of  him,  of  it  i^ter,  of  her,  of  it      f  cincr  (fein),  of  it 
Dat.      t^m,  to  ov  for  him  or  it  t^r^  to  or  for  her  or  it  ii)m,  to  or  for  it 
Ace.      i^tt,  him,  it  fic,  her,  it  c^,  it 

Third  Person  Plural:  M.  F.  N. 
Nom."       fie,  they 
Gen.         t^rcr,  of  them 
Dat.         i^nen,  to  or  for  them 
Ace.  fic,  them 

Note  that: 

1.  The  possessive  pronoun  is  formed  from  the  genitive  case 
of  the  personal  pronoun. 

2.  The  polite  form,  ©te,  is  the  third  person  plural  written 
with  a  capital,  and  is  the  same  for  both  singular  and  plural. 

3.  The  forms  fettter,  tf)r,  i^rer,  tt)m,  un^,  tvai)  and  fie  have 
more  than  one  meaning.  Give  all  the  English  equivalents  of 
each. 

311.  Relative  and  Interrogative  Pronouns. 

(a)   The  relative  bcr,  who^  which,  that. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

M.  F.  N. 

Nom.       bcr 

bic 

baS 

hh 

Gen.        bcffett 

.  berctt 

beffctt 

bcren 

Dat.        bcm 

bcr 

htm 

beitett 

Ace.        belt 

bic 

has 

hit 

(p)    The  relative  totld}tx^  who, 

which,  that 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

M.  F.  N. 

Nom.       ttJclrffcr 

mi6)t 

mid)t2 

totl^t 

Gen.       bcffeit 

berctt 

beffcn 

bcrctt 

Dat.        totid^tm 

tt)eld)er 

tticld^em 

tiotld^tn 

Ace.        tticl^Ctt 

mld)t 

melc^eS 

ttlC(rf|C 

SUMMARY  OF  INFLECTIONS, 


215 


(c)  The  interrogative  and  relative  interrogative  Uicr,  who, 

toa^f  what. 

Singular  {plural  wanting). 

Masc.  and  Eem.  Neut. 

Norn.  toer  ttia§ 

Gen.  ttjcffeu  tticffctt 

Dat.  ttjcm  

Ace.  tticn  tva§ 

(d)  The  interrogative  lnel(l)er  is  declined  like  "ber"  words. 

J^ote  that: 

1.  The  only  differences  between  the  forms  of  the  relative, 
ber,  and  the  article,  ber,  are  in  the  genitive  throughout  and  the 
dative  plural. 

2.  The  relative  iDeI(f)er  is  wanting  in  the  genitive  and  uses 
the  genitive  of  the  relative,  ber. 

3.  The  dative  of  the  neuter  interrogative,  lt)a^,  is  wanting. 
It  is  usually  expressed  by  It)o(r)  and  a  preposition:  iDOjU,  IDO- 
nad),  tDorauf,  etc. 

4.  The  only  differences  in  form  between  the  relative,  rt)elc^er, 
and  the  interrogative  lr)el(f|er,  are  in  the  genitive. 

312.  Demonstrative  Pronouns. 

(a)  The  demonstratives  are  ber,  that;  biefer,  this;  {etter, 
that;  foI(f)er,  such  (a);  \^tx\tx(x(^t,  that,  the  one ;  berfelbe,  the  same. 

(h)  The  demonstrative  ber,  that^  is  declined  like  the  relative 
ber;  biefer,  {ener,  and  folc^er  are  "ber"  words  (§  305,  c).  In 
berjentge  and  berfelbe,  the  first  part  is  declined  like  the  definite 
article,  the  last  part,  weak. 


Singular. 

Plural, 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

M.  F.  N. 

Nom. 

bcrjetttge 

btcjctttgc 

baj^jenigc 

bie  jenig  en 

Gen. 

be^icutcjctt 

bcrjcnigett 

be^jcttigen 

berjentgeit 

Dat. 

bcmicnigcu 

berjcnigctt 

bcmicmgen 

bettjctttgcn 

Ace. 

bcttjciiicjett 

biejenige 

baj^jeitigc 

biejcttigcn 

216 


ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 


Note  that  : 

1.  The  demonstrative,  ber^  differs  in  form  from  the  article, 
bet,  only  in  the  genitive  throughout  and  in  the  dative  plural. 
It  is  declined  just  like  the  relative  ber,  from  which  it  can  be 
distinguished  by  the  position  of  the  verb  following.  The  de- 
monstrative does  not  change  the  order  of  the  sentence ;  after 
the  relative  the  verb  is  put  at  the  end. 

2.  In  the  declension  of  berjentge  and  berfelbe,  the  second 
part  is  inflected  just  as  if  it  were  a  separate  weak  adjective 
following  the  article,  ber. 

313.  Indefinites  and  Reflexives. 

(a)  Most  indefinites  and  the  reflexive  fid)  for  the  third  per- 
son (er,  fie,  e^ ;  fie)  are  indeclinable.  The  declinable  ones  are 
inflected  thus: 

(b)  The  indefinites  {etnanb,  some  one ;  niemanb,  no  one ;  \t^ 
bermann,  every  one  ;  matt,  one,  they. 

Singular  (plural  wanting). 


Norn.      jcmanb 

ntemaub                  jeberntann       man 

Gen.        \cmant>{t)§ 

tttl^tttlTttS^I^^^                               tl^h(^1*tttlY1ttt^ 

niKiiiuiw\}^j9                  jtucvmiiiiuj? 

Dat.        jcmanb(cm  or  ctt) 

nicmattb(em  or  eit)     jcbcrmantt        etncm 

Ace.        ictttattb(cn) 

tticmattb(cn)             jebctmatttt       cincji 

The  reflexives  : 

Subject 

R^exive. 

NOM. 

DAT.                  ACC. 

m 

mir            mx^ 

bn 

bit            bi(i^ 

wit 

nn§           m» 

iljr 

tn^           euiit 

(e)  The    indefinite    mand)er,  many    (a),  is    a   "ber"  word 

(§305,  c). 

Note  that: 

1.   The  reflexive  pronouns  (a)  for  the  first  and  second  per- 

sons  singular  have  different  forms  for  the  dative  and  accusa- 


SUMMARY  OF  INFLECTIONS. 


217 


tive ;  (b)  for  the  first  and  second  persons  plural  they  have  one 
form  for  both  dative  and  accusative ;  (c)  for  the  third  person 
both  singular  and  plural  of  all  genders,  there  is  only  the  one 
form,  fid^,  for  the  dative  and  accusative. 

2.    3^^^^*^  ^^^  ntemanb  are  just  alike  in  form  and  ending ; 
iebermann  has  two  n's  and  man  only  one. 


314. 

(a)  Pres.  Indie. 
I  have,  etc. 
id)  4aBe 
t>n  ^aft 
tx  fiat 
tait  ^aB  en 
iljr  \)abt 
8te  f^ahtn 
fie  f^abtn 

(6)  Past  Indie. 

I  had,  etc. 
id)  f)aitt 
t>\t  iaitt^t 
cr  \)atit 
tt)ir  flatten 
i^r  f)aiitt 
(Sic  fatten 
ftc  flatten 

(c)  Future  Indicative. 
I  shall  have,  etc. 
id)  ttierbe  f)af>tn 
btt  mirft  ^aben 
er  ttiitb  ^abcn 


Conjugation 

Pres.  /Su6;. 
I  have,  etc. 
id)  l^abe 
bu  l^abeft 
er  l^abe 
tntr  l^aben 
i^r  f)af)  et 
<Sie  l^aben 
fte  i)ah  en 

I  had,  etc. 
id)  f)dit  e 
hn  Wt  eft 
er  f)'dtt  c 
mir  ^att  en 
i^r  f)dtt  et 
8tc  ^att  en 
fie  f)dtt  en 


of  the  verb  ^aben,  to 

Perf.  Indie. 
I  have  had,  etc. 
id)  f)abt  ge^abt 
bn  ^aft  qtf)aU 
er  l^at  ge^abt 
mir  l^aben  qtf)aU 
i\)v  f)ahzt  ^tf)aU 
@ie  ^aben  gelftabt 
fte  f)ah  en  ^tijtx^bt 

Plup.  Indie. 
I  had  had 
id)  f)att  e  Qt^abt 
t^n  \)att  eft  ge^abt 
er  ffait  e  gel^obt 
wir  l^att  en  ge^abt 
i^r  ^attet  ^tf)aht 
<Bit  f)att  en  ge^abt 
fie  f)ati  en  gel^abt 


Perf.  SuhJ. 
I  have  had,  etc.i 
id)  f)aift  gel)abt 
bn  ^ab  eft  ge^abt 
er  i)ah  e  ge^abt 
mir  f)ah  en  ge^abt 
i^r  f)ah  et  ge!)abt 
8ie  i)ah  en  ge!^abt 
fie  Iftab  en  ge^abt 

PZitp.  ^w?y. 

I  had  had 
id)  f)dtt  e  ge^abt 
hn  f)dtt  eft  ge^abt 
er  f|dtt  e  gelftobt 
tt)ir  ptten  gel)abt 
i^r  Ijatt  et  ge^abt 
<Sie  f)dit  en  gel^abt 
fie  ^iitt  en  gefiabt 


Future  Suhjunetive. 
I  should  have,  etc. 
id)  nierbe  ^aben 
bumerbeft  f)attn 
er  tuerb  e  ^aben 


Present  Conditional, 
I  should  have  had 
t(^  mitrb  e  l^aben 
bn  mitrb  eft  l^aben 
er  mitrb  e  Ijaben 


1  The  translation  of  the  subjunctive  depends  wholly  upon  the  context  and  con- 
struction. The  student  must  not  think  the  translation  here  given  is  the  only  one 
for  this  mode.  As  the  mode  is  used  chiefly  in  subordinate  clauses,  it  will  be  good 
practice  for  the  student  to  conjugate  the  subjunctive  with  the  compound  tenses 
inverted :  ba^  ic^  gc^abt  f^abi,  ha%  bu  ge^abt  l^abcft,  etc. 


218 


ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 


mx  ttierb  en  \\(ii>tn 
tl^r  iDcrb  et  ^abctt 
Sic  ttJcrb  en  ^ahtn 
fie  merb  en  iftoben 

(d)  Fut  Per/.  Indie. 
I  shall  have  had,  etc. 

i^  merb  e  nel^abt  ^aben 
bn  mir  ft       —     — 
et:  mirb         —      — 

ttjir  metb  en  —  — 

il)r  merb  et  —  — 

©ie  merb  en  —  — 

fie  merb  en   —  — 


mir  nierb  en  ^ahcn 
t^v  njerb  et  ^aben 
@ie  merb  en  l^aben 
fie  tuerb  en  ^aben 

Fw«.  Per/.  Subj, 
I  should  have  had,  etc. 

xdii  merb  e  cje^abt  ^abcn 
^n  ttJcrb  eft   — -      — 
er  njerb  e      —      — 

mir  ttjerb  en  —  — 

i^r  merb  ct   —  — 

©ie  mcrb  en  —  — 

fie  merb  en   —  — 


mir  njilrb  en  i^aBen 
il)r  milrb  et  ^aben 
©ie  miirb  en  i^ahtn 
fie  miirb  en  l^ahtn 

Per/.  Conditional. 
I  should  have  had,  etc. 

i^  mitrb  e  ge^abt  Ijaben 
bnimtrbeft  —      — 
er  iniirb  e      —      — 

toxv  witrb  en  —  — 

i()r  miivb  et  —  — 

©ie  milrb  en  —  — 

fie  milrb  en   —  — 


(e)  Imperative. 

Sing.      ||ab  e  (bn),  have  ! 

i  ]^ab  en  ©te,  have ! 


Partieiples. 
Present  :  l)ab  enb,  having 
Perfect  :  ge^abt,  had 


Infinitives, 

(jn)  i^ahtn,  to  have 
ge^abt  (sn)  !ftaben,  to  have  had 
Note  that  : 

1.  The  plural  of  the  present  subjunctive  is  just  like  the  in- 
dicative, except  that  in  the  form  i^r  Ijahtt^  the  t  of  the  ending 
is  preceded  by  e.  This  is  true  for  all  verbs  except  feitt  and 
tun* 

2.  The  past  subjunctive  always  differs  from  the  past  indic- 
ative only  in  taking  umlaut  when  possible. 

3.  All  subjunctives  are  regular  (except  two  forms  in  the 
present  of  feitt).  So  when  you  have  learned  the  subjunctive 
of  l)abett,  you  have  learned  them  all. 

4.  The  present  subjunctive  is  formed  by  dropping  the  tt  of 
the  infinitive ;  the  past  by  adding  umlaut  to  the  indicative; 


SUMMARY  OF  INFLECTIONS. 


219 


the  other  tenses  by  using  the  subjunctive  of  the  auxiliaries  of 
tense. 

5.    The  past  and  pluperfect  subjunctive  are  often  used  for 
the  present  and  perfect  conditional  respectively. 

315.    Conjugation  of  the  verb  fcttt,  to  be,  and  (as  tense  auxiliary 
for  intransitives),  to  have, 
(See  Footnote,  p.  217.) 


(a)  Pres,  Indie.    Pres.  Subj.         Per/.  Ind. 

Perf.  Subj. 

I  am,  etc. 

I  am,  etc. 

I  have  been,  etc. 

I  have  been,  etc. 

id)  Un 

i^fei 

id)  hin  gettjefett 

id)  fei  gettiefett 

\>n  Bift 

btt  fei  eft 

btt  bift  (jemefett 

btt  fei  eft  gettiefett 

erift 

erfei 

er  ift  gewefett 

er  fei  gettiefett 

toiv  ftttb 

ttiirfeiett 

ttiir  ftttb  gemefett 

ttiirfeiett  gettiefett 

i^r  fctb 

i^r  fei  et 

i^r  feib  gettiefett 

i^r  fei  et  gettiefett 

©tc  ftttb 

©ie  fei  ett 

©ie  fittb  getuefett 

©ie  fei  ett  gettiefett 

fie  fittb 

fie  fei  ett 

fie  fittb  gettiefett 

fie  fei  ett  gettiefett 

(b)  Past  Indie. 

Past  Subj. 

Plup.  Ind. 

Plup.  Subj. 

I  was,  etc. 

I  were,  etc 

!.           I  had  been,  etc. 

I  had  been,  etc. 

id}  tt>av 

id)  wax  e 

id)  wax  gewefett 

iff)  ttiar  e  gettiefett 

bu  wax  ft 

btt  ttiar  eft 

btt  ttJar  ft  gettJefett 

btt  ttiar  eft  gettiefett 

er  toax 

er  wax  e 

er  war  gewefett 

er  ttiar  e  gettiefett 

tt)tr  wax  ett 

ttjir  wax  ett 

ttiir  wax  ett  gettiefett 

ttiirttitirett  gettiefett 

i^r  wax  et 

i^r  ttJcir  et 

i^rwaret  gettiefett 

i^r  ttiar  et  gettiefett 

8ic  toax  ctt 

8ie  ttJrir  ett 

©ie  war  ett  gewefett 

©ie  ttiar  ett  gettiefen 

fie  war  en 

fie  ttjiir  ett 

fie  ttiar  ett  gettiefett 

fie  ttitir  ett  gettiefett 

(c)  Future  Indieative. 

Future  Subjunctive. 

Present  Conditional. 

I  shall  be,  etc. 

I  should  be,  etc. 

I  should  be,  etc. 

itf|  ttierb  e  feitt 

i^  ttierb  e  feitt 

id)  ttiiirb  e  feitt 

\>n  wix  ft  feitt 

btt  ttierb  eft  feitt 

btt  ttiiirb  eft  feitt 

er  luirb  feitt 

er  ttierb  e  feitt 

er  ttiiirb  e  feitt 

wix  wtxh  Ctt  feitt 

ttiir  ttierb  ett  feitt 

ttiir  ttiiirb  ett  feitt 

i^r  merb  et  feitt 

i\)x  ttierb  et  feitt 

i^r  ttiiirb  et  feitt 

©ie  ttJerb  ett  feitt 

©ie  ttierb  ett  feitt 

©ie  ttiiirb  ett  f  ein 

fie  ttierb  ett  feitt 

fie  ttierb  ett  feitt 

fie  ttiiirb  ett  feitt 

220 


ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 


(d)  Fut  Per/.  Indie, 
I  shall  have  been,  etc. 
idi  tticrb  c  gettiefcn  feln 
btttuirft       —       — 
er  tDxv\>        —       -— 

toiv  tticrb  ctt  —  — 
tl)r  mcrb  ct  —  — - 
(Sic  werb  en  —  — 
fie  tuerb  en    —       — 

(e)  Imperative. 

Sing,      fei    (btt),  be  I 


Fut.  Perf.  Subj.  Perf.  Conditional. 

I  should  have  been,  etc.  I  should  have  been,  etc. 
x^  werb  e  getuefeu  feiit    i^  ^tiitrb  e  gehJefen  fcitt 


hn  ttierb  eft  — 
er  taerb  e  — 
toxv  merb  ett  — 
ifir  merb  et  — 
8ie  merbeit  — 
fie  ttierb  ett  — 


Plur. 


(  fcib  (i^r)  be  I 
'  1  fei  ett  ®ic,  be ! 

(jtt)  feitt,  to  be 


—  bit  itJitrb  eft    — 

—  er  ttJitrb  e      — 

—  tt)ir  njiirb  ett  — - 

—  i^r  ttittrb  et    — 

—  8ie  ttiiirb  ett  — 

—  fie  ttiiirb  ett    — 
Participles. 

Present  :  fei  ettb,  being 
Perfect:  gettiefett,  been 


Infinitives. 

gettiefett  (p)  feitt,  to  have  been 


316.  Conjugation  of  the  verb  tticrbeit,  to  become  (in  the  sense 
of  come  to  be),  and  as  auxiliary  for  the  future  tenses  shall  and 
will;    also  sign  of  the  passive  when  used  with  the  perfect 

participle.     See  §  318. 

(See  Footnote,  p.  217.) 

(a)  Pres.  Indie.      Pres.  Subj.  Perf.  Indie. 

I  become,  etc.  or  I  become,  etc.  or  I  have  become, 

I  shall,  etc.       I  shall  (will)  etc.  etc. 

xiS)  uierb  e  i(t|  merb  e         x^  Bttt  gettiorbett 

bu  mir  ft  bu  werb  eft       't^M  bift  gettiorbett 

et  tuirb  er  werb  e         er  ift  gettJorbett 

ttitr  toerb  ett 
i^r  tuerb  et 
@ie  werb  ett 
fie  toerb  ett 
(6)  Past  Indie. 


Perf.  Subj. 
I  have  become, 
etc. 
xdi  fei  gertjorbett 
t>n  fei  eft  gettJorbett 
erfei  gettiorbett 
mir  fittb  geitiorbcit  ttiir  fei  ett  gcttJorbeit 
i^r  feib  gemorbeit    iJ|r  fei  et  gettiorbett 
®ic  fittb  gettiorbett  Sie  fei  ett  gettiorbett 
fie  fittb  gettiorbett     fie  fei  ett  gettiorbett 
Plup.  Indie.  Plup.  Subj. 

I  became,  etc.     I  became,  etc.*  I  had  become,  etc.    I  had  become,  etc. 
id)  ttiurb  t,  tuarb      xti^  ttitlrbe      t^  ttiar  gemorbett     i(i|  nidr  e  gettiorbett 
hn  ttiurb  eft,  ttiar  ft  t^n  ttiilrb  eft  hn  tuar  ft  gettiorbett  btt  ititir  eft  gettiorbett 
er  ttiurb  t,  ttiarb      er  toitrb  e     er  ttiar  gettiorbeu      er  toar  e  gettiorbeu 

1  This  form,  tcttrbc,  is  used  regularly  for  the  auxiliary  of  the  conditional  mode, 
should t  would.    See  any  complete  verb  conjugation. 


bu  toerb  eft 
er  ttierb  e 
ttiir  ttierb  eu 
il|r  ttierb  et 
(5ie  ttierb  eu 
fie  ttierbcu 
Past  Subj. 


SUMMARY  OF  INFLECTIONS. 


221 


ttitt  lutttb  ctt  ttjitttiurbctt  »mr  tnar  en  gcttjorbcn  tnir  marcit  gettiorbeti 

t^r  njurb  ct  il^r  miirb  et  i^r  tuar  t  gcttjorben  i^r  ttidt  ct  gcworbctt 

(Sic  ttmrbcn  @ie  tuitrbcn  @ic  tuar  en  gcttiorbcn  @tc  mar  en  octtiorbctt 

fie  ttiurbctt  fie  njiirb  en  fie  tuar  en  (jenjorben  fte  Mx  en  getnorben 


(c)  Future  Indicative, 
I  shall  become,  etc. 

ir^  merb  e  luetben 
on  mv  ft  ttJerben 
ernjitb  merbett 
ttiir  merb  eu  ttjcrbett 
il)r  ttierb  et  merben 
(Bit  ttJerb  en  merbcn 
fie  nierb  eit  ttjerbcn 

(d)  Fut.  Perf.  Indie. 

I  shall  have  become,  etc. 
t(i^  merb  e  gettjorben  fein 
t>vi  njirft  gcttjorben  fein 
zx  tuirb  gettiorben  fein 
ttiir  ttierb  eit  getnorbett  fein 
i^r  tt»crbct  gemorben  fein 
Sie  wtxh  en  getuorben  fein 
fie  ttierb  en  gertjorben  feiit 


Future  Subjunctive. 
I  shall  become,  etc. 
id}  tperb  e  ttjerbett 
btt  merb  eft  njerben 
er  ttjerb  e  ttjerben 
mir  merb  eit  merbett 
if^x  itierb  et  itjerben 
<Bit  ttietb  ett  tuerbett 
fie  merb  en  njerben 


Present  Conditional. 

I  should  become,  etc. 
id)  miirb  e  merbeit 
bit  ttiitrb  eft  tuerbcn 
cr  miirb  e  merbeit 
mir  miirb  en  merbeu 
i^r  miirb  et  merben 
Sie  miirb  en  merben 
fie  miirb  en  merben 

Fut.  Perf.  Suhj.     . 
I  should  have  become,  etc 
trff  merb  e  gemorben  fein 
hn  merb  eft  gemorben  fein 
er  merb  e  gemorben  fein 
mir  merb  en  gemorben  fein 
ii^x  merb  et  gcmurben  fein 
8ie  merben  gemorben  fein 
fie  merb  en  gemorben  fein 


Perfect  Conditional. 
I  should  have  become,  etc. 
id)  miirb  e  gemorben  fein 
btt  miirb  eft  gemorben  fein 
cr  miirb  c  gemorben  fein 
mir  miirb  en  gemorben  fein 
i^r  miirb  et  gemorben  fein 
(Bit  miirb  en  gemorben  fein 
fie  miirb  en  gemorben  fein 

(e)  Imperative.  Participles. 

♦  Sing.      merb  e  {^it)^  become  !  Perfect  :  gemorben  (morbcn),  become 

p  (  merb  et  (i^r),  become  I         Present  :  merb  enb,  becoming 

LUR.  j  ^ 


merb  en  Bit,  become  ! 


(jtt)  merben,  to  become 


Infinitives. 
gemorben  (jn)  fein,  to  have  become 


222 


ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 


Note  that: 

1.  The  verb,  iDcrben,  like  all  intransitives  denoting  change 
of  condition  or  position,  is  conjugated  with  fein  as  auxiliary. 

2.  SBerben  has  three  distinct  meanings :  (1)  will,  as  auxiliary 
for  the  future  tense ;  {^  to  become;  and  (3)  to  he,  as  auxiliary 
for  the  passive  voice. 

3.  To  mean  will,  it  can  be  used  only  in  the  present,  followed 
by  an  infinitive,  or  in  the  past  subjunctive,  tt)Urbe,  as  condi- 
tional. The  meaning  become  and  the  passive  auxiliary  may  be 
used  for  all  forms. 

4.  As  sign  of  the  future  tDcrbett  is  followed  always  by  the 
infinitive  ;  as  sign  of  the  passive,  always  by  the  past  parti- 
ciple ;  meaning  to  become,  it  is  not  followed  by  any  verb  form. 

317.        Conjugation  of  lobett^  to  praise,  a  weak  verb. 
Active  Voice. 
(See  Footnote,  p.  217.) 


(a)  Pres.  Ind. 

Pres.  Subj. 

I  praise,  etc. 

I  praise,  etc. 

x(ii  lobe 

i^  lobe 

btt  lobft 

bn  lobeft 

er  lobt 

er  lobe 

mir  loBen 

mir  loben 

i^r  lobct 

i^r  lobet 

Oie  lobcn 

@ie  loben 

fie  lobcn 

fte  lobcn 

(&)  Past  Ind. 

Past  Subj. 

I  praised,  etc. 

I  praised,  etc. 

i^  lobte 

idi  lobte 

btt  lobteft 

t>n  lobteft 

cr  lobte 

er  lobte 

ttiir  lobteit 

mir  lobten 

i^r  Uhitt 

i^r  lobtct 

(5ie  lobten 

Sic  lohttn 

fie  lobten 

fie  lobten 

Perf.  Ind.^ 
I  have  praised,  etc. 
x6)  ^aht  oelobt 
\svi  ^aft  gelobt 
er  ^ai  gelobt 
ttiir  l^abcn  gelobt 
i^r  ^a\si  gelobt 
8ie  l^abcn  gelobt 
fie  l^abcn  gelobt 

Plup.  Indie. 
I  had  praised,  etc. 
idj  Iiattc  gelobt 
bu  ^attt^t  gelobt 
er  f^aitt  gelobt 
toir  l^atten  gelobt 
i^r  Ijattct  gelobt 
8ie  \jatttn  gelobt 
fie  fatten  gelobt 


Perf.  Subj. 
I  have  praised,  etc. 
i^  f^abt  gelobt 
hn  l^abeft  gelobt 
er  liabe  gelobt 

loir  fiaUn  gelobt 
xi)v  f^abtt  gelobt 
@ie  l^aben  gelobt 
fte  fjobttx  gelobt 

Plup.  Subj. 
I  had  praised,  etc. 
id)  ^dttc  gelobt 
t>n  ptteft  gelobt 
er  I)attc  gelobt 
mir  fatten  gelobt 
i^r  i^dittt  gelobt 
®ie  f^mtttx  gelobt 
fie  flatten  gelobt 


iFor  the  conjugation  of  an  intransitive  verb  with  fein  as  auxiliary,  see  hjcrbcn, 
§316. 


SUMMARY  OF  INFLECTIONS. 


223 


(c)  Future  Indicative. 
I  shall  praise,  etc. 

i^  ttjcrbc  lofien 
btt  ttJtrft  iohtn 
tx  toxth  ioi)tn 
ttiir  tuerbctt  lobctt 
i^r  tuerbct  lohtn 
8ie  tticrbcn  (obcn 
ftc  tticrbctt  lobctt 

(d)  JPu^.  Per/.  Indie. 
I  shall  have  praised, 

etc. 

iti)  ttJcrbc  gclobt  l^abcn 

bu  tiitrft       —  — 

er  mirb        — ^  — 

tuir  ttJcrben  —  — 

i^r  merbct  —  — 

Sic  ttJcrbctt  —  — 

ftc  ttJcrbcn   —  — 


Future  Subjunctive. 
I  should  praise,  etc. 

id)  iDerbe  lohtn 
t^n  ttierbcft  Uhtn 
cr  mcrbe  lobctt 
ttiir  tnctbctt  Uffcn 
i^r  teicrbet  lobctt 
(Bit  mcrbctt  lohcn 
fie  tticrbcit  Uhcn 

Fut  Per/.  Suhj, 

I  should  have  praised, 

etc. 

i6)  ttJcrbc  gelobt  !)a6ctt 
bu  tucrbcft   —      — 
cr  tticrbc      —      — 
ttjir  tticrbctt  — 
i^r  tticrbct   — 
8ic  ttjcrbctt  — 
ftc  mcrbctt   — 


Present  Conditional. 
I  should  praise,  etc. 

ir^  ttJiirbe  lubcn 
^n  ttiurbcft  (uben 
er  ttiurbc  lobctt 
ttiir  tDiivbett  (oben 
i^x  njilrbet  lobctt 
@ic  ttJiirbcn  (obett 
ftc  ttittrbctt  lobeit 

Perf.  Conditional. 
I  should  have  praised, 
etc. 

tr^  hJiirbc  gcbbt  l^abcn 

'tsM  tuiirbcft  —  — 

cr  ttiiirbc     —  — 

ttJtr  milrbcn  —  — 

i^r  miirbct  —  — 

8tc  hiurbcit—  — 

ftc  ttiurbctt   —  — 


(e)      Imperative.  Participles.  Infinitives. 

Sing,  lobe  (bu),  praise !    Pres.  lobcub,  praising  (p)  lobctt,  to  praise 
Plu.  UU  (i^r),  praise  !  Perf.  gclobt,  praised     gctubt  (^u)  I)abCtt,  to  have 

praised 


lobcu  @tc,  praise ! 
318. 

(a)  Pres.  Indie. 
I  am  praised,  etc. 

id\  mcrbc  gctobt 
t>\t  ttJirft  fjclobt 
cr  tuirb  gclubt 

ttiir  uicrbctt  gclobt 
if)x  tticrbet  gctobt 
Sic  tticrbcu  gclobt 
fie  ttJcrbctt  gclobt 


Passive  Voice. 

(See  Footnote,  p.  217.) 

•  Pres.  Subj. 
I  am  praised,  etc. 

x(i)  tticrbc  gclobt 
bu  ttjcrbeft  gclobt 
er  tticrbc  gclobt 

ttiir  tticrbcu  gcbbt 
i^r  tticrbct  gctobt 
@ic  mcrbctt  gclobt 
fie  ttJcrbeu  gclubt 


224 


ELEMENTS   OF  GEBMAN. 


Per/.  Indie. 
I  have  been  praised,  etc. 
id)  bin  qcloht  morben 
btt  bift  qtioht  morben 
cr  ift  qtiohi  itiorbctt 
toiv  finb  qtioht  iDorbcn 
iljr  fcib  gelobt  ttiorbctt 
@te  finb  gclubt  itiorbcn 
fie  finb  gelobt  morben 

(&)  Past  Indie. 

I  was  praised,  etc. 
idf  mnrbe  gelDbt 
bn  mntbeft  gclobt 
ct  tt»nrbc  geluBt 
toiv  ttinrbcn  gclobt 
t!ftr  mnrbct  getobt 
@ic  nmrbcn  ocIoW 
fie  mnrben  gclobt 

PZwp.  Indie. 
I  had  been  praised,  etc. 
t(i^  mar  ^tUU  morben 
hn  ttJarft  geloBt  morben 
er  war  gelobt  morbcn 
mir  maren  geloBt  njotben 
i^r  maret  gelobt  murben 
8ie  ttJaren  gclobt  morben 
fie  maren  gcIoBt  morben 

(c)         Future  Indie. 
I  shall  be  praised,  etc. 
idj  merbc  gctobt  merben 
btt  mirft  gelobt  ttjerbcn 
er  mirb  getobt  itjcrbcn 
mir  merben  gelobt  mcrben 
t^r  tuerbct  gelobt  merben 
(Bit  merben  getoBt  mcrben 
fie  n^erben  gelobt  merben 


Perf.  Suhj. 
I  have  been  praised,  etc. 
id)  fei  gelobt  murben 
hn  feteft  gelobt  morben 
er  fei  gelobt  morben 
tuir  feien  gelobt  morben 
i^r  fciet  gelobt  luorben 
@ic  feien  gelobt  morben 
fie  feien  gelobt  wurben 

Past  Suhj. 
I  vras  praised,  etc. 
id)  miirbe  gelobt 
t^n  iuiirbeft  gelobt 
er  miivbe  gelobt 
tuir  wiirben  gelobt 
i!jr  mitrbet  gelobt 
8ie  ttjiirben  gelobt 
fie  miirben  gelobt 

Plup.  Suhj. 
I  had  been  praised,  etc. 
id)  mare  gebbt  morben 
^M  ttJareft  getobt  morben 
er  mare  gelobt  morben 
mir  maren  getobt  morben 
iftr  maret  gelobt  morben 
Sie  maren  gelobt  morben 
fie  maren  gelobt  morben 

Future  Suhj. 
I  should  be  praised,  etc. 
i^  merbe  getobt  merben 
bn  merbeft  gelobt  merben 
er  merbe  gelobt  merben 
mir  merben  gelobt  merben 
iftr  merbet  gelobt  merben 
Sie  mcrben  gelobt  merben 
fie  merben  gelobt  merben 


SUMMARY  OF  INFLECTIONS. 


226 


(d)  Future  Perf.  Indie. 

I  shall  have  been  praised,  etc. 
i(f|  ttjerbc  gclobt  ttiprbcn  fetn 
bu  ttiirft  qtloht  !mox\>cn  fein 
cr  mirb  gclobt  ttiorben  fciit 
ttJtr  tticrbctt  qtloU  morben  fein 
i^r  ttierbct  gclobt  tuorbcn  fein 
@ic  mctbctt  gelobt  morbcn  fctit 
fie  ttierben  gclobt  ttjorbcn  fein 

(e)  Present  Conditional. 
I  should  be  praised,  etc. 

id^  ttiiirbe  gclobt  ttjerbcn 
hn  niitrbeft  ge(obt  merben 
cr  ttjitrbe  gelobt  werbeit 
tx>ix  ttiiirbett  gelobt  merben 
i^r  ttiiirbet  gelobt  tperbett 
@ie  tuiirben  gelobt  toerben 
fie  loiirben  gelobt  toerben 


Future  Perf.  Subj. 
I  should  have  been  praised,  etc. 
i^  toerbe  gelobt  toorbeu  fein 
hn  toerbcft  gelobt  toorben  fein 
er  toerbe  gelobt  toorben  fein 
ttiir  toerben  gelobt  morben  fein 
i^r  toerbet  gelobt  morben  fein 
8ie  merben  gelobt  ttjotrben  fein 
fie  merben  gelobt  morben  fein 

Perfect  Conditional. 
I  should  have  been  praised,  etc. 
t(^  mitrbe  gelobt  toorben  fein 
t^n  mitrbeft  gelobt  morben  fein 
er  toiirbe  gelobt  toorben  fein 
toir  miirben  gelobt  niorben  fein 
i^v  miirbet  gelobt  morben  fein 
8ie  toiirben  gelobt  morben  fein 
fie  ttJiirben  gelobt  morben  fein 


2d  Sing. 
2d  Plur. 


Imperative. 
toerbe  {t>n)  gelobt     or  fci  (Ux)  gelobt,  be  praised ! 
(  toerbet  (il|r)  gelobt  or  fcib  (i^r)  gelobt,  be  praised ! 
(  tt»erben  3ie  gelobt  or  feien  @ie  gelobt,  be  praised ! 


Participles. 
Present:  (jn  lobenb,  used  only  as  adj.) 
Perfect:  gelobt  toorben 


Infinitives. 

gelobt  (ju)  njerben 
gelobt  morben  (^n)  fein 


319.        Conjugation  of  fel^en,  to  see,  a  strong  verb. 
Active  Voice. 
(See  Footnote,  p.  217.) 


(a)  Pres.  Indie.  Pres.  Subj. 
I  see,  etc.  I  See,  etc. 

itift  fe^e  ir^  fe^e 

hn  fielrft  btt  fei^eft 

er  fie^t  er  fe^e 


Perf.  Indie. 
I  have  seen,  etc. 
id)  ^aht  gefe^en 
hn  l^aft  gefe^en 
er  f)at  gefeljen 


Perf.  Subj.    , 
I  have  seen,  etc. 
id)  ffaU  gcfc^cn 
t>n  ^abeft  gefel^en 
er  l^abe  gefe^cn 


226 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 


mir  fc^en        mit  fei^ctt 

ttitr  iftaben  gcfel^ctt 

ttiir  (abctt  gefc^cn 

i^r  fc!)t            i^r  fefiet 

i^r  \)a\>t  gefe^cu 

i^r  f)ahti  gefc^ctt 

@tc  fcl)Ctt         Sic  fefjctt 

8ie  i)a\)t\i  gefeftcn 

@ie  ^abctt  gcfe^icu 

ftc  fc^ctt          fie  fe^ieit 

fie  ^abctt  gefe^en 

fie  ^abctt  gcfctjctt 

(6)  Pasi.  Ind.    Pas^.  ;Sw?>;.             Plup.  Indie. 

Plup.  Subj. 

I  saw,  etc.        I  saw,  etc 

I  had  seen,  etc. 

I  had  seen,  etc. 

id)  \a\)             id)  fd^e 

id)  \)aiit  gefcl^cn 

id)  f)ixitt  gefc^ctt 

U  fal)ft           bu  fa^eft 

btt  \)aiit\i  gefe^ctt 

btt  Iidttcft  gefe^ctt 

cr  fa^              er  fa^e 

cr  l^atte  gefc^ctt 

er  l^dttc  gefc^ctt 

njir  fa^en         ttiir  fd^eu 

wir  fiattctt  gefc^ctt 

ttiir  pttctt  gcfclftctt 

i^r  fa^t            i^r  fd^jet 

il^r  ^(kiiti  gefe^en 

i^r  f)'dittt  gcfcfjctt 

8ie  fnfiett        @ie  fd^en         (5ie  ftatteit  gcfe^eu 

8ie  ^dttctt  gefc^ctt 

fie  fa^ctt          fie  fd^en 

fie  ^attctt  gefe^ctt 

ftc  pttctt  gefc^ctt 

(c)      Future  Indie. 

Future  Subj. 

Present  Conditional. 

I  shall  see,  etc. 

I  shall  see,  etc. 

I  should  see,  etc. 

id)  merbe  feften 

id)  tticrbe  fc^cn 

id)  ttiilrbe  fc^ctt 

bu  mirft  fewest 

btt  ttierbefi  fe^ctt 

btt  ttiiirbeft  fc^cn 

cr  ttJirb  fe^en 

cr  tticrbe  fc^ctt 

cr  mitrbe  fc^cn 

mir  ttierbctt  fc^cn 

ttiir  ttierben  fc^ctt 

ttiir  ttiiirbctt  fc^ctt 

if)r  tacrbct  fcljcn 

i^r  tticrbet  felften 

ii)x  ttiiirbet  fc^ictt 

@ie  ttjcrbctt  fc^ctt 

(Sic  merbcn  fc^en 

@ic  ttiitrbctt  fc^ctt 

fie  tticrbctt  fe^cu 

ftc  ttierben  fcften 

fie  ttiitrbctt  fc^ctt 

{d)  Future  Perf.  Indie. 

Fat.  Perf.  Suhj. 

Perfeet  Conditional. 

I  shall  have  seen,  etc. 

I  should  have  seen,  etc. 

I  should  have  seen,  etc. 

id)  mcrbc  gefe^eit  ^abett  id)  tuerbe  oefcl)en(|abcit 

id)  ttiilrbe  gefc^ctt  I|al»ctt 

btt  ttiirft       —       — 

btt  ttierbeft    —       — 

btt  ttiiirbeft   —       — 

cr  njirb       —       — 

cr  tticrbe      —       — 

cr  ttiilrbe      —       — 

wsix  mcrbctt  —       — 

ttiir  ttierbctt  —       — 

ttiir  ttiitrbctt  —       — 

t^r  ttJcrbet    —       — 

i^r  tticrbet    —       — 

i^r  ttiiirbet    —       — 

®ic  ttierben  —       — 

®ic  ttierbctt  —       — 

(Sic  ttiilrbctt  —       — 

fie  ttierben    —       — 

fie  ttierben    —       — 

fie  ttiilrbctt    —       — 

(e)     Imperatives. 

Participles. 

Jnflnitives. 

Sing,  fte^(c)  btt,  see ! 

Pres.  fc^Cttb,  seeing 

(5tt)  fc^Ctt,  to  see 

fc!)et(il)r),  see! 
^^^'   fcdeneie,  see! 

Perf.  gcfd^Ctt,  seen 

gefeftctt  (p)  ^abew,  to 

have  seen 

SUMMARY  OF  INFLECTIONS. 


227 


(/)  The  Passive  Voice  of  fe^ett  is  formed  exactly  like  that 
of  (oben,  by  substituting^ the  form  gefe^eu  for  the  form  gelobt 
in  the  paradigms  in  §  318. 

Note   that: 

1.  The  personal  endings  throughout  the  weak  verb  cor- 
respond very  closely  to  those  of  the  auxiliaries. 

2.  Many  strong  verbs  change  the  root-vowel  in  the  present 
indicative,  second  and  third  persons  singular,  and  in  the  im- 
perative singular. 

3.  Weak  verbs  have  the  past  participle  in  t.  Strong  verbs 
in  en;  otherwise  they  are  conjugated  just  like  weak  verbs, 
except  in  the  present  and  past  indicative  and  in  the  imperative. 

320.     Conjugation  of  attfatigcn,  to  begin,  a  separable  strong  verb. 

(See  Footnote,  p.  217.) 


(a)  Pres.  Ind.     Pres.  Suhj. 

I  begin,  etc.  I  begin,  etc. 

i(^  fange  an  xdf  fange  an 

bu  fanoft  an  bu  fangcft  an 

tx  fdngt  an  tx  faitgct  an 

toix  fangeit  an  n)ix  fangctt  an  toix  i^ahtn 

i^x  fangt  an  iijx  fannct  an     i^r  f^aht 

(Bit  fangctt  an  Sic  faitgett  an  @ic  f^ahtn 

fie  fanoen  an  fie  fangen  an     fie  f^ahtn 


Per/.  Indie. 
I  have  begun,  etc. 
ic^  I)aBe  angefangen 
hn  ^aft         — 
er  i^at  — 


(b)  Past  Ind. 
I  began,  etc. 

id)  fing  an 
hn  fingft  an 
tx  ftngt  an 
mir  fingen  an 
i^r  finget  an 
(Bit  fingen  an 
fie  fingen  an 


Past  Subj. 
I  began,  etc. 

iti)  finge  an 
bn  fingeft  an 
et  finget  an 
mir  fingen  an 
iffr  finget  an 
Bit  fingen  an 
fie  fingen  an 


Plup.  Indie. 
I  had  begun,  etc. 

x6)  f^aitt  angefangen 

hn  ^attt^t  — 

tx  f^attt  — 

mir  fatten  — 

iftr  f^atttt  — 

®ie  f^atitn  — 

fie  fatten  *— 


Perf.  Subj. 
I  have  begun,  etc. 
id)  f)aht  angefangen 
t>n  ^abeft      — 
er  f)aht        — 

tvix  i)ahtn  — 

i^r  \)ahtt  — 

Bit  f)ahtn  — 

fie  ^aben  — 

Plup.  Subj. 
I  had  begun,  etc. 

id)  f)aUt  angefangen 
btt  Iiattcft     — 

tx  f)Clttt         — 

toix  fatten  ■— 

il)r  %aiiti  — 

Bit  ^aiitn  — 

fie  ^aiitn  — 


228 


ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 


(c)     Future  Indie. 
I  shall  begin,  etc. 

x^  merbe  anfattgen 
btt  toitft  anfangeu 
cr  ttiirb  anfangen 
toxx  tuerbcn  anfattgcn 
i^r  tticrbet  anfattgcn 
Sic  merben  anfangeu 
fie  toerben  anfangen 


Future  Subj. 
I  should  begin,  etc. 

id)  merbe  anfangen 
t^n  tnerbeft  anfangen 
tv  merbe  anfangen 
njir  merben  anfangen 
i^r  merbet  anfangen 
Bit  ti^txhtrx  anfangen 
fie  tuerben  anfangen 


Pres.  Conditional. 
I  should  begin,  etc. 

idj  miirbe  anfangen 
hn  miirbeft  anfangen 
er  milrbe  anfangen 
tx)iv  mitrben  anfangen 
i^r  milrbet  anfangen 
<Sie  milrben  anfangen 
fie  miirben  anfangen 


{d)  Future  Perf.  Indie. 

I  shall  have  begun,  etc. 

td^  »erbc  angefangen  fiobtn 
^n  mirft  angefangen  f^ahtn 
er  tuirb  angefangen  l^aben 
mir  ttierben  angefangen  f^ahtrt 
t^r  ttJerbet  angefangen  ^aben 
8ie  tnetben  angefangen  l^aben 
fie  tuerben  angefangen  l^aben 


Future  Perf.  Subj. 
I  should  have  begun,  etc. 

x6!i  merbe  angefangen  t^aiftn 
bn  merbeft  angefangen  ^oben 
er  merbe  angefangen  ftaben 
mir  merben  angefangen  f^ahctt 
if\x  ttJerbet  angefangen  f^ahcrx 
8ie  merben  angefangen  Iiaben 
fie  merben  angefangen  f^ahtn 


Perfect  Conditional. 
I  should  have  begun,  etc. 

id)  miirbe  angefangen  Iftaben 
hn  miirbeft  angefangen  i)ai>tn 
er  miirbe  angefangen  l)aben 
ttiir  mitrben  angefangen  f)ahtn 
if)x  miirbet  angefangen  l^aben 
(Bit  milrben  angefangen  ^ahtn 
fie  niitrben  angefangen  ^aben 


(e)  Imperative. 

Sing,  fange  (bn)  an,  begin ! 
•       (fanget(i^r)  an,  begin  i 
^^'  ( f angen  Bit  an,  begin  ! 


Participles. 
Pres.  anfangenb,  beginning 
Perf.  angefangen,  begun 


an^ttfangen,  to  begin 


Infinitives. 
angefangen  su  l^aben,  to  have  begun 


SUMMARY  OF  INFLECTIONS. 


229 


(/)    The  Passive  Voice  of  separable  verbs  is  perfectly  regu- 
lar.    See  §  318. 


321.     Conjugation  of  JcrBred^Clt,  to  break  (to  pieces)^  an  insepar- 
able strong  verb. 

(See  Footnote,  p.  217.) 

Pres.  Subj.  Per/.  Indie. 


(a)  Pres.  Ind. 
I  break,  etc. 
idft  ScrBrcdjc 
btt  jcrBnriftft 


I  break,  etc. 

t^  $crBrcrftc 
bu  ^crBrc(f|cft 


toix  serBrer^ctt  ton  ^crbrcrficu 
i^r  5crBrc(^t      i^r  jcrbrer^ct 
(Bit  jcrBrc^ctt  @tc  jcrBrc^ctt 
{ic  aer^rcti^ctt    fie  ^txhttd^tn 


(6)  Pasi.  Inci. 
I  broke,  etc. 
l^  ^tvhxad) 
bn  aerbrati^ft 
cr  ^txhxa^ 
.ttiir  serbrati^ctt 
^r  aerBradftt 
@tc  serBradftcn 
fie  scrbrar^ctt 


Past  Subj. 
I  broke,  etc. 
t(^  jctBrddje 
bu  jerbrdriftft 
cr  ^txWdtijt 
totr  jcrbrad^cit 
tl|r  ^erbror^iet 
(Sie  jcrbrat^cn 
fie  scrbrd^en 


I  have  broken,  etc. 

id\  i^ahc  5crbrod)ett 

hn  ia^i  — 

cr  f^at  — 

ttiir  ^abctt  — 

i^r  fiaU  — 

@ic  ^abcn  — 

fie  ^abeit  — 

Plup.  Indie. 
I  had  broken,  etc. 

xdi  f^aiit  5erbro(i^en 

btt  iiattt^t  — 

cr  f^aitt  — 

ttiir  f^atitn  — 

i^r  ^attct  — 

Sie  fatten  — 

fie  flatten  — 


Per/.  5u6;. 
I  have  broken,  etc. 

id)  fjaht  scrbrot^cn 

btt  ^abeft  — 

cr  l^aht  — 

ttJir  ^abctt  — 

i^r  f^attt  — 

®ie  f^ahtn  — 

fie  l^abctt  — 

Plup.  Subj, 
I  h?.d  broken,  etc. 

id)  f)aitt  serbrod^ctt 

hn  ftdttcft  — 

cr  ^dtte  —- 

Itiirpttctt  — 

t^r  f)ixtttt  — 

@ie  \)Uitn  — 

fie  ^dttctt  — 


(c)      Future  Indie, 
I  shall  break,  etc. 

id)  tnerbe  jerbrcti^ett 
btt  tuirft  serbrctiftctt 
cr  ttjirb  jerbrcd^ett 
ttiir  ttjerbctt  gerbre^en 
ifjr  tticrbet  gerbrec^ctt 
Sie  werbctt  gerbreciftctt 
fie  ttierbctt  scrbrcd^ctt 


Future  Subj, 
I  should  break,  etc. 

id)  merbe  gerbreti^ett 
btt  ttjcrbeft  jerbred^ett 
cr  tticrbe  jerbre^ett 
ttiir  merbctt  ^erbrcrfictt 
i^r  ttierbet  jerbrerfiett 
8ie  ttierbett  ^erbrcd^ctt 
fte  tttcrbctt  ^erbreti^en 


Pres.  Conditional, 
I  should  break,  etc. 
id)  ttJiirbe  serbredjcn 
btt  ttiitrbcft  jerbrcd^ctt 
cr  toiirbe  ^txUtd)tn 
toix  ttJiirbctt  ^erbreti^ctt 
i^r  ttJitrbet  ^erbrct^iett 
8te  tuitrbctt  scrbreri^ett 
fie  ttiilrbcn  aerbrcii^ctt 


230  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN, 

(d)  Fut.  Perf.  Indie.  Fut  Perf.  Suhj, 

I  shall  have  broken,  etc.  I  should  have  broken,  etc. 

i^  ttierbe  ^txhxo^tn  f^abtn  id)  luerbe  ^cvhvod)cn  i^ahtn 

btt  ttJirft  ^tvhvoti)tn  f)aUn  t^n  merbeft  ^tvhxo^tn  ^abcit 

er  ttiirb  scrbrudjeit  ^abcn  cr  hierbc  ^txhvo^tn  IftaBeit 

ttiir  tticrbctt  jcrBro^cn  ^aben  tuir  merben  serbroti^ctt  ^abett 

i^r  hierbct  ^erbrorJicn  ^abcn  il)r  tticrbet  ^crbroriicn  ffahtn 

(Bit  tticrbcu  gerbrotfjcn  Ijaben  (Bit  njctben  scrbroc^en  ftabctt 

fie  mxhtn  ^tvhvo^tn  f^ahtn  fie  ttierben  ^txhtoti^tn  iiahtn 

Perfect  Conditional. 
I  should  have  broken,  etc. 

id^  njiirbe  ^crbro^en  ftaben 
btt  ttiiirbcft  ^txhxod^tn  f^ahtn 
er  ttiitrbe  ^erbroti^en  l)abctt 
ttiir  ttiitrbett  jcrbror^ctt  f^ahtn 
xf)x  miirbet  jerbrocfiett  f^ahtn 
Bit  ttJitrbett  ^txhxod^tn  f^ahtn 
fie  ttiiirbctt  ^crbroc^en  ^aben 

(e)  Imperative.  Participles. 

Sing,  jerbrirf)  (btt),  break !  Pres.  ^erbretiftenb,  breaking 

Plu  ( S^^^'^^^^ti^Ct  (iWf  l^^eak !  Perf.  jerbrodftCtt,  broken 

( jcrbreri^ett  Bitf  break  ! 

Infinitives. 
(jtt)  jerbreriictt,  to  break         ^erbroti^ctt  (jtt)  ^jabett,  to  have  broken 

(/)  The  Passive  Voice  of  inseparable  verbs  is  perfectly  reg- 
ular :  i(J)  it)erbe  gerbrodEien,  etc     See  §  318. 

Note  that  : 

1.  The  separable  prefix  follows  and  is  separated  from  the 
root-verb  in  the  present  and  past  indicative  and  subjunctive 
and  in  the  imperative. 

2.  In  all  other  cases  it  precedes  and  is  attached  to  the  root- 
verb.     This  includes  the  past  participle  with  prefix  ge^  and  the 


SUMMARY  OF  INFLECTIONS.  231 

infinitive  with  sign  gu.     So  we  write  aufgeftattben,  aufjuftctjen, 
etc. 

3o  Inseparable  verbs  are  just  like  simple  verbs,  except  that 
the  past  participle  does  not  have  the  prefix  ge-.  It  is  easy  to 
see  that  this  would  sound  awkward. 

322.   Conjugation  of  fid^  frcueit,  to  be  glad,  to  rejoice,  a  reflexive 

verb. 
(See  Footnote,  p.  217.) 
(a)  Pres.  Ind.      Pres.  Subj,  Perf.  Indie.  Per/.  Subj. 

I  am  glad,  etc.  I  am  glad,  etc.  I  have  been  glad,  etc.  I  have  been  glad,  etc. 
i(ift  frcttc  mid)    ifft  frcue  mir^    id)  t)aU  mid)  gefrcut  ir^  ffaBe  mirf|  gcfreut 
btt  frcuft  \>id)    hn  freucft  hid)   bu  f)a^i  hid)        —      bu  ^abcft  hid)    — 
cr  freut  ^id)      cr  freuc  \id)       tv  f)at  ^id)  —      er  ^abc  \id)       — 

ttJirfrcttcituni^  ttJirfrcttCttUtt^  ttJtr  ^abetttttt^  —  ttiir  ^aficu  utt^  — 
Hr  frcttt  tnd)  i\)v  frcuct  tnd)  ii)v  f)aU  cud)  —  ii)v  f)ahtt  end)  — 
(Sic  frcuctt  ^id)  @tc  freuen  ftr^  @ie  ^aBcit  ^id)  —  @ic  i)ahcn  ^id)  — 
fie  frcucn  fid)    fie  freuen  ft(^     fie  f)ahtn  \id)      —      fie  f)aUn  ^id)      — 

(6)  Past  Indie.       Past  Subj.  Plup.  Indie.  Plup.  Subj. 

I  was  glad,  etc.  I  was  glad,  etc.  .1  had  been  glad,  etc.  I  had  been  glad,  etc. 

idi  freute  mid)    id)  freute  mid)  id)  fjaitc  mid)  gefreut  id)  f)'attt  mid)  gefreut 

btt  freuteft  bidi  hn  freuteft  hid)  hu  t)attt^i  hid)   —  hn  Jtitteft  hid)    — 

er  freute  ^id)      er  freute  ftrff      er  ^attc  fitfi       —  er  fiiitte  fic^       — 

UJtr  freuteu  nn^  UJir  freuteu  \m§  tuir  f)aiitn  un§  —  mtr  \)dittn  nn^  — 

if)v  freutet  euc^  i\)v  freutet  eudj  tfir  f)atttt  cud)  —  if)v  f)dtHt  end)   — 

(Bit  freuteu  ftdji  @te  freuteu  fid)  ®te  i)atitn  \id)  —  8te  i)ixittn  [xd)  — 

fie  freuteu  \id)    lie  freuteu  fid)    fie  f)aittn  \id)    —  fie  f)dittn  fid)     — 

(c)  Future  Indieative.  Future  Subjunctive. 

I  shall  be  glad,  etc.  I  should  be  glad,  etc. 

id)  merbe  mid)  freuen  id)  werbe  mid)  freuen 

hn  ttJirft  bitift  freuen  bu  merbeft  hid)  freuen 

er  tuirb  fid)  freuen  er  UJerbe  ftt^  freuen 

mtr  ttjerbeu  un§  freuen  mir  werbeu  uu^  freuen 

tl)r  luerbet  euti^  freuen  t^r  mcrbet  end)  freuen 

8ie  ttjerben  ^id)  freuen  ©te  merben  fid)  freuen 

fie  merbeu  fid)  freuen  fie  merben  \id)  freuen 


232 


ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN, 


(d)  Future  Per/.  Indie, 

I  shall  have  been  glad,  etc. 
id)  merbe  mieift  gcfrcut  f^ahtn 
btt  ttiirft  hiti)  gcfrcut  f)ahcn 
cr  ttiirb  fief)  gcfrcut  ^ti^cn 
mir  ttjerbctt  nn§  gefreut  l^abctt 
i^r  tuerbct  curi^  gcfreut  ^abeit 
Sic  tt)tvhtn  fl(^  gcfreut  liaBcit 
ftc  wcrbcit  fitift  gefrcut  ^abcit 

(e)  Present  Conditional. 
I  should  be  glad,  etc. 

ii^  mitrbe  mt(!^  freuen 
bu  tDiirbeft  bit^  freuen 
er  tuilrbc  fiti^  freuen 
ttiir  miirben  nn$  freuen 
i^r  ttJitrbet  cu^  freuen 
@ie  mitrben  fic^  freuen 
fie  miirben  fir^  freuen 


Future  Perf.  Subj. 
I  should  have  been  glad^  etc. 
i6:i  merbe  mii^  gefreut  :^aBen 
\>n  merbeft  biri^  gefreut  ^oben 
er  merbe  fid^  gefreut  I)aben 
mir  merben  nn§  gefreut  l^aUn 
xf)v  tuerbet  eur^i  gefreut  l)aben 
6ie  tuerben  fid)  gefreut  ^ahzn 
fie  merben  firi^  gefreut  l)oben 

Perfect  Conditional. 
I  should  have  been  glad,  etc. 
id)  miirbe  mitift  gefreut  Iftaben 
^n  tuiirbeft  hid)  gefreut  l^oben 
er  ttiiirbe  fid)  gefreut  ^aben 
toir  mitrben  un§  gefreut  f)(ibcn 
i^ir  milrbet  tnd)  gefreut  I)abeu 
8ie  ttJitrbeu  fid^  gefreut  f)ahtn 
fie  milrben  fiti^  gefreut  ^oben 


Participles. 
Pres.   fid^  freueub,  rejoicing 
Perf.  fiti^  gefreut,  rejoiced 


(/)  Imperative. 

Sing,  f reue  \>id),  rejoice ! 
( freut  tnd)f  rejoice ! 
^^*  ( freuen  8ie  fiti^,  rejoice ! 

Infinitives. 
[id)  5tt  freuen,  to  be  glad  [td)  gefreut  ju  ^oben,  to  have  been  glad 

Note  that :  v 

1.  The  reflexive  pronoun  in  the  conjugation  of  the  reflexive 
verb  must  change  to  agree  with  the  subject,  just  as  we  say  in 
English,  /  hurt  myself,  you  hurt  yourself,  he  hurt  himself. 

2.  The  reflexive  pronoun  always  follows  directly  after  the 
verb  in  the  simple  tenses  and  directly  after  the  auxiliary  in 
the  compound  tenses. 

3.  All  reflexive  verbs  are  conjugated  with  the  auxiliary 
fjaben. 


SUMMARY  OF  INFLECTIONS, 


233 


323.     The  Modal  Auxiliaries  correspond  to  the  English  modals 
as  follows:  — 


(a) 

Present. 

Past. 

Past  Participle. 

bitrfctt, 

,  may,  to  he  permitted 

bttrftc 

gcbttrft  < 

ov  biirfctt 

fottiiett 

;,  can,  to  be  able  to 

fottttte 

gefottttt 

or  fiittttCtt 

Jitiigctt, 

,  may,  to  care  or  like  to 

tttOC^tC 

gentot^t 

or  tttiigctt 

miigcii 

,  must,  to  be  compelled  to 

»       tttttgtC 

gctttttjit  - 

or  tttiiffctt 

follcu, 

shall,  ought,  to  be  to 

folltc 

gcfoUt  or  fottctt 

ttioKen, 

f  will,  to  want  to 

tooUtc 

gcttioUt  ( 

or  ttfoUtn 

W 

Present  Indicative  of  Modals. 

I  may, 

I  can,            I  like. 

I  must. 

I  am  to. 

I  want  to, 

etc. 

etc.                etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

i^  barf 

x^  fatttt       id)  tttag 

id)  tttttg 

id)^oU 

id)  toiU 

bn  barfft 

bn  faititft      btt  tttagft 

btt  ttttt^t 

btt  folift 

btt  ttJittft 

ct  barf 

er  fatttt        cr  tttag 

cr  nttt^ 

erfua 

crttJia 

mtr  bitrfctt 

ttiir  fottttCtt  mir  tttijgctt 

ttiir  tttiiffctt 

ttJir  fottctt 

ttiir  mottctt 

i^r  biirft 

il)r  fiitttttc    iljr  tttijgt 

i^r  tttii^t 

i^r  fottt 

ii)v  ttJottt 

<Bic  biirfeii 

Sic  fiittttCtt  Sic  tttiigctt 

Sic  tttiiffctt 

Sic  fo«ctt 

Sic  ttfoUtn 

fie  bitrfctt 

fie  fiittttCtt    fie  tttiigctt 

fie  tttiiffctt 

fie  fottctt 

fie  ttiottctt 

(c) 

Present  Subjunctive. 

I  may, 

I  can^            I  like. 

I  must. 

I  am  to. 

I  want  to. 

etc. 

etc.                etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

xd\  bitrfc 

t(f|  fBttttc      id)  tttijgc 

id)  ntitffc 

id)  fottc 

iti^  tuottc 

btt  bilrfcft 

btt  fiJitttcft    btt  tttijgcft 

btt  tttitffeft 

btt  foWeft 

btt  ttiotfcft 

cr  bitrfc 

er  fiittttc       cr  tttijge 

cr  ittiiffe 

cr  folic 

cr  tt>oUt 

ttiir  bitrfctt 

ttiir  fiittttCtt  ttJir  tttiigctt 

ttiir  tttiiffctt 

ttJir  foffctt 

tt)ir  ttioKctt 

il|r  biirfct 

il)r  fiittttct    i^r  tttijgct 

i^r  ittitffct 

iffr  follet 

i!)r  tooUtt 

Sic  bitrfctt  Sic  fbnttctt  Sic  tttijgctt 

Sic  tttiiffctt  Sic  foUctt 

Sic  ttioKctt 

ftc  bitrfctt 

fie  fiittttCtt    fie  tttiigctt 

fie  tttiiffctt 

fie  fottctt 

fie  ttfoUtn 

(d) 

Past  Indicative. 

I  was  per- 

I was  able,    I  liked  to. 

I  had  to, 

I  ought  to. 

I  wanted  to, 

mitted,  etc. 

etc.               etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

id)  bttrftc     id)  fottttte     id|  tttod)te     tt^  nttttte     tr^  fottte       id)  ttiottte 
bttbitrftcft   bttfmttttcft  btttttod^teft  btt  tttit^tcft  bttfollteft     bttttioWtcft 
er  bttrftc      er  fottttte     cr  tttod^tc     er  tttttgtc      er  fottte       er  woHtc 


234  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

ttiir  burftctt  ttJit  fotttitcn  toix  mori)tctt  toit  mugtcn  ttih  fotttett  ttitr  ttjotttcn 

il|r  burftet    i^r  foiintct   i^r  mod)tct    i^r  mu^tet   if)r  foKtct  i^r  wotttct 

©ic  burftctt  @ic  fonntcn  @tc  modfitctt  (Sic  mu^ten  Sic  folltcn  Sic  tuotttcu 

fte  burftctt    fie  fotttttctt  fie  mod)ttn    fie  tttugtctt  fie  fotttctt  fie  moUttn 

(e)  Past  Subjunctive. 

I  might,        I  could,        I  should     I  sh'd  have   I  ought  to,     I  should 
etc.  etc.  like,  etc.        to,  etc.  etc.         want  to,  etc. 

irift  biirfte     id)  fiittttte     ir^  mod^tc     i^  ntiigtc  irf|  fottte  id^  tnoKtc 

bttbiirfteft   bu  fmmtcft  bu  ntiJri^tcft  bu  ntiigtcft  bu  fottteft  bu  inoHtcft 

er  biirfte      cr  Wttttte     er  ntiitJite      cr  miifttc  cr  foKtc  cr  ttiotttc 

ttjir  biirftctt  ttiir  fowtttctt  ttiir  ntiid^tctt  ttiir  ntii^tctt  luir  foKtctt  toir  motttctt 

iftr  bilrftct   i^r  fiitttttet  i^r  ntotfttct  ifir  tttii^tct  i^r  fotttct  i^r  tuotttct 

Sic  bilrftCtt  Sic  fijuutcn  Sic  miidjitctt  Sic  ntit^tctt  Sic  foCten  Sie  moUtctt 

fie  biirftctt    fie  fiitttttew  fie  tttijrf)tctt  fie  ntilgtctt  fie  foKtctt  fie  luoKtctt 

(/)  Future  Indicative  of  all  modals  is  regular:   iij  tDcrbe 
burfen,  I  shall  be  permitted;  bu  IDirft  biirfen,  etc. 

Future  Subjunctive  of  all  modals  is  regular:   id)  lt)erbe 
bitrfen,  I  shall  be  permitted;  bit  tDcrbeft  biirfen,  etc. 

(g)  Perfect  Indicative  without  a  dependent  infinitive  is  regu- 
lar: idE)  f^abt  geburft,  I  was  (have  been)  permitted:  iii)  ijabt  ge^ 
fount,  I  was  (have  been)  able,  etc. 

(h)  Perfect  Indicative  with  a  dependent  infinitive  has  the 
past  participle  with  infinitive  form  ("two  infinitives"): 

I  was  permitted  to  go,  etc. 

i^  l^abc  gc^ctt  biirfctt 
btt  ^laft  gclftctt  biirfen 
er  f^at  gc^eu  biirfen 
tuir  i)ahzn  qtf^tn  biirfen 
xf^v  i}aht  ncf)cn  biirfen 
(Sic  f^ahtn  gc^cn  biirfen 
fie  ftabcn  gel)en  biirfen 


SUMMARY  OF  INFLECTIONS. 


235 


(i)  Perfect  Subjunctive, 

Without  Dependent  Infinitive. 
I  have  been  permitted,  etc. 

id)  f^ahc  geburft 
bu  ^abcft  ficbutft 
cr  ^abc  gebutft 
ttjir  f^abtn  gcburft 
U)v  ^nBct  gcburft 
(Bit  f)ahtn  gcburft 
fie  ^aBcu  gcburft 

(y)  Pluperfect  Indicative, 

Without  Dependent  Infinitive. 
I  had  been  permitted,  etc. 

tr^l  ^attc  gcburft 
^n  ^attcft  gcburft 
er  iftattc  gcburft 
ttJir  f^atitn  gcburft 
ii^v  fiatttt  gcburft 
@ic  fatten  gcburft 
ftc  flatten  gcburft 

(Jc)  Pluperfect  Subjunctive, 

Without  Dependent  Infinitive. 
I  might  have  been  permitted,  etc. 

tri^  f^'diic  gcburft 
hu  pttcft  gcburft 
cr  pttc  gcburft 
UJtr  l^cittcu  gcburft 
iftr  Ijcittct  gcburft 
Sic  Ijiittcu  gcburft 
fie  i^dtttn  gcburft 


With  Dependent  Infinitive. 
I  have  been  permitted  to  go,  etc. 

idi  ^abc  gel^cu  bitrfcn 
bu  l^abcft  gcl^cu  btirfcn 
cr  ^abc  gcl^cu  biirfcu 
ttiir  i^ahtn  gc^cu  biirfcu 
i^r  ftabct  gcl)cu  biirfcu 
8ic  ^abcu  gcl)cu  biirfcu 
fie  ^abcu  ge^en  biirfcu 


With  Dependent  Infinitive. 
I  had  been  permitted  to  go,  etc. 

idi  I)ottc  gc^cu  biirfcu 
hn  ftattcft  gc^eu  biirfcu 
cr  f^attc  gc^cu  biirfcu 
ttiir  f^atttn  gc^cu  biirfcu 
i^ir  \)atUt  gc^cu  biirfcu 
@ie  fiaittn  gcl^cu  biirfcu 
fie  fiaittn  gc^cu  biirfcu 


With  Dependent  Infinitive. 
I  might  have  been  permitted  to  go. 

id)  fidttc  gc^cu  biirfcu 
'^M  I)dttcft  gc^cu  biirfcu 
er  1;)Uit  gcl)cu  biirfcu 
ttiir  pttcu  gc^cu  biirfcu 
i^r  i)tiiiti  gcl)eu  biirfcu 
Sic  pttcu  gc^cu  biirfcu 
fie  in'aiitn  gc^cu  biirfcu 


(I)  Future  Perfect  Indicative  and  Subjunctive  of  modals  is 
regular  but  seldom  used. 


236  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

(m)  Imperative.  Participles. 

Wanting,  except  Pres.   bitrfcub,  fottttCttb,  etc. 

mottCtt,  which  is  rare.  Perf.  geburft  or  biirfctt,  etc. 

Infinitives. 
bilrfctt,  !ottnen,  etc.  geburft  ju  ^abcit,  gefottitt  311  l^abctt,  etc. 

2^ote  that: 

1.  In  their  principal  parts  all  modals  are  irregular  and  re- 
semble weak  verbs. 

2.  The  forms  are  regularly  made  from  the  principal  parts 
except  in  the  present,  and  in  the  past  subjunctive  of  folletl 
(follte)  and  iDoIfen  (iDoltte),  which  do  not  take  umlaut. 

3.  The  past  indicative  and  subjunctive  of  [oKen  and  of  iDoCen 
have  the  same  form. 

4.  The  English  should  like  or  would  like  is  usually  German 
Tnorf)te  (gem). 

5.  English  expressions,  could  have  gone,  might  have  heen, 
must  have  seen,  ought  to  have  done,  etc.,  are  almost  always 
German,  I)atte  ge^eti  fotinen,  t)dttc  fein  f onnen,  l^dtte  [e^en  tnitffen, 
^dtte  tun  mii[fen,  etc.  Always  begin  such  a  phrase  with  a 
form  of  Icjaiit. 

6.  Because  of  the  future  idea  in  m5gen ,  follen  and  iDoHeti, 
they  are  not  commonly  used  in  the  future  tense. 

7.  All  modals  are  conjugated  with  !^aben  as  auxiliary. 


PRONUNCIATION.  237 

PRONUNCIATION. 

Introduction.  • 

324.  A  German  Accent.  —  Most  of  us  can  imitate  German 
brogue  in  telling  a  dialect  story.  We  say  :  "  Veil,  vot  iss  it  ?  " 
and  so  on.  To  speak  in  this  way  we  throw  our  organs  of 
speech  by  force  into  the  positions  which  those  of  a  German 
occupy  naturally.  This  is  the  basis  of  what  we  call  a  German 
accent. 

The  easiest  way  to  approach  a  good  German  accent  is  to 
make  believe  we  are  telling  a  German  dialect  story,  and  to  do 
this  when  we  read  or  speak  German.  We  must  also  get  rid 
of  all  false  modesty,  for  trying  to  mimic  German  sounds  is  not 
half  so  ridiculous  as  giving  German  letters  their  American 
sounds. 

325.  The  Main  Difficulties.  —  In  general,  those  German 
sounds  for  which  English  has  nothing  to  correspond  —  like  ci^, 
8,  and  u  —  are  well  mastered  by  American  pupils.  The  chief 
difficulties  are  with  sounds  like  I,  r,  and  long  c,  because  we 
wrongly  assume  that  these  letters  represent  English  sounds. 
Pupils  prepare  themselves  for  the  difficulties  offered  by  such 
words  as  ba6  33U(f),  bie  SKit^e,  or  fc^5n,  and  take  pains  in  pro- 
nouncing them.  The  result  is  that  they  are  pronounced  much 
nearer  the  true  German  way  than  words  which  are  thought  to 
offer  no  difficulty,  like  al(e,  le^^ren,  or  bte  @eele. 

The  things  that  are  most  distinctively  German  —  neglect  of 
which  marks  an  American  most  clearly  when  he  speaks  with  a 
German  —  are:  (1)  pure  voivel  sounds,  especially  0  and  e,  §§ 
326  ff.;  (2)  the  diphthongs,  §§  329-330;  (3)  the  glottal  catch,  §§ 
331  ff.;    (4)  the  consonants  \  and  r,    §§  338-339;    (5)  length 


238 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 


Fig.  1. — The  Tongue-position  for  t» 


Fig.  2.  — The  Tongue-position  for  a» 


of  consonants,  §  340  ; 
and  (6)  the  ending  en  in 
certain  special  cases, 
§342. 

Vowels. 

326.   Quality  of  Sound. 

—  American  vowels  are 
usually  slurred,  but  Ger- 
man vowels  are  simple, 
pure.  There  is  almost 
always  an  tt/i-sound  after 
an  American  vowel. 
This  is  caused  by  the 
moving  of  the  tongue  or 
the  lower  jaw.  We  pro- 
nounce o  as  0-00,  while  a 
German  keeps  tongue, 
lips,  and  lower  jaw  in 
exactly  the  same  position 
throughout  the  entire 
sound.  We  pronounce 
art,  school,  rose,  Orert, 
schoo-ul,  ro-ooze,  where  a 
German  makes  pure,  sim- 
ple sounds  of  bie  2lrt,  bte 
©c^ule,  bte  9iofe.  The 
English  sounds  are  of 
course  exaggerated  here, 
the  better  to  illustrate 
the  tendency.     But  the 


PBONUNCIA  TION. 


239 


Germans   keep   the  organs   of  speech  in   the   same   position 
throughout  each  sound. 

327.  Tongue  and  Lip  Position.  —  In  order  not  to  move  tongue, 
lips,  and  lower  jaw  dur- 
ing the  sound  of  German 
vowels,  it  is  important 
to  know  the  exact  posi- 
tion of  these  parts  for 
the  making  of  the  vari- 
ous vowel  sounds. 

Articulate  carefully 
the  vowels  in  feed,  far, 
food.  For  the  vowel 
sound  in  .  feed  the  lips 
are  drawn  back  as  in  a 
smile ;  in  far  they  are  in 
t*heir  normal  position  of 
rest ;  in  food  they  are 
(or  should  be)  thrust  for- 
ward as  in  a  pout.  And 
the  tongue  is  raised  and  thrown  forward  in  feed,  is  normal  in 
far,  and  is  drawn  back  in  food.  These  positions  are  illustrated 
in  Figures  1,  2,  and  3. 

The  German  vowel 
sounds  form  a  sequence 
t,  e,  a,  0,  U,  beginning 
with  a  sound  in  the  front 
of  the  mouth  and  running 
to  the  back.  Notice  the 
position  of  the  tongue  for  the  series  as  graphically  shown  in 
Figure  4.     It  must  not  change  position  during  each  sound. 


Fig.  3.  —  The  Tongue-position  for  U» 


Fig.  4.  —  Diagram  of  the  Tongue-position 
for  Gernnan  vowels. 


240  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

A  good  way  to  keep  the  tongue  steady  is  to  rest  its  tip  con- 
sciously against  the  base  of  the  lower  teeth.  A  good  way  to 
keep  the  lower  jaw  steady  is  to  hold  a  lead  pencil  between  the 
teeth. 

328.  Pronunciation.  —  Except  in  the  case  of  long  e,  German 
vowels  offer  little  difficulty  if  we  remember  not  to  move  tongue 
or  lower  jaw  during  vowel  sounds. 

German  e  has  three  sounds :  short,  obscure,  and  long. 
When  short  it  is  like  e  in  metf  when  obscure  like  e  in  golden. 
But  long  c  makes  trouble,  as  it  has  no  English  equivalent.  It 
is  between  a  in  mate  and  ee  in  meet.  It  is  made  with  the  teeth 
almost  together,  the  lips  drawn  back  as  in  a  smile,  and  the 
tongue  almost  as  high  as  in  the  i-position  (Fig.  1).  It  is  a 
pure  sound  and  has  not  the  slur  usually  following  English 
long  a,  as  when  we  pronounce  name,  na-im.  Pronounce  Sl^re 
(not  t^rc),  @eete  (not  ©ate),  tne^ren  (not  aJiiil^ren),  fe^e  (not 
fa^e). 

Note.  For  the  sound  of  c  in  the  unaccented  syllable  tx,  see  r,  §  339, 
Note. 

Diphthongs. 

329.  Pronunciation.  —  Properly  speaking,  a  diphthong  is  a 
double  sound.  But  we  often  speak  of  two  vowels  when  written 
together,  as  a  diphthong,  even  when  they  are  spoken  as  a  single 
sound :  eaich,  heart,  heard.  Below  are  treated  the  three  genuine 
diphthong  sounds :  at  (ci),  au,  and  cu  (Su).  They  differ  from 
the  English  chiefly  in  having  the  main  emphasis  on  the  second 
sound  where  English  has  it  on  the  first.  But  there  are  also 
differences  in  the  quality  of  the  sounds. 

(1)  The  diphthongs  ct  and  at  are  pronounced  exactly  alike  in 
German.    Their  sound  is  nearly  like  that  of  English  i  in  mine. 


PRONUNCIATION.  241 

but  English  long  i  is  a  long  a^--sound  followed  by  a  short  ee 
sound  {W-ee)y  while  German  at  (ci)  is  a^  short  a-sound  followed 
by  a  longer  c-sound  (a=CC')-  In  German,  after  the  short  a-sound, 
the  tongue  does  not  bother  to  climb  clear  to  the  {-position 
(Fig.  1),  but  stays  for  the  longer  part  of  the  diphthong  in  the 
c-position  (Fig.  4):  ®a^  (5t,  metti,  ber  §ain,  bie  @atte, 

(2)  The  diphthong  au  is  nearly  like  English  ow  in  how,  but 
English  ow  is  a  long  a^-sound  followed  by  a  short  i^sound  (d'ob), 
while  German  au  is  a  short  a-sound  followed  by  a  longer  o-sound 
(a-oo').  In  German,  after  the  short  a-sound,  the  tongue  does 
not  bother  to  go  way  back  into  the  u-position  (Fig.  3),  but  stays 
for  the  longer  part  of  the  diphthong  in  the  o-position  (Fig.  4)  : 
^a^  §au^,  ber  9?aub,  ba^  aJiaut,  an^. 

(3)  The  diphthongs  cu  and  au  are  historically  the  same  sound 
and  are  pronounced  exactly  alike  in  German.  Their  sound  is 
nearly  like  that  of  English  oy  in  boy,  but  English  oy  is  a  short 
at(;-sound  followed  by  a  shorter  i-sound  (aw-i)  German  cu  (Su) 
is  a  short  o-sound  followed  by  a  longer  8-sound  (o-W).  In 
German,  after  the  short  o-sound  the  lips  keep  the  same  rounded 
position  and  the  tongue  does  not  bother  to  climb  clear  to  the 
t-position  (Fig.  1),  but  stays  for  the  longer  part  of  the  diph- 
thong in  the  c-position  (Fig.  4) :  J)te  geute,  ^eute,  bie  gciute, 
bie  ®dule. 

330.  Summary  of  the  Differences.  —  German  diphthong-sounds 
have  the  emphasis  on  the  second  part,  where  English  empha- 
sizes the  first  element.  The  second  (longer)  element  of  the 
German  diphthong  is  not  so  different  from  the  first  (short) 
element  as  in  English.  In  other  words,  both  the  lip-  and  the 
tongue-positions  for  the  second  element  of  the  German  diph- 
thong are  nearer  those  of  the  first  element,  than  in  English. 


242  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

German  diphthongs  are  also  of  shorter  duration  than  English. 
They  are  not  so  long  as  a  long  vowel. 

If  we  want  to  emphasize  a  claim  to  something  we  say: 
"  That's  mine "  (mdadd'een),  where  a  German  says :  „T)a^  t[t 
tnein''  (maeen')-  When  we  are  hurt,  we  say:  "  Ow"  {dddd'do)^ 
but  a  German  says :  „%n"  (aoo')»  We  also  call :  "  Ship  ahoy  " 
(aw'i),  but  a  German  in  calling  out  the  word  for  hay,  says : 
„ba^  §eu"  (odo').  The  best  way  to  say  this  right  is  to  think 
mainly  of  the  second  sound ;  the  first  will  take  care  of  itself. 

The  Glottal  Catch,  y^ 

331.  The  ^* Catch"  Proper.  —  Germans  usually  speak  with 
the  muscles  of  the  chest  and  diaphragm  tense.  They  seem  to 
be  holding  their  breath,  as  it  were;  there  is  always  pressure 
upon  the  bellows  which  furnishes  the  motive -power  for  speech. 
This  tenseness  or  pressure  accounts  not  only  for  the  staccato 
effect  and  the  impression  of  vigor  and  speed  given  by  most 
spoken  German,  but  also  for  the  greater  explosiveness  of  many 
German  sounds.  It  is  also  the  foundation  of  what  is  called 
the  glottal  catch. 

When  we  say,  "  pooh ! "  the  breath  bursts  through  our  lips 
in  a  little  explosion.  If  we  close  our  vocal  cords,  as  we  do 
our  lips  in  "  pooh,"  and  then  let  the  breath  pop  through  them, 
we  have  what  is  known  as  a  "  glottal  catch."  There  is  noth- 
ing like  it  in  English ;  the  nearest  approach  is  when  we  whis- 
per "  uh-uh  "  for  "  no."     It  is  a  little,  jerky  cough. 

332.  Use  of  the  Catch. — In  English  conversation  we  carry- 
over a  consonant  to  a  following  vowel,  even  when  they  are  in 
separate  words :  not  at  all,  odd  or  even.  But  a  German  comes 
to  a  full  stop  —  closing  his  vocal  cords  —  before  words  or  syl- 


PRONUNCIATION.  243 

lables  beginning  with  a  vowel.  The  sound  of  the  vowel  is 
then  preceded  by  the  little,  jerky  cough  —  the  "  glottal  catch  " 
—  caused  by  the  sudden  bursting  open  of  the  vocal  cords: 
odd  I  or  I  everiy  not  \  at  \  all. 

Pronounce  the  following  words,  making  a  complete  closure 
of  the  vocal  cords  after  the  prefix,  and  beginning  the  basic 
word  with  a  glottal  catch:  ent|e^ren,  er|tnnern,  mig|ad^ten, 
t)er|einen,  ur|a(t*  Also:  g^  |  tft  |  ein  |  au^er|orbentU(f)  |  unlar- 
tige^  Sitib, 

When  in  English  a  vowel  sound  precedes  an  initial  vowel  — 
whether  this  begins  a  word  or  a  syllable  —  we  join  the  two  by 
the  sound  of  to  (after  o  or  u)  or  of  y  (after  e  or  ^).  In  rapid 
speech,  throughout,  see  it,  I  am  are  pronounced  through-wout, 
see  yit,  I  yam.  But  a  German  comes  to  a  full  stop  before  the 
initial  vowel  sound,  which  he  pronounces  with  a  glottal  catch : 
through  \  out,  see  \  it,  I  \  am. 

Pronounce  the  following  words,  making  a  complete  closure 
of  the  vocal  cords  after  the  prefix,  and  beginning  the  basic 
word  with  a  glottal  catch:  be|ob|ac^ten,  be|a{^ten,  ge|enbet, 
ge|arbettet»  Also:  ^^c^  I)abe  |  etne  |  un|angene^me  |  2lnttDort 
I  er^alten, 

333.  Rule  for  the  Glottal  Catch.  —  In  very  rapid  speech, 
especially  in  unaccented  words  and  syllables,  the  glottal  catch 
is  sometimes  omitted.  But  as  such  fluency  is  not  acquired 
till  after  years  of  practice,  it  is  best  to  follow  the  rule.  Except 
after  the  participles  mentioned  below,  a  glottal  catch  should  pre- 
cede every  word  or  root  syllable  beginning  ivith  a  vowel. 

It  sounds  queer  to  us  when  a  German  speaks  English  with  a 
glottal  catch,  but  no  queerer  than  it  sounds  to  a  German  when 
we  say :  be-yo-bachten,  be-yachten,  ge-yeyidet,  and  ge-yarbeitet 
instead    of    be|ob|a(^ten,    be|a(^ten,    gelenbet,  and    ge|arbeitet» 


244  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

Much  of  the  difficulty  Germans  have  in  understanding  our 
pronunciation  of  their  language  is  due  to  our  omission  of  the 
glottal  catch.  An  illustration  of  this  is  the  fact  that  an  Amer- 
ican was  once  obliged  to  pronounce  the  word  „ertnnern"  five 
times  before  her  German  teacher  could  tell  what  word  she  was 
trying  to  say.  The  difficulty  lay  partly  in  the  drawling  of  the 
American  r,  partly  in  the  omission  of  the  glottal  catch  after 
the  first  er*     The  American  said  e-rinnurn  instead  of  er|innern« 

334.  Omission  of  the  Glottal  Catch.  —  In  words  compounded 
with  the  particles  ^ter,  ^tn,  ^er,  bar,  tnar,  tt)or,  t)or,  tPteber,  and 
after  K,  there  is  no  glottal  catch.  Thus  l^inau^,  herein,  barUTt' 
ter,  tDarum,  i^oran,  t)oriiber,  iDteberum,  tiollenben,  are  easy  for 
Americans,  as  they  are  pronounced  without  the  glottal  catch. 

Consonants. 

335.  Dissimilar  Consonants.  —  The  consonants  which  have 
sounds  not  found  in  English  are  d^,  g,  I,  and  r*  Naturally 
they  make  the  most  trouble  for  Americans. 

336.  The  Sound  of  rff.  —  (1)  When  we  pronounce  ^  after  a, 
U,  U,  or  au,  the  back  of  the  tongue  is  raised  and  drawn  back 
toward  the  soft  palate  so  that  a  scraping  sound  is  made  as  the 
breath  is  forced  through.  It  is  like  the  Scotch  ch  in  loch.  The 
nearest  equivalent  English  sound  is  the  rasping  we  sometimes 
make  at  the  end  of  a  long  yawn,  or  the  sound  some  people  utter 
when  breathing  on  their  eye-glasses  before  cleaning  them. 
Pronounce :  a6),  ba^  53uc^,  ba^  8od^,  avi6). 

(2)  After  all  other  sounds  —  that  is,  after  consonants  or  e,  t, 
CU,  or  the  umlauted  vowels  —  ^  has  a  sound  resembling  the 
noise  made  by  a  spitting  cat.  Eaise  the  tongue  to  the  position 
for  long  i  (Fig.  1)  and  holding  it  there,  stop  the  vowel  sound 


PRONUNCIATION.  245 

and   breathe   out.     Pronounce:   ba§  ^ed),  ba^  8i(I}t,  eU(^,  bie 
%'6&jitx,  bie  ©cither,  bie  Zviijtx,  bie  ®d)(au(^e,  ix)el(^,  tnanc^* 

The  guttural  rf)-sound,  made  in  the  back  of  the  mouth,  goes 
naturally  with  the  vowels  a,  0,  and  u,  which  are  formed  in 
the  middle  or  back  of  the  mouth  (see  Fig.  4).  The  palatal 
(j^-sound,  made  against  the  front  part  of  the  palate,  goes  natu- 
rally with  the  vowels  formed  in  the  front  of  the  mouth  (Fig.  4) 
or  with  I  or  n,  both  of  which  are  articulated  with  the  tongue 
against  the  front  of  the  palate  (Fig.  5). 

(3)  At  the  beginning  of  a  syllable,  (i|  is  pronounced  as  in  (2) 
before  c  and  i:  S^emie,  E'^itta*  Before  other  vowels  or  con- 
sonants it  is  pronounced  like  l :  g^or,  Shrift,  g^arafter,  S^^^^, 
iDad^fett- 

337.  The  Sounds  of  g.  —  (1)  German  g  at  the  beginning  of 
a  word  or  syllable  is  like  English  g  in  go.  (2)  At  the  end  of 
a  syllable  it  is  like  k  except  (3)  in  the  ending  ig,  when  it  is 
like  rff  in  td^. 

Thus  ^  and  g  in  ri^tig  are  pronounced  alike.  But  as  soon 
as  inflectional  endings  are  added  to  final  g,  so  that  g  becomes 
the  first  letter  in  the  following  syllable,  g  is  pronounced  like  g 
in  go.  Pronounce :  (1)  gut,  gritti ;  (2)  ber  Zd^,  ber  @ieg ; 
(3)  ru^ig,  rii^tig  ;  but  (1)  bie  SEage,  bie  Siege,  ru^iger,  rid^tiger. 

Note.  There  is  less  uniformity  in  Germany  for  the  pronunciation  of 
g  than  for  any  other  letter.  Probably  half  the  people  in  Germany  pro- 
nounce final  g  like  final  6),  as  in  §  336,  1  or  2.  But  the  best  authorities 
are  now  agreed  upon  the  pronunciation  as  given  above. 

338.  The  Sound  of  L — German  I  is  pronounced  with  the 
tohgue  pressed  against  the  front  of  the  palate,  like  Hi  in  million 
(Fig.  5).  The  sound  of  y  in  year  seems  interwoven  with  the 
i,  which  is  made  in  the  very  front  of  the  mouth,  not  at  the 


246 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 


back  as  English  I  One  might  say  that  German  I  has  an 
ee-shade  (Fig.  1),  while  English  I  has  an  oo-shade  (Fig.  3). 
Pronounce :  8tHt  Se^matttt,  alle§,  IW!- 

339.  The  German  r*  —  There  are  two  distinct  German  t's  ; 
the  tongue-tip  (trilled)  r,  and  the  uvula  (rolled)  r*  Both  differ 
from  the  American  slurred  r  of  the  East  and  South,  and  from 

the    drawled    r    of    the 
West. 

(1)  In  the  trilled  r 
(Fig.  6),  the  tongua-tip 
is  vibrated  against  the 
palate  just  behind  the 
front  teeth.  This  is  not 
only  the  easier  of  the 
two,  but  it  is  the  one 
approved  on  the  stage. 

(2)  The  uvula  or  throat 
t  (Fig.  7)  is  made  by  the 
vibrations  of  the  uvula 
upon  the  back  of  the 
tongue.  It  is  more  dis- 
tinctively German,  but 
it  is  usually  difficult  for 

Americans  to  acquire.  In  a  way  it  resembles  a  gargle,  and  it 
may  best  be  developed  from  the  guttural  d^,  §  336,  1.  In  fact, 
many  Germans  pronounce  r  as  d^  when  speaking  rapidly ;  they 
give  9)?art^a  and  9J?agba  almost  the  same  sound.  The  physio- 
logical explanation  of  this  is  that  in  very  rapid  speech  the 
uvula  fails  to  vibrate  when  the  breath  is  forced  out,  thus 
making  only  the  scraping  sound  of  d),  §  336,  1.     For   this 


Fig.  5. — The  Tongue-position  for  I. 


PRON  UNCI  A  TlOJSr. 


247 


uvula  r  the  front  of  the 
tongue  must  never  be 
raised  as  in  the  drawled 
r  of  the  West.  The 
back  of  the  tongue  is 
raised  so  that  the  uvula 
is  forced  to  vibrate  when 
we  breathe  out  (see 
Fig.  7). 

Note,  In  conversation 
the  r  in  the  unaccented  syl- 
lable er  is  not  rolled.  The 
uvula  touches  the  tongue  just 
once,  but  does  not  vibrate. 
This  makes  a  very  short  aw- 
sound,  akin  to  o  in  short. 
Thus  S)er  ^atev  l)at  e§  t)er= 
geffen  is  spoken  almost  like 
Daw  fahtaw  hat  es  fawges- 
sen.  The  sound  here  repre- 
sented by  aw  is  as  short  as  it 
can  possibly  be.  It  is  not  at 
all  like  the  avj  in  ' '  See,  saw, 
Marjorie  Daw,^"*  but  on  the 
contrary  so  brief  as  to  be 
practically  only  a  grace 
note. 

340.  Length  of  Conso- 
nants. —  German  has 
long  and  short  conso- 
nants as  well  as  long 
and  short  vowels  A 
long  vowel  followed  by 


Fig.  6. — The  Tongue-position  for  trilled  r» 


The  Tongue-position  for  uvula  tt 


248  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

a  short  consonant  offers  no  difficulty,  as  that  is  a  frequent 
combination  in  English.  But  care  must  be  taken  to  prolong 
a  consonant  following  a  short  vowel.  Remember  to  hold 
tongue  and  jaw  still  during  a  German  vowel-sound  and  to 
jump  without  any  slur  from  a  vowel  to  the  following  conso- 
nant, especially  when  the  vowel  is  short.  Compare  ber  ^onig 
and  fdttnen*  Pronounce  S5  5  d  ij  nig  and  Ion  Tin  n  nen*  In  the 
same  way  pronounce  bte  @(^ule  and  bie  ®(J)Ulb  (@d)U  U  U  n  le 
and  ©c^uinib).  Also  ber  Of  en  and  off  en  (D  o  o  o  fen  and 
offfffen)*  Be  careful  always  to  jump  without  any  slur  from 
the  vowel  to  the  consonant.  Do  not  say  Sol^^/ilnig,  fo|i^^|nnen, 
^6:)Vi\uh\lt,  (Sd)n\uh\lh,  D|w^|fen,  o|w/i|ffen. 

This  is  one  of  the  most  characteristic  features  of  German  and 
one  of  the  easiest  to  learn.  Just  reraeniber  to  put  on  extra 
lung-pressure  for  short  vowels  and  then  to  hold  the  following 
consonant.  If  we  admire  something  very  much,  we  say  it  is 
"  wo  0  0  nderful^^ ;  a  German  says  „tt)nnnnbert)oIt.''  The  best 
English  illustration  of  this  is  the  way  ng  is  prolonged  in  the 
American  slang  expression :  "  Stung !  "  This  length  of  conso- 
nants is  especially  easy  to  get  with  I,  m,  and  n*     Try  these  first. 

A  few  good  pairs  with  which  to  practice  these  short  vowels 
followed  by  long  consonants  and  to  compare  them  with  similar 
long  vowels  followed  by  short  consonants  are  :  bent  (So^ne,  bie 
(Sonne;  fit^Ien,  fiillen;  !omif(^,  fomnten;  ber  ©ta^I,  ber  ©tall; 
mo^toollen;  ber  33aIIfaaI;  §alle  an  ber  (Saate;  ben  @^afen, 
fc^affen;  lam,  ber  ^amm;  la^m,  ba^  Samm. 

Pitch. 

341.  Change  of  Pitch.  —  In  English  words  the  vowel  carries 
the  changes  in  pitch.  When  we  say  "  Oh,  come  on  "  in  a  plead- 
ing tone,  the  o  in  on  slides  several  notes  down  the  scale.     If 


PBONITNCIATION.    .  249 

a  German  were  to  use  the  same  expression  „Somm  an"  in  the 
same  tone,  the  n  in  atl  would  carry  this  change  in  pitch. 
Graphically  this  may  be  represented  by  English  ^^Come  0"^^  "  ; 

German  „®omm  Cltt?^♦''  In  German  any  change  in  pitch  is  car- 
ried by  the  long  element  in  the  syllable,  whether  vowel  or  con- 
sonant. Of  course,  to  carry  change  in  pitch  a  consonant  must 
be  voiced,  that  is,  the  vocal  cords  must  vibrate  when  it  is  pro- 
nounced. Thus  change  of  pitch  cannot  be  carried  by  mutes 
like  p,  h,  t 

Assimilation. 

342.  The  Ending  ctt.  —  Much  of  the  speed  with  which  Ger- 
mans speak  is  due  to  their  clipping  of  the  ending  ctt*  An  enor- 
mous number  of  German  words  end  in  eu,  the  sound  of  which 
is  shortened  in  various  ways.  In  conversation  the  c  in  etl  is 
always  silent.  The  n  then  undergoes  various  changes,  called 
assimilation  J  depending  upon  the  preceding  or  following  conso- 
nant. Chief  of  these  are  :  (1)  next  to  16  or  )j ;  (2)  after  g ;  and 
(3)  after  n  or  ng* 

(1)  When  the  ending  en  comes  just  after  or  just  before  a  i 
or  a  ^j  sound,  it  is  pronounced  like  m.  The  sentence  2Bir  ^ben 
eben  fiebett  ^naben  gefe^en  is  pronounced,  SBir  ^abm  ebm  fiebm 
.^nabm  gefe^ti,  gfd^enb^it^  and  aBoIfenbiittel  are  pronounced 
gf^mbarf)  and  aBoIfmbutteL^ 

iThis  statement  is  at  variance  with  German  pronunciation  as  formally 
taught,  but  it  is  consistent  with  the  practice,  even  of  teachers.  The  author 
once  heard  a  professor  in  the  University  of  Berlin  —  a  man  well  known  in 
America  — say  in  a  lecture  :  2)te  ©nbung  ,en'  mu§  tmmer  tjolln  Zon  ^abml 
Advocates  of  stage  German  insist  that  en  should  have  its  regular  sound,  but 
even  on  the  stage  h  and  p  usually  attract  n  to  m.  For  instance,  ^upmhtint 
(in  Frey tag's  "3"^urnaltften")  is  never  pronounced  according  to  the  stage  rules. 


250  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

If  we  notice  carefully  how  6  and  p  come  to  attract  n  to  ttl, 
we  shall  see  that  it  is  all  done  by  the  soft  palate.  For  the 
sounds  h  and  p  the  lips  are  closed  and  the  soft  palate  cuts  off 
the  nasal  passage.  For  the  following  n-sound  it  is  much  easier 
to  keep  the  lips  closed  and  simply  to  let  the  soft  palate  down, 
thus  opening  the  nasal  passage,  than  it  is  to  open  the  lips  and 
raise  the  tongue  to  the  n-position.  This  opening  of  the  nasal 
passage  gives  a  nasal  sound,  and  the  only  nasal  sound  possible 
with  the  lips  closed  is  m. 

(2)  A  similar  process  to  that  just  described  takes  place 
when  en  follows  g.  In  the  sound  of  g  in  ge'^ett  (§  337,  1)  the 
nasal  passage  is  closed  by  the  soft  palate,  and  it  is  easier  to 
lower  the  soft  palate  than  to  raise  the  tongue  to  the  n-position. 
The  result  is  that  the  following  n-sound  becomes  nasal  (like  ng 
in  sing).  SBir  tragen  f)of)e  ^ragen  is  pronounced  SBir  tragng 
l^o^e  Sragng. 

(3)  When  the  ending  en  follows  n  or  ng  it  is  indicated 
simply  by  a  cliange  of  pitch.  The  change  may  be  up  or  down. 
In  other  words  the  tongue  remains  in  the  n= position  while  the 
vocal  cords  alter  the  pitch.  This  may  be  graphically  indi- 
cated thus :  2Btr  f 5nnen  einen  f d^onen  ©^^ajtergang  maiden  —  tt)tr 
fontt^  etn"^  fcf)o^  ©pajtergang  ma&n  —  or  tpir  Ii3nn3  etn3 
fc^on3®pa5tergang  ma(f)n.  @ie  ftngen  an,  gu  fingen — fie  fing^ 
an,  ju  fing^  o^  fie  fing^  an,  ju  fing"^* 

Actors  always  say  ^ie^mbrinf.  This  is  a  practically  universal  law,  which  the 
Greeks  and  Romans  embodied  in  their  written  language:  €P-{-^dWuj—4fji^dX\uj 
(en  +  ballo  —  emballo) ;  con  +  preheudo  —  comprehendo.  In  speaking  hur- 
riedly we  say  "  0pm  the  door,"  for  "  Open  the  door." 


WORD  FORMATION.  251 

"WORD   FORMATION. 

343.  Introduction.  —  German  is  very  rich  in  compound 
words.  Not  only  does  it  compound  many  words  which  in 
English  are  written  separate,  as  bte  §au:pt[a(l)e,  the  main  thing^ 
bte  8uftfrf)tfffa^rt^afttengefel(fd)aft,  the  airship  passage  stock 
company,  and  so  on,  but  it  is  particularly  varied  in  its  roots, 
prefixes,  and  suffixes. 

344.  Roots.  —  German  roots  often  vary  their  vowel  sounds 
so  that  it  is  hard  to  identify  the  original  root :  [(^liej^en,  ba^ 
(Sdjfo^,  ber  ®d)(u§ ;  ber  Sunb,  bte  Sinbe,  ba^  53anb»  English 
also  has  this  same  kind  of  change:  sing,  sang,  sung,  song; 
swim,  swam,  swum. 

Nouns  derived  from  verb  roots  are  usually  of  one  of  three 
kinds  :  (a)  an  active  object,  performing  the  action  of  the  verb ; 
(&)  a  passive  object,  on  which  the  action  of  the  verb  is  per- 
formed; or  (c)  an  abstract  noun,  denoting  the  condition  or 
action  of  the  verb. 

(a)  J)a^  Sanb  (binben),  something  that  binds. 
®er  Sogen  (btegen),  something  that  bends. 
!j)er  glu^  (Pie^en),  something  that  flows. 

(6)  !j)er  Srud^  (brecfien),  something  that  is  broken. 
!Der  Sunb  (binben),  something  that  is  bound. 
©er  Sranf  (trinfen),  something  that  is  drunk. 

(c)  !j)er  Slug  (fltegen),  action  or  condition  of  flying. 
S)er  ®ang  (ge^en),  action  or  condition  of  going. 
©er  2^run!  (trinfen),  action  or  condition  of  drinking. 

345.  On  the  next  page  are  given  some  common  verbal  roots 
from  which  nouns  are  derived  in  the  way  just  shown. 


252  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

^inben,  to  hind;  ber  Sanb,  hound  vohime;  ba^  53anb,  rihhon; 

bie  33inbe,  handage;  ber  33unb,  2>ond,  union. 
gitegen,  ^o  /ow;;  ber  glu^,  nVer;  ba^  glo^,  rq/)^. 
®raben,  to  dig;  ha^  ®rab,  grave;  bie  ®rube,  grotto;  bie  ®ruft, 

vault;  ber  ®raben,  d^Yc/i. 
^lingen,  ^o  sound;  ber  Slang,  sound;  bie  S(inge(,  &eZ?. 
©c^ie^en,  ^o  s/ioo^;  ber  ®d)U^,  s/io^;  ber  (Sd^o^,  s/zoo^,  ^w;/^. 
©c^Iagen,  to  strike;  ber  @(J)(ag,  stroke;  bie  @(i)Ia(^t,  6a#Ze. 
©d^Ue^en,  (o  shut;  ba^  ©C^to^,  ^oc/c;  cas^Ze;  ber  @(^Iu^,  end; 

ber  ©c^liiffel,  key. 
®ingen,  to  sing;  ber  @ang,  ber  ®efang,  song. 
©pred^en,  to  speak;  bie  ©praise,  language;  ber  ©prud^,  saying; 

ba^  ®e[pradf),  conversation. 
Strinfen,  ^o  drm/^;;  ber  Jran!  and  ber  S^rutif,  c?nnA:. 
SBiegen,  (1)   to  weigh ^  (2)  to  rock;  (1)  bie  SBage,  scale;  ba^ 

®ett)i(^t,  weight;  (2)  bie  SBiege,  cradle;  bie  SBoge,  ?/.'a'ye. 
^icl^en,  ^o  dmw  ;  ber  ^Vi^,  train ;  feature ;  bie  3^^^^  hreed(ing), 

346.  German  Prefixes  may  be  divided  into  two  classes,  verhal 
and  general.  The  verbal  prefixes  have  been  treated  under  in- 
separable and  separable  verbs.  Of  the  general  prefixes  the 
most  important  are :  erj^,  ge-,  Utl',  ur=.  They  are  used  chiefly 
with  nouns. 

(a)  Srj'  (English  arch-)  means  leader,  chief;  ber  Srjbifd^of, 
archhishop;  ber  (Srj^erjog,  archduke;  ber  ©rjIUgtier,  arch-liar, 

(h)  ®t-  (no  English  equivalent)  forms  (1)  collectives  out  of 
noun  stems,  or  (2)  verhal  nouns  from  verb  stems. 

(1)  S)a^  ®ebirge,  mountain  chain  (ber  Serg) ;  bie  ®e' 
briiber,  hrothers  (ber  ©ruber);  ba^  ®efieber, pZwma^e  (S^eber). 

(2)  ber  ®eban!e,  thought  (ben!en) ;    ba^  ®ebi^t,  poem 
(bic!^ten) ;  ba^  ®t\i^tVii,  present  (f^en!en). 


WOBD  FOBMATION.  253 

(c)  Utl=  (English  im-  or  in-,  sometimes  mis-)  usually  reverses 
the  meaning  of  a  word :  uttarttg,  naughty  (arttg) ;  uttbeftimmt, 
indefinite  (befttmtnt)  ;  bte  Uugebulb,  impatience  (bie  ®ebulb), 

(d)  Ur==  (no  English  equivalent)  denotes  origin  or  source.  It 
may  also  intensify  the  meaning  of  a  word ;  uralt,  very  old 
(att) ;  ur!omt[(^,  very  funny  (fottiifd^) ;  ber  Urfl^rung,  source  (ber 
(Sprung) ;  ba^  \Xx\Qaih,  primeval  forest  (ber  SBalb), 

347.  Suffixes.  —  Many  German  words  are  formed  by  adding 
suffixes  to  roots.  The  most  important  groups  of  words  formed 
in  this  way  are :  (1)  nouns,  (2)  adjectives,  and  (3)  verbs 
Nouns  formed  by  suffix  may  be  divided  into  two  classes  :  con- 
crete and  abstract. 

348.  Concrete  Nouns  are  formed  by  the  following  suffixes : 
c^en,  letn,  er,  in,  and  ling- 

(a)  Sf)en  and  lein  form  neuter  diminutives  out  of  other 
nouns,  the  root  vowel  taking  Umlaut  when  possible:  ba^ 
9Kdbc[)en,  little  girl  (bte  SJiagb);  ba^  ^Six^Iein,  brooklet  (ber 
^a(^) ;  ba^  grauletn,  Miss,  little  woman  (bte  grau). 

(b)  @r  forms  masculine  agents,  usually  with  Umlaut,  from  — 

(1)  Nouns :    ber  glei[(^er,  butcher    (ba^  Sf^t[d^) ;    ber 
©artner,  gardener  (ber  ®arten) ;  ber  stopfer,  potter  (ber  2:opf)« 

(2)  Verbs :  ber  git{)rer,  guide  (fU^ren)  ;  ber  8efer,  reader 
(lefen) ;  ber  ®(^retber,  clerk  (ft^reiben). 

(c)  Qn  forms  feminines  from  masculines ;  bie  ^ontgtn,  queen 
(ber  ^tintg) ;  bie  Sel^rertn,  lady  teacher  (ber  gefjrer). 

(d)  8ing  forms  masculines  of  varying  meaning,  having  Um- 
laut when  possible. 

(1)  Nouns :    ber  ©iinftttng,  favorite  (bte    ®unft) ;    ber 
©|3ro^Ung,  scion  (ber  ®^3ro^,  sprout). 


254  ELEMENTS   OF  GEBMAN.  ■ 

(2)  Adjectives :  bet  gremblittg,  stranger  (fremb)  ;  ber 
grueling,  spring  (frii^)  ;  ber  -Sitngltng,  youth  (jung). 

(3)  Verbs  :  ber  gmbltng,  foundling  (fittben)  ;  ber  ge^rling, 
apprentice  (lefjren) ;  ber  ©ciugUng,  suckling  (faugen). 

(4)  Numerals :  ber  dx^tlin^,  first  fruits  (erft) ;  ber  3tt)i(ttng, 
twin  (5tx)et)  ;  ber  ©rifling,  triplet  (brei), 

349.  Abstract  Nouns  are  formed  by  the  following  suffixes  :  e, 
ei,  l^eit,  !eit,  [rf)aft,  andung* 

(a)  (5  forms  abstract  feminines  with  Umlaut  from  — 

(1)  Adjectives  :  bte  §drte,  hardness,  cruelty  (^art)  ;  bte 
@ro^e,  size  (gro^) ;  bte  gcinge,  length  (lang). 

(2)  Verb  Eoots :  bie  :93ttte,  request  (bitten);  bie  Siebe,  love 
(tieben) ;  bie  giige,  lie  (litgen), 

(h)  @i  forms  feminines  of  various  meanings  (many  have 
become  concrete)  from  — 

(1)  IS'ouns:  bie  ^Mtxtx,  bakery  (ber  Sdder);  bie  gift^erei, 
fishery  (ber  i^tfrfier) ;  bie  @!Iat)erei,  slavery  (ber  ©ftatje)* 

(2)  Verbs :  bie  5Re(ferei,  chaffing  (neden,  to  tease) ;  bie 
^lauberei,  chattering  (planbern)  ;  bie  @(^meicf)elei,  flattery 
(f(^mei(^eln), 

(c)  §eit  forms  abstract  feminines  from  — 

(1)  Nouns :  bie  Sinb^eit,  childhood  (ba^  Mnb)  ;  bte 
9Kenfcf)^eit,  humanity  (ber  9)fenf(^). 

(2)  Adjectives :  bte  ©nmm^eit,  stupidity  (bumm) ;  bie 
(5inf)eit,  unity  (ein)  ;  bie  Sei^^eit,  wisdom  (tt)etfe)* 

{d)  ^eit  forms  abstract  feminines  from  adjectives  which 
have  endings  like  ig,  1x6),  fatn,  bar,  etc. :  bte  !l)anfbarfett,  grati- 
tude (banlbar) ;  bie  grennblic^feit,  Idndness  (freunblii^). 

(e)  ©djaft  forms  abstract  feminines,  chiefly  from  nouns  de- 


WOBD  FOBMATION,  255 

noting  persons :  bie  Siirgerf c^af t,  citizens  (bet  Sitrger) ;    bie 
!Diener[c^aft,  servants  (ber  ©iener). 

(/)  Utig  forms  abstract  feminines,  chiefly  from  verbs :  bie 
grjci^tung,  story  (erjci^ten) ;  bie  Sleibung,  clothing  (fteiben)- 

350.    Adjectives  are  formed  by  the  following  suffixes :  bar^ 
en,  ^ft,  ig,  \\6),  lid),  and  fant* 
(a)  33ar  forms  adjectives  from  — 

(1)  Nouns:  ban!6ar,  grateful  (ber  3)an!) ;   e^rbar,  hon- 
orable (bie  S^re) ;  furc^tbar,  terrible  (bie  gurc^t). 

(2)  Verbs :   brauc^bar,  usable  (.brau(^en) ;   epai%  eatable 
(effen) ;  le^bar,  Zegr26Ze  (lefen), 

(6)  @tl  forms  adjectives,  usually  of  material,  from  nouns : 
etd^en,  oaken  (bie  ©it^e) ;  golben,  golden  (ba^  ®oIb)» 

(c)  §aft  forms  adjectives  from  — 

(1)  Nouns :  efel^aft,  disgusting  (ber  (Sfet) ;  Ttieifter^aft, 
masterful  (ber  SJieifter) ;  fitnb^aft,  sinful  (bie  ©itnbe). 

(2)  Adjectives :  bo^^aft,  malicious  (bdfe,  bad) ;  !ran!^aft, 
s^c%  (Iran!) ;  tra^r^ft,  real  (iDa^r,  true). 

(d)  Q^  forms  adjectives,  chiefly  from  nouns :  ttlUttg,  cou- 
rageous (ber  SKut) ;  fonnig,  sunny  (bie  ®oune). 

(e)  Q^6)  forms  adjectives,  chiefly  from  proper  nouns :  atneri- 
fanifc^,  American  (ber  2lmertfaner)  ;  frans^fif^,  French  (ber 
grangofe) ;  ^omerifc^,  Homeric  (ber  §omer)» 

(/)  8icf)  forms  adjectives  from  — 

(1)  Nouns :  gtitcMirf),  happy  (ba^  ®Iii(f )  ;  menfc^Ii^,  human 
(ber  5Kenf(^) ;  tagU(^,  c?a?72/  (ber  3:ag). 

(2)  Adjectives :    fro^U(^,  joyous  (frot))  ;    IangU(^,  lengthy 
(lang) ;  rbtUi^,  reddish  (rot). 


256  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

(3)  Verbs :  begretflti^,  comprehensible  (begretf en) :  fraglid^, 
questionable  (fragen)  ;  ^a^ti^,  hateful,  ugly  (^affen)* 

(g)  (Satn  forms  adjectives  from  — 

(1)  Nouns :  furd^tfatti,  timid  (bie  gurd^t) ;  gelDaltfam, 
violent  (bie  ©etDalt)  ;  fittfatn,  modest  (bie  (Sitte,  usage). 

(2)  Verbs  :^  biegfatu,  pliable  (biegen)  ;  ge^orfam,  obedient 
(gel^ord^en) ;  ftre^fam,  assiduous  (ftreben,  to  strive), 

351.  Verbs  are  formed  by  the  following  suffixes :  en,  em, 
teren,  and  igen* 

(a)  @n  forms  verbs  from  — 

(1)  Nouns :  bitrften,  to  brush  (bie  SSitrfte) ;  fifteen,  to  fish 
(ber  gifc^) ;  !u[fen,  to  kiss  (ber  Sn^). 

(2)  Adjectives :  fatten,  to  harden  (^art)  ;  flatten,  to  iron 
flat  (plait ^  flat);  ftdrfen,  to  strengthen  (ftar!). 

(3)  Eoots  of  other  verbs:  brcingen,  to  crowd  (bringen, io 
force  one^s  way) ;  (fatten),  to  fell  (fatten). 

(b)  dxn  forms  verbs,  chiefly  from  adjectives.  With  com- 
paratives it  may  be  considered  as  simply  -n  added  to  the  com- 
parative root.  A  prefix  —  commonly  t)er*  —  often  precedes 
the  root:  t)erbeffern,  to  correct  (beffer)  ;  t)erlangern,  to  prolong 
(Knger)  ;  Dergrb^ern,  to  enlarge  (gro^). 

(c)  ^eren  forms  verbs,  chiefly  from  foreign  words  :  antU=* 
fieren,  to  entertain  (Ft.  amuser) ;  regteren,  to  rule  (Lat.  regere). 

(d)  ^g^tt  forms  verbs  from  — 

(1)  Nouns:  l^nlbigen,  to  do  homage  (bie  @utb,  grace)] 
freujigen,  to  crucify  (ba^  ^ren^) ;  fteinigen,  to  stone  (ber  (Stein). 

(2)  Adjectives  (when  an  adjective  has  the  ending  ^ig, 
this  class  of  verbs  is  not  to  be  distinguished  from  that  in  (a)): 
befeftigen,  to  fasten  (feft) ;  befc^bnigen,  to  beautify  (fi^5n). 


WOBD   FORMATION,  257 

352.  German  Compounds  always  have  the  basic  word  last : 
blaugrun,  hluish  green;  griinblau^  greenish  blue.  They  may  be 
any  part  of  speech  (nouns  take  their  gender  from  the  last  ele- 
ment):  ba^  5rt[(f)bein  (noun),  table  leg;  ba^felbe  (pronoun),  the 
same;  l^eHblaU  (adjective),  light  blue;  lt)a^rfagen  (verb),  to 
prophesy ;  bergatt  (adverb),  up  hill;  attftatt  (preposition),  instead 
of;  nai^bem  (conjunction),  after;  :pofetaufenb  (interjection), 
Great  Scott!  But  most  compounds  are  (1)  Nouns,  (2)  Adjec- 
tives, and  (3)  Verbs. 

353.  Compound  Nouns  may  be  formed  from  — 

(a)  Nouns:  ba^  ^thtxhtii,  feather  bed;  ber  gittger^ut,  ^^im- 
ble;  ba^  ©olbftUd,  gold  piece;  bie  ^auptftabt,  capital  city. 

(b)  Pronouns,  usually  felbft :  ber  ©elbftmorb,  suicide;  ber 
©elbftlaut,  voioel;  bie  ©elbftfui^t,  selfishness. 

(c)  Adjectives:  ber  33Itibfinn,  nonsense;  ba^  ©eutfc^Iattb, 
Germany ;  bie  ©ro^TUUtter,  grandmother. 

(d)  Verbs:  ba^  3^a{)rrab,  bicycle;  bie  j^nU^tbtX^  fou7itain  pen. 

(e)  Adverbs:  bie  Slu^eufeite,  outside;  ba^  Sbenbilb,  image. 
(/)  Prepositions:  ba^  Ttittdb,  pity;  bie  9^a(^tt)elt,  posterity. 

354.  Compound  Adjectives  may  be  formed  from  — 

(a)  Nouns:  hxl\>\d)on^  pretty  as  a  picture;  feefratt!,  seasick; 
ftlber^ett,  clear  as  crystal. 

(b)  Adjectives:  bitterfU^,  bitter  sweet;  gutmilttg,  good  nar 
tured;  gritnblau,  greenish  blue. 

(c)  Verbs  :  bemerfett^itjert,  worthy  of  note;  lernbegterig,  ea^er 
to  learn;  merflDilrbtg,  remarkable. 

(d)  Prepositions :  aufred^t,  upright;  au^erorbetttttd^,  ex- 
traordinary;  >o^x{CiVi{f  foricard,  pert. 


258  ELEMENTS   OF  GEBMAN, 

355.  Compound  Verbs  may  be  formed  from  — 

(a)  Nouns:  ^au^f)a(ten,  to  keep  house;  ftattfitlbetl,  to  take 
place;  tetltte^men,  to  take  part, 

(&)  Adjectives:  gro^tUtt,  to  swagger;  ttebclugeln,  to  ogle; 
tiottenben,  to  finish. 

(c)  Adverbs  :  '^inge^en,  to  go  away;  tDteberfommen,  to  co7ne 
again;  guriicffe'^ren,  to  turn  back. 

(d)  Prepositions  :  anjie^en,  to  put  on;  mitgel)en,  to  go  along 
ivith;  nad)fi^en,  to  stay  after  school. 

356.  Derivations  through  the  Latin.  — Latin  students  may  like 
to  compare  certain  English  words,  derived  from  Latin,  with 
their  German  synonyms.  German  equivalents  for  many  Eng- 
lish words  may  be  found  by  translating  the  Latin  word,  part 
by  part,  into  German.  A  few  illustrations  are  given  below; 
students  should  be  on  the  watch  for  others. 

(a)  Nouns: 

Attraction,  bte  2In5te^ung  (ad,  an  +  trahere,  jie^en)* 

Eruption,  bet  §lu^bru(^  (e,  au^  +  rumpere,  bred^ett), 

(6)  Adjectives  : 

Retrograde,  riicfgdngig  (retro,  rltcf  4-  gradi,  ge^eti)* 

Subsequent,  nadifolgenb  (sub,  narf)  +  sequi,  folgen). 

(c)  Verbs: 

Expel,  a}X^ixt\htn  (ex,  au^  4-  pellere,  treiben). 
Prescribe,  t3orf(i)rieben  (prae,  t)or  +  scribere,  f(J)reiben)* 
Survive,  iiberlebett  (super,  iiber  +  vivere,  Itbtn)* 

GRIMM'S   LATV 

357.  Jacob  Grimm  was  one  of  the  greatest  scholars  Germany 
ever  produced.     He  is  best   known  for  the  discovery  or   the 


GRIMM'S  LAW.  269 

working  out  of  Grimm'' s  Law.  In  all  its  details  this  law  is  too 
complex  for  any  but  advanced  students,  but  many  parts  of  it 
may  be  readily  understood  by  beginners.  In  brief  it  is  the 
law  of  cognates  or  of  related  words. 

358.  The  German  Language,  as  it  is  spoken  and  written  to-day, 
is  a  growth  or  development  from  an  older  tongue,  commonly 
called  Germanic.  From  the  Germanic  language  grew  in  suc- 
cession Old  High  German  ( 1100),  Middle  High  German 

'  (1100-1350),  and  New  High  German,  which  is  usually  dated 
from  the  time  of  Martin  Luther  (1483-1546).  During  this 
evolution  certain  changes  of  sounds  took  place,  somewhat  like 
those  that  have  taken  place  in  English  from  the  old  Anglo- 
Saxon  through  Chaucer  and  Shakspere  down  to  the  present 
time. 

359.  Cognates. — English,  as  well  as  German,  comes  from 
•  the  old  Germanic  language,  so  we  have  many  words  in  English 

like  corresponding  German  words.  These  similar  words  are 
called  cognates,  (a)  Some  are  identical  in  spelling  but  differ- 
ent in  sound ;  (b)  some  are  identical  in  sound  but  different  in 
spelling ;  (c)  others  differ  in  both  sound  and  spelling  and  even 
in  meaning,  but  their  relation  to  each  other  can  easily  be  seen. 

(a)  Similar  spellings  are  seen  in  such  words  as  ber  3lrm,  ber 
Salt,  bte  X)ame,  ber  ?5tttger,  ha^  ®otb,  bte  §anb,  ba^  §orn,  ba^ 
8anb,  ber  ^iame,  ber  'ipian,  ber  ©acf,  ber  SBtnb.  Most  of  these 
have  been  given  in  the  vocabularies  of  this  book. 

(&)  Similar  sounds,  but  with  different  spelling,  are  seen  in 
such  words  as  ber  SS'dx,  ba^  S3oot,  ber  33uf(f),  ba^  ©0,  ba^  ®Ia^, 
ba^  §au^,  ber  9JJantt,  bie  3)iau^,  bie  Wild),  ber  3}?iil(er,  ber 
©ommer,  ber  ®tuf)L 


260  ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN. 

(c)  Other  cognates,  differing  in  both  sound  and  spelling,  are 
such  words  as  ba^  i8rot,  ber  :33ruber,  bte  geber,  ba^  }^tvitx,  ber 
®arten,  ber  §unb,  ber  §ut,  bte  a)?utter,  ba^  papier,  'ba^  ©alj, 
bte  ®(j^ule,  ber  ©o^n,  bte  Suppe,  ber  2:ee,  ber  SSater,  ber  SBagen. 

360.  Statement  of  the  Law.  —  From  these  examples  we  see 
that  many  consonants  are  just  the  same  in  both  German  and 
English.  These  are  in  general  the  liquids  (I,  tit,  tt,  r),  and  the 
letters  b^  f,  g,  f,  t|,  and  f,  when  these  latter  come  at  the  begin- 
ning of  a  word. 

But  many  consonants  are  different  in  English  and  in  German, 
although  certain  ones  in  English  correspond  regularly  to  the 
same  ones  in  German.  Jacob  Grimm  formulated  the  law  ^ 
showing  just  how  they  correspond.     In  general :  — 

(1)  English  d  is  German  t:  ber  Jag,  gut,  alt,  ba^  33ett, 
ba^  «rot, 

(2)  English  th  is  German  b :  ba^,  bte^,  bret,  ber  T)orn, 

(3)  English  v  is  German  6  :  ^abett,  lebeu,  gebett,  ba^  ©ilber. 

(4)  English  k  is  German  ^  :  ba^  93uci),  ttxai^ett,  bte  WA6), 

(5)  English  p  is  German  ^Jf  or  f  :  ber  ^fab,  bte  "iPflattje,  ba^ 
"iPfuttb,  ^offen,  reif. 

(6)  English  t  is  German  f  or  ff :  l^et^,  au^,  effen* 

1  Footnote  to  teachers.  The  statements  here  given  make  no  distinction 
between  the  first  and  second  sound-shifts,  nor  between  the  formulations 
of  Grimm,  Verner,  and  other  philologists.  They  merely  attempt  to  give 
pupils  an  idea  of  the  rela?tion  of  the  two  languages,  making  no  pretence  to 
scientific,  philological  completeness. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


Whtn^f  bcr,  be«  -§,  bic  -c,  evening; 
written  without  a  capital  in  ad- 
verbial expressions  like  ge'ftern 
a'benb,  ^eu'te  abenb,  mor'gen 
abcnb. 

5l'0cttbfott'ttCttfd^ctn,  ber,  be^  -^, 
evening  sunshine. 

3l'6cttbttHJr!c,  bic,  bte  -tt,  evening 
cloud. 

a'hcVf  conjunction,  followed  by  the 
normal  order^  but. 

ati^f  excL,  oh,  ah  ;  as  noun,  ha^ 
%d),  alas  ;  SSe^  unb  ^d),  (the  say- 
ing of)  Alas  and  alack  ! 

a^tf  eight. 

ad^i'mai,  eight  times. 

ad^t'jc^tt^utt'bcrtfic'bettttubnctttt^ 

^^  Stg,  1897. 

(t!^n'U(i^^  adj.,  like,  resembling,  sim- 
ilar, preceded  by  the  dative. 

W^'vtf  bie,  bte  -n,  ear  (of  corn) . 

aUf  all ;  for  special  uses,  see  §  124, 
b  ajid  §  162,  a. 

aKctn'(e),  alone;  2SaI)re  ®roge  l)at 
allein,  tt)er,  etc.,  only  he  who. 

aUtviydxt^i^  hardest  of  all. 

aW^tiif  always. 

dl^,  conjunction,  referring  to  past 
time,  when,  as ;  a(§  ob,  as  if ;  cor- 
relative, as ;  after  a  comparative, 
than. 


aV^Of  so,  then  (never  also). 

alt,  aVtttf  aCteft,  old;  as  a  noun, 

ber  5llte,  beg  -n,  bte  -n,  old  per- 
son, old  man. 
antf    an    bem ;    with    the   superl., 

§  212,  b. 
a'men',  excl.,  amen. 
%ml'x\laf  bag,  be^  -g,  America. 
amuftc'rcn  flti^,  fid^  amiifier'te,  ftd^ 

amiifiert'  (^aben),  to  have  a  good 

time. 
ait,  prep,  with  dat.  or  ace,  at,  by, 

near,  to ;  retd)  an,  rich  in  ;  benfen 

an,  to  think  of;  also  separable 

prefix  as  in  an'fangen. 
5(tt'bcgttttt,  ber,  beg  -g,  beginning; 

t)om   5lnbegtnn,  from   the    very 

first. 
att'bcr,  other,  different,  as  distin- 
guished from  nod)   (etn),   other, 

in  the  sense  o/more. 
^tn'bctigfetn,   "tiCi^,  being  different, 

difference,  peculiarity. 
an^bcrt^nrB,  one  and  a  half. 
^tn'fang,  ber,  beg-(e)g,  bie  tofcinge, 

beginning. 
an'fangctt,    fing    an^    an'gefangen 

(^aben),  er  fcingt  an,  to  begin, 

commence. 
att'gcfattgctt,  see  an'fangen, 
an'gefommctt,  see  an'fommen, 
an'geite^m,  agreeable,  pleasant  to, 

preceded  by  the  dative. 


antam 


an^alttn 


an'tawtf  see  ait'fomnteru 

an'fommcn,  fam  an',  an  gefommen 
(fein),  to  arrive ;  at,  in  or  an  with 
the  dative;  ba^  fommt  baranf 
an,  that  depends. 

att'ntuttg,  graceful. 

^n'na,  bic,  proper  name^  Anna. 

^n'^pxu^f  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  5ln= 
fpriic^e,  claim ;  in  5lnfpru(^  nef)= 
men,  lay  claim  to. 

an^iatt'fprep.  with  gen.,  instead  of ; 
followed  by  ^n  with  the  infinitive 
in  German^  where  English  has  a 
verbal  in  -ing. 

an'pfangen,  see  an'fangen. 

5ttt'5«9r  ber,  be§  -(e)^,  bie  ^tn'jiige, 
suit  (of  clothes). 

^^'fel,  ber,  be^  -«,  bie  "■,  apple. 

%x'ht\if  bie,  bic  -en,  work,  in  the 
sense  of  labor  as  distinguished 
from  \ia^  2Ber!,  work,  in  the  sense 
of  the  result  or  product  of  labor. 

ar'Bctten,  reg.  (^aben),  to  work. 

arm,  adj.,  poor. 

%xm,  ber,  be§  -(e)g,  W  -e,  arm. 

a%  ate,  see  effen» 

(iVi6)f  also,  too. 

5(tt(e),  bie,  bie  -(e) n,  meadow,  pas- 
ture. 

aitf,  prep,  with  dat.  or  ace,  on, 
upon,  onto;  anf  bentfc^,  in  Ger- 
man ;  anf  bie  ^o\i,  to  the  post- 
office;  anf  bent  i^anbe,  in  the 
country ;  marten  anf,  loith  ace, 
to  wait  for;  with  the  siiperl., 
anf«  "^oc^fte,  in  the  highest  possi- 
ble way ;  also  separable  prefix 
as  in  anf'^oren,  auf'mac^en,  anf':= 
fte^en,  etc. 


5tuf'gaBc,  bie,  bie  -n,  exercise,  as- 
signment, task,  problem. 

aitf'gcgattgen,  see  anf'gel)en. 

auf'gc^en,  ging  anf,  anf'gegangen 
(fein),  to  go  up,  rise,  arise;  of 
love,  bie  ?iebe  (c/.  p.  137),  to 
dawn. 

mifgeprt,  see  auf'^bren. 

auf'gelcfcn,  see  auf'Iefen, 

auf'geftanben,  see  anf'fte^en. 

auf'ptett,  reg.,  sep.  ({)aben),  to 
stop,  followed  in  German  by  the 
infinitive  with  ^n,  where  English 
has  the  verbal  in  -ing. 

aitf'Iefett,  lag  anf,  anfgelefen 
(tjaben),  er  tieft  anf,  to  gather  up, 
pick  up,  glean. 

aitfmati^Ctt,  reg.,  sep.  (l^aben),  to 
open. 

auf'ftel)ett,  ftanb  anf,  anfgeftanben 
((Cin),  to  rise,  get  up,  stand 
up. 

aitf  5ttma(^cn,  see  anf  mad)  en, 

^n'^Cf  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  -n,  eye. 

5ttt'gCttBUrf,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  -e,  mo- 
ment. 

^ug'Ieht,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  little 
eye. 

^Ittjiuft',  ber,  (the  month)  August ; 
^n'gnft,  ber,  Augustus,  August, 
the  man''s  name. 

an§f  prep,  with  dat. ,  out  of,  from 
out,  from,  of;  ein  9Jiarcf)en  ang 
alien  Batten,  a  tale  of  olden  times ; 
also  separable  prefix  as  in  aM'^ 
fatten,  ang'feljen,  ang'f^rerfjen, 
ang'fpannen,  etc. 

an§'({C^pvo6)Ctt,  see  ang'fpred^en. 

au^'f^aittn,  ^ielt  ang',  ang'ge^alten 


auSfal^ 


Bcrcitcn 


(Ijahtn),  cr  ^cilt  au«',  to  bear,  suf- 
fer, endure,  "stand." 

an§'^a%  see  aii^'fe^en. 

auie^'fc^en,  fal)  au«',  au§'gefe()eu 
(^abeu),  er  fie^t  au^^,  to  look, 
appear ;  ha^  ^2lu^fe^en,  beg  -6,  ap- 
pearance, look,  looks. 

aW^tvi)alhf  prep,  with  gen.,  out- 
side of. 

aUi^^f^attttCtt,  reg.,  sep.  (^abett),  to 
spread  out. 

'$in^'^pva(f)t,  bte,  bie  -n,  pronuncia- 
tion, accent,  in  the  sense  of  a 
good  German  accent. 

an^'^pvt^cn,  jprad^  aug',  aii^'ge- 
j^roc^en  (^abett),  cr  fprtd^t  aii§'; 
to  pronounce. 

au^'^ttf^^reri^ett,  see  an^'\pxt6)en. 


^a'dtf  bte,  bte  -tt,  cheek. 

Sab,  ba§,  be§  -«,  bie  "er,  bath. 

Saljlt,  bte,  bie  -en,  way,  road. 

Balti(c),  adv.,  soon;  batb  .  ,  ♦  balb, 
now  .  .  .  now ;  at  one  time  .  .  . 
then  again. 

f8aU,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  %  ball. 

Satta'bC,  bie,  bie  -n,  ballad. 

S3attb,  ber,  beS  -§,  bie  ""e,  volume. 

Batt'gCtt,  regr.  (tjaben),  usually  im- 
pers.  with  dat.,  eg  bangt  tnir,  to 
be  afraid ;  lattgeti  unb  bangen,  to 
be  longing  and  fearing. 

^anff  bte,  bte  ^e,  bench. 

S8arml)cr'5tg!ctt,  bte,  mercy. 

^an'ttntta^tf  bte,  bte  -en,  peas- 
ants' costume  or  dress. 

f8anm,  ber,  beg  -g,  bte  iBanme, 
tree. 


Scti^'ftcttt,  $?ubtt)tg,proi)er  name,  a 
German  poet. 

Bcbcu'teai,  re^;'.,  msep.  (l^aben),  to 
mean  (of  things)  as  contrasted 
with  ntetnen,  to  mean  {of  per- 
sons). 

htWdn'^tttf  reg.,  insep.  (l^aben),  to 
oppress;  bebrangt',  oppressed, 
afflicted. 

Befln'bctt  fid^,  fic^  befanb',  ftc^  befun'^ 
ben  (f)aben),  to  be,  to  do  (in 
health) ;  Ste  beftnben  @te  ftd^  ? 
How  do  you  do  ?  How  are 
you? 

begcg'ttCtt,  reg.,  insep.  (fetn),  fol- 
lowed by  the  dative,  to  meet  by 
chance,  happen  upon,  run  across. 

bcgitt'nen,  begann',  begon'nen  (Ija^ 
ben),  to  begin,  commence. 

Bcglii'cfctt,  reg.,  insep.  (^aben),  to 
make  happy ;  begliicft,  happy. 

Bcgott'nctt,  see  begin'nen, 

begdi'^cu,  reg.,  insep.  (^aben),  to 
greet. 

Bci,  prep,  xdth  dat.,  near,  close  to, 
by ;  at  the  house  of. 

I6ci'bc,  both,  two;  used  after  the 
article  or  adjective  that  precedes 
it  in  English  :  both  the  boys,  bte 
betben  ^naben. 

S5ettt,  bag,  beg  -g,  bte  -e,  leg. 

Bci'fjctt,  big,  gebtfjen  (^aben),  to 
bite. 

Bcfom'men,  be!am',  befom'men  (^a^ 
ben),  to  get,  secure,  procure. 

^tVXtMf  reg.  (^abett),  to  bark. 

^txtxi'f  ready,  prepared. 

bcrci'tcn,  reg,,  insep.  (^aben),  to 
prepare. 


SBerg 


25«(^ftaBc 


f&tx^f  hex,  be^  -(e)6,  bie  -e,  moun- 
tain. 

ht^^ti'^trtf  bejd^ieb',  befc^te'ben  (^a^ 
ben),  to  allot,  assign,  apportion. 

Bcf  fer,  better,  comparative  of  gut* 

beft,  best,  superlative  of  gut;  am 
beften,  best. 

Bcftirn'men,  regr.,  ^^^sep.  (i^ahen),  to 
decide,  decree,  settle. 

S^cfuc^',  ber,  beg  -(e) §,  bie  -e,  visit; 
visitor. 

licfu'ri^Ctt,  re^.,  insep.  (I)abeu),  to 
visit ;  of  school,  to  attend. 

betrii'bcn,  reg.,  insep.  ():)ahtn),  to 
grieve,  afflict,  depress. 

fdtttf  ha^,  beg  -(e)g,  bie -eu,  bed; 
gu  iBett,  to  bed. 

l^ic^gctt  \x^,  reg.  (l)aben),  to  bend 
(itself)  ;  to  sv^ray,  wave. 

SBic'ne,  bie,  bie  -n,  bee. 

S3i(b,  hoi^,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -er,  picture. 

iixV^tn,  reg.  ({)aben),  to  form,  fash- 
ion, shape ;  fic^  bilben,  to  form 
itself,  to  develop. 

SJtUctf ,  hOi^,  beg  -g,  bie  -e  {pro- 
nounced bilyet'),  ticket. 

hvXf  am,  see  fein. 

hi^f  prep,  with  ace,  till,  until; 
conjunction  with  dependent  order, 
till,  until. 

Bift,  art,  are,  see  fein. 

Ui'Uf  see  bit'teu. 

hit'tcttf  hat,  gebe'ten  (^aben),  to 
beg,  ask ;  for,  urn  with  the  ace.  ; 
(trf))  bitte,  please;  you're  wel- 
come. 

Ma'fctt,  blieg,  gebta'fen  (l^aben),  er 
btcift,  to  blow ;  of  the  watchman 
(SBdd^ter),  to  sound  his  horn. 


^laitf  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  "er,  leaf. 

Man,  blue. 

hid'htrtf  blteb,  geblie'ben  (fein),  to 

stay,  remain. 
Ui'dtttf    reg.     (^aben),    to    look, 

glance ;  see  also  nieberbltd en. 
hlit'^tUf    reg.    (^aben),    to    flash, 

gleam,  sparkle. 
ftlil'^ett,    reg.   (^aben),  to   bloom, 

blossom ;  to  flourish. 
S3(ttm'(i^Ctt,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  little 

flower,  posy. 
^Wmtf  bie,  bie  -n,  flower. 
SBJii'tenfri^tmmer,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — , 

gleam,    glitter,    or    splendor    of 

blossoms. 
So'bcn,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  floor. 
SBout,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  boat. 
Bur'gen,  reg.  (fjaben),  to  borrow. 
fSoxxitf  2^'^oper   name,   a    German 

author. 
hva^f  see  bre(i)en. 
Brau'd^Ctt,  reg.  (^aben),  to  need. 
hvaixn,  brown. 
to'd^cn,  brad^,  gebro'd)en  (^aben), 

er  brtd^t,  to  break. 
hvtxtf  broad,  wide. 
f&vtxxia'nOf  proper  name,  a  German 

poet. 
SBrtef,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  letter, 

epistle. 
Brttt'gctt,  bradi'te,  gebrad^t'  (f)aben), 

to  bring. 
S3rot,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie-e,  bread. 
Sru'ber,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  ",  brother. 
23ttti^,    bag,    beg    -(e)g,    bie    "er, 

book. 
Suri^'ftaic,  ber,  beg  -ng,  bie  -n,  let- 
ter {of  the  alphabet). 


hn^^iahitvtn 


bcrfclfic 


l^udiftaBtc'ren,  budiftabier'te,  bud)- 
ftabiert'  (^abcn),  to  spell. 

SBurg,  bie,  bie  -en,  castle,  fortress. 

S3ufrf|,  ber,  be6  -eg,  bie  "e,  bush. 

S5uf'fc,  proper  name,  a  German 
poet. 

Sttt'tCt,  bie,  butter. 


^axlf  ber;  proper  name.,  Charles, 
Carl. 

IS^araf'tetr,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  (Jt)ara!= 
te're,  character. 

aWmtn^,  ber,  proper  oiame,  Clem- 
ent. 

ba,  a(?v.,  there,  in  that  place;  con- 
junction usually  giving  a  reason, 
as. 

babet',  at  the  same  time,  too. 

bagc'gen,  against  it ;  etr\)a^  bagegen 
^aben,  to  have  any  objections. 

balder',  along. 

ba^itt',  along,  thither. 

^a^lt^  proper  name,  a  German 
poet. 

^a'ntc,  bie,  bie  -n,  lady. 

bamtt^,  with  it. 

bam'mcrn,  reg.  (^aben),  to  grow 
dark  or  dusk. 

•-^attf,  ber,  beS  -(e)8,  thanks. 

bait'fctt,  reg.  (^aben),  with  dat.,  to 
thank;  (id^)  banfe,  thank  you. 

bann,  then,  next. 

bar,  adv.  and  sep.  prefix,  usually 
not  to  he  translated.  It  adds  a 
suggestion  of  definite  direction  to 
a  verb.    See  barfii^ren. 


baran^,  of  it. 

baraitf,  upon  it,  on  it ;  bo8  fommt 
barauf  an,  that  depends. 

barau!^',  out  of  it. 

barf,  barfft,  see  biirfen. 

bar'fii^rctt,  reg.,  sep.  (ftaben),  to 
lead  along  or  away. 

baritt',  in  it. 

barii'bcr,  about  it,  over  it. 

barum',  then,  therefore. 

ba^,  see  ber,  article  and  demonstra- 
tive. 

baf,  conjunction  followed  by  the 
dependent  order,  that. 

ba^feCbe,  see  berfel'be. 

'I)a'tiib,  ber,  proper  name,  David. 

batlOtt',  of  it,  from  it,  from  there, 
away. 

be'cfcn,  reg.  (^aben),  to  cover  ;  of  a 
table,  to  set. 

bein,  poss.  adj.,  your,  thy;  poss, 
pron.,  yours,  thine. 

bem,  see  ber, 

bctt,  see  ber. 

be'ttCtt,  dat.  plu.  ofrel.,  ber, 

bctt'feu,  ti^^^it,  gebad^t'  (^aben),to 
think;  of,  an  with  ace. 

bCtttt,  interrogative  particle,  usu- 
ally omitted  in  translation  ;  con- 
junction folloioed  by  the  normal 
order,  for. 

ber,  bie,  ha^,  gen.,  beg,  ber,  beg, 
article,  the ;  rel.  pron. ,  gen., 
beffen,  beren,  beffen,  who,  which, 
that ;  demonstr.  pron.,  that,  the 
one. 

bcrfcrbc,  biefel^be,  bagfel'be,  gen., 
begfet'ben,  berfel'ben,  begfel'ben, 
the  same. 


Dctwett 


etn 


htttOtxVf   conjunction  followed  by 

the  dependent  order,  while. 
bci3,  see  ber* 
bef  fen,  gen.  of  the  relative,  ber  or 

be'fto,    correlative   of  comparison 

with  je:  je  »  ,  .  befto,  the  .  .  .  the. 
bCtttfd^,  adj.,  German ;  auf  beutfd^, 

in  German. 
^CUtj^,   ba^,  be^  -en,  the   German 

language;   er  fprid^t  2)eutfd),  he 

speaks  German. 
^eutfrJ^e,  ber,  be^  -n,  bie  -n,  Ger- 
man man;  plu.,  the  Germans. 
^Ctttfti^'Iattb,  ba^,  beg  -g,  Germany. 
^c^cm'Ber,  ber,  be§  -8,  December. 
bid^,  ace.  o/biu 

^i^'ttVf  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  poet. 
hkf  see  ber, 

^tCttjg'tag,  ber,  beg  -g,  Tuesday. 
bicfeFBc,  see  berfelbe. 
bic'fct,  bie'fe,  bte^feg,  or  bieg,  this ; 

pliL,  these. 
btCi^'fcit^,  j9rep.  -mjM  gen.,  on  this 

side  of. 
^tng,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  thing. 
bir,  fZa^.  0/  bu. 
boc^,  adv.,  after  all,  still,  yet,  but ; 

idiomatic  particle,  pray  ;  yes  ;  is 

it?     (§296.) 
^m'ntt §ta^f  ber,  beg  -g,  Thursday. 
^orf,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  "er,  village. 
^ortt,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  -en,  thorn. 
bort,  there,  over  there,  yonder. 
brau'^Ctt,   outside,   out  of    doors, 

used  with  verbs  of  rest. 
btei,  three. 

brci'ttubcttt^alb',  three  and  a  half. 
hxti'unWitv'^XQ,  forty-three. 


^Vt'tit^f  proper  name,  a  German 

poet. 
Mitf  third. 

Wtt'ttn^f  thirdly,  in  the  third  place. 
hvn'htVf  for  barii'ber,  over  it,  about 

it. 
brum,  for  barnnt',  then,  therefore. 
Wf  betner,  btr,  bid^,  you,  thou. 
bulb 'f am,  patient. 
bumm,  stupid. 
buu'fchl,  reg.  (^aben),  impersonal 

with  eg,  to  grow  dark. 
burti^,  prep,  with  ace,  through. 
'is\xx6)^\'ai'itx\%  reg.,  insep.  (I)abcn), 

to  run  through  {of  a  book), 
bur^'5icl|cn,    aog    bnr(^',   burd^'ge- 

gogen  (fein),  to  go  through. 
bitr'fcu,  burf'te,  gebnrft'  or  biir'fen 

(^aben),  er  barf,  to  be  permitted, 

be  allowed,  may. 
burf 'ten,  see  biirfen. 
bur'ftig,  thirsty. 

c'bcu,  just ;  ja,  eben,  yes,  that's  so. 
@b'ucr=@f(^'cuBa(^,  proper  name, 

a  German  poet. 
VbtXf    declined    ebler,    eb(e,    eb(eg ; 

compared  ebel,  ebler,  ebelft,  noble. 
t'\)tf    conjunction  followed  by  the 

dependent  order,  before. 
(S^'rc,  bie,  bie  -n,  honor. 
ell'rcu,  reg.  (^aben),  to  honor. 
©i,  bag,  beg  -(e)  g,  bie  -er,  egg. 
ci'geu,  declined  eig(e)ner,  eig(e)ne, 

etg(e)neg,  own,  one's  own. 
@i'(c,  bie,  haste. 
CtU,    indef.    art.,   a,   an;    numeral 

(cing),  one ;  sep.  prefix  as  in  etn* 


cinerlei 


crtttiicrrt 


fatten,  einpEen,  einfd)cn!en,  ein= 

fc^tafen,  etc. 
eittcrlci',  of  one  and  the  same  kind  ; 

\ia^  ift  mir  einerlei,  it's  all  the 

same  to  me,  I  don't  care. 
cttt'fattctt,     fie(     t\i\' ,    ein'gefaEen 

(fein),  e6  fdUt  mir  ein,  with  the 

dat.^  to  occur  to;    e^  fdllt  mir 

nid^t  ein,  it  doesn't  occur  to  me, 

I  should  not  think   of   (such   a 

thing). 
CtttI)Cr',  sep.  prefix  usually  imply- 
ing stateliness,  along,  forth. 
mt^tt'tDaUciXf  reg.,  sep.    (^aben), 

to  float  along. 
citt'pttctt,    reg.,   sep.    (l^aben),   to 

wrap  up,  envelop. 
et'ittg,  united;   einige,  plu.^  some; 

einige  3^it,  some  time. 
Citt'mat,  once ;  once  upon  a  time. 
citt'fri^Cttfcn,  reg.,  sep.  (:^aben),  to 

fill  up  (of  a  glass). 
citt'f^Iafcn,  fd)(ief  ein',et^'9^ff^icifen 

(fein),  to  go  to  sleep. 
Ctltft,  once  upon  a  time,  one  day. 
c(f,  eleven. 

^i'ttxttf  bie  (plu.),  parents. 
cm^fa^n',  poetic  for  em^fangen, 
cm^fan'gcn,    empftng',  em^fan'gen 

(^aben),  er  em^fcingt',  to  receive. 
@n'be,  t)a^f  beg  -§,  bie  -n,  end. 
Cttb'Uc^,  finally. 

©tt'gcl,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  angel. 
cng'lif^,  adj.,  English;  anf  engltfcf), 

in  English. 
©ug'Uft^,  bag,  beg  -en,  the  English 

language. 
Sn^'titt,  proper  name,  a  German 

poet. 


tntUc^ttttf   entbot^   entbo^ten   (l)a- 

ben),  to  summon  avi^ay. 
tniho'ttttf  see  entbie'ten. 
txtt^aVUttf  ent\)uW,  entljal'ten  (f)a> 

ben),  eg  ent^dlt',  to  hold,  contain. 
Cttt^tctt',  see  ent^al'ten, 
entfc^Uc'^ctt,  entfc^Iog',  entfc^lof'fen 

(l)aben),  to  decide. 
tni^d)io^'nt§f  see  entjd^Iie'gen, 
etttf(i^uFbi(|cn,    entfcf)nl'bigte,    ent^ 

fc^nl'bigt  (^aben),  to  excuse. 
cutftc'^Ctt,      entftanb',     entftan'ben 

(jein),  to  come  into  being,  begin, 

arise,  break  out. 
Cttt'lueber,    either;    enttt)eber  .  .  . 

ober,  either  ...  or. 
er,  fte,  eg,  he,  she,  it. 
crMi'tctt,   erbat',  erbe'ten  (fjaben), 

to  obtain  by  entreaty,  to  get  by 

asking. 
©t'bc,  bie,  ber  — ,  earth ;  anf  (Srben 

(old  weak  dative),  on  earth. 
©r'bcnruttt),  bag,  beg  -eg,  bie  -e, 

face    of    the     earth,    terrestrial 

globe. 
erffc'^cn,  reg.,  insep.    (^aben),  to 

get  by  pleading. 
crgc'Bctt,  ergab',  erge'ben  (^aben), 

er  ergibt',  to  deliver  up,  yield  to ; 

past  part.,  ergeben,  devoted,  at- 
tached. 
ctgrci^fctt,    ergriff',    ergrif'fen,    to 

grasp,  seize ;  ergreift  eg  mtt  toxU 

bem  3Be^,  is  seized  with  a  wild 

yearning  (lit.,  woe). 
tvi^aVttn,  er()te(t',  er^at'ten  (^aben), 

er  er^dlt',  to  keep;  to  receive. 
cx^tWf  see  er^al'ten. 
crin'ttetn,  reg.,  insep.  (!^aben),  to 


crfam^fen 


fe^lctt 


remind;    fic^   erinnern   with   the 

genitive^  to  remember. 
crfom^'fen,  reg.,  insep.  (^aben),  to 

get  by  fighting. 
crfamtt^,  see  erfen'nen, 
crfen'ttCtt,  erfann'te,  erfannt'  (l)a- 

ben),  to  recognize. 
crfld'rcn^  reg.,  insep.   (^aben),  to 

explain. 
txian'htnf  reg.^  insep.  (^aben),  loith 

dative,  to  allow,  permit. 
ttW^tUf    reg.,   insep.    (^aben),  to 

deliver,  ransom,  redeem. 
ernft'ltc^,  earnest (ly),  serious(ly). 
crqul^rfctt,  reg.,  insep.  (l^ahen),  re- 
fresh, restore. 
crrei'd^Ctt,  re^.,  insep.  (^aben),  to 

reach. 
crritt'gctt,   errang',  errun'gen  (I}a= 

ben) ,  to  obtain  by  striving. 
crrutt'gcn,  see  errin'gen. 
crft,  adv.,  for  the  first  time,  first; 

just,  only  ;  not  till. 
cr'ftcn^,    adv.,   in  the   first  place, 

firstly. 
ctftcr,  erfte,  erfte^,  adj.,  first. 
crftrci'ten,  erftritt',  erftrit'ten  (^a- 

ben),  to  get  by  fighting. 
crffrit'tctt,  see  erftrci'ten. 
tvtt>a'^ttt,  reg.,    insep.    (fein),   to 

awaken,  wake  up  {neuter). 
crtua^'fen,  reg.,  insep.  (^aben),  to 

choose. 
crttior'tctt,  reg.,  insep.  (^aben),  to 

await,  expect. 
crttJi'bcril,  reg.,  insep.   (l)abeii),  to 

repay,  requite,  render  in  return. 
crja^'lctt,  reg.,  insep.   (^aben),  to 

relate,  tell. 


t^f  it;  there  (is  or  are)  ;  with  fein 
and  a  plural  predicate  attribute, 
they,  those.     See  §  155. 

cffen,  Ci%  gegef'fen  (^aben),  er  igt, 
to  eat. 

ti'toa^f  something,  anything;  a  fol- 
lowing adjective  must  he  neuter 
and  is  capitalized,  except  anber : 
ettDag  ©uteg,  ettt)a«  anbereg.    • 

t\x6]f  dat.  and  ace.  of  if)r,  you. 

tw'tXf  your. 

©uangc'Iiuttt,  t^a^,  be^  -^,  bie  @t)an* 
ge^Iien,  gospel. 

C'ttJtg,  a(?j.,  eternal;  adv.,  forever. 

S'ttJtgfctt,  bie,  eternity;  in  (Swtg* 
felt,  forever  and  ever. 

3'a^bcn,  ber,  beg  -§,  bie  ^aben, 
thread. 

fa!^'rcn,  fn^r,  gefa^'ren  (jein),  er 
fci^rt,  to  drive,  ride,  go  {by  train)  ; 
see  also  fort'fa^ren. 

fd'lctt,  fiel,  gefat'Ien  (fein),  er  fallt, 
to  fall ;  see  also  ein'fatten* 

%aV\tx^\thtnf  proper  name,  a  Ger- 
man poet. 

fftUt,  see  fal'Ien  and  ein'fallen, 

f atft^,  false ;  in  the  class  room, 
wrong. 

^amx'Iic,  bie,  bie  -n  (four  sylla- 
bles), family. 

faitb,  fan'ben,  see  fin'ben, 

fan'gcn,  fing,  gefan'gen  (^aben),  er 
fangt,  to  catch,  seize ;  see  also 
an  fangen. 

fje'bruar,  ber,  beg  -g,  February. 

JJc'ber,  bie,  bie  -n,  pen. 

^t^'Urtf  reg.  (^aben),  to  lack,  with 


getter 


freubtioU 


the  dative  of  the  person  who  lacks 
and  the  subject  of  the  thing 
lacked:  mir  fe^tt  iBrot,  I  lack 
bread. 

%z^'\tXf  beiv  beg  -§,  hit  —,  mistake, 
error. 

fci'crUc^,  festive ;  stately,  solemn. 

JJcinb^  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  enemy. 

JJclb,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -er,  field. 

gc'Hj,  ber,  proper  name,  Felix, 

geFfcnriff,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e, 
rocky  reef. 

^en'ftcr^  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  window. 

^CV'ntf  bie,  distance,  remoteness ; 
in  ber  gerne,  far  away,  at  a  dis- 
tance. 

fer'tig,  ready ;  through,  finished. 

S'Cft'gcfang,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  geft= 
gefdnge,  festal  song,  joyous  music. 

^tn^'tev^khtttf  proper  name^  a 
German  poet. 

%tM'tx,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  fire. 

fttt'ben,  fanb,  gefun'ben  (^aben),  to 
find. 

ftttg,  fin'geu,  see  fan'gen, 

JJitt'gcr,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  finger. 

fttt'fter,  gloomy,  dark. 

gifr^,  ber,  beg  -eg,  bie  -e,  fish. 

%\'\6)tXf  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  fisher- 
man, fisher. 

fJi'f^erltiaBe,  ber,  beg  -n,  bie  -n, 
fisher  lad  or  boy. 

Pcti^'ten,  fforf)t,  gef(od)'ten  (l^aben), 
er  ftid)t,  to  weave,  twine,  braid. 

^leifti^,  bag,  beg  -eg,  bie  -e,  meat. 

flci'^ig,  superl.,  fleigigft,  industri- 
ous, diligent;  fleigig  (ernen,  to 
study  hard. 

??ne'gc,  bie,  bie  -n,  fly. 


fltc'gcttp  flog,  geflogen  (fein),  to  fly. 

fltc'lctt,  flog,  geflof'jen  (fein),  to 
flow. 

^Hf  flo'ge,  see  flie'gen, 

^Witf  bie,  bie  -u,  flute. 

p^tCtt,  reg.  (^aben),  to  play  the 
flute ;  bag  glijteu,  playing  on  the 
flute. 

^in'^ti,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  wing. 

^mg,  ber,  beg  gluffeg,  bie  gliiffe, 
river. 

flii^ftcrn,  reg.  (^aben),  to  whisper. 

flit'ftcrnb,  see  fliifterr.. 

^Intf  bie,  hie  -en,  flood,  stream; 
water. 

fuCgctt,  reg.  (fein),  with  dat.,  to 
follow. 

fort'fa^ren,  fu^r  fort',  fort'gefa^ren 
(^aben),  er  fd^rt  fort',  to  con- 
tinue; followed  in  German  by 
an  infinitive  with  git,  where  Eng- 
lish has  either  an  infinitive  or  a 
verbal  in  -ing. 

fort'gcfa^ren,  see  fort'fa^ren, 

fra'gctt,  reg.  (I)aben),  to  ask  (a 
question),  as  distinguished  from 
bitten,  to  ask  {a  favor) ;  reflexive 
impersonal,  eg  fragt  fi(^,  it  is  a 
question. 

fjrau,  bie,  bie  -en,  woman;  wife; 
Mrs. 

fret,  free(ly). 

grci'tag,  ber,  beg  -g,  Friday. 

fremb,  strange,  a  stranger  to,  pre- 
ceded by  dat. 

greu'bc,  bie,  bie  -n,  joy,  happiness ; 
t3or  (anter  greub',  for  very  joy,  for 
pure  joy. 

ftCttb'tiofl,  joyous,  happy. 


freuctt 


10 


(SJcfiebcr 


freu'eit  firi^,  reg.  (^ab en),  to  be  glad  ; 

impersonal^  t%  freut  mic^,  I  am 

glad. 
§reimb^  ber,  be^  -(e) ^,  bie  -e,  friend. 
freWttb'Ur^,    adj.,    kind,    friendly; 

adv.,  in  a  friendly  way. 
f^rie'bc,  ber,  beg  -n^,  bie  -n,  peace. 
gric'iicn^ttjolfc,  W,  bie  -n,  cloud 

of  peace. 
^ricb^riri^,  ber,  proper  name,  Fred- 
erick. 
ftrifc^,  fresh. 

%xx^f  tin,  proper  name,  Fred,  Fritz. 
friJ^'Ut^,  joyous,  joyful,  merry. 
frii^,  compar.,  frii^er,  early,  soon; 

tnorgen    friil^,    to-morrow  morn- 
ing. 
grii^'Uttg^a^ttUttg,  bie,  premonition 

of  spring,  feeling  that  spring  is 

in  the  air. 
gru^'lutg^Heb,  \ia^,  beg  -(c)g,  bie 

-er,  spring  song. 
fii'gen,  reg.  (^aben),  to  fit  together, 

join ;  see  also  ^uf iigen. 
fu^r,  fii^ren,  see  fa^ren  and  fort= 

fasten. 
fii^'rctt,  reg.  (^aben),tolead;  take, 

bring. 
JJttl'ba,  proper  name,   a    German 

poet. 
fitttf,  five. 
fim'feln,  reg.  (^aben),  to  sparkle, 

gleam. 
fiir,  prep,  with  ace,  for. 
f?urrf|t,  bie,  fear,  terror,  dread. 
fiirti^'tcn,  reg.  (^aben),  to  fear;  \id} 

fiird^ten    t)or    with    dat.,    to    be 

afraid  of. 
^M^f  ber,  beg  -eg,  bie  giige,  foot. 


^ahf  ga  ben,  see  geben. 

i^a'hci,  bie,  bie  -n,  fork. 

gaU5,  whole,  entire,  all ;  gu  jebem 

ganjen  SBerf,  for  every  complete 

work;  ein  ©angeg,  a  whole. 
gat,  in  fact,  really ;  at  all. 
(SJar'tctt,   ber,  beg  -g,  bie  ©cirten, 

garden. 
ge'^ctt,   gab,  gege'ben   (^aben),  er 

gibt,  to  give;   eg  gibt,  there  is; 

2Bag  gibt'g?  What's  up  ? 
gcBc'tcn,  asked  ;  see  bitten. 
gcBHc'ften,  stayed;  see  blei'ben. 
geBorgt',  borrowed ;  see  bor'gen. 
^thta^i'f     brought;      given,     see 

brin'gen. 
®cbaat'!c,    ber,   beg   -ng,    bie   -n, 

thought. 
gcban'fcittJoH,  pensive. 
gebauff,  thanked;  see  ban' fen. 
geberft',  covered;  of  tables,  set;  see 

be'den. 
gcbci'^(c)tt,  gebie^,  gebie'f)en  (fein), 

to  increase,  grow,  develop,  thrive, 

flourish. 
(^t^id^t'f    bag,   beg   -(e)g,   bie   -e, 

poem. 
gcbttC'btg,  patient (ly). 
gcfal'Ictt,  fallen ;  see  fallen. 
gefal'lctt,  gefteC,  gefal'Ien  (baben), 

er  gefcittt',  vnth  dat.,  to  please. 
(SJefa^r'te,  ber,  beg  -n,  bie  -n,  com- 
panion, comrade. 
gefatt'gett,  caught;  see  fan'gen. 
gefcl)(t',  lacked ;  see  feb'fen. 
^cflc'bcr,    bag,    beg    -g,  feathers, 

plumage. 


gcpogett 


11 


fief(^ric6ctt 


gcflo'gctv  flown ;  !am  geflo'gen, 
came  flying  ;  see  flie'gen. 

gcftttt'tJeu,  found  ;  see  fin'ben. 

gcgctt'gen,  gone;  see  ge'l)en, 

gcgc'ben,  given;  see  ge'ben, 

gc'gctt,  j)rej9.  tozY/i  ace,  against, 
toward,  to. 

Q^t^^tnttiif  ba^,  be§  -g^  contrary. 

gegcf 'fctt,  eaten ;  see  effen. 

geglauBt',  believed,  thought;  see 
„    gtau'bem 

gcl^aBt',  had ;  see  l^a'ben, 

ge^ci'Hget,  hallowed;  see  l)ei/Ugeti. 

^e^ci^',  ba^,  beg  -eg,  command, 
order. 

gc'^cit,  gtttg,  gegan'gen  (fetn) ,  to  go ; 
2Bie  ge^t  eg  3^nen?  How  goes 
it  ?  How  are  you  ?  See  also 
l^erum'ge^en,  l^tn'ge^en,  Iog'gel)en, 
\paik'xm  ge{)en. 

gc^oCf en,  helped ;  see  ^effen, 

gcprt',  heard ;  see  ^o'reti. 

gcl)o'rctt,  re^.,  ^?^sep.  (\^ahen),  with 
dat.^  to  belong  to;  ge^ort  eiti 
ganger  5D^antt,  requires  or  is  re- 
quired by. 

^t\jitf  3d  sing,  indie,  or  M  plu.  im- 
perative; see  ge^^en. 

gefauft',  bought ;  see  fau^fen. 

gcfom'mett,  come ;  see  fom'men* 

gclii^t',  kissed ;  see  fiif'fen. 

&tihf  ba^,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -er, 
money. 

gclcgf ,  laid ;  see  le'gen. 

getc'fctt,  read  ;  see  (e^fen, 

gcHe'^Ctt,  lent ;  see  Iei'()en. 

gelhtb'Cc),  soft(ly),  mild(ly), 
gently,  gentle. 

gelttt'gctt,  gelang^  gelun'gen  (jein), 


eg  gelingt  mir,  impers.  with  dat., 
to  succeed. 

gelobt',  praised ;  see  lo'bett. 

get'tctt^  gait,  gegol'ten  (^aben),  eg 
gilt,  loith  dat.,  to  be  for,  be  in- 
tended for;  with  ace,  to  be 
worth. 

gehtn'gett,  succeeded ;  see  getin^gen, 

gcmat^t',  made  ;  see  tna'd^ett. 

(3tmai)Vf  ber,  beg  -g,  bte  -e,  hus- 
band. 

^cmaf^Vf  bag,  beg  -g,  obsolete  and 
poetic,  consort,  spouse. 

gcmtt|t',  been  obliged  to ;  see  miif  * 
fen» 

^tmi}t'f  sewed ;  see  nci'^ett. 

gcnom'tttett,  taken ;  see  ne^'men* 

gettug,',  enough. 

gcttil'gctt,  reg.,  insep.  (^aben),  to 
sufiice,  be  enough;  bag  geniigt, 
that  is  sufficient,  that  will  do. 

gcra'be,  adj.,  straight;  adv.,  just, 
exactly. 

gent,  compar.,  Iteber,  superl.,  am 
Itebften,  gladly;  usually  trans- 
lated to  like  to  :  id)  finge  gent,  I 
like  to  sing, 

gcfagt',  said;  see  fa'gen. 

gefc^afft',  worked;  see  fd^af fett. 

gcft^c'^Ctt,  gefc^a!)^  gej(^e'l}ett  (fein), 
eg  gefc^tel)t',  impers.  withdat.,  to 
happen. 

@cfc^i(^'te,  bte,  bie  -tt,  story;  his- 
tory. 

gcfri^irft',  sent;  clever,  dexterous; 
see  f(^i'c!en, 

^cfri^mei'bc,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — , 
jewelry. 

gefrffric'bctt,  written;  see  fd)rei'ben. 


gefe^en 


12 


gt(tU 


gcfc'^eit,  seen ;  see  fe'^en. 

gcfc^t',  set;  see  fet'^en. 

gef^on'nctt,  spun ;  see  fpin'nen» 

gcf^ro'ci^ett,  spoken ;  see  fpre'rf)en* 

^cfta'be,  ba^,  beS  -^,  bank,  shore, 
beach. 

gcftanb',  see  gefte'l)en. 

(JJcftrittb'mg,  ha^,  beg  @eftanb'uiffe«, 

.  bie  ©eftcinb'niffe,  confession, 
avowal. 

gcftcrft',  put,  see  ftc'cfen. 

gefte'^ctt,  geftanb^  geftan'ben  (^a= 
ben),  to  confess,  admit. 

ge'ftcnt,  adv. ,  yesterday ;  a  follow- 
ing noun  is  written  as  an  adverb 
without  a  capital^  ge'ftern,mor'= 
gen,  ge'ftern  a'benb. 

©c'ftern,  ha^,  noun^  (the)  yester- 
day. 

gcftor'Bcn,  died;  see  fter'ben. 

gctatt',  done ;  see  tnn. 

getrcttttt',  separated;  see  tren'nen» 

gettial'tig,  powerful,  mighty. 

gcttie'fcn,  been ;  see  jein. 

gewitt'ttCtt,  getDann',  getuon'nen 
(^aben),  to  win. 

gemoHt^  wanted ;  see  n)oI'Ien, 

gcttJOtt'nett,  won,  see  gelDin'nen, 

gettiur'bCtt,  become,  got;  see 
njer'ben, 

gcttmjt',  known ;  see  tDiffen. 

gejeigt',  shown  ;  see  ^et'gen. 

ge^o'gen^  with  !)aben,  drawn;  with 
Snu,  gone  ;  see  ^ie'^en. 

gift,  imperative  of  ge'ben,  give. 

giftt,  see  gebcn  ;  e«  gibt,  there  is. 

gic^^cn,  gog,  gegof'fen  (^aben),  to 
pour ;  see  aZso  ^inein'giegen. 

gilt,  see  gel' ten. 


ging,  see  ge'^en, 

i^\p'\tlf  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  top, 
summit. 

glan'^cii,  re^.  (^aben),  to  gleam, 
shine,  sparkle. 

Qbia^,  \>a^,  beg  ©lafeg,  bie  @Iafer, 
glass. 

gktt'Bcn,  re^.  (^aben),  to  think;  to 
believe,  with  dat.  of  person  be- 
lieved^ but  icith  ace.  if  the  object 
is  a  thing.  ^ 

gleid^,  adj.,  preceded  by  dat.,  like, 
alike,  equal,  the  same ;  adv.,  at 
once. 

g(cid)'!ommctt,  !am  gteid)',  gleld^'= 
getommen  (fein),  with  dat.,  to 
equal. 

^IM,  ha^,  beg  -(e)g,  happiness, 
fortune,  luck. 

gliiif'lid),  superl.,  QlM'li6)%  happy, 
fortunate. 

Q^lntf  bie,  bie  -en,  heat,  glow;  ar- 
dor, passion. 

^oc't^C,  proper  name,  a  German 
poet. 

©olb,  bag,  beg  -(e)  g,  gold. 

golbctt,  goIb(e)neg,  golden. 

giJn'ttCtt,  reg.  (^ahen),  to  grant 
willingly,  not  to  begrudge. 

(^ottf  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  hie  Hx,  God; 
god. 

(^oi'U§hottf  ber,  beg  -it,  bie  -n,  di- 
vine messenger. 

Q^vah,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  "er,  grave. 

GJraf,  ber,  beg  -en,  bie  -en,  count. 

®vamma'iitf  bie,  bie  -en,  grammar. 

(Bva^,  bag,  beg  ©rafeg,  bie  ©rdfer, 
grass. 

gtau,  gray. 


fifog 


13 


l^erjagett 


gro§,    cojiipar.,    gro'ger,     superl, 

grbgt,  large,  great,  big. 
(^x'o^tf  hie,  greatness. 
griitt,  green. 
QXltf    adj.,    good;    adv.,   well;    as 

noun,  @ute§,  good ;  ba^  ®ute,  the 

good. 


^aaVf  ba^,  bc^  -(e)«,  bic  -e,  hair, 
ifsed  &oi/fc  iw  sing,  and  plu.  in 
general  sense  of  hair. 

f^a'htttf  i:)at'te,  ge^abt'  (t)aben),  bit 
^aft,  er  Ijat,  to  have  ;  o/iJeTi  trans- 
lated by  English  did. 

^a'gcburn,  ber,  be§  -«,  bie  -en, 
hawthorn ;  proper  name,  a  Ger- 
man poet. 

^aitt,  ber,  beg  -(e)«,  bie  -e,  grove. 

fjOXiSf  adj.,  half;  following  the  arti- 
cle :  half  a  cup,  eine  ^albe  Xaffe ; 
l^alb  elf,  half  past  ten. 

IJalf,  see  ^eCfett. 

^alf tc,  bie,  bie  -n,  noun,  half. 

^al'le,  bie,  bie  -ti,  hall. 

l^aCten,  l)ie(t,  gel)al'ten  (l)aben),  er 
^d(t,  to  hold,  keep;  ^dlten  fiir 
with  ace,  to  take  for;  see  also 
au8't)alten. 

^ant>f  bie,  bie  "e,  hand. 

l^an'gcn,  ^tng,  ge^an'gen  (Ijaben), 
er  ^cingt,  to  hang. 

I^aft,  see  ^a'ben. 

f^atf  ^at'te,  Ijat'te,  see  l^a'ben. 

^and^f  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e, 
breath. 

^anpi,  ba^,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  ^ciup'ter, 
head. 

^an^f   ba^,  beg   -eg,  bie  §du'fer. 


house;  ju  §aufe,  at  home;  ttad^ 
§aufe,  (to)  home. 

^e'ben,  ^ob,  ge^o'ben  (l)aben),  to 
lift,  raise. 

^e^r,  august,  majestic,  sublime. 

^ci'bc,  bie,  bie  -n,  heath  ;  old  weak 
dative,  §eiben  in  auf  ber  §eiben; 
compare  (Srben. 

^ci'Mhtv^f  bag,  proper  name,  a 
German  city. 

^ci'bcnro^'Iein,  bag,  beg  -g.  bie — , 
heather  rose,  heath  rose. 

^ei'ttC,  proper  name,  a  German 
poet. 

^Cii  hot. 

^ci'gcn,  ^ieg,  ge^ei'gen  (^aben),  to 
be  called,  named  ;  in  translating, 
to  be  (translated)  ;  to  bid,  com- 
mand :  Ijit^  auf  jener  ^a^n  bid^ 

^ei'tcr,  cheerful,  jovial,  merry. 

^e(b,  ber,  beg  -en,  bie  -en,  hero. 

^erfctt,  ^alf,  ge^olfen  (fiaben),  er 
'^ilft,  with  dat.,  to  help. 

^eit'fcl,  proper  name,  a  German 
poet. 

!)Ct,  adv.,  along;  sep.  prefix,  denot- 
ing motion  toward  the  speaker, 
hut  often  not  translated  ;  t)in  unb 
l^er,  to  and  fro,  hither  and  thither ; 
see  also  ^erjagen,  l^erjagen. 

^erbftlicb,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -er, 
autumn  song. 

$er't»e,  bie,  bie  -n,  flock,  herd. 

^Ct'bcr,  proper  name,  a  German 
poet. 

^cr'gefagt,  recited,  see  l)er'fagen* 

l^cr'jagcn,  reg.,  sep.  (^aben),  to 
chase  along,  hunt. 


^entiebcr 


14 


§unb 


f^tvnxt't>tVf  adv.  and  sep.  prefix, 
down  here  or  hither. 

l^crnlc'bcrft^aucn,  reg.,  sep.(I)aben), 
to  look  down  here. 

^tvXf  hex,  be§  -n,  bie  §erreii,  gen- 
tleman; Sir;  Mr.;  referring  to 
the  Deity,  Lord. 

^tXX'\x6)f  magnificent,  grand,  glo- 
rious, lordly. 

^crr'Iit^fcit,  bie,  glory. 

l^er'fagctt,  reg.,  sep.  (^aben),  to 
recite. 

1)tX\iVX'f  adv.  and  sep.  prefix, 
around,  about. 

f^txnm' ^tfjtUf  giug  ^erum',  l^eritm'* 
gegaiigen  (fein),  to  go  around  or 
about. 

$ct5,  t>a^,  beg  -en§,  bie  -en,  heart. 

|)Ctt,  ha^,  beg  -(e}g,  hay. 

fjtn'tit),  to-day;  this,  ^eute  ntor* 
gen,  this  morning;  a  following 
noun  is  written  as  an  adverb 
without  a  capital,  l^eute  abenb, 

J)ic(t,  held,  see  ^al'ten, 

^ter,  here. 

1)\t%  see  ^ei'gen, 

§irfc,  bie,  bie  -n,  help. 

^tm'mcl,  ber,  beg  -g,  heaven ;  sky. 

^im'mc(^0(^,  high  as  the  heavens. 

^m'mtX^tiif  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  can- 
opy of  heaven. 

l^imm'Iifri^,  heavenly,  divine. 

]^tn,  adv.,  along;  sep.  prefix,  de- 
noting motion  away  from  the 
speaker,  hut  often  not  translated  ; 
I)in  imb  ^er,  hither  and  thither. 

l^ittouf,  adv.  and  sep.  prefix,  up, 
up  there. 

l^ittCttt',  adv.  and  sep.  prefix,  in. 


^tncttt'gtc§ett,  gog  ^inein',  ^ittein'* 
gegoffen  (^aben),  to  pour  in. 

l^itt'ge^cn,  giug  ^in',  l^in'gegangen 
(fein),  to  go  (away  or  along). 

^itt'gefteUt,  see  ^in'ftellen, 

•^itt'ftctten,  reg.,  sep.  (^aben),  to 
place,  put. 

^in^itXf  prep,  with  dat.  or  ace,  be- 
hind. 

l^ttttttt'tcr,  adv.  and  sep.  prefix, 
down;  W  %xt\^)^t  ^inunter, 
downstairs. 

^\xi'{t)f  ber,  beg  -(e)n,  bie  -(e)n, 
shepherd. 

5o(^,  declined  ^o^er,  ^o^e,  l^o^eg; 
compared  \)q^,  p^er,  ^od^ft,  high ; 
aufg  ^o^fte,  in  the  highest  pos- 
sible way ;  ber  §o(^fte,  beg  -n,  the 
Highest,  the  Deity. 

^ori^mttt,  ber,  beg  -(e) g,  pride, 
haughtiness,  arrogance. 

^of'fctt,  reg.  (l^aben),  to  hope. 

Hoffmann  uoit  fjal'lcrj^lcbcn, 
proper  name,  a  German  poet. 

pf  Ut^,  polite(ly). 

!^o'()e,  see  })q6). 

^i^'^t,  'iixt,  bie  -n,  height. 

i)ts'\\tXf  higher,  see  ^orf). 

!^o(b,  favorable  ;  kind,  friendly. 

^o'len,  reg.  (^aben),  to  go  and  get, 
fetch. 

p'rctt,  reg.  (l)aben),  to  hear;  see 
also  anf'ljoren,  3n't)oren. 

^ii'gcl,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  hill. 

^tt^n,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  "er,  chicken, 
fowl. 

pl'Ictt,  reg.  (^aben),  to  wrap  up, 
cover,  hide  ;  .see  also  ein'^iitten. 

^nnhf  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  dog. 


^mtfjrfg 


15 


Tdmmtn 


^ung'rig,  hungry. 

^i\tf  ber,  be^  -(e)  §,  hie  "-t,  hat.    . 

^Vii'itf  bie,  hit  -n,  hut. 

td^,  ntetner,  tnir,  mic^,  I,  me. 

^bce',  bie,  bie  3be'en,  idea. 

i^tn,  (?a^.  si?i^.  o/er  or  e^,  (to)  him 
or  it. 

t^n,  ace.  sing,  of  tx,  him . 

X^'ntUf  dat.  plu.  o/fie,  (to)  them. 

^^'neit,  dat.  o/@ie,  (to)  >ou. 

3^r,  i>ossf  ac^j. ,  your. 

x))Xf  poss.  adj.,  her,  their ;  pers. 
pron.  2d  plu..,  you;  dat.  sing,  of 
fie,  (to)  her. 

tm,  in  bent. 

tm'mcr,  always. 

im'mctbar',  forever  (and  ever). 

in,  prep,  with  dat.,  in;  with  ace, 
into,  to,  in. 

tttbcm',  conjunction  followed  by  de- 
pendent order,  while,  at  the  mo- 
ment when  (§285). 

in^f  in  ba^, 

ir'bifr^,  earthly. 

ir^gcttb,  any,  some  ;  at  all ;  usually 
making  ivhat  it  modifies  more  in- 
definite, irgenb  jemanb,  some  one 
or  other. 

\%  is  ;  see  fein, 

\Cif  yes  ;  loith  an  imperative,  by  all 
means  ;  why,  you  know  (§  295). 

ja'gcn,  reg.  (Ijaben),  to  hunt,  chase; 
see  also  ^er^jagen. 

S^a^r,  h(x^,  beg  -(e) g,  bie  -e,  year. 

^a'nuar,  ber,  beg  -g,  January. 


jaudj'^Ctt^  regr.  (^aben),  to  shout 
with  joy,  exult. 

jauc^^^cntJ,  exulting ;  see  janc^^en  ; 
^im'me(I)od)  janc^'^enb,  in  ecstatic 
exultation. 

\tf  adv.,  ever;  correl.,  with  com- 
paratives,  je  ♦  ,  ♦  befto,  the  .  .  . 
the. 

je'ber,  je'be,  je'beg,  every,  each. 

ie'bermann,  every  one,  everybodj^. 

\t'bt>6)\  nevertheless,  yet,  but. 

Je'manb,  some  one,  any  one. 

^e'na,  hOi^,  proper  name,  a  city  on 
the  Saale  river  near  Weimar,  the 
site  of  a  famous  German  univer- 
sity and  the  scene  of  one  of  Na- 
poleon''s  victories. 

\t'ntXf  yt'ut,  je'neg,  that. 

je^t,  now. 

^o'^ann,  ber,  proper  name,  John. 

'^n'ix,  ber,  be§  -8,  July. 

3tt' UU)^,  ber,  proper  name,  Julius. 

jmtg,  adj.,  young;  as  noun,  ber 
3nnge,  beg  -n,  bie  -n,  young  per- 
son. 

^ung'fratt,  bie,  bie  -en,  maid,  virgin. 

^tt'ni,  ber,  beg  -g,  June. 


^af'fcc,  ber,  beg  -g,  hit  -g,  coffee. 

fa^l,  bare,  bald,  exposed. 

^al)tt,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  ^e,  skiff, 

(row)  boat. 
la%  cold. 

fam,  fa 'men,  fci'me,  see  fom'men, 
^amerab',   ber,  beg   -en,  bie  -en, 

comrade,  companion. 
^amm^  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  ""e,  comb. 
larn'mtUf  reg.  (l^aben),  to  comb. 


^ammcrtein 


16 


Sabcn 


^am'mcrlein,  ^a^,  be§  -?,  btc  — , 
little  chamber. 

^am^f,  ber,  be8  -(e)§,  bie  "e,  com- 
bat, fight. 

lamp'^crtf  to  fight,  combat. 

fatttt,  see  fon'nen, 

^avif  ber,  proper  name^  Charles, 
Carl. 

fau'fett,  re^.  (^aben),  to  buy,  pur- 
chase. 

faum,  hardly. 

fcin,  no,  not  a,  not  any,  none. 

feti'ttcn,  faun'te,  getannt'  (^aben), 
to  be  acquainted  with,  know; 
fennen  lernen,  to  meet. 

^ic'fcC,  ber,  be«  -«,  bie  — ,  pebble. 
%      ^ittb,  \ia^,  be§  -(e)«,  bie  -er,  child. 

^tt'C^C,  bie,  W  -n,  church. 

^(a'ge,  bie,  bie  -n,  complaint, 
plaint,  lament. 

^(a'gcltcb,  bag,  be8  -(e)g,  bie  -er, 
lamentation,  dirge. 

fla'gett,  reg.  (^aben),  to  complain, 
lament. 

^(atig,  ber,  beg  -(e)8,  bie  "e,  sound, 
clang. 

liaXf  clear. 

^(af'fc,  bie,  bie  -n,  class;  classroom. 

^{tXt>f  \iCi^,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -er,  dress ; 
plu.^  clothes. 

!(citt,  small,  little. 

Hin'gctt,  !tang,  geflun'gen  (^aben), 
to  sound,  resound ;  bem  fUngt  eg, 
he  hears  it  {lit.^  it  (re)sounds  to 
him) ;  as  noun^  bag  ^lingeti,  the 
sound,  resounding. 

^na'^c,  ber,  beg  -n,  bie  -n,  boy. 

ina'dtUf  reg.  (^aben),  to  crack. 

^ntc',  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  ^ni'e,  knee. 


^no^f,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  "e,  button. 

^itof'pc,  bie,  bie  -n,  bud. 

fom'men,  !am,  gefom'men  (fein), 
to  come  ;  \);iai  fommen,  to  be  {or 
come)  late;  gleic^' fommen,  with 
dat.^  to  equal ;  see  also  an'!om= 
men,  juriitf'fommen. 

^ij^ttig,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  -e,  king. 

fiitt'ttCtt,  fonn'te,  gefonnt',  or  !on'= 
nen  (^aben),  a  iamx,  to  be  able, 
can  ;  may  (denoting  possibility). 

fotttt'tc,  fonn'te,  see  fon'nen. 

^ottfonant',  ber,  beg  -en,  bie  -en, 
consonant. 

^o^f,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  "e,  head. 

^on^cxt'f  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  con- 
cert. 

^iir'ner,  2^^e'obor,  proper  name,  a 
German  poet. 

^va^f  bie,  bie  ""e,  power,  strength. 

frrif'tig,  powerful,  strong. 

frattf,  sick,  ill. 

^rei'bCy  bie,  bie  -n,  chalk. 

^to'ne,  bie,  bie  -n,  crown. 

^tt'gcl,  bie,  bie  -n,  bullet ;  ball. 

^n%  bie,  bie  "e,  cow. 

fil^l,  cool. 

fltnb,  known. 

fttttb'ttttt,  tat  fnnb^  fnnb'getan  (^a= 
ben),  to  make  known. 

Inv^f  compar.,  fiir^er,  superl.,  fiirj* 
eft,  short. 

fiiffctt,  reg.  (l^aben),  to  kiss. 


la'd^elit,  reg.  (baben),  to  smile. 
la'c^en,  reg.  (baben),  to  laugh. 
Sa'bcn,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  Sciben,  store, 
shop. 


(aben 


17 


Kef 


(a'bcn,  lub,  gcloben  (^abcn),  ex  Icibt 
(also  regular),  to  load  (0/  a 
gun)  ;  to  invite  (used  for  diu 
(aben)* 

ia^f  la'gen,  see  lic'gen, 

£am>c,  bie,  btc  -n,  lamp. 

Sanb,  bag,  bc^  -(t)^,  btc  ^er,  a;^(^ 
poetic,  2anbe,  land ;  country ;  auf 
bem  l^anbc,  in  the  country. 

lan^f  compar.,  langcr,  adj.,  long;  as 
adv.  following  an  accusative  of 
time,  for,  during :  ntetn  I^eben 
(ang,  all  the  days  of  my  life,  for- 
ever. 

lan'gc,  adv.,  for  a  long  time,  long. 

(att'gcn,  reg.  (^abeti),  to  long; 
lattgen  unb  bangen,  longing  and 
fearing. 

Xa^f  (a'fen,  see  le'fen. 

(offctt,  Iteg,  getaffeti  (^oben),  er 
Idgt,  imperative,  Ia§,  to  let;  to 
cause  to  be  (done),  to  have 
(done). 

(au'fctt,  lief,  gelau'fen  (fetn),  er 
(duft,  to  run. 

XaViif  adj.,  loud;  adv.,  aloud,  out 
loud. 

lau'tcr,  indecl.  adj.,  pure,  genuine, 
nothing  but. 

Sc'Bett,  t>a^,  beg  -§,  bie  — ,  life. 

Ic^Bctt,  reg.  (Ijabett),  to  be  alive,  live. 

ficB'rcr^t,  ber,  proper  name. 

htVf  empty. 

(c'gcn,  reg.  (f)aben),  to  lay. 

Ic^'rctt,  reg.  (^aben),  to  teach. 

Sc^'rcr,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  teacher. 

ititi^if  light ;  easy. 

£etb,  bag,  beg  -g,  harm  ;  pain ;  sor- 
row, grief,  woe. 


(ctb,  adj.,  painful. 

(ci'beti,  litt,  gelit'ten  (^aben),  to 
suffer,  endure ;  to  permit,  stand : 
unb  id)  tDiU'g  ni6:}t  leiben. 

Ictb'tutt,  tatleib',  leib'getan  (l)aben), 
impers.  with  dat.  of  English  sub- 
ject, to  be  sorry  ;  eg  tut  mtr  leib, 
I  am  sorry. 

(ctb'UoH,  sorrowful. 

Tci^^Ctt,  lie^,  gelie^^en  (^aben),  to 
lend. 

(ci'fc,  soft(ly),  gentle,  gently. 

Scr't^jC,  bie,  bie  -n,  lark. 

(cr'nctt,  reg.  (ijahtn),  to  learn;  to 
study  (as  a  pupil) ;  ftubiereu  is 
used  only  of  advanced  study,  as 
at  a  university. 

Sc'fcburff,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  2e'\t^ 
biic^er,  reading  book,  reader. 

(e^fcn,  lag,  gete'fen  (Ijahen),  ex  \\e\t, 
to  read. 

hi^t,  last. 

Scud^'tc,  bie,  bie  -u,  beacon;  guid- 
ing star. 

Undi^UUf  reg.  (^ahen),  to  light;  to 
shine. 

Seu'te,  bie  (plu.),  people. 

Slt^t,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -er,  light. 

Strf)t^9cfl(bc,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — 
fields  of  light.  • 

Ixtbf  dear,  superl.  as  noun,  bag 
?iebfte,  the  dearest;  what  one 
loves  most. 

SicB'c^Ctt,  bag,  beg  -g,  hie  — ,  little 
love,  darling,  sweetheart. 

(tc'6cn,  reg.  (Ijahen),  to  love. 

Steb'fte,  bag,  see  Ueb. 

Sicb,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -er,  song. 

Ucfy  Ite'feu,  see  lau'feu. 


Uegen 


18 


tttCffCtt 


Kc'gctt,  lag,  gete'gen  (^aben),  to  lie, 

recline. 
Itc^,  see  le'fen,  Dor'Iefen,  iDei'terte^ 

fen, 
lk%  see  laf'fen, 

fittt'bc,  bie,  bie  -n,  linden  (tree). 
lilt!,    left  (hand). 
2ip'pt,  bie,  bie  -n,  lip. 
io'hcUf  reg.  (^aben),  to  praise. 
Sof'fet,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  spoon. 
So'gau,  J?riebrt(i^,  proper  name^  a 

German  poet. 
Sp'rclci,    bie,  the  Lorelei,  a  river 

nymph  on  the  Bhine. 
to^f    loose;    the   matter;    SBa^    ift 

Io«?    What's    the   matter?    see 

also  lo^'ge^en. 
IW^ti^txtf  ging  log',    log'gegangen 

(fein),  to  start  in,  begin. 
Sub'ttiig,  ber,  proper  name,  Louis, 

Lewis. 
Suft,  bie,  bie  ^e,  air. 
Sui'fe,  bie,  proper  name,  Louise. 
Suft,  bie,  bie  ^e,  joy,  happiness. 
lu'ftig,  joyful,  jovial,  jolly. 

m 

ma^^txtf  reg.  (^aben),  to  make,  do  ; 

see  also  auf'mad^en,  gu'mac^en. 
mac^'ttg,  mighty. 
9Jlab'd|ett,  ha^,  beg,  -g,  bie  — ,  girl, 

maiden. 
ma^f  see  mogett, 
Wlaif  ber,  (the  month  of)  May. 
Wlatf  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  time. 
ntda'be,  {French),  sick. 
ma'Icn,  re^.  (t)aben),  to  paint. 
^a'ltVf  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  painter. 
maUf  one  ;  they  ;  you. 


ntani^,  many  (a);  special  declen- 
sion, §  124. 

mnitt^l'mal,  many  a  time,  often. 

matt'geln,  reg,  (i)ahen),,impers.with 
dat.,  to  want,  lack ;  tnir  tt)irb 
nid)tg  tttattgetn,  I  shall  not  want. 

SOlann,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  ""er,  man  ; 
husband  ;  Mr. 

'Mm'itl,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  mmid, 
cloak,  robe,  mantle. 

'^^x'^tWf  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  fairy 
tale,  story. 

^axxt' f  bie,  proper  name,  Mary, 
Marie. 

WciX^f  ber,  (the  month  of)  March. 

aWattp'tt^,  ber,  beg  mait^Ci'x, 
proper  name,  Matthew. 

^ecr,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  sea, 
ocean. 

mc^t,  more. 

ntctn,  poss.  adj.,  my ;  poss.  pron., 
mine. 

tttei'nig,  ber  mei'nige,  beg  -tx,  poss. 
pron.,  mine. 

SSltx'\itXf  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  master. 

WtUt^tx'f  bie,  bie  -en  (forWiioW)^ 
melody,  music. 

SJlenf (^,  ber,  beg  -en,  bie  -en,  man,  in 
the  sense  0/ human  being,  as  dis- 
tinguished from  ber  9[Rann,  male. 

9)lett'ft^ett^|uter,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — , 
guardian  of  men. 

9Jlctt'f(i^Ctttroftcr,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — , 
consoler  of  men. 

^cnfd^'^ett,  bie,  humanity. 

mct'feit,  reg.  (l)aben),  to  note,  take 
note  of. 

mef'fctt,  mag,  gemef'fen  (tjabenj,  er 
ntigt,  to  measure. 


awcffct 


19 


ndl^en 


9Wef' fcr,  ba«,  beg  -«,  tic  — ,  knife. 

ntit^,  me ;  see  idj. 

miii(]r  bte,  milk. 

mt(b(c),  mild(ly). 

min'ber,  less. 

Wnn'itf  bie,  bie  -n,  minute. 

mir^  (to)  me ;  see  id). 

miif  prep,  with  dat.,  with ;  adv, 
and  Sep.  prefix,  along. 

mitfam'mcn,  adv.,  together. 

'^ii'itf  bte,  bie  -n,  middle,  midst. 

ntit'tett,  adv.,  in  the  midst  or 
middle. 

m'6d)'iCf  see  mi3gen, 

mij'gen,  moc^'te,  gemod)t'  or  mogen 
(^aben),  er  mag,  to  like  ;  may ; 
jt)?'es.  subj.,  moge  is  often  used  to 
introduce  a  wish. 

Wo'nat,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -e, 
month. 

9)lottt),  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -e,  moon. 

Wlott'taq,  ber,  Monday. 

9Jlor'gcn,  ber,  beg  -g,  bte  — ,  morn- 
ing ;  written  as  an  adverb  with- 
out a  capital  when  following  an 
adverb  like  gefterit,  ^eute:  Ijente 
tttorgett,  this  morning. 

tttOt'gcn,  adv.,  to-morrow  ;  as  noun, 
bag  Tlovqen,  (the)  to-morrow. 

Wlox'qtnvDt,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  dawn, 
morning  glow. 

mur'genfc^Ott,  fair  as  the  morn- 
ing. 

miibe,  tired,  weary ;  as  noun,  ber 
Tlvibe,  beg  -n,  bte  -ti,  weary  per- 
son; aEen  SJliiben,  to  all  the 
weary. 

m^Vxa'i),  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  aRitt)I'== 
rciber,  millwheel. 


^nVUVf  ber,  beg  -g,  bte  — ,  miller; 
proper  name.  Miller. 

mnv'mtlnf  reg.  (^aben),  to  mur- 
mur. 

Wxx^f  bag,  the  word  "  must." 

miif  fen,  mitgte,  gemugt,  or  miiffen 
(I^abett),  er  mug,  to  have  to,  be 
obliged  to,  must. 

mu^'tc,  mugte^  see  miiffen* 

Wviif  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  courage. 

ttttt'ttg,  bold,  courageous;  strong. 

Wwi'itXf  bte,  bte  'Mui'itx,  mother. 

tta(^,    prep,   vnth  dat.,   to;    after; 

according  to;   nac^   §aufe,   (to) 

home ;  sep.  prefix  in  nac^'fdjlagen. 
na^bcm',  conjunction  followed  by 

the  dependent  order,  after. 
"^a^'vxxiia^f  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -e, 

afternoon ;  written  as  an  adverb 

without  a  capital  following  words 

like  lieute,  morgen,   etc.:  geftern 

na(^mtttag» 
na(^'f(^(agctt,  fd^dtg  tiac^^  na(f)'ge= 

f(f)(agen  (^aben),  er  f(^Ia(|t  nad:}', 

to  look  up,   as   of  toords  in  a 

dictionary. 
md^%  superl.  o/tia^, nearest,  next; 

ber  9^dd)fte,  beg  -n,  the  next  one ; 

one's  neighbor. 
9Jac^t,  bte,  bte  ""e,  night. 
9lad)i'lit'i>f  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -er, 

evening  song. 
nat^'pf^Iagctt,  see  na(^'jd)(agen, 
^a^Mf  bte,  bte  -u,  needle. 
na%  compar.,  nd^et,  snperl.,m6^\t, 

near,  preceded  by  the  dative. 
na'^Ctt,  reg.  (^aben),  to  sew. 


9^ame 


20 


^arabicig 


^amtf  ber,  beg  -n^,  bie  -n,  name. 

na^f  wet. 

natiir'lir^,  adj.,  natural;  adv.,  of 
course. 

^t'Mf  ber,  bie  — ,  fog,  mist,  haze. 

nt'htttf  prep,  with  dat.  or  ace,  be- 
side, by,  near. 

^t'dtuXf  htx, proper  name,  a  German 
river,  on  which  Heidelberg  stands. 

ttc^'mcn,  na^m,  genom'men  (^aben), 
er  nimmt,  imperative,  nimtn, 
nel^mt,  to  take ;  in  ^n'fjjrud^  ne^= 
men,  to  lay  claim  to. 

ttei^gen,  reg.  (]^aben),  to  incline ; 
to  decline,  wane. 

mxrif  adv.,  no;  as  noun,  hoi^  ^nn, 
the  word  "  no. " 

9^eft,  tiOi^,  be8  -(e)?,  bie  -er,  nest. 

tteu,  adj.,  new:  adv.,  anew. 

neutt,  nine. 

ncUttt^  ninth. 

ttCUn'unbati^lt'Stgft,  eighty-ninth. 

neutt'je^n^Utt'bertbm'se^tt,  nine- 
teen hundred  thirteen. 

nit^t,  not. 

uv6]i^f  nothing,  not  anything;  a 
following  adjective  is  neuter, 
strong  and  is  written  with  a  capi- 
tal, except  anber:  ntdt)t?  @uteg, 
nidjt^  anbere?. 

ttic,  never. 

tttc'bcr,  adv.  and  sep.  prefix,  down. 

itic'bcrbKtfen,  reg.,  sep.  (()aben),to 
look  down,  glance  down. 

ttie'betneigett,  reg.,  sep.  (l)aben), 
to  bend  down. 

nh'mai^f  never,  at  no  time. 

nic'manb,  no  one,  nobody ;  niemanb 
anberS,  no  one  else. 


nintm,  see  ne^'nten, 

nim'mtVf  never. 

ttimmermc^r',  never,  nevermore. 

nit,  dialect  for  nidjt, 

nod^f  still,  yet ;  noc^  nic^t,  not  yet ; 
more  (§  160)  ;  noc^  etrt)ag,  some 
more ;  nor :  tt)eber  .  .  .  noc^,  nei- 
ther .  .  .  nor ;  sometimes  omitted, 
§297. 

^Ot,  bie,  bie  ""e,  need,  necessity. 

nun,  excl. ,  well ;  adv. ,  now. 

nur,  only.  ' 

9^tt^,  bie,  bie  9^iiffe,  nut. 

D 

0,  excl.,  O,  oh,  ah. 

ohf    conjunction  followed    by    the 

dependent  order,  whether,  if ;  ob 

.  .  .  fc^on,  although. 
o'htUf  above,  upstairs. 
o't)tVf  or ;  enttoeber  ♦ . .  ober,  either 

...  or. 
pf'fcn,  open. 
pft,  often. 
0^'nc,  prep,  with  ace,  without;  used 

also  with  German  infinitive  where 

English  has  a  verbal  in  -ing. 
O^r,  t>a^f  be?  -§,  bie  -en,  ear. 
D(,  ha^,  be?  -?,  bie  -e,  oil. 
Ot'iOf  ber,  proper  name,  Otto. 

^aaVf  ha^,  be?  -?,  bie  -e,  pair ;  etn 
paax,  used  as  indecl.  adj.,  a  few, 
a  couple  of. 

^a^teir^  \)a9,  be?  -?,  bie  -e,  paper. 

^arabic!^',  ha^,  be?  ^arabie'fe?, 
paradise. 


paii\tn 


21 


ntttb 


^laffctt,  reg.  (l)aben),  loith  dat.,  to 
fit ;  to  suit. 

$Cttt,  bie,  agony,  torture,  pain. 

^fab,  ber,  beg  -(e)«,  bie  -e,  path. 

$fcf' fcr^  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  pepper. 

^fcrb,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  horse. 

^futtb,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  jlxjei  ^funb, 
pound. 

^la'UUf  ^uguft,  @raf  Don,  proper 
name,  a  German  poet. 

^iai^,  ber,  beg  -eg,  bie  "e,  room 
(space) ;  seat. 

portion',  bie,  bie  -en  (t  like  <^),  por- 
tion, helping. 

$oft,  bie,  bie  -en,  post  office. 

^vci^f  ber,  beg  ^reifeg,  bie  ^reife, 
price ;  praise,  glory. 

^ru^,  9lobert,  proper  name,  a  Ger- 
man poet. 

^falm,  ber,  beg  -(e) g,  bie  -en, 
psalm. 

^nltf  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  desk. 

£1 

SlUtVUf  bie,  bie  -n,  spring  (of 
water) . 

^atf  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  "e,  counsel, 

advice. 
tau'Bctt,  reg.  (^aben),  to  rob. 
tatt'fd)cn,   reg.  (^aben),  to  rustle, 

ripple,  roar,  rush. 
Xt6)if   adj.,  right,  morally;   right, 

as  distinguished  from  left ;  red)t 

^aben,  to  be  right;  adv.,  rightly, 

really ;  well. 
Vt'htn,  reg.  (^aben),  to  speak,  talk. 


OfJc'gcI,  bie,  bie  -n,.  rule. 
Slc'gctt,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  rain. 
rcg'ttCtt,  reg.  (f)aben),   impers.,  to 

rain ;  eg  regnet,  it's  raining. 
Xtidjf    rich(ly);    in,  an;   as  noun, 

ber  9^ei(f)e,  beg  -n,  bie  -n,  the  rich 

(man) . 
^ti^f  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  king- 
dom, empire. 
rci't^ett,  reg.  (^aben),  to  hand  to, 

pass;  to  hold  out,  of  one'' s  hand; 

to  reach. 
rcttt,  pure,  clean. 
JWci'nitf,    SfJobert,  proper  name,   a 

German  poet. 
Ol^citt,    ber,     beg  -g,    the    Rhine, 

Germany'' s  most  famous  river. 
rt^ 'tig,  right,  correct  (ly). 
rie'fctn,   reg.    (^aben),  to    ripple, 

trickle. 
^is'^txif  ber,  proper  name,  Robert. 
O^iorf,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  H,  coat. 
O^loman',  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  -e,  novel ; 

tale. 
OlJo'fc,  bie,  bie  -n,  rose. 
ro'fcttfatben,     rofenfarbneg,    rosy- 

hued,  roseate. 
ro'fig,  rosy. 
D^ij^'lcttt,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  little 

rose. 
tot,  red. 
JRii'rfert,  griebrid),  proper  name,  a 

German  poet. 
ni'fctt,   rief,    gern'fen    (I)aben),  to 

call,  cry  out;  see  also  gn'rnfen, 
Dlu5(c),  bie,  ber  — ,  rest. 
tu'^cn,  reg.  (^aben),  to  rest. 
ni'^ig,  quiet,  calm. 
tunb,  round. 


22 


iti^ntU 


(B*f  abbreviation  for  @attft,  Saint, 

St. 
(Baa'ltf  tit,  proper  name,  a  German 

river. 
(Ba'd^tf  bte,  tie  ~u,  affair,  business ; 

thing. 
fat^t(e),  soft(ly),  gently. 
Badf   ber,  be^  -(e)^,  bie  "e,  bag, 

sack. 
fa'gctt,  reg.  (l)aben),  to  say,   tell; 

see  also  {jer'fagen, 
fa^y  fa'()eft,  see  fe'^en;  jal)  au^',  see 

(Sai'te,   bte,   bie  -tt,  string,  as  of  a 

harp. 
^aVhtttf  reg.  (^aben),  to  anoint. 
(Bai^f  bag,  beg  -eg,  bte  -e,  salt. 
farn'mcltt,  re^.  (^aben),  to  gather, 

collect. 
famm'le,  see  jam'melm 
fanft,      gentle,     mild(ly),     peace- 

ful(ly). 
©fttt'gcr,  ber,  beg  -g,  bte  — ,  singer, 

minstrel. 
f«Sr  jci'^ett,  see  \it'^tn. 
<Batif  ber,  beg  -eg,  bte  "e,  sentence. 
fc^affen,  re^.  (^aben),  to  work,  toil. 
Sc^a^,  ber,  beg  -eg,  bie  H,  treasure ; 

sweetheart,  of  either  sex. 
fc^afjctt,    reg.    (Ijaben),  to  value, 

treasure. 
fii^att'ctt,  reg.  (^aben),  to  look  at, 

see  ;  see  also  ^ernte'berfd)auen. 
\d)au'xi^f    shivering (ly),    shudder- 

ing(ly). 
Sc^cffel,  3o'jef  5Btf 'tor  Don,  proper 

name,  a  German  poet. 


fc^ci'bett,  fc^teb,  gefd^te'ben  (fetn), 
to  part,  depart. 

ft^Ctt'fett,  reg.  (l)aben),  to  present; 
see  also  etn'fc^enfen. 

(Bd^m'ntf  bte,  bte  -n,  barn. 

fc^i'rfen,  reg.  (^aben),  to  send ;  fxdj 
f(J)t'c!en,  impers.,  to  be  proper. 

Sti^iff,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -e,  ship. 

Si^iffcr,  ber,  beg  -g,  bte  — ,  boat- 
man. 

<B^iVhVf  grtebric^  t)on,  proper 
name,  a  German  poet. 

8ti^im'mcv,  ber,  beg  -g,  bte  — ,  shim- 
mer, glimmer,  gleam. 

fc?^(a'fctt,  fd)(tef,  gefd^Ia'fen  (^aben), 
er  f(^(aft,  to  sleep ;  see  also  etii'= 
fd)Iafen, 

fc^la'gen,  fdiUig,  gejc^Ia'gen  (t)aben), 
er  fc^lagt,  to  strike,  beat;  of 
drums,  to  beat. 

fd^ltd^t,  smooth,  polished. 

fc^Hef,  see  frf)Ia'fen. 

f^lie'len,  fci)Io6,  gefci)(onen  (^aben), 
to  shut,  close ;  see  also  ju'fc^Ite* 

fri^Umm,  bad;  compar.,  frf)(tmtner, 
worse. 

<B^U%  bag,  beg  ®c^Ioffeg,  bte 
©c^Ioffer,  castle. 

frfjtug,  see  i^(a'gen» 

ft^(um'mcrtt,  reg.  (^aben),  to  slum- 
ber. 

ft^mati^'tig,  slender,  slim. 

ft^mit'rfett,  reg.  (f)aben),  to  adorn; 
fid)  fc^miidf en,  to  deck  oneself  out. 

8rf|ttce,  ber,  beg  -g,  snow. 

fc^ttci'ctt,  reg.  (^aben),  impers.,  to 
snow. 

ff^nett^  compar.,  fd)neUer ;  superl.y 


W^rt 


23 


(Bithtl 


fd)neUft,  aufg  ft^neUfte,  swift(ly), 

fast. 
ft^on,  superl.,  fd^bnft,  beautiful. 
fd^on,  already  ;   sign  of  continued 

action,  §  73  ;  sometimes  omitted, 

§  298  ;  ob  .  .  ,  fd^on,  although. 
^d)'6p'^tVf  hex,  be^  -^,  bie  — ,  creator. 
fc^rct'ben,  frf)rieb,  gefcf)rie'ben  (^a- 

ben),   to   write ;    as   noun,   ha^ 

@cf)reiben,  be§  -8,  writing,  letter. 
f^ricb,  see  fd^rei'ben. 
<Sc^ritt,  ber,  beg  -(e)8,  bie  -e,  step, 

stride,  pace ;  in  gleic^em  ®c^ritt 

unb  2;ritt,  keeping  step  side  by 

side. 
(S^u^,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  shoe. 
@t^tt(b,  bie,  bie  -en,  fault ;  debt. 
©ci^urbigcr,   ber,  beg   -g,   bie   — , 

debtor. 
Sti^u'fc,  bie,  bie  -n,  school. 
(B^n'hVf  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  pupil. 
fri^niari^,  weak. 

<Bd^tt>aVhtf  bie,  bie  -n,  swallow. 
fti^ttiattb,  see  fd^min'ben. 
©c^ttJatm,    ber,    beg    -g,    bie    "e, 

swarm ;  crowd,  host. 
ft^ttiarj,  black. 
fc^hic'bctt,  reg.  (^aben),  to  sway, 

float ;  soar,  hover. 
ff^ttJC'bcttb,  see  f^me'ben  ;  in  fd^tre^^ 

benber  $ein,  in  the  agony  of  sus- 
pense. 
fti^ttJci'fett,  reg.  (^aben),  to  wander, 

stray,  roam. 
fd^iJiei'gen,     fc^ttjieg,     gefc^tDie'gen 

(^aben),  to  be  silent;   to  keep 

still. 
ft^tticr,   heavy,    of  weight;    hard, 

of  work. 


(B^m'^ittf  \>ie,  bie  -n,  sister. 
'Bd}t0it'xx^Uitf   bie,  bie  -en,   difia- 

culty. 
fti^ttiitt'bcn,    fc^tDanb,    gefdjmnn'ben 

(fein),  to  vanish,  disappear. 
fti^ttJo'tctt,  f(f)tt)or,  gefdimo'ren  (^a^ 

ben),  to  swear. 
\td}§,  six. 

fcr^^'ttttbbrci'^ig,  thirty-six. 
Sec,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  @e'en,  lake. 
8ec'(e,  bie,  bie  -n,  soul. 
fc'^Ctt,    fa^,   gefe'^en    (l)aben),    er 

fiel)t,   to  see,   look ;    imperative, 

mi 

fc^r,  very  ;  much. 

fet,  feib,  feien,  see  jein. 

fein,  poss.  adj.  and pron.,  his,  its. 

fcitt,  tDar,  geix)e'fen  (fein)  ;  i6)  bin, 
bn  bift,  er  ift;  mir  finb,  i^r  feib, 
fie  finb  ;  pres.  suhj.,  ic^  fei,  etc.; 
imper.,  fei,  feib,  feien  <Bie,  to  be  ; 
with  some  verbs  (§66),  have; 
eg  ift,  there  is. 

fctt,  prep,  with  dat.,  since  ;  con- 
junction followed  by  the  depend- 
ent .order,  since. 

(Sei'tc,  bie,  bie  -n,  side  ;  page. 

f elbft,  intensive  pron. ,  self,  himself, 
herself,  myself,  etc. ;  adv.,  even. 

feFtCtt,  seldom,  rarely. 

fcf^cn,  reg.  (f)aben),  to  set,  put; 
fid)  fe^en,  to  sit  down. 

fiti^,  reflexive  pron.  for  dat.  and  ace. 
of  the  third  person  and  @ie,  him- 
self, herself,  etc. 

fic,  she ;  they. 

(Bit,  you. 

(Sie'fiel,  ^CLxi,  proper  name,  a  Ger- 
man poet. 


fte^en 


24 


(Btaat 


fic^Bctt,  seven. 

fic'Bcntnal,  seven  times. 

fie'^CltUttbfttttf'^ifift,  fifty-seventh. 

ficBt,  seventh. 

fic'gett^  reg.  (^aben),  to  conquer. 

ftc^,  fieljft,  fie^t,  see\t'i)tn ;  fie{)t  an^, 
see  an^'\eljtri. 

(BiVhtXf  ha^,  beg  -g,  tie  — ,  silver. 

fttt'gcn,  fang,  gefuugen  (^aben),  to 
sing  ;  as  noun,  ha^  <Stngen,  sing- 
ing. 

fin'fen,  fanf,  gefun^fen  (fein),  to 
sink  ;  to  wane,  flag. 

©itttt,  ber,  bit  -e,  sense ;  thoughts ; 
head. 

fif^Ctt,  \a%  gefef'fen  (t)aben),to  set. 

fo,  so  ;  then  ;  often  omitted  in  trans- 
lation when  used  at  the  beginning 
of  a  German  conclusion. 

foBalb'^  conjunction  followed  by  the 
dependent  order,  as  soon  as. 

@o^tt,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  ""e,  son. 

^ol^f  such ;  special  declension, 
§124. 

Solbaf ,  ber,  beg  -en,  bie  -en,  soldier. 

fol'tcu,  foU'te,  gejoEt^  or  ]oVkn  (^a= 
ben),  er  foil,  to  be  to  ;  ought  to  ; 
shall ;  SSag  foil  bag?  What's  the 
meaning  of  that?  ©g  Ijat  nxd)t 
foEen  fein,  it  was  not  so  to  be. 

^oU'ttf  see  fol'len. 

(Bom'mtVf  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  sum- 
mer. 

^om'mcr-^totff,  Otto,  proper  name, 
a  German  poet. 

fott'bcr,  prep,  with  ace,  without ; 
it  is  not  in  common  use. 

fOtt'bcnt,  but  (instead),  but  (on  the 
other  hand),  but  (rather). 


Sott'ttaBcttb,   ber,  beg  -g,   bie  -e, 

Saturday, 
(Sott'ne,  bie,  bie  -n,  sun. 
Sotttt'tag,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  -e,  Sun- 
day. 
<Sor^ge,  bie,  bie  -n,  care,  worry. 
fjJtJiel',  so  much. 
f^an'ttCtt,  reg.  (^aben),  to  stretch, 

span,  spread ;  see  also  aug'fpan* 

nen. 
f^iit,  late. 
f^jasic'rett,  f^agier'te,  f^^ajiert'  (feiti), 

used  generally  with  gel^en,  to  take 

a  walk. 
(S^te'gel,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  mirror. 
f^ie'gclflar',  clear  as  a  mirror. 
S^tcl,   bag,   beg  -g,  W  -e,  play, 

game. 
fpic'tcjt,  reg.  (l)aben),  to  play. 
\^xa^f  see  fpre'cf)en. 
S^t^a'tffc,    bie,    bie    -n,    language, 

tongue. 
f^ran'gctt,  see  f^rin'gen. 
f^rc'd^cn,    fpvad^,   gef^ro'd^en    (l)a= 

ben),  erfprid^t,  imperative,  fprit!^; 

pres.  part.,  fpred^enb,  to  speak, 

talk ;    as    noun,    bag    @:pre(^en, 

speaking. 
(S^ric^'ttiort,    bag,    beg   -(e)g,    bie 

©pric^tDorter,  proverb. 
f^ntt'geu,       f^rang,      gefprun'gen 

(fein),  to  spring,  leap,  jump;  of 

buds,  to  burst. 
^pvnd}f  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  "-'e,  saying, 

proverb. 
Hjii'rctt,   reg.    (^aben),   to    detect, 

note,  find. 
<Biaatf  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -en,  state ; 

country. 


Stati 


25 


Xf^tattt 


'Btahf  ber,  beg  -(e)§,  bte  ""e,  staff, 

rod. 
^iati^,  see  fte'c^en, 
<BtaUf  bie,  bie  ""e,  city  ;  in  bie  or  ber 

(^tabt,  down  town. 
Stdbt'^Ctt,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  little 

city. 
ftaitb,  ftan'ben,  see  fte'l)en;  ftanb(en) 

avL^',  see  auf'fte{)en* 
ftarfi,  see  fter'ben* 
ftar!,  a^^j.,  strong  ;  adv.^  hard. 
ftatt,  i)rep.  toii/^  gen.,  instead  of. 
ftc'd^Ctt,  ftad^,  gefto'(^en  (^aben),  er 

ftic^t,  to  prick  ;  to  sting. 
ftc'rfctt,  reg.  (^aben),  to  put,  stick, 

as  into  a  pocket. 
©tc'rfctt,  ber,  beg  -g,  bte  — ,  stick, 

staff,  rod. 
fte'^ett,   ftanb,  geftau'beit    (l)aben), 

to  stand;  see  also  aitf'fteljeti, 
ftei^gen,  ftteg,  geftte'gen  (jeln),  to 

rise,  arise,  go  up. 
fter'fien,  ftarb,  geftor'ben  (fein),  er 

ftirbt,  to  die. 
Ster'ttcnmccr,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie 

-e,  sea  of  stars,  starry  ocean. 
fternffar,  'clear,  with  the  stars  shin- 
ing. 
ftitt(c),      compar.,      ftiller,.     still, 

soft(ly),  quiet(ly). 
^iiVitf  bie,  ber  — ,  stillness,  quiet, 

peace. 
8ttm'mc,  bie,  bte  -tt,  voice. 
Storm,   S;i)eobov,  proper  name,   a 

German  author. 
Strati,  ber,  beg  -g,  bte  -en,  beam, 

ray. 
fivat^'itUf  reg.  (l^aben),  to   gleam, 

beam. 


'Biva'^tf  bte,  bte  -n,  street. 

ftr^'bcn,  reg.  (^aben),  to  strive. 

Sti'Ctt,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -e,  con- 
flic  r,  dispute,  strife. 

Strom,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bte"e,  stream. 

Stiict,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -e,  piece. 

ftubic'rcu,  ftubter'te,  ftubtert'  (^a= 
ben),  to  be  a  student  at  a  uni- 
versity, to  study  in  a  higher  in- 
stitution; it  is  generally  not  used 
of  study  in  high  schools;  see 
Ternen, 

(Btn%  ber,  beg  -g,  bte  ""e,  chair. 

ftumm,  dumb  ;  silent. 

Stim'bC,  bte,  bte  -n,  hour ;  lesson. 

Sturm,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bte^'e,  storm. 

Sturm,  ^n\in^,  proper  name,  a  Ger- 
man poet. 

fu'c^Ctt,  reg.  (babcn),  to  look  for, 
seek. 

fum'mctt,  reg.  (^aben),  to  hum. 

Su^'^e,  bte,  bte  -n,  soup. 

fu§,  sweet(ly). 


Xa^f  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -e,  day ; 
ad)t  2^age,  a  week;  ^eute  iiber 
adjt  XaQt,  a  week  from  to-day. 

taji'ttC^,  daily. 

Xaif  bag,  beg  -g,  bte  "er,  valley. 

Xa'^d)tf  bie,  bte  -n,  pocket. 

^af'fe,  bte,  bte  -n,  cup. 

^ot,  bte,  bte  -en,  deed. 

tatf  ta'ten,  tci'te,  see  tun. 

Xctf  ber,  beg  -g,  bte  -g,  tea. 

^el'tcr,  ber,  beg  -g,  bte  — ,  plate. 

Xtp'pid)f  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  -e,  carpet. 

X^ea'tcr,  bag,  beg  -g,  bte  — , 
theater. 


X^cobor 


26 


U^ranb 


Xf^t'o'^OXf  ber,  proper'  name^  Theo- 
dore. 

t^ro'ncn,  reg.  (^aben),  to  be  en- 
throned. 

ticf,  deep. 

^ttt'te,  bie,  bie  -n,  ink. 

%\\^f  ber,  be§  -(c) §,  bie  -e,  table. 

%f>6)^itXf  bie,  bte  2^oci)'ter,  daughter. 

^0b,  ber,  be§  -(e)§,  bie  -e,  death. 

tot,  dead ;  as  no%in,  ber  2^ote,  be^ 
-n,  bie  -n,  dead  man,  the  dead. 

tra'gcn,  trug,  getra'gen  (^aben),  er 
trcigt,  to  carry,  bear ;  to  wear,  as 
of  clothes. 

Xra'nc,  bie,  bie  -n,  tear. 

%xa\i'tx\\t\^,  ba«,  be§  -(e)§,  bie  -er/ 
mourning,  mourning  dress. 

txaVi'ix^f  familiar  ;  cordial ;  snug, 
cozy. 

Xrauttt,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  'Xrau'me, 
dream. 

trau'tttClt,  reg.  (^aben),  to  dream. 

trau'rig,  sad. 

tm'Bctt,  trieb,  getrie'ben  (^abett), 
to  drive  ;  of  flocks^  to  tend  ;  to 
do,  act ;  to  work  at,  study. 

ttcn'nett,  reg.  (^aben),  to  separate. 

%xt)^')^t,  bie,  bie  -n,  stairway, 
stairs ;  bie  Xrep^e  I)inauf,  up- 
stairs ;  bie  ^reppe  t)inunter  or 
{)inab,  downstairs  (§  267). 

iXZMf  faithful ;  of  love,  true. 

trieb,  see  trei'ben, 

tritt'fctt,  tranf,  getrun'fen  (^aben), 
to  drink. 

Xxitt,  ber,  be8  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  step ; 
in  gtei'c^em  @d)ritt  unb  Xritt, 
keeping  step  side  by  side. 

Xrom'md,  bie,  bie  -n,  drum. 


Xxo%  ber,  beg  -(e) §,  comfort,  sol- 
ace, consolation. 

trii'ftcn,  reg.  (f)aben),  to  comfort, 
console. 

ixoi$f  prep,  with  gen.,  in  spite  of. 

tntg,  see  tra'gen. 

Xnd^f  ha^,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  ""er,  cloth. 

ttttt,  tat,  getan'  (^aben),  to  do  ;  letb' 
tun,  with  dat.,  to  hurt,  to  make 
sorry,  eg  tnt  ntir  (eib,  I  am  sorry ; 
!unb'  tun,  to  make  known,  pro- 
claim. 

%ViXf  bie,  bie  -en,  door. 

U 

ii'Bet,  evil;  iibel  <^t\)n\,with  dat.,  to 
fare  ill ;  iibel  ne^men,  to  take  [it] 

U'Mf  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  evil. 

ii'bcn,  reg.  (^aben),  to  practice; 
fic^  iiben,  to  practice. 

ii'bcr,  prep,  with  dat.  or  ace.,  over, 
above;  about;  ^eute  iiber  ad)t 
Xage,  a  week  from  to-day ;  also 
sep.  and  especially  insep.  prefix^ 
as  in  iiber^e'ben,  iiberjet'jen,  etc. 

uhtxaWf  everywhere,  all  over. 

iibcr^e'bctt  fid),  fi(^  iiber^ob',  fi(^ 
iiberi)o'beu  (i)aben),  to  boast,  be 
proud  ;  to  presume,  be  conceited. 

itbcrfet'^ett,  reg.,  insep.  (^ben),  to 
translate. 

ilBer^eu'gett,  reg.,  insep.  (^aben),  to 
convince. 

U'bung,  bie,  bie  -en,  practice. 

U'fer,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  shore, 
bank. 

U^'fanb,  li?ubn)ig,  proper  name,  a 
German  poet. 


U^t 


27 


tjctftc^en 


Ui^Vf  bte,  bie  -en,  clock,  watch ; 
o'clock;  tt)iet)iel  Uf)r  ift  e^?  what 
time  is  it?  je^n  U^r,  ten  o-clock. 

UXttf  prep,  with  ace,  around,  about; 
with  the  infinitive  and  iw,  in  or- 
der to;  also  Sep.  and  insep.  pre- 
fix, as  in  umge'ben,  etc. 

umge'fictt,  umgab',  iimge'ben  (^a= 
ben),  er  nmgibt',  to  surround. 

untf^tv'fadv.  and  sep. prefix,  around, 
about,  round  about. 

itttb,  and. 

Utt'gliirf,  'ta^,  beg  -(e)g,  misfortune, 
unhappiness. 

tttt're^t,  wrong;  nnrec^t  ^aben,  to 
be  wrong. 

ym^f  us  ;  see  tt)tr. 

tttt'fer,  poss.  adj.  and  pron.,  our, 
ours. 

tttt'tCtt,  below ;  downstairs. 

nn'ttXf  prep,  with  dat.  or  ace,  un- 
der ;  among ;  sep.  and  insep.  pre- 
fix, as  in  unter^al'ten,  etc. 

nntttfjaVitiXf  unterl)iett^  nnterl)a('= 
ten  (^aben),  er  unterljdit',  to  en- 
tertain. 

ttttternc^'mctt,  nnternat)m',  nnter* 
nom'men  (^aben),  er  nnter* 
ntmmt',  to  undertake. 

f8 
^a'tttf  ber,  be^  -g,  bie  35ater,  father; 

the  heavenly  Father. 
S^a'terlttttb,  ha^,  beg  ~(e)g,  bie  -e, 

fatherland,  mother  country. 
S5eU'(^Ctt,    ba^,    beg    -g,    bie    — , 

violet. 
Herfieffertt,  reg.,  insep.  (^aben),to 

correct ;  to  improve. 


tJCrblii'^Ctt,    reg.,  insep.   (fein),  to 

wither,  decay. 
tjerbcr'fictt,  oerbarb,  t)erbor'ben  (^a^ 

ben),  er  berbirbt',to  spoil,  injure, 

ruin. 
tierbtic'^ctt,     t)erbro6',    toerbrof'fen 

(^aben),  to  vex,  annoy,  trouble. 
bcrci'ttcn,  reg.,  insep.   (^aben),  to 

unite. 
iJCtforgen^  re^.,  insep.  (^aben),  to 

follow  vigorously ;  to  persecute. 
tJcrgc'bett,    tjergab',  tjerge'ben  (l^a= 

ben),  er  tiergibt',  imperative,  ber* 

gib',  to  forgive. 
tjergc'^ert,      merging',     Dergan'gen 

(jein),  to  pass,  of  time  or  events. 
ticrgel'ten,  Dergalt',  tjergot'ten  (!)a* 

ben),  er  t)ergt(t,  to  pay  for. 
tiergcffett,   t»erga6',  tjergef'fen  (l)a= 

ben),  er  t)ergigt',  to  forget. 
S5crgi§'tncitttttrf|t,  bag,  beg  -g,  for- 
get-me-not. 
Ucrfau'fctt;  reg.,  insep.  (l^aben),  to 

sell. 
ticrtct'^cn,  reg.,  insep.  (^aben),  to 

hurt,  harm,  injure. 
Ucrlte'ren,  t)erlor',  i)erIo'ren  (^aben), 

to  lose. 
tJcrna^mft',  see  t)erne{)'men. 
Dcrnc^'mctt,  tierna^m',  t>ernont'men 

(^aben),  er  tjernimmt',  to  hear, 

perceive,  learn. 
tjcrft^lttt'gcn,  t)erf(i)tang^  Derfd^Inn'* 

gen  (^aben),  to  swallow. 
Ucrftattb',  see  t)erfte'l)en. 
tictftc'^Ctt,  uerftanb',  t)erftan'ben  (t)a= 

ben),    to  understand;    fid)    t)er= 

[te'^en,  impers.,  to  be  a  matter  of 

course. 


tietfttriftctt 


28 


Staffer 


ticrftt'r^cn,  reg.^  insep.  (^aben),  to 
try. 

^crfu'd^ttttg,  bie,  tie  -en,  tempta- 
tion. 

ticrtuei'ttett,  reg.,  insep.  (\)ahen),  to 
pass  (time)  in  weeping  ;  to  weep  ; 
DerrtJcin'te  2lugen,  eyes  swollen 
with  weeping. 

ticrttJCtt'bett,  reg.,  insep.  (l^aben),  to 
use,  utilize. 

t)itlf  much  ;  plu.^  many. 

t>itUd^t'f  perhaps. 

t>icr,  four. 

\)kxt,  fourth. 

^tcr'tct,  ba^,  beg  -8,  ble  — ,  fourth. 

titcr'Stgft,  fortieth. 

SJo'gct,  ber,  beg  -8,  bie  ^ogel, 
bird. 

^o'g(e)(citt,  ha^,  beg  -g,  bie  — , 
little  bird. 

^otaVf  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  -e  (i)  ZiX-e 
tt)),  vowel.  ^ 

^olf,  bag,  beg  -(e) g,  bie  ""er,  nation, 
people,  folk. 

^oiWiortf  ber,  beg  -g,  the  tone  of 
the  people ;  tm  iBoIfgton,  after 
the  manner  of  a  folksong. 

UOU,  full. 

tjottctt'bcn,  ijoEen'bete,  DoUen'bet 
(l^aben),  to  finish. 

tJDttt,  Don  bent. 

tfOttf  prep,  with  dat.,  from,  of.; 
with  passive,  by. 

Uor,  prep,  toi^/i  dat.  or  ace,  before, 
in  front  of ;  t)or  gtt)ei  SBod^eu,  two 
weeks  ago  ;  tjor  (auter  greub',  for 
very  joy,  for  pure  joy  ;  sep.  pre- 
fix, as  in  t)or'(efen,  etc. 

tior^cr',  adv.,  before. 


tiur'Icfctt,  lag  \)ox',  i^or^gelefen  (^a* 
ben),  er  (left  tior',  to  read  (aloud). 
tjor'plefcii,  see  t)or'Iefen. 

293. 

tt>a'^tn,  reg.  (^aben),  to  watch ; 
to  wake,  be  awake. 

WttdytcVf  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  watch- 
man. 

SBa'gett,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  wagon, 
carriage. 

tual^r,  true ;  ntcf)t  tt)a^r,  isn't  it 
true  ? 

ttia^'rcttb,  prep,  with  gen.,  during ; 
conjunction  followed  by  the  de- 
pendent order,  while. 

2!Sa(b,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  W  "er,  wood, 
forest. 

ttiaCIen,  reg.  (^aben),  to  undulate, 
float ;  as  noun,  beg  SJleereg  SBal- 
len,  the  motion  of  the  sea;  see 
also  ein^er'tDallen. 

295attb,  bie,  bie  ""e,  wall  (of  a  room) . 

ttiatt'bettt^  reg.  (fetn),  to  go,  travel. 

^aw'tstxtXf  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  wan- 
derer. 

ttiatt'bcvtt,  reg,  (fetn),  to  wander. 

tnann,  interrog.,  when. 

war,  nja'ren,  tDci're,  see  feln. 

ttJarm,  warm. 

tuar'teit,  reg.  (^aben),  wait;  for, 
anf  with  ace;  also  in  poetry  with 
gen.,  jeiner  grenbe  tDarten. 

ttJanim',  why. 

tOti^,  interrog.,  what;  rel.  after 
neuter  adjs.  and  prons.,  which; 
sometimes  for  ettDag  (Less. 
XXXIX),  something,  anything. 

aSaf  fet,  bag,  beg  -g,  tixt  — ,  water. 


ttieben 


29 


ttite 


we'Bcn,    trob,    getDo'ben    (^abeu), 

aZso  re^.,  to  weave,  twine. 
^^Cf^'fef,  ber,  be^  -6,  bte  — ,  change. 
me'rfen,   reg.   (t)aben),  to   waken, 

wake  up  {active). 
ttjc'bcr,  neither;   tt)eber  .  .  .  noci), 

neither  .  .  .  nor. 
39i^eg,  ber,  beg  -(e) «,  bie  -e,  way, 

road ;  beg  ^egg,  alopg  the  way. 
t^t'^tMfPrep.  with  gen.,  on  account 

of. 
ttJeg'ocriffen,  see  tt)eg^*eigen» 
m^'xti^tUf  rt§  tt)eg',   tDeg'geriffen 

(l^aben),  to  tear   away,    snatch 

away. 
^tfjf   ba^,  beg  -(e)g,  woe,  pain, 

misery. 
ttiel^(C),  excL,  alas  !  oh  !  woe  !  ;  as 

noun,  feitt  2Be^  itnb  ^d),  no  (say- 
ing of)  woe  and  alas. 
ttJC^^ett,    reg.    ({)aben),    to    blow, 

flutter  ;  wave  ;  as  noun,  bag  2Be'= 

^en,  beg  -g,  blowing. 
SBe^f,  5^obor,  proper  name,  a  Ger- 
man poet. 
ttic^'rctt  \id},  reg.  (^aben),  to  defend 

oneself. 
ttiei'bcn,  reg.  ({)aben),  to  pasture, 

to  let  graze. 
ttDtilf   conjunction  followed  by  the 

dependent  order,  because. 
^ti'kf    bUf   ble   -n,  while,  time ; 

delay ;  diU  ntit  ^et(e,  haste  with 

delay;  the  more  haste,   the  less 

speed. 
tuci'nen,  reg.  (^aben),  to  weep,  cry. 
SBci'fc,  bte,  bte  -n,  melody,  music 

to  a  song ;  way,  manner. 
ttici'fe,  adj.,  wise. 


ttJCit,  treigt,  see  tt)if'fen. 

hict^,  adj.,  white, 

totitf  far  (not  wide). 

mei'ter,  adv.  and  Sep.  prefix,  fur- 
ther. 

tDci'tergelcfctt,  see  njei'terlefen. 

ttJei'terlefen,  (ag  mei'ter,  it)ei'terge= 
lejen  (^aben),  er  tieft  itjeiter,  to 
read  on,  read  further. 

tOti^f  rel.  pron.,  who,  which,  that; 
interrog.,  what,  which. 

^cVitf  bit,  bie  -en,  wave. 

Wdif  bie,  bie  -en,  world. 

ttJCm,  to  whom ;  see  tvex* 

ttic'ttig,  little;  plu.,  few. 

mc'ttiger,  fewer,  less. 

WtnUf  conjunction  followed  by  the 
dependent  order,  when;  when- 
ever; if. 

tt}tVf  interrog.  and  compound  rel., 
who;  he  who. 

ttiet'tJCtt,  tt)nr'be,  getDor'ben  (fetn), 
er  tDtrb,  past  part,  in  passive  of 
other  verbs,  rtJorben,  to  become, 
get ;  as  sign  of  future  tense  with 
pres.  injin. ,  will,  shall ;  as  sign  of 
passive  with  past  participle,  am, 
is,  are ;  past  subj.  as  sign  of  con- 
ditional, triirbe,  would,  should. 

SSerf,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  work, 
the  result  of  labor,  as  distin- 
guished from  hit  Arbeit,  labor. 

totxif  worth;  worthy. 

235ct'tev,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  weather. 

2Bi'(^ert,  proper  name,  a  German 
poet. 

SKi'bevf^nt^,  ber,  beg  -(e) g,  bie 
^i'berfprii(f)e,  contradiction. 

ttJte,  how;  as;  like. 


wicber 


30 


setgcn 


ttitc'bcr,  adv.  and  sep.  prefix^  again. 

tt>icbcr!^o'lett.,  reg.,  insep.  (^aben), 
to  repeat. 

335ie'gc,  bie,  bie  -n,  cradle. 

SBic'^cttHeb,  ha^,  be§  -(e)«,  bie  -er, 
cradle  song,  lullaby. 

ttiic'gctt  \i^f  reg.  (^aben),  to  rock, 
wave. 

ttltetlicr,  how  much;  plu.^  how 
many;  tt)iet»iet  Ut)r?  what  time? 
ben  tDietttelten  ^aben  tt)ir  Ijeiite? 
what  day  of  the  month  is  to-day  ? 

ttiUb,  wild. 

tt}iUf  Unllft,  see  inol'teti. 

^iVhf  ber,  be^  -n§,  bie  -tt,  will. 

tBiVitttf  urn  ,  ♦  ♦  tDiUen,  with  gen., 
for  the  sake  of. 

SBtnb,  ber,  be^  -(e)^,  hit  -e,  wind. 

SBttt'tcr,  ber,  beg  -§,  bie  — ,  winter. 

SSip'fcl,  ber,  be§  -g,  bie  —,  top,  sum- 
mit, tip. 

mir^  we. 

mhb,  see  tDer'ben* 

toiv'ttxtf  reg.  (^abeti),  to  effect;  to 
bring  about. 

ttJif'fen,  njug'te,  getrugt'  (Ijaben), 
er  ttJeif3,  to  know,  have  knowl- 
edge of;  as  noun.,  ha^  ^iffen, 
beg  -g,  knowledge,  knowing. 

tOOf  where. 

^o'tt^tf  bie,  bie  -n,  week. 

SBo'gc,  bie,  bie  -n,  wave. 

ttio'gctt,  reg.  (^abeti),  to  surge,  un- 
dulate. 

too^tv'f  where  (from). 

tt)0^n'f  where  (to). 

ttlD^l,  perhaps,  probably,  I.  think  ; 
well;  tt)o^l  ^abe  id)  eg  gefel)en, 
yes,  I  did  see  it. 


^0%  ha^,  beg  -g,  welfare. 

ttJOl^'ncn,  reg.  (^aben),  to  live,  re- 
side. 

SBotfgang,  Ux,  proper  name,  Wolf- 
gang. 

SBol'fe,  bie,  bie  -n,  cloud. 

^oVltnlamm',  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie 
SBol'fenlam^mer,  cloud  lamb, 
fleecy  cloud. 

tooVUttf  tDott'te,  gettJoEt'  or  tvoVUn 
(l)aben),  er  tt)iU,  to  want  to,  wish, 
will. 

tvoWitf  see  tt)ol'(en. 

SSott'ttC,  bie,  ber  — ,  bliss,  happi- 
ness, joy. 

tuor'bcn,  sign  of  the  passive,  see 
it)er'ben» 

SSort,  bag,  word ;  plu.,  bie  ifiSor'te, 
connected  words;  bie  SSor'ter, 
separate  words. 

293ort'r^cn,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  little 
word. 

W6x'ttvtn(^f  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie 
SBor'terbiic^er,  dictionary,  vocab- 
ulary. 

ttiOtlOtt',  of  which,  from  which. 

ttiun'bcrBar,  strange,  miraculous. 

ttmn'bcrfam,  strange,  peculiar. 

iDtttt'berft^iJtt,  wonderfully  beauti- 
ful. 

ttiiltt'fc^Ctt,  reg.  (^aben),  to  wish. 

iwur'bc,  tDiir'be,  see  tt)er'ben» 

2Sttr'5cI,  bie,  bie^-n,  root. 

mx^'itf  see  xt)i]'\eu. 


5e^n,  ten. 

5C^tt'ma(,  ten  times. 

Sci'flcn,  reg.  (tjaben),  to  show. 


3c«c 


31 


m'ol^ 


3ct'(c,  bie,  bic  -n,  line. 
3ctt,  bie.  bie  -en,  time. 
Stltf  ba6,  be^  -(e)«,  bie  -e,  tent; 

vault  of  heaven. 
5cr5rc'ti^ett,     gerbrad^',    gerbro'djen 

(^aben),  er  gerbric^t',  to  break  to 

pieces,  smash. 
5crBro^rf)cn,  see  gerbre'(i)en» 
Scrm'^ctt,  a^rrig,  ^erriHen  (l)aben), 

to  tear  to  pieces. 
5Ctrif  fctt,  see  jerrei'gen. 
jcrftrctt'en,  reg.,  insep.  C^aben),  to 

scatter,  strew. 
^ic'^Ctt,  mr  geso'geit  (^aben),  to 

draw,  pull;  with  feiti,  to  go,  go 

along  ;  impers.^  eg  I'^^^^t  there's  a 

draft. 
Sxdf  ha^,  be§  -(e)§,  bie  — ,  goal, 

aim,  end. 
3tm'mer,  ba^,  be§  -§,  bie  — ,  room. 
5og,  see  3ie'f)en» 
5U,  adv.^  too;  prep,  ^^l^/i  da^.,  to; 

gu  §aufe,  (at)  home  ;  sep.  prefix, 

as  in  ;^u'fiigen,  ^u'madjen,  gu'rii* 

fen,  ;;u'f(i)tiegen,  etc. 
Sn'dttf  btx,  be«  -g,  bie  — ,  sugar. 


Stt'fitgctt,  reg.,  sep.  (!)aben),  to  add. 
SMt  ^^^f  ^^^  -M^,  ^i^  ""^f  train. 
^u'^'ovtMf  reg.,  sep.   (^aben),  with 

dat.,  to  listen  to. 
^yxvXf  gu  bent. 
au'mac^cu,    reg.,   sep.   (^aben),  to 

shut ;  close. 
5ur,  ivi  ber, 

^uritrf',  adv.  and  sep.  prefix,  back. 
priirf'fommcn,  !am  ^uriid',  ^uriicf'- 

gefommen  (fein),  to  come  back. 
5tt'rufen,  rief  gu^  ^u'gerufen  (^a= 

ben),  to  call  to. 
p'fti^ac^Ctt,  id)log  gn',  a^'gefc^toffen 

(l^aben),  to  lock,  close  up,  shut. 
5ttJan'$ig,  twenty. 
^Itiar,  it  is  true  ;  really. 
jttlCt,  two. 
5ltiet'mal,  twice. 
5tDcit,  second. 

5ttJci^tCtt§,  in  the  second  place. 
jttiei'Uttbcttt^alb',  two  and  a  half. 
^ttJci'untiftcB'^ig,  seventy-two. 
^\0\'\^t\Xf  prep,  with  dat.  or  ace, 

between;  among. 
5tt)ij(f,  twelve. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY 


a,  ein;  not  a,  !cin. 

able,  to  be,  fon'nen,  fonnte,  gefonnt 

(^aben),  16)  fattn. 
about,  adv.,  un'gefdl)r;  prep,  {fig-), 

iiber  with  ace.  ;  (lit.),  um  ivith 

ace. 
above,  prep.,  iiber  loith  dat.  or  ace. 
accent  {in  sense  0/ pronunciation), 

bie  5][u^'fpraci)c, 
account,  on  account  of,  tt)e'gen  with 

gen. 
across,  ii'ber  with  dat.  or  ace. 
afraid,  to  be  afraid,  fid)  furd)'ten, 

reg.  (Ijaben),  of,  t)or  with  dat. 
after,  prep.,  nad^  with  dat.  ;  conj., 

nadjbem'  with  transposed  order; 

day  after  to-morrow,  ii'bermorg  en* 
afternoon,  ber  D^ac^'mittag,  bie  -e; 

written  small  with  adverbs :  this 

afternoon,  ^eute  nac^mittag, 
against,  ge'gen  with  ace. 
ago,  t)or  followed  by  the  noun  of 

time  in  the  dative. 
agreeable,  an'gene^nt  preceded  by 

the  dative. 
all,  all;  {in  sense  0/ whole),  ganj; 

all  right,  \6)oxi,  gut;  all  kinds  of, 

aFIerlei,  indecl. 
allow,  eriau'ben,  reg.  (^aben)  with 

dat. 
aloud,  adv.,   taut;   to  read  aloud. 


tjor'lefen,  Ia«  t)or^  tjor'gelefen  (l)a= 
ben),  er  lieft  t)or, 

already,  fd^on. 

also,  auc^  {never  a(fo)» 

always,  im'mer» 

am,  bin;  see  fein  and  progressive 
form,  §  16. 

America,  bo8  3(me'rifa, 

among,  un'ter  with  dat.  or  ace. 

an,  ein. 

and,  unb  followed  by  normal  order. 

Ann(a),  (bie)  5ln'na. 

another  {in  sense  of  one  more  of 
the  same  kind),  nod)'  ein;  {in 
sense  of  a  different  one),  ein 
an'ber. 

any,  ir'genb  (ein);  not  any,  fein. 

anybody,  ir'genb  je'manb, 

any  one,  ir^genb  je'manb. 

anything,  et'ma^  {a  folloiving  ad- 
jective ^  is  capitalized,  except 
an'ber^);  not  anything,  nid)t§  {a 
following  adjective  is  capitalized, 
except  an'ber^). 

appear  {in  the  sense  o/look),  au^'= 
fe^en,  fa^  an^',  aug'gefel^en  (^a^ 
ben),  er  fte^t  aug\ 

apple,  ber  ^pfel,  bie  SpfeL 

are,  finb;  see  also  feiu,  and  the  pro- 
gressive form,  §  16  ;  are  we  to  ? 
foUen  tnir?  there  are,  e^  gibt,  e§ 
finb. 

arm,  ber  ^rm,  bie  -e. 


33 


around 


34 


break 


around,  urn  with  ace. 

arrive,  an'fommeiT,  !am  an',  ati'ge- 

fommett  (feiu), 
as,  conj.  of  past  time,  al^;  coiij.  of 

reason,  ha;   as  if,  aU  ob  or  aU 

with  inverted   order  (§  274,  a) ; 

correL,  as  .  .  .  as,  e'benjo  »  ,  . 

Wit;  as  long  as,  folan'ge;  as  soon 

as,  fobalb'* 
ask  (in  sense  of  beg),  btt'ten,  hat, 

gcbe'ten   (^aben),  for,   um  toi^/i 

ace;  (in  sense  0/ question),  fra'* 

geti,  reg.  (^aben), 
at,  gu  with  dat.,  an  ^(?iY/i  (?a?. ;  {of 

time),  nm  ivith  ace. ;  at  school, 

in  bcr  @cf)u(e;  at  home,  ^u  §anfe; 

at  once,  gleid^;  at  last,  cnb'Udt); 

at  the  house  of,  bei  with  dat. 
attend  {of  school),  befn'c^en,  reg. 

(l)aben). 
August,  ber  5luguft', 

B 

bag,  ber  <^ad,  bie  ^e, 

ball,  ber  ^aU,  bit  "e, 

barn,  bie  ®d)eu'ne, 

be,  fein,  njar,  getDefen  (fein),  er  ift; 
{of  health)  fid)  befin'ben,  befanb' 
fid^,  fid^  befun'ben  (^aben);  to  be 
(translated),  l)et6en,  l)teg,  ge^ 
l^eigen  (^aben);  to  be  late,  \pdt 
fommen,  !am  \pat,  \pat  gefommen 
(fein) ;  see  also  progressive  forms, 
§16. 

beautiful (ly),  fd^bn;  most  beauti- 
ful, fc^bnft 

because,  Wtil  with  transposed  or- 
der; because  of,  ttjegcn  with 
gen. 


become,  toer'ben,  U)urbc,  gemorben 
(fein),  er  it)irb, 

bed,  bag  33ett,  bie  -en;  to  bed,  ^n 
^ttt 

bee,  bie  iBie'ne,  bie  -n. 

before,  prep. ,  t)or  with  dat.  or  ace. ; 
conj.,  e^e  with  dependent  order. 

beg,  bit'ten,  hai,  gebeten  (i)aben), 

began,  see  begin. 

begin,  an'fangen,  fing  an^  an'ge- 
fangen  (^aben),  er  fangt  an',    . 

begun,  see  begin. 

behind,  l^in'ter  with  dat.  or  ace. 

believe,  glan'ben,  reg.  (^aben)  with 
ace.  for  things,  with  dat.  for  per- 
sons. 

belong,  ge^o'ren,  gel)orte,  gc^ort 
{\)aht\\)  with  dat. 

below,  adv.,  un'ten. 

bench,  bie  53anf,  bie  H.. 

beside,  neben  with  dat.  or  ace;  be- 
side it,  bane'ben. 

besides,  aud^. 

better,  bej'fer;  see  good ;  to  like 
better,  lie'ber  ntb'gen. 

between,  gtri'fc^en  with  dat.  or  ace. 

big,  bigger,  biggest,  grog,  grower, 
grogt, 

bird,  ber  ^o'gel,  bie  iBogeL 

blue,  blan. 

boat,  ha^  53oot,  bie  -e» 

book,  ba^  iBud),  bie  "er. 

borrow,  bor'gen,  reg,  (]^aben). 

Boston,  (bag)  ^o'fton. 

both,  beibe  {see  §  162,  c). 

bought,  see  buy. 

boy,  ber  ^nabe,  beg  -n,  bie  -n. 

bread,  bag  iBrot,  bie  -e. 

break,    bre'djen,    brad^,    gebrod^en 


broad 


35 


(^a6cn),erbrid^t;  break  to  pieces, 

^crbre'd^en,  ^erbracf)',  gerbro'd)en 

(f)aben),  er  jerbric^t'* 
broad,  breit, 

broke,  broken,  see  break, 
brother,  ber  Sruber,  bie  iBriiber, 
brown,  braun, 
bush,  ber  iBufd),  bie  "^t. 
but,    conj.,    a 'ber;    as    alternative 

after  a  negative^  fon'bern;   adv.^ 

nur;  nothing  but,  nic^t^  a(^, 
butter,  bie  iBut'ter. 
button,  ber  ^'nopf,  bie  ^e. 
buy,  fau'fen,  reg.  (^aben). 
by   (beside);   ne'ben  with  dat.   or 

ace;    agent   with  passive^    t)on 

with  dat. 


call  {in  se7ise  of  call  to),  ru'fen, 
rief,  gerufen  (l)aben);  be  called, 
l^ei'gen,  f)ie6,  ge^eigen  (l^aben)» 

came,  see  come. 

can,  fon'uen,  fonnte,  gefonnt  (^a= 
ben),  er  !ann, 

cannot,  see  can  a7id  not. 

care,  I  don't  care,  e^  ift  mir  einerlei'. 

carpet,  ber  ^e^pid^,  bie  -e. 

carriage,  ber  SBa'gen,  bie  — » 

carry,  tra'gen,  tritg,  getragen  (^a= 
ben),  er  trdgt. 

catch,  fan'gen,  fing,  gefangen  (^a= 
ben),  er  fangt. 

caught,  see  catch. 

chair,  ber  (i)tu^(,  bie  "e. 

chalk,  bie  f  rei'be,  bie  -n. 

Charles,  (ber)  ^arl 

cheek,  bie  ^adt,  bie  -n. 

chicken,  ba^  §ul)n,  bie  ""er. 


child,  children,  ba§  .^inb,  hie  -er, 

church,  bie  ^ir'd^e,  hie  -n. 

city,  hie  @tabt,  bie  "e. 

class,  bie  Maf'fe,  bie  -n. 

clean,  rein, 

close,  gu'mac^en,  mac^te  ^u',  gu'ge-- 

mad)t  (Ijaben),  er  ma(i)t  ^u', 
cloth,  ha^  Stud),  bie  "er, 
clothes,  bie  ^'(ei'ber  (pi.)- 
coffee,  ber  ^af'fee. 
coat,  ber  9lo(f,  bie  "e, 
cold,  colder,  !alt,  falter, 
come,    fom'men,    tarn,    gefontmen 

(fein). 
concert,  ha^  ^on^^ert',  bie  -e;  to  the 

concert,  in^  ,tonjert', 
consonant,  ber  ^onfonant',  be§  -en, 

bie  -en* 
contain,    ent^at'ten,  entl^ielt',    ent= 

^aFten  (^aben),  e^  ent^alt 
continue,    fort'fa^ren,    fu^r    fort', 
"-    fort'gefa{)ren    (^aben),    er    fd^rt 

fort',  followed  by  the  infinitive 

with  gu, 
convince,   iiber^eu'gen,  iibergeug'te, 

iiberjeugt'  (^aben). 
correct,  adj.,  rid) 'tig;  vei^b,  t)crbef'* 

fern,   t)erbef'ferte,  t)erbef'fert  (^a* 

ben), 
could,  see  can. 
country,  ha^  ?anb,  bie  ""er;  to  the 

country,  auf  ha^  2anh. 
couple,  ha^  ^aar,  bie  -e;  a  couple 

of,  ein  paar  {used  like  an  adjec- 
tive not   affecting  the  case  of  a 

following  noun). 
course,  of  course,  natiir'lid^  ;  it  is 

a  matter  of  course,  e^  t)erftel^t' 


cow 


36 


every 


cow,  bic  ttii^,  bic  ^u^e» 
cup,  bic  Za\'\t,  bie  -n. 


daughter,  bic  ^^od^'tcr,  bic  Xod^tcr. 
day,  bcr  XaQ,  bic  -c ;  day  after  to= 

morrow,  u'bcrmorgcii ;  what  day 

of  the    week  ?      H)c((^cn    Xclq  ? 

what  day  of  the  month?     ben 

tt)ict)icl'ten  ? 
deal,  a  great  deal,  DieL 
dear,  \k)). 

desk,  ba^  ^u(t,  bic  -c. 
dictionary,    ha^    Sor'terbuc^,    bic 

SSbrtcrbiid^cr, 
did,  see  do  and  progressive  forms, 

§16. 
didn't,  see  did  a?i(?  not. 
die,  ftcr'bcn,  ftarb,  geftorbcn  (jcin), 

cr  ftirbt 
different,  an'bcr. 

difficulty,  bic  (gd^tt)ic'rig!cit,  bie  -en. 
do,   tnn,  tat,   gctan  (^aben) ;    (of 

health)  fid)  befin'ben,  befanb'  ft(^, 

fi(^  befnn'ben  (^abcn);  that  will 

do,    ha^    gcniigt';  for  emphasis 

icith  the  imperative,  t)od} ;  see  also 

progressive  forms,  §  16. 
does,  see  do. 
dog,  bcr  §nnb,  ^ie  -c. 
door,  hie  Xiix,  bie  -en. 
down,    ^inun'ter,    nie'ber ;    down 

town,    in    bic    (or    bcr)    ^tabt ; 

down  stairs,  (motion)  bic  Xxtp'pt 

()inun'ter  or  ^inab',  (rest)  unten; 

to  sit   down,    fid^    fe^en    (reg., 

liabcn). 
draft,  there's  a  draft,  c§  gte^t. 
draw,  jie'^cn/gog,  gcjogen  (i)abcn). 


dress,  \>a^  ^kih,  bie  -cr. 

drink,    trin'fen,    tranf,    getrunfen 

(^aben). 
during,  irfi^'rcnb  with  gen. 

E 

each,  jc'bcr,  jcbe,  jebe^  ;  each  other, 
*firf),  einan'bcr. 

early,  earlier,  frii^,  frii^cr. 

easy,  easily,  easier,  easiest,  Ieid)t, 
Icid)ter,  Ieid)teft,  am  leid^teftcn. 

eat,  ej'fcn,  ag,  gcgeffen  (^aben),  er 
igt, 

egg,  ha^  di,  bic  -cr. 

eight,  ad)t ;  eighth,  (\)a^)  a6:)te. 

eighteen,  ad^t'ge^n ;  eighteenth, 
ac^tje^nt. 

either,  ent'Wthex;  either  ...  or, 
cnttreber  .  .  .  ober, 

eleven,  ctf. 

else,  an'bcrc^  ;  anything  else,  (in 
sense  of  more),  nod^  ettra^;  (in 
se?iseo/ different),  etwa^  anbere^. 

end,  \)a^  (Sn'be,  bie  -n. 

English,  adj.,  cng'Ufc^;  noun,  ba^ 
(SngUjrf)(c);  in  English,  anf  eng= 
lifd^  ;  to  speak  English,  @ngti(d) 
jpre(f)cn. 

enough,  genng';  to  be  enough,  ge= 
nti'gen,  geniig'tc,  gcniigt'  (^aben). 

entertain,  nntert)al'ten,  untcr^iett'. 
untcrl)at'ten  (^aben),  cr  untcrl)d(t'. 

evening,  bcr  5l'benb,  bie  -c ;  in  the 
evening,  am  5lbenb,  abcnbS  ;  writ- 
ten small  when  used  with  ad- 
verbs;    ^en'tc     abenb,    mor'gen 

ever,  jc. 

every,  jc'bcr,  jcbc,  jcbeg. 


everybody 


37 


front 


everybody,  je'bermann» 

everything,  al'(e§. 

everywhere,  liberaE', 

exactly,  gera'be,  genau'. 

excuse,  entfc^ul'bigeu,  entfc^ul'bigte, 

entfd)u('btgt  (^aben), 
exercise,  bic  ^ituf'gabe,  bie  -xu 
expect,    ertrar'ten,   cxtvax'tete,   er= 

tt)ar'tet  (^aben), 
explain,  erfld'ren,  erflcir^te,  erflart' 

(^aben). 
eye,  bag  5lu'ge,  be^  -g,  bie  -n. 


fall,  \aVkn,  fie(,  gefal'Ien  (jein),  er 
fdttt. 

false,  falfc^, 

family,  hie  gami'Ue  (four  syl- 
lables), bie  -n, 

far,  n^eit ;  as  far  as,  big* 

fast,  faster,  fd)neU,  fd^netfer. 

father,  ber  33a'ter,  bie  SSater. 

February,  ber  ge'bruar. 

feel  *{of  health),  fic^  befiti'ben,  he- 
fanb'  fid^,  fid^  befun'ben  (^aben). 

fell,  see  fall. 

fetch,  ^o'len,  reg.  (Ijaben), 

few,  fewer,  tve'niQe,  tDeniger;  a 
few,  ein  paav,  used  as  an  inde- 
clinable adjective  without  affect- 
ing the  case  of  the  following 
noun :  with  a  few  (a  couple  of) 
books,  mit  ein  ^aar  ^)x6)exn. 

field,  hix^  gelb,  hie  -ex. 

fifteen,  fiinf'ge^n. 

finally,  enb  lic^, 

find,  fin'ben,  fanb,  gefuttben  (^aben). 

fine,  \6)QU,  pra(^t't)ott. 

finger,  ber  gin'ger,  bie  — . 


fire,  ha^  geu'er,  bie  — . 

first,  adj.,  erft ;  adv.,  guerft'. 

fish,  ber  gifc^,  bie  -e. 

fisher  (man),  ber  %i'\&\ex,  bie  — . 

fit,  ^af'fen,  reg.  (^aben),  with  dat. 

five,  fiinf* 

floor,  ber  iBo'beu,  bie  —  or  iBbben. 

flower,  bie  ^(u'me,  bie  -n, 

fly,  noun,  bie  glie'ge,  bie  -n ;  verb, 
flie'gen,  ftog,  geflogen  (fein). 

follow,  foCgen,  reg.  (fein)  with  dat. 

foot,  ber  gu§,  bie  ''e, 

for,  prep.,  fiir  with  ace,  um  with 
ace.  ;  conj.  giving  a  reason,  benn 
with  normal  order  ;  to  tell  extent 
of  time,  it  is  translated  simply  by 
the  accusative ;  to  look  for,  ju'- 
d^en,  reg.  (^oben);  to  wait  for, 
tDar'ten,  reg,  (^aben)  auf  with 
ace. 

forget,  tjergef'jen,  tjergag',  tjergef'* 
fen  (^aben),  er  oergigt' 

forgot(ten),  see  forget. 

fork,  bie  ©a'bel,  bie  -n, 

forty-seventh,  fie'benunbDier'jigft. 

found,  see  find. 

four,  t)ier» 

fourteenth,  ijier'je^nt, 

fourth,  adj.,  Diert;  noun,  ha^  ^ier'* 
tel,  bie  — , 

Fred,  (ber)  ^ri^, 

Friday,  ber  grei'tag,  bie  -e. 

friend,  ber  J^^iinb,  hie  -e, 

from,  t)on  with  dat.;  come  from, 
^er'fommen,  fam  l)er',  f)er'gefont= 
men  (fein);  a  week  from  to-day, 
^ente  iiber  Ci6)i  2^age. 

front,  in  front  of,  Dor  icith  dat.  or 
ace. 


game 


38 


hat 


game,  ba§  @^iel,  ble  -c. 

garden,  ber  @ar'ten,  bie  ©cirten. 

gentleman,  ber  §err,  be^  -n,  bie  -en. 

German,  adj.^  beutfd^;  noun,  (the 
German  language),  t^a^  S)eut* 
fc^(e);  (the  German  citizen),  ber 
2)eutf^e,  beg  -n,  bie  -n;  in  Ger- 
man, auf  beutfc^;  to  speak  Ger- 
man, 2)eutf(^  fprec^en, 

Germany,  ba§  2)eutfd)'Ianb. 

get,  (obtain,  secure)  befom'tnen, 
befam',  befom'men  (^aben);  (be- 
come) tt)er'ben,  n)urbe,  getDorben 
(fein),  er  Unrb;  (go  and  get) 
^o'len,  reg.  (l)aben);  get  up,  auf'= 
fte^en,  ftanb  auf';  auf'geftanben 
(fein). 

getting,  see  get. 

girl,  ha^  SJ^db'c^en,  bie  — ♦ 

give,  ge'ben,  gab,  gegeben  (l^aben), 
er  gibt. 

glad,  froVr  to  be  glad,  ft(f)  frenen, 
reg.  (^aben),  id)  freue  mid), 
§  241,  or  e§  freut  mid),  §  248  ;  be 
glad  to  do  something,  ettt)a§  gem 
tun. 

gladly,  gern. 

glass,  'iid^  (§(a«,  bie  @ldfer. 

go,  ge'tjen,  ging,  gegangen  (fein); 
go  and  get,  ^o'len  (r^^.  ^aben); 
go  on,  fort'fa^ren,  fu^r  fort',  fort'* 
gefa^ren  (^aben),  er  fd^rt  fort'; 
go  walking  or  for  a  walk,  fpagie'= 
ren  ge'^en,  ging  fpajieren,  S'^aixu 
ren  gegangen  (fein). 

gold,  ia^  @olb. 

gone,  see  go. 


good,  gut;  have  a  good  time,  fid) 
(gut)  amiifie'ren,  amiifter'te  fid), 
fi(^  amiifiert'  (^aben). 

got,  see  get. 

grammar,  bie  ©ramnta'ti!,  bie  -n. 

grass,  't^a^  @ra§,  bie  @rdfer. 

great,  grog;  a  great  deal,  Diet. 

green,  greenest,  griin,  griinft. 

grow,  (become)  trer'ben,  tDurbe, 
genjorben  (fein),  er  ttjirb;  (in- 
crease in  size)  tt)ad^'fen,  tuud^g, 
getDad^fen  (fein),  er  trdd^ft. 


had,  see  have. 

hair,  bag  §aar,  bie  -e. 

half,  adj.,  \)Ci\h,  following  the  ar- 
ticle; noun,  bie  §dlf'te,  bie.  -n; 
half  past  ten,  Ic^aXh  elf;  and  a 
half,  r^unbein^alb;  one  and  a 
half,  an'bertt)a(b  (§219,  a). 

hall,  ber  ^aoX,  bie  @dle;  bie  §at'(e, 
bie  -n. 

hand,  noun,,  bie  ©anb,  bie  "e;  ifer&, 
reid}en,  reg.  (^aben). 

hang,  t)an'gen,  l)ing,  ge!)angen 
(l)aben),  er  ^dngt. 

happen,  gefd)e'^en,  gefd)al)',  gefd|e'=* 
^en  (fein),  eg  gefd)iel)t',  followed 
by  the  dative. 

happy,  g(iid'Ud). 

hard,  adj.,  (difficult)  fd)n)er;  (to  the 
touch)  ^art;  adv.,  (vigorously) 
[tar!;  (industriously)  flei'gig;  (to 
^tudy  hard)  fleigig  lernen,  reg. 
(^aben). 

hardly,  fanm. 

has,  hasn't,  see  have  and  not. 

hat,  ber  §ut,  bi^e. 


haye 


king 


have,  ^a'ben,  {)at'te,  ge()abt'  (t)aben), 

cr  l^at;   {auxil.  with  neuter  verbs) 

fein,  mar,  geirefen  (fein),  er  ift; 

to  have  to,  miiffen,  mu^'te,  ge* 

mu^V  (^aben),  er  tmig;  to  have 

done  or  made,  laf  feu,  Ueg,  gelaf'= 

fen  (()aben),  er  Idgi 
haven't,    see  have   a^if?  not,    also 

nid^t  (tDalir),  §  3,  a. 
hay,  ba^  §eu,  be^  §eu(e)g, 
he,  er. 
hear,  l)o'ren,  re^.  (l)aben);  I  heard 

them  play,   \6)   {)abe   fie    jpielen 

]^i3ren,  §  141.  • 
help,  noun^  bie  §U'fe;  -yerfe,  ^el'fen, 

\)0l\\,  ge^otfen  (^aben),  er   l)Uft, 

with  dat. 
her,  (5!(Zj.,  il)r;  pronoun^  \X)x,  fte. 
here,  ^ier. 

herself,  reflex.^  fid);  intens.,  fetbft 
high,  higher,  highest,  {)od),  l)ol)er, 

l)0(^ft;   declined  in  the  positive^ 

Ijoljev,  l)o^e,  ^o^e§. 
him,  pronoun^  i^m,  i^n. 
himself,  reflex.,  fi(^;  intens.  felbft. 
his,  fein;   loiY/t  j^ar^s  0/  ^/le   6odi/ 

used  in  the  predicate,  fi(^  and  the 

def.  art, 
hold,  ^al'ten,  ^telt,  ge^alten  (^aben), 

er  ^a(t. 
home,    at  home,   gu    §auje;    (to) 

home,  nad)  §aufe. 
hope,  l)of' fen,  reg.  (^aben). 
horse,  ba§  ^^3ferb,  hie  -e. 
hot,  ^eij3. 
hour,  bie  ®tnn'be,  bie  -n ;  an  hour 

and  a  half,  an'bertl)a(b  @tnnben. 
house,  ba^  §ang,  bie  §aufer  ;  at  the 

house  of,  bei  with  dat. 


how,  tt)ie. 

hundred,  ^un'bert,  §  217,  c. 
hungry,  ^ung'rig. 

hurt,   t)erlet'3en,   ijertelj'te,  terlefet' 
(^aben). 

I 

I,  id). 

If,  irenn  ;  after  verbs  o/askmg,  ob; 

as  if,  aU  ob  or  a(§  tyii/i  inverted 

order, 
ink,  bie  Slinte,  bie  -n. 
in,  in  with  dat.  or  ace.  ;  in  it,  barin'; 

in  the  evening,   a'benb^   or  om 

5lbenb  ;  in  German  or  English, 

anf  bentfd)  or  eng'Iifc^, 
industrious (ly),  flei'gig. 
instead  of,  anftatt'  with  gen. ;  also 

followed  by  a  phrase  (§  204,  d) 

or  a  clause  (§  286). 
into,  in  with  ace. 
is,  ift,  see  be ;  is  (translated),  l^ei^t; 

there  is,  c^  gibt  or  e§  ift. 
isn't,   see  is   and    not,   also   nid^t 

(tt)a^r),  §  3,  a. 
it,  eg ;  also  er  or  fte  (§  93)  ;  with 

prepositions,  ba(r)*. 


John,  (ber)  3o']^ann. 

just,  adv.,  gera'be,  when  qualifying 

another  word;  e'ben,  when  refers 

ring  to  time. 


kind,  bie  @or'te,  bie  -n ;  all  kinds 
of,  al'Ierlei ;  what  kind  of,  XO(x% 
fiir. 

king,  ber  ^o'nig,  bie  -e. 


knee 


40 


matter 


knee,  ba^  ^nie',  bic  MnVt. 

knew,  see  know. 

knife,  ba^  SJief^fer,  bie  — . 

know,  (have  knowledge  of)  tt)if' fen, 

tDugte,  gcltjugt  (I^aben),  cr  tt)ei6  ; 

(be  acquainted    with)     Un'nen, 

fantttc,  gcfannt  (^aben). 


lady,  bie  2)a'me,  bie  -n» 

laid,  see  lay. 

lain,  see  lie. 

lake,  ber  @ee,  be^  -g,  bie  -n. 

lamp,  bie  Sam'pe,  bie  -n. 

land,    ba^    l^anb,    bie    "er    or    -e 

(poetic) . 
large,  larger,  largest,  grog,  groger, 

grogt 
last,   lel^t ;   at  last,    enb'Iid^  ;   last 

summer,  tjo'rigett  ©om'mer, 
late,  later,  f^jcit,  f|3ater ;  to  be  late, 

j^cit  fommen. 
lay,  see  lie. 

leaf,  ha^  matt,  bie  "er, 
learn,  ler'neit,  reg.  (Ijaben). 
left,  lint 

leg,  ba^  iBein,  bie  — e. 
lend,    lei'^en,    lie^,    gelie^en    (^a= 

ben)» 
lesson,  bie  ©tun'be,  bie  -tt, 
let,  laf'fen,  lieg,  gelaffen  (^ben),  er 

letter,  (epistle)   b^r  S3rief,  bie  -e; 

(of  the  alphabet)  ber  S3uc^'ftabe, 

be«  -n(«),  bie-n. 
lie,  lie'geu,  lag,  gelegen  (^aben)* 
like,      mbgen,      mo(i)te,      gemod^t 

(Ijaben),    er    ntag;     should    or 

would  like,  ntod)te;  gem  in  sense 


of  gladly;  adj.,  (resembling) 
di)n'Ud),  preceded  by  dat. 

line  {on  the  page),  bie  ^n'U,  bie  -n, 

lip,  bie  ^ip'pe,  bie  -n. 

little  {in  sense  0/ small),  !(ein;  {in 
sense  o/not  much),  tDe'nig. 

long,  longer,  longest,  lang,  Idnger, 
Idttgj!;  adv.,  a  long  time,  lange; 
as  long  as,  folange  with  dependent 
order. 

look,  fe'^en,  fa^,  gefe^en  (l^abeu), 
erfiel)t;  (appear)  au^'je^en,  fa^ 
au^',  aug'gefei^en  (l)aben),  er  fie^t 
au§';  look  for,  fu'd)en,  reg.  (^a- 
ben);  look  up  {as  in  a  diction- 
ary), nad)'fi^(agen,  fd)tng  nad)', 
nac^'gefc^lagen  (^aben),  er  fd^ldgt 
nad)^ 

loose,  log, 

lose,  uerlie'ren,  t)erIor',  t)erlo'ren 
(^aben). 

lost,  see  lose. 

lot,  a  lot  {in  sense  o/many),  t)iet. 

loud,  louder,  lant,  (anter, 

love,  Ue'ben,  reg.  (^aben);  loving, 
liebenb* 

lying,  see  lie. 

M 

made,  see  make. 

make,  ma'd)en,  reg.  (l)aben). 

man,  ber  2JJann,  bie  "er;  sometimes 
omitted  iri  the  general  sense  of 
people :  some  men,  einige. 

many,  Die'Ie;  many  a,  mand);  how 
many,  tt)iet)ie'fe, 

March,  ber  SJidrj. 

Marie,  Mary,  (bie)  ^Oiarie'. 

matter,   what's  the  matter  ?   njaS 


May 


41 


not 


ift  Ids?  it's  a  matter  of  course,  e§ 
berfteljt^  fid),  eg  ijerftanb'  fid},  eg 
^at  fid)  i^erftan'bett/ 

May,  ber  ^at. 

may,  {possibility)  fon'ncn,  fonttte^ 
Qefonnt  (^abett),  et  fann;  (per- 
mission) biirfen,  burfte,  geburft 
(^afien),  et  barf, 

me,  Tiitr,  tnld^, 

mean,  {of  things)  bebeu'tett/  reff. 
(^aben);  {of  people)  mei'uett, 
reg.  (^aben) ;  what  do  you  mean 
'by  that?  3Sag  joE  bemt  ha^  ? 

meat,  ha^  %^^i\^f  bie  -e. 

meet,  begeg'nen,  begeg'itete,  begeg/= 
net  {\^in) ,  followed  by  dat. 

middle,  bie  mn'it. 

might,  see  may. 

milk,  bie  m\\6). 

million,  etne  ^illion^ 

mine,  mein,  ber  meine,  ber  nteintge, 

minute,  bie  9}^inu'te,  bie  -n. 

mistake,  ber  5ei)'Ier,  bie  — . 

moment,  ber  ^u'genblicf,  hit  -e» 

Monday,  ber  SRon'tag, 

money,  bag  @elb,  bie  -er. 

month,  ber  SJlo'nat,  bie  -e;  what 
day  of  the  month,  ben  mieOieCten, 

more,  ntet)r;  noc^  (§  160). 

morning,  ber  3JJor'gen,  bie  — ;  writ- 
ten small  when  used  with  ad- 
verbs:  this  morning,  i)eute  mor^ 
gen. 

mother,  bie  SO^ut'ter,  bie  3Riitter. 

Mr.,  §err. 

Mrs.,  gran. 

much,  t)ie(,  usually  not  declined; 
how  much,  tx)iet)iet^ 

must,     ntiif'fen,     mugte,     gemugt 


({)aben),  er  tnu§;  must  not  {in 

withholding    permission)^    ntd)t 

biir'fen,  burfte,  gebnrft  (t^aben), 

er  barf  nic^t. 
my,  mein;   with  parts  of  the  body 

in  the  predicate^  usually  mir  and 

the  def  art. 
myself,  reflex*^  mir,  mid);  intens.^ 

felbft. 


name,  ber  9^a'me,  beg  -ng,  bte  -n; 
to  be  named,  l)ei'gen,  ^ieg,  ge* 
^eigen  (^aben). 

named,  genannt';  to  be  named, 
^eigen. 

near,  prep.,  an  with  dat.  or  ace; 
adj.,  no^e,  preceded  by  dat. 

need,  brau'd)en,  reg.  (^aben). 

needle,  \ik  9^a'bcl,  bie  -n. 

neither,  tre'ber;  neither  .  .  .  nor, 
rtjeber  .  .  .  nod^. 

nest,  bag  9^eft,  hie  -er, 

never,  nie,  nie'malg. 

new,  nen. 

next,  ndc^ft 

night,  bie  ^a6:jt,  bie  "e ;  lohen  re- 
ferring to  evening,  as  in  "Did 
you  go  to  the  theatre  last 
night?",  ber  5l'benb,  bie  -e; 
last  night,  geftem  abenb, 

nine,  neun. 

nineteen,  nenn^ge^n. 

ninety,  nenn'gig. 

no,  adv.,  nein;  adj.,  fetn. 

none,  fein. 

nor,  nod^;  neither  .  .  .  nor,  tre'ber 
.  .  .  nod). 

not,  nid)t;  not  any,  fein. 


nothing 


42 


plenty 


nothing,  nt(^t8;  a  folloioing  adjec- 
tive is  neuter  and  is  written  with 
a  capital  (§  159,  e). 

now,  jctjt;  {less  often)  nun. 


occur,  cin'fatlen,  ftel  ein',  cln'gcfaEen 
(feln),  eg  fallt  mlr  cin',  with  dat. 

o^clock,  U^r;  omitted^  as  in  Eng- 
lish, except  on  the  exact  hour. 

October,  ber  Ofto'ber. 

of,  t)on  with  dat.;  often  rendered 
by  the  gen.;  afraid  of,  fic^  furd)'= 
ten  t)or;  of  course,  natiir'Iid^; 
a  pound  of,  etc.,  omitted,  see 
§  113. 

often,  oft. 

oh,  0,  alj,  ad). 

old,  older,  oldest,  aft,  alter,  citteft. 

on,  auf  with  dat.  or  ace. ;  to  go  on, 
fort'fal^ren,  ful)r  fort',  fort'gefa^= 
ren  (^aben),  er  fd^rt  fort';  to 
read  on,  trei'terlefen,  Ia8  irel'ter, 
iDet'tergetefen  (^aben),  er  Iteft 
tt)ei'ter. 

once,  ein'mal;  at  once,  gleic^. 

one,  ein;  one's,  feln;  not  one,  fein; 
no  one,  nie'manb ;  in  general 
sense,  one  hears,  etc.  man;  the 
one,  ber,  berje'ntge;  often  trans- 
lated by  inflected  adjective, 
§  128,  d. 

only,  nur.  . 

onto,  auf  with  ace. 

open,  auf'mac^en,  madite  auf,  auf'= 
gemac^t  (^aben). 

or,  ober;  either  ...  or,  ent'tDeJDer 
.  .  .  ober. 

order,  in  order  to,  um  with  injin. 


other,  (in  sense  o/different)  an'bcr; 
{in  sense  o/more)  nod). 

ought  to,  fol'Ien,  foUte,  gefollt 
(l)aben),  er  foU;  see  §  144,  b,  2. 

our,  un'jer. 

out,  adv.,  ^inau§';  prep.,  au8  with 
dat.;  out  of  it,  barauS';  out  of 
doors,  brau'gen. 

outside,  adv.,  brau'gen;  prep.,  out- 
side of,  au'ger^alb  with  gen. 

over,  adv.,  ^inii'ber;  prep.,  ii'ber 
wjith  dat.  or  ace. 


page,  bte  @ei'te,  bie  -n. 

pair,  ha^  $aar,  bie  -e. 

paper,  \iCi%  ^a^ier',  bie  -e. 

pass  {in  sense  of  hand  to) ,  rei'c^cn, 
reg.  (^aben). 

past,  half  past  ten,  ^atb  elf. 

pen,  bte  ge'ber,  bie  -n. 

pepper,  ber  ^feffer. 

perhaps,  oielleid)t'. 

permitted,  to  be  permitted,  biir'fen, 
burfte,  geburft  (^aben),  er  barf. 

picture,  ba§  ^ilb,  bie  -er;  (paint- 
ing), \i(x%  @emdt'be,  \i\t  — . 

piece,  ha^  @tii(f,  bie  -e;  break  to 
pieces,  ^erbre'djen,  ^erbrad^',  ^er* 
bro'd^en  (^aben),  er  gerbrid)t'. 

place,  in  the  first,  second  place, 
etc.,  er'fteng,  jtDei'ten^,  etc. 

plate,  ber  XtVUx,  bie  -^. 

play,  noun,  bag  @ptet,  bte  -e;  verb, 
f^ie'Ien,  reg.  (^aben). 

please,  gefal'Ien,  gefiel',  gefaCIen 
(^aben),  e8  gefdilt'  mir,  followed 
by  dat. ;  if  you  please,  btt'te. 

plenty  (of),  gcnug',  Diet. 


pocket 


43 


pocket,  bie    Xa'\d)e,    bie  -n ;    the 

definite  article  is  used  instead  of 

a  personal  pronoun  to  translate 

my,  your,  his,  etc. 
poem,  \iOi^  ©ebic^t',  bie  -e, 
polite(ly),  ^of  Ud^, 
poor,  arm. 
portion  (to  eat),  bie  portion',  \iit 

-en  (t  like  %), 
post-office,  bie  ^oft,  bie  -en  ;  to  the 

post-office,  auf  bie  ^oft. 
pound,  ba§  $funb,  p^tx  ^^5funb» 
practice,  bie  U'bung, 
praise,  lo'ben,  re^.  ({)aben). 
pray  {used  with  the   imperative)^ 

bod),  bit'te» 
probably,  tt)o!)(,  n)al)r{^ein'(id^. 
pronounce,  au^'f^re^en,  fprac^  an^', 

au^'gefproc^en  (l)aben),  er  (|3ri(^t 

pronunciation,  'bit  5lu^'f)3ra(i)e,   bie 

-n. 
pull,  gie't)en,  gog,  ge^ogen  (^aben),  ' 
pupil,  ber  ®d)u(er,  bie  — . 
put,    fte'rfen,  reg.    (^aben);    (lay) 

le'gen,     reg.     (^aben)  ;      (set) 

fet'jen,  reg.  (]^aben). 


quarter,  bag  ^ier'tet,  bie  —  ;  quar- 
ter to  three,  brei  iBiertel  brei. 

question,  it  is  a  question,  eg  fragt 
ftc^,  reg.  (I)aben). 

quickly,  f(i)net[. 

quite,  ganj. 

R 


rain,  ber  9fle'gen,  bie  — 
ran,  see  run. 


read,  le'fen,  (a«,  gelefen  (l^aben),  cr 
Ueft;  read  aloud,  tjor'Iefen,  lag 
t)or',  Dor'gelefen  {\jaUn),  er  Ueft 
Dor' ;  read  on,  h)ei'ter(efen,  lag 
trei'ter,  rt)ei'tergelefen  (^aben),  er 
lieft  tnei'ter. 

reader,    bag   ?e'febu(^,   bie   $!efebii^ 

ready,  fer'tig* 

receive,  er^al'ten,  er^ielt,  n^aVitn 

(^aben),  er  erpit'. 
recite,  l)er'fagen,  jdgte  l^er',  ^er  ge= 

fagt  (^aben). 
red,  rot. 
remain,    blei'ben,    blieb,   geblieben 

(feiu). 
remember,  fid)  erin'nertt,  erin'nerte 

fic^,  \\&j  erin'nert  (^aben),  with 

gen. 
repeat,   \t)ieber^o'ten,    tX)ieberl)oi'te, 

n)ieber{)oIt'  (^aben). 
rich,  reid^. 
right  (correct),  rid)'tig;  (not  left) 

rec^t;    to  be  right,   red)t  I)aben, 

l^atte  red^t,  red^t  ge^abt  (^aben), 

er    \^Oii    Xi6)i ;    all    right,   fd^on, 

gut. 
rise,   auf'fte^ett,  ftanb  auf,  auf''ge=' 

ftanben  (feitt). 
river,  ber  glug,  bie  gliiffe. 
room,  bag  ^intmer,  bie  — . 
rose,  bie  9^o'fe,  bie  -n. 
round,  adj.,  runb  ;  prep.,  um  with 

ace. 
rule,  bie  9^e'gel,  bie  -ti. 
run,  tauf'en,  lief,  gelaufen  (fein),  er 

Jtduft ;  run  through,  burd)bldt'tern, 

bur^bldt'terte,  burc^bldt'tert  (^a^^ 

ben). 


sack 


44 


soon 


S 

sack,  bcr  ^ad,  ble  H. 

said,     see    say;    is    said    to,    foil 

(§144,b). 
salt,  ha^  @alj,  bie  -c. 
same,  fe(b  ;  the  same,  htx\tlht ;  all 

the  same,  cinerici'. 
Saturday,     bcr    (Son'nabenb,     ber 

©am^'tag. 
saw,  see  see. 

say,  fa'gen,  reg.  (^abcn). 
scarcely,  faum. 
school,    bie    ©c^u'te,    bie   -n ;    to 

school,  in  bie  @^ute;  at  school, 

in  ber  @d)nle. 
second,  jmeit, 
see,  fe'^en,  fa^,  gefe^en  (^aben),  er 

fte!^t;  I  have  seen  them  play,  id) 

i)abe  fie  jpieten  je^en. 
sell,    t3er!an'fen,     Oerfanf'te,    uer- 

fauft'  (^aben)* 
send,  fd)i'cfen,  reg.  (^aben), 
sentence,  ber  @a^,  bie  "e. 
set,  fet'jen,  reg.  (l)aben), 
seven,  jie'ben. 
seventeen,  fieb'(en)3et)n. 
seventh,  fie'bent. 
seventy-fourth,  tjier'unbfteb'gigft, 
seventy-three,  brei'unbfieb'gig* 
several,  me^'rere. 
sew,  nci'^en,  reg.  (!)aben). 
shall,   (future)    tt)erben ;     (is    to) 

jotten;  (want  to)  tx)oUen» 
she,  fie, 

ship,  bag  @(^iff,  bie  -c. 
shoe,  ber  'Bd)\i^,  bie  -e. 
shore,  ba^  IVfer,  bie  — . 
short,  shorter,  tnxi,  fiirjer. 


should,  folVte  (foUen);  see  also  sub- 
junctive. 
show,  ^ei'gen,  reg.  (^aben), 
shut,  jn'mad)en,  madjte  ^n',  ^u'ge^ 

nta(f)t  (^aben)* 
side,   this  side   of,   bieS'jeit^  with 

gen. 
since,  prep.,  feit  with  dat.;   conj., 

jeitbem'. 
sick,  !ranf. 
silver,  ba^  @ilber» 
sing,  fin'gen,  jang,  gejungen   {l)a- 

ben)» 
sir,  mein  §err^ 
sister,  bie  @(5^ti3e'fter,bie  -n. 
sit,  fit'aen,  fag,  gefeffen  (i)aben);  to 

sit  down,  fi(^  fet'gen,  reg.  ({)aben), 
sitting,  see  sit. 
six,  fed)§, 
small,  !(ein, 
smash,   jerbre'd^en,  ^erbrad^^    ger* 

bro'c^en  (^aben),  er  jerbric^t'. 
snow,  noun,  ber  @d)nee;  verb,  eg 

jd)neit,  reg.  (f)aben). 
so,  jo  ;  that's  so,  e'ben  ;  with  glau'= 

ben,  bag  or  eg, 
sold,  see  sell. 
soldier,   ber  (BolbaV,  beg  -en,  bie 

-en. 
some,    ei^nig  ;    some    more,    noc^ 

et'trag  ;  some  one,  (ir'genb)  jt'^ 

manb, 
something,   et'tDag ;    a   following 

adjective  is  neuter  and  is  written 

with  a  capital. 
son,  ber  @o^n,  bie  "e. 
song,   bag  ?ieb,  bie  -er ;   ber   ©e^ 

fang',  bie  ©efdnge. 
soon,  halb;  as  soon  as,  foba(b\ 


sorry 


45 


theatre 


sorry,  to  be,  leib'tun,  tat  UW, 
leib'getan  (^abett)  loithdat. ;  I  am 
sorry,  e§  tut  mir  leib^ 

soup,  bie  @u^'pe,  bie  -n, 

speak,  fpre'd^en,  f^rad^,  gefproc^en 
(^aben),  er  fpric^t ;  to  speak  Ger- 
man, 2)eutfci)  fpre(^en. 

spell,  buc^ftabie'ren,  buc^ftabicr'te, 
budiftabiert'  (^aben). 

spite,  in  spite  of,  tro^  with  gen. 

spoke,  see  speak. 

spoon,  ber  ^of'fel^  bie  — . 

stairs,  stairway,  bie  S^rep'^e,  bie 
-n;   upstairs,  (rest)  oben,    {mo- 

'  tion)  bie  2^re|)))e  ^inaiif^;  down- 
stairs, {rest)  uitten,  (motion)  bie 
S^re^^e  l^inab'  or  Ijinun'ter. 

stand,  fte^^en,  ftanb,  geftanbert  (^a= 
ben);  stand  up,  auf'fte^en,  ftanb 
anf,  auf'geftanben  (fetn)» 

state,  ber  ®taat,  be6  -e§,  bie  -en, 

stay,  blei'ben,  blieb,  geblieben 
(fein). 

stick  (put),  fteden,  reg.  (t)aben). 

still,  {of  time)^  noc^. 

stop,  auf l^oren,  ^orte  auf',  auf'ge* 
!)ort  (^aben),  followed  by  the  in- 
finitive where  English  has  a 
verbal. 

store,  ber  ^a'ben,  bie  ?aben, 

story,  bie  @ef(^id)'te,  bie  -n* 

straight,  gera'be. 

strange,  fremb» 

stranger,  adj.^  fremb;  noun^  ber 
grembe,  beg  -n,  bie  -n, 

strong,  ftarf, 

study,  ler'nen,  reg.  (baben) ;  ftnbte'^ 
ren  is  used  only  of  advanced 
study,  as  at  a  university. 


succeed,  gelin'gen,  getang',  gelun'* 

gen  (fein),  impers.  with  dat. ;  I 

succeed,  t%  gelingt  mir. 
such,   foI(^    (§  124)  ;  such  a  good 

man  may  also  be  translated  ein 

jo  guter  9}lann. 
sugar,  ber  ^w'dtx,  bie  — ♦ 
suit,  noun,  ber  te'^ug,  bie  to'jiige; 

verb,  |)af'fen,  reg.  (^aben)  with 

dat. 
summer,  ber  @om'mer,  bie  — . 
Sunday,  ber  @onn'tag. 
sung,  see  sing. 
surround,   nmge'ben,  untgab',  urn 

ge'ben  (^aben),  et  umgibt'. 


table,  ber  %\\6),  bie  -e. 

take,    ne^'men,    na^m,  genommen 

(^aben),  er  nimmt. 
talk,  f^re'd^en,    fprad),    gej^rod^cn 

({)aben),  er  f)3ric^t. 
tea,  ber  ^ee» 
teacher,     {man)     ber  i^e^^'rer,    bie 

— ;    {woman)   bie  i^e^'rerin,  bie 

-nen. 
tear,  rei'gen,  rig,  geriffen  (^aben) ; 

to  tear  up,  tear  to  pieces,  jerrei'^ 

gen,  ^^errig',  jerriffen  (baben). 
tell,  ja'gen,  reg.  (^aben);  ergaVten, 

er^a^Cte,  txiix\)\V  (^aben). 
than,  a(§. 
thank,  ban'fen,  reg.   (^aben)  with 

dat. ;  thank  you,  (id))  banfe. 
that,  conj.,  't>Oi^\  rel.,  ber,  tDel'd)er; 

demon.,  ber,  je'ner* 
the,  ber,  bie,  ha^. 
theatre,  bag  Xljea'teXr  tic  — ;  to  the 

theatre,  tug  Sweater. 


thee 


46 


translate 


thee,  bir,  bid), 

their,  t^r. 

them,  fie,  Hj'ntn,  biefet'bcn;  with  a 

prep.,  ba(r)-, 
themselves,    rejlex.,    fid);    intens., 

felbft    ^ 
then,  (171  sense  o/next),  bamt;  (in 

sense  o/at  that  time),  ba'mal^. 
there,  adv.,  ta;  there  is,  e§  gibt,  e§ 

ift;  there's  a  draft,  e§  3iel)t» 
these,  bieje, 

they,  fie;  man  (§  169,  c);e§  (§  155). 
thing,  ba^  2)ing,  bie  -e. 
think,  gtau'ben,  re^.  (t)abett);  ein'= 

fallen,  fiel  ein^  ein'gefaEen  (fein), 

eS  fdttt  ntir   ein',   impers.  with 

dat. 
third,  adj.,  britt;  noww,  ba§  2)rittel, 

bie  — . 
thirsty,  bnr'ftig, 
thirteen,  brei'ge^n, 
thirty,  brei'gig. 
this,  bie§;  this  morning  or  evening, 

l^en'te  mor'gen  or  abenb;  this  side 

of,  bie^'feitg  with  gen. 
thorn,   ber    2)orn,   be«  2)orn§,   bie 

Dornen. 
those,  bie,  je'ne;  those  are,  'tia^  finb 

(§  159). 
thou,  bn. 

thousand,  tau'fenb, 
thread,  ber  ga'ben,  bie  gciben. 
three,  brei;  three  and  a  half,  brei'^ 

unbein^alb',     t)ier'tef)a(b;     three 

times,  brei'mal, 
through,   prep.,    burd)  with  ace. ; 

adj.,    fer'tig;    run    through    (a 

hook),  burc^blcit'tern,  bnrc^blat'^ 

terte,  burc^bldt'tert  (^aben). 


Thursday,  ber  3)on'nergtag,  W  -t. 

ticket,  ba§  iBittett',  bie  -e  (pro- 
nounced bilyetQ. 

till,  bi§  with  ace.  or  dep.  order. 

time  {extent)  bie  ^tiif  bie  -en; 
(point)  'Ha^  9}ZaI,  bie  -e;  a  long 
time,  lange  {adv.)  ;  with  a  nu- 
meral, as  three  times,  =mal,  ein-- 
mal,  iVotx'moXf  etc.;  to  have  a 
good  time,  fid)  (gut)  aniiifie'ren, 
amiifier'te  fid^,  fid)  amiifiert' 
(^aben) ;  what  time  is  it  ?  trici^iel 
UbrifteS? 

tired,  mii'be, 

to,  {with  persons)  gu  with  dat:; 
{with  places)  nad)  with  dat. ;  to 
school,  theatre,  or  concert,  in 
with  ace. ;  to  and  fro,  l^tn  nnb 
l^er;  in  order  to,  um  p  loith 
infin. ;  quarter  to  eight,  brei 
^ier'tet  (anf)  Oi&ji;  also  often 
rendered  by  the  dative. 

to-day,  !^en'te;  a  week  from  to-day, 
^ente  iiber  ad}t  XaQt. 

to-morrow,  mor'gen;  to-morrow 
morning,  morgen  frii^;  day  after 
to-morrow,  ii'bermorgen, 

too,  {with  adjs.  and  advs.)  ^u;  {in 
other  cases)  and). 

torn,  see  tear. 

town,  bie  ©tabt,  bie  "e;  to  town,  in 
bie  @tabt;  down  town,  in  bie  or 
ber  @tabt. 

train,  ber  3"9/  ^i^  Re- 
translate, iiberfet'^en,  iiberfe^'te, 
iiberfe^t'  (^aben);  to  be  (trans- 
lated), ^ei'gen,  ^ieg,  ge^ei^en 
(^aben);  What  is  that  in  Ger- 
man? 2Bic  l^eigt  ba8  auf  beutfd)? 


tree 


47 


what 


tree,  bcr  iBaum,  bic  iBaume. 
true,  \X)a\)X, 

try,  t)erfu'd)eu,  Derfud^'te,  berfuc^t' 
(l)aben),  with  ace.  or  infin.  and 

Tuesday,  ber  ^ien^'tag,  bic  -c. 
twelfth,  iXoo\\t 
twelve,  i\vU\. 
twenty,  gman'^ig. 
twenty-five,  funf'unb;;tt)an5tg, 
twenty-four,  tjier'ntibi^tuanjig. 
twenty-third,  bret'unb^tDanaigft. 
twice,  gmei'maL 
tyro,  gttjei;  the  two,  bie  bei'ben, 

U 

under,  un'ter  xoith  dat.  or  dec. 

understand,  t)erfte'^en,  t)erftanb', 
tierftan'ben  (()aben)» 

understood,  see  understand. 

undertake,  unterne^'men,  itnter^ 
tta^m',  untcrnom'nten  (^aben), 
^    tx  untcrnimmt'. 

up,  upstairs,  {rest)  o'ben,  {motio7i) 
bic  Xrep'pc  ^itiauf  ;  what's  up  ? 
lua«  gibtg?  look  up,  {of  words) 
nad)'\djiaQtn,  fc^tug  nad)',  nad)^gc- 
fd^tagcn  (^abcn),  cr  j^Icigt  nad)'; 
stand  up  or  get  up,  auf'ft.cl)en, 
ftatib  auf,  aufgcftanbcu  (fcin). 

upon,  auf  t/Ji^/i  da^.  or  ace. 

us,  uu§,  un'jer  {gen.). 


very,  fct)r, 

village,  bag  2)orf,  bic  "cr. 

visit,    noun,    ber   iBcfitd)',    bic   -e; 

ver?>,  bcfii'c^en,  reg.  (I^abcn). 
vowel,  ber  ^o!a(\  bie  -c» 


W 

wagon,  bcr  Sa'geti,  bic  — . 

wait,  raar'ten,  reg.  (^abcn),  for,  auf 
%cith  ace. 

walk,  go  for  a  walk  or  walking, 
jpagic'rcn  gc^en,  ging  j^agieren, 
j)3a3iercit  gcgangcn  (fein). 

wall  {of  a  room),  bie  2Banb,  bie 
Sdnbe. 

want,  to  want  to,  tt)o('(en,  tvoWU, 
QetvoUt'  (^aben),  cr  tt)itt.  • 

warm,  tDarm. 

was,  tuar,  see  fein» 

wasn't,  see  was  and  not. 

wast,  tDarft,  see  fcin. 

water,  ha^  SBaf'fcr,  bie  — . 

way,  ber  S©eg,  bie  -c. 

we,  tt)ir;  {in  general  sense),  man. 

wear  (as  to  wear  clothes),  tra'gen, 
trug,  getragen  (^aben),  cr  trcigt. 

weather,  ba§  SSct^ter,  bie  — . 

Wednesday,  ber  9Jlitt'tt)oc^,  bie  -c. 

week,  bic  SBoMjc,  bic  -n;  a  week 
from  to-day,  l)cutc  iiber  a6)t 
XciQC  ;  what  day  of  the  week? 
tDcI'c^en  Sag  ? 

welcome,  you're  welcome,  bit'te. 

well,  adv.,  gut;  excl.,  nun;  well 
written,  gut  gefd)rie'beu;  to  be 
well,  fid^  gut  bcfin'beu,  befaub' 
\id)  gut,  fid)  gutbefuu'beu  (^abeu). 

went,  see  go. 

were,  see  be ;  in  loassive,  tt)ur'ben. 

wet,  nag. 

what,  tuag;  what  time  is  it?  tx>ie'= 
tjicl  U()r'  ift  c8  ?  what  kind  of  ? 
tDaS  fiir  (ciu)  ? ;  what's  your 
name  ?  tnie  ^ci'geu  0ic? 


when 


48 


yourself 


when,  conj.  of  past  time,  at§;    of 

general    time,   toenn;    interrog., 

trann? 
whenever,  iDettn, 
where,  too  ;  where  (to),  U)o{)in', 
whether,  ob, 
which,  reh,  bev,  tt)e('(^er;  interrog., 

toeV6)ex  ;    with  preps.,  tT)o(r)=, 
while  {referring  to  a  long  time), 

tDci^'renb;   {for  a    short   time), 

inbem', 
white,  tDcig. 
who,  rel.,  ber,  WeVdjtt;  interrog., 

rt)er* 
whole,  gatt^, 
whom,  see  who. 

why,  interrog.,  ttjarum';  excl,,  j.a. 
wide,  breit  {not  trett,  far). 
wife,  bte  grau,  bie  -en» 
will,  {future,  of, time)  irer'ben;  \^of 

desire)  to    be    willing,    WoVUn, 

XooViit,  getDoIIt  (^aben),  er  tuill, 
willing,  see  will. 
window,  'oa^  gen'fter,  bie  — . 
winter,  ber  Stn'ter,  bie  — . 
wish,  tt)un'f(i)en,  reg.  (^aben),  fol- 
lowed by  ju  and  infin. 
with,  mit  with  dat.  ;  (with  persons, 

as  at  the   house   of),  bei   with 

dat. 
without,  o^tte  loith  ace.  ;  followed 

also  by  phrase  or  clatise  (§§  204, 

d,  and  2S6). 
woman,  bte  grau,  bie  -en. 
won't,  see  will  and  not. 
wood,  ber  ^alb,  bte  "er. 
word,   ba^   S^Sort,  bte  -e  {of  con- 


nected discourse),  bte  "er  {of  dis- 
connected words). 

work,  verb,  ar'betten,  re^.  (^aben); 
noun  {in sense  0/ labor),  bte  2lr'* 
bett,  bte  -en  ;  {in  sense  of  the 
result  of  labor)  ba^  25er!,  bte  -e. 

worn,  see  wear. 

would,  tDiir'be,  tooWte ;  see  condi- 
tional and  subjunctive  (§§  264 
and  265). 

write,  f(^ret'ben,  fd)rteb,  gejd^rteben 
(l)aben). 

writing,  written,  see  write;  well 
written,  gut  gefd)rte'ben. 

wrong,  falfd) ;  to  be  wrong  {of  per- 
sons), utt'rec^t  ()aben,  ^atte,  ge= 
1:)dbi  (^aben). 

wrote,  see  write. 


year,  ha^  3al)r,  bte  -e. 

yes,  ja. 

yesterday,  ge'ftern ;  a  following 
noun  is  written  as  an  adverb 
without  a  capital :  geftern  abenb. 

yet,  {of  time)  nod^,  {adversative) 
boc?^  ;  not  yet,  nod)  ntc^t. 

you,  (formal)  @te,  3^rer  ;  (inti- 
mate) bu,  betner  ;  t^r,  ener;  (in  a 
general  sense)  man. 

young,  younger,  jnng,  jiinger. 

your,  (formal)  3t)t: ;  (intimate) 
betn,  ener ;  (with  parts  of  the 
body  used  in  the  predicate)  bir, 
fid^  or  end^  ^vith  the  def  art. 

yourself,  (reflexive)  ^idj,  hidj,  end) ; 
(intensive)  jelbft. 


INDEX. 


%  sounds  of,  in  German,  Intro.,  I,  b. 
aa,  digraph,  Intro.,  I,/, 
a  in  diphthongs 
ax,  Intro.,  I,  6;  §  329,  1;  au,  Intro., 
i;e;  §  329,  2;  au,  Intro.,  I,  e; 
§  329,  3. 
ahev,  §  177. 

,   contrasted  with  fonbern,  §  177,  a. 
abstract  nouns 
formed  by  suffixes. 
^c,  §  349,  a ;  ^et,  §  349,  6  ;  ^eit,  §  349, 
c;  4eit,  §  349,  d;  ^c^aft,  §  349,  e ; 
.ung,§349,/. 
See  also  Word  formation. 
accent 
in  verbs,  inseparable,  §  188 ;  sepa- 
rable, §  189. 
common  verbs,  used  as  insepara- 
ble, §  196,  a ;  separable,  §  196,  b. 
in  foreign  words,  §  67,  2. 
in  pronunciation  of  German,  §§  324- 
342. 
accusative  case,  §  7;  §  7,  6;  §  8; 
§  17 ;  summary  of,  §  82 ;   §  83 ; 
summary  of  forms,  §§  305-313. 
of    definite    time,    §   117 ;    §    222 ; 

§  222,  a. 
prepositions  with  accusative  or  da- 
tive, §  89. 
with  accusative  only,  §  102. 
impersonals  with,  §  248. 
with  urn  after  c«  fragt  fic^,  §  251. 
with  c§  gt6t,  §  163. 
active  voice 
distinguished  from  passive,  §  235, 

a,  b. 
more  used  in  German,  §  237,  a,  b. 


address,  terms  of 
formal  and  familiar,  §  lO. 
use  of  (©te,  §  10,  a. 
adjectives,   review  of,  §    128  and 
§307. 
declension  of, 

strong,  §  112 ;  §  128,  6,  2. 
weak,  §  116;  §  128,  6,1. 
mixed,  §  120;  §  128,  b,  2,  note, 
indeclinable,  §  124,  a. 
possessive,    from   genitive,   §  103; 
§  149;  not  used  so  often  as  in 
English,  §  174;  §272. 
predicate,  not  declined,  §  9 ;  §  128,  a. 
attributive,  §  112;  §  128,  b. 
use  as  nouns,  §  128,  c. 

after  "one,"  §  128,  d. 
use  after  manc^^  jo(rf),  \vc\d),  §  124; 

§  124,  a. 
cardinal,  §  217. 
ordinal,  §  218 ;  §  219. 
formation  of 
from  suffixes,  ^hav,  §  350,  a ;  -en, 
§  350,  b  ;  4;aft,  §  350,  c ;  =tg,  §  350, 
d;  4f(^,  §350,  e;  Aid),  §350,/; 
.jam,  §  350,  g. 

adverbs 
unintiected  adjectives,  §  125. 
formed  from  cardinals,  with  =tttal, 
§  217,  b. 
from  ordinals,  with  =cn§,  §  218,  a. 
comparison  of,  §  212,  §  213. 
order  in  sentence,  §  125;  §  290,  b,  1, 
2,3. 
adverbial  phrases 
order  in  sentence,  §  290,  b,  1,  2,  3. 

agent,  dative  of 
with  the  passive  and  t)on,  §  232. 
with  the  active,  §  237,  b. 


49 


60 


Wbex, 


oXf  pronunciation    of,    Intro.,    I,    e; 

§  329,  1. 
aU 
declined  when  followed  by  adjec- 
tive, §  124,  h. 
indeclinable,  §  124,  6 ;  §  162,  a. 
never  weak,  §  162,  a,  1. 
neuter,  162,  a,  3. 
alphabet,  the  German,  p.  x  of  In- 
troduction. 

introducing  clauses,  §  178;   §  179. 
to  translate  verbals,  §  285. 
in  comparisons,  §  214,  a,  h. 
d^  ob,  alg  njenn,  §  274,  a. 
am,  contraction  of  an  bem 
with   the  superlative  in  the  predi- 
cate, §  212,  h. 
an,  prep,  with  dative  or  accusative, 

§89. 
anbcr 
after  cttt)a§,  §  159,  a. 
meaning  difereiit,  §  160 ;  compared 
with  noc^  etn,  §  162,  b. 
%n  ben  a)Zonb,  by  Enslin,  p.  97. 
anbcrt^atb,  §  219,  a. 
anfangen,  §  193.        » 
angene^m,  with  the  dative,  §  2S2,  a ; 

§283. 
anfommcn,  followed  usually  by  dative, 

§  287. 
another,  one  more,  nod^  ctn;  a  differ- 
ent one,  auber,  §  162,  b. 
anftatt 
followed    by    infinitive,  §    204,   d. 
preposition  with  genitive,   §   281; 
§283. 
antecedents 
agreement    of    personal    pronoun 
with,  §  93. 
of  relative  in  gender  and  number, 
§  167,  b. 
repetition  of,  §  169,  b. 
apostrophe,    used    in   genitive    of 
proper  names  in  s^,  §  225,  a. 


apposition,  nouns  in,  §  109. 
special  use  after  nouns  of  measure, 
§  113;  after  bte  portion,  §  267. 

article 
definite 
forms  of ,  §  8 ;  §  17  and  note ;  sum- 
mary of  forms,  §  305. 
combined      with      prepositions, 

§  89,  a. 
distinguished    from    demonstra- 
tive, §  158,  note, 
use  with  betbe,  §  162,  c ;  with  i)alh, 
§  163;  with  proper  names,  §  225, 
6,  c ;  instead  of  possessive  pro- 
noun with  parts  of  the  body, 
§  174;  with  3:afc^e,  §  272. 
indefinite 
forms  of ,  §  8 ;  §  22 ;  summary  of' 

forms,  §  306. 
used  with  genitive  to  express  in- 
definite time,  §  281,  a. 
See  also  bcr  and  em. 
as,  in  comparisons,  tx)ie,  §  214,  a. 
subordinating  conjunction,  §  178; 
§  179 ;  see  also  ba. 
as  — as,  §  214,  b. 
assimilation  of  spoken  sounds, 

§342. 
au,  pronunciation   of,    Intro.,   I,   e; 

§  329,  2. 
au,  Intro.,  I,  e ;  §  329,  3. 
auf 
prep,  with  dative  or  accusative,  §  89. 
separable  prefix,  §  193. 
with  adverbial  superlative,  §  212,  c. 
auft)oren  with  the    infinitive    where 
English  has  verbal  in  -ing,  §  193. 
au^,  prep,  with  dative,  §  97  ;  §  100. 
au^er^tb,  §  281,  b;  §283. 
auxiliaries 
of  mode,  see  Modals. 
of  tense 
simple  present  for  emphatic  aux- 
iliary do  in  English,  §  16; 
§  207,  a. 


INDEX. 


51 


auxiliaries  of  tense  (continued). 
future  tenses,  §  48 ;  §  49;  of  mod- 
als,  §  136. 
rendered    in    German    by    the 

present,  §  55. 
simple  futurity,  tt>erben,  §  132, 

a;  §  230,  a. 
distinctions  in  use  of  shall  and 

will,  §  132,  a,  6,  and  note. 
future  perfect,  §  78;  §  84;  of 
modals,  §  140. 
perfect  tenses 
with  ^aben,  §  58;  §  84;  of  mod- 
als, §  140. 
in  past  perfect,  §  72 ;  §  84. 
with  fctn,  ^66;  ^  84. 

in  past  perfect,  §  72 ;  §  84. 
use  of  present  perfect  in  Ger- 
man for  English  past,  §  61 ; 
§  141,  b. 
use  of   German  present    with 
fc^on  for   English    present 
perfect,  §  73. 
use  of  German  past  with  f(^on 
for  English   past    perfect, 
§  73,  a. 
of   passive   voice,    tt>erbcn,   §  230; 

§  231 ;  see  also  hjerbeu. 
of  separable  verbs,  §  196,  b. 
position  in  sentence 
in  independent  clauses,  §  170,  a. 
in  dependent  clauses,  §  170. 
with  "two  infinitives,"  §  181. 
repetition  of  auxiliary  rendered  by 
ntd^t  tt)al;r,  §  3,  a. 

B. 
95,  sound  of,  Intro.,  II,  a,  b. 

See  also  Consonants. 
hC'f  inseparable  prefix,  §  188. 
Bechstein,     Ludwig     (1801-1860), 

quoted,  p.  142. 
begcgncn,  with  the  dative,  §  282,  b; 

§283. 
bet,  preposition  with  the  dative,  §  97 ; 

§  100. 
betbc,  preceded  by  the  article,  §  162,  c. 


Bible,  quoted,  pp.  168,  188. 

hi^,  prep,  with  the  accusative,  §  102. 

hitte,  use  of,  p.  48 ;  §  107. 

Utten,  §  107;  bitten  urn,  §  107. 

Brentano,     Clemens     (1778-1842) , 

SSiegenlieb,  p.  37. 
Busse,  Carl,  liber  ben  95evgen,  p.  175. 
but,   rendered    by  aber    or    fonbern, 

§  177,  a. 

C. 

C  sounds  of,  Intro.,  II,  b,  2. 

See  also  Consonants. 
capitalization 
of  adjectives  after  ettt)a^  and  ntd^tS, 
§  159,  a,  e;  Intro.,  IV,  e. 
after  met  and  Itjentg,  §  162,  e. 
of  nouns,  Intro.,  IV,  c,  1,2. 
of  pronouns,  Intro.,  IV,  c^;  §  10. 
nouns,   a)^orgen,    S^iad^tmittag,    and 
5lbenb    not    capitalized    when 
combined    with    geftern,    ^eute, 
and  tttorgcn,  §  138,  a. 
cardinal  numbers,  §  217.    See  also 

Numerals. 
case,  endings,  §  35;  §  39;  §  44;  §  52; 
§63;  §68;  §75. 
summary  of,  §  82 ;  §  83 ;  §§  305-314. 
of  appositives,  the  same  for  both, 

§109, 
of  relatives  depending  on  construc- 
tion in  clause,  §  167,  b. 
See    also    Nominative,     Genitive, 
Dative,  Accusative. 
catch,  glottal,  §§  331-334. 
causative,  laffen,  §  144,  d;  §  145. 
^f  Intro.,  II,  b,  3,  4,  5;    discussion  of 
different  sounds   of,  §   336,  1, 
2,3. 
*cl^en,  diminutive,  always  neuter,  §  34 ; 

§  79,  6,  3;  §  348,  a. 
Christian  names,  proper  nouns 
inflections   of  nouns   ending  in  s^, 

§  225,  a. 
with  the  definite  article,  §  225,  b,  c. 
c^g,  sound  of,  Intro.,  II,  6,  4;  §  336,  3, 


52 


INDEX. 


d,  sound  of,  Intro.,  II,  6,  1,  c. 
Claudius,  Matthias,  quoted,  p.  88. 
clauses 
use    of,    in    German    instead    of 

phrases,  §  207,  6. 
independent,   inverted    when    pre- 
ceded   by    dependent    clause, 
§  170,  a. 
dependent, 
order  in,  §  170;  §274,  a. 
punctuation  of,  §  169,  c. 
conditional,  §  270;   §  271;    §  274; 
§  275 ;  §  276. 
inverted    when    ttjenn   or   ob    is 
omitted,  274,  a. 
cognates,  related  words  (as  S3uc^, 
book),  see  vocabularies  in  each 
lesson.     Also    Grimm's   Law, 
§§  357-360. 
comma 
frequent    use    in   German,   Intro., 

IV,  a. 
required  to  set  off  relative  clauses, 

Intro.,  IV,  a,  1 ;  §  169,  c. 
before  modified  infinitive,  §   192; 
§  205,  a. 
common  prefixes  (both  separable 
and  inseparable) 
use  as  separable,  §  196,  h. 
use  as  inseparable,  §  196,  a. 
comparison  of   adjectives   and 
adverbs,  §  212. 
regular,  §  212,  a. 
in  the  predicate,  212,  6,  c. 
of  long  words,  §  212,  d. 
table  of  regular  and  irregular  com- 
parisons, §  213. 
particles  of,  §  214. 
than  and  as,  §  214,  a. 
as  —  as,  §  214,  b. 
the  — the,  ^  214,  c. 
of    one    adjective    with    another, 
§  212,  d. 
composition    of    nouns,    adjec- 
tives, verbs,  etc.,  §§  343-356. 
See  Word  formation. 


complementary  infinitive,  §  192. 
complex   sentences,    §§  167-170; 
§  178. 
See  also  Sentences  and  Word  order, 
dependent. 
compound  relatives,  §  168. 
See  also  Pronouns,  relative. 
compound  sentences,  §  177. 

punctuation  of,  Intro.,  IV,  a,  2. 
compound  words,  §  352. 
nouns,  §  353. 
adjectives,  §  354. 
verbs,  §  355. 

See  also  Word  formation^ 
concrete  nouns,  §  348. 

See  also  Word  formation. 
conditional  (mode) ,  §  264 ;  §  265,  a ; 
§  275,  h. 
See  3i\so  Summary  of  Forms,  §§  314- 
323. 
conditions 
of  fact,  §270;  §  271,  a. 
contrary  to  fact,  §§  274-276. 
modals  in,  §  276. 

See  Summary  of  Forms,  §  314-323. 

conjugation 

indicative,  §  1 ;  §  6 ;  §  15 ;  §  21 ;  §  27 ; 

§32;§38;§43;§49;§58;§72. 

of  modals,  §  131;   §  135;   §  136; 

§  140 ;  §  141. 
of  inseparable  verbs,  §  188;   of 
separable,  §  190. 
imperative,  §201;  §231. 
subjunctive,  §  256;  §§  261-263. 

of  modals,  §269;  §276. 
infinitives,  §  204. 
participles,  §  206. 
passive,  §  230 ;  §  231. 
reflexive,  §  241. 
impersonals,   §  246;   §  247;   §  248; 

§249. 
See  complete  Summary  of  Forms^ 
§§  314-323. 
conjunctions 
coordinating 
not  affecting  order,  §  177, 


INDEX, 


63 


conjunctions,    coordinating    {con- 
tinued). 
special  uses,  §  177,  a. 
list  of,  §  177. 
subordinating 
requiring  dependent  order,  §  170. 
list  of,  §  178. 
connecting  vcwel  for  euphony, 

§  14,  a. 
consonants 
classification  of,  Intro.,  II,  a. 

(1)  according  to  sound 

liquids,  nasals,   stops,    spi- 
rants. 

(2)  according    to    vibration    of 

vocal  cords 
voiced  or  voiceless. 

(3)  according  to  place  in  mouth 

guttural,     palatal,     dental, 
labial, 
pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  6, 1-20 ; 
discussion  of  difficulties,  §§  335- 
340. 
contrary  to  fact  conditions 
use    of    subjunctive    for,    §    274; 

§  274,  a. 
use  of  modals  in,  §  276 ;  §  276,  a  and 
note, 
contrast,  shown  by  fonbern,  §  177,  a. 
conversation,  use  of  bcr  instead  of 

beqenige,  §  185. 
coordinating  conjunctions,  §  177 ; 

see  also  Conjunctions. 
copula,  fetn  with  participle,  §  235. 
correlatives 
as  — as,  §  214,  b. 
either  —  or,  §  291. 
neither  —  nor,  §  291. 
not  only  —  but  also,  §  177,  a,  1. 
the  —  the,  §  214,  c. 
could  have,  in  German,  §  276. 


2),  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  b. 
See  also  Consonants. 


ba,  subordinating  conjunction,  §  178; 
§179. 
use  of  clauses  with  ba  instead  of 
English  phrases,  §  207,  b. 
instead  of  verbals  in  -ing,  §  285. 
ba(v)=,  combined    with  prepositions, 

§98. 
Dahn,  Felix  (1834-1912),  2)a^  @(iicf, 

p.  191. 
ban!cn 
use    of,  p.   48 ;    with    the  dative, 
§  107;  §282,  6. 
bag 
neuter  form  of  definite  article,  see 
ber* 
as  relative,  §  167. 
as  demonstrative,  §  158,  a. 
complete  table  of  forms  of,  §  305, 
a;  §  311,  a. 
distinguished  from  'oa%  §  182. 
used  with  plural  forms  of  fcin,  §  155. 
2)ag  ®{M,  by  Felix  Dahn,  p.  191. 
t>a%  subordinating  conjunction,  §  178. 

distinguished  from  bag,  §  182. 
dative  case 
indirect  object,  §  45. 
instead  of  possessive,  §  174. 
of  definite  time 
am  with  days  of  week,  §  222 ;  tm 
^ai)xc,  §  222,  b. 
of  agent,  with  t)on,  in  passive,  §  232. 
after  passive  of  verbs,  §  236. 
with  certain  adjectives,  §  282,  a. 
with  certain  verbs,  list  of,  §  282,  b. 
anfommen,  §  287. 
bcgcgnen,  §  282,   b ;    §  283. 
ban!cn,  p.  48. 
eriauben,  §  300. 
fclgeu,  §  282,  b  ;  §  283. 
gcfaUen,  §  238 ;  §  282,  6. 
gei)orcn,  §  156;  §282,  b. 
^elfcn,  §  238 ;  §  282,  b. 
ftc^  fiirciitcn  t)or,  §  291. 
with  the  impersonals  eg  fdHt  mtr  ctn, 
eg  gclincjt  mtr,  eg  gcfci;te!^t  mir, 
eg  tut  m'lr  leib,  §  249. 


64 


INDEX. 


dative  case  {continued). 
prepositions  with  dative  or  accusa- 
tive, §  89. 
with  dative  only,  §  97. 
with  Don  instead  of  genitive,  §  225,  a. 
after  i)or,  §  300. 
David,  23d  Psalm  of,  p.  188. 
days  of  the  week,  §  223,  a. 

of  the  month,  §  223,  6. 
declension 
See  Adjectives,    Articles,    Nouns, 
Pronouns.    Also  Summary  of 
Foryns,  §§  305-314. 
demonstrative  pronouns,  §  158; 
§  185 ;  §  312. 
See  also  Pronouns. 
benn,  use  of 
as  conjunction,  §  177;  §  179. 
as  particle,  §293;  §294. 
dental    consonants,     see    Conso- 
nants. 
dependent    clauses,    §§    167-170; 
§  178 ;  §  181 ;  §  182. 
punctuation   of,   Intro.,   TV,  a,  1  ; 
§  169,  c. 
dependent  order,  see  Word  order. 
dependent    subjunctive,    §    257, 

§  258.    See  Subjunctive. 
ber,  the  definite  article,  §  2,  a ;  §  8 ; 
§  17;  §  305.    For  special  uses, 
see  Article,  definite. 
demonstrative,  §  158;  §  185;  §  312. 
relative,  §167;  §169;  §311. 
differing  from  English,  §  169. 
,,bcr"  words,  §  116. 
words  declined  like  ,,ber"  words, 
§124;  §312,  6. 
bcren,  genitive  of  relative  bcr,  §  167,  a. 
2)er  erftc  W(d,  by  Hagedorn,  p.  68. 
S)er  gute  ^amerab,  by  Uhland,  p.  144. 
derivation  of  words,  §  343-356. 

See  Word  formation. 
derivatives,  Latin  and  German  syn- 
onyms, §  356. 


bcricnige,  demonstrative,  §  158,  c,  d. 
declension  of,  §  312. 
use  of,  §  158,  d;   when  modified, 

§  185. 
in  formal  language,  §  185. 
berfelbc,  demonstrative,  §  158,  c ;  §  312. 
2)eg  ajJcibc^cn^  Steb,  by  Storm,  p.  40. 
bcffen,  genitive  of  relative  ber,  used 

for  rtjelc^cr,  §  167,  a. 
bcfto,  correlative  with  je,  §  214,  c. 
beutfcJ),  §  202. 
dialect,  relation  of,  to  correct  accent, 

§324. 
:j)te  avme  !leinc  ^i^ec^by  Sommerstorff , 

p.  145. 
biencn,  with  the  dative,  §  282,  h. 
bte§,  used  in  singular  with  plural  form 

of  fetn,  §  155.    See  also  biefer^ 
bicfer,  as  adjective,  §  116;  as  demon- 
strative pronoun,  §  158  ;  §  312 ; 
summary  of  declension,  §  305,  6. 
digraphs,  a<x,  ee,  ic,  oo,  Intro.,  I,/, 
dimidiatives,  anbcrtt)al6,   britte^alb, 

etc.,  §  219,  a. 
diminutive  suflftxes,  *d^cn  and  =Iein, 

§  34;  §  79,  6,3;  §348,  a. 
diphthong's,  at,  au,  au,  et,  eu 
pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  I,  e. 
discussion  of,  §  329 ;  §  330. 
bod^,  as  particle,  §  293 ;  §  296. 
britte(;alb,  dimidiative,  §  219,  a. 
Dreves,  Lebrecht,  5Sor  3cna,  p.  54. 
bu 
declined,  §92;  §  310. 
capitalized,  Intro.,  IV,  c?,  1 ;  §  10. 
use,  §  10. 

repetition  after  relative,  §  169,  6,1. 
2)u  bcnfft  oxi  tnic^  fo  fclten,  by  Platen, 

p.  68. 
burc^,  prep,  with  the  accusative,  §  102. 

common  prefix,  §  196. 
biirfen,  §131;  §  136;  §304. 
special  uses,  may,  §  144,  a,  1. 
subjunctive  of,  §  269. 


INDEX. 


55 


biirfcn  {continued). 
complete  summary  of  conjugation, 
§323. 

E. 

(S,  pure  vowel  in  German 
pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  I,  h. 

difficulties  of,  §  325-328. 
compounds  with,  ei,  eu,  diphthongs, 
Intro.,  I,  e;  §  329,  1. 
ce,  digraph,  Intro.,  I,/. 
=e,  weak  ending  of  adjectives,  §  116. 
plural  noun-ending,  §  51. 
typical    weak    ending,   §    116,     &; 

§  306,  4. 
noun    suffix,   §   34,  3;    §  79,   6,  2; 
§  349,  a. 
ebcrtfo  —  tDte,     correlative     as  —  as, 

§  214,  h. 
Ebner-Eschenbach,    Marie    von 

(1830-        ),  eprud;,  p.  34. 
el^e,  subordinating  conjunction,  §  178; 

§179. 
ct,  diphthong,   pronunciation  of,  In- 
tro., I,  e ;  §  329,  1. 
=et,  feminine  suffix,  §  79,  6,  2 ;  §  349,  h. 
Eichendorff,   Joseph   von   (1788- 
1857),  (S^  it>ar,  alg  l;atf  ber  |)tm^ 
mel,  p.  9(5. 
em,  indefinite  article,  §  8;  §  22. 
mixed  declension  with,  §  120. 
independent  use  of,  §  149,  6,  note, 
negative  of  (fcin),  §  106. 
summary  of  forms,  §  306 ;  §  307,  rj. 
See  also  Article,  indefinite. 
,,ettt"  words,  §  103,  a ;  §  120. 

ad  followed  by  „ein"  word,  §  124,  h. 
einicje,  §  162,  d. 
zin^f  cardinal  number,  §  217. 
=el,  masculine  and  neuter  noun  end- 
ing, first  class,  §  34. 
cmp=,  inseparable  prefix,  §  188. 
emphasis  In  German,  by  spacing 
instead  of  by  italics,  §  158,  note, 
emphatic  form  in  conjugation, 
§  16 ;  §  207,  a. 


masculine  and  neuter  noun  ending, 

§34;  §306,4. 
weak  adjective  ending,  §  116. 
suffix  to  form  adjectives,  §  350,  6 ; 

to  form  verbs,  §  352,  a. 
assimilation  of  ending 
near  h  or  )),  §  342, 1. 
after  g,  §  342,  2. 
after  n  or  itg,  §  342,  3. 
't\\^,  in  ordinal  adverbs,  §  218,  a. 
engltfd>  auf,  §  202. 
Enslin,  Karl,  %n  ben  2«onb,  p.  97. 
ent=/ inseparable  prefix,  §  188. 
entttjeber  —  ober,  correlative,  §  291. 
er,  personal  pronoun,  §  92. 
=er,  masculine  noun  suffix,  first  class, 
§34;  §79,  6,  1;  §348,  b. 
plural  noun   ending,    third    class, 

§62. 
adjective  and  adverbial  suffix  to 
show  comparison,  §  212. 
er*,  inseparable  prefix,  §  188. 
ertmtern,  fid^,  with  the  genitive,  §  243. 
erlautjen,  with  the  dative,  §  300. 
=ent,  verb  suffix,  §  351,  6. 
er5=,  noun  prefix,  §  346,  a. 
cSf  neuter  personal  pronoun,   §    92 
§  310,  c. 
with  impersonal   verbs,   §  245,  a 

§§  246-250. 
as  object  of  modal  auxiliaries,  §  137, 
used  with  plural  form  of  fein,  §  155, 
in  e^  tft,  followed  by  the  nomina- 
tive, §  163;  §  250,  b. 
in  e^  o^ifit,  followed  by  the  accusa- 
tive, §  163;  §250,  a. 
^c^f    neuter    ending    of    adjectives, 

§  120,  b. 
(g^  roar,  a(^  ^citt^  ber  .^immct,  by  Joseph 

Eichendorff,  p.  96. 
ettua^,  indeclinable  indefinite,  §  159,  a. 
eu,  pronunciation    of,   Intro.,    I,    e; 
'  329,  3 ;  §  330. 


56 


INDEX. 


exclamation  point,  frequent  use  in 
German,  Intro.,  IV,  6  ;  §  69. 

F. 

factitive  verbs 
eg  ift,  §  250,  h  ;  §  163. 
e«3iH§  250,  a;  §  163. 
Fallersleben,      Hoffmann      von 
(1798-1874) 
^ergi^meinntc^t,  p.  12. 
mdn  ^atcrlanb,  p.  82. 
feminine  nouns 

uninflected  in  singular,  §  67. 
exceptions,  auf  ©rben,  auf  bet  ^tU 
ben,  see  Vocabulary, 
first  class  (two  only) ,  §  34,  4,  ;  §  39. 
second  class,  §  51;  §  52. 
fourth  class  (weak),  §  67;  §  68. 
Summary  of  inflections,  §§  308-309. 
See  also  Gender. 
Feuchtersleben,  Ernst,  Freiherr 
von    (1806-1849),   quoted,    pp. 
103,  149. 
finben,  followed  by  infinitive  without 

5U,  §  204,  a. 
folgen,  with  the  dative,  §  282,  h ;  §  283. 
foreign  nouns,  masculine,  §67,  2. 
formal  address 
use  of  berjemgc  instead  of  ber,  §  185. 
in  the  imperative,  §  69 ;  §  200 ;  §  201. 
®ie  instead  of  bu,  §  10. 
fortfat)ren,  §  193. 
fractions,  §  219. 
fragen,  §  133 ;  as  impersonal  reflexive, 

§247. 
fremb,  with  the  dative,  §  282,  a ;  §  283. 
frii^,  special  use  in  ntorgen  fvii^,  §  145. 
^rii^lingga^nung,  by  Uhland,  p.  31. 
fii^Ien 

"  two  infinitives,"  §  141. 
followed  by  the  infinitive  without 
5U,  §  204,  a. 
Pulda,  Ludwig  (1862-       ),  3Benn, 

p.  182. 
fiir,  prep,  with  accusative,  §  102. 


future  tense,  §48;  §49;  ofmodals, 

§136. 
summary  of  conjugations,  §§  314- 

323. 
rendered  by  present,  §  55. 
translation  of  will,  §  132. 
distinctions  between  follen,  tt)o((en, 

and  rtjerben,  §  132,  note, 
future  perfect,  §  78;  §  84. 
of  modals,  §  140. 

G. 

®,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  h,  6. 
discussion  of,  §  337, 1,  2,  3. 
See  also  Consonants. 
gang  for  English  entire,  §  219,  c;  §  162, 

a,  2. 
ge^,  inseparable  prefix,  §  188. 
prefix,    to   form   nouns,   §    34,   3; 

§  346,  b. 
in  past  participles,  §  59;  §  304. 
gefallen  with  the  dative,  §  238 ;  §  282, 6. 
gegen,  prep,  with  accusative,  §  102. 
gepren  with  the  dative,  §  156 ;  §  282,  b. 
ge()ord;en  with  the  dative,  §  282,  b. 
Geibel,       Emanuel       (1815-1884), 

quoted,  p.  156. 
gender 
in  German,  §  2. 

importance  of  definite  article,  §  2,  a. 
in   German  compounds,  §  353;  in 

foreign  masculines,  §  67,  2. 
rules  of 
determined  by  meaning,  §  79,  a, 

1,  2,  3. 
determined  by  ending,  §  79,   &, 
1,  2,  3. 
See    also     Masculine,    Feminine, 
Neuter,  and  Summary  of  In- 
flections, §§  305-314. 
genitive  case 
denoting  possession,  §  40. 
possessive  adjective  formed  frod, 

§  103. 
of  proper  names,  §  225. 
after  ftd^  erinnern,  §  243. 


INDEX. 


bl 


to  denote  indefinite  and  regularly 

recurring  time,  §  281,  a. 
with  certain  prepositions,  §  281,  6. 
substitutes  for,  §  174;  §  225,  a. 
For  case   endings,  see  Summary, 
§82;  §83;  §305-314. 
gcltngen,  impersonal  verb,  §  249 ;  §  251 ; 

§  282,  h. 
German  languagre 
sketch  of,  §  358. 
richness  in  compounds,  §  343. 
grammatical  terms,  Intro.,  V. 
orthography,  Intro.,  II,  h,  15,  note, 

Intro.,  IV,  c,  d,  e. 
punctuation,  Intro.,  IV,  a,  6. 
gem,  §  144,  a ;  §  145. 
geftcrn,  words  following,  §  138,  a. 
gtauben,  with  the  dative,  §  160 ;  §  282,  6. 

with  accusative,  §  160. 
glottal  catch,  §§  331-334. 
gu,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  6,  20. 
Goethe,    Wolfgang"    von    (1749- 
1832) 
SKanbrer^  9fJad)tlteb,  p.  41. 
§etbenrd^(ein,  p.  163. 
quoted,  pp.  35,  38,  42,  80,  95,  152, 
161,  164,  180,  183,  192. 
grammatical  terms  in  German, 

Intro.,  V. 
Grimm,  Jacob,  §  13,  note;  §  357. 

Grimm's  law,  §  357-§  360. 
@utc  "iilad^t,  by  Theodor  Korner,  p.  13. 
gutturial   consonants,   Intro.,    II, 
a,  3. 

H. 

^aben,§l;  §6;  §314. 
use  in  perfect  tenses,  §  58;   §  72; 
§78;  §84. 
with  modals,  §  140;  position  with 

"two  infinitives,"  §  181. 
with  certain   inseparable  verbs, 

§  196,  a. 
always  with  reflexives,  §  240,  h. 
with     impersonals,     except     ge» 


fd^c^en,  gclingcn,  and  cinfaUen, 
§  245,  a. 
4«ft,  adjective  suffix,  §  350,  c. 
Hagedorn,  Friedrich  von  (1708- 

1754),  2)er  erfte  m<i\,  p.  68. 
^ciIB,  dimidiative,  §  219,  a, 
l^alb,  adjective,  §  163;  §  219,  c. 
half,  see  l^alb,  .^cilfte. 
plft^,  bte,  §219;  §219,  h. 
-^cibenro^Iein,  by  Goethe,  p.  163. 
Heine,  Heinrich  (1798-1856) 
2)te  :^oreIe{,  p.  25. 
quoted,  pp.  101, 137. 
l^et^en,  io  he  named,  §  202. 
to  hid,  call,  '*  two  infinitives,"  §  141. 
followed  by  infinitive  without  ^u, 
§  204,  a. 
4ett,    feminine    suffix,    §    79,    h,    2; 

§  349,  c. 
^etfen,  "  two  infinitives,"  §  141. 
followed  by  infinitive  without  ju, 
§  204,  a. 
by  the  dative,  §  238;  §  282,  h. 
Hensel,    Luise    (1798-1877),  WnU 

bin  tcJ),  p.  57. 
^er,  §  197. 

in  ^m  unb  ^zx,  §  197,  a. 
^erbftlteb,  by  Julius  Sturm,  p.  53. 
Herder,   Johann    Gottfried    von 

(1744-1803),  quoted,  p.  130. 
^tx^f  ba^,  irregular  noun,  first  class, 

§  308,  d. 
^zniZf  peculiarities  of,  §  138,  a. 

—  iiber  ac^t  ^age,  §  300. 
^eutc,  nuc  l^eutc,  by  Theodor  Storm, 

p.  40. 
^m,  §  197. 

^in  unb  ^cr,  §  197,  a. 
l^tntcr,  prep,  with  dative  or  accusa- 
tive, §  89. 
{)orcn,  "  two  infinitives,"  §  141. 
followed  by  infinitive  without  ju, 
§  204,  a. 


58 


INDEX, 


hortative  subjunctive,   §  266,   a. 

See  also  Suhjiuictive. 
ijunbert,  §  217,  c. 

I. 
%  vowel,  Intro.,  I,  6  ;  §  327. 
\6^,  personal  pronoun,  §  92;  §  310. 
repetition  after  the  relative,  §  169, 
6,  1. 
A6:)f  masculine  ending,  §  79,  h,  1. 
idiomatic  particles,  §§  293-299. 
te,  digraph,  Intro.,  I,/. 
4e,  noun   ending,  in   two    syllables, 

§156. 
stereU;  verb  suffix,  §  351,  c. 
stg,  noun  ending,  §  51 ;  §  79,  h,  1. 

adjective  suffix,  §  350,  d. 
A^zn,  verb  suffix,  §  351,  d. 
imperative  miode 
formation   of,  §  69 ;   §  200 ;   §  201 ; 

summary,  §§  314-323. 
of  reflexives,  §  241. 
use  of  hortative  subjunctive  for  first 
and    third   person  imperative, 
§  266,  a. 
passive  imperative  with  f ein,  §  231 , 

note, 
difficulties  of,  §  201,  a. 
imperfect,  see  Past  tense. 
impersonal  verbs 
with  jcin,  §  Q&. 
in  passive,  but  personal  in  active, 

§236. 
used  instead  of  passive,  §  24^,  c. 
intransitive  reflexives,  §  242,  6. 
special  use  of  e^  gtbt,  §  250,  a ;  e^  iff, 

§  250,  6. 
classes  of 
pure  (state  of  weather),  §  246. 
reflexive  (with  fid;),  §  247. 
with  dative  (eS  fattt  nttr  ein),  §  249. 
with  accusative  (eg  frcut  mtcf;), 

§248. 
list  of,  §  251. 
in,  prep,  with  dative  or  accusative, 
§89. 


AXi,  feminine  ending,  §  79,  &,  2 ;  §  348,  c. 
indefinite  article,  §  8 ;  §  22 ;  §  306. 

See  also  Article. 
indefinite  pronouns 
indeclinable 
ettt>ag,  §  159,  a;  trgenb,  §  159,  6; 
man   (with   additional  forms), 
§  159,  c,  and  note ;   mz\)X,  §  159, 
d;    n\6)i^,    §   159,    e;    hjcmger, 
§  159,/;  and  also  (genitive  ex- 
cepted) ,  jcbermann,  jemanb,  nk^ 
ntanb,  §  159,  g. 
inflected  (declinable) 
all,  §  162,  a,  1, 2,  3 ;  anber,  §  162,  h  ; 
betbe,  §  162,  c;  etmgc,  me^rere, 
§  162,  d ;  'ok\,  h)emg,  §  162,  e. 
tnbem,  introducing  clauses,  §  285. 
indicative  mode 
conjugation  of  forms  in,  see  Con- 
jugation. 
tenses  of,  see  Tense. 
complete  summary  of,  §§  314-323. 
used  to  indicate  speaker's  belief, 

§  258,  c. 
use  for  conditions  of  fact,  §  270. 
indirect  discourse,  §  258,  a,  6,  c. 

in  questions,  §  258. 
infinitives 
present  and  perfect,  §  204. 
without  5U,  §  204,  a. 
with  5U,  §  204,  h. 
use  as  noun,  §  204,  c. 
complementary,  §  192. 
of  purpose,  §  86;  §204,  d. 
instead  of  verbal  after  anftatt  and 

c\)m,  §  204,  d. 
passive,  §  231. 
reflexive,  §  241. 
impersonal,  §§  246-251. 
position  of,  §  50;  §  192;  §  205. 
with  raodals,  §  137,  h. 
in  "two  infinitives,"  §  141. 
in  compound  tenses,  §  181. 
in    translating     two     or    more, 

§  181,  a. 
after  separable  verbs,  §  192. 


INDEX. 


59 


infinitives  {continued) 

rendered    in    German    by    clause, 
§  207,  h. 

used  instead  of  English  verbal  in 
'ing,  §  193. 

with  geltnv3en,  §  251 ;  with  tt>imfd;en, 
§259. 
inflected  indefinites,  §  162. 

See  Indefinite  pronouns. 
=tng,  noun  ending,  §  51. 
tnnert)alb,  §281,  h. 
inseparable  verbs 

list  of  inseparable  prefixes,  §  188. 

meaning  of,  §  195. 

conjugation  of,  §  321. 

inseparable  and  separable  (com- 
mon) verbs,  §  J96. 

intensive    pronoun,    jelbft,    felbcr, 
§150. 

interjections,  §  299,  6,  and  vocabu- 
laries. 
interrogative    pronouns,    §   153; 
§  311,  c,  d. 
See  also  Pronouns. 
interrog-ative  sentences,  §  3. 

See  also  Questions. 
intransitive  verbs 
indicating  motion,  take  fetn,  §  66. 
idiomatic  use  of  impersonal  reflex- 
ive, §  242,  h. 
common   verbs,    when    separable, 

§  196,  h. 
with  fcin  in  German,  active  in  Eng- 
lish, §  283. 

inversion 

questions  by,  §  3 ;  in  clauses  when 
tt)cmi  is  omitted,  §  274,  a. 
inverted  order  in  sentences,  see 

Word  order. 
trgcnb,  use  of,  §  159,  6. 
irregular  verbs 
definition  of  strong  verbs,  §  13. 
forms  of,  §  26. 


list  of  principal  parts  of  all  strong 

verbs,  §  304. 
conjugation  of,  §§  319-323. 
4)c^,  adjective  ending,  §  350,  e. 
italicizing",  German   substitute  for, 

§  158,  a,  note, 
iteratives,  cardinal  adverbs,  §  217,  6. 


3f  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  h,  8. 

ja,  as  idiomatic  particle,  §  293;  §  295. 

jeber,  §  116. 

icbermann,  §  159,  g ;  §  313,  6. 

icmanb,  §  159,^;  §313,  h. 

|c  —  befto,  the  — the,  §  214,  c. 

jener,  as  adjective,  §  116. 

as  demonstrative,  §  158;    §  312, 
a,  6. 

K. 
^,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  h,  1. 

See  also  Consonants. 
tein,  use  of,  §  106. 

without  the  noun,  §  149,  5,  note. 

declension,  §  103,  a;  §  306,  c. 
=fett,  feminine  suffix,  §  79,  6,  2 ;  §  349,  d. 
!cnnen,  §  156. 

!n,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  6,  20. 
fonnen,  §131;    §135;     §136;     §140; 
§  323,  h. 

with  c^  and  ju,  §  137. 

*'  two  infinitives,"  §  141. 

to  translate  may,  §  144,  1. 
Korner,  Theodor  (1791-1813),  @ute 

^JJad)t,  p.  13. 
4unft,noun  ending,  second  class,  §  51. 

L. 

^f  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  a,  h. 

difficulties  of,  §325;  §338. 
labials,  see  Consonants. 
laffen,  "  two  infinitives,"  §  141. 

followed  by  infinitive  without  JU, 
§  204,  a. 

as  causative,  §  144,  d',  §  145. 


60 


INDEX. 


Latin  derivatives,  compared  with 

German  synonyms,  §  356. 
tcgen,  not  to  be  confused  with  liegcn, 

§  95 ;  §  110,  d, 
Xt^xtn,  "  two  infinitives,"  §  141. 
followed  by  the  infinitive  without 
5U,  §  204,  a. 
Ictb   tun,    impersonal    with    dative, 

§249. 
4e{n,  diminutive  suffix,  §   34;   §   79, 

6,3;  §348,  a. 
lernen,  "  two  infinitives,"  §  141. 
followed  by  the  infinitive  without 

SU,  §  204,  a. 
4tc^,  adjective  suffix,  §  350,/. 
Itcgcn,  not  to  be  confused  with  (cgcn, 

§95;  §  110,  c?. 
4tng,  masculine  ending,  §  79,   h,  1; 

§  348,  d. 
liquids,  see  Consonants. 
Log-au,  Friedrich  von  (1604-1655) , 

2)a^  SSiffcn,  p.  24. 
Lord's  Prayer,  from  gospel  of  St. 

Matthew,  p.  168. 
Sorclct,  by  Heine,  p.  25. 
b^,  with  gc^^en,  idiomatic  use,  p.  116. 
with  fcin,  §  183. 

M. 

W,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  a,  h. 

See  also  Consonants. 
tttac^en,  "  two  infinitives,"  §  141. 
followed  by  infinitive  without  ju, 
§  204,  a. 
m(d,  bag,  §  145. 

=mal,  adverbial  suffix,  §  217,  h. 
man,  indefinite   pronoun,  §   159,   c  ; 
§  313,  h. 
used  with  active  as  substitute  for 
passive  voice,  §  237,  a. 
mand^,  declined  like  bcr,  §  124 ;  §  313,  c. 

indeclinable,  §  124,  a. 
may,  translated  by  burfen  or  fonnen, 
§  144,  a,  1. 


measure,  nouns  of,  §  113. 

bte  portion,  §  267. 
mt^Xf  used  as  particle  of  comparison 
only  when  one  adjective  is  com- 
pared with  another,  §  212,  d. 
indeclinable  indefinite,  §  159,  d. 
tncl^rcre,  inflected  indefinite,  §  162,  d. 
Wtixi  ^aterlanb 
by  Sturm,  p.  22. 
by  Fallersleben,  p.  82. 
mx^^f  inseparable  prefix,  §  188. 
mtt,   prep,    with    the    dative,    §   97; 

§100. 
mixed  declension,  see  Nouns,  Ad- 
jectives. 
modal  auxiliaries 
indicative  forms  of,  §  131 ;   §  135 ; 

§136;  §140. 
subjunctive,  §  269. 
in  conditions  contrary    to   fact, 
§  276 
"  two  infinitives  "  with,  §  141. 
infinitive  without  ^u,  §  204,  a, 
position  of 

in  normal  order,  §  137,  b ;  §  141. 
in  dependent  order,  §  181. 
special  uses 

to  translate  likey  §  144,  a;  may, 
§  144,  a,  1 ;  is  said  to,  §  144,  b ; 
what  is  the  meaning  of  this? 
§  144,  b,  1 ;  ought  ^o,  §  144,  6,  2; 
to  be  about  to,  §  144,  c. 
mode,   see  Indicative,    Imperative, 
Subjunctive. 
auxiliaries  of,  see  Modals. 
3}Zdgc  jcbcr  ftill  ^cgliicft,  by  Ruckert, 

p.  71. 
tnogen,  conjugation  of,  see  Modals. 
special  use,  §   144,  a;  for  should, 

§  276,  6. 
See  Modal  auxiliaries. 
months,  names  of,  §  223,  b. 
9)iorgen,  peculiarities  of,  §  138,  a. 
morgcn  frii^,  §  145. 
morgen  iiber  ac^t  2^agc,  §  300. 


INDEX. 


61 


motion 

from  the  speaker,  §  197;  toward, 
§  197 ;  hither  and  thither,  §  197, 
a ;  up  and  down,  §  267. 

SD'lube  hin  id),  by  Luise  Hensel,  p.  57. 

Muller,      Wilhelm      (1794-1827), 
quoted,  p.  108. 

multiplicatives,  with  *mal,  §  217,  h. 

miiffcn,  see  Modal  auxiliaries. 

N. 
%  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  a,  h. 

See  also  Consonants. 
nac^,  prep,  with  the  dative,  §  97 ;  §  100. 
nac^bem,  subordinating  conjunction, 

§178;  §179. 
ncic^ft,  superlative  of  na^,  §  213. 
name,  tjet^cn,  §  202. 
nasals,  see  Consonants, 
mhtn,  prep,  with  dative  or  accusative, 

§89. 
negative,  use  of  jottbcrn  after,  §  177, 

a;fcm,§103,  a;  §106;  §149,  6, 

note;§306,  c;  mc^t,§3,  a;  §23; 

§  137,  a;    nic^t^,  §  159,  e;  nie, 

§121;  ttjebcr  — noc^,  §  291. 

ntd^t,  for  repetition  of  questions,  §  3,  a. 

position  in  sentence,  §  23. 

with  modal  auxiliaries,  §  137,  a. 

9^i^t    ba§    mete    SStffeti,    by    Logau, 

p.  24. 
ntd^tg,  indeclinable  indefinite,  §  159,  e. 
nic^t  tt)a^r,  for  repetition  of  questions, 

§  3,  a. 
nie,  §  121. 

niemanb,  indecl.  except  in  gen.,  §  159,  g. 
=m§,  noun  ending,  §  51. 
noc!^,  idiomatic  particle,  §  293 ;  §  297. 
noc^  ein,  for  another,  §  162,  h. 
nominative  case,  §  7 ;  §  8. 

with  eg  \\i,  §  163. 
normal  order,  see  Word  order. 
nouns 
classes  of,  §  33. 


first  class  (strong),  §  33;  §  34. 
declension  of  masculine,  §  35; 
§  79,  h,  1. 
feminine,  §  39. 

neuter,  §44;  §79,6,3;  §204, 
c;  §219. 
second  class  (strong),  §  51. 

declension  of,  §  52;  §  79,  6,  1. 
third  class  (strong),  §  62. 

declension,  §  63. 
summary  of  strong  endings,  §  83. 
fourth  class  (weak) 
masculine  and  feminine,  §  67. 
declension  of,  §  68;  §  79,  h,  2. 
fifth  class  (mixed) ,  §  74. 
declension  of,  §  75. 
in  apposition,  §  109;  §  113;  §  267. 
of  measure,  omission   of   preposi- 
tion, §  113. 
after  a  numeral,  §  113,  a. 
substitutes  for 
adjectives  used  as,  §  128,  c. 
infinitive  used  for,  §  204,  c. 
**  one  "  used  for  noun,  §  128,  d. 
used  with  geftern,  i^eute,  and  morgen, 

§  138,  a. 
declension     of,     §§     308-309;     see 

Classes  of  nouris. 
gender  of,  §  79. 
proper,  inflections,  §  225,  a. 
with  the  definite   article,  §  225, 
6,  c. 
number,  see  Singular  and  Plural. 
numerals 
ending  of  nouns  after,  §  113,  a. 
cardinal,  §  217. 
indeclinable,  except  etnS  and  tim 

mmm,  §  217. 
adverbs,  §  217,  h. 
omission  of  ein,  in  a  hundred^ 
§  217,  c. 
ordinal,  §  218. 
exceptions,  §  218. 
adverbs,  §  218,  a. 
fractions  with  4el  {Ztii),  §  219. 
a)eal,§145;  .mat,  §  217,  6. 
nun,  in  exclamations,  loelU,  §  299,  6. 


62 


INDEX, 


O. 

O,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  I,  6,  1, 

2;  §§325-327. 
0,  Intro.,  I,  c?,  2. 

ob,  subordinating  conjunction,  §  178; 
§  179. 
contrary  to  fact  after  a(§  oh,  §  274,  a. 
object 
direct 
in  the  accusative,  §'7,  h. 
of  reflexive  verbs,  §  240. 
indirect 

takes  dative,  §  45. 
order  of  two  noun  objects,  §  45; 
§94,  c. 
pronouns,  §  94,  a,  b. 
with  modals,  §  137. 
obcr,  coordinating  conjunction,  §  177. 
o^nc,  prep,  with  accusative,  §  102. 
followed    by  infinitive  instead  of 
verbal,  §  204,  d. 
**one"      following     an     adjective, 
§  128,  d. 
translated  by  demonstrative,  §  185. 
CO,  digraph,  Intro.,  I,  /. 
optative  subjunctive,  §  266. 
order  of  words  in  sentence,  see 

Word  order. 
orthography 
use  of  capitals,  Intro.,  IV,  c,  d,  e. 
silent  -^  after  t,  Intro.,   II,   6,   15, 
note, 
ought  to  have,  translation  of,  §  276. 

P. 

^,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  b. 
See  also  Consonants. 

^aar,  ba^;  cin  ^aar,  §  156. 

palatal    consonants,    see    Conso- 
nants. 

participle,  past  (or  perfect) 

in  perfect  tenses,  §  58;  formation 

of,  §  58;   position  in  sentence, 

§  60;  use  as  adjective  or  noun, 

§  206,  a;    impersonal,  §§  246- 


251 ;    passive,  §  231 ;    rendered 
by  a  clause,  §  207,  b  ;  reflexive, 
§241. 
of  all  strong  verbs,  see  Sumynary, 

§  304. 
as  adjective  after  fetn,  §235;  com- 
pared with  passive,  §  235,  a,  b, 
c. 
participial  phrases,  §  207. 
particles,  of  comparison,  §  214. 

idiomatic,  §§  293-300. 
^affen,  followed  by  the  dative,  §  282, 

b ;  §  283. 
passive  voice 
formation  of,  §  230;   conjugation, 
§  231 ;  §  316 ;  §  318 ;  agent  of, 
§  232 ;  of  verbs  governing  the 
dative,   §  236;  compared  with 
perfect  participle  and  fern,  §  235, 
a,  b,  c. 
substitutes  for 
man  with  the  active,  §  237,  a. 
agent  with  the  active,  §  237,  b. 
reflexive,  §  242,  c. 
less  used  in  German,  §  237. 
past  tenses,  see  Tense. 
perfect  tenses,  see  Tense. 
person,  congruence  of  pronouns  in, 
§93;  §  167,  b. 
for  personal  endings,  see  Summary 
of  Forms  of  Nouns,  Pronouns, 
Adjectives,  and  Verbs,  §§  304- 
323. 
personal  pronouns,  see  Pronouns. 
^f,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  b,  20. 
phr^,ses,    in    English    rendered    by 
clause  in  German,  §  207,  b. 
order  of,  §  290,  b. 
pitch  of  voice  in  German,  §  341. 
Platen,  August,  Graf  von  (1796- 

1835),  :^u  benfft  an  mid;,  p.  68. 
plural  number 
of  third  person,   used  for  formal 

use,  i^econd  person,  §  10. 
form  of  \zi\\  used  with  ba§,  §  155. 


INDEX. 


63 


plural  number  {continued). 
of  nouns  of  measure,  §  113,  a, 
ending  of  all  nouns  in  the  dative, 

=n,  §  45,  a. 
For  all  plural  forms,  see  Summmnf, 

§  305-323. 
poems 
first  lines  of, 
2luf  ben  Bergen,  btc  ^urgcn,  p.  54. 
2)ag  (^Ividf  ba^   tmmer   tJoc   mtr 

fd)ii3aub,  p.  191. 
2)ctne  ^lumcn  ftnb  t)er6(ii^t,  p.  53. 
2)em  :^aub,  too  mctnc  SSetge  ftanb, 

p.  22. 
2)er    crftc   :^ag   im   2)?onat   a)iat/ 

p.  68. 
2)u  bcufft  an  mid)  fo  fcltcn,  p.  68. 
©ineu  33rief  fod  id)  fc^reiben,  p.  129. 
©g  bliii^t   tin    fc^b'nc^    33liiimc^en, 

p.  12. 
(5^  iuar,  atg  l)atf  ber  §immcf,  p.  96. 
(5^  n?ar  etnmat  cine   arme   fletnc 

^bee,  p.  145. 
©ute  '^hxi^i,  p.  13. 
@uter  gDZonb,  bu  gc^ft  |o  [title,  p.  97. 
-^aft  bu  bag  ^djXc^  g^fef)en,  p.  110. 
§eute,  nuu  Ijeute  bin  ic^  fo  fd)on, 

p.  40. 
3(^  ^atf  einen  ^ameraben,  p.  144. 
3ci^  h)ei^  ntd)t,  n^ag  fott  eg  bebeuien, 

p.  25. 
3a,  i)dtte  ntir  t)on  5lnbeginn,p.  182. 
9)Joge  jcber  ftid  bcgliicft,  p.  71. 
WnU  hxn  \6),  gel)'  ^ur  9tuf),  p.  57. 
9fJid)t  bag  Diete  Siffen  tuf  g,  p.  24.    ' 
O  fanftcr,  jii^er  v^aud),  p.  31: 
@af)  eirt  ^nab'  ein  Otb'glein  ftci)n, 

D.  163. 
®inget  leife,  leife,  (eife,  p.  37. 
!^reue  \?iebe  in^  5um  ®rabe,  p.  82. 
iXber  aden  ©i^feln,  p.  41. 
iiber  ben  33etgen,  tt)eit  ju  ttjanbern, 

p.  175. 
SBie    tft   boc^   bie   (Jrbc   fo   fd^bn, 

p.  41. 
3it>ei  :2)inge  tern'  gebulbig  tragen, 

p.  34. 


authors  of 
Brentano,  p.  37;    Busse,  p.  175; 
Dahn,  p.  191;    Dreves,  p.  54; 
Ebuer-Eschenbach,   p.   34;   Ei- 
chendorff,  p.  96;  Enslin,  p.  97; 
Fallersleben,  pp.  12,  82;  Fulda, 
p.  182 ;  Goethe,  pp.  41,  163 ;  Ha- 
gedorn,   p.   68;    Heine,   p.   25 
Hensel,  p.  57;    Korner,  p.  13 
Logan,   p.   24;    Platen,   p.   68 
Reinick,  p.  41 ;  Riickert,  p.  71 
Sommerstorff,  p.  145;    Storm 
pp.  40,129;  Sturm,  pp.  22,  53 
Uhland,  p.  31,  110,  144. 
authors  quoted,  see  Quotations. 
possessive    pronouns,    see    Pro- 

yiouns. 
potential  subjunctive,  §  265. 
predicate,  order  in,  see  Word  order. 
predicate  adjective,  §  9;  §  128,  a. 
prefixes,  inseparable,  §  188. 
separable,  §  189. 

common   (separable  and  insepara- 
ble), §  196. 
general,  §  346. 
prepositions,  with  the  accusative, 
§    102;    dative  or    accusative, 
§  89 ;  with  the  dative,  §  97 ;  with 
the  genitive,  §  281,  6. 
buret),  iiber,  um,  unter,  as  verbal  pre- 
fixes, §  196. 
omitted   after  nouns  of   measure, 

§  113. 
combined  with  ba(r)s,  §  98;    with 
the  definite  article,   §    89)^  a; 
with  n?o(r)=,  §  154. 
present  tense,  see  Tense. 
preterit,  see  Tense,  past. 
principal  parts  of  verbs,  §  59 ;  list 

of,  for  all  strong  verbs,  §  304. 
prog-ressive    form,     rendered    by 
.  simple  verb  in  German,  §  16; 
§  207,  a. 
pronouns 
agreement  with  antecedent,  §  93. 
as  objects  of  reflexive  verbs,  §  240. 


64 


INDEX. 


pronouns  {continued). 
summary  of  forms  of,  §§  310-313. 
personal,  §  92 ;  §  310. 
dative  used  instead  of  possessive, 
§174. 
possessive  as  adjective,  §  103 ;  §  310, 
c,  1. 
without  a  noun,  §  149. 
weak    declension    of,    §   149,   a; 

strong,  §  149,  h. 
effect  upon  verbals,  §  286. 
intensive,  §  150. 
interrogative,  §  153;  §  311,  c,  d. 
demonstrative,  §  158;  §  312. 

when  modified,  §  185. 
indefinite,  §  313. 
indeclinable,  §  159. 
inflected,  §  16*2. 
reflexives,  §  174;  §313. 
relative,  §  167 ;  §  311. 
agreement       with      antecedent, 

§167,  h-  §  169,  6,  1,  2. 
compound,  he  who,  §  168;  com- 
pound neuter,  §  168,  a. 
substitute  for,  tDO  with  preposi- 
tions, §  168,  6. 
uses,  §  169. 
never  omitted,  §  169,  a;  §  185. 
agreement  with  verb,  §  169,  h,  c. 
punctuation  of,  Intro.,  IV,  a,  1. 
pronunciation.  Introduction;  §§  324- 
342. 
vowels,  Intro.,  I;  §§  326-328. 
diphthongs,  Intro.,  I,  e;  §§  329- 

330. 
digraphs,  Intro.,  I,/, 
consonants,  Intro.,  II;  §§  335-340. 
glottal  catch,  §§  331-334. 
pitch,  §  341. 
assimilation,  §  342. 
summary  of   chief   difficulties   of 
German  pronunciation,  §§  324- 
325.' 
proper  names,  §  225 ;  see  No^ins. 
proverbs,  pp.  1,  3,  6,  10,  23,  46,  51, 
58,  63,  65,  72,  86,  92,  123,  176, 
196. 


Prutz,  Robert  (1816-1872),  quoted, 

p.  106. 
Psalm,  Twenty-third,  p.  188. 
punctuation,  Intro.,  IV. 
comma 
in   compound    sentences,   Intro., 

IV,  a,  2. 
to  set  off  relative  clause,  Intro., 

IV,  a,  1 ;  §  169,  c. 
with  infinitive,  §  86 ;  §  192. 
exclamation  point,  Intro.,  IV,  6,1,2. 
purpose,  infinitive  of,  §  86 ;  §  204,  d. 

Q. 

O,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  b. 
quantity,  of  consonants,  §  340. 

of  vowels,  Intro.,  I,  a,  b. 
questions 
direct 
by  inversion  or  interrogative,  §  3. 
by  ntc^t  or  nid)t  itta^r,  §  3,  a. 
indirect,    with    dependent    order, 
§173. 
requiring  dependent  subjunctive, 
§258. 
quotation  marks,  as  in,  English, 

Intro.,  IV. 
quotations  from 
Bechstein,  p.  142;  Bibel,  pp.  168; 
188 ;  Claudius,  p.  88 ;  Feuchters- 
leben,  pp.  103,  149;  Geibel,  p. 
156;  Goethe,  pp.  35,  38,  42,  80, 
95,  152,  161,  164,  180,  183,  192; 
Heine,  pp.  101,  137;  Herder, 
p.  130;  Muller,  p.  108;  Prutz, 
p.  106;  Riickert,  pp.  60,  69,  127, 
133,  172;  Scheffel,  pp.  74,  140; 
Schiller,  pp.  83,  186;  Siebel, 
p.  98;  Wehl,  p.  146;  Wichert, 
p.  120. 

R. 

%  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  b,  10. 
difficulties  of,   trilled  v,  ,§   339,  1 ; 
rolled  X,  §  339,  2. 


INDEX. 


65 


reflexive  verbs,  §§  240-242. 
list  of,  §  243. 
common  use  of,  in  German,  §  242, 

a,  h,  c. 
impersonal,  §  247. 
complete    conjugation    of    typical 
one,  §  322. 
rcgnet,    e^,  impersonal  verb,  §   246; 

§251. 
Reinick,  Robert,  SSie   tft   boc^  bte 

(grbe  fo  \d)on,  p.  41. 
relative  pronouns,  see  Pronouns. 
roots  of  words,  §§  344-345. 
See  also  Word  formation. 
Ruckert,  Priedrich  (1788-1866) 
quoted,  pp.  60,  69,  127,  133,  172. 
<Bpm^,  p.  71 . 

S. 

®,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  6,  11. 

in  script,  Intro.,  II,  6,  11,  note. 
s^,  genitive  ending,  §  40,  a. 

See  also  Table  of  forms,  §§  305-314. 
fagen^  indirect  discourse  after,  §  258. 
^\oX,  noun  ending,  §  51. 
sfam,  adjective  suffix,  §  350,  g. 
fd),  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  6,  12. 
4c^a[t,  feminine  noun  suffix,  §  79,  h,  2 ; 

§  349,  e. 
Scheffel,  Viktor  von  (1826-1886), 

quoted,  pp.  74,  140. 
Schiller,     Friedrich    von    (1759- 

1805),  quoted,  pp.  83,  186. 
fc^metc^eCn,  with  the  dative,  §  282,  h. 
jc^neit,  t^f  impersonal,  §  246;  §  251. 
fc^on,  idiomatic  particle,  §  293;  §  298. 
with  present  for  English  perfect, 

§73. 
with  past  for  English  past  perfect, 

§  373,  a. 
script,  German,  diflterent  ^  in,  Intro., 

II,  h,  11,  note. 
fel;en,  "  two  infinitives,"  §  141. 
infinitive  without  ju,  §  204,  a. 


fein,  conjugation  of ,  §  1 ;  §  6 ;  §  315. 
use  of  ba^,  bie^,  and  e^  with,  §  155 ; 
as  copula  with  perfect  partici- 
ple, §  235 ;  with  impersonals,  gc^ 
fc^c^en,  gcltngcn,  cinfaUcn,  §  245, 
a;    of    predicate    nominative 
after,  §  7,  a,  2. 
as  auxiliary  of  perfect  tenses,  §  QQ ; 
§72. 
fetn,  possessive  adjective,  §§  103-105. 
fett,  prep,  with  the  dative,  §  97 ;  §  100. 
felbcr,  intensive  pronoun,  §  150. 
felbft,  intensive,  §  150. 

meaning  even,  §  150,  a. 
sentences 
complex  (dependent),  §  170;  §  178; 
§182. 
modals  in,  §  181. 
punctuation  of,  Intro.,  IV,  a,  1. 
compound,  §  177, 

punctuation  of,  Intro.,  IV,  a,  2. 
order  of  words  in,  see  Word  order. 
separable  prefixes,  §  189 ;  §§  190- 

192. 
separable  and  inseparable  (com- 
mon), §  196. 
sequence   of  tenses  in  indirect 

discourse,  §  258,  a,h. 
fc^en,  §  95 ;    §  110,  d. 
shall,    §  132,   h ;     see    also    Future 

tenses. 
fid^,  reflexive,  §  175;  used  instead  of 

possessive,  §  174. 
ftc^  fiirc^tcn  'oox,  followed  by  the  dative, 

§291. 
fie,  personal  pronoun,  they,  §  92;  she, 
§92. 
reflexive  of  (ftc^),  §  240,  a. 
(Ste,  used  for  second  person,  formal 
address,  §  10;  capitalized,  In- 
tro., IV,  d;  §  10. 
reflexive  of  (ftd^),  §  240,  a. 
Siebel,    Karl    (1826-1868),    quoted, 
p.  98. 


66 


INDEX, 


singular  number 
of   pronoims    for    English   plural, 

§  155. 
see  also  Number  and   summaries 
of    inflections  throughout  the 
book, 
fi^en,  §90;  §  110,  d. 
fo,  adverb,  §  41. 

to  introduce  conclusions,  §  271. 
fobalb,     subordinating     conjunction, 

§178;  §179. 
fo((^,  declined  like  ber,  §  124. 

indeclinable,  §  124,  a. 
fotten,  §  131;  §135;  §  136;  §  140. 
with  5U,  §  137;   "two  infinitives," 

§141. 
to  translate  is  said  to,  §  144,  b. 
what  is  the  meaning  of  that,  §  144, 

6,1. 
ought  to,  subjunctive,  §  144,  6,  2. 
are  we  to.,  §  132,  b. 
Sommerstorff,  Otto, 

2)ie  avme  tleine  3^ee,  p.  145. 
fonbern 
special  use  after  negative,  §  177,  a. 
correlative,    not    only  —  but    also, 
§  177,  a,  1. 
f^at,  use  as  pred.  adjective  only  with 

eg  tft,  §  142. 
spirants,  see  Consonants. 
®:pt:icf)h)6rtcr,  see  Proverbs. 
ff,  %  Intro.,  II,  b,  13. 
*%  to  form  ordinals,  §  218. 
stops,  see  Consonants. 
Storm,  Theodor  (1817-1888) 
^eute,  nur  ^eute,  p.  40. 
(Sinen  33ricf  foli  tc^  fd)rct6cn,  p.  129. 
strong  declension 
of  nouns,  first,  second,  third  class, 
§§33-35;  §39;  §44;  §51;  §52; 
§62;  §63. 
of  adjectives,  §  112. 
See  also  Table  of  forms,  §§  305- 
309. 


strong  verbs,  complete  list  of,  §  304. 
definition  of,  §  13;   vowel  change 
in,  §   26;   formation   of,  §  27; 
§  31 ;  §  32. 
See    Table  of  forms,  §  319;  §  320; 
§321. 
Sturm,  Julius  (1816-1896) 
mtin  iSatcrlanb,  p.  22. 
.^erbftltcb,  p.  53. 
subject,  see  Nominative  case. 
subjunctive  mode 
formation  of  tenses,  §  255. 
of  auxiliaries,  §  256. 
of    weak    verbs,    §   261;    strong 

verbs,  §  262 ;  §  263. 
of  modals,  §269;  §  276. 
uses 
dependent,     indirect    discourse, 
§  258,  a,  b,  c. 
use  of  present  where  English 
has  past,  §  258,  a. 
conditional,  §  264;  §  274;  §  276. 
contrast  of  Gterman  and  Eng- 
lish, §  275. 
potential,  §  265. 
optative,  §  266. 
hortative,  §  266,  a. 
substantive,  adjectives  as,  §   128, 
c,  d. 
See  Nouns. 
suffixes 
to  form  nouns,  concrete,  §  348;  ab- 
stract, §  349. 
adjectives,  §  350. 
verbs,  §  351. 

adverbs,  §  217,  b ;  §  218,  a. 
See  Word  formation. 
summary  of  forms,  §§  304-323. 
syllabication,  Intro.,  III. 


X,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  b. 
*t,  to  form  ordinals,  §  218. 
Xcxi,  bcr,  softened  to  tel,  §  219. 
stel,  with  ordinals  to  form  fractions, 
§219. 


INDEX. 


67 


tense 
present  indicative,  §  1 ;  §  15 ;  §  27 ; 
§38;  §131. 
personal  endings  of  weak  verbs, 
§14. 
of  strong  verbs,  §  26. 
use  of  simple  indicative  for  em- 
phatic and  progressive,  §  16 ; 
§  207,  a. 
instead  of  future  tense,  §  55. 
with  fc^on  for  present  perfect, 
§73. 
past  indicative,   §6;    §   21;   §  32) 
§43;  §135. 
personal  endings  of  weak  verbs, 
§20. 
of  strong  verbs,  §  31. 
use  of  simple  past  in  German  for 
emphatic    and    progressive, 
§  16 ;  §  207,  a. 
of  past  in  narrative,  §  61,  a. 
with   f(i)on    for    past    perfect. 

§  73,  a. 
of    perfect    for    past,    §    61; 
§  141,  h. 
future  indicative,  §  48;    §  49;    of 
modals,  §  136.  • 
in  English  rendered  in  German 
by  present,  §  55. 
perfect  indicative 
formation  with   Jjabcn,  §  58;   of 
modals,  §  140 ;  with  jein,  §  66 ; 
rule  for,  §  84. 
use  of  German  perfect  for  English 
past,  §61;  §  141,  h. 
of  present  with  fc^cn  for  English 
perfect,  §  73. 
past  perfect  indicative 

formation,  §  72;   rule  for,  §  84; 

of  modals,  §  140. 
use  of  past  with  jci^on  instead  of 
past  perfect,  §  73,  a. 
future  perfect  indicative,  formation, 
§78;  §  84;  of  modals,  §  140. 
for  tenses  of  the  subjunctive,  see 
Subjunctive    and     Table    of 
Forms,  §§  314-322. 


tl),  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  6,  15 

and  note  (new  spelling) . 
than,  in  comparisons,  §  214,  a. 
the  — the,  je  — befto,,§  214,  c. 
there  is  (factitive),  eg  tft,  §  250,  6; 

eg  ^iU,  §  250,  a. 
a,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  6,  14. 
time 
definite,  accusative  of,  §  117 ;  §  222. 
indefinite,    genitive   of,  §   281,   a; 

regularly  recurring,  §  281,  a. 
of  day,  §  221,  a,  b. 
of  the  week,  §  222. 
of  the  month,  §  222,  a. 
of  the  year,  §  222,  b. 
transitive  verbs 

reflexive  use  of,  §  240,  b ;  §  242,  a. 
inseparables  with  figurative  mean- 
ing, §  196,  a. 
in  English  becoming  intransitive  in 
German  (fotgcn,  i)egegnen),§282, 
h ;  §  283. 
l^aben  usually  auxiliary  with  imper- 
sonals,  §  245,  a. 
transposed  order,  see  Word  order. 
tro^,  preposition  with  the  genitive, 

§  281,  b. 
stum,  noun  ending,  §  62. 
lint,  in  eg  tut  mtr  leib,  §  249. 
Twenty-third  Psalm,  p!  188. 
''two  infinitives,"  §  141. 
^,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  b,  16. 

U. 

U,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  I,  a,  6; 

§326;  §327. 
in  diphthongs,  §  329,  2,  3 ;  digraphs, 

Intro.,  I,  e,f. 
i\,  Intro.,  I,  c,  d,  3. 
liber,  prep,  with  dative  or  accusative, 

§89. 
liber*,  common  verbal  prefix,  §  196. 
iiber  ben  Bergen,  by  Busse,  p.  175. 


68 


INDEX. 


Uhland,  Ludwig  (1787-1862) 
^riitjling^a^nung,  p.  31. 
2)er  gute  ^amerab,  p.  144. 
um,  preposition  with  the  accusative, 
§  102;   with  infinitive  of  pur- 
pose, §  86 ;  §  204,  d ;  with  bitten, 
§107. 
urn*,  common  verbal  prefix,  §  196. 
umlaut 
history  and  effect  upon  sounds,  In- 
tro., I,  c,  d;  §329,  3. 
use,  in  plural  of  nouns,  §  33;  §  51; 
§62. 
in    past    subjunctive    of    strong 
verbs,  §  255,  h;  §  304. 
omitted  in  imperative,  §  200,  h. 
nw^,  general  prefix,  §  346,  c. 
unb,  coordinating  conjunction,  §  177. 
sung,  feminine  suffix,  §  79,  6, 2 ;  §  349/. 
unfer,  „t\n"  word,  not  „ber"  word, 

§  103;  §  120. 
unter,  prep,  with  dative  or  accusative, 

§89. 
unter:',  common  verbal  prefix,  §  196. 
VLX^,  general  prefix,  §  346,  d. 


35,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  a,  b. 

i>ex^,  inseparable  prefix,  §  188. 

verbals  in  -ing,  rendered  by  infini- 
tive   after    auf()oren    and    fort* 
fa^rcn,  §  193;  after  m^tatt  and 
o^ne,  §  204,  d. 
m.odified  verbals  rendered  by  ba§ 

clause,  §  286. 
in  time  or  causal  phrase  rendered 
by  clauses,  §  285. 

verbs 
as  it  would  be  impossible  to  index 
verbs  without  referring  to  most 
of  the  sections  in  the  book,  ref- 
erences have  been  made,  under 
the  proper  special  headings,  to 
the  forms  and  uses  of  verbs,  i.e. 


to  Voice,  Mode,  Tense,  Conju- 
gation, etc. 
See  also  under 
Word  formation. 
Separable,  Inseparable,  and  Com- 

mon  Prefixes. 
Transitive  and  Intransitive  verbs. 
Weak  and  Strong  verbs. 
Reflexive  verbs. 
Iiyipersonal  verbs. 
verbs  with  the  dative,  §  238 ;  §  282, 
b ;  §  283. 
impersonals,  §  249. 
verbs  "with  the  genitive,  §  243. 
verbs,  impersonal,  with  the  accusa- 
tive, §  248. 
^ergi^metnm(^t,  by  Fallersleben,  p.  12. 
ml,  §  162,  e. 

voice,  see  Active  and  Passive. 
voiced    consonants,    see     Conso- 
nants. 
voiceless  consonants,  see  Conso- 
nants. 
i)on,  prep,  with  the  dative,  §  97 ;  §  100. 
use  with  the  agent  in  the  passive 
voice,  §»232. 
as  substitute  for   the    genitive, 
§  225,  a. 
S3or,  prep,  with  dative  or  accusative, 
§  89;  §  90;  with  dative,  §  291; 
§  300. 
fSov  3ena,  by  Dreves,  p.  54.^ 
vcwels,  kinds  of,  Intro.,  I,  a;  pro- 
nunciation   of,    Intro.,    I,    b; 
difficulties    of    pronunciation, 
§§  325-329. 
vowel  changes  in  strong  verbs, 
§26. 

W. 

SS,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  b,  18. 
tt)dt)renb,  subordinating  conjunction, 

§  178;   §  179;    use  in  clauses, 

§285. 
preposition  with  genitive,  §  281,  b. 


INDEX. 


69 


SanbrerS  ^fjac^tltcb,  by  Goethe,  p.  41. 
tt)ann,  interrogative,  §  41. 
rt>a^,  interrogative,  §  153,  a. 
indefinite  compound  relative,  §  153, 

a  ;  §  168. 
relative  after  neuter,  §  168,  a. 
nja^  fiir  ein,  §  153,  c. 
nja^  gibt'^,  §  163. 

•weak   declension,    of   nouns,  see 
Nou7is,  fourth  class. 
of  adjectives,  see  Adjectives. 
weak  verbs 
no  vowel  change,  §  13  and  note, 
personal  endings,  §  14;    additions 

for  euphony,  §  14,  a. 
past  participles  of,  §  59 ;  complete 
conjugation  of,  §  317. 
■weather,  state  of,  shown  by  imper- 
sonal verbs,  §  246. 
week,  days  of  the,  §  222;  §  223,  a. 

ttjegen,  prep,  with  the  genitive,  §  281, 
b ;  §  283. 


,    g^cobor     (1821-1890),     quoted, 
p.  146. 
hjeil,  subordinating  con  j  unction ,  §  1 70 ; 

§178;  §179. 
)mci(i)f  indeclinable  as    exclamatory, 
§  124,  a. 
See  also  Sclc^cr. 
ttjtic^cr,  relative,   declined    like    ber, 
§  167;  §311. 
interrogative,  §  153,  b. 
well,  adv.,  gitt,  §  299,  b. 

of  health,  rtJof)t,  §  299,  a. 
ttjcnig,  inflected  indefinite,  §  162,  e. 
tt)cnigcr,       indeclinable       indefinite, 

§  159,  /. 
tuenn,     subordinating     conjunction, 
§178;  §179. 
use  of,  §  271 ;  omission  of,  §  271,  a. 
al^  ttjcnn  in  conditions  contrary  to 
fact,  §  274,  a. 
SBenn,  by  Ludwig  Fulda,  p.  182. 


it>er,  §  311,  c;  as  compound  relative, 
§168. 
interrogative,  §  153,  a. 
tDcrben 
conjugation   of,   §38;    §  43;   sum- 
mary, §  316. 
auxiliary  of  the  future  tense,  §  48; 
in  compound  tenses  of  modals, 
§181. 
of  passive  voice,  §  230;    §   231; 
§318. 
use  of  nominative  after,  §  7,  a,  2. 
discussion  of  meanings,   §  132,  a, 

b,  note;  §  230,  a. 
subjunctive  of,  in  the  conditional, 
§  264. 
Wichert,    E.    (1831-        ),    quoted, 

p.  120. 
ttJtber,  prep,  with  accusative,  §  102. 
h)te,  in  comparisons,  §  214,  a,  b ;  cor- 
relative with  ebenfo,  §  214,  b ; 
.  interrogative,  §  24. 
SSie  tft  bod^  bte  @rbe  fo  fd^on,  by  Rei- 

nick,  p.  41. 
SStegenltcb,  by  Brentano,  p.  37. 
will,  showing  simple  futurity,  hjerbcit, 
§  55;  §  132,  a;    desire,  tt»oUen, 
§  132,  a,  b,  note. 
WiVf  personal  pronoun,  §  92;  §  310. 
tDiffen,  §  156. 
tuo,  interrogative  adverb,  §  4. 

iuo(r)=,  compounded  with  prepositions, 
§  168,  b. 
used  for  neuter  dative,  §  311,  d,  3. 

hJof)(,  as    idiomatic   particle,   §  293; 
§299. 

word  formation 

roots,  §  344 ;  verbal,  §  345. 
prefixes,  §  346. 
suffixes,  §  347. 
forming  concrete  nouns,  §  348. 

abstract  nouns,  §  349. 

adjectives,  §  350. 

verbs,  §  351. 


70 


INDEX. 


word  formation'  {continued) . 
compound  words,  §  352. 
German  rich  in,  §  343. 
nouns,  §  353;   adjectives,  §  354; 
verbs,  §  355. 
Latin  derivatives  compared   with 
German,  §  356. 
word  order,  §  289. 
normal 
general  rule  for  emphasis,  §  290. 
coordinating  conjunctions,  §  177. 
position  of 
nouns  as  objects,  §  45 ;  §  94,  c ; 
pronouns    as    objects,   §   94, 
a,   6;   indirect  object,  §  45; 
adjective,    §  282,   a ;    posses- 
sive genitive,  §  40. 
verbs,  §  78. 

separable  prefixes,  §  189,  h,  c; 
ju  and  ge=, §  189,  d\  infinitives, 
§  50 ;  §  205 ;  modified,  §  205,  a ; 
complementary,  §  192;  "two 
infinitives,"  §  141. 
5U  with  modals,  §  137,  h. 
participles,  §  60;  §  206,  a. 
adverbs,  §    125;    §    290;    nid^t, 

§23;  me,  §  121. 
phrases,  adverbial,  §  290,  h. 
inverted 
general  rule  for,  §  99. 
in  questions,  §  3. 
in    formal    imperative,    §    69; 

§200. 
of  main  clause,  §  170,  a. 


of  the  condition,  §  271. 

after     d^      (lt»cnn     omitted), 

§  274,  a. 
omission  of  e^,  §  250,  h. 
dependent 
general  rule,  §  170. 
with  relatives,  §  167 ;  in  indirect 
questions,  §  173 ;  with  subor- 
dinating conj.,  §  178;   after 
ba^,  §   182;    the   modals  in, 
§  181;  §276. 
Sort,  plurals  of,  §  64. 
tt)iinfrf)cn,  with  infinitive  and  ju,  §  259. 


X,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  6,  1. 

Y. 

^,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  I,  6. 

Z. 

3,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  6,  19. 
jer*,  inseparable  prefix,  §  188. 
5U,  prep,  with  dative,  §  97;  §  100. 
position  of,  §  205. 

with  modals,  §  137,  h. 
use  of,  §  204,  h ;  §  259. 
omission  of,  §  204,  a. 
3ti?ct,  §  217. 
3h)ei  2)ingc  lenf  gcbulbig  tragen,  by 

Ebner-Eschenbach,  p.  34. 
§tt)tfc^en,  prep,  with  dative  or  accusa- 
tive, §  89. 


UNI 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN  INITIAL  PINE  OP  25  CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
THIS  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  50  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY  AND  TO  $1.00  ON  THE  SEVENTH  DAY 
OVERDUE. 


jUN  15  1938 


OCT  1C?1939 


**oy  7  m. 


oct  ^  ^^ 


SIT?  t^  mm 


Oct 


s- 


■"■■^  /i 


w^ 


«)^^' 


iA^ 


JUN  12  195SM 


•Y^rr^^ff*^   l^^- 


6    19^ 


LD  21-95m-7,'37 


Tb   UIAID 


(^ 


% 


.'h 


Ql   A 


/■■■ 


r 

03.5655 

.  ^ '— ' 

■■"e 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

^5?f  f  ^'  fi/i^ 


